JP7723979B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventionally, a gaming machine known as a pachislot machine includes multiple reels with multiple symbols arranged on their periphery, multiple display windows corresponding to each reel that display some of the symbols arranged on the periphery of each reel so that the player can see them, a start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of each reel when it detects a player's operation (hereinafter referred to as a "start operation"), provided that a medal has been inserted, a stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of that reel depending on the type of reel when it detects a player's operation (hereinafter referred to as a "stop operation"), and a control unit that controls the operation of a stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and stop switch, thereby rotating and stopping each reel. Typically, such pachislot machines determine whether a win has occurred based on the combination of symbols displayed in the multiple display windows, and if a win has been determined, medals are dispensed from a hopper and stored in a medal receiver.

In such gaming machines, the processing of reel stopping related to the symbol stopping limit is generally performed separately for normal play and pseudo play (see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2022-067988

As in Patent Document 1, if normal play and simulated play were processed separately and corresponding programs were created for each, the program size would be small, but it would take up space in the program area of the main ROM.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that shares some of the processing between normal games and simulated games, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM.

Furthermore, by sharing some of the processing between normal games and simulated games, the present invention aims to simplify the program structure and description, thereby improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

To achieve the above objective, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 2001) that controls the progress of a game by implementing a microprocessor (e.g., a microprocessor 2100) including an arithmetic circuit (e.g., a main CPU 2101), a read memory (e.g., a main ROM 2102), and a read/write memory (e.g., a main RAM 2103),
The read memory is composed of a first storage means (e.g., a ROM area 2202a within the use area) in which programs and data directly related to the progress of the game are stored, and a second storage means (e.g., a ROM area 2202b outside the use area) in which programs and data not directly related to the progress of the game are stored,
The read/write memory is composed of a third storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203a in the used area) that is read and written by the program of the first storage means, and a fourth storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203b outside the used area) that is read and written by the program of the second storage means,
The programs stored in the second storage means include specific subroutines that are called by the program stored in the first storage means, execute processing, and then always return to the program of the first storage means that called them (for example, a subprogram that executes RAM initialization processing (continued) outside the used area shown in FIG. 177 and a subprogram that executes interface 2 output processing (continued) shown in FIG. 180), and normal subroutines that are called by the program stored in the second storage means, execute processing, and then always return to the program of the second storage means that called them (for example, a CRC calculation processing (outside the used area) shown in FIG. 173).
When the arithmetic circuit executes the specific subroutine, it executes a specific call instruction (e.g., "CALLEX") to call the specific subroutine, and executes a specific return instruction (e.g., "RETEX") to return to the caller,
The specific call instruction stores different instruction capacity in the first storage means depending on whether the specific subroutine to be called calls a program stored before a specific address (e.g., "2100"H) in the second storage means or a program stored at an address after the specific address (e.g., a 2-byte instruction when calling a program before the specific address, and a 4-byte instruction when calling a program after the specific address),
the instruction capacity is required to be larger when calling a program stored at an address after the specific address than when calling a program stored before the specific address,
The specific subroutines include a first type subroutine and a second type subroutine,
The first type subroutine is
The program body is stored at an address subsequent to the specific address, and in order to reduce the instruction capacity, the specific call instruction executes the program body of the specific subroutine via a call of a program (e.g., a "JR" or "JP" instruction) stored at an address prior to the specific address;
When the program body is stored at an address subsequent to the specific address, a processing code (e.g., a code that can be interpreted by the main CPU 2101) for executing the program body of the specific subroutine is stored at an address prior to the specific address,
the first type subroutine stores the specific return instruction at the specific address and thereafter;
The second type subroutine has a program body and the specific return instruction stored in a location called by the specific call instruction,
An out-of-area initialization means for initializing the fourth storage means is stored in the second storage means (for example, initialization is performed by a program for out-of-area RAM initialization processing (out-of-area) shown in FIG. 177),
The gaming machine, wherein the out-of-area initialization means is the first type subroutine.

According to the present invention, some of the processing for normal games and simulated games is shared, which reduces pressure on the capacity of the program area in the main ROM. Furthermore, according to the present invention, by sharing some of the processing for normal games and simulated games, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the external structure of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 1 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the functional flow of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the playability of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining modes of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 1A to 1C are diagrams showing various tables of a first gaming machine according to a first embodiment. 1A to 1C are diagrams showing various tables of a first gaming machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the correspondence between the internal winning combinations, stop operation modes, display combinations, etc. of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the limit processing of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a winning flag storage area, a winning activation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a carryover role storage area of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a game status flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of an operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. A diagram showing the configuration of a press sequence storage area of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a power-on process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a medal acceptance/start check process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a game start state control process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the processing at the start of play during a favorable zone executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel stop control process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a game end state control process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the processing at the end of play during a favorable zone executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a periodic interrupt process executed by a main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing an overview of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. 1 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medalless gaming machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a main control board of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a lock effect according to the second embodiment. A figure showing a specific example of the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "1". A figure showing a specific example of the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "2". A figure showing a specific example of the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3". A figure showing a specific example of the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "4". A figure showing a specific example of the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "5". A figure showing a specific example of the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "6". 10 is a flowchart showing a lock effect determination process performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a lock effect execution process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device in a simulated game. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing during pseudo-game play performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing normal pseudo-game processing performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a post-pseudo game reel effect process performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing during pseudo-game play after reel presentation performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a reel rotation start process performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a random delay process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of temporal changes in the reel control state when a pseudo game is being played. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of temporal changes in the reel control state when a pseudo game is being played. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of temporal changes in the reel control state when a pseudo game is being played. 11 is a flowchart showing a lock effect execution process performed in a main control circuit according to the third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-game start process performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing normal pseudo-game processing performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a stop button operation acceptance process performed in the main control circuit. 4 is a flowchart showing a swing control process performed in a main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-game ending process performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-game challenge operation acceptance process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device. 10 is a flowchart showing a process performed in the main control circuit when a bonus is won. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for determining a lock effect at the end of a game, which is carried out in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for executing a lock effect at the end of a game, which is carried out in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing the process for starting a lock effect at the end of a game, which is carried out in the main control circuit. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a memory map of the main control circuit. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the gameplay of the first gaming machine (modified example) according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of preferential control (during normal mode) of the first gaming machine (variant) according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of preferential control (during ST) of the first gaming machine (modified example) according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of the anticipation effects of the first gaming machine (variant) according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of the anticipation effects of the first gaming machine (variant) according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of the anticipation effects of the first gaming machine (variant) according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of the anticipation effects of the first gaming machine (variant) according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of the anticipation effects of the first gaming machine (variant) according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of the anticipation effects of the first gaming machine (variant) according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of the anticipation effects of the first gaming machine (variant) according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining an example of control of the anticipation effects of the first gaming machine (variant) according to the first embodiment. This is a diagram for explaining variant 3 of the push order bell (example of transmission information control (part 1)) of the first gaming machine (variant) related to the first embodiment. This is a diagram for explaining variant 3 (example of transmission information control (part 2)) of the push order bell of the first gaming machine (variant) according to the first embodiment. 10A is a diagram showing a transition of a game state according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 10B is a table summarizing transition conditions of a game state according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. 1A is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a symbol code table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a symbol combination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a combination table by flag. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a combination table by flag. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a combination table by flag. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a combination table by flag. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a combination table by flag. A figure showing an internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state. 10A is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the BB gaming state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between internal winning combinations, stop operation modes, display combinations, etc. A figure showing an example of the transition flow of the game state in the non-advantageous zone and the advantageous zone in the fourth embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing the transition of the ball output state in the fourth embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a table summarizing the conditions for transitioning the ball output state according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. 1A is a diagram showing numerical values displayed on the instruction monitor in the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents corresponding to the numerical values displayed on the instruction monitor. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the correspondence between internal winning combinations, sub-flags, and payout flags. A flowchart showing the processing performed in the main control circuit at the start of play in a non-advantageous zone. 1A is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining whether a game is to move to an advantageous zone, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining whether a game is to move to an advantageous zone. 10 is a flowchart showing the process at the start of consecutive games to prepare for the game, which is carried out in the main control circuit. 1A is a diagram showing a consecutive game preparation mode lottery table (1), and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a consecutive game preparation mode lottery table (2). A diagram showing a lottery table for transition to consecutive game challenges. 1A is a diagram showing a consecutive-game challenge transition determination lottery table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a consecutive-game preparation fall lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of a normal stage game performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a process at the start of a normal stage performed in the main control circuit. 1A is a diagram showing a normal transition mode lottery table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a normal transition ceiling lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a point mode lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal stage-only process performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing a freeze lottery table during the normal stage. A diagram showing a normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table. A diagram showing a normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table. A diagram showing a normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing the common processing for normal ball output state performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a normal prescribed number of games counter update process performed in the main control circuit. This is a diagram showing the lottery table for transitioning to high probability 1 with the normal number of plays. This is a diagram showing the lottery table for transitioning to high probability 1 with the normal number of plays. A diagram showing a ceiling fake preparation lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing ceiling-related processing performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing a lottery table for lottery types when the ceiling is reached. A figure showing a lottery table for lottery types when the ceiling is reached. 10 is a flowchart showing point-related processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a point acquisition lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a lottery table when points are reached. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for lottery-determining the number of premonition games when a flag is drawn during the normal stage, which is performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of lottery determination of the number of premonition games when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage, which is performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a process for lottery-determining the number of premonition games when a chance stage is won during a normal stage, which is performed in the main control circuit. (a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG or promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached), (b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG or promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when a ceiling is reached), and (c) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG or promotion chance is won during the normal stage (basic). (d) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached). (e) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (basic). (f) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a ceiling fake is won during the normal stage. 10 is a flowchart showing the premonition game number counter management process for the normal stage performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing a probability mode-related process performed in the main control circuit. (a) is a diagram showing a high probability 2 transition lottery table (1). (b) is a diagram showing a high probability 2 transition lottery table (2). (c) is a diagram showing a high probability 2 transition lottery table (3). (d) is a diagram showing a high probability 2 drop lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing a promotion chance pre-processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a promotion chance transition lottery table. 10 is a flowchart showing a game start process for a chance stage performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a chance stage guaranteed number of plays lottery table at the start of the chance stage. A figure showing a pseudo-BIG/promotion chance lottery table during the chance stage. A diagram showing a lottery table for adding the number of plays during the chance stage. 10 is a flowchart showing a process of lottery for determining the number of premonition games when a flag is drawn during a chance stage, which is performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition games when a flag is drawn during a chance stage. 10 is a flowchart showing a chance stage counter management process performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing performed in the main control circuit at the start of a promotion chance game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a promotion chance mode lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a promotion chance mode lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a lottery table during promotion chances. A figure showing the next pseudo-game lottery table. A figure showing a pseudo-BIG promotion lottery table when the specified number of plays is played. 139 is a diagram showing the current pseudo game lottery table. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing the contents of the pseudo game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the contents of a pseudo game. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the flow of the game during a promotion chance. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation when a pseudo-BIG is won in the first game of a promotion chance. This is a diagram showing an example of the presentation when all pseudo-BIGs are not won in the first to fourth games of the promotion chance. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing performed in the main control circuit at the start of a pseudo BIG game. 10 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-BIG start process performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing a consecutive win challenge lottery table at the start of pseudo BIG. A diagram showing a 1G consecutive lottery table during pseudo BIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-BIG counter management process performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing pseudo-BIG termination processing (1) performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing a lottery table when the number of successful replies is insufficient. 10 is a flowchart showing pseudo-BIG termination processing (2) performed in the main control circuit. A figure showing the consecutive win challenge lottery table at the end of the final second pseudo BIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of a pseudo-REG game performed in the main control circuit. A diagram showing a consecutive win challenge lottery table at the start of a pseudo-REG. A diagram showing a 1G consecutive lottery table during pseudo REG. 10 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-REG counter management process performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing the processing performed in the main control circuit at the start of a consecutive game challenge game. A figure showing a pseudo bonus lottery table at the start of a consecutive win challenge. A figure showing a lottery table for determining the number of games at the start of a consecutive game challenge. A diagram showing a lottery table during a consecutive win challenge. A figure showing a lottery table for transitioning to normal mode at the end of a consecutive win challenge. 10 is a flowchart showing a counter management process for consecutive game challenges performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a list of counters managed in the main control circuit. 4 is a flowchart showing an AT-related process performed in the main control circuit when the lever is on. 10 is a flowchart showing AT-related processing performed in the main control circuit when the engine is completely stopped. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation when a penalty occurs during a promotion chance. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of the configuration of a microprocessor of a main control board according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of various registers included in a main CPU according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a memory map of a microprocessor according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an overview of external interrupt processing related to power interruption detection in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a power-on process in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a CRC check process (outside a used area) in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a CRC calculation process (outside the used area) in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing processing of an error that makes it impossible to return to play (outside the use area) in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a BB (special prize) number of play check process, a transmission standby & RAM initialization process, and a designated RAM initialization process in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a BB (special prize) number of play check process, a transmission standby & RAM initialization process, and a designated RAM initialization process in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing an out-of-use area RAM initialization process (out-of-use area) and an out-of-use area RAM initialization process (continuation) in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a random number value acquisition process and an internal lottery process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a random number value acquisition process and an internal lottery process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing interface 2 output processing (outside of the use area) and interface 2 output processing (continuation) in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for determining an abnormality in the number of passing medals (outside the use area) in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing the medal payout/replay operation processing, settlement execution processing, and medal payout processing in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing the medal payout/replay operation processing, settlement execution processing, and medal payout processing in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a medal passing number counting process (outside the use area) in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing the role ratio monitor aggregation start process (outside the use area) in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a periodic interrupt process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 10 is a flowchart showing a test firing signal control process (outside the use range) in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing an error detection process (outside of a used area) in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting value check process (outside the use area) and a random number inspection process (outside the use area) in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a power interruption process in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a CRC generation process (outside a used area) in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing an out-of-use area error cause clearing process (outside the use area) in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a situation regarding designation of a call destination in CALLEX in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a process related to a CRC check of a main RAM in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a 4-bit data acquisition process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a process related to a 4-bit data acquisition process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a table defined so as to be read by applying a 4-bit data acquisition process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a table defined so as to be read by applying a 4-bit data acquisition process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a table defined so as to be read by applying a 4-bit data acquisition process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a 2-bit data acquisition process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a process related to a 2-bit data acquisition process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a table defined so as to be read by applying a 2-bit data acquisition process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a process related to a common process in which a lower address of a counter is used as an input parameter in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a process related to a common process in which a lower address of a counter is used as an input parameter in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a method for determining a clear start address of an out-of-use RAM area in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a stop button input monitoring process in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing a common information backup generation process and a common information backup restoration process in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing common information restoration processing in the fifth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating common processing in backup generation and backup restoration in a fifth embodiment of the present invention. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a gaming machine equipped with a main control board related to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. A figure showing an example configuration of a game information display unit, a medal count display unit, and a medal lending display unit installed in a gaming machine equipped with a main control board related to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. A diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main control microprocessor and the medal count control microprocessor of the main control board in the sixth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of an example of a circuit configuration of a main control board according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention.

[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that in this embodiment, a pachislot machine will be described as an example of the gaming machine.

[1. Pachislot machine structure]
First, the structure of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 1 and 2. Note that Figure 1 is a diagram showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1, and Figure 2 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the pachislot machine 1. For ease of explanation, the following description of the external structure may sometimes explain part of the internal structure, and vice versa.

[1-1. External structure]
[1-1-1. Housing]
The pachislot machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. The housing 2 has a metal cabinet G that serves as the gaming machine main body and has a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door mechanism UD located at the upper front part of the cabinet G, and a lower door mechanism DD located at the lower front part of the cabinet G.

The cabinet G has an intermediate support plate G1, a pair of left and right side walls G2, a rear wall G3, a top wall G4, and a bottom wall G5. Note that the rear wall G3 and bottom wall G5 are not shown in Figures 1 and 2. Two openings G4a are formed in the top wall G4 of the cabinet G, penetrating vertically and spaced a predetermined distance apart in the left-right direction. Wooden plate members G4b are attached to the top wall G4 so as to cover each of the two openings G4a.

The plate member G4b is used to secure the pachislot machine 1 to the gaming island (not shown) when it is installed in an amusement parlor. As long as such a securing method is ensured, it can be made of metal or resin, or can be formed integrally with the top wall G4. Furthermore, as long as a certain level of strength is ensured for the cabinet G, some or all of the components can be made of wood or resin.

Inside the cabinet G, an upper opening G101 that opens forward is formed on the upper side, sandwiched between an intermediate support plate G1, and a lower opening G102 that opens forward is formed on the lower side, sandwiched between the intermediate support plate G1. In other words, the interior of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space, sandwiched between the intermediate support plate G1, which functions as a partition plate that divides the interior of the cabinet G into the upper and lower spaces. The upper space is the space behind the upper door mechanism UD within the cabinet G, and houses the main display device 210, described below, etc. The lower space is the space behind the lower door mechanism DD within the cabinet G, and houses the reel unit RU, described below, main control board 71, etc.

The cabinet G does not necessarily have to include the intermediate support plate G1. In other words, as long as each device can be properly accommodated within the cabinet G, it may not have a partition between the upper and lower spaces. The cabinet G can also be referred to simply as the "box" or "main body," or, because it functions as a frame that supports or fixes the upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD, it can also be referred to as the "main body frame," "support body," "support frame," or "fixing frame," etc.

[1-1-2. Front door]
The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G, and are provided so as to be able to close the upper and lower spaces of the opening in the cabinet G. In other words, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD function as front doors provided on the front side of the pachislot machine 1.

Furthermore, each of the upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD is attached to the cabinet G so that it can be opened and closed freely, for example, by an opening and closing mechanism (not shown), such as a hinge, provided on the left side wall G2. It is also possible to configure either the upper door mechanism UD or the lower door mechanism DD to be openable and closable using the above-mentioned opening and closing mechanism, while the other can be attached and detached only when one of the door mechanisms is in the open state.

The upper door mechanism UD has a performance display window UD1 located in its center and an upper lamp 23 located above the performance display window UD1. The performance display window UD1 is configured as a transparent panel made of resin, for example, and allows the performance images displayed on the screen device C located on its back side and constituting the main display device 210 (described below) to be viewed. Note that in this embodiment, the main display device 210, which displays performances through the performance display window UD1, may be described as the main performance display unit 21.

The lower door mechanism DD has a main display window 4 located approximately in the center of its upper part, and a reel unit RU attached to the inside of the cabinet G behind the main display window 4.

The reel unit RU is primarily composed of three reels: 3L (left reel), 3C (center reel), and 3R (right reel). Each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is composed of, for example, a cylindrical reel body and a translucent reel band attached to the periphery of the reel body. The reel band has multiple (e.g., 20) symbols printed at predetermined intervals along the reel's rotation direction. Furthermore, each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is arranged in parallel (in a horizontal row) so that each can rotate vertically at a constant speed. The main display window 4 is, for example, a transparent panel made of resin, allowing at least a portion (e.g., three) of the symbols on the periphery of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R to be visible. Furthermore, a light source (a reel lamp, which is included in the lamps and LEDs described below) is provided inside each reel 3L, 3C, 3R at a position where the symbols can be seen at least through the main display window 4, and while at least each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is spinning, it is illuminated from the inside at a constant brightness, ensuring the visibility of the symbols.

The lower door mechanism DD also has a sub-effect display unit 22 located on the left side of the main display window 4, and a performance button 10b located on the right side of the main display window 4. The sub-effect display unit 22 displays the performance images displayed on the sub-display device 220 (described below). The sub-effect display unit 22 can be configured as a touch panel, and can function not only as a performance display but also as one of the performance buttons. The performance button 10b is an operation unit that accepts performance operations (performance operations) from the player.

The lower door mechanism DD has a roughly horizontal base formed below the main display window 4, and includes a MAX BET button 6a, a 1 BET button 6b, and a settlement button 9 on the left side, a performance button 10a located roughly in the center, and a medal slot 5 on the right side.

The MAX BET button 6a and 1 BET button 6b are operation units that accept game operations (betting operations; they can also be called "insertion operations" or "betting operations") by the player to use medals deposited (credited) inside the pachislot machine 1. When the MAX BET button 6a is operated, if the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets (for example, three medals) and the number of credited medals is equal to or greater than that difference, the maximum number of medals will be bet. On the other hand, if the number of credited medals is less than that difference, no medals will be bet. Furthermore, when the 1 BET button 6b is operated, if the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets and one or more medals are credited, one medal will be bet.

The settlement button 9 is an operation unit that accepts a player's game operation (settlement operation) to return (settle) credited medals. If the settlement button 9 is operated when there are no credited medals, the player may be able to accept a game operation (C/P mode selection operation) to select either a credit mode (C mode) in which inserted or paid-out medals are credited, or a pay mode (P mode) in which the medals are not credited, within the creditable number (for example, 50 medals). In other words, the settlement button 9 can also function as a so-called C/P button. The effect button 10a is an operation unit that accepts a player's operation for effect (effect operation).

The medal insertion slot 5 accepts medals inserted into the pachislot machine 1 from outside by a player. The accepted medals are detected by a selector 31, described below, and a determination is made as to whether they are valid medals. If an accepted medal is invalid, the accepted medal is returned from the medal payout outlet 11, described below. If an accepted medal is valid and the current number of bets is less than the maximum number of bets, one medal is bet. If the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets and the number of credited medals has not reached the creditable number, one medal is credited. On the other hand, if the number of credited medals has reached the creditable number, the accepted medal is returned from the medal payout outlet 11, described below.

The lower door mechanism DD also has an information display device 14 located between the main display window 4 and the base portion. The information display device 14 is composed of multiple lamps (LEDs) and a 7-segment LED, and displays information about the game depending on the lighting state of the lamps.

Furthermore, the lower door mechanism DD has a start lever 7 located below the base on the left side, three stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R located approximately in the center, and a locking mechanism 15 located on the right side. The start lever 7 is attached so that it can tilt freely within a predetermined angle range, and is an operation unit that accepts the player's game operation (start operation) to start play. Each stop button 8L, 8C, and 8R is located corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R, and is an operation unit that accepts the player's game operation (stop operation) to stop the respective reel's rotation.

The locking mechanism 15 is, for example, a key cylinder lock. When the lower door mechanism DD is closed, an amusement facility manager (e.g., a store employee) inserts a door key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it clockwise to unlock the door, opening the lower door mechanism DD. The locking mechanism 15 may also function as a reset switch in addition to managing the opening and closing of the door mechanism. For example, when an amusement facility manager inserts the door key into the keyhole and turns it counterclockwise, it may be capable of detecting a reset operation similar to the reset switch 53 described below. In this embodiment, when the lower door mechanism DD is opened, the upper door mechanism UD may also be opened in conjunction with this. Alternatively, a separate locking mechanism corresponding to the upper door mechanism UD may be provided, allowing the opening and closing of each to be managed independently.

The lower door mechanism DD also has a lower panel 13 located in the center of its lower part, a medal tray 12 located below the lower panel 13, a medal payout opening 11 located above the medal tray 12, and sound transmission holes 24a and 24b located on the left and right of the medal payout opening 11.

The lower panel 13 is composed of a decorative panel bearing model information, such as a logo representing the model name or characters representing a motif, and a light source (a lower lamp, included in the lamps and LEDs described below) for illuminating this decorative panel from the rear side. The medal tray 12 stores medals paid out from the medal payout outlet 11. The medal payout outlet 11 discharges medals paid out (or returned) from inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside. Note that medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 11 include those paid out from the hopper device 32 described below and those returned from the selector 31 via a cancel chute (not shown). The sound transmission holes 24a, 24b are located on the rear side of each, and allow sound such as sound effects and background music output from speakers 35a, 35b (speaker 35a is not referenced in Figure 2) attached to the interior of the cabinet G to pass through to the front side of the pachislot machine 1.

In this embodiment, the upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD are provided to correspond to the fact that the interior of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space. However, as long as the opening in the cabinet G can be opened and closed appropriately, the mechanism can be configured as a single door mechanism or as three or more door mechanisms. It can also be configured as a double door mechanism in the front-to-rear direction (for example, an outer door and an inner door). The upper door mechanism UD and lower door mechanism DD can be simply referred to as "doors" or "doors," or, because they function as components that allow the opening in the cabinet G to be opened and closed, they can also be referred to as "opening and closing components," "door components," or "door components."

[1-1-3. Variable display section]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 includes the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R and the main display window 4. When the start lever 7 is operated (when a start operation is performed by a player), the stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R (described below) are driven and controlled to start the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As a result, the symbols displayed in the main display window 4 are displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, when the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated (when a stop operation is performed by a player), the stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R (described below) are driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As a result, the symbols displayed in the main display window 4 are displayed in a static manner.

In other words, each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4 constitutes a variable display unit (means) capable of variably displaying (and stopping) multiple symbols in multiple rows, or multiple variable display units (means) capable of variably displaying (and stopping) multiple symbols. The variable display unit (means) can also be referred to as a "symbol display unit (means)" or "variable display unit (means)." The symbols can also be referred to as "pictures" or "designs," and, as long as they are information that can be visually identified by the player, they can also be referred to as "identification information," etc.

Furthermore, the main display window 4 is configured so that when the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, three consecutively arranged symbols are displayed within its frame. That is, the main display window 4 displays one symbol (three symbols in total) in each of the upper, middle, and lower areas of each column (the symbols are displayed in a 3-row x 3-column format within the frame of the main display window 4). The main display window 4 is sometimes referred to as the "symbol display area" or "window portion," etc.

In addition, pay lines are defined in the main display window 4. Pay lines are lines used to determine whether a specified combination of symbols is displayed when all the symbols in all columns are stopped and displayed in response to the player's stop operation. In this sense, pay lines can also be called "winning lines" or "determination lines." Pay lines are also configured as lines connecting any of the areas in each column. In other words, if the main display window 4 is configured to display symbols in a 3-row x 3-column format, it is possible to define up to 27 different pay lines. However, in practice, one or more of these lines can be defined as pay lines, and the remaining lines can be defined as inactive lines.

For example, the line connecting the middle area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the middle area of reel 3R is called the "center line," the line connecting the upper area of reel 3L, the upper area of reel 3C, and the upper area of reel 3R is called the "top line," the line connecting the lower area of reel 3L, the lower area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is called the "bottom line," the line connecting the lower area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the upper area of reel 3R is called the "cross-up line," and the line connecting the upper area of reel 3L, the middle area of reel 3C, and the lower area of reel 3R is called the "cross-down line." Because these lines connect the areas of each column in a straight line, one or more of these lines are often defined as active lines. However, as mentioned above, so-called irregular lines that connect the areas of each column with broken lines can also be defined as active lines.

In addition, for an active line to be activated, the player must bet the number of medals required for the current game (the number of medals that can be used to start a game) prior to starting the game. However, the number of active lines that are activated may remain the same regardless of the number of bets, or may vary depending on the number of bets. For example, if the three lines described above - the "center line," "top line," and "bottom line" - are defined as active lines, in the former case, the "center line," "top line," and "bottom line" are activated regardless of the number of bets - from 1 to 3. On the other hand, in the latter case, if the number of bets is 1, only the "center line" is activated; if the number of bets is 2, the "center line" and "top line" are activated; and if the number of bets is 3 (the maximum number of bets), the "center line," "top line," and "bottom line" are activated.

In this embodiment, the variable display unit has three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R and a main display window 4 that can display three symbols in each column, thereby displaying symbols in a 3 row x 3 column format, but the symbol display format in the variable display unit is not limited to this. For example, the number of reels can be one, two, or four or more, and the number of symbols displayed in each column can be one, two, or four or more, to display symbols in a format different from the above format. In this case, the number of definable active lines can also be increased or decreased as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display unit displays the symbols by rotating each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, but the configuration of the variable display unit is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured using an image display device similar to the main display device 210 and sub-display device 220 described below, or it may be configured using other display devices (e.g., organic EL, 7-segment LED, etc.). It may also be configured using other physical devices (e.g., belts, etc.). The layout and size of the variable display unit can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display unit functions as a main display unit directly related to the game and is controlled by the main control circuit 100 described below. However, a variable display unit may also be provided as a sub-display unit related to effects not directly related to the game and controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 described below. The sub-display unit may be configured using, for example, the main display device 210 or the sub-display device 220. That is, in addition to the main display unit, a sub-display unit may be provided as a variable display unit that displays symbols in response to the player's start operation (or the fulfillment of other start conditions) and stops symbols in response to the player's stop operation (or the fulfillment of other stop conditions). In this case, to allow the player to identify whether a variable display unit is directly related to the game, an identification mark such as "reel" or "main reel" may be attached near the main display unit, making it possible to identify the variable display unit as the main display unit. Such identification display may also be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub-display device 220.

[1-1-4. Medal slot]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a medal insertion slot 5 that accepts medals inserted into the pachislot machine 1 by a player from outside. The medal insertion slot 5 and the selector 31, described below, function to bet the number of medals required for one game, similar to the MAX BET button 6a and the 1 BET button 6b, and therefore such insertion action can also be referred to as, for example, a betting operation. Therefore, the medal insertion slot 5 can also be said to be a betting operation detection unit (means) that can detect a player's betting operation. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal insertion slot can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, when the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, as described below, the medal insertion slot is not necessarily a required component.

In this embodiment, medals are used as gaming media as gaming value used in games or awarded according to game results, but gaming value used in this manner is not limited to this. For example, coins, gaming balls, gaming point data or tokens, etc. can also be used. Gaming value can also be simply referred to as "value" or "gaming value," etc.

[1-1-5. Operation section]
The pachislot machine 1 is equipped with the following operation units as operation units that can be operated by the player. Note that the operation units shown below are merely examples, and the machine may be configured to include operation units different from these, or may not include operation units that are not necessarily required.

[1-1-5-1. Bet button]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 includes a MAX BET button 6a and a 1 BET button 6b that accept a player's betting operation to use medals deposited (credited) therein. Furthermore, such betting operations are detected by a bet switch 6S, which will be described later. Therefore, the MAX BET button 6a, the 1 BET button 6b, and the bet switch 6S constitute a bet operation detection unit (means) that can detect a player's betting operation. Note that the bet buttons only need to be able to detect a player's betting operation, and their shape, placement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, while the MAX BET button 6a and the 1 BET button 6b are provided in this embodiment, it is also possible to provide only the MAX BET button 6a without the 1 BET button 6b. Furthermore, a 2 BET button for betting two medals may also be provided separately.

[1-1-5-2. Start lever]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with the start lever 7 that accepts a start operation by a player to start a game. This start operation is detected by a start switch 7S, which will be described later. Therefore, the start lever 7 and the start switch 7S constitute a start operation detection unit (means) that can detect a start operation by a player. Note that the start lever may be modified as needed in terms of its shape, position, size, etc., as long as it is capable of detecting a start operation by a player.

[1-1-5-3. Stop button]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is provided with stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, each corresponding to a reel 3L, 3C, and 3R, that accept a player's stop operation to stop the respective reels. Furthermore, such stop operations are detected by a stop switch 8S, which will be described later. Therefore, the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R and the stop switch 8S constitute a stop operation detection unit (means) that can detect a player's stop operation. Note that the stop buttons may be modified as needed, as long as they are capable of detecting a player's stop operation.

[1-1-5-4. Settlement button]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a settlement button 9 that accepts a player's settlement operation (return operation) to return (settle) credited medals. Furthermore, such a settlement operation is detected by a settlement switch 9S, which will be described later. Therefore, the settlement button 9 and the settlement switch 9S constitute a settlement operation detection unit (means) that can detect a player's settlement operation. Note that the settlement button only needs to be capable of detecting a player's settlement operation, and its shape, placement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-5. Effects buttons]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with effect buttons 10a and 10b that accept effect operations by the player. Such effect operations are detected by detection switches (not shown) provided corresponding to the respective effect buttons. Therefore, the effect buttons 10a and 10b and the detection switches constitute an effect operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the effect operations of the player. The effect buttons only need to be capable of detecting the effect operations of the player, and their shape, arrangement, size, etc. can be changed as appropriate. In addition, while the present embodiment is provided with two effect buttons 10a and 10b, the machine can be configured without either of these buttons, or with only one of these buttons. It can also be configured with three or more effect buttons.

The main uses of the effect buttons are to change the effect mode when a specific effect (for example, an operation-linked effect, as described below) is executed, and to perform selection and confirmation operations in the user menu, as described below. Therefore, it is possible to configure the system so that effect buttons are provided according to the purpose. For example, effect buttons 10a and 10b are used for the former purpose, and the touch panel described above can be used for the latter purpose. For the latter purpose, it is also possible to configure the system so that a jog dial, cross key, or other effect button capable of receiving selection and confirmation operations is provided as a separate effect button.

[1-1-6. Medal payout outlet]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a medal payout outlet 11 that discharges medals that are paid out (or returned) from inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside. When a win occurs and medals are paid out, the medal payout outlet 11 awards medals paid out from a hopper device 32 (described below) to the player, and therefore can also be said to be part of a bonus awarding means that awards a bonus to the player. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal payout outlet can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, when the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine (described below), the medal payout outlet is not necessarily a required component.

[1-1-7. Medal tray]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a medal tray 12 that stores medals paid out from the medal payout opening 11. In other words, the medal tray 12 constitutes a storage unit (means) that can store the awarded gaming value. Note that the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal tray can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, when the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, the medal tray 12 is not necessarily a required component.

[1-1-8. Waist panel]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with a lower back panel 13, which is composed of, for example, a decorative panel on which model information is depicted and a lower back lamp for illuminating the decorative panel from the rear side. The lower back panel 13 basically indicates to the player in an easy-to-understand manner what model the pachislot machine 1 is, but it can also be configured as one of the effect execution means capable of executing effects, for example, by the lighting mode of the lower back lamp, or by configuring the lower back panel 13 itself as an image display device or the like.

[1-1-9. Information display]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 includes the information display device 14 that displays information about the game by its lighting mode. That is, the information display device 14 constitutes an information display unit (means) that can display information about the game.

The information display device 14 is composed of, for example, an insert lamp, a start lamp, a replay lamp, a bet number lamp, a credit lamp, a payout number lamp, an instruction monitor, a limit lamp, etc.

When the insert lamp lights up, it indicates that medals can be inserted. When the start lamp lights up, it indicates that play can begin by operating the start lever 7. When the replay lamp lights up, it indicates that medals have been automatically inserted due to the replay operation. When the bet number lamp lights up, it indicates the number of medals bet. When the credit lamp lights up, it indicates the number of medals credited. When the payout number lamp lights up, it indicates the number of medals paid out (payout number) according to the game result.

The instruction monitor also includes an alarm lamp (stop operation display unit) and a section lamp (status display unit). Under circumstances in which information about a stop operation is notified to the player (e.g., in an AT state), the alarm lamp displays information about the stop operation by lighting up in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information about the stop operation being notified. Note that "a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information about the stop operation being notified" refers to, for example, a manner in which the indicator monitor displays the number "1" when announcing the push order (which may be described as the "batting order" in this embodiment) "1st (performing the first stop operation on reel 3L)," the indicator monitor displays the number "2" when announcing the push order "2nd (performing the first stop operation on reel 3C)," and the indicator monitor displays the number "3" when announcing the push order "3rd (performing the first stop operation on reel 3R)." Note that the alarm lamp does not necessarily have to be provided separately from the credit lamp and payout number lamp. For example, information about the stop operation may be displayed using either the credit lamp or the payout number lamp.

As such, in this embodiment, when information about a stop operation is notified to a player, the information about the stop operation is not only notified by a sub-side notification means (e.g., the main display unit 21) controlled by the sub-control circuit 200 described below, but also by an instruction monitor serving as a main notification means controlled by the main control circuit 100 described below. Note that the notification mode of the main notification means and the notification mode of the sub-notification means may be different from each other. That is, the main notification means only needs to notify the information about the stop operation in a mode that uniquely corresponds to the information about the stop operation being notified, and does not necessarily need to notify the information about the stop operation directly. For example, when notifying the push order "1st," even if the number "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, some players may not be able to identify the content of the notification. On the other hand, the sub-side notification means only needs to notify the information about the stop operation directly. For example, when notifying the push order "1st," the main display unit 21 only needs to directly notify instruction information for performing the first stop operation on reel 3L.

Furthermore, the section lamp, when lit, indicates that the current state is in the advantageous section, described below. For example, when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section, described below, the section lamp lights up at any time before play in the advantageous section begins, and when the advantageous section ends and transitions to a non-advantageous section, it goes out at any time before play in the non-advantageous section begins. Note that the timing of lighting the section lamp is not limited to this. For example, when transitioning from a performance section (normal advantageous section) described below in a non-advantageous section or advantageous section to an increase section (AT state) described below in an advantageous section for the first time, the section lamp may light up at any time before play in the increase section begins. In other words, the section lamp may indicate that the current state is in an advantageous section, regardless of whether it is an effect section or an increase section, or may indicate at least the period from the start of the first increase section to the end of the advantageous section, including this.

The limit lamp also indicates, depending on how it lights up, whether or not a limit process, described below, has been executed, or the possibility of this. For example, by lighting up when a limit process has been executed, it notifies the player that a favorable state (such as an AT state) has been forcibly ended by the execution of the limit process. For example, by flashing when the execution of the limit process is imminent, it notifies the player that there is a high possibility that the favorable state will be forcibly ended by the execution of the limit process. In addition to these, other information related to the limit process can also be appropriately communicated by setting triggers for lighting, flashing, or turning off.

[1-1-10. Performance display]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 includes a main effect display unit 21 and a sub effect display unit 22 that display effect images. The main effect display unit 21 and the sub effect display unit 22 constitute an effect display unit (means) that can display effects. They are also configured as one of the effect execution means that can execute effects from a visual perspective for the player.

The main display unit 21 includes a main display device 210 that displays effects through the effect display window UD1. The main display device 210 is configured as a display unit A that is replaceably mounted on an intermediate support plate G1 within the cabinet G. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device that includes an irradiation unit B that emits light for image display and a screen device C that displays images by irradiating the light from the irradiation unit B. While this configuration of the main display device 210 enables sophisticated and impressive effects to be displayed in this embodiment, the configuration of the main display device 210 is not limited to this. As long as it can provide effects that are visually appealing to the player, it can be configured as an image display device such as a liquid crystal display or organic electroluminescence (EL) display, a 7-segment LED display, or a display device such as a variable display device or dot display device for sub-reels. Furthermore, its shape, layout, size, and other factors can be appropriately modified based on these considerations. Furthermore, if the pachislot machine 1 is primarily designed to entertain players through the results of the winning combination, it may be configured without the main effect display unit 21 (the same applies to the sub effect display unit 22).

The sub-effect display unit 22 includes a sub-display device 220. The sub-display device 220 is configured as a liquid crystal display device. Like the main display device 210, the sub-display device 220 can be configured as another image display device or display device, or as a variable display device or dot display device. From this perspective, its shape, layout, size, and other factors can be modified as appropriate. The main effect display unit 21 has a large screen, so it primarily displays effects closely related to the current game, such as push order notifications, win notifications, and continuous effects. The sub-effect display unit 22 has a small screen, so it primarily displays effects less closely related to the current game, such as game history. This allows for separate display content to be displayed according to the purpose. In addition, this embodiment is configured with two effect display units, the main effect display unit 21 and the sub-effect display unit 22. However, the system can be configured with neither of these units, or with only one of them. It can also be configured with three or more effect display units.

[1-1-11. Lamp]
As mentioned above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with one or more lamps (light-emitting means) that can produce effects by changing their light-emitting modes (not only lighting, flashing, or extinguishing, but also their brightness and light-emitting color if configured as a full-color LED), such as the upper lamp 23 given as an example. Furthermore, such light-emitting means are configured as one of the effect execution means that can produce effects from a visual perspective for the player. Note that from this perspective, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the light-emitting means can be changed as appropriate.

Other lamps included in the lamps and LEDs described below include, for example, side lamps provided on both end faces of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD, and operation unit lamps provided within each operation unit. The latter include the function of informing the player whether or not each operation unit is operable, and therefore, when performing this function, the light emission pattern does not change depending on the presentation content, but can be controlled to emit light in a unique light emission pattern.

[1-1-12. Speaker]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with speakers 35a, 35b that output sounds such as sound effects and background music. The speakers 35a, 35b constitute audio output means capable of producing effects by outputting sounds. They are also configured as one of the effect execution means capable of producing effects from an auditory perspective for the player. From this perspective, the number, shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the speakers can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-13. Other production devices]
It should be noted that the pachislot machine 1 may be provided with other effect devices in addition to the various effect devices (effect execution means) described above. For example, it is possible to provide effect devices such as movable effect devices, such as so-called gadgets, vibration effect devices that produce effects by vibration, or air effect devices that produce effects by injecting air, and to execute effects. In other words, any effect device that can execute an effect that appeals to any of the player's five senses (sight, hearing, touch, taste, and smell) (allowing the player to recognize that an effect is being executed) can be used. Therefore, in this embodiment, "executing an effect" means that an effect may be executed using one or more of the various effect devices (effect execution means) described above, unless otherwise specified.

[1-2. Internal structure]
[1-2-1. Selector]
The selector 31 (reference numeral omitted in FIG. 2) is a path through which medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 5 flow down, and is provided on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD. The selector 31 includes, for example, a medal sensor 31S, which will be described later, and a sorting device.

The medal sensor 31S detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 5 and determines whether the detected medals are appropriate. If the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medals are appropriate and the sorting device is ready to accept the medals, the sorting device is controlled and driven to guide the medals to the hopper device 32, described below. In this case, the number of bets or credits is incremented by one. On the other hand, if the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medals are not appropriate or the sorting device is not ready to accept the medals, the sorting device is controlled and driven to return the medals through the cancel chute and from the medal payout outlet 11. If an abnormality occurs in the medal detection by the medal sensor 31S, a selector error occurs. In this case, the error state is cleared by eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, a medal jam) and performing a reset operation.

In other words, the selector 31 constitutes a gaming medium detection unit (means) capable of detecting the inserted gaming medium. The selector 31 also constitutes a determination means capable of determining whether the inserted gaming medium is valid. The selector 31 also constitutes a sorting means that stores the inserted gaming medium internally if it is valid, and discharges it to the outside if it is invalid. The configuration, placement, size, etc. of the selector 31 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medalless gaming machine, as described below, the selector 31 is not necessarily a required component.

[1-2-2. Hopper device]
The hopper device 32 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The hopper device 32 has, for example, a bucket section that stores medals that are inserted through the medal insertion port 5 and guided by the selector 31, a disk section that is provided at the bottom of the bucket section and stirs the medals stored in the bucket section and guides them one by one to the discharge section, a discharge section that discharges the medals guided by the disk section one by one, and a count sensor that counts the medals discharged from the discharge section.

The bucket is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. Any medals exceeding this number are guided through a guide passage on the top side to the auxiliary medal storage 33, described below. If the medals stored in the bucket become empty, a hopper empty error occurs. In this case, the error state can be cleared by refilling the bucket with medals and performing a reset operation.

The disk unit has multiple medal-shaped cutouts formed radially from the center, and when the central axis is rotated in accordance with a drive signal, medals that fit into the cutouts are guided one by one to the discharge unit. The rotation of the disk unit also agitates the medals stored in the bucket unit. If an abnormality occurs in the rotation of the disk unit, a hopper jam error will occur. In this case, the error state will be cleared by eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, a medal jam) and performing a reset operation.

The count sensor detects medals dispensed from the dispenser and counts the number of medals. For example, when one medal is dispensed, the disc starts rotating, and then stops rotating when the count sensor counts that one medal has been dispensed. In this way, the correct number of medals is dispensed.

In other words, the hopper device 32 constitutes a gaming media payout unit (means) capable of paying out gaming media. Furthermore, as described above, it can also be said to be part of the bonus granting means that grants bonuses to players. Furthermore, the configuration, placement, size, etc. of the hopper device 32 can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, if the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine, as described below, it is not necessarily a required component.

[1-2-3. Auxiliary medal storage]
The auxiliary medal storage 33 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The auxiliary medal storage 33 has, for example, a storage section that stores medals guided from the bucket section of the hopper device 32, and an auxiliary medal storage switch 33S that is provided near the storage section and detects the amount of medals stored in the storage section.

The storage unit is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. If the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S determines that more than the certain number of medals have been stored, an auxiliary medal storage error occurs. In this case, the error state will be cleared if the number of medals stored in the storage unit is reduced to at least below the certain number and a reset operation is performed.

In other words, the auxiliary medal storage 33 constitutes a surplus gaming media storage section (means) that can store surplus gaming media. Note that the configuration, placement, size, etc. of the auxiliary medal storage 33 can be changed as appropriate. Also, if the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine, as described below, it is not necessarily a required component.

[1-2-4. Power supply]
The power supply device 34 is provided in the lower space within the cabinet G. The power supply device 34 has, for example, a power supply board 34a and a power switch 34b, and supplies power to the pachislot machine 1 when the power switch 34b is turned on. The power supply device 34 converts 100V AC power supplied from a power cable (not shown) into DC power required by each component, similar to household electrical appliances, and supplies the converted power to each component. In other words, the power supply device 34 constitutes a power supply unit (means) capable of supplying the required power to the gaming machine. The configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the power supply device 34 can be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the setting key switch 52 and reset switch 53 (described below) are configured to be provided on the main control board 71 (more specifically, on the main control board case (described below)), but these switches can also be configured to be provided on the power supply unit 34.

[1-2-5. Substrate]
The pachislot machine 1 includes the following boards as boards required for various controls: Note that the boards listed below are merely examples, and the machine may be configured to include boards different from these, or may not include boards that are not necessarily required.

[1-2-5-1. Main control board]
The main control board 71 is attached to the rear side of the reel unit RU inside the cabinet G. The main control board 71 is a game control board that controls games, and is housed in a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin main control board case (not shown) so that its state can be seen. The electrical configuration of the main control board 71 will be described later.

The specifications of the main control board 71 are subject to various constraints, and while it is generally configured with various electronic components DIP mounted, some or all of the various electronic components may be configured with SMT mounting (surface mounting). In this case, test points may be provided to check operation using a tester or oscilloscope. Small electronic components not exceeding 6 square mm may also be used for some or all of the various electronic components. The board surface of the main control board 71 may also be configured with multiple layers.

[1-2-5-2. Sub-control board]
The sub-control board 72 is attached to the back side of the intermediate support plate G1 inside the cabinet G. The sub-control board 72 is a performance control board that controls performance-related aspects, and is housed in a resin sub-control board case (not shown). The sub-control board case can be configured as a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin case like the main control board case, or as an opaque (or nearly opaque) case made of another material. The electrical configuration of the sub-control board 72 will be described later.

[1-2-5-3. Other substrates]
(Main relay board)
The main relay board 73 (reference numeral omitted in FIG. 2 ) is attached to a specific position within the cabinet G (e.g., the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD) and is an intermediate control board that relays between the main control board 71 and various devices connected to the main relay board 73, and between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Note that the main relay board 73 is configured as a separate board from the main control board 71 for the sake of control efficiency and wiring efficiency. Therefore, unless there is a particular problem, it is also possible to have the main control board 71 perform all of the functions of the main relay board 73, and to eliminate the main relay board 73. From this perspective, the main relay board 73 may be further divided into multiple relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. In other words, multiple boards may be provided as main relay boards.

(Sub-relay board)
The sub-relay board 74 is attached to a specific position within the cabinet G (for example, on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD) and is an intermediate control board that relays between the sub-control board 72 and various devices connected to the sub-relay board 74, and between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Because the sub-relay board 74 is configured as a separate board from the sub-control board 72 for the sake of control efficiency and wiring efficiency, it is also possible to assign all of the functions of the sub-relay board 74 to the sub-control board 72 and not provide the sub-relay board 74 unless there is a particular problem. From this perspective, the sub-relay board 74 may be further divided into multiple relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. In other words, multiple boards may be provided as sub-relay boards.

(External centralized terminal board)
The external centralized terminal board 55 is attached to a specific position within the cabinet G (for example, the back of the lower space) and outputs signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, external signals 1 to 4, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The output start and end conditions for external signals 1 to 4 can be set appropriately, making it possible to report to the outside the transition of the internal state of the pachislot machine 1 (for example, bonus state or AT state) according to the gameplay. Furthermore, since the external centralized terminal board 55 is usually connected to an external data display or hall computer, these devices can also recognize not only the medal insertion/payout status and error occurrence status of the pachislot machine 1, but also the transition of such internal states.

(Testing machine interface board)
The first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine are both relay boards used to output various signals related to gameplay to the test machine during the certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot machine 1 (note that these relay boards are not installed in the pachislot machine 1 as a released product for sale, and therefore the various electronic components necessary for connecting to the first interface board 301 for the test machine and the second interface board 302 for the test machine are not mounted on the main control board 71 for sale). For example, test signals for controlling main game-related operations (e.g., internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) are output via the first interface board 301 for the test machine, and test signals related to the push order navigation determined by the main control board 71 are output via the second interface board 302 for the test machine.

[2. Electrical configuration of pachislot machine]
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 3. Fig. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachislot machine 1.

As described above, the pachislot machine 1 has a main control board 71, a sub-control board 72, a main relay board 73, and a sub-relay board 74. The main control board 71 and the main relay board 73, the main relay board 73 and the sub-relay board 74, and the sub-relay board 74 and the sub-control board 72 are electrically connected to each other. Furthermore, the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 are electrically connected to enable one-way serial communication from the main control board 71 to the sub-control board 72 via the main relay board 73 and the sub-relay board 74.

The main control board 71 is equipped with a main control circuit 100, which functions as a game control unit that controls gameplay. The main control circuit 100 includes, for example, a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, a clock pulse generating circuit (not shown), a random number circuit (not shown), and the like. The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, and data for sending various control commands to the sub-control circuit 200. The main RAM 103 has a storage area for storing various data, such as internal winning combinations determined by the execution of the control programs. The clock pulse generating circuit generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU 101. The random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse signal. Furthermore, the main CPU 101 extracts one or more values from the generated random numbers as random values, as needed. In this way, all gameplay operations are controlled.

The sub-control board 72 is equipped with a sub-control circuit 200 that functions as a performance control unit for controlling performance-related aspects. The sub-control circuit 200 is configured to include, for example, a sub-CPU 201, a sub-RAM 203, etc. A ROM cartridge board 202 is also connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 202 stores various control programs executed by the sub-CPU 201, various data tables, and various performance data (for example, video data and drive data related to the main display device 210, video data related to the sub-display device 220, lamp data related to the lamp/LED group, sound data related to the speaker group, etc.). The sub-RAM 203 is provided with a storage area for registering performance content and various performance data determined by execution of the control program, as well as a storage area for storing data related to various control instructions (commands) sent from the main control board 71. The random number values for the effects may be generated and selected within the sub-CPU 201 from a predetermined range of random numbers (e.g., 0 to 32767), or may be generated and selected by a random number circuit similar to that in the main control circuit 100. A sub-ROM may be included within the sub-control circuit 200 rather than the ROM cartridge board 202, with various control programs and the like stored in the sub-ROM. Various effect data may be stored on the ROM cartridge board 202, and various control programs and data tables may be stored in the sub-ROM within the sub-control circuit 200. The sub-control circuit 200 may also include a dedicated image processor (e.g., a VDP), such as a GPU, which is used to generate (edit) the images displayed on the main display device 210 and sub-display device 220.

The main control board 71 is electrically connected to the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, setting key switch 52, reset switch 53, winning ratio monitor device 54, external central terminal board 55, hopper device 32, auxiliary medal storage switch 33S, and power supply device 34. The main control board 71 is also electrically connected to the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, start switch 7S, stop switch 8S, settlement switch 9S, and information display device 14 via the main relay board 73. If the first test machine interface board 301 and second test machine interface board 302 are installed, they are electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the main relay board 73, for example.

Note that the external centralized terminal board 55, hopper device 32, auxiliary medal storage switch 33S, power supply device 34, medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, start switch 7S, stop switch 8S, settlement switch 9S, information display device 14, first interface board for test machine 301, and second interface board for test machine 302 have already been explained, so explanation will be omitted here.

Each stepping motor 51L, 51C, and 51R is connected to each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R via gears with a predetermined reduction ratio, and their drive rotates and stops each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. Each time a pulse is output to each stepping motor 51L, 51C, and 51R, each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R rotates a fixed angle. Therefore, the main CPU 101 counts the number of pulses output to each stepping motor 51L, 51C, and 51R, and manages the symbol positions of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R based on this count. Each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is also provided with a reel index (not shown) that determines the initial position for this management, and an index sensor (not shown) that detects the position of the reel index.

The setting key switch 52 is used when changing the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 (e.g., six levels of setting 1 to setting 6) (setting change) or when checking the setting of the pachislot machine 1 (setting check). Here, the setting value indicates the degree of advantage the player has in terms of gameplay; typically, the lower the setting value (e.g., closer to setting 1), the lower the player's advantage, and the higher the setting value (e.g., closer to setting 6), the higher the player's advantage. The setting key switch 52 is turned on when, for example, an amusement parlor manager inserts a setting key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it counterclockwise from the initial position, and turns off when the setting key is returned to the initial position. When the power to the pachislot machine 1 is off, turning the setting key switch 52 on and then on will allow settings to be changed, and turning the setting key switch 52 on while the power to the pachislot machine 1 is still on will allow settings to be confirmed.

The reset switch 53 can detect a reset operation by the gaming parlor's administrator. The reset operation is an operation to clear various error states. Furthermore, the reset switch 53 can detect a setting value confirmation operation by the gaming parlor's administrator when settings can be changed. When the reset switch 53 is operated when settings can be changed, the setting value increases by one each time (when setting 6 is reached, it returns to setting 1). This allows the setting value to be confirmed. The setting value thus confirmed is confirmed when the start lever 7 is subsequently operated once. In other words, the start switch 7S can detect a setting value confirmation operation by the gaming parlor's administrator. Thus, to change the settings, the following setting change operation is required: turn on the setting key switch 52, operate the reset switch 53 to select a setting value, operate the start lever 7 to confirm the selected setting value, and then turn off the setting key switch 52. This is just one example of a setting change operation; settings can also be changed using other operations. Additionally, when changing or checking settings, the current setting value may be displayed, for example, on the credit lamp or payout number lamp mentioned above.

The role ratio monitor device 54 is configured, for example, with a four-digit, seven-segment LED and is installed inside the main control board case. The role ratio monitor device 54 sequentially displays various percentage information related to games compiled and calculated by the main CPU 101. This percentage information is used by the gaming parlor manager to check for any tampering with the pachislot machine 1. The role ratio monitor device 54 may be mounted on the main control board 71 or on another board (e.g., a percentage display board) connected to the main control board 71. It may also be installed elsewhere within the cabinet G. For example, it may be installed on the main control board case. A management switch for starting the display on the role ratio monitor device 54 or switching its content may be installed within the cabinet G, and when this switch is operated, the various percentage information described above may be displayed. Furthermore, assuming the use of such a management switch, for example, the information display device 14 may be configured to double as the role ratio monitor device 54. Furthermore, immediately after power-on or after a predetermined time has passed since power-on (for example, about 10 seconds, a buffer time that takes into account the time required for the main control circuit 100 and sub-control circuit 200 to start up), in order to be able to confirm that the 4-digit 7-segment LED of the role ratio monitor device 54 is functioning normally, it is desirable to configure it so that it lights up (or blinks) for a predetermined period of time with a test pattern such as "8.8." (a pattern in which all segment and decimal LEDs light up).

In the role ratio monitor device 54, for example, the top two digits display the type of ratio information, and the bottom two digits display a value (%) indicating that ratio information. Here, the various types of ratio information displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54 include, for example, cumulative specific section ratio information, consecutive role ratio information and role ratio information for the most recent 6,000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio information and role ratio information, etc.

Specific section ratio information is information that indicates the proportion of plays in a play section (e.g., AT state) in which information about a stop operation advantageous to the player was notified, out of the play section of the target number of plays (for example, 175,000 games for "cumulative," 6,000 games for "most recent 6,000 games," etc.; the same applies below), (or it may simply be the number of plays in an advantageous section). Furthermore, continuous feature ratio information is information that indicates the proportion of medals paid out during the operation of a first-class special feature (RB) (including the operation of a first-class special feature (RB) when the feature continuous operating device (BB) related to the first-class special feature is in operation), out of the number of medals paid out in the play section of the target number of plays. Furthermore, the feature ratio information is information that indicates the proportion of medals paid out during the operation of the first type special feature (RB), second type special feature (CB), and normal feature (SB) out of the total medals paid out in the play section of the target number of games. Here, "during the operation of the first type special feature (RB)" includes the operation of the first type special feature (RB) while the feature continuous operation device (BB) associated with the first type special feature is in operation, and "during the operation of the second type special feature (CB)" includes the operation of the second type special feature (CB) while the feature continuous operation device (MB) associated with the second type special feature is in operation.

In addition, a game zone in which information about a stop operation advantageous to the player is being notified (for example, in AT mode) can be considered to be a zone in which a special feature is in operation, or a continuous feature operation device is in operation, and the respective percentage information can be used to tally and calculate the percentage information. In other words, the role ratio monitor device 54 need only display the necessary percentage information appropriately, and the various percentage information that can be displayed are not limited to these. Furthermore, for models in which the corresponding numerical information (corresponding information) does not exist, such as when displaying continuous feature percentage information on a model that does not have a Type 1 special feature (RB), or when displaying specific section percentage information on a model that does not have a favorable section function (AT function), when the relevant item is displayed, it is desirable to display a non-compatible information identification display, such as by lighting two vertical bars in the center of the last two digits of the four-digit seven-segment LED that display the numerical information (% information indicating the ratio), such as "- -", so that the user can immediately recognize that the model does not have compatible information.

The door open/close monitoring switch 56 is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. It may be provided on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD or on the cabinet G side. A similar door open/close monitoring switch may also be provided on the upper door mechanism UD. The door open/close monitoring switch 56 monitors the opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD by turning on when the lower door mechanism DD is open and turning off when it is closed. If the door open/close monitoring switch 56 turns on, a door open error occurs. In this case, the error state is cleared by closing the lower door mechanism DD.

The sub-control board 72 is electrically connected to the ROM cartridge board 202, main display device 210, and sub-display device 220. The sub-control board 72 is also electrically connected to the 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, a group of performance buttons such as performance buttons 10a and 10b, lamps and LEDs such as upper lamp 23, and a group of speakers such as speakers 35a and 35b via the sub-relay board 74.

Note that the ROM cartridge board 202, main display device 210, sub-display device 220, effect buttons, lamps/LEDs, and speakers have already been explained, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here.

The 24-hour door monitoring unit 61, like the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, is installed, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. It has the same function as the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 in that it monitors the opening and closing of the lower door mechanism DD, but by allowing this monitoring to be performed on the sub-control circuit 200 side as well, it is possible to further store the opening and closing history of the lower door mechanism DD for a certain period of time. This opening and closing history can be confirmed from the hall menu, which will be described later. Therefore, for example, if there is a history of the door being opened after the arcade manager has left outside of business hours, or if there is a history of the door being open for a long period of time during business hours, it can be recognized that there is a high possibility of fraudulent activity.

[3. Functional flow of pachislot machines]
Next, the functional flow of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 4. Fig. 4 is a diagram for explaining the functional flow of the pachislot machine 1.

When a player inserts a medal into the pachislot machine 1 (a bet operation is performed) and operates the start lever 7 (a start operation is performed), a single random number value (in this embodiment, this may be described as an "internal lottery random number value") is extracted from a predetermined range of random numbers (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means (main CPU 101, which performs the internal lottery processing described below) draws a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines the internal winning combination. The determination of the internal winning combination determines in advance the symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed on the pay line. Symbol combinations include "winning" combinations that provide players with benefits such as the payout of medals, the activation of replays, and the activation of bonuses, as well as other so-called "losing" combinations. A combination that results in the payout of medals is referred to as a "minor combination," a combination that activates replays is referred to as a "replay combination," and a combination that activates a bonus (bonus state) is referred to as a "bonus combination." A combination that can result in an internal winning combination (i.e., a combination of symbols that is permitted to be formed) is sometimes simply referred to as a "combination." The internal winning combination may also be referred to as a "winning combination," a "predetermined result," or a "derivation allowable condition," etc. The internal lottery means may also be referred to as a "combination determining means," a "winning combination determining means," a "predetermining means," or a "derivation allowable condition determining means," etc.

Furthermore, when the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), multiple reels begin to spin. Then, when the player operates the stop buttons (stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R) corresponding to the reels (reels 3L, 3C, and 3R) (a stop operation is performed), the reel stop control means (main CPU 101, which performs the reel stop control process described below) controls the stopping of the corresponding reels based on the internal winning combination and the timing (or the order in which the stop buttons are pressed) of the stop buttons. Note that the operation means for performing the start operation is not limited to a lever-shaped device like the start lever 7, and may be any operation means that allows the player to perform the start operation. Furthermore, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to a button-shaped device like the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, and may be any operation means that allows the player to perform the stop operation.

In pachislot machine 1, control is basically performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In this embodiment, the number of symbols that move as the reel rotates within this specified time is called the "number of sliding symbols." In this embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols (maximum number of sliding symbols) is set to four symbols.

When an internal winning combination that allows the display of a winning symbol combination has been determined, the reel stop control means stops the rotation of the reels within a specified time of typically 190 msec (the equivalent of four symbols) so that the symbol combination is displayed on the pay line as much as possible. The reel stop control means also uses the specified time to stop the rotation of the reels so that symbol combinations that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination are not displayed on the pay line. The symbols displayed when the reels have stopped spinning are sometimes referred to as "stop display" or "display result." Displaying symbols when the reels have stopped spinning is sometimes referred to as "deriving the stop display" or "deriving the display result."

The reel stop control means may also be configured to perform automatic stop control, which automatically stops each reel when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed since the reels began spinning, even if the player has not performed a stop operation. In this case, since the reels will stop without the player's intervention, it is desirable to stop the reels so that no winning symbol combinations are displayed along the pay line, even if any internal winning combinations have been determined.

When all of the reels have stopped spinning in this way, the winning determination means (main CPU 101, which performs the winning activation determination process described below) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed on the pay line is a winning combination (or any other predetermined combination). That is, it determines whether a winning combination of symbols (or any other predetermined combination of symbols) has been achieved. Then, if the winning determination means determines that the displayed combination of symbols is a winning combination (or any other predetermined combination) (that is, a winning combination of symbols (or any other predetermined combination of symbols) has been achieved), a bonus such as the payout of medals is awarded to the player, or various controls are carried out in response to this. As an example, the above series of steps is carried out as one game (unit game) in pachislot machine 1.

The winning determination means may simply determine whether the symbol combination displayed on the pay line corresponds to any of a plurality of predetermined symbol combinations, or it may determine whether the symbol combination corresponds to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means. That is, in the former case, it may determine whether the symbol combination corresponds to a winning combination separately from the internal winning combination. In this case, as long as the reel stop control means performs appropriate stop control, it is possible to sufficiently ensure the prevention of erroneous winning, thereby reducing the control burden associated with erroneous winning detection. On the other hand, in the latter case, by being able to determine whether the symbol combination associated with a winning combination is a symbol combination that is permitted to win, it is possible to detect erroneous winning in the event of an erroneous winning due to a reel malfunction, etc., thereby improving security.

Furthermore, in pachislots, during the series of gaming operations described above, various effects are produced using the display devices (e.g., main display device 210, sub-display device 220, etc.), the light output from various lamps (e.g., upper lamp 23, etc.), the sound output from speakers (e.g., speakers 35a, 35b, etc.), or a combination of these. In other words, these are effect execution means that execute the effects. The content of the effects executed by the effect execution means may be determined on the main control circuit 100 side (main side) or on the sub-control circuit 200 side (sub side). In other words, any of these can be effect content determination means.

For example, when the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), a random number value for effect is sampled separately from the random number value for the internal lottery. Once the random number value for effect is sampled, the effect content determination means determines by lottery (or according to predetermined determination conditions) the effect to be executed this time from among multiple types of effect content associated with the internal winning combination.

Next, once the effect content is determined by the effect content determination means, the effect execution means executes the corresponding effect in conjunction with various triggers, such as when the reels start spinning, when each reel stops spinning, and when it is determined whether or not a win has been won. In this way, in pachislot machine 1, for example, by executing effect content associated with an internal winning role, the player is provided with an opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning role (which can also be expressed as the symbol combination to be aimed for, the button press sequence, etc.), thereby increasing the player's interest.

[4. Basic specifications regarding the playability of pachislot machines]
Next, the basic specifications regarding the playability of the pachislot machine 1 will be explained.

[4-1. Design arrangement]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is designed so that a game is played by displaying multiple symbols in a variable and static manner. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to determine which symbols are located at which positions on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Therefore, the main ROM 102 stores data for identifying the type of symbol located at each symbol position on at least each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. While various data configurations can be employed as long as the above objective is achieved, the present embodiment uses a symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 9) described below as an example.

The symbol arrangement table specifies symbol position data (e.g., "0" to "19") indicating the position of each symbol in the rotation direction of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Each symbol position data is also associated with data for identifying the type of symbol (e.g., a symbol code). The symbol arrangement table also specifies the position of the symbol located in the middle area of each reel within the frame of the main display window 4 when the reel index is detected as "0." The number of symbols in each column, the number of symbol types, and the maximum number of sliding pieces can be changed and specified as appropriate.

[4-2. Design Combination]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is designed so that the combination of displayed symbols affects the game outcome. That is, the pachislot machine 1 can award various benefits, transition from the current state to a relatively advantageous state, or transition from the current state to a relatively unfavorable state, depending on the combination of displayed symbols. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp such symbol combinations. For this reason, the main ROM 102 contains data for identifying such symbol combinations. While various data configurations can be adopted as long as the above objective is achieved, the present embodiment uses the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 11 to 14) described below as an example.

The symbol combination table specifies data (for example, "display role" or "winning activation flag") indicating the types of combinations of multiple predetermined symbols that can be displayed on an active line. The symbols that make up each symbol combination can be identified, for example, using the symbol codes described above. Each symbol combination is also associated with data indicating the type of bonus (for example, "payout, etc."). The symbol combination table basically has a data structure that corresponds to the winning flag storage area, winning activation flag storage area, and symbol code storage area (see Figure 17), which will be described later. The number of symbol combination types, the content of the bonus, etc., can be changed and specified as appropriate.

[4-3. Internal lottery]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is designed so that the game outcome is affected by which symbol combinations are permitted to be displayed (predetermined in advance). That is, the pachislot machine 1 is capable of determining the internal winning combination (i.e., the type of symbol combination that may be displayed (or the type of bonus that may be awarded)) prior to (in advance of) the player's stop operation. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp such internal winning combinations. For this reason, the main ROM 102 contains data for identifying such internal winning combinations. While various data configurations can be adopted as long as the above objective is achieved, the present embodiment uses the internal lottery table (see FIG. 10 ), which will be described later, as an example.

The internal lottery table specifies data indicating the types of multiple predetermined internal winning combinations (for example, "No." or "winning number"), and lottery values that determine each internal winning combination in each gaming state. Note that the lottery values may vary depending on the set value. Each internal winning combination is also associated with the type of (corresponding) symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed. Note that pachislot machine 1 allows multiple symbol combinations to be associated with one internal winning combination, and when such an internal winning combination is determined, the symbol combination that will be displayed is determined by stop control.

Here, for example, in the internal lottery process of this embodiment described below (see FIG. 26; more specifically, the internal winning combination determination process of S64), first, a random number value extracted by a random number circuit from a predetermined range of numbers (e.g., 0 to 65535) is sequentially added and updated with a lottery value specified for each internal winning combination. Next, a determination is made as to whether the lottery result (lottery value + random number value) exceeds 65535 (whether the lottery result has overflowed). Then, for a predetermined internal winning combination, if the result of this determination exceeds 65535, that internal winning combination is awarded (the internal winning combination is determined). However, if this determination is made for all internal winning combinations and none exceed 65535, the internal winning combination for this game is a "lose." Note that this is merely one example of internal lottery processing, and various methods can be used for the lottery processing as long as an appropriate lottery is performed according to the lottery value (winning probability). For example, the extracted random number value may be sequentially subtracted and updated by a lottery value specified for each internal winning combination, and then the internal winning combination may be determined by determining whether the subtraction result (lottery result) is below 0 (whether the lottery result has underflowed).

In this way, in the internal lottery table, the larger the specified lottery value of an internal winning combination, the higher the probability of it being determined (winning probability). The winning probability of each internal winning combination can be expressed as "lottery value specified for each winning number / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 65536)."

[4-4. Stop control]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is designed so that the game outcome is affected by the final symbol combination displayed by the player's stop operation, among the symbol combinations permitted to be displayed based on the determination of the internal winning role. In other words, the pachislot machine 1 is capable of controlling (determining) the type of symbol combination that will ultimately be displayed based not only on the type of determined internal winning role, but also on the timing and sequence of the player's stop operations (also referred to as the "stop operation mode" or "stop operation procedure"). Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to determine the type of stop control to be performed for each internal winning role, depending on the player's stop operation mode. For this reason, the main ROM 102 contains data for specifying such stop control modes. While various data configurations can be adopted as long as these objectives are achieved, in this embodiment, a stop table and a pull-in priority table (not shown) are used as examples.

The stop table prescribes data indicating the amount of movement of symbols (e.g., "number of sliding symbols") for each symbol position data of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. For example, suppose a predetermined stop table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination is determined. Next, suppose a stop operation is performed on the spinning reel 3L. At this time, suppose the stop start position (the symbol position data in the middle area of reel 3L when the stop operation is performed) is "0." Furthermore, suppose the number of sliding symbols prescribe for symbol position data "0" in the predetermined stop table is "4." In this case, the main control circuit 100 controls reel 3L to stop at a symbol position four symbols away (the position with symbol position data "4") (the planned stop position becomes "4"). In this way, the stop table prescribes data (number of sliding symbols) that makes it possible to directly determine the stop position. Note that this data configuration is merely one example. Furthermore, using such a stop table to perform stop control is generally referred to as "table control."

The attraction priority table specifies data (e.g., "attraction priority") that indicates which symbol combination is given priority for display (attraction) when there are multiple symbol combinations that are permitted to be displayed. For example, suppose a predetermined attraction priority table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination is determined. Here, the predetermined internal winning combination permits the display of symbol combination A and symbol combination B, and the predetermined attraction priority table specifies attraction priorities such that symbol combination B is given priority over symbol combination A. Next, suppose a stop operation is performed on reel 3L while it is spinning. At this time, suppose the stop start position is "0".

The main control circuit 100 then searches for symbols that make up symbol combination A and symbol combination B at each symbol position within the maximum number of sliding symbols (e.g., "4"), including the stop start position, to determine whether they are present. If neither symbol is present, the main control circuit 100 determines the stopping position according to a predetermined rule (e.g., stopping at a closer position, stopping at a farther position, etc.). If only symbols that make up symbol combination A are present, the main control circuit 100 determines the stopping position corresponding to the symbol. If only symbols that make up symbol combination B are present, the main control circuit 100 determines the stopping position corresponding to the symbol. If both symbols are present, the main control circuit 100 determines the stopping position corresponding to the symbol, since symbol combination B is displayed preferentially over symbol combination A. Note that the draw priority may be stored for all symbol positions during rotation of the target reel according to the selected draw priority table, or may be stored for each symbol position within the maximum number of sliding symbols, including the stop start position, when a stop operation is performed on the target reel. This data structure is merely an example. Furthermore, using such a pull-in priority table to perform stop control is generally referred to as "control control."

In this embodiment, stop control can be performed by performing only "table control," or by performing only "control control." Alternatively, stop control can be performed by first tentatively determining the stopping position by performing "table control," then searching for a more appropriate stopping position by performing "control control," and then changing the stopping position depending on the search results.

In this way, in pachislot machine 1, the combination of symbols that will ultimately be displayed on the pay line is determined based on, for example, the following three factors:

The first element is the determined internal winning combination (the lottery result of the internal lottery process). For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is a "miss," none of the symbol combinations related to the replay role, the symbol combination related to the minor role, or the symbol combination related to the bonus role will ultimately be displayed on an active line. Note that a "miss" can be considered to be one of the internal winning roles, or it can be considered to be a lottery result in which no internal winning role is determined.

The second factor is the timing of the player's stop operation (the position of the symbols (pressed position) when the player operates one of the stop buttons). For example, in this embodiment, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to four symbols. Therefore, even if one of the internal winning combinations is selected as a result of the internal lottery process, if the symbols that make up a symbol combination that is permitted to be displayed are positioned on an active line (or on each active line, if there are multiple active lines), the symbol combination may not be displayed depending on the timing of the player's stop operation. This is known as a "miss."

The third element is the player's press order (the order in which the player operates the stop buttons). For example, in this embodiment, an internal winning combination associated with a combination of multiple symbols may be determined, and in this case, the combination of symbols ultimately displayed on the active line may vary depending on the player's press order. Such an internal winning combination is called a "push order combination," and if it is a replay combination, it may be called a "push order replay," and if it is a minor combination, it may be called a "push order minor combination."

[4-5. Game Status]
In the pachislot machine 1, various game states can be set as game states in order to vary the degree of advantage to the player or to achieve intended gameplay. An example of such a game state will be described below.

[4-5-1. Bonus state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a bonus role is won and a symbol combination associated with the bonus role is displayed on an active line, it is possible to transition to a bonus state (activate the bonus state). It is also possible to configure the machine so that such a bonus state is not provided. Furthermore, it is also possible to configure the machine so that multiple bonus states are provided by providing multiple types of bonus roles. When a bonus role is won, a state (carry-over state) occurs in which the bonus role is carried over as an internally-won role over multiple games until the symbol combination associated with the bonus role is displayed on an active line. Such a bonus role is sometimes referred to as a "carry-over role." This carry-over state is also sometimes referred to as a "(bonus) flag interval" or "(bonus) internally-won" state.

The bonus state is a state in which it is possible to vary the lottery pattern for small roles (including the winning probability, its content, and the stop control pattern, etc.; the same applies below) compared to a state in which the bonus state is not activated (non-bonus state). (Because it is also a state in which it is possible to vary the lottery pattern for replay roles, the bonus state can also be considered one pattern of the RT state described below.) Therefore, if such a lottery pattern is relatively advantageous to the player, the bonus state will be a more advantageous gaming state than the non-bonus state. On the other hand, if such a lottery pattern is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the bonus state will be a less advantageous gaming state than the non-bonus state.

Examples of bonus roles include a first-class special role (RB), a role continuous operation device (BB) related to a first-class special role, a second-class special role (CB) (but not a carryover role), a role continuous operation device (MB) related to a second-class special role, and a normal role (SB) (but not a carryover role). Furthermore, for example, the bonus states corresponding to each bonus role are configured as follows: The RB state is configured as a game state that ends when a predetermined number of wins (for example, the upper limit is 8 times) or a predetermined number of plays (for example, the upper limit is 12 times) have been played. The BB state is configured as a game state that ends when more medals than a predetermined number of payouts (for example, the upper limit is 285) have been paid out.

The CB state is configured as a game state that ends when one game has been played. The MB state is configured as a game state that ends when more medals than a predetermined number of medals have been paid out (for example, the upper limit is 153 medals), or when RB or SB is won during the MB state. The SB state is configured as a game state that ends when one game has been played.

The condition for activating the bonus state is not limited to the display of a combination of symbols associated with a bonus role on a payline. For example, during the operation of a special feature continuous activation device (BB) associated with a first-class special feature, a special feature (RB) can be configured to automatically activate when the feature continuous activation device (BB) associated with the first-class special feature begins operation, when play begins when the first-class special feature is not in operation, or when the operation of the first-class special feature ends. In other words, the RB can be controlled to always be in operation while the BB is in operation, without specifying the symbol combination associated with the RB. Here, the RB during BB operation is sometimes referred to as "JAC," and a specification in which the RB is automatically activated during BB operation is sometimes referred to as "auto JAC." Furthermore, during BB operation, the RB can be controlled to be activated when a specified symbol combination associated with the RB is displayed on a payline. Such a specification in which the RB is activated based on the display of a corresponding symbol combination is sometimes referred to as "manual JAC." The same applies to the relationship between the special device continuous operation device (MB) for the second-class special device and the second-class special device (CB). In other words, it is possible to control the CB so that it is always in operation while the MB is in operation without specifying the combination of symbols related to the CB, or it is possible to control the CB so that it is in operation when the specified combination of symbols related to the CB is displayed on the pay line while the MB is in operation.

[4-5-2. RT state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is met, it is possible to transition to the RT state (activate the RT state). Note that it is also possible to configure the machine so that such an RT state is not provided. It is also possible to configure the machine so that multiple RT states are provided. The RT state is a state in which the lottery mode of the replay role can be varied relative to a state in which the RT state is not activated (non-RT state). Therefore, if such a lottery mode is relatively advantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a more advantageous gaming state than the non-RT state. On the other hand, if such a lottery mode is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the RT state becomes a less advantageous gaming state than the non-RT state. Furthermore, when multiple RT states are provided, the same applies to the differences between the multiple RT states. In this case, an RT state in which the lottery pattern for the replay role (particularly the winning probability) is relatively favorable to the player may be referred to as a "high RT state" or a "high probability replay state," while an RT state in which the lottery pattern for the replay role (particularly the winning probability) is relatively unfavorable to the player may be referred to as a "low RT state" or a "low probability replay state."

The RT state can be transitioned when any of the following transition conditions are met, for example: In addition, when multiple RT states are provided, the same applies to transitions between the multiple RT states.
(1) When RB, BB or MB is won. (2) When a combination of symbols related to RB, BB or MB is displayed. (3) When the RB state, BB state or MB state ends. (4) When a specific combination of symbols is displayed when RB, BB or MB has not been won (not carried over) and the player is not in the RB state, BB state or MB state. (5) When a predetermined number of games have been played after the transition condition of (3) or (4) is met.

[4-5-3. AT state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is met, it is possible to transition to the AT state (activate the AT state). Note that it is also possible to configure the machine not to provide such an AT state. It is also possible to configure the machine to provide multiple AT states. The AT state is a gaming state that is configured as a more advantageous state than a state in which the AT state is not activated (non-AT state), for example, by notifying the player of information about a stop operation that is advantageous to the player when the above-mentioned push order role is won.

When multiple AT states are provided, the degree of advantage to the player can be varied by varying the play period for each AT state (including the likelihood of extension, if such period can be extended (also called "addition"; the same applies below)), the type of role for which information on a stop operation is notified, or the probability of notification of information on a stop operation. The transition and termination conditions for the AT state can be set appropriately according to the gameplay (excluding termination due to the execution of limit processing, described below). The AT state may also be treated as if it were the bonus state described above, in which case it may be referred to as a "pseudo bonus state", etc.

Furthermore, as long as the play period in the AT state is managed appropriately, it may be managed by the number of games (number of plays) (game number management), or by the number of sets, with a predetermined number of games considered as one set (set number management). It may also be managed by the number of payouts or net increase (difference in number of coins) during the AT state (payout number management, difference in number of coins management). It may also be managed by the number of notifications (number of navigations) that affect the payout of medals in the AT state (for example, push order navigation when a push order minor feature is won) (navigation number management). The same applies when the AT state is extended. The play period granted when transitioning to the AT state and the play period granted when the AT state is extended may be managed by different management methods. Furthermore, when multiple AT states are provided, they may be managed by the same management method, or by different management methods.

[4-5-4. ART state]
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is met, it is possible to transition to an ART state that combines the above-mentioned high RT state and AT state (activate the ART state). That is, the ART state means an AT state that is performed in a high RT state, so it differs from the AT state in that at least a low RT state and a high RT state are provided as RT states, and control is performed to transition to the high RT state (or transition to the low RT state is avoided), but the basic control is the same as the AT state (if information about a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, resulting in a transition to the high RT state (or transition to the low RT state is avoided), it can be said to be synonymous with the AT state). Note that when the transition condition for the ART state is met, it may first transition to the AT state, and then transition to the high RT state to transition to the ART state, or it may transition to the ART state by transitioning to the high RT state and the AT state simultaneously (or approximately simultaneously).

[4-5-5. Other gaming conditions]
It should be noted that the pachislot machine 1 can also have gaming states other than the various gaming states described above. For example, the various modes in the advantageous zones (see Figures 5 and 6) described below are also states in which the player plays the game, and can change the degree of advantage of whether or not to transition to an AT state, which is a pseudo-bonus state, and therefore these can be considered gaming states. From a similar perspective, it is also possible to provide gaming states that can change the degree of advantage of whether or not to transition to a bonus state. For example, when a bonus role is won (carried over), it is possible to configure the machine to change the degree of advantage of the player by providing a gaming state in which a combination of symbols related to the bonus role is more likely to be displayed by stop control, and a gaming state in which a combination of symbols related to the bonus role is relatively less likely to be displayed. In addition, for example, by providing a game state in which a bonus role is won with a predetermined probability (easy to win) and a game state in which the bonus role is won with a probability lower than the predetermined probability (relatively difficult to win), it is possible to configure the game so that the player's degree of advantage can be varied.

Furthermore, the following methods can be employed to vary the degree of advantage of whether or not to transition to the AT state (which may also include whether or not to extend the play period of that AT state while in the AT state; the same applies below). For example, a "special role" can be determined as an internal winning role. The number of medals awarded for this special role varies depending on the player's stop operation mode (which may be the timing of the stop operation, the order in which buttons are pressed, or a combination of these) (for example, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct), eight medals are paid out, and if the stop operation mode is inappropriate (incorrect), one medal or no medal is paid out).

If the specific combination is won in a specific game state, and eight coins are paid out, no decision will be made as to whether or not to change the degree of advantage for transitioning to the AT state in this game to a more advantageous one (this may also include a decision as to whether or not to transition directly to the AT state, or whether or not to directly extend the game period of that AT state; hereinafter referred to as an "advantageous decision"). On the other hand, if eight coins are not paid out, the advantageous decision will be made in this game. Alternatively, if the specific combination is won in the specific game state described above, and eight coins are paid out, the advantageous decision will be made in this game. On the other hand, if eight coins are not paid out, the advantageous decision will not be made in this game.

In this way, when a player plays using a specific game method, the game may result in either an advantageous decision being made for the current game, or in a situation where the advantageous decision is not made (advantageous decisions are restricted). Note that the player may change between the current game and the next game, and if such restrictions continue into the next game and beyond, there is a risk that the (next) player will suffer a significant disadvantage. Therefore, it is desirable that such restrictions only apply to the current game and not continue into the next game and beyond. Such restrictions are also sometimes referred to as "penalties."

[4-6. Gaming area]
In order to prevent excessive gambling in the pachislot machine 1, it is possible to provide various game zones as game states based on concepts different from the game states described above. An example of such a game zone will be described below. The game zones can be broadly divided into non-advantageous zones and advantageous zones.

(Non-advantageous section)
The non-advantageous section is configured as a gaming period during which it is not possible to notify the player of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player, and has the following requirements: Note that the following requirements are merely examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened, they can be changed accordingly.

(1) It is not possible to notify the player of advantageous stop operation modes (for example, push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, it is not possible to control the machine to the AT state or ART state described above.
(2) When the setting value is changed (setting changed), or when an initialization condition such as a "RAM abnormality" described below is met, a non-advantageous zone is set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit processing described below is executed in the advantageous zone (i.e., when a predetermined value (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone game count counter or advantageous zone payout counter described below) that is updated as the game progresses during the advantageous zone becomes a specified value (e.g., 1,500 games or 2,400 coins)), a non-advantageous zone is set as the initial state. Note that the predetermined value may be referenced, and if the predetermined value becomes a specific updated value even before it becomes a specified value, the non-advantageous zone may be set using that as a condition. Also, if a predetermined termination condition is met during the advantageous zone and the zone is determined to end (e.g., if a lottery to determine the end of the advantageous zone is held and the lottery is won), the non-advantageous zone may be set using that as a condition.
(4) In a non-advantageous zone, processing related to the advantageous zone (for example, processing to determine whether to transition to an advantageous zone) can only be performed by referencing the determined internal winning combination, and cannot be performed by referencing various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) or the number of games played in the non-advantageous zone (or the advantageous zone before transition). Note that which internal winning combination has been determined can be determined by referencing data that directly indicates the internal winning combination, such as a winning number, or by referencing data that indirectly indicates the internal winning combination, such as a sub-flag (where multiple combinations are treated as one piece of data to be determined) generated or converted from data on the internal winning combination.
(5) A non-advantageous zone is basically in state 1, and multiple states cannot be set within a non-advantageous zone. For example, it is not possible to set different states, such as a non-advantageous zone after the end of an advantageous zone being non-advantageous zone A, and a non-advantageous zone after a setting change being non-advantageous zone B.

(Advantageous area)
The advantageous section is configured as a gaming period during which it is possible to notify the player of advantageous stop operation modes, and it meets the following requirements: Note that the following requirements are merely examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened, they can be changed accordingly.

(1) It is possible to notify the player of advantageous stop operation modes (for example, push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to control to the above-mentioned AT state or ART state.
(2) If the setting value is changed (setting changed), or if an initialization condition such as a "RAM abnormality" described below is met, it is not possible to set the advantageous zone as the initial state.
(3) If the limit processing described below is executed in a favorable zone, the favorable zone must be terminated.
(4) In the advantageous zone, processing related to the advantageous zone (for example, determining whether to shift the gaming state (mode) during the advantageous zone or whether to extend a specific gaming state (mode)) can be performed not only by referring to the determined internal winning combination, but also by referring to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games played during the advantageous zone. Note that other examples of the various parameters that can be referred to include, for example, bonus information such as points that can be awarded according to the various parameters described above, the type of bonus state, the type of RT state, the timing of the stop operation of any of the reels, or the push order.
(5) Multiple states can be set within the advantageous zone. For example, states such as a normal state that is unfavorable to the player, a CZ state that makes it easier to transition to the AT state, or an AT state in which the expected value of medal increase is positive when a stop operation is performed in accordance with the notification can be set. In addition, for example, states such as a CZ precursor state that is set as a standby state until the actual transition to the CZ state in response to a decision to transition to the CZ state in the normal state, and in which a premonition effect suggesting a transition to the CZ state can be performed, or an AT precursor state that is set as a standby state until the actual transition to the AT state in response to a decision to transition to the AT state in the normal state or the CZ state, and in which a premonition effect suggesting a transition to the AT state can be performed can also be set according to the gameplay.
(6) The lighting of a section lamp (status display unit) that can indicate whether the section is a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section can indicate that the section is in an advantageous section (if the section lamp is off, it can indicate that the section is in a non-advantageous section). Note that the timing at which the section lamp starts to light can be set to any timing, as described above. Basically, the lamp may start to light up when the section transitions from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section and continue to light up until the section transitions to a non-advantageous section, or if the section transitions from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (the advantageous section has started) and the advantageous section to which the section transition has been made is in a normal state, the lamp may not start to light up, but may start to light up when the AT state is first entered. Note that if the advantageous section to which the section transition has been made is in an AT state, the lamp may start to light up from that time.

[4-7. Limiter]
In the pachislot machine 1, in order to prevent excessive gambling due to an advantageous zone continuing for too long, it is possible to set an upper limit (restriction) on the period of time that the advantageous zone continues. Such an upper limit is called a "limiter." In addition, in this embodiment, the termination of the advantageous zone by such a limiter is described as the execution of limit processing or the activation of the limiter. An example of such a limiter will be described below.

(Game limiter)
The game count limiter is configured as a limiter that executes a limiting process when the number of games (number of plays) during the advantageous period reaches "1500." For example, the advantageous period game count counter described below starts counting when the advantageous period begins and increments by one each time a play is completed. When the value of the advantageous period game count counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g., "1500" or more), the advantageous period is forcibly terminated and a transition to a non-advantageous period occurs (e.g., even if the play period in the AT state remains). The number of games at which the game count limiter activates can be set to any number of games as long as it is equal to or less than the upper limit of "1500." Furthermore, if the requirements for such a game count limiter are relaxed or tightened, the limiter can be appropriately changed accordingly. Furthermore, the limiter may gradually reduce the risk of gambling depending on the number of games played during the advantageous period.

(Payout limiter)
The payout number limiter is configured as a limiter that executes a limiting process when the number of medals paid out during a favorable zone reaches 2400. For example, the favorable zone payout number counter (described below) starts counting when the favorable zone begins and increments the count by the corresponding number of medals each time a medal is paid out (more specifically, the net increase obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of payouts). When the value of the favorable zone payout number counter reaches a predetermined value (e.g., 2400 or more), the favorable zone is forcibly terminated and the game transitions to a non-favorable zone (e.g., even if the game period in the automatic time slot (AT) remains). The payout number at which the payout number limiter activates can be set to any payout number up to the upper limit of 2400. Furthermore, if the requirements for such a payout number limiter are relaxed or tightened, the limiter can be appropriately modified accordingly. Furthermore, the limiter may gradually reduce the risk of gambling depending on the number of medals paid out during a favorable zone.

Also, for example, the advantageous zone payout number counter described below may be configured to count the positive amount from the most recent lowest point, with the point at which the absolute value of the number of medals has decreased the most since the start of the advantageous zone as the lowest point (starting point) (i.e., the count is decremented if no payout has occurred). In other words, the payout number limiter may be configured as a limiter that executes limit processing when a maximum of 2,400 medals have been paid out since the number of medals began to increase during the advantageous zone (e.g., when the AT state began). Also, for example, the advantageous zone payout number counter described below may simply count the actual number of payouts (i.e., the number of payouts without subtracting the number of bets) rather than the net increase mentioned above.

The pachislot machine 1 may execute limit processing for the advantageous zone using only the game count limiter, may execute limit processing for the advantageous zone using only the payout limiter, or may execute limit processing for the advantageous zone using both the game count limiter and the payout limiter. When using both limiters, it is desirable to end the advantageous zone when the activation conditions of either limiter are met after the advantageous zone has started.

Furthermore, the types of limiters are not limited to the game count limiter and payout limiter described above. For example, a navigation count limiter may be provided that executes limit processing when the number of times push order minor roles are navigated during the AT state (i.e., the number of times information about stop operations advantageous to the player for roles related to the payout of medals is notified) reaches a predetermined number of times (e.g., 400 times). In other words, as long as gambling can be appropriately suppressed, limit processing can be executed using various conditions related to the game.

[4-8. External Signals]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is designed to be capable of outputting multiple types of external signals to the outside. For example, if external signal 1 is turned on when a bonus state is initiated and turned off when the bonus state is terminated, a bonus state effect linked to this can be performed in the external data display device. Furthermore, if external signal 1 is turned on when a BB state is initiated and turned off when the BB state is terminated, and external signal 2 is turned on when an MB state is initiated and turned off when the MB state is terminated, not only can the external data display device perform the bonus state effect described above, but it can also count the number of bonuses by type.

Furthermore, for example, if external signal 1 is turned on when an AT state begins, and turned off when the AT state ends, it is possible to perform AT state effects linked to this on the external data display.Furthermore, for example, if external signal 1 is turned on when a specific AT state begins, and turned off when the specific AT state ends, and external signal 2 is turned on when a specific AT state begins, and turned off when the specific AT state ends, it is possible to not only perform the above-mentioned AT state effects on the external data display, but also count the number of ATs by type.

Also, for example, if the AT state is configured as an AT state managed by the number of sets, and external signal 1 is turned on when the first set of the AT state begins, and external signal 2 is turned on each time a set begins from the second set onwards, the external data display device can also count the number of initial hits in the AT state and the number of times the AT state has been extended. The timing for turning each external signal on and off can be set as appropriate. In other words, as long as the situation is properly recognized by the external data display device, hall computer, etc., the output mode of each external signal can be set as appropriate. For example, the period from the off state to the on state and back to the off state can be set to various conditions, such as a predetermined time, the duration of one game, or until the state changes.

[4-9. Commands]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is designed to be able to send multiple types of commands from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. Note that the pachislot machine 1 does not allow the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200 to communicate with each other, and is required to communicate only in one direction, from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to send information (commands) to the sub-control circuit 200 at appropriate times to report changes in the state of the pachislot machine 1, etc. An example of such a command is described below.

The main control circuit 100 sends an initialization command to the sub-control circuit 200, for example, when a setting change operation is performed. The initialization command includes parameters that specify the setting values, game status, etc. Also, for example, when a bet operation is performed, the main control circuit 100 sends a medal insertion command. The medal insertion command includes parameters that specify the number of bets, etc. Also, for example, when a start operation is performed, the main control circuit 100 sends a start command. The start command includes parameters that specify the internal winning combination, game status, etc. Also, for example, when a lock effect is performed, the main control circuit 100 sends a lock command. The lock command includes parameters that specify the content of the lock effect, etc. Also, for example, when reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start spinning, the main control circuit 100 sends a reel spin start command. The reel spin start command includes parameters that specify that reel spinning has started, etc.

Also, for example, when a stop operation is performed, a reel stop command is sent. The reel stop command includes parameters that specify the reel to be stopped and the position where that reel will be stopped. Also, for example, when all reels are stopped and a displayed role (winning activation flag) is confirmed, a winning activation command is sent. The winning activation command includes parameters that specify the type of displayed role and the details of the bonus to be awarded. Also, for example, when a favorable zone starts, a favorable zone start command is sent. The favorable zone start command includes parameters that specify the start of the favorable zone and the mode (game state). Also, for example, when a favorable zone ends, a favorable zone end command is sent. The favorable zone end command includes parameters that specify the end of the favorable zone and the cause of its end. Also, for example, when a settlement operation is performed, a settlement command is sent. The settlement command includes parameters that specify the number of returns, etc. Note that these are merely examples, and other commands can be sent as needed, and unnecessary commands can be suppressed.

[4-10. Performance]
As described above, in the pachislot machine 1, in order to increase the interest of the game, to inform the player of useful information, or to achieve the intended gameplay, it is possible to execute various effects using various effect devices. An example of such effects will be described below.

[4-10-1. Main side production]
In the pachislot machine 1, the following effects can be performed, for example, under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side). As mentioned above, the pachislot machine 1 is capable of announcing information about the stop operation using the instruction monitor, and this is also included in the effects in a broad sense.

(Rock production)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, an effect can be performed in which the progress of the game is stopped for a predetermined period of time (the player's game operations are disabled for a predetermined period of time). Such an effect is called a "lock effect (or simply "lock")" or a "freeze effect (or simply "freeze")." Note that the machine can be configured so that such a lock effect is not performed, or so that multiple types of lock effects can be performed.

The gaming operations to be invalidated may be, for example, start operations, stop operations, or other operations. For example, if start operations are invalidated for a specified period of time, game progress will be stopped for a specified period of time after all stop operations have been performed. For example, if stop operations are invalidated for a specified period of time, game progress will be stopped for a specified period of time after a start operation has been performed. Furthermore, if multiple types of lock effects are provided, the period during which game progress is stopped (the period during which the player's gaming operations are invalidated) and the type of gaming operation to be invalid can be set for each lock effect.

(Reel performance)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, an effect can be produced by the effect display mode of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (including not only the variable display mode but also a combination with the stopped display mode) during the execution of the above-mentioned lock effect. Such an effect is called a "reel effect" as well as a "pattern effect," etc. Note that the machine can be configured not to produce such a reel effect, or can be configured to produce multiple types of reel effects. Furthermore, when it is said that a "lock effect is produced (executed)," it also includes both cases where a reel effect is produced and cases where it is not produced.

In short, reel effects are produced by spinning or stopping (temporarily stopping) each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R without the player's input during a period in which the player's input is disabled. Therefore, it is possible to set an operation pattern that produces such effects without considering the rotation speed or maximum number of sliding symbols. Furthermore, by setting multiple operation patterns, it is possible to provide multiple types of reel effects. Furthermore, by combining multiple types of reel effects with multiple types of lock effects, it is possible to set an even wider variety of effect patterns. Note that the reel effects may use any one, any two, or all three of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

(Pseudo-game)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, an effect can be performed in which a pseudo game is played while the above-mentioned lock effect is being executed. Such an effect is called a "pseudo game." Note that the machine can be configured so that such a pseudo game is not performed, or so that multiple types of pseudo games can be performed. Furthermore, when "a lock effect is performed (executed)," this also includes both cases where a pseudo game is performed and cases where it is not performed.

In essence, pseudo-games involve accepting simulated player operations during a period in which the player's operations are invalid, thereby spinning or stopping (temporarily stopping) the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to create effects. In other words, the reel effects described above are further enhanced by the player's operations. Note that, for example, the MAX BET button 6a, 1 BET button 6b, start lever 7, stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement button 9 are primarily intended for use in game operations, and it is not ideal for them to be used for any other purpose. However, pseudo-games allow these operations to be accepted, provided that measures are taken to prevent the player from mistaking them for actual gameplay.

Here, the flow of the pseudo game will be described by way of an example. The pseudo game is carried out, for example, in the following manner.
(1) The player's actual start operation (the execution conditions are met and the pseudo game begins here)
(2) Each reel rotates in a simulated manner (during simulated play)
(3) Accepts a pseudo-stop operation, which temporarily stops each reel (during pseudo-play).
(4) After a random delay process, each reel actually starts spinning (the simulated game ends and the actual game begins).

Note that random delay processing is a process that randomly generates a delay period for each reel before starting rotation (such a delay period is also called a "rearrangement period") to correct the situation where, for example, if specific symbols are displayed in a line in the above-mentioned situation (3) and the reels begin normal rotation in the above-mentioned situation (4), a player may be more likely to use the specific symbols as markers to stop the reels (this may aid in so-called "eye-pressing"). Furthermore, when the reels are temporarily stopped in the above-mentioned situations (3) and (4), it is desirable to ensure that the phase signal in the excitation control of each stepping motor is always less than a predetermined time (e.g., 500 ms) so that the reels are alternately rotated forward and backward to prevent the reels from being mistaken for having completely stopped.

One of the measures mentioned above is, for example, when an arbitrary symbol combination temporarily stops in the above-mentioned situation (3) (when the third reel temporarily stops and then all reels temporarily stop), slightly vibrating (swinging) each reel up and down until the random delay process is started in the above-mentioned situation (4). Note that, as long as the phase signal changes within the above-mentioned predetermined time, such swinging may not be performed when the first reel temporarily stops or when the second reel temporarily stops.

As one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo-game lamp may be provided to indicate that a pseudo-game is in progress, and the pseudo-game lamp may be illuminated from the time when the pseudo-game begins in the above-mentioned situation (1) until the time when the random delay process begins in the above-mentioned situation (4). It is desirable that the pseudo-game lamp be installed above the operation unit that accepts the player's game operations, and in a position that is visible during gameplay. It is also desirable that the pseudo-game lamp be an independent lamp that is not used for any other purpose, and that the entire display portion of the pseudo-game lamp be covered with a single-color border. It is also desirable that the display area of the pseudo-game lamp, including the explanatory portion of the pseudo-game lamp, has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeding 10 mm and a surface area exceeding 642 square mm). Additionally, it is desirable that the description of the pseudo game lamp be written in a way that makes it clear that the pseudo game lamp is a lamp that indicates that a pseudo game is in progress (for example, "FREEPLAY," "pseudo game effect in progress," or "automatic reel effect in progress"), and that such description should occupy at least one-third of the surface area. Note that the pseudo game lamp may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or the sub-control circuit 200.

As one of the measures mentioned above, for example, a pseudo-game display indicating that a pseudo-game is in progress may be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub-display device 220 (or both) from the time the pseudo-game starts in the above-mentioned situation (1) until the random delay process starts in the above-mentioned situation (4). It is desirable that the pseudo-game display be displayed above the operation unit that accepts the player's game operations and in a position that is visible during gameplay (in this embodiment, since both the main display device 210 and the sub-display device 220 are above the operation unit, either may be used). It is also desirable that the display range of the pseudo-game display, including its explanatory portion, have a certain surface area (e.g., one side exceeds 10 mm, the surface area exceeds 642 square mm if the display screen is less than 7 inches, or the surface area is 8.2% or more of the entire screen if the display screen is 7 inches or larger). Additionally, it is desirable that the explanatory portion of the pseudo-game display be written in a way that makes it clear that the pseudo-game display is intended to notify players that a pseudo-game is in progress (for example, "FREEPLAY," "pseudo-game effect in progress," or "automatic reel effect in progress"), and that it be large enough for players to read without being obscured.

Furthermore, for example, during a simulated game (for example, from the start of the simulated game in the above-mentioned situation (1) until the start of the random delay processing in the above-mentioned situation (4)), it is desirable to configure the instruction monitor so that information about the stop operation is not announced (if it is necessary to display information about the stop operation on the instruction monitor during that game, the display should start when the random delay processing starts). This can further prevent a player from mistakenly believing that an actual game is being played during a simulated game. Note that, if any of the above measures are taken, during a simulated game, information about the stop operation may be announced on the sub-side presentation device (for example, the main display device 210 or the sub-display device 220). Similarly, during a simulated game, the sub-side presentation device may perform presentations according to the results of the simulated game (linked to the simulated game operations).

Furthermore, during actual gameplay, test signals corresponding to the player's game operations or the state in which such game operations are possible are output via the test machine first interface board 301. However, during simulated gameplay, test signals corresponding to the player's simulated game operations or the state in which such simulated game operations are possible are not output. Therefore, during simulated gameplay, a test signal (pseudo game signal) may be output to enable the test machine to recognize that a simulated game is being played. Furthermore, when the test machine first interface board 301 receives a pseudo game signal from the main control board 71, it may output a signal for controlling the pseudo game progress to the main control board 71, thereby allowing the pseudo game to proceed on the main control board 71 side (i.e., the test machine first interface board 301 may be equipped with a pseudo game progress function). Furthermore, if the test machine first interface board 301 is equipped with such a pseudo game progress function, a switch may be provided to switch the function on and off. This makes it possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to check the simulated game effects during the certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot machine 1.

[4-10-2. Sub-side production]
In the slot machine 1, the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-side) can control the following effects, for example: As mentioned above, the slot machine 1 can notify the player of stop operation information using the main display device 210, etc., and this is also included in the effects in a broad sense.

(Normal performance)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, an effect that is completed in the current game (i.e., ends in one game) can be performed. Such an effect is called a "normal effect" or a "single effect." Note that the machine can be configured not to perform such a normal effect, or can be configured to perform multiple types of normal effects.

(Continuous performance)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, a continuous effect can be produced over multiple plays (i.e., a continuous effect over multiple games). Such an effect is called a "continuous effect" or a "continuous effect." Note that the machine can be configured not to produce such continuous effects, or can be configured to produce multiple types of continuous effects.

(Operation-linked effects)
In the pachislot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is met, an effect can be produced in which the effect content can be changed according to the effect operation by the player. Such an effect is called an "operation-linked effect" or "button effect," etc. Note that the configuration can be such that such an operation-linked effect is not performed, or the configuration can be such that multiple types of operation-linked effects can be performed. Furthermore, the operation-linked effect can be configured as a normal effect or as a continuous effect. Furthermore, the effect operation can include not only an operation on the effect button group, but also various game operations.

The various effects described above can be used for a variety of purposes. For example, they can be used to suggest or notify set values, internal winning combinations, game status, game zone, bonus content, and the period until a bonus is awarded. They can also be used to suggest or notify the degree of advantage in these areas. These uses are merely examples.

(Other performances)
The pachislot machine 1 can also perform effects other than those described above. For example, various notifications to players or gaming establishments (e.g., addiction prevention notifications, loss prevention notifications, error state notifications, demo state notifications, etc.) are also included in the effects in a broad sense, as notifications other than those described above. The addiction prevention notification can be, for example, a warning or the like issued when a favorable zone ends. The loss prevention notification can be, for example, a warning or the like issued when a favorable zone ends or when a settlement operation is performed. The error state notification can be, for example, a warning or the like issued when an error occurs until it is resolved. The demo state notification can be, for example, a notification that a machine is vacant when a predetermined period of no play has occurred or when a settlement operation is performed.

[5. First gaming machine]
Next, with reference to Figures 5 to 22, a specific example of specifications related to the gameplay of the pachislot machine 1 will be described as a "first gaming machine." Note that some or all of the various specifications and functions described as the first gaming machine in this embodiment can be applied to other gaming machines in this embodiment, and some or all of the various specifications and functions described as other gaming machines in this embodiment can be applied to the first gaming machine in this embodiment. In other words, an appropriate combination of these can be considered as the invention according to this embodiment.

First, in the first gaming machine, the active line is defined as only one line, the above-mentioned "center line." Furthermore, the first gaming machine has two gaming states: a non-bonus state and a bonus state. The non-bonus state includes a 2BB flag interval where the "F_2BB" (a bonus role that can only be won when two coins are bet; hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "2BB") described below is carried over, a 3BB flag interval where the "F_3BB" (a bonus role that can only be won when three coins are bet; hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "3BB") described below is carried over, and a non-flag interval where no bonus role has been won (no bonus role has been carried over). The bonus state includes a 2BB state, which is entered when a symbol combination related to 2BB is displayed, and a 3BB state, which is entered when a symbol combination related to 3BB is displayed.

Furthermore, the first gaming machine allows players to play with two medals bet (two-bet state) or three medals bet (three-bet state). Note that "betting" includes the player inserting two or three medals into the medal slot 5 for play, the player operating the MAX BET button 6a or 1 BET button 6b to bet two or three medals from their credits, and the player automatically betting two or three medals when a replay combination is won.

[5-1. Gaming Characteristics of the First Gaming Machine]
Next, the flow of games in the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 5 to 8. Note that Figure 5 is a diagram showing an example of the transition flow of game states in non-advantageous zones and advantageous zones in the first gaming machine, Figure 6 is a diagram for explaining an example of each mode in the first gaming machine, and Figures 7 and 8 are diagrams showing an example of various tables in the first gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 5, in the first gaming machine, the states in which a player plays are broadly divided into non-advantageous zones and advantageous zones, and advantageous zones are further divided into effect zones (advantageous zones, normal play) and increase zones (advantageous zones, pseudo bonus). Non-advantageous zones are gaming states (non-AT states) in which information about stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not notified, and are gaming states that are disadvantageous to the player. Effect zones are gaming states (non-AT states) in which information about stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not notified, and are gaming states that are disadvantageous to the player, similar to non-advantageous zones, but differ from non-advantageous zones in that mode transitions occur, as described below.

In other words, the non-advantageous zone is the control state that is the initial state that is controlled when play in the advantageous zone ends, when a setting change operation is performed, when other initialization conditions are met, or when the machine is shipped from the factory, etc., while the effect zone is the control state that is the normal state in which the player plays normally, and in which the expected probability of transitioning to the increased zone (awarding) can be changed by mode transitions, etc.

On the other hand, the increase section is a game state (AT state) in which information about stop operations that are advantageous to the player is notified, and is a game state that is advantageous to the player. In other words, the increase section is a control state that is advantageous in that it allows the player to increase the number of medals. Note that both the presentation section and the increase section are advantageous sections, and by transitioning between these sections, a series of advantageous sections are formed.

In the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), in a non-advantageous zone, a non-advantageous zone sub-flag is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 10, described below). The sub-flag is information used to group internal winning combinations that play similar roles (such as whether or not they are a winning combination and their winning probability) in various lotteries related to gameplay (various processes related to advantageous zones) performed by the main control circuit 100, and assign the same information to make the group identifiable. This eliminates the need to provide various data tables for each internal winning combination, allowing for data compression and avoiding strain on the capacity of the main ROM 102. In a non-advantageous zone, a lottery is conducted using this non-advantageous zone sub-flag.

The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Replay Bell" is determined when the internal winning combination is any of "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "F_Replay B" (No. "4"), and "F_Bell 123A1" to "F_Bell 321B2" (No. "10" to No. "33"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Weak Cherry" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Cherry" (No. "5"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Watermelon" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Confirmed Cherry" is determined when the internal winning combination is any of "F_Confirmed Cherry" (No. "6") and "F_Reach Eye" (No. "8"). The non-advantageous zone sub-flag "Middle Cherry" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Middle Cherry" (No. "7"). Note that non-advantageous zones can also be configured so that winning sub-flags and winning sub-flags can be determined, just like advantageous zones. Furthermore, the correspondence between these is not limited to the above.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), in the advantageous zone, a sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous zone is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the internal winning role (see FIG. 10 described below). Furthermore, in the advantageous zone, a sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous zone is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the combination of symbols displayed. In the advantageous zone, a lottery is held using these sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous zone and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous zone.

When a favorable zone is won, the sub-flag "Bell" is determined when the internal winning combination is any of "F_Bell123A1" to "F_Bell321B2" (No. "10" to No. "33"). When a favorable zone is won, the sub-flag "Weak Cherry" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Cherry" (No. "5"). When a favorable zone is won, the sub-flag "Watermelon" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"). When a favorable zone is won, the sub-flag "Determined Cherry" is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_Determined Cherry" (No. "6") or "F_Reach Eye" (No. "8"). When a favorable zone is won, the sub-flag "Medium Cherry" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Middle Cherry" (No. "7").

When entering the advantageous zone, the sub-flag "Tsuu Replay 1" is set when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4") and the "Right Up Replay" symbol combination is displayed (i.e., the winning combination is "Right Up Replay"). When entering the advantageous zone, the sub-flag "Tsuu Replay 2" is set when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4") and the "Parallel Replay" symbol combination is displayed (i.e., the winning combination is "Parallel Replay").

Here, in the first gaming machine, as described below, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), a "Right-Rising Replay" symbol combination is displayed between 3BB flags, and a "Parallel Replay" symbol combination is displayed between 2BB flags and non-flag spaces.

In other words, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "Tsutsu Replay 1" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is entered between 3BB flags, and "Tsutsu Replay 2" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is entered between 2BB flags and non-flags. In the first gaming machine, when the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is entered differs in this way, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below (for example, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery using the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in Figure 7(c) or the mode transition lottery using the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8(f)) is changed.

Note that in the first gaming machine, for example, "F_Replay A" (No. "3") is used as an example of a role in which the sub-flag changes when a favorable zone is entered depending on whether the win is between 3BB flags or 2BB flags. However, the manner in which the sub-flag changes when a favorable zone is entered is not limited to this. For example, as described below, when the internal winning role is "F_Bell 123B1" (No. "12"), the stop control is different for the 3BB flag and the 2BB flag. Therefore, when such a role is entered, the number of medals paid out may not change (or may change), but the combination of symbols displayed may be different, thereby determining a different sub-flag when a favorable zone is entered. Then, depending on the difference in the sub-flag when a favorable zone is entered, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below may change.

Furthermore, for example, as described below, when the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"), regardless of which flag interval (non-flag interval) it is, if the pressing position (stop operation timing) is appropriate, the "watermelon" symbol combination will be displayed, and if the pressing position is inappropriate, a miss will occur and the "watermelon spill" symbol combination will be displayed. Therefore, when such a combination is won, different sub-flags for when the advantageous zone is entered may be determined depending on whether the win is achieved without a miss or whether a miss occurs. Then, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below may be varied depending on whether the sub-flag for when the advantageous zone is entered is different.

Also, for example, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), if the stopping operation is performed in a specific manner between 3BB flags (this specific manner may be, for example, a manner in which the stopping operation is performed in a predefined hitting order (correct button press order), a manner in which the pressing position (timing of the stopping operation) is appropriate, or a manner in which a combination of these is performed), a "parallel replay" symbol combination is displayed, and if the stopping operation is not performed in the specific manner, a "right-up replay" symbol combination is displayed, and different sub-flags for when the advantageous zone is entered may be determined based on this. Then, the degree of advantage in the various lotteries described below may be varied depending on the different sub-flags for when the advantageous zone is entered.

In other words, the first gaming machine allows the final stop display pattern for a specific combination to differ depending on the number of bets, the game state, the type of stop operation, or any combination of these, and it is possible to determine different secondary information according to different stop display patterns, thereby applying all of the methods that can change the degree of advantage.

Returning to the explanation of the gameplay of the first gaming machine, in the non-advantageous zone, a lottery for transitioning to an advantageous zone is held for each play. Specifically, the advantageous zone transition lottery table shown in Figure 7(b) is referenced to determine the internal winning combination, and at a predetermined timing during the play after the non-advantageous zone sub-flag is determined according to the internal winning combination, the transition mode, etc. is determined according to the non-play zone sub-flag. Note that this determination may involve only the type of mode to be used when transitioning to the advantageous zone ("Advantageous Zone Start" in Figure 5), or it may involve not only the type of mode but also a transition to a pseudo-bonus ("Advantageous Zone Start + Pseudo Bonus Start" in Figure 5). However, it is also possible to configure the game so that transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is not determined in the non-advantageous zone.

Now, with reference to Figure 6, we will explain each mode in the first gaming machine. In the first gaming machine, the mode is control information (which can also be referred to as the game state or control state) for varying the expectation of transitioning (awarding) to an increase zone (pseudo bonus) in the presentation zone (normal play), and in the presentation zone (normal play), the mode determines whether or not to transition to a pseudo bonus, whether to maintain an advantageous zone, or whether to end the advantageous zone and transition to a non-advantageous zone.

Start mode is a relatively unfavorable mode that is likely to be occupied when transitioning from a non-favorable zone to a favorable zone (effect zone), and the expected probability of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c) in Figure 7 below). The expected probability of transitioning to a more favorable mode is also relatively low (see (f) in Figure 8 below). Although not shown, in start mode, the ceiling game count is set to 965 games. The ceiling game count is used to forcibly transition to a pseudo bonus when a certain period of time has elapsed without transitioning to a pseudo bonus. Therefore, the lower the ceiling game count, the more advantageous it is for the player, and the higher the ceiling game count, the more disadvantageous it is for the player.

Normal A mode is the mode in which players are most likely to stay while playing, and is a relatively unfavorable mode. The likelihood of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is relatively low (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the likelihood of transitioning to a more favorable mode is also relatively low (see (f) in Figure 8 below). In normal A mode, the ceiling game count is set to "965 games." Also, in Figure 6, "approximately 999G after pseudo-bonus" refers to the fact that, after the pseudo-bonus ends, a transition occurs to end A mode or end B mode (described below), where 32 games are played without transitioning to a pseudo-bonus. If a player transitions to a non-favorable zone and then selects normal A mode when transitioning from the non-favorable zone to the favorable zone, the apparent ceiling game count will be "965 games" + the "32 games" play period in end A mode or end B mode + the number of games required to transition from the non-favorable zone to the favorable zone. The same applies to normal B mode, Heaven Preparation mode, and Chance mode.

Normal B mode is a mode in which players tend to stay relatively longer while playing, and although it is a relatively unfavorable mode, it is more favorable than normal A mode, and the likelihood of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is relatively low (see Figure 7 (c) below), and the likelihood of transitioning to a more favorable mode is also relatively low (see Figure 8 (f) below). In normal B mode, the ceiling number of games is set to "965 games."

In Heaven Preparation Mode, the likelihood of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is relatively low (see Figure 7 (c) below), but the ceiling number of games is set at 466 games, and if a transition to a pseudo-bonus occurs, it is guaranteed that the mode will transition to Heaven Mode after the end (see Figure 8 (f) below), making it a relatively advantageous mode in that sense.

In Chance Mode, the likelihood of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see Figure 7 (c) below), and the ceiling number of games is set at 222 games, making it a relatively advantageous mode in that sense. However, the likelihood of transitioning to Heaven Mode is not high (see Figure 8 (f) below).

End A mode is a relatively unfavorable mode in which players are likely to remain if they transition to a pseudo bonus and do not transition to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after the pseudo bonus ends, and the expected probability of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is the lowest (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the expected probability of transitioning to a more favorable mode is also relatively low (see (f) in Figure 8 below). In End A mode, if 32 games are played after the pseudo bonus ends without transitioning to a pseudo bonus, the favorable zone itself ends and the player transitions to a non-favorable zone.

End B mode is a relatively unfavorable mode that players tend to stay in if they transition to a pseudo bonus and do not transition to Heaven mode (including Heaven preparation mode) after the pseudo bonus ends. However, it is more favorable than End A mode, and the likelihood of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the likelihood of transitioning to a more favorable mode is also relatively low (see (f) in Figure 8 below). In End B mode, as with End A mode, if 32 games are played after the pseudo bonus ends without transitioning to a pseudo bonus, the favorable zone itself ends and the player transitions to a non-favorable zone. End A mode and End B mode can also be collectively referred to as "end mode."

Guaranteed mode is the mode in which you remain when Heaven C mode ends, and since the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in Figure 7 below), and the ceiling number of games is set to "32 games," in that sense it is a relatively advantageous mode. However, the expectation of transitioning to Heaven mode is not high (see (f) in Figure 8 below). In other words, when Heaven C mode ends, in order to prevent a decrease in interest due to this, Guaranteed mode is positioned as a mode that attempts to maintain (guarantee) a relatively advantageous state for a certain period of time.

Heaven A mode is a mode in which consecutive pseudo bonuses can be expected (this may include the extension (addition) of the AT state if the AT state is configured to continue due to a decision to extend (add) the AT state; the same applies below). The expected probability of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in Figure 7 below), the ceiling number of games is set to 32 games, and the probability of maintaining the ceiling mode (Heaven mode loop rate) is set to a moderate level, making it a relatively advantageous mode. Although not shown in Figure 6, for example, it is possible to set different ceiling mode loop rates. For example, the lottery value can be set so that when the set value is an odd number (1, 3, 5), the ceiling mode loop rate is approximately 75%, and when the set value is an even number (2, 4, 6), the ceiling mode loop rate is approximately 67%. Alternatively, the lottery value can simply be set so that the higher the set value, the higher the ceiling mode loop rate. The same applies to Heaven B mode and Heaven C mode, which will be described later, and it is also possible to set different ceiling mode loop rates.

Heaven B mode is a mode in which consecutive pseudo bonuses can be expected, and the probability of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see Figure 7 (c) below). The ceiling number of games is set to "32 games." Furthermore, the probability of maintaining the ceiling mode (heaven mode loop rate) is set high, making it a relatively advantageous mode. In other words, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, it is an even more advantageous mode than Heaven A mode.

Heaven C mode is a mode in which consecutive pseudo bonuses can be expected, and the expectation of transitioning to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see Figure 7 (c) below). The ceiling number of games is set to "32 games," and the probability of maintaining the ceiling mode (heaven mode loop rate) is set quite high, making it a relatively advantageous mode. In other words, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, it is an even more advantageous mode than Heaven A mode and Heaven B mode. Heaven A mode, Heaven B mode, and Heaven C mode can be collectively referred to as "heaven mode."

Note that the above modes are merely examples, and the mode configuration is not limited to these. Modes other than those described above can also be set, and some of the above modes can be chosen not to be set.

Up to this point, we have described non-advantageous zones as being less advantageous than advantageous zones, but the relationship between non-advantageous zones and advantageous zones is not limited to this. For example, the transition rate to the increasing zone may be higher in non-advantageous zones than when at least one mode is set in the advantageous zone, or the average number of games required to transition to the increasing zone may be shorter. Alternatively, we could design the non-advantageous zone to be the most likely to become an increasing zone. This creates an incentive to play even in a state that is confirmed as a non-advantageous zone after a setting change, motivating players to start playing even from the time the store opens. Furthermore, even if the zone lamp stops lighting 32 games after the end of the pseudo bonus, it is not confirmed that the most disadvantageous state has occurred, so this motivates players to continue playing even in such a situation. Up to this point, we have described the effect zone as a game state in which information about stop operations advantageous to the player is not notified. However, if the effect zone is in a state that is less advantageous than the increasing zone (for example, by reducing the frequency of notifications or changing the winning combination that is the target of the notification), the game state in which information about stop operations is notified may also be configured.

Returning to the explanation of the gameplay of the first gaming machine, in the presentation section (normal play), a pseudo-bonus transition lottery (when a winning lottery is drawn) is first conducted for each play by referencing the advantageous section winning sub-flag. Specifically, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in Figure 7(c) is referenced to determine the internal winning combination, and at a predetermined timing during the play after the advantageous section winning sub-flag is determined in accordance with the internal winning combination, it is determined whether or not to transition to a pseudo-bonus in accordance with the advantageous section winning sub-flag. Note that in Figure 7(c), "non-winning" means that a transition to a pseudo-bonus will not occur, "winning (current play)" means that a transition to a pseudo-bonus will occur from the current play, and "winning (next play)" means that a transition to a pseudo-bonus will occur from the next play.

In addition, with the first gaming machine, if a "winning lottery (current game)" is determined, gaming operations (stop operations) are invalidated for a certain period of time at the start of the current game, or if a "winning lottery (next game)" is determined, at the start of the next game. During this invalid period, a reel effect in which "red 7" symbols are displayed in the main display window 4 (a "red 7s aligned" effect) is produced, followed by a pseudo bonus. If it is necessary to notify information about the stop operation during a game in which the "red 7s aligned" effect is produced, the information about the stop operation is notified at least when the invalid period ends and gaming operations (stop operations) become enabled (this may be before, but not before the start of the random delay processing described above).

If the pseudo bonus transition lottery (if it wins) in the presentation section (normal play) determines that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur, a mode transition lottery (if it wins) is held. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8 (f) is referenced, and the transition mode is determined based on the current mode and the sub-flag set when the advantageous section is selected. Note that this transition mode may be a mode that includes the pseudo bonus, or a mode after the pseudo bonus ends. Furthermore, if the pseudo bonus transition lottery (if it wins) determines that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur, and the mode transition lottery (if it wins) is held, the pseudo bonus transition lottery (if it wins), mode transition lottery (if it reaches the ceiling), and mode transition lottery (if it wins), described below, will not be held.

If the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when drawn) does not determine a transition to a pseudo bonus during the presentation section (normal play), a pseudo bonus transition lottery (when drawn) is held for each play (more specifically, for a play in which "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is drawn), with reference to the sub-flag when entering the advantageous zone. Specifically, the pseudo bonus transition lottery table shown in Figure 7(c) is referenced to determine the winning combination, and at a predetermined timing during that play (before the start of the next play) after the sub-flag when entering the advantageous zone is determined according to that winning combination, it is determined whether or not to transition to a pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag when entering the advantageous zone.

In the pseudo bonus transition lottery table shown in Figure 7(c), the probability of deciding to transition to a pseudo bonus is higher when "Tsu-Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone than when "Tsu-Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone. However, the manner in which "Tsu-Rip 2" is given preferential treatment over "Tsu-Rip 1" is not limited to this. For example, when "Tsu-Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be determined with a predetermined probability that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur, but when "Tsu-Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be possible to prevent a transition to a pseudo bonus from being decided.

If the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning) in the presentation section (normal play) determines that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur, a mode transition lottery (when winning) is held. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8 (f) is referenced, and the destination mode is determined based on the current mode and the sub-flag set when entering the advantageous section. Note that this destination mode may be a mode that includes the pseudo bonus, or a mode after the pseudo bonus ends. Furthermore, if the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning) determines that a transition to a pseudo bonus will occur and a mode transition lottery (when winning) is held, the mode transition lottery (when reaching the ceiling), described below, will not be held.

In the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8 (f), the probability of deciding to transition to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player is higher when "Tsu-Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone than when "Tsu-Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone. However, the manner in which "Tsu-Rip 2" is given preferential treatment over "Tsu-Rip 1" is not limited to this. For example, when "Tsu-Rip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be determined with a predetermined probability that the player will transition to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player, but when "Tsu-Rip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when entering an advantageous zone, it may be possible to prevent the decision to transition to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player.

If the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when a prize is won) does not determine a transition to a pseudo bonus during the presentation section (normal play), the ceiling game count is updated (this can be done by addition or subtraction), and if the ceiling game count reaches the ceiling game count associated with the current mode (or determined in advance when transitioning to a favorable section, etc.), a transition to a pseudo bonus is determined. In this case, it is possible to always determine a "winning lottery (current play)" or to always determine a "winning lottery (next play)." Alternatively, either of these can be determined by lottery.

When the ceiling number of games is reached during the presentation section (normal play) and it is decided to transition to a pseudo bonus, a mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) is held. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8 (f) is referenced, and the destination mode is determined based on the current mode. Note that this destination mode may be a mode that includes the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus ends.

The processing related to the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when a win occurs) and the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when a prize is won) differs only in the type of sub-flag, and is otherwise the same processing content, so it can be controlled using the same lottery table and control flow. The processing related to the mode transition lottery (when a win occurs) and the mode transition lottery (when a prize is won) differs only in the type of sub-flag, and is otherwise the same processing content, so it can be controlled using the same lottery table and control flow.

Also, if "Winning Lottery (Played This Time)" is not set as a type of pseudo bonus winning lottery, then at the time the sub-flag for winning the advantageous zone is determined, the sub-flag for winning the advantageous zone will also have already been determined, and the ceiling game count can also have already been updated. Therefore, the pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning), pseudo bonus transition lottery (when winning), and pseudo bonus transition processing when the ceiling is reached can be performed together in a single process. Similarly, the mode transition lottery (when winning), mode transition lottery (when winning), and mode transition lottery (when the ceiling is reached) can also be performed together in a single process.

Returning to the explanation of the gameplay of the first gaming machine, as described above, if a decision is made to transition to a pseudo bonus in the presentation section (normal play) and the pseudo bonus begins ("Pseudo bonus start" in Figure 5), the machine transitions to the increase section (pseudo bonus). Also, as described above, if control is exercised in end A mode or end B mode in the presentation section (normal play) and 32 games are played without transitioning to a pseudo bonus ("End of advantageous section (via end A/B)" in Figure 5), the machine transitions to a non-advantageous section. Furthermore, if the conditions for the limit processing shown in Figure 16, described below, are met, the advantageous section will be forcibly ended ("End of advantageous section (limit processing)" in Figure 5), resulting in a transition to a non-advantageous section.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), a ceiling shortening lottery is held when the pseudo bonus starts. Specifically, the ceiling shortening lottery table shown in Figure 8 (e) is referenced, and it is determined whether or not to shorten the ceiling number of games after the pseudo bonus ends, depending on the current mode. Note that in Figure 8 (e), "Non-winning" means that the ceiling number of games will not be shortened, and "Winning (ceiling number of games = 0 updated)" means that the ceiling number of games set to "0" (shortened) after the pseudo bonus ends, regardless of the mode. Note that the ceiling shortening lottery can be held not only when the pseudo bonus starts, but also every time a pseudo bonus is played.

If the result of the ceiling shortening lottery is that the ceiling game number will not be shortened, and if the player does not have the 1G consecutive stock (described below) when the pseudo bonus ends, the ceiling game number will be set according to the current mode (in the end mode, the advantageous period ends after 32 games (and is cleared accordingly), so the ceiling game number will not be set, but the ceiling game number may be provisionally set here), the pseudo bonus will end ("Pseudo bonus end" in Figure 5), and the game will transition to the presentation period (normal play). On the other hand, if the result of the ceiling shortening lottery is that the ceiling game number will be shortened, the ceiling game number will be set to "0 games" when the pseudo bonus ends. This means that the pseudo bonus will start again from the next play after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, the pseudo bonus will start when the ceiling game number is reached, so the mode transition lottery (at ceiling) described above will be performed.

In the increase zone (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (when drawn) is conducted for each game (more specifically, for games in which the sub-flag for the advantageous zone is determined to be "guaranteed role" or "medium chain"). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8 (f) is referenced, and the destination mode is determined based on the current mode and the sub-flag for the advantageous zone. Note that the destination mode may also be determined when a sub-flag for the advantageous zone other than those described above is determined. However, in this case, to prevent a mode that is relatively less favorable than the current mode from being determined as the destination mode, a different mode transition lottery table with a different lottery value than the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8 (f) may be referenced.

In the increase zone (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (when a win occurs) is conducted for each game (more specifically, for games in which "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is won). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8 (f) is referenced, and the destination mode is determined based on the current mode and the sub-flag when entering the advantageous zone. As with the above, in this case, to prevent a mode that is relatively less favorable than the current mode from being determined as the destination mode, a different mode transition lottery table with a different lottery value from the mode transition lottery table shown in Figure 8 (f) may be referenced.

In the increase zone (pseudo bonus), a 1G consecutive draw is held for each game. Specifically, the 1G consecutive draw table shown in Figure 7(d) is referenced, and whether or not a 1G consecutive draw will occur is determined based on the current mode and the sub-flag for when a favorable zone is drawn or when a favorable zone is entered. Note that in Figure 7(d), "Non-winning" means that a 1G consecutive draw will not occur, and "Winning (1G consecutive + 1)" means that the right to generate a 1G consecutive draw (1G consecutive stock) is awarded (the 1G consecutive stock counter is incremented by 1). Note that multiple 1G consecutive stocks (up to 255) can be stocked (accumulated) by the 1G consecutive stock counter. Therefore, multiple 1G consecutive stocks may be awarded during a single pseudo bonus. The 1G consecutive draw table can also be configured so that multiple 1G consecutive stocks can be awarded in a single 1G consecutive draw.

If the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter is 1 or greater when the pseudo bonus ends (i.e., if 1G consecutive stocks are held), one 1G consecutive stock is consumed (the 1G consecutive stock counter is decremented by 1), and the pseudo bonus will start again from the next play after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo bonus starts according to the right to 1G consecutive stocks, the mode transition lottery described above will not be held. On the other hand, if the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter is not 1 or greater when the pseudo bonus ends (i.e., if 1G consecutive stocks are not held), and if the ceiling shortening lottery described above has not been won, the ceiling game number will be set according to the current mode (in the end mode, the advantageous period ends after 32 games (and is cleared accordingly), so the ceiling game number will not be set, but it may be set provisionally here), the pseudo bonus will end ("Pseudo bonus end" in Figure 5), and the game will transition to the presentation period (normal play).

In addition, if a player wins the ceiling shortening lottery and also has 1G consecutive stocks, the result of the ceiling shortening lottery may take priority, and a pseudo bonus corresponding to the ceiling shortening is executed after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G consecutive stocks is executed, or the 1G consecutive stocks may take priority, and a pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G consecutive stocks is executed after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the ceiling shortening is executed. In the latter case, information that allows the existence of a ceiling shortening to be carried over can be stored separately.

In the first gaming machine, the configuration of the increase section (pseudo bonus) is given as an example, where it lasts for 55 games and allows for the win of up to 275 coins, but the configuration of the pseudo bonus is not limited to this. For example, the pseudo bonus may be configured as a "pseudo BB (big bonus)," and another pseudo bonus, a "pseudo RB (regular bonus)," which lasts for 22 games and allows for the win of up to 110 coins may be included. In this case, when the above-mentioned pseudo bonus transition lottery, the ceiling-reaching lottery, or the 1G consecutive lottery determines whether to transition to a pseudo bonus (to grant the right), the type of pseudo bonus (e.g., whether it will be a "pseudo BB" or a "pseudo RB") can be determined with a predetermined probability (e.g., 50% each). The "pseudo RB" may have a different value than the "pseudo BB" (more specifically, a lower value than the "pseudo BB"). For example, the number of continuing games may be the same as the "pseudo BB," but the bell navi rate (probability of announcing information about a stop operation) may be lowered to differentiate the maximum number of coins that can be won, resulting in different values. Furthermore, when the "pseudo RB" is started, a reel effect may be displayed in which a "BAR" pattern is aligned in the main display window 4, or a reel effect may be displayed in which "red 7-red 7-BAR" is displayed. Furthermore, the increase section is not limited to being configured as a pseudo bonus. For example, it may be configured as an AT state or ART state in which the number of continuing games (playing period) can be changed.

Furthermore, if the conditions for executing the limit processing shown in Figure 16 below are met during the pseudo-bonus, the advantageous period will be forcibly ended ("End of advantageous period due to limit processing" in Figure 5), resulting in a transition to a non-advantageous period.

In the first gaming machine, the above-described game flow is based on the assumption that play is basically performed with three coins bet. Therefore, when play is performed with two coins bet, various lotteries using, for example, (a) to (d) in Figure 7 and (e) and (f) in Figure 8 are not performed, and the ceiling number of games is not updated. Furthermore, when play is performed with two coins bet during a pseudo bonus, the pseudo bonus does not become an increase period because the system is configured so that medals do not increase when two coins are bet. In other words, the first gaming machine is configured so that playing with two coins bet basically puts the player at a disadvantage.

Here, when play is performed in the two-coin bet state, lotteries (e.g., various lotteries using (a)-(d) of Figure 7, (e) and (f) of Figure 8, etc.) and processing (e.g., updating the ceiling game count, etc.) related to the advantageous zone (AT) are not performed, but it is desirable that the advantageous zone game number counter for the game count limiter described above and the advantageous zone payout number counter for the payout number limiter described above are updated. These limiters have the function of appropriately suppressing gambling by restricting the number of games played in the advantageous zone and the upper limit on the number of coins won. Therefore, if these counters were not updated in the two-coin bet state, there is a possibility that the upper limit on the number of games played in the advantageous zone or the number of coins won will be exceeded due to play in the two-coin bet state, resulting in a situation where gambling cannot be appropriately suppressed. Therefore, it is desirable that the limiter counters be configured to be updated every game regardless of the number of coins bet.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the above-described game flow is basically based on the assumption that play is performed in a non-bonus state. Therefore, when play is performed in a bonus state (2BB state and 3BB state), various lotteries using, for example, (a) to (d) in Figure 7 and (e) and (f) in Figure 8 are not performed, and the ceiling number of games is not updated. Furthermore, if a bonus state is entered during a pseudo-bonus, the bonus state is configured to have a lower expected medal increase value than a non-bonus state (more specifically, a non-bonus state with three medals bet), so the pseudo-bonus may not be an increase period. In other words, the first gaming machine is configured so that playing in a bonus state may put the player at a disadvantage.

For this reason, the first gaming machine is configured to recommend playing in a 3-coin bet state between 2BB flags (in this embodiment, the 3-coin bet state between 2BB flags is sometimes described as a "recommended gaming state," and other states are sometimes described as "non-recommended gaming states"). That is, in the first gaming machine, 2BB is a bonus role that can only be won in a 2-coin bet state, and a symbol combination related to 2BB between 2BB flags is only a winning combination in a 2-coin bet state, but not a winning combination in a 3-coin bet state. Also, 3BB is a bonus role that can only be won in a 3-coin bet state, and a symbol combination related to 3BB between 3BB flags is only a winning combination in a 3-coin bet state, but not a winning combination in a 2-coin bet state. Also, 3BB never wins between 2BB flags, and 2BB never wins between 3BB flags.

The first gaming machine uses these configurations to, for example, win 2BB in a non-flag bet state with two coins (without winning 2BB), resulting in a 2BB flag bet, and then play in a 3-coin bet state, allowing you to play in the recommended game state described above without worrying about whether or not you win a bonus role.

As mentioned above, in the first gaming machine, a ceiling shortening lottery is conducted during a pseudo bonus. Looking at the ceiling shortening lottery table shown in Figure 8 (e), when the current mode is either Guaranteed Mode, Heaven A Mode, Heaven B Mode, or Heaven C Mode, there is a 1/8 (32/256) probability of winning the ceiling shortening lottery, while in other modes, the ceiling shortening lottery is not won. In other words, in a mode where the ceiling number of games is "32 games," those "32 games" may be shortened to "0 games," and in a mode where the ceiling number of games is greater than that, the ceiling number of games will never be shortened.

In addition, even in modes where the ceiling number of games is greater than "32 games," it may be decided that the ceiling number of games will be reduced with a lower probability (for example, 1/64) than in modes where the ceiling number of games is "32 games."

Furthermore, the manner in which the ceiling number of games is reduced is not limited to the above. For example, the same effect can be achieved by reducing "32 games" to a smaller number of predetermined games (0-31 games). Therefore, the number of games to be reduced when the ceiling reduction lottery is won may be determined further, or the number of games to be reduced in the ceiling reduction lottery may be determined in advance.

Furthermore, the triggers for conducting the ceiling shortening lottery are not limited to those described above. For example, during a pseudo-bonus, the ceiling shortening lottery may be conducted for each game. Furthermore, in the advantageous zone (normal play), when the current mode is one of the guaranteed mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, or heaven C mode, the ceiling shortening lottery may be conducted for each game. In these cases, the advantageous zone winning sub-flag and advantageous zone winning sub-flag are referenced to determine whether or not to win the ceiling shortening lottery.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in the first gaming machine, a 1G consecutive lottery is conducted during the pseudo bonus. Looking at the 1G consecutive lottery table shown in Figure 7(d), it can be seen that 1G consecutive stocks may be awarded regardless of the current mode. In other words, the right to continue the pseudo bonus can be awarded regardless of whether the mode has a ceiling game count of "32 games."

However, the manner in which this right is granted is not limited to the above. For example, in a mode where the ceiling number of games is "32 games," a 1G consecutive lottery may not be conducted in consideration of the fact that a ceiling shortening lottery will be conducted, and in a mode where the ceiling number of games is greater than "32 games," a 1G consecutive lottery may be conducted, thereby preventing the game from becoming overly gambling-oriented.

Furthermore, the triggers for the 1G consecutive lottery are not limited to those described above. For example, the 1G consecutive lottery could be conducted in advantageous zones (performance zones) other than pseudo bonuses, and the resulting 1G consecutive stocks could be consumed in the next pseudo bonus.

Although not shown in Figures 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when the pseudo bonus starts or during the pseudo bonus, if the current mode is Heaven mode, a special bonus effect is executed with a predetermined probability to suggest that the player is in an advantageous state. Therefore, when the special bonus effect is executed, it is possible to anticipate that the ceiling shortening lottery will be executed. Furthermore, this special bonus effect may be executed with a 100% probability when the ceiling shortening lottery is won. In this way, for example, when the special bonus effect is executed at the start of the pseudo bonus, it suggests that the player is at least in Heaven mode, and further, it can create a sense of anticipation that the ceiling shortening lottery may also be won. Furthermore, this special bonus effect may be executed with a predetermined probability or 100% probability when the 1G consecutive lottery is won during the pseudo bonus. This allows for a variety of possibilities to be suggested, such as (1) Heaven mode only, (2) Heaven mode + ceiling shortening win, (3) Heaven mode + 1G consecutive win, (4) Heaven mode + ceiling shortening win + 1G consecutive win, (5) 1G consecutive win only, etc., which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, if it is determined that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state again within a predetermined period (e.g., 32 games) after the end of an advantageous state (e.g., a pseudo bonus) (e.g., in the case of Heaven mode), that period may be further shortened. Therefore, even if the play period of a series of advantageous zones is limited (e.g., when limit processing is executed), it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game by allowing the player to play in a state with as high a degree of advantage as possible.

Furthermore, with the first gaming machine, even if it is not certain that the advantageous state will be restored within a predetermined period of time after the end of the advantageous state (for example, in the case of end mode), the advantageous state may be restored by granting a right (for example, 1G consecutive stock), which can heighten the player's anticipation and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, although not shown in Figures 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, if the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won is determined to be "Confirmed Role" (i.e., if "F_Confirmed Cherry" or "F_Reach Eye" is determined as the internal winning role), and if the result of the mode transition lottery described above is that a transition to Heaven C mode is made, a special lock effect can be executed with a probability of 1/2 (this probability is arbitrary). Furthermore, even when the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won is determined to be "Middle Cherry" (i.e., if "F_Middle Cherry" is determined as the internal winning role), the player can receive the same benefits as when the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won is "Confirmed Role." Therefore, when the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won is determined to be "Middle Cherry," a special lock effect can be executed in the same way as when the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won is "Confirmed Role."

Here, because a "confirmed combination" is a combination that also confirms a transition to a pseudo bonus (see (c) in Figure 7), when the special lock effect is executed, the player is able to recognize that a transition to a pseudo bonus and a transition to Heaven C mode has occurred, which is very exciting for the player. The special lock effect is configured, for example, as an effect in which game operations (stop operations) are disabled for approximately 20 seconds at the start of play. During this time, special reel effects may be performed, such as the reels vibrating or spinning backward, or special images that are not normally displayed may be displayed on the main effect display unit 21. Special music that is not normally output may also be output. Of course, effects can also be created using a combination of these. Furthermore, game operations are not disabled, but these effects may be continued until the player performs the next game operation (i.e., the player may be allowed to decide whether to allow the effects to be executed to the end or to cancel them midway and continue playing).

However, in the first gaming machine, as shown in Figure 16 below, even if you are in Heaven C mode, the advantageous zone may be forcibly terminated by the execution of limit processing, so it may not be desirable to repeatedly execute the above-mentioned special lock effect.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special lock effect is executed only once within the same series of advantageous zones. Specifically, the special lock effect is executed the first time a decision is made to execute it within a series of advantageous zones, but the system is controlled so that the special lock effect is not executed thereafter within the same series of advantageous zones, even if the same conditions are met. One method is to store information indicating that a special lock effect has been executed once, and then, if that information is stored within the same series of advantageous zones thereafter, not make a decision on whether to execute the special lock effect in the first place. Alternatively, the decision may be made, but if the information is stored, the decision result may be rewritten to indicate that the special lock effect will not be executed, even if it indicates that the special lock effect will be executed. The stored information can then be cleared when the advantageous zone ends.

Note that the manner in which the execution of the special lock effect is limited is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit on the number of times the special lock effect can be executed may be set to "two" or "three" times rather than "one time." In other words, the execution of the special lock effect is limited, but the upper limit may be set to multiple times. This can be set appropriately depending on the expected number of balls paid out per special lock effect.

Furthermore, the conditions for determining whether or not a special lock effect will be executed are not limited to those described above. In other words, in the above, a mode transition is triggered by a winning lottery for a "fixed role," and the determination of whether or not a special lock effect will be executed is made on the condition that the mode in question is Heaven C mode. However, since there may be cases where a transition to Heaven C mode is triggered by factors other than a winning lottery for a "fixed role" (see (f) in Figure 8), a determination of whether or not a special lock effect will be executed in these cases may also be made, and the execution of a special lock effect may be determined at a predetermined probability (which may be the same probability as when a winning lottery for a "fixed role" is triggered, or it may be a different probability).

Also, for example, when a "fixed role" is won, a decision may first be made as to whether or not a special lock effect will be executed, and if it is decided that a special lock effect will be executed, a transition to Heaven C mode may occur. In other words, the special lock effect may be executed in response to a decision to transition to Heaven C mode, or a transition to Heaven C mode may be made in response to a decision to execute a special lock effect.

Furthermore, for example, the degree of progress of play within the advantageous zone may be used as a condition for determining whether or not a special lock effect will be executed. For example, when the value of the advantageous zone game count counter or control game count counter described below is less than 750, or when the value of the advantageous zone payout counter or control payout counter described below is less than 1201, a determination as to whether or not a special lock effect will be executed is made as described above; and when the value of the advantageous zone game count counter or control game count counter described below is 750 or greater, or when the value of the advantageous zone payout counter or control payout counter described below is 1201 or greater, it is possible to prevent the determination of whether or not a special lock effect will be executed from then on in the same series of advantageous zones.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, the play period for a series of advantageous zones is limited to a fixed period (see Figure 16 described below). Furthermore, even if control information that is highly advantageous to the player (for example, Heaven C mode) is set multiple times within the same series of advantageous zones, control is performed so that special effects (for example, special lock effects) are not performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high while also preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, within a series of advantageous zones, the winning of a specific role (e.g., a "fixed role") may trigger control to a favorable state (e.g., a pseudo bonus), and control information that is highly advantageous to the player (e.g., Heaven C mode) may be set. Even if this occurs multiple times within the same series of advantageous zones, the machine is controlled so that special effects (e.g., special lock effects) are not performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling aspect of the game from becoming excessively high, while also preventing a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the first gaming machine is capable of determining secondary information (e.g., a sub-flag when a favorable zone is won) according to the determined internal winning combination, as well as determining secondary information (e.g., a sub-flag when a favorable zone is entered) according to the combination of symbols displayed, and is capable of determining whether or not to grant a favorable state (e.g., a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding the player's stopping operation is notified according to the secondary information determined for each.

In this way, the first gaming machine can create a sense of anticipation regarding the awarding of an advantageous state not only when an internal winning combination is determined, but also when a symbol combination is displayed, thereby diversifying the gameplay regarding the awarding of an advantageous state.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, both the information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and the information corresponding to the displayed symbol combination are managed as common secondary information, which helps prevent an increase in the control load and amount of information related to the granting of advantageous states.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, when the gaming value bet is a first amount (e.g., 3 coins), a first special role (e.g., 3BB) can be won, but a second special role (e.g., 2BB) cannot be won. Furthermore, when the gaming value bet is a second amount (e.g., 2 coins), a second special role can be won, but the first special role cannot be won. Furthermore, when a specific role (e.g., "F_Replay A") is won, if the first special permission state (e.g., between 3BB flags) is reached, a predetermined symbol combination (e.g., "Right-Up Replay") is displayed, and if the second special permission state (e.g., between 2BB flags) is reached, a specific symbol combination (e.g., "Parallel Replay") is displayed (see Figure 15 below).

The first gaming machine is capable of determining different secondary information when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed and when a combination of specific symbols is displayed. In other words, the first gaming machine can vary the determination of whether an advantageous state will be awarded depending on which special permission state is in effect, even when the same specific combination is determined. This allows for further diversification of gameplay while minimizing the increase in control load and information volume related to the awarding of advantageous states.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state when at least a specific combination is won and a specific symbol combination is displayed.

Here, in the first gaming machine, since both the predetermined symbol combination and the specific symbol combination are symbol combinations related to replay, the same benefit of activating replay will be awarded regardless of which combination is displayed.

However, the manner in which the same benefit is awarded is not limited to the above. For example, a specific combination may be configured as a specific minor combination related to the award of game value. Then, when a specific minor combination is won, for example, in the first special permission state, a predetermined symbol combination (a symbol combination related to the award of game value equivalent to a "right-up lip") that awards game value of one coin (this value is arbitrary and may be any value less than the betted game value, or may be a value greater than the betted game value) may be displayed; and in the second special permission state, a specific symbol combination (a symbol combination related to the award of game value equivalent to a "parallel lip") that awards the same number of game values as when the predetermined symbol combination is displayed may be displayed.

Furthermore, both the predetermined symbol combination and the specific symbol combination may be configured as "miss" symbol combinations (however, in order to be able to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state, the symbol combinations must be distinguishable as being different from pure "miss" combinations). Even in this case, the value remains the same.

In this way, the first gaming machine can vary the decisions regarding the granting of advantageous states depending on which special permission state is in effect, even when the same specific combination is determined. This makes it possible to diversify the gameplay while preventing an increase in the control load and amount of information required for the granting of advantageous states. Furthermore, in a game in which a specific combination is determined, the same benefit is awarded regardless of which special permission state is in effect, so even when the gameplay is varied, it is possible to prevent players from suffering direct disadvantages.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, if a specific combination is won and the second special permission state is in effect, it may be configured so that when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, a specific combination of symbols can be displayed, but when a stop operation is not performed in a specific manner, it is not possible to display the specific combination of symbols.

It may also be possible to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state at least when a specific combination of symbols is displayed when a specific role is won. If a specific role is determined as an internal winning role, it may be possible to set different degrees of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state when a specific combination of symbols is displayed and when a specific combination of symbols is not displayed.

In addition, if a specific combination is won, and the first special permission state is in effect, a combination of predetermined symbols may be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode; and, if the second special permission state is in effect, a combination of predetermined symbols may be displayed when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, and a combination of predetermined symbols may be displayed when a stop operation is not performed in a specific mode.

In this case, the specific combination can be configured so that a specific symbol combination is displayed on at least one reel when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (in this embodiment, this may be described as "press position ○" or "correct press position", etc.), and a predetermined symbol combination is displayed when the timing of the stop operation is inappropriate (in this embodiment, this may be described as "press position ×" or "incorrect press position", etc.). This allows the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state to vary depending on the player's stop operation (or the timing of the stop operation), allowing the player to concentrate more on the game and increasing the player's interest in the game.

As mentioned above, a specific combination can also be configured as a specific minor combination. In this case, on at least one reel, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (when the button is pressed at ○), a specific combination of symbols is displayed and a predetermined number of game values is awarded, and if the timing of the stop operation is inappropriate (when the button is pressed at ×), a specific combination of symbols is displayed and a predetermined number of game values is awarded. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (i.e., the same benefit). Alternatively, a game value greater than the specific number may be awarded for the specific number. Alternatively, a game value less than the specific number may be awarded for the specific number. At least one of the specific combination of symbols and the specific combination of symbols may be the combination of symbols when a miss occurs. In other words, either the predetermined number or the specific number may be set to "0." This not only makes it possible to change the degree of advantage in granting an advantageous state based on the player's stop operation (or the timing of the operation), but also to change the direct content of the bonus, allowing players to concentrate more on the game, further diversifying the gameplay and increasing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if there is only one type of special role, the appropriate timing for the stop operation is also limited, so it is desirable to provide multiple special roles with different appropriate timings for the stop operation. For example, on one reel, a first special role may be provided in which, when the stop operation is performed at a first timing, an appropriate stop operation occurs and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, but when the stop operation is performed at any timing other than the first timing, the appropriate stop operation occurs and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed; a second special role may be provided in which, when the stop operation is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, the appropriate stop operation occurs and the combination of specific symbols is displayed, but when the stop operation is performed at any timing other than the second timing, the appropriate stop operation occurs and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed; and a third special role may be provided in which, when the stop operation is performed at a third timing different from the first and second timings, the appropriate stop operation occurs and the combination of specific symbols is displayed, but when the stop operation is performed at any timing other than the third timing, the appropriate stop operation occurs and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and all of these roles have the same winning probability.

In this case, the specific winning combination can be configured so that a specific symbol combination is displayed when the batting order is appropriate (when the button press order is correct), and a predetermined symbol combination is displayed when the batting order is inappropriate (when the button press order is incorrect). This allows the degree of advantage regarding the granting of an advantageous state to vary depending on the player's stopping operation (procedure), allowing the player to concentrate more on the game and increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, as described above, the specific combination can also be configured as a specific minor combination. In this case, if the batting order is appropriate (in the case of the correct button press order), a specific symbol combination is displayed and a predetermined number of game points is awarded. If the batting order is inappropriate (in the case of the incorrect button press order), a specific symbol combination is displayed and a predetermined number of game points is awarded. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (i.e., the same bonus). A higher game point may be awarded for the specific number than the specific number. A lower game point may be awarded for the specific number than the specific number. At least one of the specific symbol combination and the specific symbol combination may be the symbol combination when a miss occurs. In other words, either the predetermined number or the specific number may be set to "0." This not only changes the degree of advantage related to the awarding of an advantageous state due to the player's stop operation (procedure), but also changes the content of the direct bonus. This allows the player to concentrate more on the game, further diversifies the gameplay, and increases the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, since only one type of special role limits the appropriate batting order, it is desirable to provide multiple special roles with different appropriate batting orders. For example, a first special role may be provided in which, when the left first stop appears, an appropriate stopping operation is performed and a combination of special symbols is displayed, and when the center/right first stop appears, an appropriate stopping operation is not performed and a combination of special symbols is not displayed; a second special role may be provided in which, when the center first stop appears, an appropriate stopping operation is performed and a combination of special symbols is displayed, and when the left/right first stop appears, an appropriate stopping operation is not performed and a combination of special symbols is not displayed; and a third special role may be provided in which, when the right first stop appears, an appropriate stopping operation is performed and a combination of special symbols is displayed, and when the left/center first stop appears, an appropriate stopping operation is not performed and a combination of special symbols is not displayed; and these roles may be set to win with the same probability of winning.

So far, we have mentioned that in a unit game in which a specific combination is won, the stop operation mode (at least one or both of the timing of the stop operation and the batting order) can change the process for determining whether a non-advantageous zone will transition to an advantageous zone, and the process for determining whether an advantageous state will be granted in an advantageous zone (including pseudo-bonus transition lotteries, mode transition lotteries, and other processes for changing the advantageous degree of the game situation in an advantageous zone). However, among such changes, changes that are relatively disadvantageous to the player (which may ultimately result in an disadvantage) can be considered the above-mentioned penalty. Therefore, when such a change occurs, the system may be configured to generate an optional effect (warning notification) to draw attention to the player.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, when a specific combination is won, the likelihood of an advantageous state being awarded is higher when a specific symbol combination is displayed than when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed. In other words, assuming a three-coin bet, the second special permission state (e.g., between 2BB flags) is a state in which the awarding of an advantageous state is favored more favorably than the first special permission state (e.g., between 3BB flags).

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, if a predetermined role (for example, "Push Order Bell B" described below) is won, if the first special permission state is active, the combination of award symbols (for example, a combination of symbols that will result in the payout of eight coins) is displayed regardless of the batting order, whereas if the second special permission state is active, the combination of award symbols is displayed if the batting order is the predefined correct push order, but if the batting order is not the predefined correct push order, the combination of award symbols is not displayed, resulting in a miss where no game value is awarded, or a combination of symbols that will award less game value than if the combination of award symbols were displayed (for example, a combination of symbols that will result in the payout of one coin) is displayed. In other words, ignoring the activation of advantageous states, the first special permission state is a state in which the awarding of game value is favored more favorably than the second special permission state.

In other words, if a player plays in a non-recommended gaming state with three bets between 3BB flags, the probability of awarding an advantageous state is not favored, but the probability of awarding gaming value when an advantageous state is not activated is favored, so the player can play in a state where the difference in slope value between when an advantageous state is activated and when it is not activated is relatively small. In this way, a state in which the player's gaming value is unlikely to decrease, although the possibility of the player being able to suddenly increase their gaming value is reduced, can be defined as, for example, a "stable state."

On the other hand, if a player plays in a recommended game state, the probability of obtaining an advantageous state is favored, but the probability of obtaining game value when an advantageous state is not activated is not favored, so the player can play in a state where the difference in slope value between when an advantageous state is activated and when it is not activated is relatively large. In this way, a state in which the player is more likely to be able to rapidly increase their game value, but in which the player's game value is likely to decrease, can be defined as, for example, a "rough seas state."

The method for creating the two states, the stable state and the rough seas state, is not limited to the above. For example, in the "stable state," the pseudo bonus transition probability is increased compared to the "rough seas state" in the pseudo bonus transition lottery described above, while the transition probability to Heaven mode is decreased compared to the "rough seas state" in the mode transition lottery described above. Furthermore, in the "rough seas state," the pseudo bonus transition probability is decreased compared to the "stable state" in the pseudo bonus transition lottery described above, while the transition probability to Heaven mode is increased compared to the "stable state" in the mode transition lottery described above. In this way, a state can be created in the "stable state" where it is easier to win a pseudo bonus for the first time but it is difficult to win consecutive wins, while a state can be created in the "rough seas state" where it is harder to win a pseudo bonus for the first time but it is easier to win consecutive wins. Note that the stop control for the predetermined combination may vary between 2BB flags and 3BB flags, as described above, or it may be different (i.e., not favoring 3BB flags).

[5-2. Symbol Arrangement Configuration of First Gaming Machine]
Next, the symbol arrangement configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 9. Fig. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine. As shown in Fig. 9, in the first gaming machine, ten types of symbols, namely "Red 7", "BAR", "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon", "Cherry", "Red Blank", "Yellow Blank", "White Blank 1", and "White Blank 2", are arranged on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R at the positions shown in Fig. 9. Furthermore, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[5-3. Internal winning combination configuration of first gaming machine]
Next, the internal winning combination configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 10 to 15. Figure 10 is a diagram showing an example of an internal lottery table of the first gaming machine. Also, Figures 11 to 14 are diagrams showing an example of a symbol combination table of the first gaming machine. Also, Figure 15 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the display combination, etc. of the first gaming machine. That is, below, the types of internal winning combinations drawn by lottery in the first gaming machine, and which symbol combinations (which can also be referred to as display combinations, winning combinations, stop display modes, display results, etc.) are displayed depending on the stop operation mode (i.e., the hitting order, stop operation timing, etc.) when each internal winning combination is won will be described.

First, in the first gaming machine, in the internal lottery process (see FIG. 26) described below, each internal winning combination shown in FIG. 10 is won with the probability shown in FIG. 10 (lottery value/probability denominator: 65536). The symbol combinations permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in the "corresponding symbol combinations" in FIG. 10. Also, in FIGS. 11 to 14, "BB" indicates a symbol combination related to a bonus combination, "REP" indicates a symbol combination related to a replay combination, and "FRU" indicates a symbol combination related to a minor combination.

"F_2BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with two bets in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags), but is configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with three bets. In a game where "F_2BB" wins in a two-bet state, or in a game where a "lose" occurs between 2BB flags, if the press position ○ is reached on each reel, "BB01" is displayed and the game transitions to 2BB state (bonus state based on 2BB). On the other hand, in a game where a three-bet state occurs, even between 2BB flags, "BB01" will never be displayed.

"F_3BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with three bets in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags), but is configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with two bets. In a game with three bets in which "F_3BB" wins, or in a game with a "lose" between 3BB flags, if the press position is ○ on each reel, "BB02" will be displayed and the game will transition to the 3BB state (a bonus state based on 3BB). On the other hand, "BB02" will not be displayed when a game with two bets is played, even between 3BB flags.

In the 2BB and 3BB states, the lottery value in the "Bonus State" column in Figure 10 is referenced to determine the internal winning combination (only a three-coin bet is allowed to start play). During the 2BB and 3BB states, the RB, a first-class special combination, is always activated (RB state). The RB state is repeatedly terminated and activated again if two wins occur or two games are played after activation. In addition, in the first gaming machine, the condition for terminating the 2BB state is stipulated as more than one medal being paid out in the 2BB state, and the condition for terminating the 3BB state is stipulated as more than 176 medals being paid out in the 3BB state.

When the 2BB or 3BB state ends, a special mode transition process is performed. For example, if the mode when the bonus state is transitioned to (this is equivalent to when the bonus state ends, as mode transitions do not occur during the bonus state), i.e., the current mode, is "Start Mode," the mode to transition to will be "Start Mode." Also, if the current mode is "Normal A Mode," "Normal B Mode," "Heaven Preparation Mode," or "Chance Mode," the mode to transition to will be "Normal A Mode." Also, if the current mode is "End A Mode" or "End B Mode," the mode to transition to will be "End A Mode." Also, if the current mode is "Guaranteed Mode," "Heaven A Mode," "Heaven B Mode," or "Heaven C Mode," the mode to transition to will be "Guaranteed Mode."

"F_Replay A" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in non-bonus states, regardless of the number of bets. When determined as an internal winning combination, between non-flag and 2BB flags, regardless of the stopping operation mode, one of "REP64" to "REP72" (these can be collectively referred to as "parallel replays" because they display the "replay" symbols in a straight line in the bottom row or in a straight line in the middle row. Also, "REP64" to "REP71" can be collectively referred to as "lower row replays," and "REP72" can be referred to as "middle row replay") is displayed, and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, between 3BB flags, regardless of the stopping operation mode, "REP73" (which displays the "replay" symbols in a straight line in the top right, so can be referred to as "right-up replay") is displayed, and a replay is awarded.

"F_Replay B" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in non-bonus states, regardless of the number of bets. It can be determined as an internal winning combination when three coins are bet, but can also be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination when two coins are bet. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, a "Parallel Replay" will be displayed and a replay will be awarded regardless of the stop operation mode, regardless of the state.

"F_Cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in non-bonus mode. It can be determined as an internal winning combination in three-coin bet mode, but can be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination in two-coin bet mode. If determined as an internal winning combination, a "middle row replay" is displayed in two-coin bet mode regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In three-coin bet mode, if the push position is ○ on at least the left reel 3L, one of "REP28," "REP60," to "REP63" (these can be collectively referred to as "cherry replays" because they display the "cherry" symbol in the lower row on the left reel 3L) is displayed, and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the push position is ×, other replays (e.g., "REP57" to "REP59") are displayed, and a replay is awarded.

"F_Confirmed Cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in non-bonus states. While it can be determined as an internal winning combination in three-coin bet states, it can also be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination in two-coin bet states. If determined as an internal winning combination, a "middle row replay" is displayed in two-coin bet states regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In three-coin bet states, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" through "batting order 4," pressing position ○ on at least the left reel 3L will display one of "REP42" through "REP56" (these symbols display a "cherry" symbol in the lower row on the left reel 3L; for example, symbols that can increase the player's expectations, such as "REP42," can also be displayed on other reels, and these can be collectively referred to as "confirmed cherry replays"), and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the button is pressed at an X position, other replies (such as the aforementioned "Cherry rep" or "REP29" to "REP41") will be displayed and a replay will be awarded. Furthermore, if the button press is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6," a "middle row rep" will be displayed and a replay will be awarded regardless of the stop operation mode.

"F_Middle Cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. While it can be determined as an internal winning combination in the three-coin bet state, it can also be configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination in the two-coin bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, a "middle replay" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-coin bet state, and a replay is awarded. In the three-coin bet state, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" through "batting order 4," if the pressing position is ○ on at least the left reel 3L, one of "REP15" through "REP19" (these can be collectively referred to as "middle cherry replays" because they display the "cherry" symbol in the middle row on the left reel 3L) is displayed, and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, other replays (e.g., "REP20" through "REP27") are displayed, and a replay is awarded. Additionally, if the button press is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6," a "middle lip" will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay will be granted.

"F_Reach Eye" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in non-bonus states. Note that while it can be determined as an internal winning combination in three-coin bet states, it can also be configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination in two-coin bet states. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, a "middle lip" is displayed in two-coin bet states regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In three-coin bet states, if the push order is any of "batting order 1" through "batting order 4," one of "REP01" through "REP14" (these are, by convention, configured as combinations of symbols that can definitely notify (or suggest) a transition to a state advantageous to the player, and these can be collectively referred to as "reach eye lip") is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. Furthermore, if the push order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6," a "middle lip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded.

"F_Watermelon" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in a non-bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, if the push position for each reel is ○, one of "FRU10" to "FRU12" (these display watermelon symbols side by side and can be collectively referred to as "watermelon") will be displayed, and if three coins are bet, three medals will be paid out, and if two coins are bet, two medals will be paid out. On the other hand, if the push position is ×, one of "FRU08" or "FRU09" (these do not display watermelon symbols side by side and can be collectively referred to as "watermelon spill") will be displayed, and one medal will be paid out. Note that if the push position is ×, a spill will occur and no medals will be paid out.

"F_Bell 123A1", "F_Bell 123A2", "F_Bell 132A1", "F_Bell 132A2", "F_Bell 213A1", "F_Bell 213A2", "F_Bell 231A1", "F_Bell 231A2", "F_Bell 312A1", "F_Bell 312A2", "F_Bell 321A1", and "F_Bell 321A2" are configured to be determined as internal winning combinations in non-bonus states regardless of the number of bets. These can be collectively referred to as "Push Order Bell A".

As shown in Figure 15, "Push Order Bell A" is a push order minor feature with six options (one of "Batting Order 1" to "Batting Order 6" is the correct push order), and if it is determined as an internal winning feature, and the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct push order, one of the following "bells" will be displayed: "Right Downward Bell" ("FRU03"), "Upper Bell" ("FRU01" and "FRU02"), "Middle Bell" ("FRU04"), "Right Upward Bell" ("FRU05"), "Small Hill Bell" ("FRU06"), and "Lower Bell" ("FRU07").If three coins are bet, eight medals will be paid out, and if two coins are bet, two medals will be paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operations are not performed in the corresponding correct button sequence, and the first stop operation is correct, there is a 1/2 probability that the remaining stop operations will result in a press position ○, and if the press position is ○, one of the winning "1-coin roles" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") will be displayed, and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the press position is ×, a miss will occur and no medal will be paid out. Also, if the first stop operation is incorrect, there is a 1/8 probability that the remaining stop operations will result in a press position ○, and if the press position is ○, one of the winning "1-coin roles" will be displayed, and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the press position is ×, a miss will occur and no medal will be paid out.

"F_Bell 123B1", "F_Bell 123B2", "F_Bell 132B1", "F_Bell 132B2", "F_Bell 213B1", "F_Bell 213B2", "F_Bell 231B1", "F_Bell 231B2", "F_Bell 312B1", "F_Bell 312B2", "F_Bell 321B1", and "F_Bell 321B2" are configured to be determined as internal winning combinations in non-bonus states regardless of the number of bets. These can be collectively referred to as "Push Order Bell B".

As shown in Figure 15, "Push Order Bell B" is not a push order minor feature between the 3BB flags in the 2-coin bet state and the 3-coin bet state. If it is determined to be an internal winning feature, one of the above-mentioned "bells" will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and 8 medals will be paid out if the 3-coin bet state is in effect, and 2 medals will be paid out if the 2-coin bet state is in effect.

Also, as shown in Figure 15, "Push Order Bell B" is a push order minor role in states other than between 3BB flags in the 3-coin bet state (between non-flags in the 3-coin bet state, between 2BB flags in the 3-coin bet state), and if it is determined to be an internal winning role, if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct push order, one of the above-mentioned "bells" will be displayed and eight medals will be paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct push order, if the first stop operation is correct, there is a 1/2 probability that the push position will be ○ for the remaining stop operations, and if the push position is ○, one of the winning "1-coin roles" will be displayed and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the push position is ×, a miss will occur and no medal will be paid out. Furthermore, if the first stop operation is incorrect, there is a 1/8 probability that the push position will be ○ for the remaining stop operations, and if the push position is ○, one of the winning "1-coin roles" will be displayed and one medal will be paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is X, a miss will occur and no medals will be paid out.

The "8 F_RB" combination can be determined as an internal winning combination during bonus mode. If determined as an internal winning combination, one of the "bells" described above will be displayed and 8 medals will be paid out regardless of the stop operation mode.

The "1 F_RB" can be determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, one of the above-mentioned "1-coin combinations" (more specifically, "FRU117" to "FRU120" have been added) will be displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and one medal will be paid out.

Note that the internal lottery table shown in Figure 10, the symbol combination tables shown in Figures 11 to 14, and the correspondence between internal winning combinations, stop operation modes, and display combinations shown in Figure 15 are merely examples, and are not limited to the modes shown here.

For example, in the first gaming machine, a "loss" can occur in various situations, such as a pure "loss," a "loss" due to missing "BB01" in a 2-bet state where "BB01" can be displayed, or a "loss" due to missing "BB02" in a 3-bet state where "BB02" can be displayed, or a "loss" due to a 3-bet state between 2 BB flags, or a "loss" due to a 2-bet state between 3 BB flags, or a "loss" due to missing a "push order minor win." Therefore, in order to vary the symbol combinations displayed as "losses" in some or all of these cases, these different symbol combinations are specified in advance in a symbol combination table, and these are allowed to be displayed as "corresponding symbol combinations" depending on the determined internal winning combination, so that the symbol combinations displayed as "losses" can be varied depending on the situation, etc.

[5-4. Limit processing configuration of first gaming machine]
Next, the limit process configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Figure 16. Figure 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of each limit process in the first gaming machine. As shown in Figure 16, the first gaming machine is configured to execute limit processes, including a normal limit process (number of games), a normal limit process (number of payouts), a special limit process (number of games), a special limit process (number of payouts), a semi-limit process (number of games), and a semi-limit process (number of payouts). Note that this is only an example of executable limit processes, and limit processes other than these limit processes may be executed, or some of these limit processes may not be executed.

Normal limit processing (number of games) is executed when the value of the advantageous zone game number counter reaches 1500 or more (i.e., when 1500 consecutive plays have been played during the advantageous zone). The advantageous zone game number counter starts counting the number of plays when the advantageous zone (including the presentation zone) begins, and stops counting and is cleared (initialized) when the advantageous zone ends (including when the limit processing is activated). The advantageous zone game number counter also counts when the number of bets is 2 or 3. The advantageous zone game number counter also counts in 2BB and 3BB states.

When the normal limit process (number of games) is executed (activated), the advantageous zone is forcibly ended and transitioned to a non-advantageous zone, regardless of whether it is during a presentation zone or an increase zone (pseudo bonus). At this time, all information related to the advantageous zone (for example, information for controlling the presentation zone or increase zone, information related to the current mode, information related to the pseudo bonus play period, information related to the ceiling game count and whether the ceiling has been shortened, the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter, and other information obtained during the advantageous zone, as well as various information required to control the advantageous zone) is also cleared (initialized).

Normal limit processing (payout number) is executed when the value of the favorable zone payout number counter reaches 2401 or more (i.e., when the number of medals paid out during the favorable zone exceeds 2400). The favorable zone payout number counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, the "net increase (difference in number of medals)") when the favorable zone (including the presentation zone) begins, and ends counting and is cleared (initialized) when the favorable zone ends (including when the limit processing is activated). The favorable zone payout number counter counts both when the number of medals bet is 2 or 3. The favorable zone payout number counter also counts in 2BB and 3BB states. For example, when a "miss" or "missed win" occurs during the favorable zone, the favorable zone payout number counter subtracts a value calculated appropriately according to the actual payout number (for example, "-2 medals" or "-3 medals") Therefore, if the number of medals does not increase but decreases after the advantageous period begins, the value may become negative (alternatively, it can be configured to always maintain "0" when a negative value occurs). In other words, the advantageous period payout number counter is capable of counting from the lowest point of the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period to the defined highest point (difference in number of medals: 2400).

When the normal limit process (payout amount) is executed (activated), the advantageous zone is forcibly ended and the player transitions to a non-advantageous zone, regardless of whether the player is in the performance zone or the increase zone (pseudo bonus). At this time, all information related to the advantageous zone described above is also cleared (initialized).

The special limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter reaches 1445 or more (i.e., when 1445 consecutive plays have been played during the advantageous period). The control game number counter starts counting the number of plays when the advantageous period (including the presentation period) begins, and stops counting and is cleared (initialized) when the advantageous period ends (including when the limit process is activated). The control game number counter counts when the number of bets is three, but does not count when the number of bets is two. The control game number counter counts when the game is in a non-bonus state, but does not count when the game is in a 2BB state or a 3BB state. However, the control game number counter can also be configured in the same way as the advantageous period game number counter.

When the special limit process (number of games) is executed (activated), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (i.e., during the increase period), the pseudo bonus will not be forcibly ended midway, but when the pseudo bonus ends, the advantageous period will be forcibly ended accordingly, and the game will transition to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information related to the advantageous period mentioned above will also be cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if you are not in a pseudo bonus (i.e., if you are in a presentation period), you will first be forced to transition to the pseudo bonus. In other words, even if you do not win the pseudo bonus transition lottery, you will transition to the pseudo bonus by executing this special limit process (number of games). Then, when the pseudo bonus you transitioned to ends, the advantageous period will be forcibly ended accordingly, and you will transition to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information related to the advantageous period described above will also be cleared (initialized).

Note that the value of the advantageous zone game number counter where normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated) is "1500", while the value of the control game number counter where special limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated) is "1445". Since the maximum number of games played (continuable period) during a pseudo bonus is "55 games" in the first gaming machine (see Figure 5), this difference takes into account the playable period during a pseudo bonus.

In other words, the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed when a predetermined restricted period of play has been played in the advantageous zone in order to prevent the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high. However, if this normal limit processing (number of games) is executed immediately after or during the start of a pseudo-bonus, for example, the player may feel distrust or a sense of loss, which may reduce their interest in the game. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special limit processing (number of games) is executed in play that is one playable period (55 games) before the play in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed, thereby preventing the pseudo-bonus from ending prematurely and causing the player to feel distrust or a sense of loss.

From this perspective, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated) is not limited to the above. For example, the special limit processing (number of games) may be executed in a game that is two consecutive periods per increased section (55 games x 2 sets = 110 games) before the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. Furthermore, for example, to provide a slight grace period, the special limit processing (number of games) may be executed in a game that is one consecutive period per increased section (55 games) + grace period (2 games) before the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. Furthermore, for example, in a case where a premonition state is passed through before transitioning to a pseudo bonus, and the maximum number of games in this premonition state is "4 games," the special limit processing (number of games) may be executed in a game that is one consecutive period per increased section (55 games) + maximum premonition period (4 games) before the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. In other words, the timing at which the special limit process (number of games) is executed (activated) can be any timing before the timing at which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed, and can be set appropriately according to individual game specifications, etc.

The special limit process (payout number) is executed when the value of the control payout number counter reaches 2126 or more (i.e., when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous period exceeds 2125). The control payout number counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, the "net increase (difference in number of medals)") when the advantageous period (including the presentation period) begins, and stops counting and is cleared (initialized) when the advantageous period ends (including when the limit process is activated). The control payout number counter counts when the number of bets is three, but does not count when the number of bets is two. The control payout number counter counts when the game is in a non-bonus state, but does not count when the game is in a 2BB or 3BB state.

In addition, when a "miss" occurs during a favorable period, the control payout counter subtracts an appropriate count value according to the actual number of medals paid out (for example, "-3 medals"). However, when a "miss" occurs during a favorable period (at least when a difference occurs from the maximum number of medals paid out), the control payout counter counts the number of medals paid out as if no "miss" (or difference) had occurred. Specifically, for example, in a game where a player bets three coins and wins "Push Order Bell A," if the hitting order is correct, the number of medals paid out (maximum value) will be "8 medals" (the difference in number is "+5 medals"); however, if the hitting order is incorrect and the pressing position is correct, the number of medals paid out will be "1 medal" (the difference in number is "-2 medals"); if the pressing position is incorrect, a miss will occur and the number of medals paid out will be "0 medals" (the difference in number is "-3 medals"); however, the control payout counter will count the difference in number of medals as "+5 medals" in either case in that game.

Furthermore, for example, if the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter becomes greater than the value of the control payout number counter due to activation of the 2BB state or 3BB state, the value of the control payout number counter is corrected to the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter. Note that the control payout number counter can also be configured in the same way as the advantageous zone payout number counter.

When the special limit process (payout amount) is executed (activated), if the pseudo-bonus is in progress (i.e., if it is in an increasing period), the pseudo-bonus will not be forcibly ended midway, but when the pseudo-bonus ends, the advantageous period will be forcibly ended accordingly, and the player will transition to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information related to the advantageous period mentioned above will also be cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if you are not in a pseudo bonus (i.e., if you are in a presentation period), you will first be forced to transition to the pseudo bonus. In other words, even if you do not win the pseudo bonus transition lottery, you will transition to the pseudo bonus by executing this special limit process (payout number). Then, when the pseudo bonus you transitioned to ends, the advantageous period will be forced to end accordingly, and you will transition to a non-advantageous period. At this time, all information related to the advantageous period described above will also be cleared (initialized).

Here, note that the value of the advantageous zone payout counter where normal limit processing (payout number) is executed (activated) is "2401", while the value of the control game number counter where special limit processing (payout number) is executed (activated) is "2126". Since the maximum number of coins that can be won during a pseudo bonus (amount of game value that can be awarded) in the first gaming machine is "275 coins" (see Figure 5), this difference takes into account the amount of game value that can be awarded during a pseudo bonus.

In other words, normal limit processing (payout number) is executed when a predetermined regulated amount of game value has been awarded in a favorable zone in order to prevent the game from becoming overly gambling-oriented. However, if this normal limit processing (payout number) is executed immediately after the start of a pseudo-bonus or during it, for example, the player may feel distrust or a sense of loss, and their interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, special limit processing (payout number) is executed when an amount of game value awarded is less than the amount of game value that would trigger normal limit processing (payout number) by the amount of game value that can be awarded per increase zone (275 coins), thereby preventing the pseudo-bonus from ending prematurely and causing the player to feel distrust or a sense of loss.

From this perspective, the timing at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed (activated) is not limited to the above. For example, the special limit process (payout number) may be executed when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed is awarded by the amount of game value that can be awarded per two increase intervals (275 coins x 2 sets = 550 coins). Furthermore, for example, to provide a slight grace period, the special limit process (number of games) may be executed when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed is awarded by the amount of game value that can be awarded per increase interval (275 coins) + the amount of game value equivalent to the grace period (8 coins). In other words, the timing at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed (activated) may be any time before the timing at which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed, and can be set appropriately depending on the individual game specifications, etc.

The semi-limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter is "1390" or greater, calculated by multiplying the value of the 1G consecutive counter (if the ceiling reduction lottery is won and the result is "ceiling reduction enabled," an additional "1" is added) by "55" (i.e., the duration for which the pseudo bonus can continue). For example, if the value of the 1G consecutive counter is "1" and the result is "ceiling reduction enabled," the latter value is "55 x 2 = 110," so the semi-limit process (number of games) will be executed (activated) when the value of the control game number counter reaches "1280."

The semi-limit process (payout number) is executed when the value of the control payout number counter is multiplied by 275 (i.e., the amount of gaming value that can be awarded for the pseudo bonus) and the result is 1851 or greater. For example, if the value of the 1G consecutive counter is 1 and "ceiling shortening" is enabled, the latter value is 275 x 2 = 550, so the semi-limit process (payout number) is executed (activated) when the value of the control payout number counter reaches 1301. Note that since the semi-limit process (number of games) and the semi-limit process (payout number) both impose the same restrictions, once one of the activation conditions is met and activated, there is no need for the other to be activated again, even if the other activation condition is met.

When the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the preparation limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (activated), the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery and ceiling shortening lottery will no longer be executed during the pseudo-bonus in the subsequent series of advantageous zones. In other words, the extension of the play period in the increase zone is suppressed. Note that the method of suppressing the extension of the play period in the increase zone is not limited to this. For example, in the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery, the probability of winning 1G consecutively may be made lower than usual, or in the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, the probability of winning ceiling shortening may be made lower than usual. In other words, the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery and ceiling shortening lottery themselves may be executed, but it may be made more difficult to win these lotteries. Also, for example, in the presentation zone after the execution of the semi-limit processing (number of games), the lottery value that will result in a winning lottery in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery may be lowered to make it more difficult to transition to the pseudo-bonus. Alternatively, the lottery value that determines a mode transition advantageous to the player in the mode transition lottery may be lowered, making it more difficult for consecutive pseudo bonuses to occur.

In addition, once the semi-limit processing (number of games) or semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (activated), special processing will be performed during the subsequent advantageous period when a "fixed role" (see (a) in Figure 7) is drawn during the performance period. Below, this special processing will be explained using the example of a case where the "fixed role" is "F_fixed cherry" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "fixed cherry").

When neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is active, if a "Definite Cherry" is drawn during the presentation period (which may be during the increase period), the "Winning Lottery (Next Game)" is determined in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (see (c) of Figure 7). Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L is a symbol that players have high expectations for, so in games where stop operation information is not announced, the general procedure is for the player to perform the stop operation on the first left stop and aim for the "Cherry" symbol (aiming for the "BAR" symbol as a guideline). Therefore, when playing using the general procedure, when a "Definite Cherry" is drawn, the "Cherry" symbol first stops on the bottom row of the left reel 3L on the first left stop. Furthermore, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, if a "confirmed cherry" is drawn, a notification may be made to the effect that the first stop on the left ("batting order 1" and "batting order 2") should be made. Furthermore, a "winning lottery (next game)" is not limited to one in which the pseudo-bonus starts from the next game, but may also be one in which the pseudo-bonus starts from the next game or later.

At this point, a skilled player will further determine whether it is a "weak che" or a "confirmed cherry" by, for example, performing a stopping operation on the center reel 3C and right reel 3R, aiming for the "BAR" symbol. As a result, the "BAR" symbol will line up in the middle row of each reel, and the player will be able to recognize that they have won a "confirmed cherry" (see, for example, "REP42" in Figure 11). On the other hand, an unskilled player may not, or may be unable to, perform a stopping operation on the center reel 3C and right reel 3R, aiming for the "BAR" symbol, and may not be able to determine whether it is a "weak che" or a "confirmed cherry" from the stop display pattern (see, for example, "REP28" in Figure 11).

In the first gaming machine, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, if a "Determined Cherry" is won and the "Determined Cherry Rep" symbol combination is displayed, a special winning sound is output. Also, if a "Determined Cherry" is won and the "Determined Cherry Rep" symbol combination is not displayed, but the "Cherry Rep" symbol combination is displayed, a special winning sound is output. The special winning sound may be output with a 100% probability, or with a predetermined probability (for example, a 50% probability).

In any case, if you win a "Confirmed Cherry" when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, a "Red 7 Align" effect will be displayed at the start of the next game, and you will be notified that a pseudo-bonus will begin, and the pseudo-bonus will begin.

On the other hand, if a "Confirmed Cherry" is drawn during the presentation period (or during the increase period) after either the semi-limit processing (number of games) or semi-limit processing (number of payouts) has been activated, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery will initially determine "Winning Lottery (Next Game)" (see (c) in Figure 7), but this determination result will be rewritten to "Winning Lottery (Current Game)" by executing special processing. Then, at the start of the current game, a "Red 7 Align" presentation will be displayed, announcing that a pseudo-bonus will begin, and the pseudo-bonus will then begin.

At this time, in the current game, the "Determined Cherry Lip" symbol combination (including the "Cherry Lip" symbol combination) is not displayed, and a notification (special notification) is made of information regarding the stop operation to display the "Middle Lip" symbol combination. For example, in the first gaming machine, a special notification is made to perform the first stop on the right ("Batting Order 5" and "Batting Order 6") (see Figure 15). As a result, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the game flow is changed to "Determined Cherry Lip" display → pseudo-bonus start from the next game. However, after either the semi-limit processing (number of games) or the semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the game flow is changed to "Middle Lip" display → pseudo-bonus start from the current game → stop operation performed in accordance with the special notification. The special notification may be controlled by the main (main control board 71) side, or it may be controlled only by the sub (sub control board 72) side, from the viewpoint that the player will not suffer any disadvantages even if the result is a transition to a pseudo bonus.

In addition, if a "Confirmed Cherry" is won after either the semi-limit processing (number of games) or semi-limit processing (number of payouts) has been activated, and the "Confirmed Cherry Rep" symbol combination is displayed despite a special notification, the special winning sound will not be output.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, if "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation procedure is generally not announced. Therefore, if the stop operation procedure is announced and the "middle replay" is displayed only when the above-mentioned special notification is made, when such a situation occurs, the player will clearly recognize that one of the semi-limit processes has been activated, which may result in a decrease in interest in the game. Therefore, during the advantageous zone, regardless of whether one of the semi-limit processes is activated (or even after one of the semi-limit processes has been activated), if "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, a notification similar to the special notification may be made with a predetermined probability. This prevents the player from feeling unnatural when a special notification is made. Furthermore, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, a notification similar to the special notification may also be made when the pseudo bonus transition lottery is won. In this case, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the pseudo bonus transition lottery may determine a "win (current game)" with a predetermined probability.

So far, we have used the example of monitoring the play period in the advantageous zone using the "number of games" and "number of payouts" to activate the normal limit process, special limit process, and semi-limit process, but the conditions for executing each limit process are not limited to those described above and can be changed as appropriate. For example, when each limit process is executed, the value of the advantageous zone game count counter, the value of the advantageous zone payout counter, the value of the control game count counter, the value of the control payout counter, the value of the 1G consecutive counter, and whether or not the ceiling is shortened (i.e., variables for activating the semi-limit process) can be changed as appropriate depending on the game specifications, market trends, etc.

Furthermore, the method for monitoring the play period in the advantageous zone is not limited to the above. For example, if the "number of navigations" is used to monitor the play period in the advantageous zone, normal limit processing (number of navigations), special limit processing (number of navigations), or semi-limit processing (number of navigations) can be executed in the same manner as above. In other words, any element (parameter) whose value can be counted can be used to monitor the play period in the advantageous zone, and by specifying the value at which normal limit processing is executed, the value at which special limit processing is executed, and the value at which semi-limit processing is executed for the element used, each limit processing can be executed in the same manner as above.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, advantageous states (e.g., pseudo bonuses) and specific states (e.g., presentation zones) are controlled as a series of advantageous zones, and when the play period in this series of advantageous zones reaches a predetermined period (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone game count counter is 1500 or greater), or when the amount of play value awarded in this series of advantageous zones reaches a predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone payout counter is 2401 or greater), this series of advantageous zones is forcibly terminated. However, when the play period in this series of advantageous zones reaches a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (e.g., the value of the control game count counter is 1445 or greater), or when the amount of play value awarded in this series of advantageous zones reaches a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the control payout counter is 2126 or greater), if the advantageous state exists, the series of advantageous zones is terminated when transitioning to the specific state.

In other words, with the first gaming machine, a series of advantageous periods are not forcibly ended in the middle of an advantageous state, but rather can be ended within a certain period in a natural flow that accompanies the end of an advantageous state. This prevents excessive gambling while also preventing players from feeling distrust or a sense of loss, making it possible to take into consideration the emotions of players.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, advantageous states (e.g., pseudo bonuses) and specific states (e.g., presentation zones) are controlled as a series of advantageous zones, and when the play period in this series of advantageous zones reaches a predetermined period (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone game count counter is 1500 or greater), or when the amount of game value awarded in this series of advantageous zones reaches a predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone payout counter is 2401 or greater), this series of advantageous zones is forcibly terminated. However, when the play period in this series of advantageous zones reaches a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (e.g., the value of the control game count counter is 1445 or greater), or when the amount of game value awarded in this series of advantageous zones reaches a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (e.g., the value of the control payout counter is 2126 or greater), if the advantageous state is not reached, a transition to the advantageous state is made, and when the transition to the advantageous state ends and a transition to the specific state is made, the series of advantageous zones is terminated.

In other words, with the first gaming machine, a series of advantageous periods is not forcibly ended in the middle of an advantageous state, but rather can be ended within a certain period of time in a natural flow following the end of an advantageous state. Furthermore, when ending a series of advantageous periods in this way, if the advantageous state is not yet reached, the system transitions the player to an advantageous state before ending the period. This prevents excessive gambling while also preventing the player from feeling distrust or a sense of loss, making it possible to take the player's emotions into consideration.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the specific period or specific amount is set taking into consideration the duration for which an advantageous state can continue (e.g., "55 games") or the amount of gaming value that can be awarded (e.g., "275 coins"), thereby preventing excessive restrictions on the amount of gaming value awarded to a player while still taking into consideration the player's feelings.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state may be extended by granted rights (e.g., "1G consecutive stock" and "ceiling shortening"), but when the play period in a series of advantageous zones is shorter than the specific period and becomes a special period set according to the number of granted rights (e.g., when the value of the control game number counter reaches a value at which semi-limit processing (number of games) is executed), or when the amount of game value granted in a series of advantageous zones is less than the specific amount and becomes a special amount set according to the number of granted rights (e.g., when the value of the control payout number counter reaches a value at which semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is executed), the granting of rights is suppressed in the series of subsequent advantageous zones. This prevents, for example, a player from being granted more rights than they can consume, which would force the series of advantageous zones to end, causing the player to feel distrust or a sense of loss. This makes it possible to prevent excessive gambling while also taking into consideration the player's emotions.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, when calculating the above-mentioned "specific amount" and "special amount," even if a difference occurs between the amount of game value that should have been awarded and the amount of game value that has actually been awarded due to, for example, a player's operational error or ignoring instructions, this difference is not taken into consideration and calculation is performed based on the amount of game value that should have been awarded. This prevents a series of advantageous periods from being extended more than necessary due to such player behavior, and prevents unfairness from arising between players who have engaged in such behavior and those who have not, making it possible to prevent excessive gambling while also taking into consideration the feelings of players.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a fixed combination (e.g., a "fixed cherry") that confirms a transition to an advantageous state is won while the granting of rights is suppressed (e.g., after the semi-limit processing has been activated), a special notification is issued to prevent the display of a special symbol combination (e.g., a "fixed cherry rep") that clearly indicates the winning of this fixed combination. This prevents the player from feeling, for example, that the winning of the fixed combination was a wasted win. In other words, by not allowing the player to clearly recognize the trigger that initiated the advantageous state while the granting of rights is suppressed, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling while also taking into consideration the player's emotions. Note that any presentation execution means may be used to issue the special notification.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, when a special notification is issued, the advantageous state that would have started in the next game is started in the current game. This allows the player to perform the stopping operation in accordance with the special notification in a natural flow, preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable even when such a special notification is issued.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when the granting of rights is not suppressed and a fixed combination is won and a special symbol combination is displayed, a special notification (for example, output of a special winning sound) can be made. However, when the granting of rights is suppressed and a fixed combination is won and a special symbol combination is displayed, a special notification cannot be made. This prevents the player from feeling that winning the fixed combination was a wasted win, for example. In other words, by not allowing the player to clearly recognize the trigger that initiated the advantageous state when the granting of rights is suppressed, it is possible to prevent excessive gambling while also taking into consideration the player's emotions. Note that any effect execution means may be used to make the special notification.

In addition, the first gaming machine determines whether or not to issue a special notification depending on whether or not a fixed combination has been drawn, whether or not a special symbol combination has been displayed, and whether or not a special notification has been issued. This allows for more appropriate management of the circumstances under which a special notification is issued.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous zone game number counter and advantageous zone payout number counter count regardless of the amount of gaming value bet, making it possible to execute normal limit processing (number of games) and normal limit processing (number of payouts) not only when three coins are bet but also when two coins are bet.

Furthermore, in the first gaming machine, the control game number counter and control payout number counter count when three coins are bet, but do not count when two coins are bet. Therefore, when three coins are bet, it is possible to execute special limit processing (number of games) and special limit processing (number of payouts), but when two coins are bet, it is not possible to execute special limit processing (number of games) and special limit processing (number of payouts). Therefore, when two coins are bet, the execution of normal limit processing (number of games) or normal limit processing (number of payouts) may force the end of a series of advantageous periods, even during a pseudo bonus.

In the first gaming machine, for example, the probability of winning a minor prize and the number of medals paid out differ between the three-coin bet state and the two-coin bet state (see Figures 10 to 15), making it more disadvantageous to the player when playing in the two-coin bet state than when playing in the three-coin bet state. However, this is not the only way to make playing in the two-coin bet state more disadvantageous to the player. For example, if playing in the two-coin bet state during a pseudo bonus, the system may be configured to put the player at a disadvantage by not announcing the stop operation procedure.

In this way, in the first gaming machine, when a first amount of gaming value (e.g., "3 coins") is bet and play is performed, a series of advantageous periods is not forcibly ended in the middle of an advantageous state, and it is possible for a series of advantageous periods to end within a certain period in a natural flow following the end of an advantageous state. This prevents excessive gambling while also preventing the player from feeling distrust or a sense of loss, making it possible to take the player's emotions into consideration. On the other hand, when a second amount of gaming value (e.g., "2 coins") is bet and play is performed, a series of advantageous periods may be forcibly ended in the middle of an advantageous state, which makes the player realize that they did not play in the intended way and encourages the player to play in the intended way.

In addition, in a series of advantageous zones, betting a second amount of game value and playing is more disadvantageous to the player than betting a first amount of game value and playing. Therefore, by making such a warning possible, it is possible to encourage the player to play in a more advantageous state, and to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game due to playing in a way that the player did not intend.

[5-5. Storage Area Configuration of First Gaming Machine]
Next, the storage area configuration of the first gaming machine will be described with reference to Figures 17 to 22. Figure 17 is a diagram showing an example of a winning flag storage area, a winning activation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, Figure 18 is a diagram showing an example of a carryover role storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, Figure 19 is a diagram showing an example of a game status flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, Figure 20 is a diagram showing an example of a mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, Figure 21 is a diagram showing an example of an activation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, Figure 22 is a diagram showing an example of a press order storage area of the first gaming machine.

(Winning flag storage area, winning activation flag storage area, and symbol code storage area)
First, the configuration of the winning flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area), the winning activation flag storage area (display combination storage area), and the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 17. In the first gaming machine, the winning flag storage area, the winning activation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area have the same data configuration.

Each of the above-mentioned storage areas consists of storage areas 1 to 26, each represented by one byte of data. Note that the data stored in each storage area is only the one byte of data in the "Data" column in Figure 17, but for ease of explanation, Figure 17 also lists the "combination" (in Figure 17, the symbols on reel 3L, reel 3C, and reel 3R are listed in that order) indicating the symbol combination associated with the bit of each storage area, as well as its contents (see Figures 11 to 14).

The data stored in the winning flag storage area is used by the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination (i.e., the type of symbol combination permitted to be displayed in the current game). For example, if 2BB is won in the current game (if it is carried over), a "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

The data stored in the winning activation flag storage area is used by the main CPU 101 to enable it to identify the type of symbol combination corresponding to the displayed role (i.e., the type of symbol combination displayed on the pay line in the current game). For example, if a symbol combination corresponding to 2BB is displayed on the pay line in the current game, a "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

The data stored in the symbol code storage area is used by the main CPU 101 to identify the types of symbol combinations that can still be displayed on an active line in the current game while at least one of the reels is spinning. For example, if a symbol combination related to 2BB can still be displayed on an active line while at least one of the reels is spinning in the current game, a "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1.

(Carryover role storage area)
Next, the configuration of the carryover combination storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 18. The carryover combination storage area is configured as a storage area represented by 1-byte data.

When the internal lottery process determines that the bonus role of "F_2BB" (2BB) or "F_3BB" (3BB) is the internal winning role, these bonus roles are stored in the carryover role storage area as carryover roles (a "1" is stored in the corresponding bit). The carryover role stored in the carryover role storage area is retained and not cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on an active line. Also, while a carryover role is stored in the carryover role storage area, in addition to the internal winning role (minor role/replay role) determined by the internal lottery process, the carryover role (bonus role) is stored in the winning flag storage area.

(Game status flag storage area)
Next, the configuration of the game status flag storage area will be described with reference to Figure 19. The game status flag storage area is a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. For example, if the current game status is 2BB, a "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area.

Note that the first gaming machine does not have an RT state, and therefore the gaming state flag storage area shown in FIG. 19 does not have an area indicating the type of RT state. However, if an RT state is provided, for example, a "1" is stored in the bit of the storage area corresponding to the current RT state. Note that in the first gaming machine, data indicating the type of gaming state (mode) in the advantageous zone is stored separately in a mode flag storage area, which will be described later, but it can also be stored and managed in this gaming state flag storage area. The same applies to the gaming zones of non-advantageous zones and advantageous zones. A beneficial zone flag storage area (not shown) can be provided for management, or data can be stored and managed in this gaming state flag storage area. The same applies to gaming states such as the AT state and ART state. An AT state (ART state) flag storage area (not shown) can be provided for management, or data can be stored and managed in this gaming state flag storage area.

(Mode flag storage area)
Next, the configuration of the mode flag storage area will be described with reference to Figure 20. The mode flag storage area is composed of storage area 1 and storage area 2, each represented by 1 byte of data. For example, if the current mode is start mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1. Also, if the current mode is heaven A mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 2. Note that in the first gaming machine, the pseudo bonus state is also managed as one of the modes.

(Operation stop button storage area)
Next, the configuration of the activated stop button storage area will be described with reference to Figure 21. The activated stop button storage area is a storage area represented by 1 byte of data. Bits 0 to 2 of the activated stop button storage area store data indicating the type of stop button that has already been operated (the type of reel that has stopped), and bits 4 to 6 store data indicating the type of stop button that has not yet been operated (the type of reel that is currently spinning).

For example, if the stop button 8L is the stop button that was pressed this time, i.e., the activated stop button, then a "1" is stored in bit 0 of the activated stop button storage area. Also, for example, if the stop button 8L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, i.e., a valid stop button, then a "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 101 distinguishes between the stop button that was pressed this time and a stop button that has not yet been pressed based on the data stored in the activated stop button storage area.

(Press order storage area)
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to Fig. 22. The pressing order storage area is configured as a storage area represented by 1-byte data. The pressing order indicates the order in which the stop buttons were pressed, i.e., the pressing order (batting order).

For example, when all reels are spinning, a "1" is stored in bits 0 to 5 of the press order storage area. Next, when stop button 8L is pressed (because it is the first "left" stop), bits 0 and 1 remain "1", but bits 2 to 5 are changed to "0". Next, when stop button 8C is pressed (because it is the first "left" stop and the second "center" stop), bit 0 remains "1", but bit 1 is changed to "0". The main CPU 101 identifies the press order for the current game based on the data stored in the press order storage area.

[6. Processing by the main control circuit]
23 to 32, the contents of the various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 using each program will be described. Note that in the description of the various processes shown below, a specific example of the process contents may be explained using the specifications of the first gaming machine, but the process contents of the various processes shown below are not limited to this.

[6-1. Main Processing]
First, the main processing (main operation processing) executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 23. Fig. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing. Fig. 23 also shows the power-on processing that is executed prior to the start of the main processing.

First, when power is supplied to the pachislot machine 1 (when the power is turned on), the main CPU 101 performs power-on processing (S1). This processing involves various processes required when the power is turned on. Details of the power-on processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing at the end of one game (S2). In this processing, data in a designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area from which data must be erased for each unit game, such as a winning flag storage area or a prize activation flag storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs medal acceptance and start check processing (S3). During this processing, it checks the input status of, for example, the medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, and start switch 7S, and performs various processing required at the start of play. Details of the medal acceptance and start check processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number value acquisition process (S4). In this process, it extracts random numbers for internal lotteries (e.g., a range of 0 to 65535) and random numbers for effects (random numbers for other lotteries) used in various gameplay-related lotteries (e.g., a range of 0 to 65535 or a range of 0 to 255), and stores the extracted random numbers in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the manner in which the various random numbers are acquired is not limited to the above. It is possible to acquire the required number of random numbers from predetermined numerical ranges (e.g., a range of 0 to 65535, a range of 0 to 32767, a range of 0 to 255, or a range of 0 to 127, etc.).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs internal lottery processing (S5). This processing involves various processes required to determine the internal winning combination based on the internal lottery table and internal lottery random number value corresponding to the current game state, etc. Details of the internal lottery processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs game start state control processing (S6). In this processing, when game play starts, if a transition condition for each game state is met (for example, based on a determined internal lottery combination, etc.), the main CPU 101 performs various processes necessary to transition the game state in accordance with the transition condition that has been met, or to manage the play period of the current game state. Details of the game start state control processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a start command generation and storage process (S7). In this process, start command data to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see S204 in Figure 32) described below. The methods for generating, storing, and transmitting data for other commands are also basically the same.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs main-side effect control processing at the start of game (S8). In this processing, if various effects are to be performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 (main side) when game play begins, various processes necessary to perform those effects are performed. For example, if a lock effect is to be performed at the start of game play, the execution of that lock effect is controlled. Furthermore, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of that pseudo game (or notifications related to the pseudo game) is controlled. Furthermore, for example, if the AT state is active and information on a stop operation is to be notified by the instruction monitor, the notification mode is controlled. Furthermore, although details are omitted, if a lock effect is to be performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed during this processing.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop initialization processing (S9). In this processing, various information necessary for stop control, such as the type of stop table and the type of draw priority table to be used in the current game, is set based on the internal winning combination, game status, etc.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel spin start processing (S10). This processing requests that all reels start spinning. Once all reels have been requested to start spinning, the reel control processing (see S203 in Figure 32), described below, controls the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, and 51R, and each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R starts spinning. Once each reel has started spinning, it is accelerated until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then this constant speed is maintained. Also, although details are omitted, this processing involves the generation and storage of a reel spin start command.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a draw priority order storage process (S11). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) on the spinning reel (all reels in this case), data indicating the draw priority order is obtained by referencing the set internal winning combination and the set draw priority order table, and stored in a draw priority order data storage area (not shown). Although not shown, the symbol code storage process, described below, is performed prior to this process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop control processing (S12). In this processing, various processes are performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the determined internal winning combination (or information related to various stop control settings set accordingly) and the stop operation mode of each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R. Details of the reel stop control processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a win activation determination process (S13). In this process, it determines whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is one of the combinations defined in the symbol combination table. For example, it determines whether there is a bit in which a "1" is stored in the win activation flag storage area. Also, although details are omitted, this process involves the win activation command generation and storage process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs medal payout/replay activation processing (S14). In this processing, if the symbol combination determined in the above-mentioned winning activation determination processing is a symbol combination related to a minor role, the corresponding number of medals is paid out. If the symbol combination is a symbol combination related to a replay role, various processing steps are performed to activate replay in the next game. Note that, for example, if the symbol combination determined in the above-mentioned winning activation determination processing is a symbol combination related to a replay role, a process is performed to set a value equal to the number of bets in the current game in the automatic medal counter described below. Also, in this processing, a medal payout signal corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs end-of-game state control processing (S15). In this processing, when the game ends, if a transition condition is met for each game state (for example, based on the combination of displayed symbols), various processes are performed to transition the game state in accordance with the transition condition that has been met, or to manage the play period of the current game state. Details of the end-of-game state control processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs main-side effect control processing at the end of game play (S16). In this processing, if various effects are to be performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side) when game play ends, various processes necessary to perform those effects are performed. For example, if a lock effect is to be performed at the end of game play, the execution of that lock effect is controlled. Furthermore, if this includes a pseudo game, the progress of that pseudo game (or notifications related to the pseudo game) is controlled. Furthermore, although details are omitted, if a lock effect is to be performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed during this processing.

In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, one unit game is controlled by performing the above-mentioned processes S2 to S16, and the progress of the game is controlled by repeating these processes. Note that the machine can be configured to perform processes other than these as needed, or to not perform some of these processes. In other words, the various processes described above are merely examples.

(Power-on processing)
Next, the power-on process performed in S1 of the main process will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a power-on initialization process (not shown), then performs a write test on the main RAM 103, and determines whether the write to the main RAM 103 was successful (S21). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 103.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the writing to the main RAM 103 was successful (YES in S21), it determines whether the setting key switch 52 is in the ON state (S22). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting can be changed.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch 52 is in the on state (YES in S22), it performs initialization processing when the setting is changed (S23). In this processing, data in a designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area from which data needs to be erased when the setting is changed, such as a carryover role storage area, a game status flag storage area, or a mode flag storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization command generation and storage process (S24). In this process, initialization command data indicating that the setting change process has started is generated and sent to the sub-control circuit 200, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change process (S25). In this process, by accepting the setting value determination operation or setting value confirmation operation described above, the main RAM 103 is initialized, and then the new setting value is set (stored) in the setting value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting key switch 52 has been turned off (S26). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the state in which the setting can be changed has ended after the new setting value was set.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch 52 is not in the OFF state (NO in S26), it waits until the setting key switch 52 is turned OFF. On the other hand, if it determines that the setting key switch 52 is turned OFF (YES in S26), it performs an initialization command generation and storage process (S27). In this process, it generates initialization command data to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200, indicating that the setting change process has ended, and stores the generated data in the communication data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S22 that the setting key switch 52 is not in the on state (NO in S22), it determines whether the backup data is normal (S28). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the various information backed up when the power supply to the pachislot machine 1 was cut off (power outage) is normal.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the backup data is normal (YES in S28), it performs a game return process (S29). This process returns the pachislot machine 1 to the state it was in before the power was cut off. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S21 that writing to the main RAM 103 was not performed normally (NO in S21), or if it determines in S28 that the backup data is not normal (NO in S28), it performs power-on error processing (S30). Note that errors that occur as a result of this power-on error processing are not resolved by the reset operation described above, but are resolved when a new setting value is set. Therefore, after power-on error processing, the main CPU 101 turns off the power to the pachislot machine 1, and then does not proceed to normal processing (S2 onwards in Figure 23) until a new setting value is set (until the processing of S22 to S26 described above is performed).

(Medal reception and start check processing)
Next, the medal acceptance and start check process performed in S3 of the main process will be described with reference to Fig. 25. Fig. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the medal acceptance and start check process procedure.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (S41). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether a replay role was won in the previous unit game (whether a replay was activated).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (NO in S41), it performs automatic insertion processing (S42). In this processing, the same number of medals as were inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted. Furthermore, although details are omitted, if automatic insertion is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage processing is performed in this processing. Also, in this processing, a medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S41 that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (YES in S41), or after processing S42, it performs auxiliary medal storage switch check processing (S43). In this processing, it determines whether the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S is in the ON state (i.e., whether a certain number of medals or more are stored in the auxiliary medal storage 33), and if it determines that the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S is in the ON state, it generates an auxiliary medal storage error. In this case, processing waits until the error is resolved. If it determines that the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S is not in the ON state, this processing ends.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion status check process (S44). In this process, the current number of bets and credits is checked, and it is also determined whether medal acceptance is prohibited or a selector error has occurred. If medal acceptance is possible, the state becomes one in which medal acceptance is possible (a state in which betting operations can be accepted) (medal acceptance is permitted). Note that if a selector error has occurred, processing will wait until the error is resolved.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the machine is ready to accept medals (S45). If the main CPU 101 determines that the machine is ready to accept medals (YES in S45), it performs a medal insertion check process (S46). In this process, the number of bets and the number of credits are updated based on the detection results of the medal sensor 31S and the bet switch 6S. Furthermore, although details are omitted, if a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage process is performed in this process. Furthermore, in this process, a medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is possible to insert medals or to deposit credits (S47). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is "50". If the main CPU 101 determines that it is not possible to insert medals or deposit credits (that is, the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is "50") (NO in S49), it prohibits the acceptance of medals (S48). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the state to one in which it is not possible to accept medals (a state in which betting operations are not acceptable).

If the main CPU 101 determines in S45 that the machine is not in a state where medals can be accepted (NO in S45), if it determines in S47 that medals can be inserted or credits can be deposited (YES in S47), or after processing S48, it determines whether the number of inserted medals is the number required to start playing (S49). In the case of the first gaming machine, this process determines, for example, whether the current number of bets is "2" or "3."

If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of inserted coins is the number required to start playing (YES in S49), it determines whether the start switch 7S is in the ON state (S50). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the player has performed a start operation.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 7S has been turned on (YES in S50), it prohibits the acceptance of medals (S51). After this process, the main CPU 101 then ends the medal acceptance/start check process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S49 that the number of inserted coins is not the number required to start playing (NO in S49), or if it determines in S50 that the start switch 7S is not in the ON state (NO in S50), it returns the process to S44.

(Internal lottery processing)
Next, the internal lottery process performed in S5 of the main process will be described with reference to Fig. 26. Fig. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a process to check the setting value and the number of inserted medals (S61). In this process, the setting value and the number of bets for the current unit game are checked. Next, the main CPU 101 sets an internal lottery table according to the setting value, the number of bets, the game status, etc. (S62). Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value for the internal lottery from the random number value storage area (S63). That is, the main CPU 101 acquires the data of the random number value for the internal lottery acquired in S4 of the main process described above. Note that if this process determines that the setting value is other than "1" to "6" or the number of bets is other than "1" to "3," the main CPU 101 determines that a serious error has occurred and executes the power-on error process described above (see S30 in FIG. 24).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an internal winning combination determination process (S64). In this process, the acquired internal lottery random number value is sequentially updated (e.g., added and updated) using the lottery values for each internal winning combination defined in the set internal lottery table, and it is determined whether the updated result is a predetermined result (e.g., whether an overflow has occurred). If a predetermined result is achieved, that internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination for this unit game. Note that if the predetermined result is not achieved even after determining all internal winning combinations, the result of this unit game will be a "loss" (a "loss" is determined as the internal winning combination).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether an internal winning combination has been determined (S65). If the main CPU 101 determines that an internal winning combination has not been determined (NO in S65), the process returns to S64. That is, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the internal winning combinations to be determined (sequentially updates the random number values for the internal lottery), and repeats the process of S64 until determinations have been made for all internal winning combinations (or until an internal winning combination is determined halfway through).

When the main CPU 101 determines that an internal winning role has been determined (YES in S65), it determines whether the determined internal winning role is a role that is not eligible for carryover (i.e., whether it is a minor role or a replay role, rather than a bonus role that is a carryover role) (S66). When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning role is a role that is not eligible for carryover (YES in S66), it updates the winning flag storage area (S67). In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the data in the winning flag storage area based on the internal winning role determined in the process of S64. In other words, the main CPU 101 stores a "1" in the bit in the data in the winning flag storage area that corresponds to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed in accordance with the determined internal winning role.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S66 that the determined internal winning combination is not a combination that is not eligible for carryover (NO in S66), or after processing S67, it determines whether the determined internal winning combination is eligible for carryover (i.e., whether it is a bonus combination that is a carryover combination) (S68).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is a carryover target combination (YES in S68), it determines whether the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (S69). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether any bonus combinations have yet been carried over. When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (YES in S69), it updates the carryover combination storage area (S70). In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the data in the carryover combination storage area based on the internal winning combination determined in the process of S64. That is, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the data in the carryover combination storage area that corresponds to the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed in accordance with the determined internal winning combination.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S68 that the determined internal winning combination is not a carryover eligible combination (NO in S68), if it determines in S69 that the data in the carryover combination storage area is not "0" (NO in S69), or after processing S70, it again determines whether the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (S71).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover role storage area is not "0" (NO in S71), it updates the winning flag storage area (S72). In this process, the data stored in the carryover role storage area is reflected in the data in the winning flag storage area. In other words, when a bonus role is carried over (or a win has been won in the current unit game), the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit in the winning flag storage area for the data corresponding to the combination of symbols that is permitted to be displayed in accordance with the bonus role.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S71 that the data in the carryover role storage area is "0" (YES in S71), or after processing S72, it performs a sub-flag setting process (S73). In the case of the first gaming machine, this process may set, for example, a non-advantageous zone sub-flag or an advantageous zone winning sub-flag based on the internal winning role. This process may also set information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor when in the AT state. After this process, the main CPU 101 terminates the internal lottery process.

(Game start state control process)
Next, the game start state control process performed in S6 of the main process will be described with reference to Fig. 27. Fig. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game start state control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition satisfaction check process (S81). In this process, when game play begins, a check is made to see if a transition condition for transitioning from one game state to another has been satisfied. For example, if a transition to a flag interval as a specified RT state is made based on winning a specified bonus role, this process checks whether the specified bonus role has been won. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, the flag interval is not configured as an RT state (i.e., as a game state stored in the game state flag storage area), so this check is unnecessary. Furthermore, for example, if there is a specific RT state that starts or ends when a specific number of games are played after a specific transition condition is satisfied, this specific number of games can also be managed in this process.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a transition condition for transitioning to one of the game states has been met (S82). If the main CPU 101 determines that a transition condition for transitioning to one of the game states has been met (YES in S82), it updates the game state flag storage area (S83). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the game state according to the transition condition that has been met. Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set game state (S84). In this processing, if it is necessary to set the game period for that game state or to set lottery values (lottery tables) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process in response to the transition to the game state, such setting processing is performed as appropriate.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S82 that the transition condition for transitioning to one of the gaming states has not been met (NO in S82), and after processing S84, it determines whether the current gaming zone is a non-favorable zone (S85). If the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming zone is a non-favorable zone (YES in S85), it performs a favorable zone start condition fulfillment check process (S86). In this process, when starting play, it checks whether the transition condition for transitioning from a non-favorable zone to a favorable zone (favorable zone start condition) has been met. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process, for example, involves conducting the above-mentioned favorable zone transition lottery and checking whether the lottery result will start the favorable zone.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have been met (S87). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have not been met (NO in S87), it terminates the game start state control process. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have been met (YES in S87), it performs setting processing for the start of the advantageous zone (S88). That is, the main CPU 101 starts (sets) the advantageous zone. In this processing, in response to the start of the advantageous zone, it appropriately performs setting processing such as starting counting of various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processing (i.e., starting monitoring of the game period for the series of advantageous zones).

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S89). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the advantageous zone that has started. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process sets the destination mode determined in accordance with the results of the advantageous zone transition lottery described above, for example.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S90). In this processing, if it is necessary to set the play period (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) for the set mode or to set lottery values (lottery tables) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this processing, for example, according to the set destination mode, sets the play period to "55 games" when transitioning to a pseudo bonus, sets the play period to "32 games" when transitioning to an end mode, and sets the corresponding ceiling number of games when transitioning to any other mode. Also, lottery values (lottery tables) for various lotteries (see Figures 7 and 8, etc.) are set. After this processing, the main CPU 101 terminates the game start state control processing.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S85 that the current play zone is not a non-favorable zone (i.e., it is a favorable zone) (NO in S85), it performs processing at the start of play during the favorable zone (S91). Details of the processing at the start of play during the favorable zone will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process to check whether the advantageous zone end condition has been met (S92). In this process, when game play begins, a check is made to see whether the transition condition for transitioning from the advantageous zone to the non-advantageous zone (the advantageous zone end condition) has been met. In the case of the first gaming machine, this process checks, for example, whether the activation conditions for various limit processes have been met based on the number of games played in the advantageous zone (see FIG. 16), or whether 32 games have elapsed if the current mode is the end mode.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for ending the advantageous zone have been met (S93). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous zone have been met (YES in S93), it performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous zone (S94). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous zone and sets a non-advantageous zone. In this processing, in response to the end of the advantageous zone, initialization processing is performed to clear all information (i.e., information related to the advantageous zone) such as various counters related to various limit processes (see FIG. 16), the mode (game state) during the advantageous zone, and the play period of that mode (including the ceiling game number, etc.). Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control processing. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous zone have not been met (NO in S93), it ends the game start state control processing.

(Processing at the start of play during advantageous zone)
Next, the game start processing during the advantageous period performed in S91 of the game start state control processing described above will be described with reference to Fig. 28. Fig. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the game start processing during the advantageous period.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter update processing (at the start of play) (S101). In this processing, for example, various counters related to various limit processing based on the number of games played in the advantageous zone (see FIG. 16), various counters that manage the play period such as various modes (play states) during the advantageous zone, or various counters that manage other advantageous degrees are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, subtracting (adding) 1 per game).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a specific mode (AT state) is in progress (S102). If the main CPU 101 determines that a specific mode is in progress (YES in S102), it performs AT period management processing (at the start of play) (S103). In this processing, for example, if it is possible to extend the AT state play period (e.g., by extending the number of games or adding more sets) at the start of play, it determines whether the conditions for such an extension are met and performs processing such as extending the play period based on the results of this determination (if it is possible to shorten the AT state play period, processing related to the shortening is performed). Furthermore, this processing may manage the AT state play period regardless of whether it is extended, or the AT state play period may be managed in the processing of S101 described above, with only processing related to the extension being performed in this processing. In the case of the first gaming machine, this process involves, for example, conducting the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is selected, conducting a 1G consecutive lottery, and then processing to extend the pseudo bonus according to the results of this lottery.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a navigation setting process (S104). This process sets information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor and information corresponding to the stop operation information to be included in the start command. Note that this process may also be able to determine whether or not to generate a navigation. In other words, when a role to be notified is drawn in the AT state, a navigation may not necessarily occur, and whether or not a navigation will occur in this process may be determined according to predetermined conditions (for example, the type of role to be notified or a predetermined probability of a navigation occurring).

If the main CPU 101 determines in S102 that the specific mode is not in effect (NO in S102), or after S104, it determines whether the mode transition condition is met (S105). In the case of the first gaming machine, this process determines whether the transition mode has been determined in accordance with the results of the mode transition lottery described above, which is based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is selected.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition has been met (YES in S105), it updates the mode flag storage area (S106). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) within the advantageous zone to which the player has transitioned. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process sets the transition destination mode determined, for example, in accordance with the results of the mode transition lottery described above based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is selected.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S107). In this processing, if it is necessary to set the play period for that mode (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) or set lottery values (lottery tables) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, depending on the set mode, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this processing is similar to the processing of S90 described above, for example. Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the start of play during the advantageous period. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition has not been met (NO in S105), it ends the processing at the start of play during the advantageous period.

The state control process at the start of play shown in Figure 27 and the state control process at the end of play shown in Figure 30, as well as the process at the start of play during a favorable period shown in Figure 28 and the process at the end of play during a favorable period shown in Figure 31, are basically configured in almost the same way. This means that processes that can be performed either when play starts or when play ends (for example, processes that reference a determined internal lottery role, such as changing the game state or mode, but the processing results only need to be reflected by the time the current game ends (or the start of the next game)) can be performed in either order, and does not mean that similar processes are performed in both orders. Therefore, such processes may be performed either when play starts or when play ends.

In contrast, processing that needs to be performed when game play begins (for example, the navigation setting processing described above) can be performed when game play begins, and processing that needs to be performed when game play ends (for example, processing that references the combination of displayed symbols) can be performed when game play ends. Furthermore, processing that needs to be performed at a predetermined time after game play begins but before game play ends, or processing that is better performed (for example, processing that references the stop operation mode of the first stop operation), can be performed at that time.

(Reel stop control process)
Next, the reel stop control process performed in S12 of the main process will be described with reference to Fig. 29. Fig. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether the rotation speed of all reels has reached a predetermined constant speed (e.g., 80 rotations per minute) (i.e., whether they are rotating at a constant speed) (S111). If the main CPU 101 determines that all reels are not rotating at a constant speed (NO in S111), it waits until all reels are rotating at a constant speed. On the other hand, if it determines that all reels are rotating at a constant speed (YES in S111), it allows each reel to stop (S112). In other words, the main CPU 101 enables each stop button. Accordingly, the activated stop button storage area is updated (in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, bits 4 to 6 of the activated stop button storage area are set to "1").

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a valid stop button has been operated (S113). If the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has not been operated (NO in S113), the processing waits until a valid stop button is operated. Note that if automatic stop control is to be performed, this waiting time can be measured, and the automatic stop control can be performed when the measurement result reaches a predetermined time.

When the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has been operated (YES in S113), it updates the activated stop button storage area and the press sequence storage area (S114). In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, when the first stop operation is performed on reel 3L (when stop button 8L is pressed), this process stores a "1" in bit 0 of the activated stop button storage area and updates bit 4 to "0." Additionally, bits 2 to 5 of the press sequence storage area are updated to "0."

Next, the main CPU 101 determines the reel to be controlled based on the activated stop button (S115). In this process, for example, if stop button 8L is pressed, reel 3L is determined to be the reel to be controlled.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position from the symbol counter (S116). The symbol counter is configured as a counter for tracking symbol position data (e.g., "0" to "19"). In this process, for example, if the stop button 8L is pressed, the symbol position data of the middle area of reel 3L at the time the stop button 8L was pressed is stored as the stop start position.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sliding symbol count determination process (S117). In this process, the most appropriate number of sliding symbols (the amount of symbol movement) is determined, for example, by referencing the number of sliding symbols specified in the stop table described above and the data in the pull-in priority data storage area described above.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the planned stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols (S118). In this process, the stop start position stored in the process of S116 described above and the symbol position data of the position where the symbol will ultimately stop based on the number of sliding symbols determined in the process of S117 described above are stored as the planned stop position.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop command generation and storage process (S119). In this process, data for the reel stop command to be sent to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Note that the reel stop command can be configured to include parameters that can specify not only the intended stop position, but also the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol code storage process (S120). In this process, the symbol code storage area is updated while also referencing the type of symbol (symbol code) at the intended stop position for reels whose intended stop positions have already been determined. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is an active stop button (S121). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there are any reels that are still spinning (whether or not a stop operation has been performed on all reels).

If the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button is present (YES in S121), it performs a control change process (S122). In this process, if it is necessary to change the stop table or pull priority table set in the reel stop initial setting process described above, for example, depending on the player's stop operation behavior up to this point, the various information required for such stop control is reset.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a draw priority storage process (S123). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) on the spinning reel, the main CPU 101 references the set internal winning combination and the set draw priority table, while also referencing the type of symbol at the planned stop position on reels whose planned stop positions have already been determined, to obtain data indicating the draw priority, and stores this in the draw priority data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 then returns the process to S113. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that there is no valid stop button (NO in S121), it terminates the reel stop control process.

(Game End State Control Processing)
Next, the game end state control process performed in S15 of the main process will be described with reference to Fig. 30. Fig. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game end state control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition fulfillment check process (S131). In this process, when game play ends, a check is made to see if a transition condition for transitioning from one game state to another has been fulfilled. For example, if a transition to a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state is to be made based on the display of a predetermined symbol combination, this process checks whether the predetermined symbol combination has been displayed. Furthermore, if the game is in the predetermined RT state or the predetermined bonus state, this process checks whether the termination conditions for these game states have been fulfilled. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process checks, for example, whether a symbol combination related to 2BB or 3BB has been displayed. Furthermore, if the game is in the 2BB state or the 3BB state, a check is made to see whether the termination conditions for these game states have been fulfilled by the payout of medals.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a transition condition for transitioning to one of the game states has been met (S132). If the main CPU 101 determines that a transition condition for transitioning to one of the game states has been met (YES in S132), it updates the game state flag storage area (S133). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the game state according to the transition condition that has been met. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, if a symbol combination related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed, a "1" is stored in bit 0 or bit 1 of the game state flag storage area, and the 2BB state or 3BB state is set. Also, for example, if the game state is in the 2BB state or 3BB state and the termination condition for these game states is met, bit 0 or bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is updated to "0."

The main CPU 101 then performs setting processing according to the set gaming state (S134). In this processing, when it is necessary to set the gaming period for that gaming state or to set lottery values (lottery tables) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process in response to the transition of the gaming state, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, for example, if the 2BB state is set, the payout number as the termination condition is set to "1," and if the 3BB state is set, the payout number as the termination condition is set to "176."

If the main CPU 101 determines in S132 that the transition condition for transitioning to one of the game states has not been met (NO in S132), and after processing S134, it determines whether the current game zone is a non-favorable zone (S135). If the main CPU 101 determines that the current game zone is a non-favorable zone (YES in S135), it performs a process to check whether the favorable zone start condition has been met (S136). Note that, as mentioned above, in a non-favorable zone, only processing that references the determined internal lottery role is possible, and therefore this processing is the same as the processing of S86 described above (game start state control processing).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have been met (S137). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have not been met (NO in S137), it terminates the end-of-game state control process. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous zone have been met (YES in S137), it performs setting processing at the start of the advantageous zone (S138). Note that, as mentioned above, in non-advantageous zones, only processing that references the determined internal lottery role is possible, so this processing is the same as the processing of S88 described above (state control processing at the start of game).

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S139). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) for the advantageous period that has started. As mentioned above, in the non-advantageous period, only processing that references the determined internal winning combination is possible, so this processing is the same as the processing of S89 described above (game start state control processing).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S140). In this processing, if it is necessary to set the play period for that mode (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) or set lottery values (lottery tables) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, depending on the set mode, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. Note that, as mentioned above, only processing that references the determined internal lottery combination is possible in the non-advantageous zone, so this processing is the same as the processing at S90 described above (game start state control processing).

If the main CPU 101 determines in S135 that the current play zone is not a non-profitable zone (i.e., a profitable zone) (NO in S135), it performs processing at the end of play during the profitable zone (S141). Details of the processing at the end of play during the profitable zone will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process to check whether the advantageous zone end condition has been met (S142). This process checks whether the transition condition for transitioning from the advantageous zone to the non-advantageous zone (the advantageous zone end condition) has been met when the game ends. In the case of the first gaming machine, this process checks, for example, whether the activation conditions for various limit processes have been met based on the number of payouts during the advantageous zone (see FIG. 16), or whether 32 games have elapsed if the current mode is the end mode.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for ending the advantageous period have been met (S143). If the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous period have been met (YES in S143), it performs initialization processing at the end of the advantageous period (S144). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous period and sets a non-advantageous period. In this processing, in response to the end of the advantageous period, initialization processing is performed to clear all information (i.e., information related to the advantageous period) such as various counters related to various limit processing (see FIG. 16), the mode (game state) during the advantageous period, and the play period of that mode (including the ceiling game number, etc.). Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 terminates the game end state control processing. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for ending the advantageous period have not been met (NO in S143), it terminates the game end state control processing.

(Processing at the end of play during the advantageous period)
Next, the process at the end of a game during an advantageous period, which is performed in S141 of the above-mentioned game end state control process, will be described with reference to Fig. 31. Fig. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the process at the end of a game during an advantageous period.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter update processing (at the end of play) (S151). In this processing, for example, various counters related to various limit processing based on the number of payouts during the advantageous period (see FIG. 16), various counters that manage the play period such as various modes (play states) during the advantageous period, and various counters that manage other advantageous degrees are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, the number of payouts, the number of times a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed, the stop operation mode, etc.).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a specific mode (AT state) is in progress (S152). If the main CPU 101 determines that a specific mode is in progress (YES in S152), it performs AT period management processing (at the end of play) (S153). In this processing, for example, if it is possible to extend the AT state play period (e.g., by extending the number of games or adding more sets) at the end of play, it determines whether the conditions for such extension are met and performs processing such as extending the play period based on the results of this determination (if it is possible to shorten the AT state play period, processing related to the shortening is performed). Furthermore, this processing may manage the AT state play period regardless of whether it is extended, or the AT state play period may be managed in the processing of S151 described above, with only processing related to the extension being performed in this processing. In the case of the first gaming machine, this process involves, for example, conducting the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is entered, and then processing to extend the pseudo bonus according to the results of this lottery.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the specific mode is not in progress (NO in S152), or after S153, it determines whether the mode transition condition is met (S154). In the case of the first gaming machine, this process determines whether the transition mode has been determined based on the results of the mode transition lottery described above, which is based on the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is entered.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition has been met (YES in S154), it updates the mode flag storage area (S155). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) within the advantageous zone to which the player has transitioned. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this process sets the transition destination mode determined, for example, in accordance with the results of the mode transition lottery described above, which is based on the sub-flag set when the advantageous zone is entered.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S156). In this processing, if it is necessary to set the play period for that mode (including the ceiling number of games, etc.) or set lottery values (lottery tables) for various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, depending on the set mode, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. Note that in the case of the first gaming machine, this processing is similar to the processing of S140 described above, for example. Then, after this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the end of play during the advantageous period. Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition has not been met (NO in S154), it ends the processing at the end of play during the advantageous period.

[6-2. Periodic interrupt processing]
First, the periodic interrupt process executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described with reference to Fig. 32. Fig. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the periodic interrupt process.

In this embodiment, the periodic interrupt processing cycle (one interrupt time) is set to "1.1172 ms." However, the periodic interrupt processing cycle is not limited to this. For example, periodic interrupt processing may be executed at a different cycle, or even if the same cycle is set, the number of interrupts actually executed for some or all of the processing may be set to "2" or more, resulting in periodic interrupt processing being executed at a different cycle.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a register save process (S201). Next, the main CPU 101 performs an input port check process (S202). In this process, the input states (on or off) of the various sensors and switches connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are checked. For example, the input state at the time of the previous interrupt is compared with the input state at the time of the current interrupt to check whether the input state has changed. If the input state has changed, the change is stored in input port storage area 0 (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and input states that have not changed are stored as is in input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs reel control processing (S203). In this processing, it controls the drive of each stepping motor 51L, 51C, and 51R, and controls the rotation and stopping of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. Next, the main CPU 101 performs communication data transmission processing (S204). In this processing, it transmits each parameter of each command stored in the communication data storage area to the sub-control circuit 200. Note that in this processing, if no command data is stored in the communication data storage area, it transmits the data stored in input port storage area 0 and input port storage area 1 to the sub-control circuit 200 as an input status command.

In this embodiment, the various command data is temporarily stored in a communication data storage area and then transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 during periodic interrupt processing. However, for example, the various command data may be stored directly in a communication circuit (not shown) provided within the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 without being stored in the communication data storage area. Also, although detailed explanation is omitted in this embodiment, the various command data is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 via serial communication. However, for example, the various command data may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 via parallel communication.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs 7-segment LED drive processing (S205). This processing controls the display content of devices connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73), such as the information display device 14. Next, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing (S206). This processing updates various timers managed by the main control circuit 100.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs error detection processing (S207). In this processing, it detects whether various error conditions have occurred based on the input status, etc., checked in S202 described above. Next, the main CPU 101 performs door open/close check processing (S208). In this processing, for example, the open/close status of the lower door mechanism DD is checked based on the input status of the door open/close monitoring switch 56. Note that if various error conditions have occurred or if the input status of the door open/close monitoring switch 56 is open (off), a security signal is output from the external central terminal board 55.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs register restoration processing (S209). After this processing, the main CPU 101 ends the periodic interrupt processing.

[7. Processing by the sub-control circuit]
Next, an outline of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 using each program will be described with reference to Fig. 33. Fig. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the outline of the sub-side control processing.

In addition, in the pachislot machine 1, various restrictions are placed on the main control circuit 100 side (including the main control board 71 and main control board case) from the perspective of preventing fraudulent activities and unauthorized modifications, but not as many restrictions are placed on the sub-control circuit 200 side (including the sub-control board 72 and sub-control board case). Therefore, the sub-control board 72 (and sub-control circuit 200) can use a variety of configurations depending on the type and number of connected performance devices, the type of performance performed by those performance devices, and the balance between manufacturing costs, etc. This is why Figure 33 uses the term "overview."

First, when the power is turned on, the sub-CPU 201 performs power-on processing in the same manner as the main CPU 101 (S301 and S302). This processing includes detecting whether an abnormality occurred when the power was turned on, initializing data stored in the sub-RAM 203, and activating various tasks required to perform the various performance execution control processes described below.

Furthermore, when the sub-CPU 201 receives a command sent from the main control circuit 100, it performs a performance execution control process when the command is received (S303 and S304). In this process, for example, when an initialization command is received, the parameter information of the received initialization command is referenced, and if a setting change has been made, the appropriate initialization process is performed on the sub-side, and if the setting change has not been made, the sub-side is also subjected to a process to restore the state before the power outage.

For example, when a start command is received, the parameter information of the received start command is referenced, and if the state is not AT, the content of the presentation that suggests or notifies the internal winning combination, game status, etc. is determined (by lottery, if necessary), and various presentation devices are controlled so that the presentation with the determined content is executed. Furthermore, if the state is AT, in addition to this, the content of the presentation that notifies the advantageous stop operation mode is determined, and various presentation devices are controlled so that the presentation with the determined content is executed.

For example, when a lock command is received, the parameter information of the received lock command is referenced, the content of the effect linked to the content of the lock effect is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect with the determined content is executed.For example, when a reel stop command is received, the parameter information of the received reel stop command is referenced, the content of the effect linked to the stop start position and the planned stop position (or simply the number of stop operations performed, etc.) is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect with the determined content is executed.For example, when a winning activation command is received, the parameter information of the received winning activation command is referenced, and if a bonus is awarded, the content of the effect linked to the awarded bonus is determined, and various effect devices are controlled so that the effect with the determined content is executed.

Furthermore, when effect buttons 10a, 10b connected to the sub-control board 72 (including those connected via the sub-relay board 74) are operated, for example, the sub-CPU 201 performs effect button operation effect execution control processing (S305 and S306). In this processing, for example, if an effect button corresponding to an effect is operated while an operation-linked effect is being executed, the sub-CPU 201 controls various effect devices so that the content of the operation-linked effect changes. Also, for example, if an effect button is operated to call up the user menu (described below) while not playing, the sub-CPU 201 performs control to display the user menu. Also, if an effect button is operated for a selection or confirmation operation while the user menu is displayed, the sub-CPU 201 performs control in accordance with these operations.

Furthermore, if a trigger other than the above-mentioned trigger occurs, the sub-CPU 201 performs other effect execution control processing (S307). In this processing, for example, if a non-operation period during which no game-related operations or user menu-related operations are performed reaches a predetermined period (e.g., approximately 30 seconds), the sub-CPU 201 determines the content of the effect related to the demo state notification and controls various effect devices so that the effect with the determined content is executed.

[8. Other functions of pachislot machines]
As described above, the pachislot machine 1 is equipped with various functions for controlling games and various functions for controlling presentations, as well as various configurations for realizing these functions, but it can also be equipped with other functions, such as those shown below. Below, an example of other functions on the player's side and an example of other functions on the gaming parlor's side will be explained.

[8-1. Player's side]
For example, a user menu is displayed by the player's presentation operation, the desired menu is selected from the user menu, and then the player performs appropriate selection and decision operations on the selected menu, allowing the player to obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, when the "Layout/Payout Table" is selected and confirmed, an information screen will be displayed on the display screen, allowing players to check the symbol layout on the pachislot machine 1, the specified symbol combination, and the payout (bonus details) when that combination is won.

For example, when "Volume/Light Adjustment" is selected and confirmed, a settings screen is displayed on the effect display unit, allowing settings to be made for the brightness of the various display devices on the pachislot machine 1, the volume of the sound output from the speakers, or the light intensity of the lamps and LEDs. When making such settings, in order to allow for more detailed settings or to more easily accept settings-related operations, the various operation units that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to those settings (i.e., the operation unit that accepts effect operations).

Furthermore, for example, when "Custom" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display unit, allowing the user to set the presentation mode of the pachislot machine 1 (for example, the type of character used in the presentation (including the type of character (display mode) itself, the type of voice corresponding to the character, or the type of costume or item (individual display mode) associated with the character), the probability of the presentation occurring (including the type of expectation level when the presentation occurs), or the mode of suggestion or notification (including the timing of presentation execution, etc.)). During such configuration, in order to enable more detailed settings or to make it easier to accept settings-related operations, the various operation units that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the settings (i.e., the operation unit that accepts presentation operations).

Furthermore, for example, when "UniMemo" is selected and confirmed, it becomes possible to receive an information provision service using the player's mobile device (e.g., a mobile phone, smartphone, etc.). With such an information provision service, for example, the player can log in to start playing (play can also be started without logging in), and then log out when play is finished, allowing them to check or obtain game history information (e.g., information related to various game results, such as the total number of games played, the number of times an advantageous game state occurred, and the maximum number of coins won).

In addition, for example, the game history information may also include information regarding accompanying benefits, such as information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed during play and the types of music that can be output depending on the results of the game (whether the unlocking conditions are met), and information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed on the player's mobile device and the types of music that can be output.

Note that various methods for logging in and out of such information provision services can be employed. For example, logging in and out can be accomplished by having the player read a two-dimensional code displayed on the display unit using the player's terminal, or by having the player enter or memorize a password (specifically, for example, when logging out at the end of a game, a four- to ten-digit character string can be displayed instead of a two-dimensional code as a password to be entered next time, which the player can obtain by writing it down on paper or taking a photo of it on a mobile device, and then entering the password obtained in this way when logging in before the start of the next game). Furthermore, these methods can also be combined as appropriate to enable logging in and out.

[8-2. Amusement parlor side]
For example, the hall menu is displayed by the setting confirmation operation (which may be a setting change operation or other operation by the amusement parlor administrator) by the amusement parlor administrator, the desired menu is selected from the hall menu, and then, when an appropriate selection and decision operation is performed for the selected menu, the amusement parlor administrator can obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, when "Time Setting" is selected and confirmed, a setting screen is displayed in the display effect section, allowing the date and time, etc. of the pachislot machine 1 to be set. The date and time can also be configured to be automatically updated, for example, during the sub-side power-on process described above (see S302 in Figure 33).

For example, when "Total Medal Information" is selected and confirmed, an information screen is displayed on the display screen, allowing users to check historical information such as the number of coins inserted and paid out within a specified period of time (for example, each of seven business days) on the pachislot machine 1. This type of menu can also be configured as a menu in the user menu.

For example, if "Settings Change/Confirmation History" is selected and confirmed, an information screen will be displayed on the display screen, allowing the user to check history information indicating the number of settings change operations and setting confirmation operations performed on the pachislot machine 1 within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for seven business days). For example, if "Error Information History" is selected and confirmed, an information screen will be displayed on the display screen, allowing the user to check history information indicating the date and time of error occurrences and their details within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for seven business days) on the pachislot machine 1.

For example, if "Monitoring History" is selected and confirmed, an information screen will be displayed on the display screen, allowing the user to check historical information such as the date and time the door was opened within a specified period (for example, each of seven business days) on the pachislot machine 1, as well as that period. For example, if "Warning Settings" is selected and confirmed, a settings screen will be displayed on the display screen, allowing the user to set the type and frequency of various warning notifications on the pachislot machine 1.

For example, when "Power Saving Mode Setting" is selected and confirmed, a settings screen is displayed on the display screen, allowing the user to set whether or not to activate the power saving function of the pachislot machine 1. Such a menu can also be configured as a menu within a user menu. Furthermore, when making such settings, in order to allow for more detailed settings or to more easily accept settings-related operations, the various operation units that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation unit that accepts settings-related operations (i.e., the operation unit that accepts effect operations).

For example, when "Limit Setting" is selected and confirmed, a settings screen is displayed on the display screen, allowing the user to set whether or not to activate the limit function on the pachislot machine 1. The limit function is a function that, when a predetermined activation condition is met, renders the machine unplayable until a cancellation operation (e.g., a reset operation) is performed by the gaming facility manager. The predetermined activation condition may be met, for example, when the advantageous zone is forcibly ended by executing the limit process described above, or when a specific state (e.g., a bonus state, an increase zone, or an advantageous zone (including an activation zone)) ends. Furthermore, when the limit function is set to ON, the automatic settlement function described below may also be set to ON in conjunction with this.

For example, when "Automatic Settlement Settings" is selected and confirmed, a settings screen is displayed on the effect display unit, allowing the user to set whether or not to activate the automatic settlement function of the pachislot machine 1. The automatic settlement function is a function that automatically settles credits (i.e., automatically returns all credited gaming value) when a predetermined activation condition is met. The predetermined activation condition may be met, for example, when the advantageous zone is forcibly ended by executing the limit process described above, or when a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increase zone, or an advantageous zone (including an effect zone)) ends. Furthermore, when the automatic settlement function is set to ON, the above-mentioned limit function may also be set to ON in conjunction with this.

When setting the limit-play function or automatic settlement function, in order to allow for more detailed settings or to make it easier to accept settings-related operations, the various operation units that accept the player's game operations can be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to those settings (i.e., the operation unit that accepts presentation operations). However, in this case, it is not desirable to unnecessarily increase the number of operation units that can accept operations, so it is also possible to use only a specific operation unit (for example, a stop button) as part of the operation unit that accepts settings-related operations.

[9. Extension Example]
Up to this point, a pachislot machine 1 has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the invention according to this embodiment can be applied. However, the gaming machines to which the invention according to this embodiment can be applied are not limited to this. For example, the invention according to this embodiment can also be applied to gaming machines known as "pachinko machines" or "slot machines," and similar effects can be obtained. In other words, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to all gaming machines that can play games (perform gaming control) in accordance with the gaming actions (operations) of the player. Furthermore, the configurations and functions of gaming machines including the pachislot machine 1 are not limited to those described above, and various modifications and extensions are possible. Below, such an extension example will be described, although it is merely an example.

(Pachinko machine)
A pachinko machine has, for example, a game board with a game area where game balls can roll and flow down, a glass door including protective glass that protects the game area while making it visible from the outside, a performance display device provided in a specified area of the game area (which may be provided outside the game area), a payout unit that pays out game balls, and a board unit that includes various control boards that perform various controls related to games and performances, and these are supported by a frame body (sometimes simply referred to as a "frame" or the like).

The front of a pachinko machine is equipped with, for example, a launch handle as one of the player's operating means, an upper tray in which game balls to be used in the game can be stored, and a lower tray in which paid-out game balls can be stored. Many machines are also equipped with the above-mentioned effect buttons and movable effect devices. The game area is also equipped with, for example, a starting area (sometimes called a "starting port") or a specific area (sometimes called a "V winning port") through which game balls can pass, a variable winning device (sometimes called a "large winning port") that can transition between a state in which game balls have an easy chance of winning and a state in which they have a hard time winning, and a variable display device that can variably display identification information (sometimes called a "pattern" or the like, including "special patterns" and "normal patterns").

In pachinko machines, players play by operating a launch handle to launch a game ball into the game area. For example, when a launched game ball passes through the starting area, the variable display begins. At this time, a decision is made (i.e., whether to transition the game state to a big win game state or a small win game state, which are more favorable to the player) based on a probability determined by the current state (e.g., whether the game is in a high-variable game state, with a relatively high probability of winning) and the type of starting area (i.e., whether to transition the game state is determined by lottery or judgment). After that, when the variable display stop condition (e.g., the set variable time has expired) is met, the variable display stops in a stop pattern corresponding to the result of the decision. If the result of the decision is to transition the game state (a win), the stop pattern also becomes a display result corresponding to the win, and the game transitions to the game state corresponding to the win in response to the display result. On the other hand, if the above decision result is one that does not result in a change in the game state (a loss), the display result for the stopped ball will also correspond to a loss, and the game state will not change. Note that, for example, if the launched game ball passes through a specific area (specific areas are usually designed to be difficult for game balls to pass through), it is decided to change the game state regardless of the variable display device.

In other words, pachislot machine 1 begins play when the player bets the required medals and performs a start operation, whereas pachinko machines differ in that the player fires the required game ball by operating a launch handle, and the game begins when the game ball passes through a starting area, for example. However, both machines share the commonality that the game begins due to the player's gaming action. Pachislot machine 1 and pachinko machines also share the commonality that the stop mode that will ultimately be permitted to be displayed (in other words, the content of the bonus to be awarded) is determined when the start trigger is met.

Furthermore, while pachislot machine 1 basically stops the variable display when the player performs a stop operation, pachinko machines stop the variable display when a stop condition is met (without the player performing a stop operation), which is a difference between the two. However, both machines stop the variable display according to a predetermined decision and award a bonus according to the stopped state. Pachislot machine 1 and pachinko machines also have in common the ability to execute effects related to the game. For example, the effect display device functions as the effect display unit and information display unit described above. Furthermore, pachinko machines may of course also be provided with effect execution means such as the aforementioned lamps, speakers, or other effect devices, and effects may be executed using these.

In many pachinko machines, the decorative symbols (which are sometimes referred to as "identification information") are displayed in a variable manner on the performance display device. As mentioned above, the actual game results are displayed on the variable display device, but because the variable display devices are small and the display results are shown using the lighting patterns of multiple LEDs, it is often difficult for players to recognize the game results. For this reason, the mainstream pachinko machines are designed to play by displaying decorative symbols in a variable manner (and stationary) on the performance display device in conjunction with the variable display on the variable display device. Furthermore, the variable display of such decorative symbols (although for presentation purposes, the variable display may begin after a certain delay when the start trigger is met, or may temporarily stop before the stop condition is met) is basically the same as the variable table device described above, with the identification information being displayed as variable or static as the game progresses (for example, in the case of a win, the decorative symbols are displayed as static in a special stop mode (e.g., matching symbols), while in the case of a loss, the decorative symbols are displayed as static in a non-special stop mode (e.g., scattered symbols)). Therefore, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to this as one aspect of the variable display unit described above.

In other words, in this embodiment, the various items described as the configuration of the external or internal structure of the pachislot machine 1 can also be applied to the configuration of the external or internal structure of a pachinko machine, except for those that have properties unique to the pachislot machine 1 (for example, those that require medals and cannot be replaced by game balls).

Furthermore, in pachinko machines, various controls related to gameplay are performed by a main control circuit acting as a game control unit mounted on a main control board (including the case where some control related to payouts is performed by a payout control circuit mounted on a payout control board electrically connected to the main control board), and various controls related to presentation are performed by a sub-control circuit acting as a presentation control unit mounted on a sub-control board. Therefore, the various matters described as the electrical configuration of pachislot machine 1 can be applied to the electrical configuration of pachinko machines, except for those that have characteristics unique to pachislot machine 1 (for example, those related to stop operations, etc.).

Furthermore, as described above, the pachislot machine 1 can provide game states that are relatively advantageous to the player (or may be disadvantageous depending on the configuration), such as a bonus state, RT state, AT state, and an ART state that combines these. For example, in the bonus state, the lottery mode for small winning combinations is made more advantageous than in the non-bonus state, making it possible to maintain a state in which medals are more likely to be awarded (increase) for a certain period of time; in the RT state, the lottery mode for replay combinations is made more advantageous than in the non-RT state, making it possible to maintain a state in which losses are less likely to occur (and, as a result, medals are less likely to decrease) for a certain period of time; and in the AT state, an advantageous stop operation mode is notified, making it possible to maintain a state in which medals are more likely to be awarded (increase) for a certain period of time.

In contrast, pachinko machines can also be equipped with various game states with similar characteristics. For example, in a big win game state or a small win game state, the variable prize-winning device is controlled differently from normal, enabling the game to transition to a state in which game balls are more likely to win, thereby enabling a state in which game balls are more likely to be awarded (increased) to continue for a certain period of time. Also, in a time-saving game state (sometimes referred to as an "electric support state"), normal symbols are controlled differently from normal, enabling a state in which game balls are more likely to pass through the starting area, thereby increasing the frequency of lottery draws by the variable display device and enabling a state in which game balls are less likely to decrease to continue for a certain period of time. Also, in a probability-variant game state, special symbols are controlled differently from normal, enabling a state in which the variable display device has a higher probability of winning (and as a result, game balls are more likely to increase) to continue for a certain period of time.

In other words, in this embodiment, the various matters described as control configurations related to game state transitions (or shifts) as part of the playability of the pachislot machine 1 can be applied as control configurations related to game state transitions (or shifts) of pachinko machines, except for those that have properties unique to the pachislot machine 1 (for example, those that involve transitions between play zones). The same applies to the various other matters described as part of the playability of the pachislot machine 1.

Incidentally, pachinko machines can also transition to a time-limited play state when the number of plays in a non-time-limited play state (normal play state) reaches a specified number. In other words, pachinko machines can also be equipped with a ceiling function (a function that transitions to a favorable state (e.g., time-limited play state) as a way to recover from a stuck game if an unfavorable state (e.g., normal play state) continues for a predetermined period (e.g., 900 games (spins)) without transitioning to a favorable state (e.g., jackpot play state)). Therefore, the various matters described as configurations related to the ceiling function of pachislot machine 1 can also be applied as configurations related to the ceiling function of pachinko machines.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine, if the stop pattern of the variable display device results in a display result corresponding to a specific miss during a non-time-saving game state (normal game state), it is possible to transition to a time-saving game state. In other words, even in a pachinko machine, a transition (transition) between game states (not triggered by a transition to a jackpot game state, etc.) is possible due to the display of a specific display result (specific symbol combination). Therefore, for example, the various matters described as configurations related to a transition (transition) to the RT state due to the display of a specific symbol combination on a pachislot machine 1 can also be applied as configurations related to a transition (transition) to a time-saving game state due to the display of a specific display result on a pachinko machine.

(Medalless gaming machine)
In the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, one of the conditions for starting play is the player's betting operation (i.e., inserting medals held in hand into the medal insertion slot 5 to place a bet, or operating the MAX BET button 6a or 1 BET button 6b to place a bet with credited medals), and if medals are to be paid out when play ends, the hopper device 32 is driven to pay out medals from the medal payout opening 11, or medals are credited, as described above, but the configuration of the pachislot machine 1 is not limited to this.

For example, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to all types of gaming in which a player bets the amount of gaming value required for a game, the game is played based on that bet, and a bonus is awarded (e.g., gaming value is awarded) based on the outcome of the game. In other words, the invention can be applied not only to types in which medals are physically inserted (bet) and paid out by the player's actions, but also to those in which the gaming value held by the player is managed electromagnetically within the pachislot machine 1 (or, even if not electromagnetically, at least managed in a manner that prevents the player from directly accessing the gaming value), allowing for medal-free gaming. Here, such pachislot machines 1 are referred to as "medalless gaming machines." Medalless gaming machines are also sometimes referred to as "managed gaming machines" or "enclosed gaming machines," etc.

The game value held by the player may be electromagnetically managed by the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) itself, or by a game value management device attached to (connected to) the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) (hereinafter, such a management device may be referred to as a "medal count control board"). An example of how this game value management device is installed is described below.

The gaming value management device is a device equipped with at least ROM and RWM (or RAM) and installed in the pachislot machine 1. It is connected to an external gaming value providing device (hereinafter, such a gaming value providing device may be referred to as a "communication-only unit") for two-way communication via a communication device (hereinafter, such a communication device may be referred to as a "connection terminal board"). By performing the necessary communication with the external gaming value providing device, the gaming value management device can perform operations such as lending gaming value (i.e., providing the gaming value required for a player to place a gaming value bet), granting gaming value (i.e., providing the granted gaming value to a player when a winning combination related to the granting of gaming value is achieved (such combination is realized)), and electromagnetically recording the gaming value provided by these operations. The gaming value providing device is also sometimes referred to as a "gaming value (gaming medium) handling device," "gaming value (gaming medium) lending device," or "sandbox."

The external gaming value providing device is also connected to an external ball payout management device (ball payout management server), and the gaming value management device is configured to be able to send ball payout management information to the external ball payout management device via a communication device and the external gaming value providing device. Here, the ball payout management information is made up of various pieces of information necessary to enable the external ball payout management device to manage ball payouts. An example of ball payout management information will be described later. The external gaming value providing device and the external ball payout management device are connected, for example, by an internet line.

Here, "balls paid out" directly refers to the number of gaming media paid out, but in this embodiment, the concept also includes, for example, the difference (net increase) between the number of payouts and the number of bets, the degree of benefit given to the player (for example, how much the player gained (how much the gaming establishment lost), or how much the player lost (how much the gaming establishment gained), etc.), the duration of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state, an AT state, or a series of advantageous periods, etc.), or the degree of gambling potential assumed by a combination of these.

Also, for example, a retained game value number display device (not shown) that displays the number of retained game values may be provided on the front side of the pachislot machine 1, and the game value management device may manage the number of game values displayed on this retained game value number display device based on the management results of the number of game values. In other words, the game value management device may not only record the total number of game values that a player can use for play by electromagnetic means, but may also be configured to be able to control the display of the recorded results. In this case, it is desirable that the game value management device have the ability to allow a player to freely transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game values to an external game value providing device, and also have the ability to prevent the recorded number of game values from being reduced except by direct operation by the player, and also have the ability to transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game values only via a communications device.

The gaming value management device may not only have the function of electromagnetically managing a player's gaming value using an external gaming value providing device, but also the function of managing the number of gaming values bet by the player's physical actions and the number of gaming values paid out by the physical actions of the pachislot machine 1. In other words, it may also be capable of managing the actual insertion and payout of medals in a conventional pachislot machine 1. In this way, the pachislot machine 1 can be controlled using conventional methods, or using methods similar to those of the medal-less gaming machine described above, allowing for a common configuration regardless of the specifications of the pachislot machine 1. In this case, the gaming value management device may directly control the selector 31 and hopper device 32 described above, or it may indirectly control these by controlling them using the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) and transmitting the control results.

In addition to the above, the pachislot machine 1 may be provided with various operating means necessary for the operation of a medal-less gaming machine, such as a lending operating means and a return (settlement) operating means that can be operated by the player. The gaming value providing device may be provided with various operating means necessary for the operation of a medal-less gaming machine, such as a lending operating means and a return operating means that can be operated by the player, in addition to various devices such as an insertion slot for valuables such as banknotes, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), and a contactless communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal (all not shown). Insertable recording media include not only non-member recording media issued by gaming establishments on the same day, but member recording media held by members of the gaming establishment. Gaming value recorded on non-member recording media is valid only for the day (it becomes invalid from the following day onwards), but gaming value recorded on member recording media is valid from the following day onwards.

An example of the flow of play in this case will be explained below. For example, first, the player deposits valuable value into the game value providing device using one of the methods. The game value providing device subtracts a predetermined amount of valuable value in response to the player's operation of one of the lending operation means, and provides the game value corresponding to the subtracted value to the pachislot machine 1. The player then plays, and if more game value is required, repeats the above operation. Thereafter, when the player has acquired a predetermined amount of game value as a result of the game and wishes to end the game, the player operates one of the return operation means. The game value management device transmits the number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's operation of one of the return operation means. The game value providing device ejects the recording medium on which the transmitted number of game values is recorded. When the game value number has been transmitted, the game value management device clears the number of game values stored in itself. The player can take the ejected recording medium to a prize exchange center or the like to exchange it for a prize, or can move to another pachislot machine 1 and continue playing by inserting the ejected recording medium into a game value providing device corresponding to the other machine. Also, if the ejected recording medium is a member's recording medium, it will remain valid from the next day onwards, so the player can stop playing here.

In the above example, the game value management device transmits the total number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's return operation. However, the device may be configured to transmit only the number of game values desired by the player depending on the manner of the player's return operation. In other words, the game value held by the player may be divided. Furthermore, while the game value providing device records the transmitted number of game values on a recording medium and dispenses it, it may transmit information of the same value to the player's mobile terminal using the above-mentioned non-contact communication antenna, or may dispense, for example, cash or a cash equivalent, as long as it provides the player with something of equivalent value.

The pachislot machine 1 or the gaming value providing device may also be provided with a lock operation means that can be operated by the player, and in response to an operation on this lock operation means, the gaming value management device and the gaming value providing device may be controlled to a state (locked state) in which communication between them is disabled. In this case, the pachislot machine 1 or the gaming value providing device may be configured to perform authentication processes such as setting a PIN (and inputting the set PIN), issuing a one-time password (and inputting the issued one-time password), or biometric authentication, and the locked state may be released if the results of the authentication process are normal.

With the medal-less gaming machine described so far, compared to when gaming media are physically provided for play, there is no need to provide some external structures such as the medal insertion slot 5 and medal payout outlet 11, or some internal structures such as the selector 31 and hopper device 32. This not only reduces the cost and manufacturing costs of the gaming machine, but also reduces the power consumption of the gaming machine. Furthermore, since it is more difficult to access the inside of the gaming machine, fraudulent activity against the gaming machine can be prevented. Furthermore, because players do not come into direct contact with the gaming media, the gaming environment is improved and noise can be reduced. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various aspects of the environment surrounding the gaming machine.

(Example of medal-less gaming machine configuration)
Next, a configuration example in which the pachislot machine 1 is configured as a medal-less gaming machine will be described with reference to Fig. 34. Fig. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medal-less gaming machine. Note that, hereinafter, a configuration example in which a medal count control board (game value management device) is provided will be mainly described.

As described above, the medal count control board is connected to the main control board 71 and manages the number of medals (game value count) held by the player. The medal count control board is also connected to the communications-only unit (game value providing device) via a connection terminal board (communication device). The medal count control board also transmits ball payout management information to the ball payout management device via the connection terminal board and communications-only unit. The medal count control board is also equipped with a medal count control circuit (not shown). The medal count control circuit is also composed of, for example, a medal count control CPU (not shown), a medal count control ROM (not shown), and a medal count control RWM (not shown).

The ball payout management device is, for example, a server for managing ball payouts managed by an association (information center) to which the gaming machine manufacturer belongs, and is provided for the purpose of making it possible to monitor whether the gambling nature of each gaming machine is appropriate (ball payout performance) by storing the transmitted ball payout management information in the ball payout management device.

From this perspective, the medal count control board and connection terminal board, like the main control board 71, perform important functions in the pachislot machine 1, and therefore must be installed inside the pachislot machine 1 in a manner that prevents fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications. Configuration example 1 and configuration example 2 shown in Figure 34 show examples of such a configuration.

<Configuration Example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in Figure 34 shows that the medal count control board and connection terminal board are housed in the main control board case, similar to the main control board 71. Here, the main control board case is usually sealed in various ways to make it difficult to open (or remove) it, or to make it possible to recognize traces of it having been opened (or the number of times it has been opened) (for example, sealing with crimping, affixing a sealing sticker, or affixing a crimping sticker that records when the crimping has been cut, etc.).

Therefore, by housing the medal count control board and connection terminal board within the main control board case, the same security effect as the main control board 71 can be achieved, and fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications can be appropriately prevented.

<Configuration Example 2>
Configuration example 2 shown in Figure 34 shows that the medal count control board and connection terminal board are housed in a medal count control board case that is provided separately from the main control board case, unlike the above-mentioned configuration example 1. Note that the medal count control board case is configured as a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin case like the main control board case, and the medal count control board and connection terminal board housed therein are housed in a state where they can be easily seen.

Here, the medal count control board case of configuration example 2 can be configured to undergo the same sealing process as the main control board case, or it can be configured to undergo at least a partial sealing process. For example, the medal count control board case can be configured to be sealed by crimping, just like the main control board case, but without a sealing sticker. Also, for example, the main control board case may be required to use a predetermined crimping sticker, but the medal count control board case may be configured to allow the use of any sticker as the crimping sticker.

<Example of accumulated data>
The example of stored data shown in Figure 34 shows an example of various data stored in the ball-out management device. That is, it shows an example of ball-out management information that the medal count control board transmits to the ball-out management device via the connection terminal board and the communication-only unit. Note that this is merely an example, and it is also possible to configure the system so that some of the various information shown in Figure 34 is not transmitted, or to transmit information other than the various information shown in Figure 34.

Furthermore, the timing at which the medal count control board sends information to the communication-only unit can be arbitrary, and the timing at which the communication-only unit sends information to the ball payout management device can also be arbitrary. As long as the ball payout management device is able to monitor the ball payout performance of each gaming machine at least once per unit (for example, one business day of an amusement parlor), the information may be sent at any timing. For example, the timing at which the medal count control board sends information to the communication-only unit may be different from the timing at which the communication-only unit sends information to the ball payout management device. Also, for example, the timing at which the medal count control board sends information to the communication-only unit may differ depending on the type of information.

The accumulated data "total number of inserted coins" is the cumulative number of coins inserted per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of game value coins bet by the player through betting operations, excluding those bets made through the replay operation, to the communication-only unit at a predetermined timing (e.g., for each unit of play), and the communication-only unit transmits the cumulative total of this information to the ball-out management device at a predetermined timing (e.g., when the gaming facility closes for business).

The accumulated data "total payout number" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of game values awarded by the gaming machine's payout process, excluding those awarded by the replay operation, to the communications-only unit at a predetermined timing (e.g., for each unit play), and the communications-only unit transmits the cumulative total of this information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (e.g., when the gaming facility closes for business).

The accumulated data "MY" is the maximum difference in number of coins that occurred during one unit after each gaming machine was powered on (in other words, the difference in number of coins obtained during the period in which the gaming value increased the most during one unit; this is referred to as "MY"). For example, the medal count control board calculates this maximum difference in number of coins and transmits the calculated information to the communications-only unit at a predetermined timing (for example, when the gaming establishment closes), and the communications-only unit transmits this information to the ball-out management device at a predetermined timing (for example, when the gaming establishment closes).

The accumulated data "total number of coins paid out from game devices" is the cumulative number of coins paid out per unit since the power to each gaming machine was turned on, and is also the cumulative number of coins paid out while various game devices are in operation. For example, the medal count control board transmits information about the number of game value awarded by the gaming machine's payout process while various game devices are in operation to the communications unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit of play while various game devices are in operation), and the communications unit transmits the cumulative total of this information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, when the gaming facility closes for business).

The accumulated data "total number of consecutive feature payouts" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since each gaming machine was powered on, and is also the cumulative number of payouts paid out while the consecutive feature (RB, including RB while BB is in operation) is in operation. For example, the medal count control board transmits information about the number of game value awarded by the gaming machine's payout process while the consecutive feature is in operation to the communications unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit of play while the consecutive feature is in operation), and the communications unit transmits the cumulative total of this information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, when the gaming facility closes for business).

The medal count control board also transmits various types of information that can be displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54 to the communications unit at predetermined times (e.g., at the time of calculation by the role ratio monitor device 54), and the communications unit then transmits the information to the payout management device at predetermined times (e.g., at the time of transmission from the medal count control board). The accumulated data "role ratio" corresponds, for example, to the role ratio information described above; the accumulated data "sequential role ratio" corresponds, for example, to the consecutive role ratio information described above; the accumulated data "advantageous zone ratio" corresponds, for example, to the specific zone ratio information described above; the accumulated data "role ratio with instructions" corresponds, for example, to the role ratio information described above that is aggregated and calculated even during the AT state; and the accumulated data "role, etc. state ratio" corresponds, for example, to the specific zone ratio information that is aggregated and calculated even while various roles are in operation.

The accumulated data "number of plays" is the cumulative number of plays per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal count control board transmits information on the number of plays played to the communications unit at a predetermined timing (e.g., for each unit play), and the communications unit transmits the cumulative total of this information to the ball payout management device at a predetermined timing (e.g., when the gaming facility closes for business).

The stored data "main control chip ID number" is the individual identification number (also known as "CPU ID"; hereinafter referred to as the "chip ID number") of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this individual identification number, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball payout management device, it sends information including this individual identification number.

The stored data "main control chip manufacturer code" is a manufacturer code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this manufacturer code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball payout management device, it sends information including the manufacturer code it received.

The stored data "main control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this product code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball payout management device, it sends information including the product code it received.

The stored data "medal count control chip ID number" is the individual identification number of the medal count control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this individual identification number, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball payout management device, it sends information including this individual identification number. Note that if a medal count control board is not provided and various information is sent to the communication-only unit by the main control board 71, this information will be "0".

The stored data "medal count control chip manufacturer code" is a manufacturer code recorded in the management area of the medal count control ROM of the medal count control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communication-only unit, it sends information including this manufacturer code, and when the communication-only unit sends various information to the ball payout management device, it sends information including this manufacturer code. Note that if a medal count control board is not provided and various information is sent to the communication-only unit by the main control board 71, this information will be "0".

The stored data "medal count control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the medal count control ROM of the medal count control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal count control board sends various information to the communications-only unit, it sends information including this product code, and when the communications-only unit sends various information to the ball payout management device, it sends information including this transmitted product code. Note that if a medal count control board is not provided and various information is transmitted to the communications-only unit by the main control board 71, this information will be "0".

In this way, the ball dispensing management device is able to store various types of information (ball dispensing management information) transmitted from gaming machines. Furthermore, the ball dispensing management information includes multiple pieces of individual identification information (for example, the aforementioned "main control chip ID number" through "medal count control chip product code") that can identify individual gaming machines. Therefore, the ball dispensing management device can identify the gaming machine that sent the information using this individual identification information, and if, for example, the correspondence between the "main control chip ID number" and the "medal count control chip ID number" changes over time, it can recognize the possibility that one of the control boards has been replaced (i.e., the possibility that fraud or unauthorized modification has occurred).

In addition, the payout management information includes multiple pieces of payout information (for example, the above-mentioned "total number of coins inserted" to "number of games played") that can identify the payout performance per unit. Therefore, the payout management device can use this payout information to determine whether the gambling nature of the gaming machine that sent the information is within an appropriate range. For example, if the "total number of coins paid out" or "ratio of devices with instructions" suddenly becomes significantly high, it can determine the possibility that fraud or unauthorized modifications have occurred, or that there may have been some kind of flaw in the original specification design.

If the ball payout management device recognizes the above-mentioned possibility, it is expected that the gaming parlor or gaming machine manufacturer will be notified of the result and appropriate measures will be taken. In other words, by building a management system that includes multiple managed gaming machines, a gaming value providing device (a communication-only unit) that transmits ball payout management information sent from the managed gaming machines to the ball payout management device, and a ball payout management device that manages the ball payout performance of each managed gaming machine based on the transmitted ball payout management information, it becomes possible to properly manage all managed gaming machines under its management.

<Modification 1>
As described above, medal-less gaming machines can be configured so that the number of game values held by a player is managed by a medal count control board. Therefore, a medal count monitor device (not shown) may be provided on the medal count control board so that the gaming parlor manager can grasp such management status and other information.

The medal count monitor device is, for example, composed of a four-digit, seven-segment LED, and is provided inside the medal count control board case. The medal count monitor device sequentially displays various information (for example, some or all of the above-mentioned ball payout management information) related to the number of gaming values tallied and calculated by the medal count control CPU (or it may be the main CPU 101). Note that if the medal count monitor device displays all of the display contents of the role ratio monitor device 54, the role ratio monitor device 54 need not be provided. Alternatively, the role ratio monitor device 54 may be configured to double as a medal count monitor device.

The medal count monitor device may be mounted on the medal count control board, or on another board (for example, a connection terminal board) connected to the medal count control board. It may also be installed elsewhere within the cabinet G. For example, it may be installed on the medal count control board case. A management switch for starting the display on the medal count monitor device or switching its content may also be installed within the cabinet G, and various information may be displayed when this switch is operated. Furthermore, assuming the use of such a management switch, for example, the information display device 14 may also be configured to function as the medal count monitor device.

The medal count monitor device may also be configured to display the type of error that has occurred when any of the various error conditions related to the device occur. For example, if a communication error occurs with the main control board 71, a communication error occurs with the connection terminal board, a communication error occurs with the gaming value providing device, or an abnormality occurs in the medal count control RWM, the corresponding numerical value may be displayed. In this case, to enable the gaming facility manager to easily recognize which error condition the displayed numerical value corresponds to, an explanatory section (such as a sticker or printed text) indicating the correspondence may be provided on or near the medal count control board case.

<Modification 2>
As described above, in a medalless gaming machine, the medal count control board can be configured to transmit ball management information to the outside via a connection terminal board. Here, in this embodiment, an external centralized terminal board 55 is also provided to transmit information to the outside. Therefore, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 can be configured, for example, as follows.

For example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 can be configured as a common terminal board. This not only reduces the number of parts, but also the amount of wiring directed to the outside, thereby improving security.

Also, for example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are configured as a single unit. Also, for example, the connection terminal board and the external centralized terminal board 55 are arranged close to each other at least within the cabinet G. This improves work efficiency when connecting. Furthermore, the length of the wiring can be kept constant and the wiring locations can be limited, thereby improving security.

<Modification 3>
As described above, medalless gaming machines can be configured to transmit ball payout management information to a ball payout management device. Furthermore, the ball payout management device can appropriately manage the ball payout performance of each medalless gaming machine based on the transmitted ball payout management information. Therefore, assuming that ball payout performance can be appropriately managed in this manner, the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided. In other words, the machine may not have the function of forcibly terminating the advantageous zone when certain regulatory conditions are met.

Furthermore, the medal count control board may be equipped with a function for appropriately managing ball output performance, and on the assumption that ball output performance can be appropriately managed in this way, the above-mentioned limiter may not be provided. In other words, the machine may not have a function for forcibly ending the advantageous zone when certain regulatory conditions are met.

For example, the medal count control board is configured to include a ball output monitoring RWM (which may be the medal count control RWM described above, or a separate RWM). The ball output monitoring RWM monitors ball output by, for example, initializing when settings are changed but not initializing when a favorable zone ends. If the monitored ball output exceeds a certain threshold, control may be exercised to reduce ball output performance, for example by reducing the probability of a navigation occurring, reducing the probability that the AT state will be extended, or even ending the AT state itself, without forcibly ending the favorable zone itself. This also makes it possible to appropriately manage ball output performance. Note that in this case, such control results may be sent to the ball output management device as ball output management information. In other words, both the medal count control board and the ball output management device may be configured to manage the ball output performance of each medalless gaming machine.

(Example of the main control board configuration of a pachislot machine)
Next, a configuration example of the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 35. Fig. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main control board 71. Note that, hereinafter, a configuration example of the reuse (reuse) of the main control board 71 will be mainly described.

As mentioned above, there are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71 in pachislot machines 1, one of which is that the manufacturer's name and board control number must be printed on the main control board 71. The manufacturer's name is the name of the gaming machine manufacturer that produces pachislot machine 1, and the control number is a number that identifies the model of the main control board 71.

<Configuration Example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35 shows that the manufacturer's name and board reference number are printed in text on the main control board 71, as in the past. In this configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, it is assumed that a pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "model A") equipped with the main control board 71 is first manufactured by BB Co., Ltd. Initially, only the manufacturer's name "BB Co., Ltd." and the board reference number "BB-00-11-22" are printed in the lower row. If model A is subsequently removed from the gaming parlor and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "model B"), AA Co., Ltd. must laser engrave the printed manufacturer's name and board reference number in the lower row and newly print their own serial number and board reference number in a different space (for example, the manufacturer's name "AA Co., Ltd." and the board reference number "AA-00-11-22" in the upper row of configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35).

If model B is subsequently removed from the gaming parlor, and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. were to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "model C"), BB Co., Ltd. would have to laser engrave the manufacturer's name and board control number printed on the top line and print a new serial number and board control number related to their company in a different space. However, since there is no more free space in configuration example 1 shown in Figure 35, there is a problem in that, even though the hardware is still fully reusable, the main control board 71 may not be able to be reused due to the constraints described above.

This is also true if multiple manufacturer names and board control numbers are printed on the board from the beginning. For example, even if the serial numbers and board control numbers for both AA Co., Ltd. and BB Co., Ltd. are printed on the board in advance, the serial number and board control number for AA Co., Ltd. will be erased by laser engraving when Model A is manufactured. Therefore, while it may be possible for BB Co., Ltd. to reuse it, it will no longer be possible for AA Co., Ltd. to reuse it. In contrast, the following configuration examples 2 and 3 are expected to solve the above-mentioned problems. In other words, it is possible to increase the reusability of boards used to control games, such as the main control board 71.

<Configuration Example 2>
Configuration example 2 shown in Figure 35 shows that a code including the manufacturer's name and board control number is printed. Note that in configuration example 2 shown in Figure 35, a QR code (registered trademark), which is a two-dimensional code, is used as an example of the code including the manufacturer's name and board control number, but a JAN code (bar code) or other code can also be used. In other words, the code may be any type as long as it includes information that allows a checker to uniquely identify the manufacturer's name and board control number using some means (for example, a mobile terminal, etc.).

In configuration example 2 shown in Figure 35, if model A is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd., the first code from the right is printed. The first code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number associated with BB Co., Ltd. After that, when model A is removed from the gaming facility and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model B, the second code from the right is printed and the first code from the right is erased by laser engraving. The second code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number associated with AA Co., Ltd.

If model B is subsequently removed from the gaming facility and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model C, the third code from the right is printed and the second code from the right is erased by laser engraving. The third code from the right contains information that can identify the serial number and board control number associated with BB Co., Ltd. If model C is subsequently removed from the gaming facility and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. can erase the third code from the right by laser engraving and print the fourth code from the right, which contains information that can identify the serial number and board control number associated with AA Co., Ltd., thereby making it possible to reuse the main control board 71 in an even newer pachislot machine 1.

In other words, in configuration example 2 shown in Figure 35, by printing a code including the manufacturer's name and board control number, it is possible to save printing space for each manufacturer's name and board control number on the surface of the main control board 71, making it possible to increase its reusability compared to configuration example 1 shown in Figure 35.

<Configuration Example 3>
Configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35 , like configuration example 2 described above, illustrates printing a code including the manufacturer's name and board control number. Note that in configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35 , multiple codes (e.g., four) are printed from the beginning. For example, two codes are printed for each of AA Co., Ltd. and BB Co., Ltd. Furthermore, on the surface of the main control board 71 (or on the corresponding main control board case), the locations corresponding to each code can be crimped with, for example, a strip-shaped member, etc., to fix the code in an unreadable state. Furthermore, for example, by cutting the strip-shaped member, etc., the fixation can be released, making the code readable.

In configuration example 3 shown in Figure 35, when model A is first assumed to be manufactured by BB Co., Ltd., only the first code from the right is readable, and the second to fourth codes from the right are unreadable. The first code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number associated with BB Co., Ltd. Later, when model A is removed from the gaming facility and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model B, only the second code from the right is readable, and the first, third, and fourth codes from the right are unreadable. The second code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number associated with AA Co., Ltd.

If model B is subsequently removed from the gaming facility and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. attempts to manufacture model C, only the third code from the right will be made readable, and the first, second, and fourth codes from the right will be made unreadable. The third code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number associated with BB Co., Ltd. If model C is subsequently removed from the gaming facility and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. attempts to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA can make only the fourth code from the right readable and the first through third codes from the right unreadable, thereby enabling them to reuse the main control board 71 in an even newer pachislot machine 1.

Furthermore, in configuration example 3 shown in Figure 35, it is sufficient to make at least one code readable and the other codes unreadable, which allows for further reuse and allows for reuse by a greater number of gaming machine manufacturers. Note that configuration example 3 shown in Figure 35 can also be configured so that only crimping holes are provided and codes are printed in the locations corresponding to the crimping holes each time the machine is reused.

Second Embodiment
The first embodiment has been described above. A second embodiment will now be described. The basic configuration of the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. In the following, components that are the same as those of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment will be described with the same reference numerals. Furthermore, explanations of portions that apply to the second embodiment as well as the first embodiment will be omitted.

Note that even if the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as "In the first embodiment, ..." or "In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...," they can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, provided that they do not deviate from the spirit of the second embodiment. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first embodiment (including each configuration shown in the modified example and the extended example) can be partially replaced with or combined with the configuration shown in the second embodiment.

Furthermore, even if a component has a different shape from the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, components with similar functions may be assigned the same reference numerals for convenience. Furthermore, even if a component has the same shape or the same processing as the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, different reference numerals or step numbers may be assigned for convenience.

<Rock performance>
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a lock effect. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "1". FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "2". FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3". FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "4". FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "5". FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "6".

As explained in the first embodiment, the lock effect is an effect that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time (disables the player's game operations for a predetermined period of time). In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, it is possible to execute reel effects or simulated games while the lock effect is being executed.

As explained in the first embodiment, reel effects are produced by spinning or stopping (temporarily stopping) each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R without the player's input during a period in which the player's input is disabled. Furthermore, pseudo-game effects are produced by accepting the player's input in a simulated manner during a period in which the player's input is disabled, thereby spinning or stopping (temporarily stopping) each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R.

Note that in lock effects (reel effects or simulated games), a combination of symbols may be displayed in a static state, but no special benefits will be awarded to the player based on that combination of symbols being displayed in a static state. For example, even if the combination of symbols displayed in a reel effect or simulated game matches a combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table (see Figures 11 to 14), no medals will be paid out according to that combination of symbols.

Furthermore, for example, in this embodiment, when a specific symbol combination (for example, a line of red 7s) is stopped and displayed in the reel presentation or simulated game, a transition to the AT state may occur. However, this merely notifies (suggests) that a decision has been made to transition to the AT state via a specific symbol combination (for example, a line of red 7s) in a state where a transition to the AT state has already been decided; it does not mean that a decision has been made to transition to the AT state in response to a specific symbol combination (for example, a line of red 7s) being stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, the lock effects shown in Figure 36 (lock effects corresponding to lock effect numbers "1" to "6") are provided as such lock effects. The lock effects corresponding to lock effect numbers "1" to "6" are each composed of one of the lock effects (i) to (iv) below, or a combination of two of these lock effects.

(i) The "red 7" symbols line up in the reel presentation. (ii) The "red 7" symbols do not line up in the reel presentation. (iii) The "red 7" symbols line up in the pseudo-game. (iv) The "red 7" symbols do not line up in the pseudo-game.

In the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "1", the effect (i) above will be performed. In the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "2", the effect (ii) above will be performed. In the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3", the effect (iii) above will be performed. In the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "4", the effect (iv) above will be performed. In the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "5", the effect (iv) above will be performed, followed by the effect (i) above. In the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "6", the effect (ii) above will be performed, followed by the effect (iii) above.

In this embodiment, the same symbol arrangement table (see Figure 9) as in the first embodiment is used, with the "Red 7" positioned at symbol position "0." Figures 37 to 42 also show numbers indicating the symbol positions corresponding to the symbols that are stopped and displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37, in the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "1," after the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to spin (see FIG. 37(a)), the right reel 3R stops spinning (automatically) without the player's stopping operation, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 37(b)). Next, the center reel 3C stops spinning (automatically) without the player's stopping operation, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the center reel 3C (see FIG. 37(c)). Then, the left reel 3L stops spinning (automatically) without the player's stopping operation, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see FIG. 37(d)).

As shown in Figure 38, in the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "2," after the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R begin to spin (see Figure 38(a)), the right reel 3R stops spinning (automatically) without the player's stopping operation, and a "red 7" is displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see Figure 38(b)). Next, the center reel 3C stops spinning (automatically) without the player's stopping operation, and a "red 7" is displayed in the middle area of the center reel 3C (see Figure 38(c)). Then, the left reel 3L stops spinning (automatically) without the player's stopping operation, and a symbol other than the "red 7" (in this example, a "white blank 1") is displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see Figure 38(d)).

As shown in Figure 39, in the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3," after the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to spin (see Figure 39(a)), the right reel 3R stops spinning in response to a stop operation on the right reel 3R, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see Figure 39(b)). In this state, the right reel 3R swings at a predetermined timing. Next, the center reel 3C stops spinning in response to a stop operation on the center reel 3C, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the center reel 3C (see Figure 39(c)). In this state, the center reel 3C swings at a predetermined timing, and the swinging of the right reel 3R also continues. Then, the left reel 3L stops spinning in response to a stop operation on the left reel 3L, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see Figure 39(d)). In this state, the left reel 3L swings at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and center reel 3C also continue to swing.

As shown in Figure 40, in the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "4," after the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R begins (see Figure 40(a)), the rotation of the right reel 3R stops in response to a stop operation on the right reel 3R, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see Figure 40(b)). In this state, the right reel 3R swings at a predetermined timing. Next, the rotation of the center reel 3C stops in response to a stop operation on the center reel 3C, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the center reel 3C (see Figure 40(c)). In this state, the center reel 3C swings at a predetermined timing, and the swing of the right reel 3R also continues. Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L stops in response to a stop operation on the left reel 3L, and a symbol other than the "red 7" (in this example, a "white blank 1") is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see Figure 40(d)). In this state, the left reel 3L swings at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and center reel 3C also continue to swing.

As shown in Figure 41, in the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "5," after the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R begins (see Figure 41(a)), the rotation of the right reel 3R stops in response to a stop operation on the right reel 3R, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see Figure 41(b)). In this state, the right reel 3R swings at a predetermined timing. Next, the rotation of the center reel 3C stops in response to a stop operation on the center reel 3C, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the center reel 3C (see Figure 41(c)). In this state, the center reel 3C swings at a predetermined timing, and the swing of the right reel 3R also continues. Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L stops in response to a stop operation on the left reel 3L, and a symbol other than the "red 7" (in this example, a "white blank 1") is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see Figure 41(d)). In this state, the left reel 3L swings at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and center reel 3C continue to swing. After that, the left reel 3L spins again (see Figure 41(e)), and the left reel 3L stops spinning (automatically) without the player performing a stopping operation, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see Figure 41(f)). In this state, the left reel 3L swings at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and center reel 3C continue to swing.

As shown in Figure 42, in the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "6," after each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R begins to spin (see Figure 42(a)), the right reel 3R stops spinning (automatically) without the player's stopping operation, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see Figure 42(b)). Next, the center reel 3C stops spinning (automatically) without the player's stopping operation, and a "red 7" is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the center reel 3C (see Figure 42(c)). Then, the left reel 3L stops spinning (automatically) without the player's stopping operation, and a symbol other than the "red 7" (in this example, a "white blank 1") is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see Figure 42(d)). The left reel 3L then spins again (see Figure 42(e)), and stops spinning in response to a stop operation on the left reel 3L, with a "red 7" displayed as a static symbol in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see Figure 42(f)). In this state, the left reel 3L swings at a predetermined timing, while the right reel 3R and middle reel 3C do not swing. Note that after the "red 7" is displayed as a static symbol in the middle area of the left reel 3L, the right reel 3R and middle reel 3C may swing at a predetermined timing, similar to the left reel 3L.

<Lock effect determination process>
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the lock effect determination process carried out in the main control circuit.

The lock effect determination process shown in Figure 43 is performed by the main control circuit 100 after the process of step S6 (game start state control process) in Figure 23 (main process) is executed.

In the lock effect determination process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the current game zone is an advantageous zone (step S1001). As explained in the first embodiment, an advantageous zone is a game period that can be controlled to a game state (AT state) in which information about stop operations that are advantageous to the player is notified. Advantageous zones include an effect zone (advantageous zone, normal game) and an increase zone (advantageous zone, pseudo bonus) (see Figure 5). An effect zone is a game state (non-AT state) in which information about stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not notified. It is similar to a non-advantageous zone in that it is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, but differs from a non-advantageous zone in that a mode transition occurs. An increase zone is an AT state (a game state that is advantageous to the player).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming zone is not a favorable zone, it terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming zone is a favorable zone, it determines whether or not a pseudo bonus is in progress (step S1002). As explained in the first embodiment, a pseudo bonus is a gaming state (AT state) in which information about stop operations that are favorable to the player is notified. The main CPU 101 can determine whether or not a pseudo bonus is in progress by referring to the mode flag storage area (see Figure 20) of the main RAM 103.

If it is determined that a pseudo bonus is in progress, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game has transitioned to the pseudo bonus (step S1003). As explained in the first embodiment, when an internal winning combination is determined by the internal lottery process (see step S5 in FIG. 23), a sub-flag (see FIG. 7(a)) at the time of winning the advantageous zone is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the internal winning combination. Then, in the presentation zone (advantageous zone/normal play), the pseudo bonus transition lottery table (see FIG. 7(c)) is referenced, and a lottery (pseudo bonus transition lottery) is conducted based on the random number value and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous zone, and the result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery is determined as "winning" or "not winning." The "winning" combination includes "winning (current play)" and "winning (next play)."

If a "winning lottery (current game)" is determined, for example, in step S106 of the processing at the start of play during the advantageous zone (see FIG. 28) for the current game (the game in which the pseudo bonus transition lottery was drawn), the bit corresponding to "pseudo bonus" in the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is set to "1." As a result, if a "winning lottery (current game)" is determined, a transition will occur from the current game to the pseudo bonus. Similarly, if a "winning lottery (next game)" is determined, for example, in step S106 of the processing at the start of play during the advantageous zone (see FIG. 28) for the next game (the game following the game in which the pseudo bonus transition lottery was drawn), the bit corresponding to "pseudo bonus" in the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is set to "1." As a result, if a "winning lottery (next game)" is determined, a transition will occur from the next game to the pseudo bonus.

If it is determined that the current game did not transition to the pseudo bonus, the main CPU 101 determines whether the 1G consecutive lottery was won (step S1004). As explained in the first embodiment, in the pseudo bonus, the 1G consecutive lottery table (see FIG. 7(d)) is referenced, and a lottery (1G consecutive lottery) is conducted based on the random number value and the sub-flag when the advantageous zone is won, and the result of the 1G consecutive lottery is determined to be "winning" or "not winning." As a "winning" result, "winning lottery (1G consecutive + 1)" is provided.

If "Winning (1G consecutive + 1)" is determined, for example, in step S103 of the processing at the start of play during the advantageous zone (see FIG. 28), the right to generate 1G consecutive wins (1G consecutive stock) is granted (the 1G consecutive stock counter is incremented by 1). When the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter is 1 or greater (i.e., if 1G consecutive stocks are held), one 1G consecutive stock is consumed (the 1G consecutive stock counter is decremented by 1), and the pseudo bonus will start again from the next play after the pseudo bonus ends.

If it is determined in step S1003 that the current game has transitioned to the pseudo bonus, or if it is determined in step S1004 that the 1G consecutive lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 randomly selects one of the lock effect numbers "1" and "6" (see FIG. 36) (step S1005). The main CPU 101 then sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1006) and ends this subroutine. This results in a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1" or "6." The lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1" or "6" is an effect equivalent to the "match red 7s" effect described in the first embodiment. Note that if the 1G consecutive lottery has been won, a lock effect different from the lock effect (the "match red 7s" effect) performed when the game transitions to the pseudo bonus (for example, the special bonus effect described in the first embodiment) may be performed.

If it is determined in step S1002 that a pseudo bonus is not in progress, the main CPU 101 determines whether the conditions for generating a special lock effect have been met (step S1007). As explained in the first embodiment, the special lock effect is an effect that can be executed with a predetermined probability when a "confirmed role" (see FIG. 7(a)) is determined as the sub-flag when a favorable zone is won, and a transition to Heaven C mode (see FIG. 6) is determined by the mode transition lottery (see FIG. 8(f)). In other words, the conditions for generating a special lock effect are that a "confirmed role" is determined as the sub-flag when a favorable zone is won, a transition to Heaven C mode is determined by the mode transition lottery, and the special lock effect generation lottery, which can be won with a predetermined probability, is won.

If the sub-flag indicates a "Confirmed Role" when a player wins the advantageous zone, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery always determines a "Winning Lottery (Next Play)" (see Figure 7(c)), confirming the transition to the pseudo-bonus. Heaven C mode is a mode in which consecutive pseudo-bonuses can be expected. When the pseudo-bonus starts, the ceiling shortening lottery table (see Figure 8(e)) is referenced, and a lottery based on a random number value (ceiling shortening lottery) is conducted, determining a "Winning Lottery" or "No Winning Lottery" as the result of the ceiling shortening lottery. If a "Winning Lottery" is determined, the ceiling game count is set to "0 games" when the pseudo-bonus ends. This means that the pseudo-bonus will start again from the next play after the pseudo-bonus ends. Heaven C mode is a mode in which a player can win the ceiling shortening lottery (heaven mode), and is also a mode in which heaven mode is likely to be maintained (a mode advantageous to the player).

If it is determined in step S1004 that the 1G consecutive lottery has not been won, or if it is determined in step S1007 that the conditions for generating the special lock effect have not been met, the main CPU 101 executes a lock effect lottery (step S1008). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result is a "win" or a "no win" by conducting a lottery based on a random number value. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock effect lottery has been won (step S1009). If it is determined that the lock effect lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 randomly selects one of the lock effect numbers "2" or "4" (see Figure 36) (step S1010). The main CPU 101 then sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1011) and ends this subroutine. This results in the lock effect (a so-called fake effect) corresponding to the lock effect number "2" or "4" being performed.

If it is determined in step S1007 that the conditions for generating the special lock effect have been met, the main CPU 101 randomly selects one of the lock effect numbers "3" and "5" (see Figure 36) (step S1012). The main CPU 101 then sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1013) and ends this subroutine. This causes the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "5" to be generated.

The lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3" or "5" is equivalent to the special lock effect described in the first embodiment. As with the first embodiment, the special lock effect can be configured not to be executed if the degree of game progress (game history) during the advantageous zone meets certain conditions. Such game history can include the value of the advantageous zone game number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the advantageous zone payout number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, etc. (values referenced in limit processing). An upper limit (limiter) is set for the duration of the advantageous zone, and limit processing is a process for ending the advantageous zone when the limiter is reached (see Figure 16).

In the lock effect determination process shown in Figure 43, it has been explained that if the pseudo-bonus transition lottery or the 1G consecutive lottery is won, a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "1" or "6" will be performed (lock effects corresponding to lock effect numbers "3" and "5" will not be performed). However, in this embodiment, it may also be possible to perform a lock effect (special lock effect) corresponding to lock effect number "3" or "5" if the pseudo-bonus transition lottery or the 1G consecutive lottery is won. As explained in the first embodiment, when the semi-limit processing (number of games) or semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the 1G consecutive lottery will not be executed (see Figure 16). Furthermore, when the semi-limit processing (number of games) or semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery may not be executed. When the pseudo bonus transition lottery and 1G consecutive lottery are no longer executed, the determination results in steps S1003, S1004, and S1007 in FIG. 43 all become "NO," and the lock effect is no longer executed. In this embodiment, for example, it is possible to configure the lock effect (pseudo game as a special lock effect) to no longer be executed when a variable in the advantageous zone (such as the value of the advantageous zone game count counter, the value of the control game count counter, the value of the advantageous zone payout counter, or the value of the control payout counter, or a value calculated based on these values and the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter) reaches a predetermined value or greater.

<Lock effect execution process>
Fig. 44 is a flowchart showing the lock effect execution process carried out in the main control circuit Fig. 45 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device in a pseudo game.

The lock effect execution process shown in Figure 44 is performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S8 (main effect control process at the start of play) of Figure 23 (main processing).

In the lock effect execution process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the lock effect start flag (see steps S1006, S1011, and S1013 in FIG. 43) is set to on (step S1021). If it determines that the lock effect start flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect start flag is set to on, the main CPU 101 executes a lock command generation and storage process (step S1022). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates lock command data and stores the generated lock command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The lock command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in Figure 32). This enables the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that reel locking has begun, and to determine the timing for executing various effects, etc.

Specifically, upon receiving the lock command data, the sub-control circuit 200 sets effect data corresponding to various lock effects. As a result, for example, if a lock effect corresponding to one of lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 43), the "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 shown in FIG. 45 is displayed on the main display device 210. The "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 is an image suggesting that the player should perform a stop operation in the order of "right reel 3R → center reel 3C → left reel 3L" and at the timing when a "red 7" symbol can be displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. By displaying the "Aim for 7" effect image 1100, it is possible to have the player operate the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R in the suggested order, thereby allowing the player to participate in a simulated game.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to OFF (step S1023). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 executes a lock effect acceleration process (step S1024). In this process, the main CPU 101 requests the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. When the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is requested, the reel control process (see step S203 in FIG. 32) controls the drive of the stepping motor, and the rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R begins. Then, each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R accelerates until its rotation reaches a constant speed, and is then controlled to maintain that constant speed. Note that the rotational pattern of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R until the constant speed is reached is not limited to normal rotation (forward rotation) but may include reel actions such as slow rotation, high-speed rotation, reverse rotation, or a combination thereof. Additionally, each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may not be maintained in a constant rotational state, but may be decelerated immediately after reaching a predetermined speed.

In the reel control process (see step S203 in Figure 32), the main CPU 101 controls each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R by switching the excitation pattern of the excitation phase over time so that each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotates and stops in the manner shown in Figures 37 to 42. When accelerating the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for acceleration. When rotating reels 3L, 3C, 3R at a constant speed, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for constant speed. When decelerating the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for deceleration. When reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are kept stopped, the main CPU 101 outputs pulse signals to excite the excitation phases based on the excitation pattern for stopping. When reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are swung, the main CPU 101 outputs pulse signals to excite the excitation phases based on the excitation pattern for swinging. Each excitation pattern is maintained for a predetermined time. This time is managed by the timer update process (see step S206 in Figure 32). The excitation method is not particularly limited, and two-phase excitation, one-two-phase excitation, or the like can be used as appropriate. Furthermore, stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R may be PM-type stepping motors or HB-type stepping motors. The drive method may be bipolar or unipolar.

After executing the processing of step S1024, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo-game in progress flag is set to ON (step S1025). The pseudo-game in progress flag is a flag that indicates that a pseudo-game is being executed. Although not shown, if a lock effect corresponding to any of lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected, the main CPU 101 also performs processing to set the pseudo-game in progress flag to ON in the processing of step S1024. Furthermore, if a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "6" is selected, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo-game in progress flag to ON when it starts control to keep the left reel 3L stopped in the reel effect (see Figure 42 (d)) (when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R).

If it is determined that the pseudo-game in-progress flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes pseudo-game in-progress processing (step S1026). The pseudo-game in-progress processing will be described later using Figure 46.

If it is determined in step S1025 that the pseudo-game in progress flag is not set to ON, or after executing the processing of step S1026, the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock effect end flag is set to ON (step S1027). The lock effect end flag is a flag indicating that the lock effect has ended. Although not shown, if a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "1" or "2" is selected, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON when it starts control to maintain the left reel 3L in a stopped state (see Figures 37(d) and 38(d)) (when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R). Furthermore, if a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3" or "4" is selected, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (see step S1073 in FIG. 47) when it starts control to swing the left reel 3L (see FIGS. 39(d) and 40(d)) (when all stopping operations for the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the pseudo game are completed) or when it starts control to swing the left reel 3L that has stopped after the re-spinning (see FIG. 41(f)) or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the re-spinning of the left reel 3L or the left reel 3L was started or when it starts control to swing the left reel 3L that has stopped after the re-spinning (see step S1084 in FIG. 48). Furthermore, if the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "6" is selected, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (see step S1112 in FIG. 49) when it starts control to swing the stopped left reel 3L after the respin (see FIG. 42(f)) (when the stopping operation for the left reel 3L in the pseudo game after the respin is completed).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the lock effect end flag is not set to ON, it returns the process to step S1025. On the other hand, if it determines that the lock effect end flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the random delay flag to ON (step S1028) and ends this subroutine. The random delay flag is a flag used for performing random delay processing. As explained in the first embodiment, random delay processing is processing for randomly generating a delay period for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R after the lock effect before starting rotation, and is performed to prevent players from being prone to "eye-pressing" as a result of the lock effect. Details of the random delay processing will be explained later using Figure 51.

<Processing during pseudo-game play>
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the processing during pseudo-game play carried out in the main control circuit.

The pseudo-game processing shown in Figure 46 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S1026 of Figure 44 (lock effect execution processing).

In the simulated game processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination processing (see Figure 43) is lock effect number "6" (step S1041).

If it is determined that the selected lock effect number is not lock effect number "6," the main CPU 101 executes normal pseudo game processing (step S1042). The normal pseudo game processing will be described later using FIG. 47. After executing the processing of step S1042, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the selected lock effect number is lock effect number "6," it executes post-reel effect pseudo-game processing (step S1043). The post-reel effect pseudo-game processing will be described later using FIG. 49. After executing the processing of step S1043, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Normal pseudo-game processing>
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the normal pseudo-game processing performed in the main control circuit.

The normal pseudo-game processing shown in Figure 47 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S1042 of Figure 46 (pseudo-game processing).

In normal pseudo-game processing, the main CPU 101 first executes steps S1061 to S1068, which are essentially the same as steps S111 to S120 in Figure 29 (reel stop control processing).

Here, in the normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 47, processing equivalent to steps S116 and S117 in FIG. 29 is not performed. That is, the number of sliding symbols (see step S117) is not determined, and in the processing of step S1066, the main CPU 101 determines and stores the predetermined position where the symbol will ultimately stop as the expected stop position, regardless of the stop start position (see step S116). As a result, each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R stops in the manner shown in FIGS. 39(b)-(d), 40(b)-(d), and 41(b)-(d). In the pseudo-game, predetermined symbols may be displayed in this manner regardless of the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols, or, similar to the reel stop control processing (in the main game) shown in FIG. 29, control may be performed to stop each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R based on the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols. In this case, for example, even if a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3" or "5" is selected, if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "red 7" symbol will not be aligned. Note that when each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces, the maximum number of sliding pieces in the pseudo game may be the same as the maximum number of sliding pieces in the main game, or may be greater than or less than the maximum number of sliding pieces in the main game.

Furthermore, in step S111 of Figure 29, 80 rotations per minute was given as an example of the speed (constant rotation speed) when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is rotating at a constant speed. The constant rotation speed in the pseudo game may be the same as the constant rotation speed in the main game (e.g., 80 rotations per minute), may be faster than the constant rotation speed in the main game (e.g., 90 to 180 rotations per minute, or 120 to 160 rotations per minute), or may be slower than the constant rotation speed in the main game (e.g., 10 to 60 rotations per minute, or 30 to 45 rotations per minute). Furthermore, in the normal pseudo game processing shown in FIG. 47, as in the main game, the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are activated in the pseudo game after the rotation speed of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R reaches a constant rotation speed (see step S1062). However, in the pseudo game, the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R may also be activated before the rotation speed of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R reaches a constant rotation speed.

After executing the processing of step S1068, the main CPU 101 determines whether the controlled reel (see step S1065) has stopped (step S1069). In this processing, the main CPU 101 determines whether the control to decelerate the rotation of the controlled reel has ended. The main CPU 101 can recognize that the control to decelerate the rotation of the controlled reel has ended (the controlled reel has stopped) when the retention time of the deceleration excitation pattern has expired (when the time required to stop the rotation of the controlled reel has elapsed).

If it is determined that the controlled reel has not stopped, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1069 again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the controlled reel has stopped, the main CPU 101 executes control to swing the controlled reel (step S1070). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets data corresponding to the swing excitation pattern for swinging the controlled reel. This drives and controls the stepping motor 51 corresponding to the controlled reel, causing the controlled reel to swing in a predetermined manner. The swing excitation pattern is not particularly limited, but it is possible to employ a configuration in which two-phase excitation is performed so that excitation pattern I and excitation pattern II are repeated as follows:

Although not shown, each of the stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R has four excitation phases (A phase, B phase, C phase, and D phase) sequentially arranged in a clockwise direction, and eight excitation patterns (A phase-B phase, B phase, B phase-C phase, C phase, C phase-D phase, D phase, D phase-A phase, and A phase) are provided as 1-2 phase excitation patterns. For example, it is possible to employ a configuration in which an excitation pattern (e.g., B phase-C phase) having an offset value of 2 from a reference excitation pattern is held as the excitation pattern I over a time T ₁ (e.g., 3 interruption times), and an excitation pattern (e.g., A phase-B phase) having an offset value of 0 from the reference excitation pattern is held as the excitation pattern II over a time T ₂ (e.g., 300 interruption times). It is desirable that _T2 be less than 500 ms, and it is also desirable that the total time of _T1 and _T2 be less than 500 ms. For example, _T1 can be set to approximately 1 to 20 ms (or 2 to 10 ms), and _T2 can be set to approximately 100 to 490 ms (or 200 to 450 ms). Furthermore, the current used by the stepping motor 51 when excitation control is performed based on the oscillation excitation pattern may be configured to be greater than the current used by the stepping motor 51 when excitation control is performed based on the stop excitation pattern, and may be approximately the same as the current used by the stepping motor 51 when excitation control is performed based on the constant-speed excitation pattern. For example, the current used by the stepping motor 51 when excitation control is performed based on the oscillation excitation pattern may be approximately 60% (e.g., approximately 40 to 80%, or approximately 50 to 70%) of the current used by the stepping motor 51 when excitation control is performed based on the acceleration excitation pattern or the deceleration excitation pattern.

By controlling the driving of the stepping motor 51 as described above, the reel 3 can be swung up and down (see Figures 39(b)-(d), 40(b)-(d), and 41(b)-(d)). The swaying pattern of the reel 3 is not particularly limited, as long as the reel 3 moves to an extent that is noticeable to the player. However, because "swaying" refers to a slight vibration and can also be described as a "temporary stop," it is desirable that the amplitude of the vibration does not exceed one symbol (or 1/2 symbol, 1/4 symbol, 1/8 symbol, or 1/16 symbol). Note that "swaying" is a concept that encompasses not only cases in which the reel 3 moves at a regular cycle, but also cases in which the reel 3 moves non-periodically. Furthermore, periods in which the reel 3 is almost completely stopped are also included in "swaying," but it is desirable that such periods be less than 500 ms (e.g., 100-490 ms, or 200-450 ms). In other words, if the reel 3 performs some kind of movement within a range of less than 500 ms, it can be called "swinging."

After executing the processing of step S1070, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not any of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are active (step S1071). This processing is the same as the processing of step S121 in Figure 29 (reel stop control processing). The main CPU 101 can recognize the operation status of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R by referencing the activated stop button storage area (see Figure 21).

If it is determined that valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R exist, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S1063. On the other hand, if it is determined that valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R do not exist, the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 43) is lock effect number "5" (step S1072).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the selected lock effect number is not lock effect number "5," it sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1073) and ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the selected lock effect number is lock effect number "5," it executes post-pseudo-game reel effect processing (step S1074). The post-pseudo-game reel effect processing will be described later using Figure 48. After executing the processing of step S1074, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Reel effect processing after pseudo game>
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the post-pseudo game reel effect processing carried out in the main control circuit.

The post-pseudo-game reel effect processing shown in Figure 48 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S1074 of Figure 47 (normal pseudo-game processing).

In the post-pseudo-game reel effect processing, the main CPU 101 first executes a re-acceleration process (step S1081). This process is the same as the process in step S1024 in Figure 44 (lock effect execution process). In step S1024, the main CPU 101 requests the start of rotation of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, but in step S1081, the main CPU 101 requests the start of rotation of only the left reel 3L. All other points are as described in step S1024. Execution of step S1081 controls the drive of the stepping motor 51L, and starts the rotation of the left reel 3L (see Figure 41 (e)).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the left reel 3L has stopped (step S1082). This process is the same as the process in step S1069 in Figure 47 (normal pseudo-game processing). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the left reel 3L has stopped when a predetermined time has passed since the left reel 3L began to spin again.

If it is determined that the left reel 3L has not stopped, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1082 again. On the other hand, if it is determined that the left reel 3L has stopped, the main CPU 101 executes control to swing the left reel 3L (step S1083). This process is the same as the process of step S1070 in Figure 47 (normal pseudo-game processing). This controls the drive of the stepping motor 51L, causing the left reel 3L to swing up and down (see Figure 41 (f)).

The main CPU 101 then sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1084) and ends this subroutine.

<Processing during pseudo-game after reel effect>
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-game processing after reel presentation carried out in the main control circuit.

The pseudo-game processing after reel effect shown in Figure 49 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S1043 of Figure 46 (pseudo-game processing). As described above, when the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "6" is selected, the pseudo-game flag is set to ON when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of rotation of each of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (see step S1024 of Figure 44). As a result, the determination result of step S1025 of Figure 44 becomes "YES", and the pseudo-game processing after reel effect shown in Figure 49 is initiated.

In the post-reel effect pseudo-game processing, the main CPU 101 first executes post-reel effect pseudo-game start command generation and storage processing (step S1101). In this processing, the main CPU 101 generates post-reel effect pseudo-game start command data and stores the generated post-reel effect pseudo-game start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The post-reel effect pseudo-game start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission processing (see step S204 of Figure 32). This enables the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that the reel effect (ii) above has ended and the pseudo game (iii) above has begun (see Figure 36), and to determine the timing of executing various effects. Specifically, upon receiving the post-reel effect pseudo-game start command data, the sub-control circuit 200 sets effect data corresponding to the end of the reel effect and the start of the pseudo game. As a result, for example, although not shown, a text image ("hit the lever" image) with the message "hit the lever" is displayed on the main display device 210, encouraging the player to operate the start lever 7.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1102). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start switch 7S has been turned on (see step S50 in FIG. 25). If it determines that the start lever 7 has not been operated, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1102 again. On the other hand, if it determines that the start lever 7 has been operated, the main CPU 101 executes the re-acceleration process (step S1103). This process is the same as the process of step S1081 in FIG. 48 (post-pseudo-game reel effect process). This controls the drive of the stepping motor 51L, and starts the rotation of the left reel 3L (see FIG. 42(e)). In this way, in the post-reel effect pseudo-game process shown in FIG. 49, it is explained that the left reel 3L is re-spinned after the reel effect ends, provided that the start lever 7 is operated. However, the left reel 3L may be made to spin again automatically after the reel effect has ended (when a predetermined time has passed since all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning in the reel effect).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the rotation speed of the left reel 3L has reached the constant rotation speed (step S1104). As described above, the constant rotation speed in the pseudo game may be different from the constant rotation speed (80 rotations per minute) in the main game (see step S1061 in Figure 47). If the main CPU 101 determines that the rotation speed of the left reel 3L has not reached the constant rotation speed, it executes the processing of step S1104 again. On the other hand, if it determines that the rotation speed of the left reel 3L has reached the constant rotation speed, the main CPU 101 allows the left reel 3L to stop (step S1105). In this processing, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 4 of the activated stop button storage area (see Figure 21). This activates the left stop button 8L. As mentioned above, the left stop button 8L may be activated before the rotation speed of the left reel 3L reaches the constant rotation speed (see step S1062 in Figure 47).

The main CPU 101 then executes steps S1106 to S1111, which are essentially the same as steps S1063 to S1070 in FIG. 47. In the normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 47, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R corresponding to the operated stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are determined as the reels to be controlled, but in the post-reel pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 49, the left reel 3L is the reel to be controlled. By executing step S1111, the drive of the stepping motor 51L is controlled, causing the left reel 3L to swing up and down (see FIG. 42(f)). The main CPU 101 then sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1112) and ends this subroutine.

<Reel spin start process>
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the reel rotation start process carried out in the main control circuit.

The reel rotation start processing shown in Figure 50 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S10 of Figure 23 (main processing).

In the reel spin start processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the random delay flag (see step S1028 in Figure 44) is set to on (step S1121).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the random delay flag is set to ON, it determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the random delay flag was set to ON (since the lock effect ended) (step S1122). If it determines that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 executes the processing of step S1122 again. On the other hand, if it determines that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 executes the random delay processing (step S1123). As described above, the random delay processing is a process for randomly generating a delay period for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R after the lock effect has occurred before the reels begin to spin. Details of the random delay processing will be explained later using Figure 51. After executing the processing of step S1123, the main CPU 101 sets the random delay flag to OFF (step S1124) and ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1121 that the random delay flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes normal acceleration processing (step S1125). This processing is the same as that described in step S10 of Figure 23 (main processing). In the processing of step S1125, unlike the random delay processing, the main CPU 101 simultaneously requests the start of rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As a result, the start of rotation and acceleration of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R occur simultaneously, and they simultaneously reach a constant speed. After executing the processing of step S1125, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

In the reel spin start process shown in Figure 50, it is explained that once the lock effect has ended, the random delay process is automatically executed without any operation by the player. However, the random delay process may also be executed on the condition that the player performs an operation (for example, operating the start lever 7) after the lock effect has ended. In this case, for example, when the determination result in step S1122 is "YES," the above-mentioned "hit the lever" image (see step S1101 in Figure 49) may be displayed on the main display device 210. Thereafter, when the start lever 7 is operated, it is possible to configure the random delay process (processing in step S1123) to start at the timing of the start lever 7 operation. On the other hand, if the start lever 7 is not operated within a predetermined time after the "hit the lever" image is displayed, the random delay process may be started when the predetermined time has elapsed.

<Random Delay Processing>
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the random delay processing performed in the main control circuit.

The random delay processing shown in Figure 51 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S1123 of Figure 50 (reel rotation start processing).

In the random delay process, the main CPU 101 first obtains a random number value for the left reel, a random number value for the center reel, and a random number value for the right reel (step S1141). The random number value for the left reel, the random number value for the center reel, and the random number value for the right reel are random number values used to randomly determine the spin start timing of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. In the process of step S1141, the main CPU 101 obtains a number between 0 and 20 as the random number value for the left reel, a number between 0 and 20 as the random number value for the center reel, and a number between 0 and 20 as the random number value for the right reel.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets values corresponding to the random number value for the left reel, the random number value for the center reel, and the random number value for the right reel to the left reel acceleration timer, the center reel acceleration timer, and the right reel acceleration timer, respectively (step S1142). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the value obtained by multiplying the random number value for the left reel by a predetermined number (e.g., 32) to the left reel acceleration timer, sets the value obtained by multiplying the random number value for the center reel by a predetermined number (e.g., 32) to the center reel acceleration timer, and sets the value obtained by multiplying the random number value for the right reel by a predetermined number (e.g., 32) to the right reel acceleration timer. For example, if the random number value for the left reel is 5, the left reel acceleration timer is set to "160." If the random number value for the center reel is 10, the left reel acceleration timer is set to "320." If the random number value for the right reel is 15, the right reel acceleration timer is set to "480." The left reel acceleration timer, center reel acceleration timer, and right reel acceleration timer are each updated by the timer update process (see step S206 in Figure 32). That is, the left reel acceleration timer, center reel acceleration timer, and right reel acceleration timer are each decremented by 1 each time the periodic interrupt process (see Figure 32) is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the left reel 3L has already accelerated (step S1143). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the left reel 3L has already accelerated if the left reel acceleration flag (see step S1146) is set to ON. If it determines that the left reel 3L has not already accelerated, the main CPU 101 determines whether the left reel acceleration timer is 0 (step S1144). If it determines that the left reel acceleration timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes left reel acceleration processing (step S1145). In this processing, the main CPU 101 controls the excitation phase so that it is excited based on the same excitation pattern as the excitation pattern used to accelerate the left reel 3L in the normal acceleration processing (see step S1124 of Figure 50). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the left reel acceleration flag to ON (step S1146).

If the main CPU 101 determines in step S1143 that the left reel 3L has already accelerated, if it determines in step S1144 that the left reel acceleration timer is not 0, or after executing the processing of step S1146, the main CPU 101 determines whether the center reel 3C has already accelerated (step S1147). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the center reel 3C has already accelerated if the center reel acceleration flag (see step S1150) is set to on. If the main CPU 101 determines that the center reel 3C has not already accelerated, the main CPU 101 determines whether the center reel acceleration timer is 0 (step S1148). If it determines that the center reel acceleration timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes center reel acceleration processing (step S1149). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the excitation phase so that it is excited based on the same excitation pattern as the excitation pattern used to accelerate the center reel 3C in the normal acceleration process (see step S1124 in Figure 50). The main CPU 101 then sets the center reel acceleration completed flag to ON (step S1150).

If the main CPU 101 determines in step S1147 that the center reel 3C has already accelerated, if it determines in step S1148 that the center reel acceleration timer is not 0, or after executing the processing of step S1150, the main CPU 101 determines whether the right reel 3R has already accelerated (step S1151). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the right reel 3R has already accelerated if the right reel acceleration flag (see step S1154) is set to on. If the main CPU 101 determines that the right reel 3R has not already accelerated, the main CPU 101 determines whether the right reel acceleration timer is 0 (step S1152). If it determines that the right reel acceleration timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes right reel acceleration processing (step S1153). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the excitation phase so that it is excited based on the same excitation pattern as the excitation pattern used to accelerate the right reel 3R in the normal acceleration process (see step S1124 in Figure 50). The main CPU 101 then sets the right reel acceleration completed flag to ON (step S1154).

If it is determined in step S1151 that the right reel 3R has already accelerated, if it is determined in step S1152 that the right reel acceleration timer is not 0, or after executing the processing of step S1154, the main CPU 101 determines whether all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have already accelerated (step S1155). The main CPU 101 can recognize that all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have already accelerated if the left reel acceleration flag, center reel acceleration flag, and right reel acceleration flag are all set to ON. If it is determined that at least one reel 3 has not already accelerated, the main CPU 101 returns processing to step S1143. On the other hand, if it is determined that all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have already accelerated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the timing at which each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R starts spinning is determined randomly, and in this respect, the random delay process (the acceleration process for reels 3L, 3C, and 3R when a lock effect is performed) differs from the normal acceleration process (the acceleration process for reels 3L, 3C, and 3R when a lock effect is not performed). However, the behavior of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R after spinning (the time it takes for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R to reach a constant speed after starting to spin) is the same whether a lock effect is performed or not.

<Reel control state in pseudo game>
52 to 54 are diagrams showing an example of the change over time in the reel control state when a pseudo game is being played.

Figures 52 and 53 show the relationship between player operations and reel control states when a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3" (see Figure 36) is performed. Figure 54 shows the relationship between player operations and reel control states when a lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "6" (see Figure 36) is performed. In the figures, "acceleration" indicates that the reel control state is an acceleration control state, "constant speed" indicates that the reel control state is a constant speed control state, "deceleration" indicates that the reel control state is a deceleration control state, "stop" indicates that the reel control state is a stop control state, and "swing" indicates that the reel control state is a swing control state.

The acceleration control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on an acceleration excitation pattern. The constant speed control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on a constant speed excitation pattern. The deceleration control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on a deceleration excitation pattern. The stop control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on a stop excitation pattern. The oscillation control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on an oscillation excitation pattern. Information indicating the reel control state (reel control state flag) is stored in a reel control state flag storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 recognizes the current reel control state by referencing the reel control state flag storage area, and in the reel control process (see step S203 in Figure 32), controls each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R so that the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern corresponding to the reel control state.

In the example shown in FIG. 52, when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to an acceleration control state, and after a predetermined time has passed, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to a constant speed control state. Thereafter, when one of the stop buttons 8 is operated as a first stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 targeted by the stop operation (first stopped reel) changes to a deceleration control state, and when the rotation of the first stopped reel stops, the reel control state for the first stopped reel changes to a swing control state. Similarly, when one of the stop buttons 8 is operated as a second stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 targeted by the stop operation (second stopped reel) changes to a deceleration control state, and when the rotation of the second stopped reel stops, the reel control state for the second stopped reel changes to a swing control state. Similarly, when any stop button 8 is operated as a third stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 that was the target of the stop operation (third stopped reel) changes to a deceleration control state, and when the rotation of the third stopped reel stops, the reel control state for the third stopped reel changes to a swing control state. Then, after the reel control state for all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to the swing control state, a random delay process is performed, and at random timing, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to an acceleration control state, and then the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to a constant speed control state.

In the example shown in FIG. 53, when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to an acceleration control state, and after a predetermined time has passed, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to a constant speed control state. Thereafter, when one of the stop buttons 8 is operated as a first stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 targeted by the stop operation (first stopped reel) changes to a deceleration control state, and when the rotation of the first stopped reel stops, the reel control state for the first stopped reel changes to a swing control state. Similarly, when one of the stop buttons 8 is operated as a second stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 targeted by the stop operation (second stopped reel) changes to a deceleration control state, and when the rotation of the second stopped reel stops, the reel control state for the second stopped reel changes to a swing control state. Similarly, when one of the stop buttons 8 is operated as a third stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 that was the target of the stop operation (the third stopped reel) changes to a deceleration control state, and when the rotation of the third stopped reel stops, the reel control state for the third stopped reel changes to a swing control state. Then, when a predetermined time has passed since the reel control states for all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changed to the swing control state, the reel control state for each of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to a stop control state. After that, when random delay processing is performed, the reel control state for each of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to an acceleration control state at random timing, and then the reel control state for each of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to a constant speed control state.

As described above, when random delay processing is performed, in the example shown in FIG. 52, a direct transition from the swing control state to the acceleration control state occurs, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 53, a transition from the swing control state to the stop control state occurs first, and then a transition from the stop control state to the acceleration control state occurs. In this embodiment, a stop control state may or may not be interposed between the swing control state and the acceleration control state. If a stop control state is interposed, the timing of the transition from the swing control state to the stop control state is not particularly limited. For example, when the determination result of step S1122 in FIG. 50 is "YES," the reel control state for all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be transitioned from the swing control state to the stop control state. Furthermore, when the pseudo game is switched to the main game (for example, when the determination result in step S1122 in FIG. 50 is "YES"), the above-described "hit the lever" image (see step S1101 in FIG. 49) may be displayed on the main display device 210, and when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be switched from the swing control state to the stop control state. In these cases, the swinging of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R ends simultaneously at the timing of the transition to the stop control state. This timing may be before or after the random delay process (see step S1123 in FIG. 50) is started. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the swinging may end at different times for each reel 3 (in the order in which the stop operation is performed). For example, for each reel 3, the swing control state may be switched from the swing control state to the stop control state when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reel control state was switched to the swing control state (since the rotation stopped).

In the example shown in Figure 54, when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes an acceleration control state, and after a predetermined time has passed, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes a constant speed control state. After that, after a predetermined time has passed, the reel control state for the first stopped reel (e.g., the right reel 3R) becomes a stop control state via a deceleration control state, regardless of the player's stop operation (automatically). Similarly, the reel control state for the second stopped reel (e.g., the center reel 3C) becomes a stop control state via a deceleration control state, regardless of the player's stop operation (automatically). Similarly, the reel control state for the third stopped reel (e.g., the left reel 3L) becomes a stop control state via a deceleration control state, regardless of the player's stop operation (automatically). Thereafter, the "hit the lever" image (see step S1101 in FIG. 49) described above is displayed on the main display device 210. When the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for the third stopped reel (e.g., left reel 3L) changes from an acceleration control state to a constant speed control state. When the stop button 8 (e.g., left stop button 8L) corresponding to the third stopped reel is operated, the reel control state for the reel 3 targeted by the stop operation (third stopped reel) changes to a deceleration control state. When the third stopped reel stops spinning, the reel control state for the third stopped reel changes to a swing control state. When a random delay process is then performed, the reel control state for each of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to an acceleration control state at random timing, and then the reel control state for each of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to a constant speed control state.

As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 54, the rotation of the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) is automatically stopped, but the reel control state for these reels does not become the swing control state after they have stopped. In this manner, in this embodiment, if one reel 3 stops without the player's stop operation, it is possible to configure that reel 3 not to swing. For example, if the rotation of the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) is automatically stopped, and then the rotation of the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) is stopped in response to the player's stop operation, these reels 3 may not swing when the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) stop, but may swing when the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) stops. 54, the third stop reel (e.g., the left reel 3L) may be automatically stopped once and then stopped again in response to a stop operation performed after the re-spinning, or the third stop reel (e.g., the left reel 3L) may be stopped in response to a stop operation (from the beginning without re-spinning) without automatically stopping the third stop reel (e.g., the left reel 3L). Similarly, if the rotation of the first stop reel (e.g., the right reel 3R) is automatically stopped and then the rotation of the second stop reel (e.g., the center reel 3C) and the third stop reel (e.g., the left reel 3L) is stopped in response to a stop operation by the player, the reel 3 may not be swung when the first stop reel (e.g., the right reel 3R) is stopped, but these reels 3 may be swung when the second stop reel (e.g., the center reel 3C) and the third stop reel (e.g., the left reel 3L) are stopped. In the above, it has been explained that the reel 3 that is to be stopped first is stopped automatically, and the reel 3 that is to be stopped later is stopped in response to the player's stop operation, but the opposite is also possible: the reel 3 that is to be stopped first is stopped in response to the player's stop operation, and the reel 3 that is to be stopped later is stopped automatically.

In this embodiment, it is also possible to configure the reel 3 to swing even when it stops without the player's stopping operation. For example, if the rotation of the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) through the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) is automatically stopped as shown in FIG. 54, the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) may be swung when the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) stops, the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) may be swung when the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) stops, and the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) may be swung when the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) stops.

In Figures 52 to 54, the player operates one stop button 8, and after that stop button 8 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (the stop switch 8S changes from an on state to an off state, i.e., becomes off-edge), the reel control state for the reel 3 corresponding to that stop button 8 is illustrated as changing to a swing control state. In this embodiment, the swing of the reel 3 corresponding to that stop button 8 may be initiated when the stop button 8 changes from an operated state to a non-operated state (becomes off-edge), or the swing of the reel 3 corresponding to that stop button 8 may be initiated when the stop button 8 changes from a non-operated state to an operated state (the stop switch 8S changes from an off state to an on state, i.e., becomes on-edge). For example, the sequence may be: on-edge of the first stop operation (no swing of the first stop reel) → off-edge of the first stop operation (start of swing of the first stop reel) → on-edge of the second stop operation (no swing of the second stop reel) → off-edge of the second stop operation (start of swing of the second stop reel) → on-edge of the third stop operation (no swing of the third stop reel) → off-edge of the third stop operation (start of swing of the third stop reel).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the rotation of the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) through the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) is stopped in response to a player's stop operation (see Figures 52 and 53), these reels 3 may not be swayed when the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) are stopped, and all reels 3 may be swayed when the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) is stopped. For example, all reels 3 may be swayed when an off-edge of the stop switch 8S corresponding to the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) is detected. Alternatively, in this case, the first stop reel (e.g., right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (e.g., center reel 3C) may not be swayed, and only the third stop reel (e.g., left reel 3L) may be swayed. For example, the sequence may be: on-edge of the first stop operation (no swing of the first stop reel) → off-edge of the first stop operation (no swing of the first stop reel) → on-edge of the second stop operation (no swing of the second stop reel) → off-edge of the second stop operation (no swing of the second stop reel) → on-edge of the third stop operation (no swing of the third stop reel) → off-edge of the third stop operation (all reels start to swing).

The above describes the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment as one embodiment of the present invention.

[Third embodiment]
The first and second embodiments have been described above. A third embodiment will now be described. The basic configuration of the pachislot machine 1 according to the third embodiment is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first and second embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first and second embodiments will be assigned the same reference numerals. Furthermore, explanations of portions that apply to the third embodiment as well as the first and second embodiments will be omitted.

Note that even if the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as "In the first embodiment, ..." or "In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...," they can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the third embodiment, as long as they do not deviate from the spirit of the third embodiment. Similarly, the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, as long as they do not deviate from the spirit of the third embodiment. Therefore, it is possible to partially replace or combine the configurations shown in the first and second embodiments (including the configurations shown in the modified examples and the extended examples) with the configurations shown in the third embodiment.

Furthermore, even if the shape is different from the pachislot machine 1 according to the first and second embodiments, components with similar functions may be assigned the same reference numerals for convenience.Furthermore, even if the shape or processing is the same as the pachislot machine 1 according to the first and second embodiments, different reference numerals or step numbers may be assigned for convenience.

<Lock effect execution process>
Fig. 55 is a flowchart showing the lock effect execution process carried out in the main control circuit, and Fig. 56 is a flowchart showing the pseudo game start process carried out in the main control circuit.

The lock effect execution process shown in Figure 55 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S8 (main side effect control process at the start of play) of Figure 23 (main processing). In the third embodiment, the lock effect execution process shown in Figure 44 was described as being performed as the process performed in step S8 (main side effect control process at the start of play) of Figure 23 (main processing). In this embodiment, the lock effect execution process shown in Figure 44 or the lock effect execution process shown in Figure 55 may be performed as the process performed in step S8 (main side effect control process at the start of play) of Figure 23 (main processing).

In the lock effect execution process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the lock effect start flag (see steps S1006, S1011, and S1013 in FIG. 43) is set to on (step S1201). If it determines that the lock effect start flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect start flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes pseudo-game start processing (step S1202). Here, the pseudo-game start processing will be explained using Figure 56.

In the pseudo-game start processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination processing (see FIG. 43) is any of lock effect numbers "3," "4," and "5" (step S1221). If it determines that the selected lock effect number is not any of lock effect numbers "3," "4," and "5," the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the selected lock effect number is one of lock effect numbers "3," "4," or "5," it sets a value corresponding to a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) to the pseudo-game start lock timer (step S1222). The pseudo-game start lock timer is updated by the timer update process (see step S206 in Figure 32). In other words, the pseudo-game start lock timer is decremented by 1 each time the periodic interrupt process (see Figure 32) is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo game start lock timer is at 0 (step S1223). If it determines that the pseudo game start lock timer is not at 0, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1223 again. This results in the pseudo game start lock being performed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 5 seconds). The pseudo game start lock may be a lock effect (freeze) that does not involve a reel effect or a pseudo game, or may be a lock effect that involves a reel effect (reel action such as slow rotation, high-speed rotation, or reverse rotation). While the pseudo game start lock is being performed, reels 3L, 3C, and 3R remain stopped, and any operation performed by the player will be invalid.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo game start lock timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo game start command generation and storage process (step S1224). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates pseudo game start command data and stores the generated pseudo game start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The pseudo game start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in Figure 32). This enables the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that it is time for the pseudo game to start, and to determine the timing for executing various effects, etc.

Specifically, upon receiving the pseudo-game start command data, the sub-control circuit 200 sets effect data corresponding to the start of the pseudo-game. As a result, for example, although not shown, a text image ("hit the lever" image) with the message "hit the lever" is displayed on the main display device 210, prompting the player to operate the start lever 7.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1225). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start switch 7S has been turned on (see step S50 in Figure 25). If it determines that the start lever 7 has been operated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the start lever 7 has not been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the pseudo-game start command generation and storage process was executed (since the "hit the lever" image was displayed) (step S1226). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns to step S1225. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo-game cancel flag to ON (step S1227). The pseudo-game cancel flag is a flag used to cancel the pseudo-game. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to OFF (step S1228) and ends this subroutine.

The above explains the pseudo-game start processing performed in step S1202 of Figure 55 using Figure 56. Let's return to the explanation of Figure 55.

After executing the processing of step S1202, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo-game cancel flag is set to ON (step S1203). If it determines that the pseudo-game cancel flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo-game cancel flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S1204 to S1210. However, since these processes are similar to the processes of steps S1022 to S1028 in FIG. 44, a description thereof will be omitted here. The main CPU 101 then terminates this subroutine.

As described above, if a lock effect corresponding to any of the lock effect numbers "3" through "5" is selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 43), a lock is performed at the start of the pseudo game. If the start lever 7 is then operated, the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R for the pseudo game begins, and the pseudo game is performed (see steps S1206 and S1208 in FIG. 55). After a random delay process (see step S1123 in FIG. 50), the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes the constant speed rotation for the main game. On the other hand, if the start lever 7 is not operated within a predetermined time after the "hit the lever" image is displayed, the pseudo game (spinning of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R for the pseudo game) is not performed, and after a normal acceleration process (see step S1125 in FIG. 50), the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes the constant speed rotation for the main game.

As described above, in the lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 55, the pseudo game is started when the start lever 7 is operated. However, as explained in the second embodiment, the condition for starting the pseudo game is not limited to the operation of the start lever 7, and any operation of an operation unit (e.g., the start lever 7, the MAX BET button 6a, the 1 BET button 6b, the settlement button 9, etc.) can be used as appropriate. Furthermore, the condition for canceling the pseudo game (setting the pseudo game cancel flag to ON) is not limited to the passage of a predetermined time, and any operation of an operation unit (e.g., the start lever 7, the MAX BET button 6a, the 1 BET button 6b, the settlement button 9, etc.) can be used as appropriate.

<Normal pseudo-game processing>
Fig. 57 is a flowchart showing normal pseudo game processing carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 58 is a flowchart showing stop button operation acceptance processing carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 59 is a flowchart showing swing control processing carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 60 is a flowchart showing pseudo game termination processing carried out in the main control circuit.

The normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 57 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S1042 of FIG. 46 (pseudo-game processing). In the second embodiment, the normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 47 was described as being performed as the processing performed in step S1042 of FIG. 46 (pseudo-game processing). In this embodiment, the normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 47 or the normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 57 may be performed as the processing performed in step S1042 of FIG. 46 (pseudo-game processing).

In normal pseudo-game processing, the main CPU 101 first executes steps S1241 and S1242. However, since these steps are similar to steps S1061 and S1062 in FIG. 47, their explanation will be omitted here.

After executing the processing of step S1242, the main CPU 101 executes a stop button operation acceptance process (step S1243). Here, the stop button operation acceptance process will be explained using Figure 58.

In the stop button operation reception process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the stop button operation cancel flag is set to ON (step S1261). The stop button operation cancel flag is a flag that is set when the MAX BET button 6a is operated in a pseudo game (see step S1264). If it is determined that the stop button operation cancel flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop button operation cancel flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether a valid stop button 8L, 8C, or 8R has been operated (step S1262). This process is the same as the process of step S1063 in FIG. 47. The main CPU 101 can recognize the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, or 8R by referencing the activated stop button storage area (see FIG. 21).

If it is determined that a valid stop button 8L, 8C, or 8R has been operated, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined that a valid stop button 8L, 8C, or 8R has not been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether the MAX BET button 6a has been operated (step S1263). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the BET switch 6S has been turned ON.

If it is determined that the MAX BET button 6a has been operated, the main CPU 101 sets the stop button operation cancel flag to ON (step S1264). The stop button operation cancel flag is a flag that indicates that all remaining stop button operations are to be omitted. After executing the processing of step S1264, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the MAX BET button 6a has not been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the stop button operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 58 (step S1265). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1262. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the stop button operation omission flag to ON (step S1266). The stop button operation omission flag is a flag that indicates that the current stop button operation will be omitted. After executing the process of step S1266, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The stop button operation acceptance process performed in step S1243 of Figure 57 has been explained above using Figure 58. Let's return to the explanation of Figure 57.

After executing the processing of step S1243, the main CPU 101 updates the activated stop button storage area and the press order storage area (step S1244) and determines the reel to be controlled (step S1245). In these processes, if neither the stop button operation cancel flag nor the stop button operation omission flag is set to on, the main CPU 101 performs processing similar to the processing of steps S1064 and S1065 in FIG. 47. On the other hand, if the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag is set to on, the main CPU 101 determines that the leftmost stop button 8 of the active stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R has been operated, updates the activated stop button storage area, and determines the reel to be controlled.

For example, if all stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are enabled, the main CPU 101 stores a "1" in bit 0 of the activated stop button storage area, updates bit 4 to "0," and determines the left reel 3L as the controlled reel, just as when the left stop button 8L is operated. Also, if the center stop button 8C and the right stop button 8R are enabled, the main CPU 101 stores a "1" in bit 1 of the activated stop button storage area, updates bit 5 to "0," and determines the center reel 3C as the controlled reel, just as when the center stop button 8C is operated. Also, if the left stop button 8L and the center stop button 8C are enabled, the main CPU 101 stores a "1" in bit 0 of the activated stop button storage area, updates bit 4 to "0," and determines the left reel 3L as the controlled reel, just as when the left stop button 8L is operated. Additionally, if only the right stop button 8R is active, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 2 of the activated stop button storage area, updates bit 6 to "0", and determines the right reel 3R as the reel to be controlled, just as it does when the right stop button 8R is operated.

The main CPU 101 then executes steps S1246 to S1249, which are essentially the same as steps S1066 to S1069 in FIG. 47. In step S1246, similar to step S1066, the main CPU 101 determines and stores the predetermined position where the symbols will ultimately stop as the expected stop position, regardless of the stop start position (see step S116). As a result, reels 3L, 3C, and 3R stop in the manners shown in FIGS. 39(b) to (d), 40(b) to (d), and 41(b) to (d), regardless of whether the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag is set to on.

Here, when the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag is set on, the spinning pattern of the controlled reel until it stops may be different compared to when the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag are not set on. For example, when the stop button operation cancel flag is set on (when the MAX BET button 6a is operated), the time from when the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag is operated until the controlled reel stops may be longer compared to when neither the stop button operation cancel flag nor the stop button operation omission flag are set on (when the stop button 8 is operated) (for example, the controlled reel may be spun one extra time before stopping). However, even if there is a difference in the spinning pattern, the symbol that is ultimately displayed as stopped will be the same regardless of whether the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag is set on.

If it is determined in step S1249 that the controlled reel has stopped, the main CPU 101 executes swing control processing (step S1250). The swing control processing will now be explained using Figure 59.

In the swing control process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the stop button operation cancel flag is set to ON (step S1281). If it determines that the stop button operation cancel flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stop button operation omission flag is set to ON (step S1282). If it determines that the stop button operation omission flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the stop button operation omission flag to OFF (step S1283).

If it is determined in step S1281 that the stop button operation cancel flag is set to ON, or after executing the processing of step S1283, the main CPU 101 executes control to stop the controlled reel (step S1284). In this processing, the main CPU 101 sets data corresponding to the excitation pattern for stopping the controlled reel. As a result, the controlled reel remains stopped in the manner shown in Figures 39(b)-(d), 40(b)-(d), and 41(b)-(d) (unlike the illustrations, no oscillation occurs).

If it is determined in step S1282 that the stop button operation omission flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes control to swing the controlled reel (step S1285). This process is the same as the process of step S1070 in Figure 47. As a result, the controlled reel swings in the manner shown in Figures 39(b) to (d), 40(b) to (d), and 41(b) to (d).

After executing step S1284 or step S1285, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

The above explains the swing control processing performed in step S1250 of Figure 57 using Figure 59. Let's return to the explanation of Figure 57.

After executing the processing of step S1250, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there are any valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R (step S1251). This processing is the same as the processing of step S1071 in FIG. 47. If it is determined that there are no valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, the main CPU 101 executes processing for terminating the pseudo game (step S1252). Here, the processing for terminating the pseudo game will be explained using FIG. 60.

In the pseudo-game termination process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 43) is lock effect number "3" (step S1301). If the main CPU 101 determines that the selected lock effect number is lock effect number "3," it outputs an AT-equivalent signal via the external centralized terminal board 55 (step S1302). As explained in the first embodiment, the external centralized terminal board 55 is connected to a data display device or hall computer external to the pachislot machine 1, and these devices can also recognize the medal insertion status and game state transition status in the pachislot machine 1.

The AT-equivalent signal is an external signal that is turned on when the AT state begins and turned off when the AT state ends. In the processing of step S1302, the main CPU 101 turns the external signal on. Similarly, although not shown, the main CPU 101 turns the external signal on after executing the processing of step S1083 in Figure 48. This causes the data display and hall computer to recognize that the AT state has begun.

In this way, in this embodiment, the AT-equivalent signal is configured to be turned on when the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3" or "5" ends (when the "red 7" pattern is displayed as stopped). Furthermore, as described in the first embodiment, multiple AT states (predetermined AT states and specific AT states) may be provided, with each AT state offering a different degree of advantage to the player. Examples of such AT states include the pseudo BB (big bonus) and pseudo RB (regular bonus) described in the first embodiment. Furthermore, the same symbol combination (e.g., a "red 7" pattern) may be displayed as stopped in the pseudo game both when a decision is made to transition to the pseudo BB and when a decision is made to transition to the pseudo RB. Furthermore, the same AT-equivalent signal may be turned on when a specific symbol combination (e.g., a line of "red 7" symbols) is displayed in a pseudo game when a decision is made to transition to a pseudo BB, and when a specific symbol combination (e.g., a line of "red 7" symbols) is displayed in a pseudo game when a decision is made to transition to a pseudo RB. This makes it impossible to know whether a transition to a pseudo bonus, a pseudo BB or a pseudo RB, has been decided at the time a specific symbol combination (e.g., a line of "red 7" symbols) is displayed in a pseudo game, thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player. The timing at which the pseudo BB or pseudo RB actually starts is not particularly limited, but may be after a specific symbol combination (e.g., a line of "red 7" symbols) is displayed in a pseudo game (the unit game in which the pseudo game was played, or the unit game played a predetermined number of times after the unit game). For example, a pseudo BB may be initiated when a "red 7" pattern is displayed stopped along an active line during main play, and a pseudo RB may be initiated when a "BAR" pattern is displayed stopped along an active line during main play.

In the above, we have explained that the AT-equivalent signal is turned on when a specific symbol combination (e.g., a line of "red 7" symbols) is displayed in a static state during a simulated game (before the random delay process is initiated). Similarly, the AT-equivalent signal may be turned on when a specific symbol combination (e.g., a line of "red 7" symbols) is displayed in a static state during a reel effect (before the random delay process is initiated). The AT-equivalent signal may also be turned on when the simulated bonus actually starts (e.g., step S106 in FIG. 28). The timing for turning off the AT-equivalent signal is not particularly limited, but it may be turned off when the simulated bonus actually ends (e.g., step S155 in FIG. 31). As explained in the first embodiment, external signal 1 (the above-mentioned AT-equivalent signal) may be turned on when the first set of AT state is initiated, and external signal 2 may be turned on each time the second set or subsequent sets are initiated. From this perspective, the pseudo game may be performed only when it is decided to transition to the AT state for the first set (for example, it will not be performed if the 1G consecutive lottery is won). Also, when the AT-equivalent signal is turned on, the section lamp described in the first embodiment is lit.

If it is determined in step S1301 that the lock effect number is not lock effect number "3," the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 43) is lock effect number "5" (step S1303). After executing the process of step S1302, or if it is determined in step S1303 that the lock effect number is not lock effect number "5" (i.e., lock effect number "4"), the main CPU 101 outputs a medal insertion signal via the external centralized terminal board 55 (step S1304).

As explained in the first embodiment, the medal insertion signal is a signal output from the external centralized terminal board 55 when a medal is inserted (see steps S42 and S46 in Figure 25). In other words, the medal insertion signal is output each time a main game is played, and the number of games played on the pachislot machine 1 can be recognized by the data display device or hall computer via the medal insertion signal. In this embodiment, by outputting the medal insertion signal even during pseudo games, the number of games played includes the number of pseudo games (the total number of main games and pseudo games). This allows the number of games to be counted up even when pseudo games are played. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 outputs the medal insertion signal even after executing the processing of step S1083 in Figure 48.

The medal insertion signal can be output when the pseudo game starts or ends. Examples of when the pseudo game starts include when the start lever 7 is operated (e.g., when the determination result of step S1225 in FIG. 56 is "YES") or when the pseudo game reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start spinning (e.g., when the processing of step S1206 in FIG. 55 is performed). Examples of when the pseudo game ends include when the pseudo game reels 3L, 3C, and 3R stop spinning (e.g., when the processing of FIG. 60 is performed) or when the main game reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start spinning (e.g., when the determination result of step S1122 in FIG. 50 is "YES" or when the first reel starts spinning due to random delay processing). Furthermore, if a medal insertion signal is output during a pseudo game, the unit game in which the pseudo game is played may be configured so that the medal insertion signal is not output when a medal is inserted.

After executing the processing of step S1304, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1305) and ends this subroutine. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1303 that the lock effect number is lock effect number "5," the main CPU 101 executes post-pseudo-game reel effect processing (step S1306). The post-pseudo-game reel effect processing has been explained using Figure 48, so its explanation will be omitted here. After executing the processing of step S1306, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The pseudo-game ending process performed in step S1252 of Figure 57 has been explained above using Figure 60. Returning to the explanation of Figure 57, after executing the process of step S1252, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Pseudo-game challenge operation reception process>
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-game challenge operation acceptance process carried out in the main control circuit.

The pseudo game challenge operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 61 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S1243 of FIG. 57 (normal pseudo game processing). Above, it has been explained that the stop button operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 58 is performed as the process performed in step S1243 of FIG. 57 (normal pseudo game processing). In this embodiment, the pseudo game challenge operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 61 may be performed as the process performed in step S1243 of FIG. 57 (normal pseudo game processing).

Specifically, if all stop buttons 8 are valid (if none of the stop buttons 8 have been operated yet), i.e., if the current stop operation is the first stop operation, the pseudo-game challenge operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 61 is performed, and if an invalid stop button 8 exists (if at least one stop button 8 has been operated), i.e., if the current stop operation is the second stop operation or the third stop operation, the stop button operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 58 may be performed. The main CPU 101 can recognize the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R and the invalid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R by referencing the activated stop button storage area (see FIG. 21).

In the pseudo-game challenge operation acceptance process, the main CPU 101 first determines the stop button for pseudo-game progression (step S1321). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines one of the left stop button 8L, center stop button 8C, and right stop button 8R as the stop button for pseudo-game progression by performing a lottery based on a random number value.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo-game start command generation and storage process (step S1322). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates pseudo-game start command data and stores the generated pseudo-game start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The pseudo-game start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in Figure 32). This enables the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that it is time for the pseudo-game to start, and to determine the timing for executing various effects, etc.

Specifically, upon receiving the pseudo-game start command data, the sub-control circuit 200 sets effect data corresponding to the start of the pseudo-game. As a result, for example, although not shown, a text image stating "Select one of the three correct options on the stop button to start the pseudo-game" is displayed on the main display device 210, prompting the player to operate the stop button 8.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a valid stop button 8L, 8C, or 8R has been operated (step S1323). This process is the same as the process of step S1063 in FIG. 47. If it is determined that a valid stop button 8L, 8C, or 8R has been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether the operated stop button 8 matches the pseudo-game progress stop button determined in step S1321 (step S1324).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the operated stop button 8 matches the pseudo game progress stop button, it terminates this subroutine and proceeds to step S1244 in FIG. 57. On the other hand, if it determines that the operated stop button 8 does not match the pseudo game progress stop button, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo game cancel flag to ON (step S1325) and terminates this subroutine.

Although not shown, if the pseudo-game cancel flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends the pseudo-game challenge operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 61, then ends the normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 57 without performing the processing of steps S1244 to S1252 in FIG. 57, and further ends the lock effect execution processing shown in FIG. 55 without performing the processing of steps S1209 and S1210 in FIG. 55.

If it is determined in step S1323 that the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R have not been operated, the main CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S1326 to S1329. However, since these processes are similar to the processes of steps S1263 to S1266 in FIG. 58, their explanation will be omitted here. The main CPU 101 then terminates this subroutine.

As described above, if a pseudo game progress stop button (for example, the left stop button 8L) is operated as the first stop operation (if the three stop button choices are correct), the pseudo game continues, and after a random delay process (see step S1123 in Figure 50), reels 3L, 3C, and 3R begin to rotate at a constant speed for the main game. On the other hand, if a stop button 8 other than a pseudo game progress stop button (for example, the middle stop button 8C or the right stop button 8R) is operated as the first stop operation (if the three stop button choices are unsuccessful), the pseudo game ends at that point, and after normal acceleration process (see step S1125 in Figure 50), reels 3L, 3C, and 3R begin to rotate at a constant speed for the main game.

In this way, in this embodiment, the pseudo game can be configured to proceed on the condition that the appropriate stop button 8 is operated after the rotation of the pseudo game reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has begun. Meanwhile, operation of such an appropriate stop button 8 may also be used as a condition for starting the pseudo game. For example, in FIG. 56, it has been described that the pseudo game begins on the condition that the start lever 7 is operated. However, the pseudo game (spinning of the pseudo game reels 3L, 3C, and 3R) may also begin on the condition that an appropriate stop button 8 (e.g., the left stop button 8L) is operated instead of the start lever 7. Furthermore, if an inappropriate stop button 8 (e.g., the center stop button 8C or the right stop button 8R) is operated, the pseudo game may be canceled (and the pseudo game reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may not even be spun).

<Determining the freeze type>
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device.

Figure 62 shows the freeze type determination screen displayed on the main display device 210. In this embodiment, multiple types of freezes (Freeze A, Freeze B, and Freeze C) are provided. Freeze A is a lock effect that does not involve a reel effect or simulated game. Freeze B is a lock effect that involves a forward-spinning reel effect. Freeze C is a lock effect that involves a reverse-spinning reel effect. The freeze type determination screen is a screen for determining one freeze from Freeze A, Freeze B, and Freeze C. The determined freeze will be executed, for example, as a lock at the start of simulated game play (see step S1223 in Figure 56).

Specifically, Figure 62 shows the freeze type determination screen, displaying freeze A image 1201, freeze B image 1202, freeze C image 1203, and arrow image 1204. Arrow image 1204 is an image that indicates which of freeze A image 1201, freeze B image 1202, and freeze C image 1203 has been selected. In the example shown in Figure 62, arrow image 1204 is displayed next to and adjacent to freeze A image 1201, indicating that freeze A image 1201 has been selected.

In this way, when freeze A image 1201 is selected (freeze A selected state), arrow image 1204 is displayed next to freeze A image 1201. Similarly, when freeze B image 1202 is selected (freeze B selected state), arrow image 1204 is displayed next to freeze B image 1202. When freeze C image 1203 is selected (freeze C selected state), arrow image 1204 is displayed next to freeze C image 1203.

The position of the arrow image 1204 can be switched by any of the following methods (a) to (c). For example, one of these methods is set in the hole menu.
(a) Operation of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R (b) Operation of the MAX BET button 6a (c) Timer management

When the above (a) is set, the player can switch the position of the arrow image 1204 by operating the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R while the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210, and can determine the freeze type by operating the MAX BET button 6a. Specifically, if the MAX BET button 6a is operated when Freeze A is selected, Freeze A is determined; if the MAX BET button 6a is operated when Freeze B is selected, Freeze B is determined; and if the MAX BET button 6a is operated when Freeze C is selected, Freeze C is determined.

When the above (b) is set, the player can switch the position of the arrow image 1204 by operating the MAX BET button 6a when the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210, and can determine the freeze type by operating the start lever 7. Specifically, if the start lever 7 is operated in the freeze A selection state, freeze A is determined; if the start lever 7 is operated in the freeze B selection state, freeze B is determined; and if the start lever 7 is operated in the freeze C selection state, freeze C is determined.

If (c) above is set, when the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210, the freeze type determination screen switches from one of the freeze A selection state, freeze B selection state, and freeze C selection state to the other at predetermined time intervals (for example, freeze A selection state → freeze B selection state → freeze C selection state → freeze A selection state, etc.). At this time, the player can determine the freeze type by operating the MAX BET button 6a. Specifically, if the MAX BET button 6a is operated in the freeze A selection state, freeze A is determined; if the MAX BET button 6a is operated in the freeze B selection state, freeze B is determined; and if the MAX BET button 6a is operated in the freeze C selection state, freeze C is determined. Note that if the MAX BET button 6a is not operated within a predetermined time, the freeze type determined corresponds to the state when that time has elapsed. Alternatively, the freeze type selected by lottery may be determined.

The timing at which the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210 is not particularly limited, but it can be configured to display, for example, when a symbol combination related to BB is displayed stopped along an active line (BB wins). For example, the freeze type determination screen may be displayed when BB wins in one unit game and the start lever 7 is operated in the next unit game. Alternatively, when BB wins in one unit game, the freeze type determination screen may be displayed before the start lever 7 is operated in the next unit game.

The above describes the case where the type of freeze is determined, but a similar method may be used to determine the type of lock effect to be performed when a pseudo-bonus transition lottery or a 1G consecutive lottery is won. For example, on a screen similar to that of FIG. 62, methods such as those described in (a) to (c) above may be used to determine one of lock effects A (e.g., a lock effect without reel effects and pseudo play), lock effect B (e.g., a lock effect with reel effects), and lock effect C (e.g., a lock effect with pseudo play). The lock effect determined in this manner may be selected in steps S1005, S1010, and S1012 of FIG. 43. A similar method may also be used to determine the type of oscillation pattern (e.g., one of oscillation patterns A, B, and C described in the second embodiment). Note that the effects determined in this manner are not limited to effects controlled by the main control circuit 100, but may also be effects controlled by the sub-control circuit 200.

<Bonus winning process>
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the process carried out in the main control circuit when a bonus is won.

The bonus winning process shown in Figure 63 is performed in the main control circuit 100 after the process of step S70 in Figure 26 (internal lottery process) has been executed. In other words, the bonus winning process is performed before the rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R begins in a bonus winning game (a unit game that has transitioned from a non-bonus state (a state that is neither a bonus state nor a carryover state) to a carryover state (between flags) due to a bonus role being determined as an internal lottery role).

In the bonus winning process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether BB has been determined as the internal winning combination (whether the current unit game is a BB winning game) (step S1341). If it determines that BB has not been determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that BB has been determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 101 randomly selects one of the lock effect numbers "1," "3," "5," or "6" (see FIG. 36) (step S1342). The main CPU 101 then sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1343) and ends this subroutine. This results in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1," "3," "5," or "6" being performed.

In the second embodiment, when a lock effect number corresponding to a pseudo game is selected, the "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 (see FIG. 45) is displayed on the main display device 210 (see step S1022 in FIG. 44). This makes it possible to prompt the player to perform a stop operation at a timing when the "red 7" symbol can be displayed in a static state on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R during the pseudo game. In this embodiment, the "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 may also be displayed on the main display device 210, but in this case, the "Aim for BAR" effect image (not shown) is displayed on the main display device 210. This makes it possible to prompt the player to perform a stop operation at a timing when the "BAR" symbol can be displayed in a static state on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R during the pseudo game.

In addition, here, after BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the BB state is initiated when a line of "red 7" symbols is displayed stopped along the active line in the main game (the "red 7" symbols are aligned), and after MB is determined as the internal winning combination, the MB state is initiated when a line of "BAR" symbols is displayed stopped along the active line in the main game (the "BAR" symbols are aligned). In this case, in the BB winning game (main game), the player should aim for the "red 7" symbol when operating the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R.

However, as described above, when the "Aim for the BAR" effect image is displayed during a pseudo game, if the "Aim for the BAR" effect image continues to be displayed even after the pseudo game ends and the game transitions to the main game, the player will be led to aim for a different symbol (the "BAR" symbol) than the symbol (the "red 7" symbol) that they should actually be aiming for. This increases the chance that the "red 7" symbols will not stop and be displayed along the winning line (BB will not be awarded).

This is especially likely when the "Red 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol are spaced apart on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. For example, as shown in Figure 9, if the symbol position ("0") corresponding to the "Red 7" symbol on at least one reel 3 (middle reel 3C) is not within the maximum number of sliding symbols (4 symbols) relative to the symbol position ("9") corresponding to the "BAR" symbol on that reel 3 (middle reel 3C), then if a stopping operation is performed on that reel 3 at the time when the "BAR" symbol appears on the pay line, it will be impossible for the BB to win. In this sense, the "Aim for the BAR" effect image is a hint designed to prevent the BB from winning.

In any case, it is desirable that the "Aim for the BAR" effect image displayed in the simulated game be terminated at a predetermined timing to prevent the player from misidentifying the symbol they should be aiming for (internal winning combination). This timing may be before or after the random delay process (see step S1123 in Figure 50) has begun. Specifically, the timing may be, for example, the period from when the second stop reel stops until when the third stop reel stops in the pseudo game (for example, when the determination result of step S1262 in FIG. 58 is "YES" and the operation of the stop button 8 is the third stop operation, or when the determination result of step S1265 in FIG. 58 is "YES" and the third stop operation is omitted), when all remaining stop button operations are omitted (for example, when the determination result of step S1263 in FIG. 58 is "YES"), or the period from when the third stop reel stops until when the third stop reel starts to swing (for example, when the determination result of step S1249 in FIG. 57 is "YES"). S" and the reel to be controlled is the third stopped reel), the timing when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped in the pseudo game (for example, after the determination result in step S1251 in FIG. 57 is "YES" and before the processing in step S1252 is performed), when the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R for the main game start to rotate (for example, when the determination result in step S1122 in FIG. 50 is "YES" or the timing when the first reel starts to rotate due to random delay processing), the period after the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R for the main game starts until the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R reaches a constant speed, etc.

Furthermore, if another pseudo-game effect (for example, swing control) is being performed at the same time that the display of the "Aim for the BAR" effect image ends, that effect should also end. Furthermore, at that timing, an effect corresponding to BB being determined as the internal winning combination (BB suggestion effect) may be started (an image suggesting that BB has been determined as the internal winning combination (for example, "Aim for the 7" effect image 1100) may be displayed). This effectively prevents the player from mistaking the symbol they should be aiming for (the internal winning combination), and also suggests that they should aim for the "red 7" symbol.

As explained in the second embodiment, the pseudo game can be configured so that a predetermined symbol is displayed regardless of the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces. Therefore, in the pseudo game, even if the player aims for the "BAR" symbol when operating each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R (even if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the "BAR" symbol can be displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R), the "red 7" symbol may be aligned. This makes it possible to suggest that BB has been determined as the internal winning combination through the "red 7" symbol alignment. If the "red 7" symbol is aligned in the pseudo game, the BB suggestion effect may not be performed in the main game.

Alternatively, the pseudo game may be configured so that a "BAR" pattern is achieved when a stop operation is performed at a timing when the "BAR" pattern can be stopped and displayed on each of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (if the stop operation is not performed at the appropriate timing, the "BAR" pattern will not be achieved). Furthermore, the pseudo game may be configured so that a "BAR" pattern is achieved regardless of the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols. Alternatively, the pseudo game may be configured so that the "BAR" pattern is ready, but the "BAR" pattern is not achieved (the remaining "BAR" pattern is not stopped and displayed). If the "Red 7" pattern is not achieved in the pseudo game, it is desirable to perform the above-mentioned BB suggestion effect in the main game.

In this way, each time a "RED 7" symbol or a "BAR" symbol is stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, swing control (see step S1285 in Figure 59) is performed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. As explained in the second embodiment, this swing control is performed so that the "RED 7" symbol or a "BAR" symbol is positioned on the pay line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is positioned at the center of vibration or when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is almost completely stopped.

As described above, when the bonus winning process shown in FIG. 63 is performed, the lock effect determination process shown in FIG. 43 may not be performed, or the lock effect determination process shown in FIG. 43 may be performed in conjunction with the bonus winning process shown in FIG. 63. Also, although not shown, if BB is not determined as the internal winning combination, a lock effect (a so-called false effect) corresponding to lock effect number "2" or "4" may be performed.

<Lock effect determination process at the end of the game>
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the lock effect at the end of the game, which is carried out in the main control circuit.

The game end lock effect determination process shown in Figure 64 is performed by the main control circuit 100 after the process of step S156 in Figure 31 (game end process during advantageous period) is executed.

In the process for determining the lock effect at the end of play, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the current play zone is a favorable zone (step S1361). This process is the same as the process of step S1001 in FIG. 43. If it is determined that the current play zone is not a favorable zone, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the current play zone is a favorable zone, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo-bonus transition lottery has been won (step S1362). As explained in the first embodiment, when reels 3L, 3C, and 3R stop spinning during main play, a favorable zone entry sub-flag (see FIG. 7(a)) is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed. Then, in the presentation zone (favorable zone/normal play), the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table (see FIG. 7(c)) is referenced, and a lottery (pseudo-bonus transition lottery) is conducted based on the random number value and the favorable zone entry sub-flag, and the result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery is determined as "winning" or "not winning." Note that "winning" includes "winning lottery (current play)" and "winning lottery (next play)," but these will not be distinguished here.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the pseudo bonus transition lottery has not been won, it terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, if it determines that the pseudo bonus transition lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 randomly selects one of the lock effect numbers "1," "3," "5," or "6" (see FIG. 36) (step S1363). The main CPU 101 then sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1364) and terminates this subroutine. This results in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1," "3," "5," or "6" being performed.

Although not shown, even if the 1G consecutive lottery (see Figure 7(d)) is won, one of the lock effect numbers "1", "3", "5", and "6" may be selected (a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1", "3", "5", or "6" is performed). Furthermore, if the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (and the 1G consecutive lottery) is not won, one of the lock effect numbers "2" and "4" may be selected (a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "2" or "4" is performed).

<Lock effect execution process at the end of the game>
Fig. 65 is a flowchart showing the process for executing the lock effect at the end of a game, which is carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 66 is a flowchart showing the process for starting the lock effect at the end of a game, which is carried out in the main control circuit.

The end-of-game lock effect execution process shown in Figure 65 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S16 (end-of-game main-side effect control process) of Figure 23 (main processing).

In the game end lock effect execution process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the lock effect start flag (see step S1364 in FIG. 64) is set to on (step S1381). If it determines that the lock effect start flag is not set to on, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect start flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes processing for starting the lock effect at the end of play (step S1382). Here, we will explain the processing for starting the lock effect at the end of play using Figure 66.

In the process for starting the lock effect at the end of game, the main CPU 101 first determines whether a replay has been awarded (step S1401). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the combination of symbols stopped and displayed along the pay line is a combination of symbols related to a replay role (see Figures 11 to 14).

If it is determined that a replay has been won, the main CPU 101 executes a replay winning lock effect start command generation and storage process (step S1402). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates replay winning lock effect start command data and stores the generated replay winning lock effect start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The replay winning lock effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in Figure 32). This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that a replay has been won and the lock effect will begin, and it can determine the timing for executing various effects, etc.

Specifically, upon receiving the command data to start the lock effect when a replay is won, the sub-control circuit 200 sets effect data corresponding to the start of the lock effect when a replay is won. As a result, for example, although not shown, a text image (bet request image) with the content "Please place a bet" is displayed on the main display device 210, prompting the player to operate the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b). When a replay is won, there is no need to operate the bet button, and the bet request image can surprise the player.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) has been operated (step S1403). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the bet switch 6S has been turned on. If it determines that either the MAX bet button 6a or the 1 bet button 6b has been operated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the MAX BET button 6a nor the 1 BET button 6b has been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1404). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start switch 7S has been turned on (see step S50 in FIG. 25). If it determines that the start lever 7 has not been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the replay winning lock effect start command generation and storage process was executed (since the bet request image was displayed) (step S1405).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the predetermined time has not elapsed, it returns to step S1403. If it determines in step S1404 that the start lever 7 has been operated, or if it determines in step S1405 that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect cancel flag to ON (step S1406). The lock effect cancel flag is a flag used to cancel the lock effect. The main CPU 101 then sets the lock effect start flag to OFF (step S1407) and ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1401 that a replay has not been won, the main CPU 101 executes a process for generating and storing a command to start a lock effect when a combination other than a replay is won (step S1408). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates command data to start a lock effect when a combination other than a replay is won, and stores the generated command data to start a lock effect when a combination other than a replay is won in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The command data to start a lock effect when a combination other than a replay is won stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in Figure 32). This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that a combination other than a replay has been won and the lock effect will begin, and it can determine the timing for executing various effects, etc.

Specifically, upon receiving the command data to start the lock effect when a combination other than a replay is won, the sub-control circuit 200 sets effect data corresponding to the start of the lock effect when a combination other than a replay is won. As a result, for example, although not shown, a text image with the message "hit the lever" (a "hit the lever" image) is displayed on the main display device 210, encouraging the player to operate the start lever 7. When a combination other than a replay is won, it is normally necessary to operate the bet button before operating the start lever 7, but the "hit the lever" image can surprise the player.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1409). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the start switch 7S has been turned on (see step S50 in Figure 25). If it determines that the start lever 7 has been operated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the start lever 7 has not been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the execution of the lock effect start command generation and storage process for winning a prize other than a replay (since the "hit the lever" image was displayed) (step S1410). If it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns to step S1409. On the other hand, if it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect cancel flag to ON (step S1411). The lock effect cancel flag is a flag used to cancel the lock effect. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to OFF (step S1412) and ends this subroutine.

The above explains the process for starting the lock effect at the end of game, which is performed in step S1382 of Figure 65, using Figure 66. Let's return to the explanation of Figure 65.

After executing the processing of step S1382, the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock effect cancel flag is set to ON (step S1383). If it determines that the lock effect cancel flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the lock effect cancel flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S1384 to S1390. However, since these processes are the same as the processes of steps S1022 to S1028 in FIG. 44, a description thereof will be omitted here. The main CPU 101 then terminates this subroutine.

As described above, if it is determined that a lock effect will be performed in a unit game in which a replay is won, the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) is operated, which causes reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to begin rotating for the lock effect and the lock effect is performed (see steps S1386 and S1388 in Figure 65), and in the next unit game, after a random delay process (see step S1123 in Figure 50), the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will become the constant speed rotation for the main game. On the other hand, if it is determined that a lock effect will be performed in a unit game in which a replay is won, but the bet button (MAX BET button 6a or 1 BET button 6b) is not operated within a predetermined time after the bet request image is displayed, or if the start lever 7 is operated, the lock effect (spinning of reels 3L, 3C, 3R for the lock effect) will not be performed, and in the next unit game, the normal acceleration process (see step S1125 in Figure 50) will be performed, and the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, 3R will return to the constant speed rotation for the main game.

In the process for starting the lock effect at the end of a game shown in FIG. 66, if the start lever 7 is operated without operating the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b), the game will proceed to the next unit game. In this case, operation of the start lever 7 in the next unit game may be omitted. In other words, if the judgment result in step S1404 in FIG. 66 is "YES," the judgment result in step S50 in FIG. 25 may be "YES" without waiting for the start lever 7 to be operated in the next unit game. However, unlike the process for starting the lock effect at the end of a game shown in FIG. 66, the game may be configured not to proceed to the next unit game unless the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) is operated. Furthermore, even if the bet button (MAX BET button 6a or 1 BET button 6b) is not operated, the game may proceed to the next unit game, but the game may be configured so that the game only proceeds to the next unit game if the bet button (MAX BET button 6a or 1 BET button 6b) is not operated for a fairly long time (for example, one minute).

Furthermore, if it is determined that a lock effect will be performed in a unit game in which a winning combination other than a replay is achieved, the start lever 7 is operated to start the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R for the lock effect, thereby performing the lock effect (see steps S1386 and S1388 in Figure 65), and in the next unit game, after a random delay process (see step S1123 in Figure 50), the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be at the constant speed for the main game. On the other hand, if it is determined that a lock effect will be performed in a unit game in which a winning combination other than a replay is achieved, but the start lever 7 is not operated within a predetermined time after the "hit the lever" image is displayed, the lock effect (spinning of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R for the lock effect) will not be performed, and in the next unit game, after a normal acceleration process (see step S1125 in Figure 50), the rotation of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be at the constant speed for the main game. It is also possible to configure the game so that it will not proceed to the next unit game unless the start lever 7 is operated, or to configure the game so that it will only proceed to the next unit game if the start lever 7 is not operated for a fairly long time (for example, one minute).

<Stop button illumination control process during pseudo-game>
Although not shown, the main control circuit 100 performs a pseudo-game stop button illumination control process during the pseudo-game. Specifically, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1243 in FIG. 57 and then executes a pseudo-game stop button illumination control process. This causes, for example, the lighting state of each stop button 8L, 8C, and 8R to change. This will be explained in detail below.

Each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R has a similar configuration and is equipped with a stop button cover with a pressing portion that can be touched by the player, and a stop button LED located in a position recessed from the stop button cover. The stop button LED is a full-color LED that is capable of emitting multiple colors, including red, blue, and green. The stop button cover is made of a translucent material, and the light emitted from the stop button LED passes through the stop button cover and is emitted outside the pachislot machine 1, making it visible to the player.

In this embodiment, the pseudo game is configured to illuminate the stop button LEDs of the active stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R. Specifically, in step S1242 of FIG. 57, the main CPU 101 controls the stop button LEDs of all stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R to light up. Also, in step S1244 of FIG. 57, the main CPU 101 controls the stop button LED of the currently operated stop button 8 (or the stop button 8 that is deemed to have been operated when stop button operation is omitted) to turn off. Alternatively, if it is determined that the controlled reel has stopped in step S1249 instead of step S1244, the main CPU 101 may control the stop button LED of the currently operated stop button 8 (or the stop button 8 that is deemed to have been operated when stop button operation is omitted) to turn off.

Furthermore, when the main CPU 101 lights up the stop button LEDs of the active stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, it may control the light emission color of the stop button LEDs to be a specific color (e.g., red).Furthermore, the main CPU 101 may control the stop button LED of the currently operated stop button 8 (or the stop button 8 that is deemed to have been operated even if the stop button operation is omitted) to be illuminated in a specific color (e.g., red).

At this time, if it has been decided that a special benefit will be awarded to a player (for example, if the player has won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)), the stop button LED may be controlled to emit a specific color (for example, red) with a higher probability than if it has not been decided that the special benefit will be awarded (for example, if the player has not won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)). Also, if it has been decided that a special benefit will be awarded to a player (for example, if the player has won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)), the stop button LED may be controlled to emit a specific color (for example, red) with a higher probability than if the stop button LED emits a predetermined color (for example, blue).

This allows the player to be informed of the degree of expectation for the simulated game through the light color of the stop button LEDs. This type of control can be performed individually for the three stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R. For example, if all three stop buttons 8 are lit in a specific color (e.g., red), the player's expectations can be raised, and if only one stop button 8 is lit in a specific color (e.g., red), the player's expectations can be relatively lowered.

The above describes the effects in which the lighting patterns of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R change, but the lighting patterns of the start lever 7 and bet buttons (MAX bet button 6a and 1 bet button 6b) may also be changed. For example, the start lever 7 and the MAX bet button 6a and 1 bet button 6b may each be equipped with a translucent cover and LED, similar to the stop button 8. The cover of the start lever 7 may be a spherical part that can be held by the player. For example, the LED of the start lever 7 may be lit when the above-mentioned "hit the lever" image is displayed on the main display device 210, or the LEDs of the MAX bet button 6a to 1 bet button 6b may be lit when the above-mentioned bet request image is displayed on the main display device 210.

In addition, at this time, the light color of the LEDs on the start lever 7 or bet buttons may be used to indicate to the player the degree of expectation of the pseudo game. For example, if it has been determined that a special benefit will be awarded to a player (e.g., if the player has won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)), the LEDs on the start lever 7 or bet buttons may be controlled to emit a specific color (e.g., red) with a higher probability than if it has not been determined that the special benefit will be awarded (e.g., if the player has not won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)). In addition, if it has been determined that a special benefit will be awarded to a player (e.g., if the player has won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)), the LEDs on the start lever 7 or bet buttons may be controlled to emit a specific color (e.g., red) with a higher probability than if they emit a predetermined color (e.g., blue).

The LEDs provided on the stop button 8, start lever 7, MAX BET button 6a, and 1 BET button 6b may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or the sub-control circuit 200. If the LEDs are configured to be controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, when the main CPU 101 changes the lighting state of the LEDs, it generates command data corresponding to the change in lighting state and transmits the generated command data to the sub-control circuit 200. Note that in the main game, as in the pseudo game, an effect may be created in which the lighting state of the LEDs is changed.

<Backlight effect>
As explained in the first embodiment, a light source (reel lamp) is provided inside each reel 3L, 3C, 3R at a position where the symbols can be seen at least from the main display window 4, and at least while each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is rotating, the reels are illuminated from the inside with a constant brightness, thereby ensuring the visibility of the symbols.

In this embodiment, an effect (backlight effect) is created using such reel lamps (reel backlights). Although not shown, each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is equipped with multiple LEDs (reel illumination LEDs) as reel backlights. These reel illumination LEDs are located inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R so that they can individually illuminate each of the nine symbols displayed in a stopped state within the frame of the main display window 4.

Hereinafter, the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the upper area of the left reel 3L will be referred to as the upper left reel illumination LED, the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the middle area of the left reel 3L will be referred to as the middle left reel illumination LED, the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the lower area of the left reel 3L will be referred to as the lower left reel illumination LED, the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the upper area of the middle reel 3C will be referred to as the upper middle reel illumination LED, the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the middle area of the middle reel 3C will be referred to as the middle middle reel illumination LED, the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the lower area of the middle reel 3C will be referred to as the lower middle reel illumination LED, the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the upper area of the right reel 3R will be referred to as the upper right reel illumination LED, the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the middle area of the right reel 3R will be referred to as the middle right reel illumination LED, and the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the lower area of the right reel 3R will be referred to as the lower right reel illumination LED.

The LEDs for illuminating the top left reel, the center left reel, the bottom left reel, the top center reel, the center center reel, the bottom center reel, the top right reel, the center right reel, and the bottom right reel each have multiple LEDs, allowing for backlight effects with complex lighting patterns to be realized on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The backlight effect is achieved by turning off the reel illumination LEDs that were lit as each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R stops during a simulated game. Specifically, when the main CPU 101 starts the rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R during a simulated game (see step S1206 in FIG. 55 and step S1386 in FIG. 65), it controls the LEDs so that the LEDs for illuminating the top left reel, the LEDs for illuminating the center left reel, the LEDs for illuminating the bottom left reel, the LEDs for illuminating the top middle reel, the LEDs for illuminating the center middle reel, the LEDs for illuminating the bottom middle reel, the LEDs for illuminating the top right reel, the LEDs for illuminating the center right reel, and the LED for illuminating the bottom right reel are all lit.

When the main CPU 101 determines in step S1249 of FIG. 57 that the controlled reel has stopped, it controls the reel illumination LEDs capable of illuminating the upper area of the controlled reel, the reel illumination LEDs capable of illuminating the middle area of the controlled reel, and the reel illumination LEDs capable of illuminating the lower area of the controlled reel, so that the reel illumination LEDs capable of illuminating areas that are not located on a pay line are turned off. For example, assume that the pay line is the center line and the controlled reel is left reel 3L. In this case, the main CPU 101 controls the reel illumination LEDs to be turned off, while the LED for illuminating the upper left reel and the LED for illuminating the lower left reel remain lit. When turning off the reel illumination LEDs capable of illuminating areas that are not located on a pay line, the main CPU 101 may turn off all of the multiple LEDs provided as the reel illumination LEDs, or it may turn off only some of the multiple LEDs.

As a result, the visibility of symbols displayed in areas not on paylines is reduced, but the visibility of symbols displayed in areas on paylines is ensured. For example, in the lock effect corresponding to lock effect number "3" (see FIG. 36), in the state shown in FIG. 39(b), the visibility of "BAR" and "REPLAY" is reduced for the right reel 3R, while the visibility of "RED 7" is ensured. In the state shown in FIG. 39(c), the right reel 3R is the same as the state shown in FIG. 39(b), and the visibility of "WATERM" and "YELLOW BLANK" is reduced for the center reel 3C, while the visibility of "RED 7" is ensured. In the state shown in FIG. 39(d), the right reel 3R and center reel 3C are the same as the state shown in FIG. 39(c), and the visibility of "WHITE BLANK 1" and "WATERM" is reduced for the left reel 3L, while the visibility of "RED 7" is ensured. Therefore, even if some of the reel illumination LEDs go out, the player can clearly recognize that the "red 7" symbol has been lined up.

When turning off the reel illumination LEDs that can illuminate areas not located on pay lines, it is desirable to configure the system so that turning off the reel illumination LEDs does not reduce the visibility of the symbols in areas located on pay lines. For example, it is recommended to configure the system so that a partition or similar is provided between adjacent areas so that the visibility of the symbols in each area is not interfered with by the lighting state of the reel illumination LEDs in other areas.

Furthermore, after turning off the reel illumination LEDs that can illuminate areas that are not located on the pay line, the LEDs may be turned on and off again. In this case, the lighting pattern of the LEDs may be used to indicate to the player the degree of expectation of the pseudo game. For example, when it has been determined that a bonus will be awarded to a player (e.g., when the player has won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)), the LEDs may be controlled to light up in a specific pattern with a higher probability than when it has not been determined that the bonus will be awarded (e.g., when the player has not won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)). Furthermore, when it has been determined that a bonus will be awarded to a player (e.g., when the player has won the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery)), the LEDs may be controlled to light up in a specific pattern with a higher probability than when they light up in a predetermined pattern.

The reel illumination LEDs may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or the sub-control circuit 200. If the reel illumination LEDs are configured to be controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, when the main CPU 101 changes the lighting state of the reel illumination LEDs, it generates command data corresponding to the change in lighting state and transmits the generated command data to the sub-control circuit 200. Note that in the main game, as in the pseudo game, an effect may be created in which the lighting state of the reel illumination LEDs is changed.

<Internal structure of main ROM and main RAM (memory map)>
Next, with reference to Figures 67A to 67C, we will explain the internal configurations (hereinafter referred to as "memory maps") of the main ROM 102 and main RAM 103 included in the main control circuit 100. Note that Figure 67A is a diagram showing the memory map of the entire memory, Figure 67B is a diagram showing the memory map of the main ROM 102, and Figure 67C is a diagram showing the memory map of the main RAM 103.

In the memory map of the entire memory provided in the main control circuit 100, as shown in Figure 67A, starting from the top address (0000H), the main ROM 102 memory area, main RAM 103 memory area, built-in register area, and XCS decode area are each located at a specified address in this order, with unused areas in between.

In the memory map of main ROM 102, as shown in Figure 67B, from the top address (0000H) of main ROM 102, the program area, data area, non-standard area, trademark recording area, program management area, and security setting area are located in this order, each at a designated address.

The program area stores control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to the playability of games played by players. The data area stores various data (e.g., data tables such as internal lottery tables, data for sending various control instructions (commands) to the sub-control circuit 42, etc.) used by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to the playability of games played by players. In other words, the game ROM area (game memory area) consisting of the program area and data area stores various programs and data necessary for control processes (gameability-related processes) related to the playability of games actually played by players at gaming establishments.

In addition, the non-regular area stores control programs and data for various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game played by the player (processes that do not affect playability). For example, the non-regular area stores programs and data used in the certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot 1, control programs and data used for checksum generation processes when power is lost and sum check processes when power is restored, as well as anti-fraud programs and the data required for them.

In the memory map of main RAM 103, as shown in Figure 67C, starting from the top address (F000H) of main RAM 103, the game RAM area (predetermined storage area, game temporary memory area) and non-standard RAM area (non-standard temporary memory area) are located in this order, each at a predetermined address.

The gaming RAM area is provided with a working area and stack area for temporarily storing various data, such as internal winning combinations, determined by the execution of a control program related to the playability of the game played by the player. Each type of data is then stored in the working area at a specified address within the gaming RAM area.

The non-regular RAM area also includes a non-regular work area, which serves as a work area for various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game played by the player, and a non-regular stack. In this embodiment, this non-regular RAM area is used to execute various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game played by the player, such as sum check processing.

As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, various programs and data (tables) used for various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player are stored in a non-regular ROM area (non-regular memory area) located at an address different from the game ROM area in the main ROM 102. Furthermore, various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player are performed using a non-regular RAM area located at an address different from the game RAM area in the main RAM 103.

With this configuration of the main ROM 102, it is possible to place programs and data that are not necessary for the actual game played by the player in a ROM area (non-regular ROM area) where programs and the like were previously prohibited under previous rules. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is possible to avoid pressure on the capacity of the game ROM area.

<Test firing signal control processing (non-regulatory)>
Although not shown, the main control circuit 100 performs test firing signal control processing (non-standard) during periodic interrupt processing (see FIG. 32). The main CPU 101 executes the processing of step S208 in FIG. 32 and then executes test firing signal control processing (non-standard). In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs control processing when outputting various test signals to the test machine via the test machine first interface board 301 and the test machine second interface board 302 (see FIG. 3).

Specifically, the main CPU 101 saves the address of the stack area in the main RAM 103, sets the address of the non-regular stack area in the stack pointer (SP), and saves all register data. The main CPU 101 then processes signals output to the test machine via the first test machine interface board 301 and the second test machine interface board 302, including spin control signals (drive signals) for each reel, bonus (special prize) ON/OFF signals (test signals), and control signals corresponding to the state of the condition device signal control flag. The main CPU 101 then restores the saved data from all registers and sets the saved stack area address in the stack pointer (SP).

Such test firing test signal control processing (non-regular) is executed using the non-regular work area of the main RAM 103 (see Figure 67C). Note that test firing test signal control processing (non-regular) is also performed at times other than test firing tests (after the pachislot machine 1 is installed in the gaming facility), but at this time the main control board 71 is not connected to the test machine via the test machine first interface board 301 or the test machine second interface board 302, so various test signals are generated but not output.

As explained in the first embodiment, it is possible to configure the test machine so that a test signal (pseudo game signal) is output during simulated play, allowing the test machine to recognize that a simulated game is in progress. The control processing for outputting the pseudo game signal may be performed in the test firing test signal control processing (non-regular). In this case, the control processing for outputting the pseudo game signal is executed using the non-regular work area of the main RAM 103 (see Figure 67C).

Furthermore, as described in the first embodiment, when the test machine first interface board 301 receives a pseudo game signal, it may output a pseudo game progress control signal to the main control board 71, thereby allowing the pseudo game to proceed on the main control board 71 side (i.e., the test machine first interface board 301 may be provided with a pseudo game progress function). In this case, the main control board 71 may input the pseudo game signal to the test machine second interface board 302, and the test machine second interface board 302 may input the pseudo game signal to the test machine first interface board 301. Then, by sending a pseudo game progress control signal (stop signal) from the test machine first interface board 301 to the main control board 71, it is possible to configure the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to stop (pseudo stop) during the pseudo game. This allows the test firing test to proceed smoothly.

Furthermore, when a replay wins and a simulated game is played (see Figure 66), a test signal (cancel signal) can be output to allow the test machine to recognize that the replay win is being canceled. In this case, a cancel signal (a signal prompting the operation of the bet button) may be output from the main control board 71 to the test machine via the test machine first interface board 301 (test machine second interface board 302). Alternatively, a signal indicating that a replay win has been played and a simulated game is being played may be input from the main control board 71 to the test machine first interface board 301 (test machine second interface board 302), and then a cancel signal may be output from the test machine first interface board 301 (test machine second interface board 302). Subsequently, a signal (bet signal) corresponding to the bet placed can be output to the test machine, allowing the next game to begin, thereby smoothly progressing the test firing test. The control processing for outputting such a signal can also be configured to be performed in the test firing signal control processing (non-regular). An example of a case in which a replay wins and a pseudo game is when the symbol combination displayed on reels 3L, 3C, and 3R outside the pay line is "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell," but the winning combination is a replay.

The above describes the pachislot machine 1 according to the third embodiment as one embodiment of the present invention.

[Modification of the first gaming machine]
Next, with reference to Figures 68 to 80, further modifications (extension examples) of what was described as the first gaming machine in the first embodiment will be described. Note that, with respect to the various specifications, functions, etc. described as modifications of the first gaming machine in this embodiment, some or all of them can be applied to what is described as other gaming machines in this embodiment, and further, with respect to the various specifications, functions, etc. described as other gaming machines in this embodiment, some or all of them can be applied to what is described as modifications of the first gaming machine in this embodiment. In other words, an appropriate combination of these can be considered as the invention according to this embodiment.

The first gaming machine described above may employ a specification that, when a predetermined role (for example, a push order bell) is determined to be the winning role, if a stop operation is performed in a specific manner (for example, the first left stop), the AT-related processing is favorable, and if a stop operation is not performed in that specific manner, the AT-related processing is unfavorable.

In the first gaming machine described above, as an example of applying this specification, when a predetermined role is determined to be the winning role, if a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, SR1 is set as the SR information, whereas if a stop operation is not performed in that specific mode, SR2 is set as the SR information; if SR1 is set, the ceiling points are always decremented by 1, whereas if SR2 is set, the ceiling points may not be decremented by 1, thereby making the AT-related processing advantageous or disadvantageous.

The SR information is configured as information for identifying whether a player played using a specific game method. Specifically, it identifies whether a stop operation was performed on the first left stop (whether the first stop operation was performed on the first reel) in a game in which the push order bell was won. If a stop operation was performed on the first left stop in a game in which the push order bell was won, the SR information is set to "SR1." On the other hand, if a stop operation was performed on a stop other than the first left stop in a game in which the push order bell was won, the SR information is set to "SR2." Furthermore, in games in which a role other than the push order bell was won, "SR0" is set regardless of the push order.

However, these specifications can also be applied to gameplay different from that described above, and there is likely room for further innovation beyond what was explained in the section on the first gaming machine above, so these will be explained in this modified example.

Furthermore, with this type of specification, the predetermined role is configured so that when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, the expected value of the game value to be awarded is low, but when a stop operation is not performed in a specific mode, the expected value of the game value to be awarded is high. As a result, the characteristics of the gaming machine as a whole are configured so that when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, the awarding of game value is unfavorable, but when a stop operation is not performed in a specific mode, the awarding of game value is unilaterally favorable.

Therefore, in this modified example, basically, regardless of whether a predetermined role is determined as the winning role, when a predetermined control condition is met, if a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, control is performed to favor decisions related to the AT (AT-related processing), and if a stop operation is not performed in a specific manner, control is not performed to favor decisions related to the AT (AT-related processing).

<Gameplay of the first gaming machine (modified example)>
First, the flow of the game in this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 68. Fig. 68 is a diagram showing an example of the transition flow of the game state in the non-advantageous zone and the advantageous zone in this modified example.

As with the first gaming machine described above, non-advantageous zones and advantageous zones are provided as states in which the player plays (playing zones). Furthermore, in the first gaming machine described above, a normal zone (non-advantageous zone) was provided as a game state related to the playability of the non-advantageous zone, and this is also true for this modified version. What differs from the first gaming machine described above is that during CZ, during ST, during first bonus, and during second bonus are provided as game states related to the playability of the advantageous zone.

During CZ and ST, the state is configured as a normal advantageous zone (presentation zone), but it is a more advantageous gaming state than during normal times (advantageous zone) in that it is easier to transition to the AT state than during normal times (advantageous zone) (or it is possible to determine whether to transition to the AT state under conditions different from those during normal times (advantageous zone)). Also, during the first bonus and second bonus, the state is configured as an increasing zone (AT state), and is basically the same gaming state as during the pseudo bonus in the first gaming machine described above. Also, in this modified example, during ST and second bonus, both gaming states constitute consecutive win zones. This will be explained later.

When it is decided to move to a favorable zone during normal play (non-favorable zone), (the favorable zone transition lottery is won), the game will move to normal play (favorable zone) (transition to favorable zone). In other words, the favorable zone will begin. It is also possible to decide to move to a CZ or the first bonus as a result of the favorable zone transition lottery, and if this decision is made, the game may move directly to the corresponding state.

When play is performed during normal play (advantageous zone) and the CZ transition condition is met, a transition to the CZ occurs (CZ transition condition met). The CZ transition condition may be met, for example, when a CZ transition lottery is held with a winning probability set according to the winning combination and the lottery is won, or when points are awarded according to the winning combination (or the progress of the play period) and the awarded points reach a specified value (when the cycle is reached) (or when a CZ transition lottery is held when the cycle is reached and the lottery is won), (the condition is met). In other words, it is sufficient to be able to determine whether or not to transition to the CZ for each predetermined trigger, and the above is merely one example.

Furthermore, when play is performed during normal play (advantageous zone) and the AT transition condition is met, a transition to the first bonus will occur (AT transition condition met). The AT transition condition may be met, for example, when an AT transition lottery is held with a winning probability set according to the winning combination and the lottery is won, or when an AT transition lottery is held when the aforementioned cycle is reached and the lottery is won (or when the AT win is determined as a partial result of the CZ transition lottery). Furthermore, the condition may be met, for example, when the set ceiling number of games or the number of CZ failures reaches a specified value. In other words, whether or not to transition to the first bonus should be determined for each predetermined trigger, and the above is merely one example.

In this modified example, the main route for gameplay is basically to transition from normal mode (advantageous zone) to CZ, and then when the AT transition conditions are met during the CZ, transition to the first bonus mode. Therefore, the probability of transitioning directly from normal mode (advantageous zone) to the first bonus mode is not necessarily high. Furthermore, it may be configured so that when the AT transition conditions are met, it may be decided to transition to the second bonus mode in some cases.

In addition, during normal play (advantageous zones), for example, in decisions related to whether or not a CZ transition condition is met, or decisions related to whether or not an AT transition condition is met, the probability of that decision differs depending on whether the current state is a favorable state or a non-favorable state. Specifically, if the current state is a favorable state, the above-mentioned decision is favored, and if the current state is a non-favorable state, the above-mentioned decision is not favored.

For example, during normal play (advantageous zone), when the current state is a favorable state, it is made easier to win the CZ transition lottery compared to at least a non-favorable state, and when the current state is a non-favorable state, it is made harder to win the CZ transition lottery compared to at least a favorable state. Note that "making it harder to win" includes cases where the lottery itself is not held (or the lottery is held, but the winning lottery value is set to "0", making it virtually impossible to win (or the winning lottery value is set to an extremely small value (such as "1"), making it virtually impossible to win)).

Furthermore, for example, during normal play (advantageous interval), when the current state is a favorable state, points are made more likely to be awarded than in a non-favorable state, and when the current state is a non-favorable state, points are made more difficult to award than in a favorable state. Note that "making it more difficult to award points" includes cases where the award decision is not made at all (or where the award decision is made, but the decision result is always "0", so that no points are actually awarded (or where the probability of the decision result being "1" or higher is extremely low, so that almost no points are actually awarded)). Of course, it is also possible to create differences in this way, for example, when a "watermelon" is won, "5" points are awarded in a favorable state, but only "1" point is awarded in a non-favorable state. Also, for example, if one point is awarded per game, it is possible to create differences in this way, such as the award process being carried out in a favorable state, but not in a non-favorable state.

Furthermore, for example, during normal play (advantageous zone), when the current state is a preferential state, it is made easier to win the AT transition lottery compared to at least a non-preferential state, and when the current state is a non-preferential state, it is made harder to win the AT transition lottery compared to at least a preferential state. Note that "making it harder to win" includes cases where the lottery itself is not held (or the lottery is held, but the winning lottery value is set to "0", making it virtually impossible to win (or the winning lottery value is set to an extremely small value (such as "1"), making it virtually impossible to win)).

Also, for example, during normal operation (advantageous zone), when the current state is a favorable state, decisions related to whether or not the CZ transition conditions are met are more favorable than in a non-favorable state, but decisions related to whether or not the AT transition conditions are met are the same as in a non-favorable state (i.e., no favorable treatment) can be adopted; or during normal operation (advantageous zone), when the current state is a favorable state, decisions related to whether or not the AT transition conditions are met are more favorable than in a non-favorable state, but decisions related to whether or not the CZ transition conditions are met are the same as in a non-favorable state (i.e., no favorable treatment) can be adopted.

During the CZ, for example, it is configured to be able to continue for a set period (for example, 16 games), and if the AT transition conditions are met during that time, the game will transition to the first bonus (CZ successful, AT win). On the other hand, if the AT transition conditions are not met during that time, the game will transition to the normal period (advantageous zone) (CZ failed, AT not won). The AT transition conditions during the CZ can be, for example, the same as those during the normal period (advantageous zone), or the same as those during the ST, which will be described later.

Furthermore, with regard to the preferential control described below, for example, if AT transition conditions similar to those during normal times (advantageous zones) are adopted during CZ (or if AT transition conditions different from those during ST are adopted at least), preferential control similar to that during normal times (advantageous zones) can be performed, and if AT transition conditions similar to those during ST are adopted (or if AT transition conditions different from those during normal times (advantageous zones) are adopted at least), preferential control similar to that during ST can be performed.

Also, different AT transition conditions can be used during the CZ. For example, during the first half of the CZ (e.g., games 1-10), an expectation lottery is held for each predetermined trigger (e.g., each time a specific combination is won, or each time a game is played) to determine (or upgrade) the AT winning expectation. Then, during the second half of the CZ (e.g., games 11-15), an AT lottery is held for each predetermined trigger (e.g., each time a specific combination is won, or each time a game is played). If the lottery is won, an AT winning (CZ success) is announced in the final game (e.g., the 16th game), and the game transitions to the first bonus from the next game. If the lottery is not won, an AT non-winning (CZ failure) is announced in the final game (e.g., the 16th game), and the game returns to normal mode (the advantageous zone) from the next game. This type of gameplay can be adopted.

In this case, for example, in the first half period, when the current state is a preferential state, it is made easier to win the expectation lottery compared to at least a non-preferential state, and when the current state is a non-preferential state, it is made harder to win the expectation lottery compared to at least a preferential state. Also, in the second half period, when the current state is a preferential state, it is made easier to win the AT lottery compared to at least a non-preferential state, and when the current state is a non-preferential state, it is made harder to win the AT lottery compared to at least a preferential state. Note that the manner of "making it harder to win" is the same as that described above.

Note that the specified period during the CZ is merely an example, and the period is not limited to the above. For example, if the number of games is managed, the period may be another period that does not change (e.g., 32 games), or another period that can change (e.g., one determined by lottery between 16 and 32 games). Furthermore, for example, the number of AT lotteries to be held may be specified (or determined by lottery), and the AT lottery may continue until this specified number of times (e.g., three) have been held. Furthermore, for example, a specified number of continuation lotteries (e.g., three) may be held, and if a continuation lottery during the run is not a winning lottery, the CZ will fail and end; if all continuation lotteries are winning lots, the CZ will end and end.

Furthermore, during the CZ, the final decision on whether to transition to the first bonus can be made based on one or more lottery or decision results, and the manner in which this is done is not limited to the above. Furthermore, the timing of transition from the CZ to the first bonus is not limited to the above. For example, the transition to the first bonus may be made from the game following the game in which the AT transition condition is met, without waiting for the final game.

In addition, during the CZ, it is basically configured as a normal advantageous zone in a non-AT state, but it may be configured to be in an AT state (increasing zone) for at least a portion of the period (for example, from the start until the push order bell is drawn three times), or the entire period may be configured as an increasing zone in an AT state.

During the first bonus, for example, the AT state (increase interval) is configured to continue for a specified period (e.g., 20 games), and once the specified period of play has been played, the game transitions to the consecutive win zone (the first bonus end condition is met). During the first bonus, a second bonus stock lottery is held at least every specified trigger (e.g., every time a specific combination is won, or after each play), and if the lottery is won, the value of the second bonus counter is incremented by 1. Then, when the specified period of play has been played, if the value of the second bonus counter is 1 or greater, the value of the second bonus counter is decremented by 1 and the game transitions to the second bonus state, and if the value of the second bonus counter is 0, the game transitions to the ST state.

The specified period during the first bonus is merely an example, and the period is not limited to the one described above. For example, if the number of games is managed, the period may be another period that does not change (e.g., 25 games), or another period that can change (e.g., 20, 25, or 30 games determined by lottery). It may also be managed by the number of times a navigation occurs (navigation count) when the push order bell is drawn (e.g., ending when the navigation count reaches 10), or by the difference in the number of coins (e.g., ending when the difference in the number of coins exceeds 100).

During the second bonus, for example, the AT state (increase interval) is configured to continue for a specified period (e.g., 10 games), and one set ends when play for the specified period is exhausted. During the second bonus, a second bonus stock lottery is held at least at each specified trigger (e.g., each time a specific combination is won or after each play), and if a win is won, the value of the second bonus counter is incremented by one. When play for the specified period is exhausted (when one set ends), if the value of the second bonus counter is 1 or greater (including when it was incremented during the first bonus or during ST), the value of the second bonus counter is decremented by one, and the next set during the second bonus begins. At this time (including when transitioning from the first bonus to the first bonus or during ST), the specified period may be determined by lottery (e.g., determining the number of games from 10, 20, or 40), and the specified period may be set according to the lottery results.

Furthermore, during the second bonus, when the specified period of play has been exhausted (when one set has ended), if the value of the second bonus counter is 0, the game will transition to ST (the second bonus end condition is met). Note that various management methods can be used to manage the specified period during the second bonus, similar to those described in the explanation for the first bonus.

The ST is configured to last for a set period (e.g., 16 games), and if the second bonus transition conditions are met during that time, the game will transition to the second bonus (second bonus transition conditions met). On the other hand, if the second bonus transition conditions are not met during that time, the consecutive win zone ends (i.e., the advantageous period ends), initialization processing is performed at the end of the advantageous period, and the game will transition to normal mode (non-advantageous period) (end of consecutive win zone).

During ST, the game is basically configured as a normal advantageous zone in a non-AT state. For each predetermined trigger (for example, each time a specific combination is won, or each play), an AT transition lottery (second bonus transition lottery) is conducted with a winning probability set according to the winning combination and the type of lottery map described below. Additionally, for each predetermined trigger (for example, each time a specific combination is won, or each play), a second bonus stock lottery is conducted. Furthermore, these lotteries (determinations) are configured so that the determination probability differs depending on whether the current state is a favorable or non-favorable state. Specifically, if the current state is a favorable state, the above-mentioned determination is favored, and if the current state is a non-favorable state, the above-mentioned determination is not favored. This will be explained in more detail later using Figure 70.

If a player wins the second bonus transition lottery during ST, the game will transition to the second bonus period from the next game (or when the specified period of play has expired) (the second bonus transition condition is met). Also, if the value of the second bonus counter is 1 or greater when the specified period of play has expired without a win in the second bonus transition lottery, the value of the second bonus counter will be decremented by 1 and the game will transition to the second bonus period (the second bonus transition condition is met). On the other hand, if the value of the second bonus counter is also 0 when the specified period of play has expired without a win in the second bonus transition lottery, the consecutive win zone will end as described above, and the game will transition to normal mode (non-advantageous zone) (the consecutive win zone ends). Note that various management methods can be used to manage the specified period during ST, similar to those described in the explanation for CZ.

In this way, in this modified example, after the end of the first bonus, it is possible to alternate (loop) between the second bonus and ST, and although ST itself is not configured as an increasing section, by configuring it as a state where there is a high expectation of moving into the second bonus (where it is easy to get consecutive second bonuses), it can be configured as a consecutive win zone, a highly exciting gaming period for players. Furthermore, since the second bonus may itself result in consecutive wins (be extended), this can also increase the excitement.

It is also possible to provide multiple such consecutive win zones. For example, the above-mentioned consecutive win zone may be the first consecutive win zone, and if a specific transition condition is met in this first consecutive win zone, a transition to the more advantageous second consecutive win zone may occur. In this case, the specific transition condition may be met, for example, when the second bonus is executed a specified number of times (e.g., a total of 5 sets) in the first consecutive win zone. Also, for example, the specific transition condition may be met when the second bonus is executed for a specified period (e.g., a total of 100 games) in the first consecutive win zone. Of course, these are just examples, and various conditions that may be met depending on the player's game results can be employed.

In addition, as a mode for making the second consecutive win zone advantageous, for example, in the first consecutive win zone, the probability of the second bonus winning (looping) is set to a total of approximately 50-75%, while in the second consecutive win zone, this probability is set to a total of approximately 85%, making it relatively easier to transition into the second bonus (making it harder for the consecutive win zone to end). Also, for example, in the first consecutive win zone, 40 games are determined as the specified period during the second bonus at a predetermined probability, while in the second consecutive win zone, 40 games are more likely to be determined as a result. Alternatively, in the first consecutive win zone, the probability of winning the second bonus stock lottery is a predetermined probability, while in the second consecutive win zone, this also makes it easier to win, thereby making the degree of continuity during each second bonus advantageous. Of course, these are just examples, and any mode can be adopted as long as it ultimately provides an advantage to the player.

Although not shown in the illustration, various limit processes are also activated in this modified example. For example, if the value of the advantageous zone game count counter reaches 1420 or more, or the value of the advantageous zone payout counter reaches 2064 or more, during either the first bonus, second bonus, or ST, the game will transition to the ending state. The ending state is configured as a state in which navigation can occur for the push order bell until the payout limiter or game count limiter is activated. If any of these limiters are activated during the ending state, the advantageous zone will be forcibly ended and the game will transition to normal mode (non-advantageous zone).

In either state, if the value of the advantageous zone game count counter reaches 1500 or more, the game count limiter will be activated, and if the value of the advantageous zone payout counter reaches 2400 or more, the payout limiter will be activated. In this case, as described above, the advantageous zone will be forcibly ended, initialization processing will be performed at the end of the advantageous zone, and the zone will transition to normal mode (non-advantageous zone).

Note that because the game count limiter can only be activated by the number of games played, there is a possibility that a player who started playing just before the limiter was activated may lose interest (as the limiter would be activated immediately). Also, depending on the results of the advantageous zone transition lottery, it may be more advantageous for the player to end the advantageous zone once and transition to a non-advantageous zone, so frequently ending the advantageous zone may not actually contribute to the appropriate management of gambling. Therefore, from this perspective, the machine may be configured to only include a payout limiter as a limiter, and not include a game count limiter.

<Example of preferential control (normal mode) of first gaming machine (variant)>
Next, an example of preferential control during normal operation (advantageous zone) in this modified example will be described with reference to Fig. 69. Note that Fig. 69 shows a schematic flowchart illustrating an example of the preferential control process in order to explain the example of preferential control during normal operation (advantageous zone). Therefore, the specific control process in the preferential control is not necessarily limited to that shown in Fig. 69.

First, when a game is started (for example, when a start operation is performed), the main CPU 101 determines whether the preferential counter is 1 or greater (S4001). The preferential counter is a counter that manages whether the game is in a preferential state or a non-preferential state; if the preferential counter is 1 or greater at the start of a game, the game is controlled to be in a preferential state, and if the preferential counter is 0, the game is controlled to be in a non-preferential state.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the preferential counter is 1 or greater (YES in S4001), it sets the game state to the preferential state (S4002). Next, it decrements the preferential counter by 1 (S4003). Then, it proceeds to S4005.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the preferential counter is not 1 or greater (i.e., is 0) (NO in S4001), it sets the game state to a non-preferential state (S4004). Then, it proceeds to S4005.

Although not shown in Figure 69, when the processing of S4001 to S4004 sets the game state to a preferential state or a non-preferential state, the main CPU 101 refers to the setting result and makes decisions related to the AT state (for example, during the first bonus), such as decisions related to whether the CZ transition condition is met or whether the AT transition condition is met.

For example, if a preferential state is set, the main CPU 101 performs processing such as conducting a CZ transition lottery or an AT transition lottery in the game. It also performs processing such as awarding points and advancing the ceiling number of games in the game. On the other hand, if a non-preferential state is set, the main CPU 101 does not perform processing such as conducting a CZ transition lottery or an AT transition lottery in the game. It also does not perform processing such as awarding points or advancing the ceiling number of games in the game. As mentioned above, the manner in which the preferential state is made more advantageous than the non-preferential state, or the manner in which the non-preferential state is made less advantageous than the preferential state, are not limited to these.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stop operation for the game is the first left stop (S4005). In other words, the main CPU 101 determines whether the stop operation for the game is performed in a specific manner. Note that this determination may be performed when the first stop operation is performed, or after the third stop operation.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the stop operation for the game is the first left stop (YES in S4005), it conducts a preferential counter addition lottery, and if the lottery is a winning lottery, it increments the preferential counter by 1 (S4006). Then, it terminates the processing. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the stop operation for the game is not the first left stop (NO in S4005), it simply terminates the processing.

In the preferential counter addition lottery, for example, the probability denominator is "65536," the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "add preferential counter by 1" is assigned "65535," and the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "no preferential counter addition" is assigned "1." A preferential counter addition lottery table is referenced, and the lottery is conducted based on the sampled random number value. In this case, it is determined that the preferential counter will be incremented by 1 with a probability of "65535/65536," and that the preferential counter will not be incremented with a probability of "1/65536." In other words, in this modified example, when playing in preferential mode, the preferential counter value may not be incremented by 1 even if a stop operation is performed at the first left stop.

The configuration of the preferential counter addition lottery table described above is merely an example. For example, the probability denominator may be "256," with "255" assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "adding the preferential counter by 1," and "1" assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "not adding the preferential counter." In other words, the lottery may be conducted using a 1-byte random number instead of a 2-byte random number.

Furthermore, for example, the probability of determining "no preferential counter increment" may be increased from the above. For example, using the example of a 1-byte random number, the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "increment preferential counter by 1" may be assigned "192" or "128," and the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "no preferential counter increment" may be assigned "64" or "128." In other words, the probability may be set appropriately depending on the degree of advantage of the preferential state (or the degree of disadvantage of the non-preferential state). This is similar for other examples.

Also, for example, the probability denominator may be "65536," with "65536" assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "increase the preferential counter by 1" and "0" assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "not incrementing the preferential counter." In other words, the lottery process itself may be performed, but if the stop operation for the game is the first left stop, the preferential counter may essentially always be incremented by 1. In addition to this, for example, if the main CPU 101 determines in the processing of S4005 that the stop operation for the game is the first left stop, the processing of S4006 may simply increment the preferential counter by 1, and no lottery may be performed.

Furthermore, if the main CPU 101 determines in the processing of S4005 that the stop operation for the game is the first left stop, processing is performed in S4006 to set a preferential state for the next game, and if the main CPU 101 determines that the stop operation for the game is other than the first left stop, processing is performed in the subsequent processing (let's say S4007) to set a non-preferential state for the next game, and such control may be performed without using a preferential counter.

Also, for example, the probability denominator may be "65536," with "65534" assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "adding the preferential counter by 1," "1" assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "adding the preferential counter by 2," and "1" assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "not adding the preferential counter." In other words, it may be possible for the preferential counter value to be added by 2 or more in a single game, and it may be determined that the preferential state will continue for multiple games depending on the result of a single game.

In this way, through the processing of S4005 and S4006, the main CPU 101 increments the preferential counter by 1 as a general rule if the stop operation for the game is the first left stop. This will set the preferential state for the next game (see S4001 and S4002). On the other hand, if the stop operation for the game is not the first left stop, the preferential counter is not incremented as a general rule. This will set the non-preferential state for the next game (see S4001, S4003, and S4004).

In other words, in this modified example, by performing the preferential control described above, if a player plays at the first left stop, at least the next play will be in the preferential state, so if the player plays at the first left stop all the time, the game will basically be played in the preferential state all the time. On the other hand, if a player plays at a stop other than the first left stop, at least the next play will be in the non-preferential state, so if the player plays at a stop other than the first left all the time, the game will basically be played in the non-preferential state all the time.

In the example described above, when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, the preferential counter is incremented and updated in S4006, so that the next game will be in the preferential state. However, the method of controlling the preferential counter is not limited to this. For example, after S4003 or S4004 and before S4005, the preferential counter may be incremented by 1. If S4005 is YES, the process may be terminated. Alternatively, if S4005 is NO, a preferential counter decrement lottery may be performed, and if the lottery result is successful, the preferential counter may be decremented by 1 and the process may be terminated. In this case, for example, a preferential counter decrement lottery table may be referenced, in which "65535" is assigned to the lottery value that determines the result of the "subtract preferential counter by 1" lottery and "1" is assigned to the lottery value that determines the result of the "not decrement preferential counter," and the lottery may be performed based on the extracted random value.

In this case, the preferential counter subtraction lottery table may have, for example, a probability denominator of "65536," "65534" assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "subtract preferential counter 1," "1" assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "subtract preferential counter 2," and "1" assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "not subtracting preferential counter." In other words, it may be possible for the preferential counter value to be effectively subtracted by 2 or more in a single game, and it may be determined that the non-preferential state will continue for multiple games depending on the result of a single game.

In addition, in this modified example, the preferential control described above is configured to be performed regardless of which winning role is determined, at least during normal play (advantageous zone). In other words, in this modified example, the preferential control described above can be performed in all games during normal play (advantageous zone). Furthermore, if the configuration is such that similar preferential control is performed during a CZ, the same applies during that CZ, and if the configuration is such that similar preferential control is performed during an ST, the same applies during that ST. In other words, in this modified example, the preferential control described above can be performed at least when not controlled in the AT state (during the first bonus or second bonus).

However, priority control such as that described above may also be executable in the AT state. For example, if there is a possibility that the control load will increase due to processing branching depending on whether or not the game is in the AT state, priority control such as that described above may always be executed. In this case, for example, when the game is in the AT state, various decisions and lotteries may be made without referencing the value of the preferential counter. Alternatively, a process specific to the AT state may be performed in which the preferential counter is incremented by 1 for each play, so that the value of the preferential counter is always 1 or greater during the AT state. In this case, when the game transitions to ST, the preferential counter's initial value may be set to "1".

Here, the first gaming machine described above has a push order minor feature, such as a "push order bell," in which the expected value of the game value awarded varies depending on the stop operation mode (batting order), and a non-issue feature (such as a replay feature or other minor feature) in which the expected value of the game value awarded does not vary depending on the stop operation mode (batting order) other than this push order minor feature. In a game in which the push order minor feature is determined to be the winning feature, if the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, the first stop on the left), it may be considered an AT preferential batting order in which AT-related processing is advantageous but the expected value of the awarded game value is low, and if the stop operation is performed in a mode other than the specific mode (for example, other than the first stop on the left), it may be considered an acquisition preferential batting order (in other words, a non-AT preferential batting order) in which AT-related processing is disadvantageous but the expected value of the awarded game value is high. In this modified example, these batting orders are configured in a different manner.

Specifically, as mentioned above, the overall characteristics of the gaming machine are such that when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, the awarding of game value is unfavorable, while when a stop operation is not performed in a specific mode, the awarding of game value is unilaterally favorable. Regardless of the winning combination for each game, when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode, this is treated as a preferential AT batting order (i.e., it can be controlled to a preferential state), and when a stop operation is performed in a mode different from the specific mode, this is treated as a non-preferential AT batting order (i.e., it can be controlled to a non-preferential state). In other words, all combinations are subject to this preferential control.

However, since this preferential control is based on the premise that play is basically performed in the recommended gaming state, it may not apply to bonus roles (such as "F_BB") that, as a general rule, will not be won in the recommended gaming state.

Also, for example, so-called rare roles, such as "F_Cherry" and "F_Watermelon," which have a low probability of winning but are likely to be highly anticipated by players when various lotteries and determinations are made, may be excluded. Regarding the mode of excluding rare roles, for example, it is possible to adopt a mode in which rare roles are excluded if the current state is a favorable state and a rare role is determined as the winning role, but are not excluded if the current state is a non-favorable state and a rare role is determined as the winning role.

Also, for example, if the current state is a favorable state and a rare role is determined to be the winning role, it may be ineligible if it is determined that a transition to an advantageous state will occur, for example, by winning a CZ transition lottery or an AT transition lottery, but it may not be ineligible if a transition to an advantageous state is not determined.

Also, a configuration may be adopted in which only normal roles are subject to preferential control. Note that, for example, as described above, "normal roles" can be defined as all roles excluding bonus roles, or all roles excluding bonus roles and rare roles. Furthermore, when a game progresses with a bonus role carried over (between flags), they can also be defined as roles other than rare roles between flags. For example, overlapping roles between minor roles such as push order bells and bonus roles between flags, or overlapping roles between replay roles and bonus roles between flags, may be treated as "normal roles." They can also be defined in a different way. For example, among all roles, roles that are subject to preferential control and roles that are not excluded from preferential control can be predetermined (regardless of role type), and all roles that are subject to preferential control can be defined as normal roles. Note that roles that are subject to preferential control in this way are sometimes referred to as "penalty lottery tickets" or the like.

Also, for example, a push order replay can be provided for a replay role, and this push order replay can be configured to display a specific symbol combination when a stop operation is performed in a specific manner, but not display the specific symbol combination when a stop operation is not performed in a specific manner (however, both ultimately result in a replay), and this push order replay and push order minor role can be defined as normal roles, with other non-issue roles excluded.

<Example of preferential control (during ST) of first gaming machine (modification)>
Next, an example of preferential control during ST in this modified example will be described with reference to Figure 70. Figure 70 shows an overview of part of the game flow during ST in order to explain the example of preferential control during ST. Note that the same method as that described using Figure 69 can be used to control each game to either a preferential state or a non-preferential state, or a different method can be used.

(Example of specifications during ST)
First, an example of the specifications during ST will be described. As described above and as shown in FIG. 70, ST can be configured to continue for a specified period (e.g., 16 games). This specified period is managed by an ST game number counter, which is period management information. The value of the ST game number counter is incremented by one per game, regardless of whether the stop operation mode in that game is sequential pressing (first left stop) or irregular pressing (other than first left stop) (in other words, regardless of whether the game is controlled to a preferential state or a non-preferential state). In other words, the game period (period management information) during ST progresses regardless of the batting order. Note that the ST game number counter may be configured to manage the corresponding information by subtracting updates.

For example, if the variable display section is configured with three reels (left reel 3L, center reel 3C, right reel 3R), more specifically, performing the stop operation in the order of "left → center → right" is called "push in order," and performing the stop operation in the order of "left → right → center" is called "scissors cut." However, in the explanation of Figure 70 (and similarly when the left first stop is described as "push in order" elsewhere), the left first stop (both left → center → right and left → right → center) is referred to as "push in order." And, at least in this example, in the case of the left first stop, no particular difference is made between performing the stop operation in the order of left → center → right and performing the stop operation in the order of left → right → center (they are treated the same in terms of processing), and processing related to the preferential state is possible at the time of the first stop. However, it is also possible to differentiate between the processing of whether or not a preferred state is established when stopping operations are performed in the order of left → center → right and when stopping operations are performed in the order of left → right → center. For example, when stopping operations are performed in the order of left → center → right, it may be treated as a recommended stroke (a stop operation that results in a specific mode) that results in a preferred state, and when stopping operations are performed in the order of left → right → center, it may be treated as a non-recommended stroke (a stop operation that does not result in a specific mode) at the time of the second stop, just like with irregular strokes (first stop on center, first stop on right).

A MAP game number counter is also provided, which is lottery management information that manages the degree of advantage during ST. The value of the MAP game number counter is configured to increment by 1 if the stop operation mode for that game is sequential pressing, and not increment if it is irregular pressing. The value of the MAP game number counter is used to set the lottery MAP, and is configured so that the larger the value, the higher the probability of winning the second bonus transition lottery. In other words, the degree of advantage during ST (lottery management information) changes (progresses) to an advantageous value if sequential pressing is used, and does not change (progress) to an advantageous value if irregular pressing is used. The MAP game number counter may also manage the corresponding information by subtracting updates.

Also, although the probability is at least lower than when pressing buttons in an irregular sequence, there may be cases where the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented even when pressing buttons in order. In this case, for example, the probability denominator may be "65536," and a MAP game number counter increment lottery table may be referenced, in which "65535" is assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "increment the MAP game number counter by 1," and "1" is assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "not increment the MAP game number counter," and the lottery is conducted based on the extracted random number value.

Furthermore, although the probability is at least lower than when pressing buttons in order, the value of the MAP game number counter may also be incremented when pressing buttons in an irregular sequence. In this case, for example, a MAP game number counter increment lottery table is referenced, in which "65535" is assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "not incrementing the MAP game number counter," and "1" is assigned to the lottery value that determines the lottery result of "incrementing the MAP game number counter by 1," and the lottery is conducted based on the extracted random number value.

Furthermore, with regard to the relationship between the value of the MAP game number counter and the lottery MAP, while maintaining the basic relationship that the larger the value of the MAP game number counter, the more advantageous the lottery MAP, for example, the value of the MAP game number counter and the lottery MAP may uniquely correspond to each other, and a lottery MAP may be set according to the value of the MAP game number counter, or one lottery MAP may be determined by lottery from among multiple lottery MAPs using a lottery value according to the value of the MAP game number counter.

Furthermore, with regard to the lottery map, for example, it may be one that can change the degree of advantage to a more favorable one by simply increasing the probability of winning the second bonus transition lottery as the game progresses (the lottery value that determines a winning lottery becomes larger), or it may be one that can change the degree of advantage to a more favorable one by increasing the degree of advantage as the target role for the second bonus transition lottery progresses (resulting in a higher probability of winning). It may also be one that can change the degree of advantage to a more favorable one by combining these. Please note that these are merely examples, and the degree of advantage may be changed to a more favorable one in other ways.

Using the example shown in Figure 70, for example, when lottery MAP is "A", the roles to be drawn are "watermelon" and "cherry", the probability denominator is "256", and the lottery value that determines a winning lottery for each is assigned a "1", and the lottery value that determines a losing lottery is assigned a "255". Also, when lottery MAP is "B", the roles to be drawn are "watermelon" and "cherry", the probability denominator is "256", and the lottery value that determines a winning lottery for each is assigned a "2", and the lottery value that determines a losing lottery is assigned a "254". Furthermore, when the lottery map is "C," the roles to be drawn are "watermelon" and "cherry," the probability denominator is "256," and the lottery value that determines a winning combination is assigned "3," and the lottery value that determines a losing combination is assigned "253."

When the lottery map is "D," the roles to be drawn are "watermelon," "cherry," and "special roles," the probability denominator is "256," and the lottery value that determines a winning lottery for each is assigned a "1," and the lottery value that determines a losing lottery is assigned a "255." When the lottery map is "E," the roles to be drawn are "watermelon," "cherry," and "special roles," the probability denominator is "256," and the lottery value that determines a winning lottery for each is assigned a "2," and the lottery value that determines a losing lottery is assigned a "254." Furthermore, when the lottery map is "F," the roles to be drawn are "watermelon," "cherry," and "special role," the probability denominator is "256," and the lottery value that determines a win is assigned "3," and the lottery value that determines a loss is assigned "253." For example, in this way, it can be configured so that the degree of advantage increases sequentially.

(Control Example 1)
Next, a case where the first to sixth games during ST are all played by pressing buttons in order will be explained as control example 1 (see (a) of Figure 70).

In the first game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery MAP "A", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the second game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery MAP "B", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the third game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since this game is controlled to a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery map "C", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the fourth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled to a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery map "D", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the fifth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled to a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery map "E", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the sixth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled to a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery map "F", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

(Control Example 2)
Next, a case where the first game is played using irregular button presses and the remaining games are played using normal button presses during the first to sixth games of ST will be explained as control example 2 (see (b) of Figure 70).

In the first game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery MAP "A", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the second game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Also, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Note that, since this game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not conducted, and the second bonus stock lottery is not conducted either.

In the third game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery MAP "B", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the fourth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since this game is controlled to a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery map "C", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the fifth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled to a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery map "D", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the sixth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled to a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery map "E", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

Compared to Control Example 1, in Control Example 1, the lottery map has progressed to "F" by the sixth game, whereas in Control Example 2, the lottery map has only progressed to "E" by the sixth game. Furthermore, in Control Example 2, because the second game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery and second bonus stock lottery are not conducted in that game (as an example, no lottery is conducted). In other words, in Control Example 2, even if, for example, a player wins the "push order bell" in the first game and happens to be in the correct batting order, resulting in a large amount of game value being awarded, at least the AT-related processing is less favorable than in Control Example 1, and the game period during ST is not extended, so overall, Control Example 2 may be more disadvantageous to the player than Control Example 1.

(Control Example 3)
Next, we will explain control example 3, where, during the first to sixth games of ST, the first to fourth games are played using irregular button presses and the remaining games are played using normal button presses (see (c) of Figure 70).

In the first game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery MAP "A", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the second game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since this game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not conducted, and the second bonus stock lottery is not conducted either.

In the third game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since this game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not conducted, and the second bonus stock lottery is not conducted either.

In the fourth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since this game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not conducted, and the second bonus stock lottery is not conducted either.

In the fifth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Also, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Note that, since this game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not conducted, and the second bonus stock lottery is not conducted either.

In the sixth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game was played in sequential order, the value of the MAP game number counter is also incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled to a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery MAP "B", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

Compared to Control Example 1, in Control Example 1, the lottery map has progressed to "F" by the sixth game, whereas in Control Example 3, the lottery map has only progressed to "B" by the sixth game. Furthermore, in Control Example 3, games 2 through 5 are controlled to a non-preferential state, so the second bonus transition lottery and second bonus stock lottery are not conducted in those games (as an example, no lottery is conducted). In other words, in Control Example 3, even if a player wins the "push order bell" in games 1 through 4 and happens to be in the correct batting order, resulting in a large amount of game value being awarded, at least the AT-related processing is less favorable than in Control Example 1, and the game period during ST is not extended, so overall, Control Example 3 may be more unfavorable to the player than Control Example 1.

(Control Example 4)
Next, a case where the first to sixth games during ST are all played using irregular button presses will be explained as control example 4 (see (d) of Figure 70).

In the first game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since the game is controlled in a preferential state, a second bonus transition lottery is held in accordance with the winning combination and lottery MAP "A", and a second bonus stock lottery is also held.

In the second game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since this game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not conducted, and the second bonus stock lottery is not conducted either.

In the third game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since this game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not conducted, and the second bonus stock lottery is not conducted either.

In the fourth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since this game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not conducted, and the second bonus stock lottery is not conducted either.

In the fifth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since this game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not conducted, and the second bonus stock lottery is not conducted either.

In the sixth game, the value of the ST game number counter is first incremented by 1. However, since the game was played using irregular button presses, the value of the MAP game number counter is not incremented by 1. Furthermore, since this game is controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery is not conducted, and the second bonus stock lottery is not conducted either.

In this Control Example 4, if the game is played using irregular button presses for the entire ST period, the same control will be applied from the 7th to the 15th games. The 16th game will be the final game in which it will be determined whether or not a second bonus will be awarded during ST, but because this game is also controlled to a non-preferential state, the second bonus transition lottery will not be held, and the second bonus stock lottery will not be held either.

Then, in the next game (although for example, if the second bonus stock lottery was won in the first game, the game may transition to the second bonus), basically no decision is made as to whether the second bonus will be awarded, and the game is controlled to a state where the ST end preparation for one game is made in order to display the results of the consecutive win zone (for example, how many sets of the second bonus were executed during the consecutive win zone, how many coins were won, etc.), and the ST ends for that game, which also ends the consecutive win zone (i.e., the advantageous period ends).

<Example of control of anticipation effects in the first gaming machine (variant)>
Next, control examples of the anticipation effects of this modified example will be described with reference to Figures 71 to 78. Note that Figures 71 and 72 are diagrams showing a control example (control example 1) when effect data 1 is determined, Figures 73 and 74 are diagrams showing a control example (control example 2) when effect data 2 is determined, and Figures 75 to 78 are diagrams showing a control example (control example 3) when effect data 3 is determined. To make the explanation easier to understand, these control examples will be described assuming that the variable display unit has three reels (left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R), as in this embodiment.

In addition, the term "expectation effect" as used here refers to an effect that can give the player a sense of anticipation, such as an effect that can be executed in a game in which a rare role is won during normal play (advantageous zone) (it can also be executed in a game in which a non-rare role is won), or an effect that can be executed in a premonition state in which it has been decided that a transition will occur into the CZ (or the first bonus) but the player has not yet transitioned to the CZ (or the first bonus) (it can also be executed in a so-called false premonition state).

In other words, it can be defined as a presentation that can notify the player that a situation advantageous to the player will occur (or not occur), or suggest the possibility (for example, the likelihood or expectation) that a situation advantageous to the player may occur. Furthermore, such notifications or suggestions are made by changing the presentation content (the presentation progresses) as the game progresses.

The above-mentioned uses are merely examples, and of course the device can be used for other purposes. For example, it may notify or suggest the expectation of a transition to the AT state during a CZ or ST, or it may notify or suggest the expectation of an extension of the AT state during a first bonus or second bonus. Also, in this example, as an example of an expectation effect, the notification or suggestion is made by a change in the display content (progression of the display content) on the main effect display unit 21, but this is not limited to this, and for example, the notification or suggestion may be made by progressing the effect through the presentation mode of other presentation execution means such as a lamp or speaker.

(Control Example 1)
First, a control example (control example 1) when effect data 1 is determined as an example of an anticipation effect will be described with reference to Figures 71 and 72. Note that Figure 71 is a diagram that schematically shows the progression of the display content when a stop operation is performed by pressing in order (first stop on the left) and the game progresses in this example, and Figure 72 is a diagram that schematically shows the progression of the display content when a stop operation is performed by pressing other than in order (other than the first stop on the left) and the game progresses in this example.

In this example, when the start operation is first performed, an introductory display is displayed showing the content of the performance and the expected level (the "Find the treasure!" display screen in Figures 71 and 72), and then the performance begins (the "Where is it?" display screen in Figures 71 and 72).

At this time, as shown in Figure 71, let's assume that a stop operation is performed at the first left stop. In this case, as the first stop operation is performed and the game progresses, the presentation progresses further (the "Where is it? Where is it?" display screen in Figure 71).

Next, if a second stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation will progress further as the second stop operation is performed and the game progresses (in Figure 71, the display screen shows "Where is it? Where is it? Where is it?").

Next, when a third stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation progresses further as the game progresses after the third stop operation. In this case, if the occurrence of an advantageous situation is notified or suggested, a favorable result is displayed (the "GET! CHANCE!" display screen in Figure 71). On the other hand, if the occurrence of an advantageous situation is not notified or suggested, an unfavorable result is displayed (the "Sorry..." display screen in Figure 71). In this way, when pressing the buttons in order, the final display content (or it may be predictable from the intermediate display content) gives the player a certain sense of expectation.

On the other hand, suppose that after the progression of the effect has begun, a stop operation is performed on a stop other than the first left stop, as shown in Figure 72. In this case, the progression of the effect is stopped, and a standby display corresponding to that effect is then displayed (the "Waiting for Treasure Stage" display screen in Figure 72). This standby display continues to be displayed even if a second or third stop operation is performed and the game progresses. In other words, if a stop operation is performed on a stop other than the first left stop, the effect will no longer progress, and the player will no longer be given the specified sense of anticipation.

In gaming machines where performing a stop operation on a reel other than the first left stop can put AT processing at a disadvantage, when a stop operation is performed on a reel other than the first left stop, it is a good idea to provide a situation explanation such as audio or text display explaining the situation, such as "An irregular press is being performed," "The middle reel is being stopped first," or "The right reel is being stopped first." If the operation is performed on the first left stop, no such situation explanation will occur, subtly making the player who performed the irregular press feel uncomfortable and encouraging them to stop the left reel first.

Such a situation explanation effect may be generated when the standby display appears. Furthermore, such a situation explanation effect may be generated only in games where irregular button presses put the AT processing at a disadvantage, or may be generated in games where irregular button presses are performed in so-called normal games where the batting order navigation does not occur and the AT processing is not at a disadvantage. The timing for generating the situation explanation effect may be when the stop button is pressed, when the stop button is released, or when the reel that has been stopped stops.

The situation explanation effect may be generated only at the first stop, or may be generated repeatedly at the second stop and thereafter. For example, if the stop operation is performed in the order of center → right → left, a situation explanation effect such as a voice saying "The center reel is stopping first" may be generated at the first stop, "The right reel is stopping" at the second stop, and "The left reel is stopping" at the third stop.

The situation explanation effect may also be achieved by, for example, turning off or flashing decorative lamps on the lower panel (waist panel 13), around the reels, reel backlights, and other such lamps in a special mode that differs from their normal lighting state. For example, the lower panel may remain lit if the reel stops from the left, and turn off if the reel stops from the middle or right. This would allow the player to infer that stopping the reel from the middle or right will result in some kind of disadvantage.

By providing this type of situation explanation, players who accidentally stop the center or right reel due to an operating error can be encouraged to play in the recommended game mode, such as stopping the left reel first, without being annoyed by a direct warning.

(Control Example 2)
First, a control example (control example 2) when effect data 2 is determined as an example of an anticipation effect will be described with reference to Figures 73 and 74. Note that Figure 73 is a diagram that schematically shows the progression of the display content when a stop operation is performed by pressing in order (first stop on the left) and the game progresses in this example, and Figure 74 is a diagram that schematically shows the progression of the display content when a stop operation is performed by pressing other than in order (other than the first stop on the left) and the game progresses in this example.

In this example, when the start operation is first performed, an introductory display is displayed showing the content of the performance and the expected level (the "Run from the enemy!" display screen in Figures 73 and 74), and then the performance begins (the "Hurry!" display screen in Figures 73 and 74).

At this time, as shown in Figure 73, assume that a stop operation is performed at the first left stop. In this case, as the first stop operation is performed and the game progresses, the presentation progresses further (the display screen in Figure 73 reads "Hurry! Hurry!").

Next, if a second stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation will progress further as the second stop operation is performed and the game progresses (the display screen in Figure 73 reads "Hurry! Hurry! Hurry!").

Next, when a third stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation progresses further as the game progresses after the third stop operation. In this case, if the occurrence of an advantageous situation is notified or suggested, an advantageous result is displayed (the "Success!" display screen in Figure 73). On the other hand, if the occurrence of an advantageous situation is not notified or suggested, an unfavorable result is displayed (the "Failure..." display screen in Figure 73). In this way, when pressing buttons in order, the final display content (or it may be predictable from the intermediate display content) gives the player a certain sense of expectation.

On the other hand, suppose that after the progression of the effect has begun, a stop operation is performed on a stop other than the first left stop, as shown in Figure 74. In this case, the progression of the effect is stopped, and a standby display corresponding to that effect is then displayed (the display screen shown with diagonal lines in Figure 74. Note that this merely indicates that a standby display different from that in Control Example 1 will be displayed, and a display screen that makes it easy to recognize that it corresponds to the effect, such as "Waiting for escape stage," may also be displayed). This standby display continues to be displayed even if a second or third stop operation is performed and game play progresses. In other words, if a stop operation is performed on a stop other than the first left stop, the effect will no longer progress, and the player will no longer be given the specified sense of anticipation.

In the above-mentioned Control Example 1 and Control Example 2, if the first stop operation is anything other than the left first stop, the standby display corresponding to the respective effect is displayed from that point onwards, but the timing at which the standby display starts is not limited to this. For example, it may be displayed when the second stop operation is performed, or when the third stop operation is performed. Furthermore, the timing at which the standby display starts may differ for each. The same applies to Control Example 3, which will be described later.

In addition, in the above-mentioned Control Example 1 and Control Example 2, it was explained that there is an anticipation effect in Control Example 1 and an anticipation effect in Control Example 2 in order to illustrate that there are multiple different types of anticipation effects, but of course the number of types of such effects is not limited to two. It is possible to configure it so that there are more types where at least some of the display content differs. In this case, it is sufficient to provide a standby display corresponding to each effect. In addition, in the below-mentioned Control Example 3, it was explained that there is an anticipation effect in Control Example 3 in order to illustrate a case where the above-mentioned Control Example 1 is part of a continuous effect, but of course the number of types of such effects is not limited to one. It is possible to configure it so that there are more types where at least some of the display content differs. In this case, it is sufficient to provide a standby display corresponding to each effect.

In addition, in the above-mentioned Control Example 1 and Control Example 2, when a standby display is displayed, a unique standby display corresponding to each effect is displayed to minimize discrepancies with the content of each effect. However, a common standby display may also be displayed, for example, to reduce the amount of data. This also applies to Control Example 3, which will be described later.

In addition, in the above-mentioned Control Example 1 and Control Example 2, the standby display was always displayed when the first stop operation was other than the first left stop. However, for example, if the effect being executed ultimately displays a favorable result, the standby display may not be displayed, and if the effect ultimately displays an unfavorable result, the standby display may be displayed. In other words, even if a game is played at a stop other than the first left stop and the game is controlled to a non-favorable state, if this does not affect (or is unlikely to affect) the game situation (for example, if the AT lottery has already been won and the game is scheduled to transition to the AT state from the next game), the standby display may not be displayed. The same applies to Control Example 3, described below.

On the other hand, for example, if the effect being executed ultimately displays an unfavorable result, the standby display may not be displayed, but if the effect being executed ultimately displays an advantageous result, the standby display may be displayed. In other words, if the effect in question is originally a false effect, and not displaying a final result does not necessarily result in a disadvantage to the player, the standby display may not be displayed. This also applies to Control Example 3, described below.

The anticipation effects in Control Example 1 and Control Example 2 described above may be configured as one-off effects or as part of a continuous effect. For example, if configured as one-off effects, the same effect may be executed again in the next game after the game in which the effect was executed and the standby display was displayed. Alternatively, the effect lottery may not be executed in the next game after the game in which the effect was executed and the standby display was displayed, and no effect (except for the basic display screen) may be displayed. Furthermore, the standby display may end after it has started when a start operation is performed to start the next game. In this case, when the standby display ends, the display of the scheduled effect may start or resume. The standby display may end not when a start operation is performed, but when a bet operation for the next game is performed.

Alternatively, the standby display displayed in the previous game may continue to be displayed in the next game after the game in which the effect was displayed and the standby display was displayed. In this case, if a stop operation is performed by pressing the buttons in order in the next game, the same effect as the previous game may be executed again in the next game (the game two games after the game in which the standby display was first displayed), or the effect may be determined according to normal rules without any special control. Also, the effect may be determined according to normal rules without any special control in the next game after the game in which the effect was displayed and the standby display was displayed.

Furthermore, for example, if the continuous effects are configured as a series, the same effect as that executed in the game in which the standby display was displayed may be executed again in the game following the game in which the standby display was displayed. For example, suppose the continuous effects are configured as two games in which the first effect is executed in the first game and the second effect is executed in the second game. In this case, if all games are played in order, the first effect will be executed in the first game and the second effect will be executed in the second game.

On the other hand, for example, if the first game is played using irregular button presses, a standby display will be displayed partway through the first effect in that game. In this case, the first effect will be executed again in the second game, and if the second game is played using normal button presses, the first effect will be executed to the end in that game, and the second effect will be executed in the third game. Also, in this case, if the second game is played using irregular button presses, the same control as in the first game can be performed in that game. In other words, a standby display will be displayed partway through the first effect in the second game, and the first effect will be executed again in the third game, and if the third game is played using normal button presses, the first effect will be executed to the end in that game, and the second effect will be executed in the fourth game.

For example, if the first game is played using sequential button presses and the second game is played using irregular button presses, a standby display will be displayed midway through the second effect in that game. In this case, the second effect will be executed again in the third game, and if the third game is played using sequential button presses, the second effect will be executed to the end in that game. In addition, if the third game is played using irregular button presses, the same control as for the second game can be applied to that game. In other words, a standby display will be displayed midway through the second effect in the third game, and the second effect will be executed again in the fourth game, and if the fourth game is played using sequential button presses, the second effect will be executed to the end in that game.

However, if irregular button presses are continually being performed, causing problems with the same effect being repeated over and over, an upper limit can be placed on the number of games that can be played (for example, 10 games), and if the effect has not been completed even after the maximum number of games has been played, control can be exercised to end the effect midway. Note that a control example for when the effect is configured as a continuous effect will be described in detail later using Control Example 3 below.

In addition, the control to display a standby screen when play is not performed by pressing buttons in order may also be performed when an effect other than an anticipation effect is executed. In other words, the effects that are subject to this control are not limited to anticipation effects. For example, this control may also be performed when a development effect is executed that can notify or suggest whether the effect will continue (develop) thereafter. Furthermore, for example, this control may also be performed when a battle effect is executed that can notify or suggest whether or not to transition to an AT state during a CZ or ST. Furthermore, for example, this control may also be performed when a general effect is executed that can notify or suggest a winning combination or status. In other words, the effect that is subject to this control may be any of all effects.

(Control Example 3)
Next, a control example (control example 3) when effect data 3 is determined as an example of an anticipation effect will be described with reference to Figures 75 to 78. Note that Figures 75 and 76 are diagrams that schematically show the progression of the display content when a stop operation is performed by pressing the buttons in order (first stop on the left) in the first and second games in this example and the game progresses, and Figures 77 and 78 are diagrams that schematically show the progression of the display content when a stop operation is performed by pressing the buttons in order (other than first stop on the left) in the first game and the game progresses, and when a stop operation is performed by pressing the buttons in order (first stop on the left) in the second game in this example and the game progresses.

In this example, when the first game is started, an introductory display showing the presentation content and expected results (the "Find the treasure!" display screen in Figures 75 and 77) is displayed, and then the presentation begins (the "Where is it?" display screen in Figures 75 and 77).

At this time, as shown in Figure 75, let's assume that a stop operation is performed at the first left stop. In this case, as the first stop operation is performed and the game progresses, the presentation progresses further (the "Where is it? Where is it?" display screen in Figure 75).

Next, if a second stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation will progress further as the second stop operation is performed and the game progresses (see the "Where is it? Where is it? Where is it?" display screen in Figure 75).

Next, if a third stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the effect will continue as the game progresses (the "NEXT..." display screen in Figure 75). This indicates that the effect will not end in the first game, but will continue into the second game.

Next, when the start operation for the second game is performed, the presentation will progress further as the start operation is performed and the game progresses (see the "Where is it!?" display screen in Figure 76).

At this time, as shown in Figure 76, let's assume that a stop operation is performed at the first left stop. In this case, as the first stop operation is performed and the game progresses, the presentation progresses further (in Figure 76, the display screen reads "Where is it? Where is it?!").

Next, if a second stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation will progress further as the second stop operation is performed and the game progresses (in Figure 76, the display screen shows "Where is it?! Where is it?! Where is it?").

Next, if a third stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation will progress further as the game progresses after the third stop operation. In this case, if the occurrence of an advantageous situation is notified or suggested, a favorable result is displayed (the "GET! CHANCE!" display screen in Figure 76). On the other hand, if the occurrence of an advantageous situation is not notified or suggested, an unfavorable result is displayed (the "Sorry..." display screen in Figure 76). In this way, if both the first and second games are pressed in order, the final display content of the second game (or it may be predictable from the intermediate display content) will give the player a certain sense of expectation.

On the other hand, suppose that after the progression of the effects in the first game has begun, a stop operation is performed on a stop other than the first left stop, as shown in Figure 77. In this case, the progression of the effects is stopped, and thereafter, a standby display corresponding to that effect is displayed in the first game (the "Waiting for Treasure Stage" display screen in Figure 77). This standby display continues to be displayed even if a second or third stop operation is performed and the game progresses. In other words, in games in which a stop operation is performed on a stop other than the first left stop, the effect will no longer progress.

However, when the second game begins, as shown in Figure 78, the effects of the first game are executed again in that second game. Specifically, when the start operation for the second game is performed, the progress of the effects begins (resumes) as the start operation is performed and play progresses (the "Where is it?" display screen in Figure 78). Note that although no introductory display is displayed in Figure 78, it is also possible to configure the effects to be executed again from the beginning, including the introductory display.

At this time, as shown in Figure 78, let's assume that a stop operation is performed on the first left stop. In this case, as the first stop operation is performed and the game progresses, the presentation progresses further (the "Where is it? Where is it?" display screen in Figure 78).

Next, if a second stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the presentation will progress further as the second stop operation is performed and the game progresses (see the "Where is it? Where is it? Where is it?" display screen in Figure 78).

Next, if a third stop operation is performed on the remaining stop button, the effect will continue as the game progresses (the "NEXT..." display screen in Figure 78). This indicates that the effect will not end in the second game, but will continue into the third game.

After that, in the third game, if a stop operation is performed at the first left stop, control will be performed to progress the presentation in the same manner as shown in Figure 76, whereas if a stop operation is performed at a stop other than the first left stop, the presentation up to the start operation shown in Figure 76 will be executed again, and then control will be performed to wait for the presentation to progress in the same manner as shown in Figure 77.

In the second game, if a stop operation is performed at a position other than the first left stop, the same control as in the first game (see Figure 77) will be performed again, and in the third game, the same control as in the second game (see Figure 78) will be performed again.

(Example of control when power is restored)
When the power switch (not shown) of the power supply device 34 is turned off (the power is turned off), or when the power supply to the pachislot machine 1 is cut off due to some other factor such as a power outage, and then the power supply is resumed and the machine recovers from the power outage, the game state and presentation state will basically return to the state they were in before the power outage. Here, if the above-mentioned standby display was being displayed at the time of the power outage, the following modes can be given as examples of how the machine will return to the state they were in before the power outage.

The first mode is one in which the standby display remains on (is resumed) when power is restored after a power outage. For example, if an amusement parlor closes and the power is turned off while the standby display remains on, and then the power is turned on again when the parlor reopens the next day without any settings being changed, and the standby display is canceled, the first player to play will be playing without knowing that their first game is being controlled to a non-preferential state, which could result in the player suffering an unexpected disadvantage. This first mode can prevent such problems from occurring.

The second aspect is one in which, when power is restored after a power outage, a different display (e.g., an initial screen) is displayed instead of the standby display. For example, if an amusement parlor closes with the standby display still displayed and the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on again the next day without any settings being changed, the standby display will resume. However, if the initial screen is displayed when settings are changed, it would be easy to tell whether settings have been changed based on whether the standby display is displayed when the parlor opens, which could cause unforeseen disadvantages to the amusement parlor. This second aspect can prevent such problems from occurring. As with the first aspect described above, it is desirable to control the display so that at least the display mode when power is restored after a power outage is the same as the display mode when settings are changed, as described below. This can prevent the above-mentioned problems from occurring in either aspect. The initial screen here refers, for example, to a screen displaying the so-called normal stay stage. A display screen dedicated to non-advantageous zones may be provided and used as the initial screen, or a stage display screen that can be displayed in both non-advantageous zones and advantageous zones may be provided and used as the initial screen.

(Example of control when changing settings)
When the setting value of the pachislot machine 1 is changed (when a setting change is made) by operating the setting key switch 52 or the like, if the above-mentioned waiting display was displayed during play before the setting change, the following modes can be mentioned as ways in which it may be restored.

The first mode is one in which the standby display remains on even after a setting change. As mentioned above, if the power is turned off and on without a setting change, the standby display resumes. However, if the initial screen is displayed when a setting change is made, it would be easy to tell whether a setting change has been made by whether the standby display is displayed when the store opens, which could cause an unexpected disadvantage to the gaming facility. This first mode can prevent such problems from occurring.

The second mode is one in which, after a setting change, a different display (for example, an initial screen) is displayed rather than a standby display. Even if a stop operation was performed by pressing irregular buttons in the previous game, the initialization process performed when the setting is changed will ensure that the first game after the setting change will not be in a non-preferential state (in this case, the preferential counter will be incremented by 1 in a fixed process in the first game), and since the presentation data is also initialized in the first place, there is no possibility that the first player will suffer a disadvantage.

Furthermore, for example, the pachislot machine 1 can be configured to perform a special reset operation, such as an initialization procedure different from the setting change procedure using the setting key switch 52, in which, while the power is off, pressing the reset button (not shown) on the main control board 71 (i.e., performing a predetermined initialization operation on the initialization operation means) and then turning the power on (i.e., performing a predetermined power-on operation) will reset (initialize) the advantageous zone while leaving the settings unchanged (i.e., the advantageous zone ends, the initialization process at the end of the advantageous zone is performed, and then a transition to a non-advantageous zone occurs). In this case, if the above-mentioned standby display was displayed before the special reset operation was performed, the standby display may not be displayed after the special reset operation (after the advantageous zone is reset), but rather an initial screen similar to the one described above may be displayed. Of course, to make it difficult to detect that such a special reset operation has been performed, the standby display may remain displayed even after the special reset operation (after the advantageous zone is reset). When a special reset operation is performed, the status of the advantageous zone is initialized and the non-advantageous zone is set as the initial state, but if the carryover status of the bonus role is set as the recommended play state, information regarding the carried-over bonus role (information in the carry-over role storage area) can be maintained.

(Other control examples)
After the start operation, an operation effect (e.g., the operation-linked effect described above) involving a predetermined operation for the effect may be performed. This effect generates a response effect, such as an expectation level indication, in response to an operation of a predetermined operation means for the effect, such as a chance button (e.g., the above-mentioned operation buttons 10a and 10b) or a touch panel (e.g., the above-mentioned sub-effect display unit 22). In this case, if no operation is performed on the target operation means for the effect after the start of accepting the operation for the effect, the device enters a waiting state. However, if an irregular press is performed even in this waiting state, the device switches to a waiting display, the waiting state for the operation for the effect also ends, and it is desirable that the response effect scheduled for that operation effect will not occur even if the operation means for the effect is subsequently operated. This can prevent the occurrence of a situation that is confusing to the player, where a response effect serving the role of an expectation level indication or the like occurs during the waiting display.

Furthermore, in the case of specifications that allow for the setting of the presentation state (e.g., volume adjustment, light intensity adjustment, etc.) whether the reels are spinning or stopped, the presentation state may be set as needed even while the standby display associated with irregular button presses is displayed. Furthermore, in the case of specifications that allow for the setting of the presentation state (e.g., volume adjustment, light intensity adjustment, etc.) while the reels are stopped but not while the reels are spinning, the presentation state may be set as long as the reels are stopped, even while the standby display associated with irregular button presses is displayed. The same applies to the display of a user menu screen that allows for the display of game history, mobile-linked menus, partial payout tables, game flow, etc.; even while the standby display associated with irregular button presses is displayed, if the specifications allow for these, these may be displayed by performing the specified operation in the same way as under normal circumstances. Furthermore, the presentation state may be set as needed, for example, even during the standby state of the above-mentioned operation presentation, if the specifications allow for this setting.

Furthermore, after the start operation is performed, in the period from when the reels start to rotate until they reach a constant speed, the above-mentioned pseudo game may be performed, in which the reels are rotated and temporarily stopped by pressing the stop button. In such pseudo game, even if the stop operation is performed by pressing the buttons in an irregular manner, this is not considered an unrecommended playing method, so the standby display is not displayed and AT-related processing is not disadvantaged. Furthermore, during pseudo game, as described above, it is desirable to display a pseudo game display such as "FREEPPLAY" to make it clear that a pseudo game is in progress. Furthermore, if a pseudo game is to be performed while the standby display is displayed, the pseudo game display should be displayed along with the standby display.

<Modification of push order bell and transmission information control example of first gaming machine (modification)>
Next, referring to Figures 79 and 80, the configuration of the modified push order bell of this modified example and an example of control of the transmission information transmitted to the sub side will be described. The control example of the transmission information of this modified example can also be said to be an example of control of the transmission information of the first gaming machine. However, in this modified example, the one shown in Figure 79 is described as transmission information control example 1, and the one shown in Figure 80 is described as transmission information control example 2.

In addition, in this modified example, the variable display unit will be described as having three reels (left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R). In addition, in the modified example of the push order bell, some of the role configurations have been changed from the first gaming machine to explain the case where roles other than the push order bell are grouped in a similar manner. This will be described in more detail later.

(Modified example of push order bell)
In the modified example shown in Figure 79, for example, the internal winning roles include the replay roles "F_Normal Rip" and "F_Cherry", and the minor roles "F_Common Bell", "F_Push Order Bell A_123" to "F_Push Order Bell A_321" (the modified example of "Push Order Bell A"), "F_Push Order Bell B_213" to "F_Push Order Bell B_321" (the modified example of "Push Order Bell B"), "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A", "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B", "F_Common 1 Piece Role A", "F_Common 1 Piece Role B", and "F_Watermelon".

"F_Normal Replay" is a replay role, and regardless of the batting order or button press position, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed and a replay is awarded. Also, "F_Cherry" is a replay role, and regardless of the batting order or button press position, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed and a replay is awarded.

"F_Common Bell" is a minor winning combination that will display the corresponding symbol combination regardless of the batting order or the position where it is pressed, resulting in a 13-coin win.

The modified "Push Order Bell A" has a six-choice push order minor feature; if the stop operation is performed in the correct hitting order, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed and 13 coins are won; if the stop operation is performed in the incorrect hitting order and the first stopping operation is in the correct hitting order, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed regardless of the pressing position and 1 coin is won; if the stop operation is performed in the incorrect hitting order and the first stopping operation is also in the incorrect hitting order, if the pressing position for the specified reel is appropriate (the pressing position is correct 1/2 of the time), the corresponding symbol combination is displayed and 1 coin is won; if the pressing position for the specified reel is not appropriate (the pressing position is incorrect the remaining 1/2 of the time), a miss occurs and no prize is won (0 coins are won).

The modified "Push Order Bell B" has a four-choice push order minor feature where the first stop on the left is not defined as the correct hitting order. If the stop operation is performed in the correct hitting order, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed and 13 coins are won. If the stop operation is performed in the incorrect hitting order and the first stopping operation is the correct hitting order, the corresponding symbol combination is displayed regardless of the push position and 1 coin is won. If the stop operation is performed in the incorrect hitting order and the first stopping operation is also incorrect, if the push position for the specified reel is appropriate (the push position is correct 1/2 of the time), the corresponding symbol combination is displayed and 1 coin is won. If the push position for the specified reel is not appropriate (the push position is incorrect the remaining 1/2 of the time), a miss occurs and no prize is won (0 coins).

The modified "Push Order Bell B" is configured so that the first stop on the left is never the correct batting order, but any stop other than the first stop on the left may be the correct batting order; the first stop on the left is defined as a batting order that is unfavorable in terms of awarding game value, and any stop other than the first stop on the left is defined as a batting order that is unilaterally advantageous in terms of awarding game value, making it a push order minor feature that constitutes a biased bell.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 79, by configuring the modified "Push Order Bell B" in this way, when viewed as the gaming machine as a whole, if the stop operation is performed at batting order "123" or "132", the expected winning value is "1.1612", whereas if the stop operation is performed at batting order "213", "231", "312", or "321", the expected winning value is "2.716". In other words, if the stop operation is performed at the first left stop, the expected value of the game value awarded is lower than if the stop operation is performed at a stop other than the first left stop.

However, the expected winning value mentioned above is the expected winning value per game in a non-AT state (i.e., a situation in which a favorable stop operation mode is not announced), and since the number of bets required to play one game is three, the expected winning value will not exceed "3" regardless of the batting order played in a non-AT state (in other words, the payout rate will not exceed "1"). Therefore, for example, even if a player continues to perform stop operations other than the first left stop in a non-AT state, this is not configured in a way that will allow the player to continue to increase the game value, at least probabilistically.

"F_2 Choice 1 Coin Role A" and "F_2 Choice 1 Coin Role B" are minor roles with two choices for pressing position, not for the hitting order. For example, if "F_2 Choice 1 Coin Role A" is determined as the winning role, if the pressing position for the specified reel is appropriate (the pressing position is correct at 1/2 the timing (first timing)), the corresponding symbol combination will be displayed and a winning coin will be generated. If the pressing position for the specified reel is not appropriate (the pressing position is incorrect at the remaining 1/2 the timing (second timing)), a winning coin will be generated. occurs and no win occurs (0 coins); and when "F_2-choice 1-coin role B" is determined as the winning role, if the position pressed on the specified reel is appropriate (the press position is correct at 1/2 the timing (second timing)), the corresponding symbol combination will be displayed and 1 coin will be won, but if the position pressed on the specified reel is not appropriate (the press position is incorrect at the remaining 1/2 the timing (first timing)), a miss will occur and no win will occur (0 coins will be won).

"F_Common 1-Piece Role A" and "F_Common 1-Piece Role B" are minor roles, and the corresponding symbol combination will be displayed regardless of the batting order or press position, resulting in a 1-piece win.

"F_Watermelon" is a minor winning combination that will result in a 5-coin win, regardless of the batting order or press position. Note that this "F_Watermelon" can also be configured so that if the press position on a specific reel is appropriate, a 5-coin win will occur, but if the press position on a specific reel is inappropriate, a 1-coin win will occur.

(Example of transmission information control for a modified version of the push order bell (part 1))
Next, referring to Figure 79, the setting mode of the internal lottery information and instruction information using the modified push order bell will be described. Note that this is the transmission information control example (part 1) in order to distinguish it from the transmission information control example (part 2) described later with reference to Figure 80.

Transmission information control example (1) is a control example configured to transmit some information regarding the internal winning combination to the sub-side for each game, even in a non-AT state. In contrast, transmission information control example (2) is a control example configured to not transmit information regarding the internal winning combination to the sub-side when in a non-AT state.

(Setting mode 1 in non-AT state (advantageous zone))
Mode 1 shown in Figure 79 shows an example of a setting mode for internal lottery information and instruction information in the non-AT state of the advantageous zone (normal advantageous zone).

In this mode 1, if you win "F_Normal Rip", "F_Cherry", "F_Common 1-Piece Role A", "F_Common 1-Piece Role B", or "F_Watermelon", internal winning information ("1", "2", "16", "17", or "18") that allows the sub-side to identify each winning combination is set.

In addition, if you win "F_Common Bell" or the modified "Push Order Bell A", the sub-side will be able to identify which of these you have won, but internal winning information ("99") will be set which will not allow the sub-side to identify which one you have won. In other words, internal winning information will be set which groups "F_Common Bell" and the modified "Push Order Bell A".

In addition, if the modified "Push Order Bell B," "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A," or "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B" is won, the sub-side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("98") will be set that will not allow the sub-side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information will be set that groups the modified "Push Order Bell B," "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A," and "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B."

In addition, regardless of which winning combination is selected, instruction information ("99") is set so that the batting order cannot be determined on the sub-side. In other words, instruction information that groups all combinations is set.

(Setting mode 2 in non-AT state (advantageous zone))
Mode 2 shown in Figure 79 shows another example of the setting mode of internal lottery information and instruction information in the non-AT state of the advantageous zone (normal advantageous zone).

In this mode 2, if you win "F_Normal Rip", "F_Cherry", "F_Common Bell", "F_Common 1-Piece Role A", "F_Common 1-Piece Role B", or "F_Watermelon", internal winning information ("1", "2", "3", "16", "17", or "18") that allows the sub-side to identify each winning lottery will be set.

In addition, if the modified "Push Order Bell A" is won, the sub-side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("80") will be set which will not allow the sub-side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information is set which groups the modified "Push Order Bell A".

In addition, if the modified "Push Order Bell B," "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A," or "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B" is won, the sub-side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("98") will be set that will not allow the sub-side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information will be set that groups the modified "Push Order Bell B," "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A," and "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B."

Also, similar to the above-mentioned mode 1, regardless of which role is won, instruction information is set that prevents the batting order from being identified on the sub side (instruction information that becomes "no instruction"); however, in mode 2, if the modified "Push Order Bell B," "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A," or "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B" is won, the instruction information is set to "99," and if any other role is won, the instruction information is set to "0."

In this embodiment 2, if the modified "Push Order Bell A" is won, the internal winning information is set to "80" and the instruction information is set to "0" instead of "99", which makes it possible to perform a "Push Order Challenge Presentation" on the sub side (for example, a presentation such as "?-?-?" is displayed on the display screen, suggesting that at least the push order role has been won). This will be explained in more detail later.

(Setting mode 3 in non-AT state (advantageous zone))
Mode 3 shown in Figure 79 shows another example of the setting mode of internal lottery information and instruction information in the non-AT state of the advantageous zone (normal advantageous zone).

In this mode 3, if "F_Cherry", "F_Common 1-piece Role B", or "F_Watermelon" is won, internal winning information ("2", "17", or "18") that allows the sub-side to identify each winning result is set.

In addition, if you win "F_Normal Lip", "F_Common Bell", modified "Push Order Bell A", modified "Push Order Bell B", "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A", "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B", or "F_Common 1 Piece Role A", the sub-side will be able to identify that you have won one of these, but internal winning information ("97") will be set that will not allow the sub-side to identify which role you have won. In other words, internal winning information will be set that groups "F_Normal Lip", "F_Common Bell", modified "Push Order Bell A", modified "Push Order Bell B", "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A", "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B", and "F_Common 1 Piece Role A".

Also, similar to the above-mentioned mode 1, regardless of which role is won, instruction information is set that prevents the batting order from being identified on the sub side (instruction information that reads "no instruction"); however, in mode 3, if "F_Cherry," "F_Common 1-piece role B," or "F_Watermelon" is won, the instruction information is set to "0," and if any other role is won, the instruction information is set to "99."

The purpose of all of the above-mentioned modes 1 to 3 is to ensure that when a biased bell such as the modified "Push Order Bell B" is configured to be included in the internal winning combination, in a non-AT state, the winning combination, including the effects on the sub-side, is not recognizable to the player.

For example, even if the correct hitting order itself is not announced because the game is not in AT mode, if the player is able to recognize that a biased bell like the modified "Push Order Bell B" has been drawn, then in a game where the player recognizes this, they may intentionally perform a stop operation other than the first left stop (even if the gameplay is such that performing the first left stop gives an advantage in AT-related processing). In this case, there is a higher chance that the payout rate will deviate from the originally intended payout rate, which could result in a compromise to the fairness of the game.

Furthermore, since the fact that a player can recognize that a biased bell such as the modified "Push Order Bell B" has been drawn is essentially the same as being able to narrow down the advantageous hitting order in terms of the awarding of game value, it can be said that making this recognizable state is one aspect of the AT state. Therefore, under current regulations, for example, it would be necessary to display corresponding instruction information on the instruction monitor mentioned above, and the balls won in this state would need to be included in the above-mentioned "instruction-included device ratio" (for example, device ratio information that is also subject to aggregation and calculation during the AT state).

If such a need were to arise, it would make ball output design extremely difficult, and it would no longer be possible to guarantee the gameplay that allows for a dramatic increase in ball output by transitioning from non-AT state to AT state, which would significantly reduce player interest.

In this modified example, the information is set as described in aspects 1 to 3 above, assuming that the following requirements are met, so that there is no room for interpretation as an AT state.

For example, the first requirement is that in a game in which the internal lottery information is set to include (grouped with) biased bells such as the modified "Push Order Bell B," the payout rate will be less than 1 (or 1 or less) even if the stop operation is performed in any hitting order other than the first stop on the left (irregular pressing).

For example, in the above-mentioned modes 1 and 2, the modified "Push Order Bell B," "F_2 Choice 1 Coin Role A," and "F_2 Choice 1 Coin Role B" are grouped, and the internal winning information is set to "98." In a game where the internal winning information is set to "98" (in other words, a game where the group role is won), the expected winning value is 0.500 coins if the stopping operation is performed at batting order "123" or "132," whereas the expected winning value is 2.702 coins if the stopping operation is performed at batting order "213," "231," "312," or "321." In other words, regardless of the batting order in which the stopping operation is performed, the expected winning value does not exceed 3 (in other words, the payout rate does not exceed 1).

For example, in the above-mentioned aspect 3, "F_Normal Rip," "F_Common Bell," modified "Push Order Bell A," modified "Push Order Bell B," "F_2-Choice 1-Coin Role A," "F_2-Choice 1-Coin Role B," and "F_Common 1-Coin Role A" are grouped, and the internal winning information is set to "97." In a game where the internal winning information is set to "97" (in other words, a game where the group role is won), the expected winning value is 1.601 coins if the stopping operation is performed in the batting order of "123" or "132," whereas the expected winning value is 2.708 coins if the stopping operation is performed in the batting order of "213," "231," "312," or "321." In other words, regardless of the batting order in which the stopping operation is performed, the expected winning value does not exceed 3 (in other words, the payout rate does not exceed 1).

By doing this, for example, even if a player is able to recognize that the internal winning combination information "98" or "97" has been set and plays using irregular button presses, there will be no room for strategy, such as the player being able to increase the value of their game. Depending on the grouping method, there may be cases where the expected value of winning exceeds "3", but as long as it is ensured that the fairness of the game is not compromised, this is acceptable. However, from the above perspective, it is still desirable to configure the system so that the expected value of winning does not exceed "3".

For example, the second requirement is that in games where internal winning information is set that includes (groups with) biased bells such as the modified "Push Order Bell B," the sub-side will not perform any effects (batting order-related effects) that could indicate that the push order role has been won (or that the player could potentially recognize as batting order navigation), such as the above-mentioned "Push Order Challenge Effect."

For example, in the above-mentioned mode 1, the instruction information "99" is set for all winning combinations. Also, for example, in the above-mentioned mode 2, the instruction information "99" is set for a game in which the internal winning information "98" is set. Also, for example, in the above-mentioned mode 3, the instruction information "99" is set for a game in which the internal winning information "97" is set. In other words, on the sub-side, it is possible to control the sub-side so that the above-mentioned batting order-related effects can be performed in a game in which the instruction information "0" is received, while it is possible to control the sub-side so that the above-mentioned batting order-related effects cannot be performed in a game in which the instruction information "99" is received.

In addition, even in games where the sub-side has received the instruction information "99," it is permissible to use effects that are at least unrelated to batting order, such as effects that suggest a minor winning combination using a colored navigation such as a white or yellow navigation, or effects that warn of a chance when a stop operation is performed on the first left stop. Also, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned mode 1, the same effects may be used in the cases of internal winning information "99," internal winning information "98," and internal winning information "0" (a loss), or different effects may be used.

By doing this, players can more easily play in a specific mode (first stop on the left) that is advantageous for AT-related processing without being aware of the biased bell winnings. Furthermore, by setting the internal winning information and instruction information as described above, even if grouping information containing biased bells is sent to the sub-side, this does not make it possible to narrow down the advantageous batting order. Therefore, payouts in such games do not fall under payouts due to instructions, and are not required to be included in the above-mentioned "game device ratio including instructions." This makes it possible to accurately count payouts in the AT state and in effectively advantageous states while the game devices are operating, and it is believed that gaming establishments will also find it easier to understand the behavior of the gaming machine using the above-mentioned game device ratio monitor device 54.

It is also possible to add the following requirement (third requirement). For example, the third requirement is that in a game in which instruction information "99" is set, this fact is notified by a notification means controlled on the main side.

For example, a special lamp could be newly installed on the information display device 14, and in games where the instruction information "99" is set, this special lamp could be lit (or a specified display mode could be displayed). Alternatively, in games where the instruction information "99" is set, the instruction monitor could display a "-" or other indication that no instruction has been issued. Note that these are merely examples, and other notification means could also be used as long as some display mode can indicate to the player that no instruction has been issued.

By doing this, for example, when a special lamp lights up (or a "-" is displayed on the instruction monitor), the player can be notified or hinted that navigation will not occur (no notification of the stop operation mode will be given, no instructions will be given), making it easier for the player to play in a specific mode (first stop on the left) that is advantageous for AT-related processing without being conscious of winning the biased bell. Furthermore, this makes it possible to encourage players to play using the recommended playing method.

When using a special lamp, information on whether the special lamp is on or off may be further transmitted to the sub side. The sub side may then refer to this information and, if it recognizes that the special lamp is on, execute control to not perform the batting order-related effects described above. However, without transmitting such information, the control to not perform the batting order-related effects described above may be executed by comprehensively determining the internal lottery information and instruction information (or by determining whether instruction information "99" has been transmitted).

Furthermore, when an instruction monitor is used, for example, if instruction information "0" is set, the instruction monitor may be set to display "0," or alternatively, no information may be displayed on the instruction monitor (hidden). In either case, no instruction is generated on the main side. However, in this case, the sub side is permitted to perform the batting order-related effects described above. On the other hand, if instruction information "99" is set, the instruction monitor may be set to display "-" (or another identification information that is at least different from the above-mentioned "0" or hidden and that is different from each instruction). In this case, too, no instruction is generated on the main side. However, in this case, the sub side is prohibited from performing the batting order-related effects described above.

When "0" is displayed (or not displayed) on the instruction monitor, for example, when a push order replay is won, it is possible to have the sub-side perform batting order-related effects for special effects, such as a 7-match navigation to line up 7s as an additional notification (this does not affect the number of balls won even if the navigation is not followed). However, it is of course possible to not perform such batting order-related effects for special effects, and instead perform anticipation effects that are not related to batting order.

Also, when the instruction monitor displays "1" through "6," the corresponding batting order navigation can be performed on the sub-side. For example, if the instruction monitor displays "1," it can indicate the batting order "123," which stops the reels in the order of left, center, and right; if the instruction monitor displays "2," it can indicate the batting order "132," which stops the reels in the order of left, right, and center; if the instruction monitor displays "3," it can indicate the batting order "213," which stops the reels in the order of center, left, and right; if the instruction monitor displays "4," it can indicate the batting order "312," which stops the reels in the order of center, right, and left; if the instruction monitor displays "5," it can indicate the batting order "231," which stops the reels in the order of right, left, and center; and if the instruction monitor displays "6," it can indicate the batting order "321," which stops the reels in the order of right, center, and left. Furthermore, if the instruction monitor displays "-," as described above, the sub-side can prevent batting order-related effects from being performed.

Next, we will explain how the internal winning information and instruction information are set in the AT state, as well as how the internal winning information and instruction information are set in the non-advantageous zone.

(Setting mode 1 in AT state (advantageous zone))
Mode 1 shown in Figure 79 shows an example of a setting mode for internal lottery information and instruction information in the AT state (increasing zone) of the advantageous zone.

In this mode 1, if you win "F_Normal Rip", "F_Cherry", "F_Common Bell", "F_Common 1-Piece Role A", "F_Common 1-Piece Role B", or "F_Watermelon", internal winning information ("1", "2", "3", "16", "17", or "18") that allows the sub-side to identify each winning result will be set.

Furthermore, if the modified "Push Order Bell A" is won, the sub-side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("80") will be set which will not allow the sub-side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information is set which groups the modified "Push Order Bell A". However, because instruction information "1" to "6" is set which allows the sub-side to identify each correct hitting order, it is possible to notify advantageous stop operation patterns even with this configuration.

Furthermore, if the modified "Push Order Bell B" is won, the sub-side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("81") will be set which will not allow the sub-side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information is set which groups the modified "Push Order Bell B". However, because instruction information "3" to "6" is set which allows the sub-side to identify each correct hitting order, it is possible to notify advantageous stop operation patterns even with this configuration.

Furthermore, if "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A" or "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B" is won, the sub-side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("82") will be set which will not allow the sub-side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information is set which groups "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A" and "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B". However, since these are not push order minor roles, even if they are configured in this way, it will not affect the AT state. It is also possible to set different instruction information for each, so that the correct push position can be announced.

(Setting mode 2 in AT state (advantageous zone))
Mode 2 shown in Figure 79 shows another example of the setting mode of the internal lottery information and instruction information in the AT state (increase zone) of the advantageous zone.

In this mode 2, if you win "F_Normal Rip", "F_Cherry", "F_Common Bell", "F_Common 1-Piece Role A", "F_Common 1-Piece Role B", or "F_Watermelon", internal winning information ("1", "2", "3", "16", "17", or "18") that allows the sub-side to identify each winning lottery will be set.

Furthermore, if the modified "Push Order Bell A" is won, the sub-side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("80") will be set, which will not allow the sub-side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information is set that groups the modified "Push Order Bell A." In addition, in this mode 2, if the "F_Push Order Bell A_123" and "F_Push Order Bell A_132" are won, instruction information "10" will be set. This instruction information "10" is configured as instruction information that notifies the correct hitting order only for the first stop operation (first left stop), such as "1-?-?". In other words, in this mode 2, if the modified "Push Order Bell A" is won, a two-choice challenge presentation for the second stop operation will be performed. This is just one example.

Similarly, instruction information "20" is configured as instruction information that indicates the correct batting order only for the first stop operation (first stop on the center), for example, "?-1-?", and instruction information "30" is configured as instruction information that indicates the correct batting order only for the first stop operation (first stop on the right), for example, "?-?-1."

Furthermore, if the modified "Push Order Bell B" is won, the sub-side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("81") will be set which will not allow the sub-side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information is set which groups the modified "Push Order Bell B". However, because instruction information "3" to "6" is set which allows the sub-side to identify each correct hitting order, it is possible to notify advantageous stop operation patterns even with this configuration.

Furthermore, if "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A" or "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B" is won, the sub-side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("82") will be set which will not allow the sub-side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information is set which groups "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A" and "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B". However, since these are not push order minor roles, even if they are configured in this way, it will not affect the AT state. It is also possible to set different instruction information for each, so that the correct push position can be announced.

(Settings in non-advantageous sections)
The mode shown in Figure 79 shows an example of the setting mode of internal lottery information and instruction information in a non-advantageous zone (non-AT state).

In this mode, if you win "F_Normal Rip", "F_Cherry", "F_Common Bell", "F_Common 1-Piece Role A", "F_Common 1-Piece Role B", or "F_Watermelon", internal winning information ("1", "2", "3", "16", "17", or "18") that allows the sub-side to identify each winning combination is set.

Also, if you win the modified "Push Order Bell A," the sub-side will be able to identify which of these you won, but internal winning information ("80") will be set which will not allow the sub-side to identify which one you won.

In addition, if the modified "Push Order Bell B," "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A," or "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B" is won, the sub-side will be able to identify which of these has been won, but internal winning information ("98") will be set that will not allow the sub-side to identify which has been won. In other words, internal winning information will be set that groups the modified "Push Order Bell B," "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A," and "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B."

In addition, in this mode, if the modified "Push Order Bell B," "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role A," or "F_2 Choice 1 Piece Role B" is won, the instruction information is set to "99," and if any other role is won, the instruction information is set to "0."

(Example of transmission information control for a modified version of the push order bell (part 2))
Next, referring to Figure 80, a transmission information control example (part 2) using a modified version of the push order bell will be described. As mentioned above, this transmission information control example (part 2) is a control example configured such that when in a non-AT state, information regarding the internal lottery role is not basically transmitted to the sub side. Also, in Figure 80, in order to explain this transmission information control example (part 2), a schematic flowchart showing an example of the process is shown. Therefore, the specific control process in the transmission information control is not necessarily limited to that shown in Figure 80.

First, when a game is started (for example, when a start operation is performed), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the AT is in progress (S4011). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the AT state. If the main CPU 101 determines that the AT is in progress (YES in S4011), it transfers processing to S4013.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the AT is not in progress (NO in S4011), it determines whether a rare combination has been won (S4012). If the main CPU 101 determines that a rare combination has not been won (NO in S4012), it simply ends the processing.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that a rare combination has been won (YES in S4012), it proceeds to S4013. If YES in S4011 or YES in S4012, the main CPU 101 performs transmission information setting processing (S4013). Thereafter, it terminates this processing.

In the transmission information setting process, if the AT state is in effect (if S4011 is YES), for example, internal winning information and instruction information are transmitted using one of the AT state setting modes shown in FIG. 79. Also, if the non-AT state is in effect (if S4011 is NO) but a rare role is won (if S4012 is YES), the internal winning information corresponding to the won rare role is exceptionally transmitted. In this case, if the instruction information corresponding to the won rare role is "0", the instruction information may also be transmitted.

On the other hand, if the machine is in a non-AT state (S4011 is NO) and no rare combination has been won (S4012 is also NO), no information related to the internal winning combination is set (the processing of S4013 is not performed), and no information is sent to the sub-side. Note that "rare combination" here refers to combinations such as "F_Cherry" and "F_Watermelon", for example.

In this way, even if a biased bell such as the modified "Push Order Bell B" is included, the sub-side will not be able to recognize this winning lottery unless the machine is in the AT state, so the player will not be aware of the biased bell winning lottery and will be able to play in a specific mode (first stop on the left) that is advantageous for AT-related processing. Furthermore, since there is no need to consider how to configure the internal winning lottery information and instruction information in non-AT states, the control load and data volume can be reduced, and the ease of designing the gaming machine can be improved.

However, if information related to the internal winning combination were not transmitted for any combination, the sub-side would not perform any anticipation effects or other effects corresponding to the type of internal winning combination, which could significantly reduce the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, in this example, when a rare combination is won, the transmission information setting process is performed as an exception even in a non-AT state.

In accordance with the above-mentioned intent, if it is determined in S4011 that the AT state is present, the processing of S4013 is performed without providing the processing of S4012. However, if it is determined in S4011 that the AT state is not present (it is a non-AT state), the processing may be terminated as is, and the transmission information setting processing may not be performed, even for rare roles.

Furthermore, with this configuration, for example, when a rare role or at least a role other than the biased bell (or a role other than a group that includes the biased bell) is won, a different type of lock effect can be executed, and the type of lock effect can be sent to the sub-side via a lock command, ensuring that batting order-related effects are not executed for the biased bell, while for roles that are not related to this, effects related to the internal winning role can be executed.

<Gaming machine using the specifications of the first gaming machine (variant)>
According to the first gaming machine (variant), by using the specifications, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration, for example.

For example, this gaming machine has a preferential state in which decisions related to the AT state are favored, and a non-preferential state that is not in the preferential state, and is controllable to either state at least when not controlled to the AT state; is configured so that when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (e.g., first left stop), the expected value of the game value awarded is lower than when a stop operation is not performed in that specific mode; is capable of executing preferential control such that at least the next game can be controlled to a preferential state when a stop operation is performed in that specific mode, and at least the next game can be controlled to a non-preferential state when a stop operation is not performed in that specific mode; and is capable of displaying a specific standby display (e.g., a standby display) according to the type of specific performance being performed in a specific performance (e.g., an anticipation performance) in which the display content progresses as the game progresses, if a stop operation is not performed in that specific mode during a game in the preferential state.

Note that the stop operation resulting in a specific mode is not limited to the mode in which the left reel is the first to stop. For example, performing the first stop operation on any of the other reels may be configured to result in a stop operation in a specific mode. Also, for example, if the variable display unit is configured with four reels, performing stop operations on two specific reels in a specific order may be configured to result in a stop operation in a specific mode. Also, performing a stop operation on a specific reel (for example, the left reel) at a specific press position may be configured to result in a stop operation in a specific mode.

Furthermore, the stop operation mode controlled to the preferential state is configured so that the expected value of the game value awarded is lower than the stop operation mode controlled to the non-preferential state, but such preferential control may also be performed even if the expected value of the game value is the same. In other words, even if the winning combination is configured so that it does not include biased bells, a specific mode of the stop operation that can be controlled to the preferential state may be defined, and if the stop operation is performed in that specific mode, it may be controlled to the preferential state, and if the stop operation is not performed in that specific mode, it may be controlled to the non-preferential state.

The specific waiting display can also be used for a variety of purposes. For example, it can be used to notify or suggest that the progression of a presentation is on hold, or to notify or suggest that it will be controlled to a non-preferential state. It can also be used, for example, to notify or suggest that a presentation has ended prematurely. It can also be used, for example, to notify or suggest that the player has been put at a disadvantage by not performing a stop operation in a specific manner. It can also be used to notify or suggest that the player should play using a recommended playing method (for example, performing a stop operation in a specific manner). In other words, it can be used to notify or suggest various information related to preferential control or various information related to the progression of a presentation.

Also, for example, in this gaming machine, preferential control can be executed when a normal role is determined as the winning role.

Also, for example, this is a gaming machine in which preferential control can be executed regardless of which role is determined to be the winning role.

Games in which preferential control can be performed can be arbitrarily set according to specified control conditions. For example, preferential control may be performed under different conditions during normal play (advantageous zone), CZ, and ST. For example, in any of these states, preferential control may be performed regardless of which role is determined to be the winning role, and in other states, preferential control may be performed only when a normal role is determined to be the winning role. Also, even in the same state, preferential control may be performed regardless of which role is determined to be the winning role in one play period, and only when a normal role is determined to be the winning role in another play period.

Furthermore, for example, this is a gaming machine that can control whether to enter a preferential state or a non-preferential state on a per-game basis. However, as mentioned above, such preferential control may be performed on a multiple-game basis, or on a stop operation basis within a single game.

For example, in a game in a preferential state, if a first stop operation is performed in a specific mode, it may be possible to decide to control to the preferential state, but in the second stop operation, it may be possible to decide whether to further control to the preferential state, and if it is decided not to control to the preferential state, it may be possible to control to the non-preferential state. Also, for example, in a game in a preferential state, if a first stop operation is not performed in a specific mode, it may be possible to decide to control to the non-preferential state, but if a predetermined condition is met in the second stop operation, for example, if the preferred batting order is not reached, it may be possible to decide to control to the preferential state, and if it is decided to control to the preferential state, it may be possible to control to the preferential state.

Also, for example, this gaming machine controls games in a preferential state when the preferential counter value is 1, subtracts 1 from the preferential counter value, and adds 1 to the preferential counter value if a stop operation is performed in a specific mode during that game, but does not add 1 to the preferential counter value if a stop operation is not performed in the specific mode, thereby controlling games in which the preferential counter value is 1 or greater to be in the preferential state.

Also, for example, in a gaming machine where, during play in a preferential state, the value of the preferential counter may not be incremented by 1 even if a stop operation is performed in a specific manner.

Instead of the preferential counter, a non-preferential counter may be provided to manage the non-preferential state play period, and the value of the non-preferential counter may be incremented by 1 during play in the preferential state, and if a stop operation is performed in a specific mode during that play, the value of the non-preferential counter may be decremented by 1. However, if a stop operation is not performed in the specific mode, the value of the non-preferential counter may not be decremented by 1, and play for which the value of the non-preferential counter is 1 or greater may be controlled to the non-preferential state.

In this case, the system may be configured so that, during play in a preferential state, the value of the non-preferential counter is not decremented by 1 even if a stop operation is performed in a specific manner.

Furthermore, for example, if a power outage occurs while a specific standby display is being displayed, this gaming machine will be able to continue displaying the specific standby display even after power is restored.

Furthermore, for example, if a setting change is made while a specific waiting display is being displayed, this gaming machine is capable of displaying the specific waiting display even after the setting change.

Note that the manner in which the specific standby display is continued when transitioning from one state to another is not limited to the above. For example, if a game ends and a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed and it is determined that a non-play state has been reached, a demonstration screen would normally be displayed. However, if the specific standby display was being displayed, the specific standby display may be configured to continue to be displayed instead of the demonstration screen. In this case, if a further predetermined time (e.g., 2 hours) has passed since it was determined that a non-play state has been reached, the specific standby display may be terminated and the normal demonstration screen may be displayed.

Furthermore, for example, the specific effects include continuous effects that are executed across multiple games, and if a stop operation is not performed in a specific mode while continuous effects are being executed in a game in a preferential state, the gaming machine will display a specific standby display in that game, and then be able to execute the effect of the display content of that game again in the next game.

Note that "re-executing" does not only mean executing the entire effect from the beginning, but also includes executing only part of it. Furthermore, if adjustments are necessary when re-executing, adjustments can be made by changing only the execution time without changing the overall structure of the effect, or by omitting or adding some of the effect content. In other words, as long as the effect is executed in a way that the player perceives as the same effect being executed again without feeling uncomfortable, it does not necessarily have to be the exact same effect.

Continuous effects are sufficient as long as at least related effects are executed across multiple games, and include not only those in which predetermined information is announced or suggested for multiple games as a set, but also those in which predetermined information is announced or suggested for each game and executed across multiple games. Furthermore, they do not necessarily have to be executed across consecutive games; for example, if a performance scenario (performance control state) can be determined to control the performance tendency during a specific game period, such as a premonition state, and related effects can be executed even between non-consecutive games, it is also possible for an effect executed in one game to be executed again in a subsequent game, even between non-consecutive games.

Furthermore, for example, when a stop operation is first detected, if the stop operation is directed to a specific display column (e.g., the left reel), a specific mode will be activated, and if the stop operation is not directed to a specific display column, the specific mode will not be activated. The specific effect is an anticipation effect that is executed from the start of play, and when a specific effect is executed during play in a preferential state, if the first stop operation is not directed to a specific display column, the gaming machine will display a specific standby display from that point on.

The time when the stop operation is first detected may be the exact moment when the first stop operation is performed (when the stop button is operated and turns on, or when the stop button is operated and then turns off), or it may be any timing after the first stop operation and before the second stop operation.

Furthermore, for example, this gaming machine has a preferential state in which decisions related to the AT state are favored, and a non-preferential state that is not in the preferential state, and can be controlled to either state at least when not controlled to the AT state; when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, the first left stop), the expected value of the game value awarded is lower than when a stop operation is not performed in the specific mode; during ST, which is a non-AT state, it is more advantageous to the player than during normal play (advantageous period) and is configured to continue for a specified period (for example, 16 games); it is capable of executing preferential control such that at least the next game can be controlled to the preferential state when a stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and at least the next game can be controlled to the non-preferential state when a stop operation is not performed in the specific mode; the specified period progresses in accordance with the execution of one game, regardless of whether the gaming machine is in the preferential state; and the degree of advantage during ST may change to an advantageous one when play is performed in the preferential state, but will not change to an advantageous one when play is performed in the non-preferential state.

Note that ST does not necessarily have to be a more advantageous state than normal (advantageous zone). This type of control may also be performed during normal (advantageous zone) or CZ. This gaming machine can also, of course, perform specific wait displays similar to those described above, and various related controls can be performed. For example, when the machine is configured so that the same anticipation effects can be executed during normal (advantageous zone) and ST, if a specific wait display is to be performed, it may be configured so that different specific wait displays are displayed during normal (advantageous zone) and ST.

[Fourth embodiment]
The first to third embodiments have been described above. A fourth embodiment will now be described. The basic configuration of the pachislot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments. In the following, components that are the same as those of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Furthermore, explanations of portions that apply to the fourth embodiment from the explanations of the first to third embodiments will be omitted.

Note that even if the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as "In the first embodiment, ..." or "In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ...," they can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, provided that they do not deviate from the spirit of the fourth embodiment. Similarly, the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machine 1 of the second or third embodiment, and they can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, provided that they do not deviate from the spirit of the fourth embodiment. Therefore, it is possible to partially replace or combine each of the configurations shown in the first to third embodiments (including each of the configurations shown in the modified examples and the extended examples) with the configuration shown in the fourth embodiment.

Furthermore, even if a component has a different shape from the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments, the same reference numerals may be used for convenience to designate components with similar functions. Furthermore, even if a component has the same shape or the same processing as the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to third embodiments, different reference numerals or step numbers may be used for convenience.

<Game state transition flow>
Fig. 81(a) is a diagram showing transitions of game states according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 81(b) is a table summarizing transition conditions of game states according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

As explained in the first embodiment, the pachislot machine 1 can provide various game states in which the game is played in order to vary the player's degree of advantage or to achieve the intended gameplay. In this embodiment, the game states shown in Figure 81 (a) are managed by the main control circuit 100. Such game states include a bonus non-winning state, a flag-between state, and a bonus state.

The bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus has not been won and the bonus has not been activated (a prize has not been awarded). The flag-between state is a state in which the bonus role is carried over as an internal winning role, i.e., a state in which the bonus role has been won and the bonus has not been activated. The bonus state is a state in which the bonus is activated. As explained in the first embodiment, the flag-between state is also referred to as the carryover state, (bonus) flag-between, (bonus) internal intermediate, etc. When a bonus role is won and the symbol combination associated with that bonus role is displayed on an active line, it is possible to transition to the bonus state (activate the bonus state).

In this embodiment, a 3BB gaming state is provided as a bonus state. The bonus role corresponding to the 3BB gaming state is "F_3BB" (see Figures 84A to 84E). In addition, a 3BB flag-interval state is provided as a flag-interval state.

The 3BB flag interval state is configured as the RT state (RT1 gaming state). As explained in the first embodiment, the RT state is a state in which the lottery mode for the replay role can be changed compared to the state in which the RT state is not activated (non-RT state). The bonus non-winning state is configured as a non-RT state (RT0 gaming state).

To explain this in more detail with reference to Figures 81(a) and 81(b), when "F_3BB" is determined as the internal winning combination (when an internal win occurs) in a bonus non-winning state, the main control circuit 100 transitions the gaming state from the bonus non-winning state to the 3BB flag interval state (see transition condition (1)).

"F_3BB" (3BB) is a carryover role (see Figure 18). When 3BB is internally won, the state of the internally won 3BB is carried over until the symbol combination corresponding to 3BB ("C_3BB" shown in Figure 83A) is displayed stopped along the active line (until 3BB wins). The 3BB flag interval state is a state in which the state of the internally won 3BB is carried over.

When the "C_3BB" symbol combination is displayed stopped along an active line in the 3BB flag interval state (when a 3BB wins), the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the 3BB flag interval state to the 3BB game state (see transition condition (2)). When more than the specified number of medals (55 medals) are paid out in the 3BB game state, the main control circuit 100 transitions the game state from the 3BB game state to the bonus non-winning state (see transition condition (3)).

<Pattern arrangement table>
FIG. 82(a) is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table.

The symbol arrangement table shown in Figure 82(a) represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions "0" to "19" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

Symbol positions "0" to "19" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged in the direction of rotation on each of the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to symbol positions "0" to "19" can be identified by referencing the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter. Symbol types include "V," "Seven," "Bar," "Watermelon," "Cherry," "Bell A," "Bell B," "Lip A," "Lip B," and "Blank."

<Pattern code table>
FIG. 82(b) is a diagram showing a symbol code table.

As shown in Figure 82(b), each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R is identified by a symbol code table, and in this embodiment, each symbol is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in Figure 82(b) represents symbol codes, which are data used to identify the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

For example, the symbol arrangement table shown in Figure 82(a) has been described as representing the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R, but the symbol arrangement table actually stored in the main ROM 102 represents the arrangement of symbol codes that identify the symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R.

In this embodiment, the symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 are, as mentioned above, 10 types: "V," "Seven," "Bar," "Watermelon," "Cherry," "Bell A," "Bell B," "Lip A," "Lip B," and "Blank." In the symbol code table, symbol codes "1" to "10" are assigned to each of the symbols: "V," "Seven," "Bar," "Watermelon," "Cherry," "Bell A," "Bell B," "Lip A," "Lip B," and "Blank."

<Pattern combination table>
83A and 83B are diagrams showing a symbol combination table.

The symbol combination table defines the correspondence between symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line and the number of medals that will be paid out (number of medals paid out) when that symbol combination is stopped and displayed on an active line. The symbol combinations are shown, from left to right, as the symbols on the left reel 3L, center reel 3C, and right reel 3R. The name given to each combination is also shown.

The number of medals paid out is shown for the number of medals paid out when a single medal game is played (payout when betting one medal), the number of medals paid out when a double medal game is played (payout when betting two medals), and the number of medals paid out when a triple medal game is played (payout when betting three medals). In this specification, a unit game played by inserting one medal is referred to as a single medal game, a unit game played by inserting two medals is referred to as a double medal game, and a unit game played by inserting three medals is referred to as a triple medal game. In this embodiment, the number of medals that can be inserted in each game state is set to three.

The active line is a pseudo line (top-middle-bottom) that connects the top area of the left reel 3L, the middle area of the center reel 3C, and the bottom area of the right reel 3R. As explained in the first embodiment, the active line is activated when the number of medals required for the current game (the number of medals required to start the game) has been bet.

The symbol combination table shown in Figures 83A and 83B associates symbol combinations ("combinations") identified by storage area identification data represented by 13 bytes with the respective numbers of medals paid out when the combination is displayed on an active line when one, two, or three coins are bet.

Some of the diagrams show multiple combinations together. For example, "C_Missed Lip B_01-02" is made up of two combinations, "C_Missed Lip B_01" and "C_Missed Lip B_02." The combination called "C_Missed Lip B_01" corresponds to the symbol combination "V-Lip A-Bar," and the combination called "C_Missed Lip B_02" corresponds to the symbol combination "V-Lip A-Cherry." When these combinations are displayed along an active line, no medals are paid out, but a replay is activated.

Similarly, "C_321 Bell B_01-06" is made up of six combinations, "C_321 Bell B_01" through "C_321 Bell B_06." In the diagram, for "C_321 Bell B_01-06," three types of symbols ("Seven," "V," and "Cherry") are specified for the left reel 3L, two types of symbols ("Bell B" and "Bell A") are specified for the center reel 3C, and one type of symbol ("Bell A") is specified for the right reel 3R. This means that "C_321 Bell B_01-06" includes 3 x 2 x 1 = 6 combinations. When these combinations are displayed along an active line, 15 medals are paid out.

Also, when the "V-RIP B-V" combination known as "C_3BB" is displayed along an active line, no medals are paid out, but the game state transitions to the 3BB game state.

In the diagram, "REP" indicates a combination that activates a replay (replay) when a win is won, "FRU" indicates a combination that pays out medals when a win is won, and "BB" indicates a combination that activates the BB game state (3BB game state) when a win is won (see Figures 11 to 14).

<Flag Combination Table>
84A to 84E are diagrams showing combination tables by flag.

The flag combination table defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and the symbol combinations that can stop and be displayed on an active line. As a result, when an internal winning combination is determined, the type of symbol combination that can stop and be displayed on an active line (the type of winning combination) is uniquely determined.

Specifically, the flag combination tables shown in Figures 84A to 84E show combinations that are permitted to be displayed on the pay lines in accordance with the internal winning combinations. The internal winning combinations in this embodiment are "F_3BB", "F_Replay A", "F_Replay B", "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_213 Bell C", "F_213 Bell D", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B", "F_231 Bell C", "F_231 Bell D", "F_312 Bell A", "F_312 Bell B", "F_312 Bell C", "F_312 Bell D", "F_321 Bell A", "F_312 Bell B", "F_312 Bell C", "F_312 Bell D", "F_321 Bell B", "F_321 Bell C", "F_321 Bell D", "F_321 Bell A", "F_321 Bell B", "F_321 Bell C", "F_321 Bell D ... C", "F_321 Bell D", "F_321 Bell A", "F_321 Bell B", "F_321 Bell C", "F_32 There are "F_bell A", "F_321 Bell B", "F_321 Bell C", "F_321 Bell D", "F_Common Bell A", "F_Common Bell B", "F_1 Piece Role A", "F_1 Piece Role B", "F_Cherry", "F_Parallel Watermelon", "F_Diagonal Watermelon", "F_Reach Eye Role A", "F_Reach Eye Role B", "F_Reach Eye Role C", "F_BB Confirmed Role A", "F_BB Confirmed Role B", "F_Common 1 Piece Role", and "F_Common 15 Piece Role".

For example, if the internal winning combination is "F_3BB," then "C_3BB" is permitted to be displayed on the active line. In other words, if the internal winning combination is "F_3BB," this indicates that the internal winning combination is BB (3BB).

Also, if the internal winning combination is "F_Replay B," the following are permitted to be displayed on the active line: "C_Missed Replay B_01-02," "C_Missed Replay A_01-02," "C_Middle Replay A_01-04," "C_Lower Replay A_01-06," "C_CU Replay_01-03," "C_Upper Replay B_01-06," "C_Upper Replay A_01-03," and "C_CD Replay_01-04."

In addition, if the internal winning role is "F_213 Bell A", it is permitted to display "C_One Piece Role C6_01-02", "C_One Piece Role C2_01-02", "C_One Piece Role C1_01-02", "C_Middle Right One Piece B_01-04", "C_Middle Right One Piece A_01-04", "C_Control Role E1_01-02", "C_Control Role D6_01-02", "C_Control Role D5_01-02", "C_Control Role D1_01-02", "C_Control Role B3_01-02", "C_Control Role B2_01-02", "C_Control Role B1_01-02", "C_Control Role A4_01-02", "C_Control Role A2_01-02", "C_Control Role A1_01-02", and "C_213 Bell A_01-03" on the active line.

<Internal lottery table>
The internal lottery tables in this embodiment include an internal lottery table (see Figure 85) that is referenced in a bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state), an internal lottery table (see Figure 86(a)) that is referenced in a 3BB flag interval state (RT1 gaming state), and an internal lottery table (see Figure 86(b)) that is referenced in a BB gaming state (3BB gaming state).

Figure 85 shows the internal lottery table for the RT0 gaming state. Figure 86(a) shows the internal lottery table for the RT1 gaming state. Figure 86(b) shows the internal lottery table for the BB gaming state.

The multiple internal lottery tables shown in Figures 85 and 86 are stored in the main ROM 102 corresponding to each game state and each number of inserted coins, and show the winning probability of each flag with a denominator of 65536 for each setting 1 to 6. For example, in Figure 85, a lottery value of "4308" is specified for "F_213 Bell A." As a result, the probability of "F_213 Bell A" winning internally is "4308/65536."

There are two cases where "F_3BB" can be internally won: when "F_3BB" is internally won alone, and when "F_3BB" is internally won in combination with another internal winning combination. In Figures 85 and 86, when "F_3BB" is internally won alone, it is written as "F_3BB", and when "F_3BB" is internally won in combination with another internal winning combination, it is written as "F_3BB + (other internal winning combination)."

As shown in FIG. 85, in the RT0 gaming state, "F_Common Bell B," "F_1 Piece A," "F_1 Piece B," "F_Cherry," "F_Parallel Watermelon," "F_Diagonal Watermelon," "F_Reach Eye A," "F_Reach Eye B," "F_Reach Eye C," "F_BB Confirmed A," and "F_BB Confirmed B" can overlap with "F_3BB" and be internally drawn. Also, if "F_Common Bell B," "F_1 Piece A," "F_1 Piece B," "F_Cherry," "F_Parallel Watermelon," "F_Diagonal Watermelon," "F_Reach Eye A," "F_Reach Eye B," "F_Reach Eye C," "F_BB Confirmed A," and "F_BB Confirmed B" are internally drawn, "F_3BB" is always internally drawn.

As mentioned above, in the RT1 gaming state, "F_3BB" has already been internally drawn. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 86(a), in the RT1 gaming state, internally drawn roles other than "F_Common Bell B," "F_1 Piece A," "F_1 Piece B," "F_Cherry," "F_Parallel Watermelon," "F_Diagonal Watermelon," "F_Reach Eye A," "F_Reach Eye B," "F_Reach Eye C," "F_BB Confirmed Role A," and "F_BB Confirmed Role B" will also be internally drawn in addition to "F_3BB." Note that in the RT1 gaming state, a "lose" cannot be drawn alone, so a lottery value of "0" is set for a "lose."

Note that the lottery values for each winning combination shown in Figures 85 and 86 are common values for all settings, but setting differences may be set for some or all winning combinations.

<Correspondence between internal winning combinations, stop operation modes, and display combinations>
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between internal winning combinations, stop operation modes, display combinations, etc.

In the first embodiment, it was explained which symbol combination (which can also be expressed as a display combination, winning combination, stop display mode, display result, etc.) is displayed depending on the stop operation mode when each internal winning combination is won (see Figure 15). In this embodiment, the correspondence between internal winning combinations, stop operation modes, and display combinations, etc. is configured as shown in Figure 87.

In the diagram, "1 → 2 → 3" indicates a case where the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the third stop operation (batting order 1). "1 → 3 → 2" indicates a case where the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the third stop operation (batting order 2).

"2 → 1 → 3" indicates a case where the stop operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the third stop operation (batting order 3). "2 → 3 → 1" indicates a case where the stop operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the third stop operation (batting order 4).

"3 → 1 → 2" indicates a case where the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the third stop operation (batting order 5). "3 → 2 → 1" indicates a case where the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the center reel 3C is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the third stop operation (batting order 6).

Specifically, if "F_Replay A" is determined as the internal winning combination, and a stop operation is performed by batting order 1 or batting order 2, a "normal reply" will be displayed along the valid line; if a stop operation is performed by any of batting orders 3 through 6, a "miss reply" will be displayed along the valid line if the timing is successful, and a "normal reply" will be displayed along the valid line if the timing is unsuccessful. Similarly, if "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, and a stop operation is performed by batting order 1 or batting order 2, a "normal reply" will be displayed along the valid line; and if a stop operation is performed by any of batting orders 3 through 6, a "miss reply" will be displayed along the valid line if the timing is successful, and a "normal reply" will be displayed along the valid line if the timing is unsuccessful.

"Normal replies" is a collective term for "C_middle replies A_01-04," "C_bottom replies A_01-06," "C_CU replies_01-03," "C_top replies B_01-06," "C_top replies A_01-03," and "C_CD replies_01-04" (see Figure 83A). "Removed replies" is a collective term for "C_removed replies B_01-02" and "C_removed replies A_01-02" (see Figure 83A).

As shown in Figure 84E, the content of the "miss replies" that are permitted to be displayed on the active line differs between when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" and when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay B." Specifically, as described above, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay B," "C_Missed Replies B_01-02" and "C_Missed Replies A_01-02" are permitted to be displayed on the active line as "Missed Replies." In contrast, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A," "C_Missed Replies A_01-02" are permitted to be displayed on the active line as "Missed Replies," but "C_Missed Replies B_01-02" are not permitted to be displayed on the active line. This is related to the playability of the pseudo-BIG (see Figure 88). Details will be provided later.

Furthermore, if any of "F_213 Bell A," "F_213 Bell B," "F_213 Bell C," and "F_213 Bell D" is determined to be the internal winning combination, when a stop operation is performed in batting order 3, a combination in which 15 medals are paid out if the button press is successful will be displayed along the valid line, and a combination in which 1 medal is paid out if the button press is unsuccessful will be displayed along the valid line. When a stop operation is performed in a batting order other than batting order 3, a combination in which 1 medal is paid out regardless of the button press will be displayed along the valid line.

Furthermore, if any of "F_231 Bell A," "F_231 Bell B," "F_231 Bell C," and "F_231 Bell D" is determined to be the internal winning combination, when a stop operation is performed in batting order 4, a combination in which 15 medals are paid out if the button press is successful will be displayed along the valid line, and a combination in which 1 medal is paid out if the button press is unsuccessful will be displayed along the valid line. When a stop operation is performed in a batting order other than batting order 4, a combination in which 1 medal is paid out regardless of the button press will be displayed along the valid line.

Furthermore, if any of "F_312 Bell A," "F_312 Bell B," "F_312 Bell C," or "F_312 Bell D" is determined to be the internal winning combination, when a stop operation is performed in batting order 5, a combination in which 15 medals are paid out if the button press is successful will be displayed along the valid line, and a combination in which 1 medal is paid out if the button press is unsuccessful will be displayed along the valid line. When a stop operation is performed in a batting order other than batting order 5, a combination in which 1 medal is paid out regardless of the button press will be displayed along the valid line.

Furthermore, if any of "F_321 Bell A," "F_321 Bell B," "F_321 Bell C," and "F_321 Bell D" is determined to be the internal winning combination, when a stop operation is performed in batting order 6, a combination in which 15 medals are paid out if the button press is successful will be displayed along the valid line, and a combination in which 1 medal is paid out if the button press is unsuccessful will be displayed along the valid line. When a stop operation is performed in a batting order other than batting order 6, a combination in which 1 medal is paid out regardless of the button press will be displayed along the valid line.

In this way, "F_213 Bell A," "F_213 Bell B," "F_213 Bell C," "F_213 Bell D," "F_231 Bell A," "F_231 Bell B," "F_231 Bell C," "F_231 Bell D," "F_312 Bell A," "F_312 Bell B," "F_312 Bell C," "F_312 Bell D," "F_321 Bell A," "F_321 Bell B," "F_321 Bell C," and "F_321 Bell D" are internal winning combinations (push order bells) that stop and display different combinations (combinations of symbols) along the winning line depending on the order of stopping operations (push order) for each of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. When the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, 15 medals will be paid out if the push order is correct and the push is successful.

In addition, if any of "F_Parallel Watermelon", "F_Diagonal Watermelon", "F_Cherry", "F_Reach Eye Role A", "F_Reach Eye Role B", "F_Reach Eye Role C", "F_BB Confirmed Role A", and "F_BB Confirmed Role B" is determined as the internal winning role, the combination displayed along the active line will differ depending on whether the stopping operation is performed by batting order 1 or 2 or any of batting orders 3 to 6.

For example, if any of "F_Reach Eye Role A," "F_Reach Eye Role B," and "F_Reach Eye Role C" is determined as the internal winning role, when a stopping operation is performed by batting order 1 or batting order 2, "One Reach Eye" will be displayed along the active line, and when a stopping operation is performed by any of batting orders 3 through 6, "One Normal Win" will be displayed along the active line. "One Reach Eye" is a general term for the symbol combinations shown in Figures 83A and 83B that include the word "Reach Eye." "One Reach Eye" is a symbol combination that can only be displayed along the active line when any of "F_Reach Eye Role A," "F_Reach Eye Role B," and "F_Reach Eye Role C" is determined as the internal winning role.

In addition, if either "F_BB Confirmed Role A" or "F_BB Confirmed Role B" is determined as the internal winning role, when a stopping operation is performed by batting order 1 or batting order 2, "One BB Confirmed Reach" will be displayed along the active line, and when a stopping operation is performed by any of batting orders 3 through 6, "One Normal Roll" will be displayed along the active line. "One BB Confirmed Reach" is a general term for the symbol combinations shown in Figures 83A and 83B that include the words "BB Confirmed Role." "One BB Confirmed Reach" is a symbol combination that can only be displayed along the active line when either "F_BB Confirmed Role A" or "F_BB Confirmed Role B" is determined as the internal winning role.

<Gameplay>
Fig. 88 is a diagram showing an example of a transition flow of a game state in a non-advantageous zone and an advantageous zone according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 89 is a diagram showing the transition of a ball output state according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. Fig. 90 is a table summarizing the transition conditions of a ball output state according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.

In the pachislot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the main control circuit 100 manages the game state (ball payout state) shown in FIG. 88 separately from the game state shown in FIG. 81. As shown in FIG. 88, the ball payout state is broadly divided into a non-advantageous zone and an advantageous zone.

As explained in the first embodiment, the advantageous zone is a game period that can be controlled to a game state (AT state) in which information about stop operations that are advantageous to the player is notified (see Figure 5). Advantageous zones include a presentation zone (advantageous zone, normal game) and an increase zone (advantageous zone, AT state). Presentation zones are basically game states (non-AT states) in which information about stop operations that are advantageous to the player is not notified, and are similar to non-advantageous zones in that they are game states that are disadvantageous to the player compared to the AT state, but differ from non-advantageous zones in that a transition in the ball output state occurs. Increase zones are AT states (game states that are advantageous to the player).

During the presentation section, the ball output state can be controlled to one of the following: Normal Stage, Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Consecutive Winning Preparation, Consecutive Winning Challenge, and Promotion Chance. Normal Stage, Chance Stage A, and Chance Stage B are collectively referred to as the normal ball output state. Furthermore, during the increase section, the ball output state can be controlled to one of the following: Pseudo BIG and Pseudo REG. The characteristics of each ball output state are described in detail below.

As shown in Figures 89 and 90, when a player wins the advantageous zone transition lottery (see step S4001 in Figure 93) in a non-advantageous zone and the result of the advantageous zone transition lottery (see step S4003 in Figure 93) determines that a transition to consecutive win preparation will occur, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from the non-advantageous zone to consecutive win preparation (see transition condition (A)). Also, when a player wins the advantageous zone transition lottery (see step S4001 in Figure 93) in a non-advantageous zone and the result of the advantageous zone transition lottery (see step S4003 in Figure 93) determines that a transition to consecutive win challenge will occur, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from the non-advantageous zone to consecutive win challenge (see transition condition (B)).

If the consecutive win preparation drop lottery (see step S4031 in FIG. 95) is won during consecutive win preparation, the main control circuit 100 will transition the ball output state from consecutive win preparation to the normal stage (see transition condition (C)). If the consecutive win challenge transition lottery (see step S4027 in FIG. 95) is won during consecutive win preparation, the main control circuit 100 will transition the ball output state from consecutive win preparation to consecutive win challenge (see transition condition (D)).

When a decision is made to transition to Chance Stage A in the normal stage as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (see step S4082 in FIG. 103), the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from the normal stage to Chance Stage A via the premonition state (see transition condition (E)). In Chance Stage A, when the number of unit games determined by the chance stage guaranteed number of games lottery at the start of the chance stage (see step S4303 in FIG. 126) have been played, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from Chance Stage A to the normal stage (see transition condition (F)).

When a decision is made to transition to Chance Stage B in the normal stage as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (see step S4082 in FIG. 103), the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from the normal stage to Chance Stage B via the premonition state (see transition condition (G)). In Chance Stage B, when the number of unit games determined by the chance stage guaranteed number of games lottery at the start of the chance stage (see step S4303 in FIG. 126) have been played, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from Chance Stage B to the normal stage (see transition condition (H)).

In the normal stage, when a transition to a promotion chance is determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning lottery (see step S4082 in FIG. 103), the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from the normal stage to the promotion chance via the premonition state (see transition condition (I)). Also, in chance stage A, when a transition to a promotion chance is determined as a result of the chance stage pseudo-BIG/promotion chance lottery (see step S4306 in FIG. 126), the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from chance stage A to the promotion chance via the premonition state (see transition condition (I)). Also, in chance stage B, when a transition to a promotion chance is determined as a result of the chance stage pseudo-BIG/promotion chance lottery (see step S4306 in FIG. 126), the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from chance stage B to the promotion chance via the premonition state (see transition condition (I)).

Also, in the normal stage, when a decision is made to transition to pseudo BIG as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning lottery (see step S4082 in Figure 103), the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from the normal stage to pseudo BIG via the premonition state (see transition condition (J)). Also, in the chance stage A, when a decision is made to transition to pseudo BIG as a result of the chance stage pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery (see step S4306 in Figure 126), the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from chance stage A to pseudo BIG via the premonition state (see transition condition (J)). Also, in Chance Stage B, if a decision is made to transition to Pseudo BIG as a result of the Pseudo BIG/Promotion Chance Lottery during the Chance Stage (see step S4306 in FIG. 126), the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from Chance Stage B to Pseudo BIG via the precursor state (see transition condition (J)).

If a promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in Figure 133) determines that a transition to pseudo BIG will occur during the promotion chance, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from the promotion chance to pseudo BIG (see transition condition (K)). If a promotion chance lottery does not determine that a transition to pseudo BIG will occur during the promotion chance and a predetermined number of unit games (four times) have been played, the main control circuit 100 transitions the ball output state from the promotion chance to pseudo REG (see transition condition (L)).

When a player wins the consecutive win challenge lottery in the pseudo-BIG (see step S4408 in FIG. 144), the main control circuit 100 will transition the ball output state from the pseudo-BIG to the consecutive win challenge when the pseudo-BIG termination condition is met (see transition condition (M)). When a player wins the consecutive win challenge lottery in the pseudo-REG (see step S4483 in FIG. 152), the main control circuit 100 will transition the ball output state from the pseudo-REG to the consecutive win challenge when the pseudo-REG termination condition is met (see transition condition (M)). The pseudo-BIG termination conditions and pseudo-REG termination conditions will be explained later using FIG. 91.

If a 1G consecutive lottery (see step S4484 in FIG. 152) is won in the pseudo-REG, the main control circuit 100 will transition the ball output state from the pseudo-REG to the pseudo-BIG when the pseudo-REG termination condition is met (see transition condition (N)). Furthermore, if a 1G consecutive lottery (see step S4384 in FIG. 143) is won in the pseudo-BIG, the main control circuit 100 will control the ball output state back to the pseudo-BIG when the pseudo-BIG termination condition is met.

In the consecutive-game challenge, if the result of the consecutive-game challenge lottery (see step S4525 in FIG. 156) is to transition to a promotion chance, the main control circuit 100 will transition the ball output state from the consecutive-game challenge to a promotion chance when the number of unit games determined by the consecutive-game challenge start game number lottery (see step S4523 in FIG. 156) have been played (see transition condition (O)). In the consecutive-game challenge, if the result of the consecutive-game challenge lottery (see step S4525 in FIG. 156) is to transition to a pseudo-BIG, the main control circuit 100 will transition the ball output state from the consecutive-game challenge to a pseudo-BIG when the number of unit games determined by the consecutive-game challenge start game number lottery (see step S4523 in FIG. 156) have been played (see transition condition (P)).

In a consecutive-game challenge, if the result of the normal transition lottery at the end of the consecutive-game challenge (see step S4528 in FIG. 156) determines that a transition to a non-advantageous zone will occur, the main control circuit 100 will transition the ball output state from the consecutive-game challenge to the non-advantageous zone (see transition condition (Q)). In a consecutive-game challenge, if the result of the normal transition lottery at the end of the consecutive-game challenge (see step S4528 in FIG. 156) determines that a transition to consecutive-game preparation will occur, the main control circuit 100 will transition the ball output state from the consecutive-game challenge to consecutive-game preparation (see transition condition (R)).

The above describes typical transition routes for each ball output state. In this embodiment, conditions other than the above transition conditions (A) to (R) are also set as conditions for transitioning between ball output states, and when each transition condition is met, a transition occurs from one ball output state to another. This is explained in more detail below.

Note that the presentation section can be set to a state that is unfavorable to the player (a state in which the gaming value of medals, etc. is reduced), but it can also be set to a state in which some information about stopping operations that is advantageous to the player can be notified (for example, the correct batting order for a specific batting order role or the bonus symbol combination that should be achieved).

<AT state (pseudo BIG and pseudo REG)>
91(a) is a diagram showing the numerical values displayed on the instruction monitor in the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, and FIG. 91(b) is a diagram showing the contents corresponding to the numerical values displayed on the instruction monitor.

As explained in the first embodiment, in a situation where information about a stop operation is notified to the player (AT state), the information about the stop operation is not only notified by the sub-side notification means (e.g., the main effect display unit 21) controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, but also by the instruction monitor, which serves as the main-side notification means controlled by the main control circuit 100. As in the first embodiment, the instruction monitor is configured to include an notification lamp (stop operation display unit). In a situation where information about a stop operation is notified to the player (AT state), the notification lamp displays the information about the stop operation by lighting up in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information about the stop operation being notified.

As shown in FIG. 91(a), in the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_213 Bell A" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "1" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_213 Bell B" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "5" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_213 Bell C" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "1" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_213 Bell D" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "5" is displayed on the indication monitor.

In addition, in the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_231 Bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number "2" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_231 Bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number "6" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_231 Bell C" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number "2" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_231 Bell D" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number "6" is displayed on the indication monitor.

In addition, in the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_312 Bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number "3" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_312 Bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number "7" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_312 Bell C" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number "3" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_312 Bell D" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number "7" is displayed on the indication monitor.

In addition, in the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_321 Bell A" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "4" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_321 Bell B" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "8" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_321 Bell C" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "4" is displayed on the indication monitor. In the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if "F_321 Bell D" is determined as the internal winning role, the number "8" is displayed on the indication monitor.

As shown in FIG. 91(b), a value of "1" on the instruction monitor indicates that the first stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the center reel 3C by pressing with the aim of hitting "seven," the second stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the left reel 3L, and the third stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the right reel 3R. A value of "2" on the instruction monitor indicates that the first stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the center reel 3C by pressing with the aim of hitting "seven," the second stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the right reel 3R, and the third stop operation is to perform a stop operation on the left reel 3L.

A value of "3" on the instruction monitor indicates that the first stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the right reel 3R with a button press aimed at "seven," the second stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the left reel 3L, and the third stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the center reel 3C. A value of "4" on the instruction monitor indicates that the first stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the right reel 3R with a button press aimed at "seven," the second stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the center reel 3C, and the third stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the left reel 3L.

A value of "5" on the instruction monitor indicates that the first stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the center reel 3C by pressing with the eye aiming for the "buoy," the second stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the left reel 3L, and the third stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the right reel 3R. A value of "6" on the instruction monitor indicates that the first stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the center reel 3C by pressing with the eye aiming for the "buoy," the second stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the right reel 3R, and the third stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the left reel 3L.

A value of "7" on the instruction monitor indicates that the first stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the right reel 3R by pressing with the eye aimed at the "buoy," the second stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the left reel 3L, and the third stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the center reel 3C. A value of "8" on the instruction monitor indicates that the first stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the right reel 3R by pressing with the eye aimed at the "buoy," the second stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the center reel 3C, and the third stopping operation is to perform a stopping operation on the left reel 3L.

As described above, in pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, when the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination, a number between "1" and "8" is displayed on the instruction monitor. The display of a number between "1" and "8" on the instruction monitor (announcement of information on the stop operation to make the push order bell win) is also called "bell navi." By performing the stop operation in accordance with the announcement (bell navi), the player can win 15 medals (see Figure 87). As a result, pseudo BIG and pseudo REG are in a gaming state (AT state) that is advantageous to the player. Furthermore, as explained below, pseudo BIG has more bell navi operations than pseudo REG, making it a more advantageous gaming state than pseudo REG.

Here, the pseudo BIGs include a first pseudo BIG and a second pseudo BIG. When the pseudo BIG starts, it is controlled as the first pseudo BIG. In the first pseudo BIG, when any of the following (normal replies) are displayed along the active line: "C_middle reply A_01-04," "C_lower reply A_01-06," "C_CU reply_01-03," "C_upper reply B_01-06," "C_upper reply A_01-03," and "C_CD reply_01-04," the first pseudo BIG transitions to the second pseudo BIG.

There is an upper limit to the number of times you can transition from the first Pseudo BIG to the second Pseudo BIG in one Pseudo BIG, and this upper limit is three times. If the number of transitions from the first Pseudo BIG to the second Pseudo BIG (number of winning regular replies) is two or less, the second Pseudo BIG will transition to the first Pseudo BIG after a predetermined number of Bell Navis (nine times) have been performed in the second Pseudo BIG. On the other hand, if the number of transitions from the first Pseudo BIG to the second Pseudo BIG (number of winning regular replies) is three, the Pseudo BIG will end without transitioning from the second Pseudo BIG to the first Pseudo BIG after a predetermined number of Bell Navis (nine times) have been performed in the second Pseudo BIG.

Furthermore, when Bell Navigation is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times) in the first pseudo BIG, the pseudo BIG will end, regardless of the number of transitions from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG (number of regular RIP wins).Furthermore, when Bell Navigation is performed a predetermined number of times (5 times) in the pseudo REG, the pseudo REG will end.

The remaining number of Bernavis that can be performed in the first pseudo-BIG is managed by the first Bernavi count counter, and the remaining number of Bernavis that can be performed in the second pseudo-BIG and the remaining number of Bernavis that can be performed in the pseudo-REG are managed by the second Bernavi count counter. Furthermore, the remaining number of times that can be transitioned from the first pseudo-BIG to the second pseudo-BIG is managed by the normal remaining win count counter.

When the pseudo BIG begins, the first Bernavi count counter is set to "30" and the normal RIP remaining winning count counter is set to "3". The value of the first Bernavi count counter is decremented by 1 each time a Bernavi is performed in the first pseudo BIG. The value of the normal RIP remaining winning count counter is decremented by 1 each time there is a transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG (each time a normal RIP wins in the first pseudo BIG).

When transitioning from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG, the second Bernavi count counter is set to "9". The value of the second Bernavi count counter is decremented by 1 each time a Bernavi is performed in the second pseudo BIG. Also, when the pseudo REG starts, the second Bernavi count counter is set to "5". The value of the second Bernavi count counter is decremented by 1 each time a Bernavi is performed in the pseudo REG.

From the above, the termination condition for the pseudo BIG is that either of the following (i) or (ii) is met, and the termination condition for the pseudo REG is that the following (iii) is met.
(i) The value of the first Bernavi counter is 0. (ii) The value of the normal reply remaining winning count counter is 0, and the value of the second Bernavi counter is 0. (iii) The value of the second Bernavi counter is 0.

Therefore, if there are many remaining Bernavis that can be performed in the first pseudo-BIG (the value of the first Bernavi counter), and the number of times that can be transitioned from the first pseudo-BIG to the second pseudo-BIG reaches the upper limit, the pseudo-BIG will end without the player being able to enjoy the full benefits of the Bernavis in the first pseudo-BIG. In order to maximize the number of medals paid out in the pseudo-BIG, it is necessary to transition to the final (third) second pseudo-BIG once the remaining number of Bernavis that can be performed in the first pseudo-BIG (the value of the first Bernavi counter) has been reduced as much as possible. From this perspective, in situations where there are many remaining Bernavis that can be performed in the first pseudo BIG (value of the first Bernavi counter), and the remaining number of times that it is possible to transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG (value of the normal RIP remaining winnings counter) is one, it is desirable to avoid transitioning from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG (winning a normal RIP).

In this regard, in this embodiment, even if "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination in the first pseudo BIG, if either "C_Missed Replay B_01-02" or "C_Missed Replay A_01-02" (a miss replay) is displayed along the active line, there will be no transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG, and the value of the remaining normal replay winning counter will not be decremented. In other words, by winning a miss replay, it is possible to avoid the transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG (a normal replay winning).

As shown in FIG. 91(a), when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination in the pseudo-BIG, the number "9" or "10" is displayed on the indicator monitor. Specifically, when "F_Replay A" is determined as the internal winning combination in the pseudo-BIG, if the value of the normal replay remaining winning count counter is 2 or greater, or if the value of the first Bernavi count counter is 6 or less, the number "9" is displayed on the indicator monitor. Similarly, when "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination in the pseudo-BIG, if the value of the normal replay remaining winning count counter is 2 or greater, or if the value of the first Bernavi count counter is 6 or less, the number "9" is displayed on the indicator monitor.

In contrast, when "F_Replay A" is determined as the internal winning combination in a pseudo-BIG, if the value of the normal replay remaining winning count counter is 1 and the value of the first Bernavi count counter is 7 or greater, the number "10" is displayed on the indicator monitor. Similarly, when "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination in a pseudo-BIG, if the value of the normal replay remaining winning count counter is 1 and the value of the first Bernavi count counter is 7 or greater, the number "10" is displayed on the indicator monitor.

As shown in FIG. 91(b), the number "9" on the instruction monitor indicates that a stop operation should be performed to win a normal replay, and the number "10" on the instruction monitor indicates that a stop operation should be performed to win a miss replay. When the value of the remaining normal replay win counter is 1 and the value of the first Bernavi count counter is 7 or greater, and "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the player can avoid transitioning from the first pseudo-BIG to the second pseudo-BIG (winning a normal replay) by performing a stop operation to win a miss replay in accordance with the notification. This prevents the pseudo-BIG from ending when there are many remaining Bernavis (the value of the first Bernavi count counter) that can be executed in the first pseudo-BIG (7 or more), allowing the player to continue the pseudo-BIG while enjoying the benefits of the Bernavis in the first pseudo-BIG.

As mentioned above, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A," it is permitted to display "C_Missed Replay A_01-02" on the active line as a "Missed Replay," and when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay B," it is permitted to display "C_Missed Replay B_01-02" on the active line as a "Missed Replay" in addition to "C_Missed Replay A_01-02" (see Figure 84E).

In order for "C_Missed Replay A_01-02" to appear on an active line, the left reel 3L must be stopped when the symbol ("bar") at symbol position "6" is displayed in the middle area (the "bar" at symbol position "6" must be pressed perfectly). Because "C_Missed Replay A_01-02" are permitted to appear on an active line whether the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B," successfully pressing the "bar" will result in "C_Missed Replay A_01-02" winning (avoiding a regular replay winning).

In contrast, to display "C_Missed Replay B_01-02" on an active line, the left reel 3L must be stopped when one of the symbols (all "buoys") between symbol positions "13" and "15" is displayed in the middle area (the "buoy" symbol between symbol positions "13" and "15" must be pressed with the right eye). When the internal winning combination is "F_Replay B," "C_Missed Replay B_01-02" is permitted to be displayed on an active line, and successfully pressing the "buoy" will result in "C_Missed Replay B_01-02" winning (avoiding a regular replay winning). On the other hand, if the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A," "C_Missed Replay B_01-02" is not permitted to appear on the active line, so even if you press the "Voy" button, "C_Missed Replay B_01-02" will not win, and in this case, a regular replay will win.

When the number "10" is displayed on the instruction monitor, the player can recognize that either "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" has been determined as the internal winning combination. However, the number displayed on the instruction monitor is the same ("10") when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" and when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay B," and the content of the effect displayed on the main effect display unit 21 is also the same (for example, the display of a text image such as "Miss Challenge"). Therefore, the player cannot recognize whether the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B."

As long as you can successfully press the "bar" button, you can win a missed replay regardless of whether the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B," so it doesn't matter whether the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B." However, pressing the bar button successfully generally requires advanced skill and is difficult to achieve.

The timing of the stopping operation to successfully press the "buoy" button (the range of symbols to aim for) is wider than the timing of the stopping operation to successfully press the "bar" button (the range of symbols to aim for), so pressing the "buoy" button at the right time can be said to be easier than pressing the "bar" button at the right time. However, when pressing the "buoy" button at the right time in a situation where it is not possible to determine whether the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B," if the internal winning combination is "F_Replay B," it is possible to win a miss replay, but if the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A," it is not possible to win a miss replay.

The ratio of the probability that "F_Replay A" will be determined as the internal winning combination to the probability that "F_Replay B" will be determined as the internal winning combination is approximately 1:3 (see Figures 85 and 86). Therefore, when pressing the "V" button while unable to determine whether the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B," the probability of winning a miss (assuming accurate pressing) is approximately 75%. In contrast, when pressing the "Bar" button precisely, the probability of winning a miss (assuming accurate pressing) is 100%. As a result, players play the first pseudo-BIG by choosing between pressing the "Bar" button precisely, which is highly difficult but can reliably win a miss if successful, and pressing the "V" button, which is less difficult but may not win a miss even with accurate operation.

As shown in Figures 91(a) and (b), in the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, if any of "F_Common Bell A" and "F_Common Bell B" (collectively referred to as "F_Common Bell" in the figures), "F_Parallel Watermelon," and "F_Diagonal Watermelon" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number "11" is displayed on the instruction monitor. The number "11" on the instruction monitor notifies that a stopping operation on a reel other than the left reel 3L (the center reel 3C or the right reel 3R) will be performed as the first stopping operation. The configuration of the instruction monitor can be designed as appropriate; for example, the numbers "1" to "8" on the instruction monitor may be displayed only in the 3BB flag interval state, and the numbers "9" to "11" on the instruction monitor may be displayed regardless of whether the 3BB flag interval state is present.

<Correspondence between internal winning combinations, sub-flags, and payout flags>
FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the sub-flag, and the payout flag.

As explained in the first embodiment, the sub-flag is information used to group internal winning roles that play similar roles (whether or not they are lottery eligible roles and their winning probability, etc.) in various lotteries related to gameplay (various processes related to advantageous zones) by the main control circuit 100, and assign the same information to make the group identifiable.

Figure 92 shows the correspondence between internal winning roles and sub-flags. Specifically, the sub-flag number "0" ("loser") is set for the internal winning roles "F_213 Bell A," "F_213 Bell B," "F_213 Bell C," "F_213 Bell D," "F_231 Bell A," "F_231 Bell B," "F_231 Bell C," "F_231 Bell D," "F_312 Bell A," "F_312 Bell B," "F_312 Bell C," "F_312 Bell D," "F_321 Bell A," "F_321 Bell B," "F_321 Bell C," "F_321 Bell D," "F_1-piece role B," "F_common 1-piece role," and "F_common 15-piece role."

The sub-flag number "1" ("Replay") is set for the internal winning combinations "F_Replay A" and "F_Replay B." The sub-flag number "2" ("Common Bell") is set for the internal winning combinations "F_Common Bell A" and "F_Common Bell B." The sub-flag number "3" ("Parallel Watermelon") is set for the internal winning combination "F_Diagonal Watermelon." The sub-flag number "4" ("Diagonal Watermelon") is set for the internal winning combination "F_Diagonal Watermelon."

Sub-flag number "5" ("Cherry") is set for the internal winning combination "F_Cherry." Sub-flag number "6" ("Reach Eye") is set for the internal winning combinations "F_Reach Eye A," "F_Reach Eye B," and "F_Reach Eye C." Sub-flag number "7" ("BB Confirmed A") is set for the internal winning combination "F_BB Confirmed B." Sub-flag number "8" ("BB Confirmed B") is set for the internal winning combination "F_1 Piece A." Sub-flag number "9" ("1 Piece") is set for the internal winning combination "Loss." Sub-flag number "10" ("Loss (Single BB)") is set for the internal winning combination "Loss."

As a result, if the internal winning combination is any of "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_213 Bell C", "F_213 Bell D", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B", "F_231 Bell C", "F_231 Bell D", "F_312 Bell A", "F_312 Bell B", "F_312 Bell C", "F_312 Bell D", "F_321 Bell A", "F_321 Bell B", "F_321 Bell C", "F_321 Bell D", "F_1 Piece B", "F_Common 1 Piece" and "F_Common 15 Piece" then the sub-flag will be determined to be "miss".

If the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B", the sub-flag "Replay" is determined. If the internal winning combination is either "F_Common Bell A" or "F_Common Bell B", the sub-flag "Common Bell" is determined. If the internal winning combination is "F_Parallel Watermelon", the sub-flag "Parallel Watermelon" is determined. If the internal winning combination is "F_Diagonal Watermelon", the sub-flag "Diagonal Watermelon" is determined.

If the internal winning combination is "F_Cherry", the sub-flag "Cherry" is determined. If the internal winning combination is any of "F_Reach Eye A", "F_Reach Eye B", or "F_Reach Eye C", the sub-flag "Reach Eye" is determined. If the internal winning combination is "F_BB Confirmed A", the sub-flag "BB Confirmed A" is determined. If the internal winning combination is "F_BB Confirmed B", the sub-flag "BB Confirmed B" is determined. If the internal winning combination is "F_1 Piece A", the sub-flag "1 Piece" is determined. If the internal winning combination is "Miss", the sub-flag "Miss (Single BB)" is determined.

The above sub-flags are determined in the main control circuit 100 by the sub-flag setting process described in the first embodiment (see step S73 in Figure 26). Information indicating the determined sub-flag is then basically included in the start command data (see step S7 in Figure 23) and transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. This allows the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize the determined sub-flag and perform an effect corresponding to that sub-flag.

However, in this embodiment, when the system is in a non-AT state and no stop operation information is displayed on the instruction monitor, if the internal winning combination is any of "F_213 Bell A," "F_213 Bell B," "F_213 Bell C," "F_213 Bell D," "F_231 Bell A," "F_231 Bell B," "F_231 Bell C," "F_231 Bell D," "F_312 Bell A," "F_312 Bell B," "F_312 Bell C," "F_312 Bell D," "F_321 Bell A," "F_321 Bell B," "F_321 Bell C," and "F_321 Bell D" (push order bells), information indicating the sub-flag is not sent to the sub-control circuit 200.

These push order bells constitute biased bells where the push order is incorrect if the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, but the push order can be correct if the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or right reel 3R. When such a biased bell is determined as the internal winning combination, information indicating the sub-flag is not sent to the sub-control circuit 200, thereby preventing a stop operation (irregular push) aimed at winning the biased bell in a non-AT state. However, it is also possible to configure the system so that information indicating the sub-flag is sent to the sub-control circuit 200 even when the biased bell is determined as the internal winning combination.

The configuration of the biased bell is not particularly limited, and it is not necessary for there to be any internal winning combination that could result in the correct press order when a stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation (see Figures 85 and 86), or it may be configured to have an internal winning combination that could result in the correct press order when a stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation, but with the probability of this internal winning combination being determined lower than the probability of an internal winning combination that could result in the correct press order when a stop operation is performed on the center reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation.

Figure 92 also shows the correspondence between internal winning combinations and payout flags. There are six types of correspondence between internal winning combinations and payout flags (payout flag group 1, payout flag group 2, payout flag group 3, payout flag group 4, payout flag group 5, and payout flag group 6). Depending on the game situation, the payout flag in one of these payout flag groups is determined.

Specifically, if the internal winning combination is a "miss," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1 is determined to be an "exclusion combination," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2 is determined to be a "reach mark BB," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3 is determined to be a "reach mark BB," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4 is determined to be a "non-fall combination," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is determined to be "other," and the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is determined to be a "reach mark BB."

If the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1 is set to "Exclusion combination," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2 is set to "Other," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3 is set to "Rep Bell," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4 is set to "Non-fall combination," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is set to "Other," and the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is set to "Other."

If the internal winning combination is any of "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_213 Bell C", "F_213 Bell D", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B", "F_231 Bell C", "F_231 Bell D", "F_312 Bell A", "F_312 Bell B", "F_312 Bell C", "F_312 Bell D", "F_321 Bell A", "F_321 Bell B", "F_321 Bell C", and "F_321 Bell D", "Transition role" is determined as the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 1, "Other" is determined as the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 2, "Other" is determined as the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 3, "Other" is determined as the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 4, "Other" is determined as the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 5, and "Other" is determined as the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 6.

If the internal winning role is either "F_Common Bell A" or "F_Common Bell B", "Transition Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2, "Rip Bell" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3, "Non-Fall Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5, and "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6.

If the internal winning role is "F_Parallel Watermelon", "Transition Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1, "Weak Rare Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2, "Weak Rare Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3, "Non-Falling Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4, "Parallel Watermelon" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5, and "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6.

If the internal winning role is "F_Diagonal Watermelon," "Transition Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1, "Diagonal Watermelon" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2, "Diagonal Watermelon" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3, "Non-Fall Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4, "Diagonal Watermelon" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5, and "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6.

If the internal winning role is "F_Cherry", "Transition Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1, "Weak Rare Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2, "Weak Rare Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3, "Non-Falling Role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4, "Cherry" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5, and "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6.

If the internal winning combination is any of "F_Reach Eyes Combination A", "F_Reach Eyes Combination B", and "F_Reach Eyes Combination C", "Transitional Combination" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1, "Reach Eyes" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2, "Reach Eyes" or "Reach Eyes BB" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3, "Non-Falling Combination" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5, and "Reach Eyes" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6.

If the internal winning combination is either "F_BB Confirmed Combination A" or "F_BB Confirmed Combination B," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1 is determined to be "Transitional Combination," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2 is determined to be "Reach Eye BB," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3 is determined to be "Reach Eye" or "Reach Eye BB," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4 is determined to be "Non-Falling Combination," the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is determined to be "Other," and the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is determined to be "Reach Eye BB."

If the internal winning role is either "F_1-piece role A" or "F_1-piece role B", "Transition role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5, and "1-piece role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6.

If the internal winning role is either "F_Common 1-piece role" or "F_Common 15-piece role", "Exclusion role" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 1, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 2, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4, "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5, and "Other" is determined as the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6.

The payout flag determined in this manner will be used in the various lotteries described below.

<Processing at the start of play for non-advantageous zones>
Fig. 93 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of a game for a non-advantageous zone performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 94(a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for transition to an advantageous zone. Fig. 94(b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for transition to an advantageous zone.

The game start processing for non-advantageous zones shown in Figure 93 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the processing of step S6 (game start state control processing) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current game zone is a non-advantageous zone (see Figure 88) (for example, when the judgment result of step S85 of Figure 27 is "YES"). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the current game zone is a non-advantageous zone by referring to the ball output state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 (see Figure 20).

In the game start processing for non-advantageous zones, the main CPU 101 first executes advantageous zone transition lottery processing (step S4001). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the advantageous zone transition lottery table (see FIG. 94(a)) and performs a lottery based on the payout flags in payout flag group 1 (see FIG. 92) and random number values, thereby determining whether the result of the advantageous zone transition lottery will be a "non-winning lottery" or a "winning lottery."

In the advantageous zone transition lottery table shown in Figure 94 (a), lottery values corresponding to the results of the advantageous zone transition lottery ("non-winning" and "winning") are specified for each payout flag in payout flag group 1 ("exclusion role" and "transition role"). The probability of each outcome of the advantageous zone transition lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number numerator: 256)". As a result, if the payout flag in payout flag group 1 is "exclusion role", there is a 0/256 probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery, and if the payout flag in payout flag group 1 is "transition role", there is a 256/256 probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery.

After executing the processing of step S4001, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the advantageous zone transition lottery has been won (step S4002). If it determines that the advantageous zone transition lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the advantageous zone transition lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 executes the advantageous zone transition lottery process (step S4003). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the advantageous zone transition lottery table (see FIG. 94(b)) and performs a lottery based on the payout flags in payout flag group 2 (see FIG. 92) and the random number value, thereby determining the result of the advantageous zone transition lottery as either "Preparation for consecutive wins," "Consecutive wins challenge," or "Definite consecutive wins challenge."

In the lottery table for transitioning to the favorable zone shown in Figure 94 (b), lottery values corresponding to the results of the lottery for transitioning to the favorable zone ("Preparation for consecutive wins," "Consecutive wins challenge," and "Confirmed consecutive wins challenge") are specified for each payout flag in payout flag group 2 ("Other," "Weak rare combination," "Diagonal watermelon," "Reach mark," and "Reach mark BB"). The probability of each result of the lottery for transitioning to the favorable zone being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, if the payout flag in payout flag group 2 is "Other," the result of the lottery when moving to the advantageous zone will determine "Preparation for consecutive wins" with a probability of 256/256; if the payout flag in payout flag group 2 is "Diagonal Watermelon," the result of the lottery when moving to the advantageous zone will determine "Consecutive Wins Challenge" with a probability of 128/256, and "Definite Consecutive Wins Challenge" with a probability of 128/256.

If "preparation for consecutive games" is determined as a result of the lottery at the time of transition to the advantageous zone, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive game preparation transition flag to ON. The consecutive game preparation transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start preparation for consecutive games. The main CPU 101 updates the ball payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the consecutive game preparation transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to preparation for consecutive games (see transition condition (A) in FIGS. 89 and 90).

Furthermore, if a "Consecutive Winning Challenge" or a "Definite Consecutive Winning Challenge" is determined as the result of the lottery when transitioning to the advantageous zone (if the Consecutive Winning Challenge is won), the main CPU 101 sets the Consecutive Winning Challenge transition flag to ON. The Consecutive Winning Challenge transition flag is a flag that indicates that it is time to start the Consecutive Winning Challenge. The main CPU 101 updates the ball output status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the Consecutive Winning Challenge transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the Consecutive Winning Challenge (see transition condition (B) in FIGS. 89 and 90). Furthermore, if a "Definite Consecutive Winning Challenge" is determined as the result of the lottery when transitioning to the advantageous zone, the main CPU 101 sets the Definite Consecutive Winning Challenge flag to ON. The Definite Consecutive Winning Challenge flag is referenced in the Consecutive Winning Challenge, and the Consecutive Winning Challenge is controlled advantageously.

After executing step S4003, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In this embodiment, when the payout flag in payout flag group 1 is a "transition role" (when a transition role is established), the advantageous zone transition lottery is always a winning lottery; however, the coefficient for non-winning roles may be set to 1 or greater, so that it does not necessarily result in a winning lottery. Furthermore, it is possible to generate effects suggesting the establishment of a transition role or an exclusion role in a non-advantageous zone, thereby heightening the sense of anticipation as to whether or not a transition to an advantageous zone will occur. It is also possible to generate effects suggesting or announcing the establishment of a winning role with a high expectation of transitioning to a highly advantageous state, such as a consecutive win challenge or a confirmed consecutive win challenge (for example, a winning role corresponding to a payout flag other than "other" shown in Figure 94(b) (weak rare role, diagonal watermelon, reach symbol, reach symbol BB)).

<Start of game processing for consecutive win preparation>
Fig. 95 is a flowchart showing the consecutive win preparation game start processing carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 96(a) is a diagram showing a consecutive win preparation mode lottery table (1). Fig. 96(b) is a diagram showing a consecutive win preparation mode lottery table (2). Fig. 97 is a diagram showing a consecutive win challenge transition lottery table. Fig. 98(a) is a diagram showing a consecutive win challenge transition confirmation lottery table. Fig. 98(b) is a diagram showing a consecutive win preparation fall lottery table.

The game start processing for consecutive win preparation shown in Figure 95 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the processing of step S6 (game start state control processing) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is consecutive win preparation (see Figure 88) (for example, when the judgment result of step S85 of Figure 27 is "NO"). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 (see Figure 20).

In the game start processing for consecutive win preparation, the main CPU 101 first determines whether it is the start time of consecutive win preparation (step S4021). As described above, the transition to consecutive win preparation occurs in the game start state control processing (see step S6 of FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the consecutive win preparation transition flag (see step S4003 of FIG. 93) is set to ON. In the game start state control processing for the unit game that transitions to consecutive win preparation, the payout state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to transition to consecutive win preparation, and then the game start processing for consecutive win preparation shown in FIG. 95 is performed. In the processing of step S4021, the main CPU 101 determines that it is the start time of consecutive win preparation if the current unit game has transitioned to consecutive win preparation (if the current unit game is the first game in consecutive win preparation).

If it is determined that preparation for consecutive wins has begun, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current game state is a 3BB flag interval state (see FIG. 81) (step S4022). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the current game state is a 3BB flag interval state by referencing the carryover role storage area (see FIG. 18) in the main RAM 103.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the current game state is the 3BB flag interval state, it sets the consecutive game preparation guarantee game number counter to "5" (step S4023). The value of the consecutive game preparation guarantee game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games that guarantee staying in consecutive game preparation, and is stored in the main RAM 103. If the value of the consecutive game preparation guarantee game number counter is greater than 0, it is decremented by 1 each time a unit game is played in consecutive game preparation. Although not shown, this decrement is performed in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) in Figure 23 (main process).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes consecutive game preparation mode lottery processing (1) (step S4024). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive game preparation mode lottery table (1) (see FIG. 96(a)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine either "Mode 1" or "Mode 2" as the result of the consecutive game preparation mode lottery (1) (consecutive game preparation mode).

In the consecutive-game preparation mode lottery table (1) shown in Figure 96 (a), lottery values corresponding to the results of the consecutive-game preparation mode lottery (1) ("Mode 1" and "Mode 2") are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the consecutive-game preparation mode lottery (1) being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." As a result, regardless of the setting value, "Mode 2" is determined as the result of the consecutive-game preparation mode lottery (1) (consecutive-game preparation mode) with a probability of 256/256.

If it is determined in step S4022 that the current game state is not the 3BB flag interval state, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive game preparation guaranteed game number counter to "0" (step S4025). Next, the main CPU 101 executes consecutive game preparation mode lottery processing (2) (step S4026). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive game preparation mode lottery table (2) (see FIG. 96(b)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine either "Mode 1" or "Mode 2" as the result of the consecutive game preparation mode lottery (2) (consecutive game preparation mode).

In the consecutive-game preparation mode lottery table (2) shown in Figure 96 (b), lottery values corresponding to the results of the consecutive-game preparation mode lottery (2) ("Mode 1" and "Mode 2") are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the consecutive-game preparation mode lottery (2) being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." As a result, regardless of the setting value, "Mode 1" is determined as the result of the consecutive-game preparation mode lottery (2) (consecutive-game preparation mode) with a probability of 256/256.

If it is determined in step S4021 that preparation for consecutive games has not yet begun, or after executing the processing of step S4024 or step S4026, the main CPU 101 executes a consecutive game challenge transition lottery process (step S4027). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive game challenge transition lottery table (see FIG. 97) and performs a lottery based on the payout flags (see FIG. 92) in payout flag group 3 and the random number value, thereby determining whether the result of the consecutive game challenge transition lottery will be a "no win" or a "win."

The consecutive win challenge transition lottery table shown in Figure 97 is provided for each of the payout flags in payout flag group 3 ("Other," "Rip Bell," "Weak Rare Role," "Diagonal Watermelon," and "Reach Eye or Reach Eye BB"). If the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3 is "Other", the consecutive win challenge transition lottery table shown in FIG. 97(a) is referenced, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3 is "Rip Bell", the consecutive win challenge transition lottery table shown in FIG. 97(b) is referenced, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3 is "Weak Rare Role", the consecutive win challenge transition lottery table shown in FIG. 97(c) is referenced, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3 is "Diagonal Watermelon", the consecutive win challenge transition lottery table shown in FIG. 97(d) is referenced, and if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 3 is "Reach Eye" or "Reach Eye BB", the consecutive win challenge transition lottery table shown in FIG. 97(e) is referenced.

In each consecutive-game challenge transition lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the outcome of the consecutive-game challenge transition lottery ("non-winning" and "winning") is specified for each consecutive-game preparation mode ("Mode 1" and "Mode 2"). The probability of each outcome of the consecutive-game challenge transition lottery being determined can be expressed as "the lottery value specified for that outcome / the number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, if the payout flag in payout flag group 3 is "Rip Bell" and the consecutive win preparation mode determined in consecutive win preparation mode lottery process (1) (see step S4024) or consecutive win preparation mode lottery process (2) (see step S4026) is "Mode 2," the consecutive win challenge transition lottery will be won with a probability of 32/256. Also, if the consecutive win preparation mode determined in consecutive win preparation mode lottery process (1) (see step S4024) or consecutive win preparation mode lottery process (2) (see step S4026) is "Mode 1," the consecutive win challenge transition lottery will not be won regardless of the payout flag in payout flag group 3.

If the player wins the consecutive win challenge transition lottery (wins the consecutive win challenge), the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive win challenge transition flag to ON. As described above, the consecutive win challenge transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the consecutive win challenge. The main CPU 101 updates the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the consecutive win challenge transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the consecutive win challenge (see transition condition (D) in FIGS. 89 and 90). As will be described later, the consecutive win challenge is a ball output state that allows for a transition to a pseudo-BIG or promotion chance with a relatively high probability, and the consecutive win preparation is a ball output state that allows for a transition to such a consecutive win challenge.

After executing the processing of step S4027, the main CPU 101 determines whether the consecutive-game challenge transition lottery has been won (step S4028). If it determines that the consecutive-game challenge transition lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 executes consecutive-game challenge transition determination lottery processing (step S4029). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive-game challenge transition determination lottery table (see FIG. 98(a)) and performs a lottery based on the payout flags in payout flag group 3 (see FIG. 92) and the random number value, thereby determining either a "non-win" or a "win" as the result of the consecutive-game challenge transition determination lottery.

In the lottery table for determining whether to transition to the consecutive win challenge shown in Figure 98(a), a lottery value corresponding to the outcome of the lottery for determining whether to transition to the consecutive win challenge ("No Win" and "Win") is specified for each payout flag in payout flag group 3 ("Other," "Rip Bell," "Weak Rare Symbol," "Diagonal Watermelon," and "Reach Eye or Reach Eye BB"). The probability of each outcome of the lottery for determining whether to transition to the consecutive win challenge can be expressed as "the lottery value specified for that result / the number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, if the payout flag in payout flag group 3 is "Diagonal Watermelon," there is a 128/256 probability of winning the consecutive win challenge transition confirmation lottery; if the payout flag in payout flag group 3 is "Reach Eye" or "Reach Eye BB," the consecutive win challenge transition confirmation lottery will always be a loss. If the consecutive win challenge transition confirmation lottery is won, the main CPU 101 sets the confirmed consecutive win challenge flag to ON. As described above, the confirmed consecutive win challenge flag is referenced in the consecutive win challenge, and the consecutive win challenge is controlled advantageously. Note that if the value of the consecutive win challenge win count counter (see FIG. 162) is a predetermined value (e.g., 3) or greater, the consecutive win challenge transition confirmation lottery may always be a win.

If it is determined in step S4028 that the consecutive-game challenge transition lottery has not been won, or after executing the processing of step S4029, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the consecutive-game preparation guarantee number of plays counter (see steps S4023 and S4025) is "0" (step S4030). If it is determined that the value of the consecutive-game preparation guarantee number of plays counter is "0," the main CPU 101 executes consecutive-game preparation rollover lottery processing (step S4031). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive-game preparation rollover lottery table (see FIG. 98(b)) and performs a lottery based on the payout flag (see FIG. 92) in payout flag group 4 and the random number value, thereby determining either a "no win" or a "win" as the result of the consecutive-game preparation rollover lottery.

In the consecutive win preparation drop lottery table shown in Figure 98 (b), lottery values corresponding to the results of the consecutive win preparation drop lottery ("non-winning" and "winning") are specified for each payout flag in payout flag group 4 ("Other" and "Non-dropping role"). The probability of each result of the consecutive win preparation drop lottery can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number numerator: 256)". As a result, if the payout flag in payout flag group 4 is "Other," there is a 192/256 probability of winning the consecutive win preparation drop lottery, and if the payout flag in payout flag group 4 is "Non-dropping role," the consecutive win preparation drop lottery will always be a losing draw.

If the consecutive win preparation drop lottery is won, the main CPU 101 sets the normal stage transition flag to ON. The normal stage transition flag is a flag that indicates that it is time to start the normal stage. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the normal stage transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the normal stage (see transition condition (C) in FIGS. 89 and 90).

If it is determined in step S4030 that the value of the consecutive game preparation guaranteed number of games counter is not "0", or after executing the processing of step S4031, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Normal stage game start processing>
FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the processing carried out in the main control circuit at the start of a normal stage game.

The game start processing for the normal stage shown in Figure 99 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the processing of step S6 (game start state control processing) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is the normal stage (see Figure 88) (for example, when the judgment result of step S85 of Figure 27 is "NO"). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 (see Figure 20).

In the game start processing for the normal stage, the main CPU 101 first determines whether it is the start of the normal stage (step S4041). As described above, the transition to the normal stage occurs during the game start state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the normal stage transition flag (see step S4031 in FIG. 95) is set to on. In the game start state control processing for a unit game that transitions to the normal stage, the payout state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to transition to the normal stage, and then the game start processing for the normal stage shown in FIG. 99 is performed. In the processing of step S4041, the main CPU 101 determines that it is the start of the normal stage if the current unit game has transitioned to the normal stage (if the current unit game is the first game of the normal stage).

If it is determined that it is the start of a normal stage, the main CPU 101 executes normal stage start processing (step S4042). Normal stage start processing will be explained later using Figure 100.

If it is determined in step S4041 that the normal stage has not yet begun, or after executing the processing of step S4042, the main CPU 101 executes the normal ball dispensing state common processing (step S4043). The normal ball dispensing state common processing will be explained later using Figure 108.

After executing the processing of step S4043, the main CPU 101 executes processing dedicated to the normal stage (step S4044). The processing dedicated to the normal stage will be described later using Figure 103.

After executing step S4044, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Normal stage start processing>
Fig. 100 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of the normal stage performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 101(a) is a diagram showing a normal transition mode lottery table. Fig. 101(b) is a diagram showing a normal transition ceiling lottery table. Fig. 102 is a diagram showing a point mode lottery table.

The normal stage start processing shown in Figure 100 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4042 of Figure 99 (normal stage game start processing).

In the normal stage start processing, the main CPU 101 first executes normal transition mode lottery processing (step S4061). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the normal transition mode lottery table (see FIG. 101(a)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the normal transition mode lottery (normal mode) as one of "Mode 1," "Mode 2," "Mode 3," "Mode 4," "Mode 5," "Mode 6," "Mode 7," or "Mode 8."

In the normal transition mode lottery table shown in Figure 101 (a), lottery values corresponding to the results of the normal transition mode lottery ("Mode 1", "Mode 2", "Mode 3", "Mode 4", "Mode 5", "Mode 6", "Mode 7", and "Mode 8") are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1", "Setting 2", "Setting 3", "Setting 4", "Setting 5", and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the normal transition mode lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random denominator: 256)".

For example, when the setting value is setting 1, the results of the normal transition mode lottery (normal mode) are "Mode 1" with a probability of 98/256, "Mode 2" with a probability of 98/256, "Mode 3" with a probability of 24/256, "Mode 4" with a probability of 12/256, "Mode 5" with a probability of 12/256, "Mode 6" with a probability of 1/256, "Mode 7" with a probability of 3/256, and "Mode 8" with a probability of 8/256.

After executing the processing of step S4061, the main CPU 101 executes normal transition ceiling lottery processing (step S4062). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the normal transition ceiling lottery table (see FIG. 101(b)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the normal transition ceiling lottery (number of ceiling games) as one of "1", "51", "101", "151", "201", "251", "301", "351", "401", "451", "501", "551", "601", "651", "701", "801", or "901".

In the normal transition ceiling lottery table shown in Figure 101(b), lottery values corresponding to the results of the normal transition mode lottery ("1", "51", "101", "151", "201", "251", "301", "351", "401", "451", "501", "551", "601", "651", "701", "801", and "901") are specified for each normal mode ("Mode 1", "Mode 2", "Mode 3", "Mode 4", "Mode 5", "Mode 6", "Mode 7", and "Mode 8"). The probability of each result of the normal transition ceiling lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random denominator: 256)".

For example, if the normal mode determined in the normal transition mode lottery process (see step S4061) is "Mode 1," the result of the normal transition ceiling lottery (ceiling game count) is "201" with a probability of 16/256, "301" with a probability of 16/256, "401" with a probability of 48/256, "501" with a probability of 16/256, "601" with a probability of 48/256, "701" with a probability of 16/256, "801" with a probability of 40/256, and "901" with a probability of 56/256.

After executing the processing of step S4062, the main CPU 101 executes point mode lottery processing (step S4063). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the point mode lottery table (see FIG. 102) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine one of "point mode 1," "point mode 2," or "point mode 3" as the result of the point mode lottery (point mode).

The point mode lottery table shown in FIG. 102 is provided for each of the point reach count counter values (0-2, 3-5, 6-8, and 9 or more). The point reach count counter value indicates the number of times the normal points (see FIG. 114) have reached a predetermined value (100). If the point reach count counter value is any of 0-2, the point mode lottery table shown in FIG. 102(a) is referenced. If the point reach count counter value is any of 3-5, the point mode lottery table shown in FIG. 102(b) is referenced. If the point reach count counter value is any of 6-8, the point mode lottery table shown in FIG. 102(c) is referenced. If the point reach count counter value is 9 or more, the point mode lottery table shown in FIG. 102(d) is referenced.

In each point mode lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the result of the point mode lottery ("Point Mode 1", "Point Mode 2", and "Point Mode 3") is specified for each setting value ("Setting 1", "Setting 2", "Setting 3", "Setting 4", "Setting 5", and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the point mode lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

For example, if the value of the point reach counter is between "0" and "2" and the setting value is 6, "Point Mode 1" will be determined with a probability of 253/256, "Point Mode 2" with a probability of 2/256, and "Point Mode 3" with a probability of 1/256. Note that if the point mode value (any of 1-3) determined in this point mode lottery is smaller than the point mode value already determined, the point mode value determined in this point mode lottery will be discarded.

<Normal stage exclusive processing>
Fig. 103 is a flowchart showing the normal stage-only processing performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 104 is a diagram showing a normal stage freeze lottery table. Figs. 105 to 107 are diagrams showing normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery tables.

The normal stage-only processing shown in Figure 103 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4044 of Figure 99 (normal stage game start processing).

In the normal stage-only processing, the main CPU 101 first executes normal stage freeze lottery processing (step S4081). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the normal stage freeze lottery table (see FIG. 104) and performs a lottery based on the payout flags (see FIG. 92) in payout flag group 6 and the random number value, thereby determining the result of the normal stage freeze lottery as either "No Win," "Promotion Chance," or "Pseudo BIG."

The normal stage freeze lottery table shown in FIG. 104 is provided for each of the ball output flags in ball output flag group 6 ("Other," "Reach Eye," "Reach Eye BB," and "1-piece role"). If the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Other," the normal stage freeze lottery table shown in FIG. 104(a) is referenced, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Reach Eye," the normal stage freeze lottery table shown in FIG. 104(b) is referenced, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Reach Eye BB," the normal stage freeze lottery table shown in FIG. 104(c) is referenced, and if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "1-piece role," the normal stage freeze lottery table shown in FIG. 104(d) is referenced.

In each normal stage freeze lottery table, lottery values corresponding to the results of the normal stage freeze lottery ("No Win," "Promotion Chance," and "Pseudo BIG") are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the normal stage freeze lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random denominator: 256)."

For example, if the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Reach Eye" and the setting value is set to 1, the result of the freeze lottery during the normal stage will be "No Win" with a probability of 254/256, and "Promotion Chance" with a probability of 2/256. Also, if the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Reach Eye BB," regardless of the setting value, the result of the freeze lottery during the normal stage will be "No Win" with a probability of 255/256, and "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 1/256.

If a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the normal stage freeze lottery (if the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 updates the ball payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the normal stage freeze lottery was drawn. This causes a transition to the promotion chance. Also, if a "pseudo BIG" is determined as a result of the normal stage freeze lottery (if the pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 updates the ball payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the normal stage freeze lottery was drawn. This causes a transition to the pseudo BIG.

Furthermore, if a "Promotion Chance" or "Pseudo BIG" is determined as the result of the normal stage freeze lottery (if the player wins the Promotion Chance or Pseudo BIG), a freeze will occur when the unit game in which the normal stage freeze lottery was drawn ends. As explained in the first embodiment, a freeze is an effect that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time (invalidating the player's game operations for a predetermined period of time). The main CPU 101 controls the execution of the freeze in the main-side effect control process (see step S16 in Figure 23) at the end of the unit game. As a result, after the third stop operation is performed in the unit game, game operations are invalidated for a predetermined period of time. Thereafter, the game will transition to a Promotion Chance or Pseudo BIG when the start lever 7 is operated to start the next unit game.

During the freeze, effects corresponding to the freeze are displayed, such as images, sounds, and lamps, suggesting or announcing a promotion chance or a pseudo-BIG win. Furthermore, since reach symbols (symbols indicating a win, such as a pseudo-bonus) are often stopped on the main reels (reels 3L, 3C, and 3R) during the freeze, it is possible to draw attention to the reach symbols by lighting, flashing, or extinguishing the reel backlights (e.g., reel illumination LEDs located inside the reel bodies of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R so that each of the nine symbols displayed in the main display window 4 can be individually illuminated). As described below, in this embodiment, "one reach symbol" and "one BB-confirmed reach symbol" (see Figure 87) serve as reach symbols. Such reach symbols may be set to always stop when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined press order (e.g., the first symbol on the left) during the freeze, or may not stop depending on the timing of the stop operation.

Furthermore, in one unit game during the premonition state, if a "promotion chance" or "pseudo BIG" is determined as a result of the normal stage freeze lottery (if a promotion chance or pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 clears the value of the premonition game number counter (see step S4084). This ends the premonition state. Note that if a promotion chance or pseudo BIG has already been won at the time the processing of step S4081 is executed (if the promotion chance winning flag or pseudo BIG winning flag is set on), the main CPU 101 will not conduct a normal stage freeze lottery and will proceed to step S4082.

After executing the processing of step S4081, the main CPU 101 executes normal stage transition flag/winning lottery processing (step S4082). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the normal stage transition flag/winning lottery flag lottery table (see Figures 105 to 107) and performs a lottery based on the payout flag in payout flag group 5 (see Figure 92) and the random number value, thereby determining one of "No Winning Lottery," "Chance Stage A," "Chance Stage B," "Promotion Chance," and "Pseudo BIG" as the result of the normal stage transition flag/winning lottery.

The normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery tables include a normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table (see FIG. 105) referenced in non-high probability, a normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table (see FIG. 106) referenced in high probability 1 to high probability 2, and a normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table (see FIG. 107) referenced in high probability 3. In the normal ball dispensing state, the probability mode is controlled to one of non-high probability, high probability 1, high probability 2, and high probability 3 (see step S4085). In the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery, the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table corresponding to the current probability mode is referenced from the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery tables in FIGS. 105 to 107.

The normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery tables shown in Figures 105 to 107 are provided for each of the ball output flags in ball output flag group 5 ('Other', 'Parallel Watermelon', 'Diagonal Watermelon', and 'Cherry'). If the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is "other", the normal stage transition flag/winning lottery flag lottery table shown in Figure 105(a), Figure 106(a), or Figure 107(a) is referenced; if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is "parallel watermelon", the normal stage transition flag/winning lottery flag lottery table shown in Figure 105(b), Figure 106(b), or Figure 107(b) is referenced; if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is "diagonal watermelon", the normal stage transition flag/winning lottery flag lottery table shown in Figure 105(c), Figure 106(c), or Figure 107(c) is referenced; and if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is "cherry", the normal stage transition flag/winning lottery flag lottery table shown in Figure 105(d), Figure 106(d), or Figure 107(d) is referenced.

In each normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery table, lottery values corresponding to the results of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery ("No Winning Lottery," "Chance Stage A," "Chance Stage B," "Promotion Chance," and "Pseudo BIG") are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, if the current probability mode is High Probability 1 or High Probability 2 and the payout flag in Payout Flag Group 5 is "Diagonal Watermelon," then, regardless of the setting value, the results of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery will determine "Chance Stage A" with a probability of 1/256 and "Chance Stage B" with a probability of 255/256. Also, if the current probability mode is High Probability 3 and the payout flag in Payout Flag Group 5 is "Parallel Watermelon," then, regardless of the setting value, the results of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery will determine "No Win" with a probability of 128/256, "Promotion Chance" with a probability of 112/256, and "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 16/256.

In non-high probability, high probability 1, and high probability 2, the probability that "Promotion Chance" or "Pseudo BIG" will be determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery is 0, and only in high probability 3 can "Promotion Chance" or "Pseudo BIG" be determined. This makes high probability 3 the most advantageous probability mode. In high probability 1 to high probability 2, the probability that "Chance Stage A" or "Chance Stage B" will be determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery is higher than in non-high probability. This makes high probability 1 and high probability 2 more advantageous probability modes than non-high probability.

When "Chance Stage A" is determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (when Chance Stage A is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the chance stage A winning count counter. A value of 1 or greater on the chance stage A winning count counter indicates that Chance Stage A has been won. As will be described in detail below, when Chance Stage A is won, the player transitions to Chance Stage A via a premonition state (see transition condition (E) in Figures 89 and 90). The value of the chance stage A winning count counter indicates the number of times Chance Stage A has been won. Chance Stage A winning counts can be stockpiled, making it possible to transition from the normal stage to Chance Stage A the number of times corresponding to the value of the chance stage A winning count counter. When transitioning from the normal stage to Chance Stage A, the value of the chance stage A winning count counter is decremented by 1.

In addition, if "Chance Stage B" is determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (if Chance Stage B is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the chance stage B winning count counter. A value of 1 or greater on the chance stage B winning count counter indicates that Chance Stage B has been won. As will be described in detail below, if Chance Stage B is won, the player transitions to Chance Stage B via a premonition state (see transition condition (G) in Figures 89 and 90). The value of the chance stage B winning count counter indicates the number of times Chance Stage B has been won. Winning chance stage B can be stocked, making it possible to transition from the normal stage to Chance Stage B the number of times corresponding to the value of the chance stage B winning count counter. When transitioning from the normal stage to Chance Stage B, the value of the chance stage B winning count counter is decremented by 1.

Furthermore, if a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (if the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to ON. The promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won. Details will be described later, but if the promotion chance is won, the game will transition to the promotion chance via the premonition state (see transition condition (I) in Figures 89 and 90).

In addition, if "Pseudo BIG" is determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (if a Pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the Pseudo BIG winning flag to ON. The Pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that a Pseudo BIG has been won. Details will be described later, but if a Pseudo BIG is won, the game will transition to Pseudo BIG via a premonition state (see transition condition (J) in Figures 89 and 90). Note that if the promotion chance winning flag is set ON and "Pseudo BIG" is determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (if a Pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 will discard the promotion chance winning flag (set it to OFF).

After executing the processing of step S4082, the main CPU 101 executes point-related processing (step S4083). Point-related processing will be described later using FIG. 114.

After executing the processing of step S4083, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process for determining the number of premonition plays when a flag is won during the normal stage (step S4084). The lottery process for determining the number of premonition plays when a flag is won during the normal stage will be described later using FIG. 117.

After executing the processing of step S4084, the main CPU 101 executes probability mode-related processing (step S4085). Probability mode-related processing will be described later using Figure 122.

After executing step S4085, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

Details will be provided later, but in the normal ball dispensing state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B), the probability mode is controlled to one of three: non-high probability, high probability 1, high probability 2, or high probability 3. High probability 1 to 3 are basically modes based on the normal stage. High probability 1 is a high probability mode that is entered in a lottery (see step S4123 in Figure 109, and Figures 110A and 110B) when the number of unit plays played in the normal ball dispensing state reaches a predetermined value (any of "251," "351," "451," "551," "651," or "751") (when the specified number of stuck games since the start of the advantageous zone is reached). The lottery is held according to normal modes 1 to 8.

High Probability 2 is a high probability state that is entered when the value of normal points (see step S4163 in Figure 114) reaches 100 points (when points are reached) in a lottery (see step S4167 in Figure 114, Figure 116, step S4265 in Figure 122, and Figure 123(b)), or when a cherry is drawn (see step S4262 in Figure 122 and Figure 123(a)). The degree of advantage of the lottery state (probability mode) is equal between High Probability 1 and High Probability 2. High Probability 3 is a high probability state (so-called ultra high probability) that is entered when High Probability 2 is drawn during High Probability 1 or High Probability 1 is drawn during High Probability 2, and is an even more advantageous state than High Probability 1 and High Probability 2.

High probability levels 1 to 3 have this kind of relationship. In this gaming machine, the main winning routes from the so-called normal state (normal stage in Figure 88) to a state that the player perceives as a win ("Promotion Chance" and "Pseudo BIG") are when the number of unit plays reaches the ceiling number of games (see Figure 101 (b)), a winning lottery based on a winning combination such as a reach-eye combination (for example, a winning combination corresponding to "Reach Eye" or "Reach Eye BB" shown in Figure 104), and a winning lottery every time 100 normal points are reached. In the lottery based on a winning combination, it is easier to win a "Promotion Chance" or "Pseudo BIG" in Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B than in the normal stage.

For this reason, in the normal stage, the gameplay is such that you first transition from non-high probability to high probability 1 or 2, and then from high probability 1 or 2 to the chance stage (chance stage A or chance stage B) in order to aim for a win. In other words, high probability 1 and 2 function as preferential states for transitioning to the chance stage. As mentioned above, transition to high probability 1 is possible only after a certain number of games have been played, so you can expect to transition to high probability even if you do not draw (win) a so-called rare role (watermelon or cherry). Transition to high probability 2 is based on a lottery held when a point is reached or when a cherry is drawn, so transitioning can be expected depending on the winning role.

High Probability 3 is a state entered by overlapping high probability states, such as winning High Probability 2 while in High Probability 1, and winning High Probability 1 while in High Probability 2. As shown in Figure 107 (described below), there is no transition to the Chance Stage, and it functions as a state where you can expect to win a "Promotion Chance" or "Pseudo BIG." Because High Probability 3 is more advantageous than the Chance Stage, by suppressing transition to the Chance Stage, when there are games remaining in High Probability 3, High Probability 3 will not end due to a transition to a state less advantageous than High Probability 3.

In addition, instead of having a special high probability state like High Probability 3 that is transitioned to when high probabilities overlap, when multiple high probability states overlap (when the number of remaining games for High Probability 1 and the number of remaining games for High Probability 2 are both 1 or more), it is also possible to have a specification where, for example, after the number of games for High Probability 1 has been played, the number of games for High Probability 2 is played (transitioning to High Probability 2 after High Probability 1 has ended). Also, in this embodiment, High Probability 1 and 2 are considered to be states with equal degrees of advantage, but High Probability 2 may be more advantageous than High Probability 1, or vice versa.

In terms of presentation, it is advisable to use presentations that suggest the player's current state, such as non-high probability stages being primarily daytime stages, high probability stages 1 and 2 being primarily evening stages, and high probability stage 3 being primarily night stages. Furthermore, when a specific presentation (such as a transition to a night stage or red-text dialogue) occurs, presentations that definitively indicate the player's current state may be implemented, such as confirming that the player will move to high probability stage 3. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide presentations that occur in both high probability stages 1 and 2, or presentations that occur in high probability stage 1 but not in high probability stage 2, to create a game that allows players to guess the trigger for the transition to high probability.

<Normal ball output status common processing>
Figure 108 is a flowchart showing the common processing for normal ball output state performed in the main control circuit.

The normal ball output state common processing shown in Figure 108 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4043 of Figure 99 (processing at the start of gameplay for the normal stage).

In the normal ball output state common processing, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not "F_BB confirmed role A" (see Figures 85 and 86) has been determined as the internal winning role in the internal winning role determination processing (see step S64 in Figure 26) (step S4101).

If it is determined that "F_BB Confirmed Role A" has been determined as the internal winning role, the main CPU 101 executes normal long freeze lottery processing (step S4102). In this processing, the main CPU 101 references a normal long freeze lottery table (not shown) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine either a "no win" or a "win" as the result of normal long freeze lottery (1). If the result of normal long freeze lottery (1) is a "win," the main CPU 101 determines either a "no win" or a "win" as the result of normal long freeze lottery (2). As a result, the probability of winning normal long freeze lottery (1) is 1/256, and the probability of winning normal long freeze lottery (2) is 64/256.

If both the Normal Long Freeze Lottery (1) and the Normal Long Freeze Lottery (2) are won, a long freeze will occur. A long freeze is a type of freeze, and compared to the freeze described above (see step S4081 in FIG. 103), the period during which game operations are disabled is longer. If both the Normal Long Freeze Lottery (1) and the Normal Long Freeze Lottery (2) are won, the main CPU 101 controls the execution of the long freeze in the main-side presentation control process at the start of play (see step S8 in FIG. 23) for the unit game in which the Normal Long Freeze Lottery (1) and the Normal Long Freeze Lottery (2) were drawn.

Furthermore, if both the normal long freeze lottery (1) and the normal long freeze lottery (2) are won, the main CPU 101 controls the execution of the pseudo game in the main presentation control process at the start of game (see step S8 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the normal long freeze lottery (1) and the normal long freeze lottery (2) were drawn. The main CPU 101 also updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the state control process at the start of game (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the normal long freeze lottery (1) and the normal long freeze lottery (2) were drawn. This completes the unit game in which the long freeze occurred, and a pseudo game is played upon operation of the start lever 7 to start the next unit game, resulting in a transition to a pseudo BIG.

Furthermore, if both the normal long freeze lottery (1) and the normal long freeze lottery (2) are won, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG (ED) flag to ON. When the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set to ON, control is resumed to pseudo BIG when the pseudo BIG termination condition is met, and the pseudo BIG continues until the end of the advantageous zone. As explained in the first embodiment, when limit processing (see FIG. 16) is executed in the advantageous zone (i.e., when a predetermined value updated as play progresses during the advantageous zone (e.g., the value of the advantageous zone game count counter or advantageous zone payout counter) reaches a specified value (e.g., 3,000 games or 1,999 coins)), the advantageous zone transitions to a non-advantageous zone. At this time, the pseudo BIG also ends. Note that such limit processing may not be performed.

If both the normal long freeze lottery (1) and the normal long freeze lottery (2) are won, the main CPU 101 clears the value of the chance stage A win count counter, the value of the chance stage B win count counter, the promotion chance win flag, the pseudo BIG win flag, and the value of the premonition game count counter (see steps S4082 and S4084 in FIG. 103).

If it is determined in step S4101 that "F_BB Confirmed Role A" has not been determined as the internal winning role, or after executing the processing of step S4102, the main CPU 101 executes a normal prescribed number of plays counter update process (step S4103). The normal prescribed number of plays counter update process will be described later using FIG. 109.

After executing the processing of step S4103, the main CPU 101 executes ceiling-related processing (step S4104). Ceiling-related processing will be described later using Figure 112.

After executing the processing of step S4104, the main CPU 101 executes promotion chance pre-processing (step S4105). Promotion chance pre-processing will be described later using Figure 124.

After executing step S4105, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Normal regulation number of games counter update process>
Fig. 109 is a flowchart showing the normal regulation number of plays counter update process performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 110A and Fig. 110B are diagrams showing the normal regulation number of plays to high probability 1 transition lottery table. Fig. 111 is a diagram showing the ceiling fake preparation lottery table.

The normal specified number of plays counter update process shown in Figure 109 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4103 of Figure 108 (normal ball payout state common process).

In the normal specified number of plays counter update process, the main CPU 101 first adds 1 to the value of the normal specified number of plays counter (step S4121). The value of the normal specified number of plays counter indicates the number of unit plays performed in the normal ball dispensing state, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the normal specified number of plays counter is only added in the normal ball dispensing state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B), and is cleared when transitioning to a ball dispensing state other than the normal ball dispensing state.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is a predetermined value (one of "251," "351," "451," "551," "651," and "751") (step S4122).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is one of "251," "351," "451," "551," "651," or "751," the main CPU 101 executes a normal specified number of plays/high probability 1 transition lottery process (step S4123). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the normal specified number of plays/high probability 1 transition lottery table (see Figures 110A and 110B) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine either "no win" or "high probability 1" as the result of the normal specified number of plays/high probability 1 transition lottery.

110A and 110B are provided for each of the normal modes ("Mode 1," "Mode 2," "Mode 3," "Mode 4," "Mode 5," "Mode 6," "Mode 7," and "Mode 8") determined in the normal transition mode lottery process (see step S4061 in FIG. 100). When the normal mode is "Mode 1," the normal specified number of plays to high probability 1 transition lottery table shown in FIG. 110A(a) is referenced; when the normal mode is "Mode 2," the normal specified number of plays to high probability 1 transition lottery table shown in FIG. 110A(b) is referenced; when the normal mode is "Mode 3," the normal specified number of plays to high probability 1 transition lottery table shown in FIG. 110A(c) is referenced; and when the normal mode is "Mode 4," the normal specified number of plays to high probability 1 transition lottery table shown in FIG. 110A(d) is referenced. When the normal mode is "mode 5", the normal specified number of plays to high probability 1 transition lottery table shown in Figure 110B (e) is referenced, when the normal mode is "mode 6", the normal specified number of plays to high probability 1 transition lottery table shown in Figure 110B (f) is referenced, when the normal mode is "mode 7", the normal specified number of plays to high probability 1 transition lottery table shown in Figure 110B (g) is referenced, and when the normal mode is "mode 8", the normal specified number of plays to high probability 1 transition lottery table shown in Figure 110B (h) is referenced.

In each normal number of plays/high probability 1 transition lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the result of the normal number of plays/high probability 1 transition lottery ("no win" and "high probability 1") is specified for each value of the normal number of plays counter ("251," "351," "451," "551," "651," and "751"). The probability of each result of the normal number of plays/high probability 1 transition lottery can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." For example, if the normal mode is "Mode 1" and the value of the normal number of plays counter is "251," the result of the normal number of plays/high probability 1 transition lottery is determined with a probability of 240/256 and with a probability of 16/256.

When "High Probability 1" is determined as the result of the regular number of plays to transition to High Probability 1 (when High Probability 1 is won), the main CPU 101 sets High Probability 1 as the probability mode described above (see step S4082 in FIG. 103) and sets the High Probability 1 play count counter to "50." The value of the High Probability 1 play count counter indicates the remaining number of unit plays that can remain in High Probability 1, and is stored in the main RAM 103. If the value of the High Probability 1 play count counter is greater than 0, it is decremented by 1 each time a unit play is played. When the value of the High Probability 1 play count counter reaches 0, the game transitions from High Probability 1 to non-High Probability. Although not shown, this decrement is performed in the process of step S15 (end-of-game state control process) in FIG. 23 (main processing).

When High Probability 2 is set as the probability mode (see step S4085 in FIG. 103), if "High Probability 1" is determined as the result of the regular specified number of plays to transition to High Probability 1 (if High Probability 1 is won), the main CPU 101 sets High Probability 3 as the probability mode, sets the High Probability 3 play count counter to "20," and clears the value of the High Probability 1 play count counter and the value of the High Probability 2 guaranteed play count counter described below. The value of the High Probability 3 play count counter indicates the remaining number of unit plays that can remain in High Probability 3, and is stored in the main RAM 103. If the value of the High Probability 3 play count counter is greater than 0, it is decremented by 1 each time a unit play is played. When the value of the High Probability 3 play count counter reaches 0, the game transitions from High Probability 3 to High Probability 2. Although not shown, this decrement is performed in the process of step S15 in FIG. 23 (main processing) (game end state control process).

After executing the processing of step S4123, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. Note that if the probability mode is set to High Probability 3 at the time the processing of step S4123 is executed, the main CPU 101 will not normally perform the lottery for transitioning to High Probability 1 for the specified number of plays and will end this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4122 that the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is not "251", "351", "451", "551", "651", or "751", the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is the ceiling number of games (the value determined in the ceiling lottery at the time of transition to normal (see step S4062 in Figure 100)) (step S4124).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is the ceiling number of games, it sets "Ceiling Preparation" (step S4125). "Ceiling Preparation" is a state controlled in the normal ball output state, and is a preparation period for transitioning to the premonition state (a state in which premonition effects are performed suggesting a transition to Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Promotion Chance, or Pseudo BIG). After executing the processing of step S4125, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

Note that if a promotion chance or pseudo BIG has been won at the time step S4125 is executed (if the promotion chance winning flag or pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON), the main CPU 101 will end this subroutine without setting "Ceiling Preparation" to "Preparing for Ceiling." Also, if "Ceiling Preparation" is set and a promotion chance or pseudo BIG has been won, the main CPU 101 will clear "Ceiling Preparation."

If it is determined in step S4124 that the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is not the ceiling number of games, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is a specific value (any of "51", "151", "201", "301", "401", "501", "601", "701", and "801") (step S4126).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is any of "51", "151", "201", "301", "401", "501", "601", "701", and "801", it executes a fake ceiling preparation lottery process (step S4127). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the fake ceiling preparation lottery table (see FIG. 111) and performs a lottery based on a random number value, thereby determining either "No Win" or "Fake Ceiling Preparation" as the result of the fake ceiling preparation lottery.

The ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in Figure 111 is provided for each of the normal modes ("Mode 1", "Mode 2", "Mode 3", "Mode 4", "Mode 5", "Mode 6", "Mode 7", and "Mode 8") determined in the normal transition mode lottery process (see step S4061 in Figure 100). When the normal mode is "Mode 1", the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in Figure 111(a) is referenced, when the normal mode is "Mode 2", the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in Figure 111(b) is referenced, when the normal mode is "Mode 3", the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in Figure 111(c) is referenced, and when the normal mode is "Mode 4", the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in Figure 111(d) is referenced. If the normal mode is "mode 5", the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in Figure 111(e) is referenced, if the normal mode is "mode 6", the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in Figure 111(f) is referenced, if the normal mode is "mode 7", the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in Figure 111(g) is referenced, and if the normal mode is "mode 8", the ceiling fake preparation lottery table shown in Figure 111(h) is referenced.

In each fake ceiling preparation lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the outcome of the fake ceiling preparation lottery ("No Win" and "Fake ceiling preparation") is specified for each value of the normal specified number of plays counter ("51," "151," "201," "301," "401," "501," "601," "701," and "801"). The probability of each outcome of the fake ceiling preparation lottery can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that outcome / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." For example, if the normal mode is "Mode 1" and the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is "51," the result of the fake ceiling preparation lottery is determined to be "No Win" with a probability of 192/256, and "Fake ceiling preparation" with a probability of 64/256.

When "Ceiling fake preparation in progress" is determined as the result of the ceiling fake preparation lottery (when a win occurs during ceiling fake preparation), the main CPU 101 sets ceiling fake preparation in progress. Ceiling fake preparation in progress is a state controlled in the normal ball output state, and is a preparation period for transitioning to the false premonition state (a state in which a premonition effect is performed even though no win has been won in Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Promotion Chance, or Pseudo BIG).

If the main CPU 101 determines in step S4126 that the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is not "51," "151," "201," "301," "401," "501," "601," "701," or "801," or after executing the processing of step S4127, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

Note that if the probability mode is set to High Probability 3 at the time step S4127 is executed, or if a promotion chance or pseudo BIG has been won (if the promotion chance winning flag or pseudo BIG winning flag is set on), the main CPU 101 will not conduct a ceiling fake preparation lottery and will terminate this subroutine. Also, if a promotion chance or pseudo BIG has been won while ceiling fake preparation is set, the main CPU 101 will clear ceiling fake preparation. Even if the value of the normal specified number of plays counter is any of "51," "151," "201," "301," "401," "501," "601," "701," and "801," if that value is the ceiling number of games, the determination result of step S4124 will be "YES," and therefore a ceiling fake preparation lottery will not be conducted.

In this embodiment, the proportion of games that trigger a false sign (number of games that occur) varies depending on the normal mode (modes 1 to 8) currently in play (the value of the normal specified number of plays counter, which is more likely to result in a winning lottery during the fake ceiling preparation period, differs for each normal mode). This means that even if the sign that occurs ends up being a false sign that does not lead to any special benefits (chance stage, promotion chance, transition to pseudo BIG), the player is not simply disappointed that it was a miss; rather, the number of games that caused the false sign to occur can serve as a clue to guess the currently in play mode. This allows the player to enjoy the fun of guessing the mode and the fun of further guessing the setting value from the mode.

<Ceiling-related processing>
Fig. 112 is a flowchart showing the ceiling-related processing carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 113A and Fig. 113B are diagrams showing a lottery table for lottery types when the ceiling is reached.

The ceiling-related processing shown in Figure 112 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4104 of Figure 108 (common processing for normal ball output state).

In ceiling-related processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether "Ceiling preparation in progress" (see step S4125 in Figure 109) is set (step S4141).

If it is determined that the ceiling preparation flag has been set, the main CPU 101 executes a ceiling preparation flag set lottery process (step S4142). In this process, the main CPU 101 references a ceiling preparation flag set lottery table (not shown) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine whether the result of the ceiling preparation flag set lottery will be "no win" or "win." This results in a 16/256 probability of winning the ceiling preparation flag set lottery.

If the value of the ceiling preparation game counter exceeds a predetermined value (17), the main CPU 101 will always determine "winning" as the result of the ceiling preparation flag set lottery. The value of the ceiling preparation game counter indicates the number of unit games played since the ceiling preparation was set, and is stored in the main RAM 103. Also, if a promotion chance or pseudo BIG has been won at the time the processing of step S4142 is executed (if the promotion chance winning lottery flag or pseudo BIG winning lottery flag is set on), the main CPU 101 will not conduct the ceiling preparation flag set lottery and will proceed to step S4143.

After executing the processing of step S4142, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ceiling preparation flag set lottery has been won (step S4143). If it determines that the ceiling preparation flag set lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 executes ceiling-reaching lottery type lottery processing (step S4144). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the ceiling-reaching lottery type lottery table (see Figures 113A and 113B) and performs a lottery based on a random number value, thereby determining the result of the ceiling-reaching lottery type lottery as either "No Winning Lottery," "Promotion Chance," or "Pseudo BIG."

The ceiling-reaching lottery type lottery tables shown in Figures 113A and 113B are provided for each of the normal modes ("Mode 1," "Mode 2," "Mode 3," "Mode 4," "Mode 5," "Mode 6," "Mode 7," and "Mode 8") determined in the normal transition mode lottery process (see step S4061 in Figure 100). When the normal mode is "Mode 1," the ceiling-reaching lottery type lottery table shown in Figure 113A(a) is referenced; when the normal mode is "Mode 2," the ceiling-reaching lottery type lottery table shown in Figure 113A(b) is referenced; when the normal mode is "Mode 3," the ceiling-reaching lottery type lottery table shown in Figure 113A(c) is referenced; and when the normal mode is "Mode 4," the ceiling-reaching lottery type lottery table shown in Figure 113A(d) is referenced. If the normal mode is "mode 5", the lottery table for winning lottery types when the ceiling is reached shown in Figure 113B(e) is referenced, if the normal mode is "mode 6", the lottery table for winning lottery types when the ceiling is reached shown in Figure 113B(f) is referenced, if the normal mode is "mode 7", the lottery table for winning lottery types when the ceiling is reached shown in Figure 113B(g) is referenced, and if the normal mode is "mode 8", the lottery table for winning lottery types when the ceiling is reached shown in Figure 113B(h) is referenced.

In each ceiling-reaching lottery table, lottery values corresponding to the results of the ceiling-reaching lottery ("No Winning Lottery," "Promotion Chance," and "Simulated Big Win") are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each outcome of the ceiling-reaching lottery can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that outcome / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." For example, if the normal mode is "Mode 1" and the setting value is Setting 1, the result of the ceiling-reaching lottery is "Promotion Chance" with a probability of 255/256, and "Simulated Big Win" with a probability of 1/256.

When a "promotion chance" is determined as the result of the lottery for lottery type when the ceiling is reached (when the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to ON. As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won. As will be described in detail later, when the promotion chance is won, the state transitions to the promotion chance via a premonition state (see step S4084 in FIG. 103). Furthermore, when a "promotion chance" is determined as the result of the lottery for lottery type when the ceiling is reached (when the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to ON. The promotion chance winning flag for lottery type when the ceiling is reached is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won in the lottery for lottery type when the ceiling is reached.

Also, if "Pseudo BIG" is determined as the result of the lottery for determining the winning type when the ceiling is reached (if the Pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the Pseudo BIG winning flag to ON. As described above, the Pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that the Pseudo BIG has been won. Details will be described later, but if the Pseudo BIG is won, the state transitions to Pseudo BIG via a premonition state (see step S4084 in Figure 103). Also, if "Pseudo BIG" is determined as the result of the lottery for determining the winning type when the ceiling is reached (if the Pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the Pseudo BIG winning flag when the ceiling is reached to ON. The pseudo BIG winning flag when the ceiling is reached is a flag that indicates that a pseudo BIG has been won in the lottery for winning types when the ceiling is reached.

If it is determined in step S4143 that the ceiling preparation flag set lottery has not been won, or after executing the processing of step S4144, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. Note that when the processing of step S4144 is executed, the main CPU 101 clears the ceiling preparation flag.

If it is determined in step S4141 that "Ceiling Preparation" is not set, the main CPU 101 determines whether "Ceiling Fake Preparation" (see step S4127 in Figure 109) is set (step S4145).

If it is determined that the ceiling fake preparation flag has been set, the main CPU 101 executes a ceiling fake preparation flag set lottery process (step S4146). In this process, the main CPU 101 references a ceiling fake preparation flag set lottery table (not shown) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine either a "no win" or a "win" as the result of the ceiling fake preparation flag set lottery. This results in a 20/256 probability of winning the ceiling fake preparation flag set lottery. Note that if the value of the ceiling fake preparation game number counter exceeds a predetermined value (17), the main CPU 101 always determines a "win" as the result of the ceiling fake preparation flag set lottery. The value of the ceiling fake preparation game number counter indicates the number of unit games played since the ceiling fake preparation flag was set, and is stored in the main RAM 103.

If the ceiling fake preparation flag setting lottery is won, the main CPU 101 sets the ceiling fake winning flag to ON. The ceiling fake winning flag is a flag indicating that the ceiling fake has been won. As will be explained in detail later, if the ceiling fake is won, the game will transition to a premonition state. However, unless the game wins on one of Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Promotion Chance, or Pseudo BIG, the game will not transition to these ball-out states even after the premonition state ends. In other words, this premonition state is a state in which a false premonition effect is performed (false premonition state). Furthermore, if the ceiling fake preparation flag setting lottery is won, the main CPU 101 clears the ceiling fake preparation state.

If it is determined in step S4145 that the ceiling fake preparation flag has not been set, or after executing the processing of step S4146, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. Note that if a promotion chance or pseudo BIG has been won at the time the processing of step S4146 is executed (if the promotion chance winning flag or pseudo BIG winning flag is set on), the main CPU 101 does not draw to set the ceiling fake preparation flag and ends this subroutine.

<Point-related processing>
Fig. 114 is a flowchart showing point-related processing performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 115 is a diagram showing a point acquisition lottery table. Fig. 116 is a diagram showing a point attainment lottery table.

The point-related processing shown in Figure 114 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4083 of Figure 103 (processing exclusive to normal stages).

In the point-related processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether "F_Cherry" (see Figures 85 and 86) has been determined as the internal winning role in the internal winning role determination processing (see step S64 in Figure 26) (step S4161). If it determines that "F_Cherry" has been determined as the internal winning role, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the cherry counter by 1 (step S4162). The value of the cherry counter indicates the number of times "F_Cherry" has been determined as the internal winning role, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the cherry counter is only incremented in the normal stage, and the upper limit is 4.

If it is determined in step S4161 that "F_Cherry" has not been determined as the internal winning combination, or after executing the processing of step S4162, the main CPU 101 executes a point acquisition lottery process (step S4163). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the point acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 115) and performs a lottery based on the payout flags (see FIG. 92) in payout flag group 3 and the random number value, thereby determining one of the following as the result of the point acquisition lottery: "No Win", "5", "10", "20", "30", "40", "50", or "100".

The point acquisition lottery table shown in Figure 115 is provided for each of the ball output flags in ball output flag group 3 ('Other', 'Rip Bell', 'Weak Rare Role', 'Diagonal Watermelon', and 'Reach Eye or Reach Eye BB'). If the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 3 is "Other", the point acquisition lottery table shown in FIG. 115(a) is referenced, if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 3 is "Rip Bell", the point acquisition lottery table shown in FIG. 115(b) is referenced, if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 3 is "Weak rare combination", the point acquisition lottery table shown in FIG. 115(c) is referenced, if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 3 is "Diagonal watermelon", the point acquisition lottery table shown in FIG. 115(d) is referenced, and if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 3 is "Reach mark" or "Reach mark BB", the point acquisition lottery table shown in FIG. 115(e) is referenced.

In each point acquisition lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the point acquisition lottery outcome ("No Win," "5," "10," "20," "30," "40," "50," and "100") is specified for each Cherry Counter value ("0," "1," "2," "3," and "4"). The probability of each point acquisition lottery outcome being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that outcome / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." For example, if the payout flag in payout flag group 3 is "Rip Bell" and the Cherry Counter value is "4," the point acquisition lottery outcome will be "30" with a probability of 192/256, "50" with a probability of 32/256, and "100" with a probability of 32/256.

If the result of the point acquisition lottery is a value greater than "0" (if the point acquisition lottery is won), the main CPU 101 adds that value to the normal point value. The normal point value is used in the point achievement lottery (see step S4165) and is stored in the main RAM 103. The sub-effect display unit 22 (see Figure 1) displays an image (e.g., a meter) corresponding to the normal point value, allowing the player to visually see how many normal points have accumulated. When the meter is full, the point achievement lottery will be held.

When the value of normal points is added (when points are acquired), an effect indicating that points have been acquired may be displayed. In this embodiment, normal points are added according to the internal winning combination (replay or common bell) corresponding to the "Rep Bell" shown in FIG. 115(b). Therefore, for example, when a replay or common bell is won after all reels have stopped, a post-replay or common bell winning effect (in which light flows from the screen or reel backlight toward an image (meter, etc.) corresponding to the normal point value) may be displayed, making it easier for players to understand the gameplay characteristics of the meter increasing when a replay or common bell is won. Furthermore, an effect suggesting point acquisition or a point acquisition confirmation effect may be generated after the start lever is operated but before all reels have stopped. This configuration increases the excitement, especially when the player is close to reaching 100 points.

Furthermore, if the normal point value after the addition is 100 or more, the main CPU 101 sets the point arrival flag on. The point arrival flag is a flag indicating that the normal point value has reached 100. If the point arrival flag is set on in one unit game, when point-related processing in the next unit game of that unit game begins, the main CPU 101 sets the point arrival flag off and sets the point arrival lottery flag on. The point arrival lottery flag is a flag indicating that a point arrival lottery will be held.

After executing the processing of step S4163, the main CPU 101 determines whether the normal point value reached 100 in the previous unit game (step S4164). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the normal point value reached 100 in the previous unit game by referencing the point-at-a-point lottery flag.

If it is determined that the normal point value reached 100 in the previous unit game, the main CPU 101 increments the value of the point attainment counter by 1 (step S4165). As described above, the value of the point attainment counter indicates the number of times the normal point value has reached 100, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the point attainment counter is incremented only in the normal stage, and is cleared when transitioning to a ball attainment state other than the normal ball-out state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B).

Then, the main CPU 101 executes point mode lottery processing (step S4166). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the point mode lottery table (see FIG. 102) and conducts a lottery based on a random number value, thereby determining one of "point mode 1," "point mode 2," or "point mode 3" as the result of the point mode lottery (point mode). This processing is similar to the processing of step S4063 in FIG. 100, so a description thereof will be omitted here.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process when a point is reached (step S4167). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table when a point is reached (see FIG. 116) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the lottery when a point is reached: "High Probability 2," "Chance Stage A," "Chance Stage B," "Promotion Chance," or "Pseudo BIG."

The point reaching lottery table shown in Figure 116 is provided for each of the following: ``Point reaching count counter '0''', ``Point reaching count counter '1, 3, 5, 7''', ``Point reaching count counter '2, 4, 6, 8''', and ``Point reaching count counter '9 or more' or ``Point mode 3'''. If the value of the point reach count counter is "0", the point reach lottery table shown in FIG. 116(a) is referenced; if the value of the point reach count counter is any of "1", "3", "5", or "7" (odd numbers), the point reach lottery table shown in FIG. 116(b) is referenced; if the value of the point reach count counter is any of "2", "4", "6", or "8" (even numbers), the point reach lottery table shown in FIG. 116(c) is referenced; and if the value of the point reach count counter is "9" or greater or if the point mode (see step S4166) is "point mode 3", the point reach lottery table shown in FIG. 116(d) is referenced.

In each point-achievement lottery table, lottery values corresponding to the results of the point-achievement lottery (High Probability 2, Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Promotion Chance, and Pseudo BIG) are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the point-achievement lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, if the value of the point arrival counter is any of "1," "3," "5," or "7" (an odd number) and the setting value is set to 6, the result of the lottery when the point is reached will be "High Probability 2" with a probability of 170/256, "Chance Stage A" with a probability of 76/256, "Chance Stage B" with a probability of 2/256, and "Promotion Chance" with a probability of 8/256. Furthermore, if the value of the point arrival counter is "9" or greater, or if the point mode is "Point Mode 3," then "Pseudo BIG" will be determined with a probability of 256/256 regardless of the setting value.

If "High Probability 2" is determined as the result of the lottery when the point is reached, the main CPU 101 sets the "High Probability 2" winning flag when the point is reached to ON. The "High Probability 2" winning flag when the point is reached is a flag indicating that "High Probability 2" has been determined as the result of the lottery when the point is reached. Details will be described later, but when the "High Probability 2" winning flag when the point is reached is set to ON, there is a possibility that the probability mode will shift from "Not High Probability" or "High Probability 1" to "High Probability 2" or "High Probability 3" (see step S4085 in FIG. 103).

Also, if "Chance Stage A" is determined as the result of the lottery when the point is reached (if Chance Stage A is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the chance stage A win count counter. As described above, a value of 1 or more on the chance stage A win count counter indicates that chance stage A has been won. As will be described in detail later, if chance stage A is won, the player transitions to chance stage A via a premonition state (see step S4084 in FIG. 103). Also, if "Chance Stage A" is determined as the result of the lottery when the point is reached (if Chance Stage A is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the chance stage A win count counter when the point is reached. A value of 1 or more on the chance stage A win count counter when the point is reached indicates that chance stage A has been won by the lottery when the point is reached.

Also, if "Chance Stage B" is determined as the result of the lottery when the point is reached (if Chance Stage B is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the chance stage B win count counter. As described above, a value of 1 or more on the chance stage B win count counter indicates that chance stage B has been won. As will be described in detail later, if chance stage B is won, the player transitions to chance stage B via a premonition state (see step S4084 in FIG. 103). Also, if "Chance Stage B" is determined as the result of the lottery when the point is reached (if Chance Stage B is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the chance stage B win count counter when the point is reached. A value of 1 or more on the chance stage B win count counter indicates that chance stage B has been won by the lottery when the point is reached.

Furthermore, if a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the point-reaching lottery (the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag on. As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won. As will be described in detail later, if the promotion chance is won, the state transitions to the promotion chance via a premonition state (see step S4084 in Figure 103). Further, if a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the point-reaching lottery (the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the point-reaching promotion chance winning flag on. The point-reaching promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won in the point-reaching lottery.

Also, if a "pseudo BIG" is determined as the result of the lottery when the point is reached (if the pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG winning flag to ON. As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo BIG has been won. As will be described in detail later, if a pseudo BIG is won, the state transitions to the pseudo BIG via a premonition state (see step S4084 in FIG. 103). Also, if a "pseudo BIG" is determined as the result of the lottery when the point is reached (if the pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG winning flag when the point is reached to ON. The pseudo BIG winning flag when the point is reached is a flag indicating that a pseudo BIG has been won in the lottery when the point is reached.

As a result of the above, if the value of the point reach counter is "9" or greater, or if point mode 3 is set as the point mode and a lottery is held when the point reach is reached, it is confirmed that a transition to pseudo BIG will occur. The image (e.g., meter, etc.) corresponding to the normal point value described above is colored according to the current point mode. As a result, for example, if point mode 3 is set as the point mode, the color of the meter will be a predetermined color (e.g., gold). Note that when processing step S4167 is executed, the main CPU 101 subtracts 100 from the normal point value.

If it is determined in step S4164 that the normal point value in the previous unit game has not reached 100, or after executing the processing of step S4167, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

Note that even if step S4164 determines that the normal point value reached 100 in the previous unit game, if a player has won Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Promotion Chance, or Pseudo BIG (if the value of the Chance Stage A Winning Count Counter or the Chance Stage B Winning Count Counter is 1 or greater, or if the Promotion Chance Winning Flag or Pseudo BIG Winning Flag is set to ON), if High Probability 3 is set as the probability mode, or if the player is in a premonition state, the main CPU 101 will end this subroutine without executing the processing of steps S4165 to S4167. However, even in these cases, if Point Mode 3 is set as the point mode, the main CPU 101 may execute the processing of steps S4165 to S4167.

Here, the premonition state includes a false premonition state, and even when in a false premonition state, the processing of steps S4165 to S4167 (lottery upon point arrival) is not executed. As described above, when a lottery upon point arrival is conducted, 100 is subtracted from the normal point value. However, by looking at the meter displayed on the sub-effect display unit 22, the player can recognize that a lottery upon point arrival has been conducted. If a lottery upon point arrival were not conducted during the premonition state, but a lottery upon point arrival was conducted during a false premonition state, the player could potentially discern from the meter that the premonition effect currently being performed is a false premonition effect. In this regard, in this embodiment, the false premonition state is managed by the main control circuit 100 in the same way as the real premonition state (see step S4146 in Figure 112), so it is possible to configure the system so that a lottery is not held when a point is reached during the false premonition state. This makes it difficult to distinguish between real premonition effects and false premonition effects, and ensures the player's anticipation for the premonition effects.

When the normal point value reaches a specified value (100 points), an effect indicating that 100 points have been reached may be displayed. Here, the effect may simply indicate that a lottery based on points (lottery when points are reached) is available, but it may also be possible to use the current point mode, set value, or value of the point-reach counter to display an effect that suggests the likelihood of winning a special bonus or the type of bonus that is likely to be won. For example, the default effect may be a flashing meter pattern when 100 points are reached, and if a lightning strikes the meter, it may indicate a high likelihood of winning a bonus (for example, a promotion chance or pseudo-BIG). Alternatively, an effect that is unrelated to the image of the meter or the like that corresponds to the normal point value may be displayed. For example, the type of mini-character that appears on the screen may suggest the likelihood of winning.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the point-reaching lottery process is executed in the unit game following the one in which 100 points are reached, it is possible to configure the unit game following the one in which the above-mentioned replay or common bell post-winning effect occurred to generate effects suggesting the likelihood of winning the bonus or the type of bonus that is likely to be won, during the unit game following the one in which the above-mentioned replay or common bell post-winning effect occurred. For example, the effects may be generated in accordance with the results of the point-reaching lottery after the lottery is performed and before the results of the lottery are announced (for example, after the start lever is operated in the unit game in which the point-reaching lottery was performed and before all reels have stopped). In this case, the results of the point-reaching lottery may be announced when all reels have stopped in the unit game in which the lottery was performed.

Furthermore, the following configurations can be adopted for point-related processing during the premonition state. For example, during the premonition state, the meter may be hidden regardless of whether it is a false premonition or a real premonition, allowing the player to concentrate on the premonition effects (Specification Example 1). Furthermore, even if the normal point value reaches 100 points during a false premonition and a lottery is held when the point is reached, the result may not be announced immediately, but after the premonition ends, an effect may be presented indicating that the point has been reached or that a lottery has been held when the point is reached, or the lottery results may be announced (Specification Example 2). Furthermore, Specification Example 1 and Specification Example 2 may be combined.

Here, if a point-attainment lottery is conducted in a non-premonition state, the result of the point-attainment lottery can be configured to be announced when all reels in the unit game in which the point-attainment lottery was conducted have stopped. Specification example 2, when a point-attainment lottery is conducted in a premonition state, generally announces the result after the premonition ends. However, if the lottery result is a promotion chance or pseudo-BIG win, it is desirable to announce the result during the premonition. In this case, it is advisable to present a winning notification effect corresponding to the presentation state during the false premonition, so that it does not feel unnatural. Note that, as mentioned above, when a false premonition occurs, it is possible to infer the setting value. However, when announcing a promotion chance or pseudo-BIG win through the point-attainment lottery during a false premonition, it is more difficult to guess the setting if it is unclear whether the premonition was false or not.

Also, if the normal point value reaches 100 points during a false premonition, the execution of the point-reaching lottery may be postponed until the end of the false premonition, or until 1 to 3 games after the end of the false premonition (Specification Example 3). In this case, the effects indicating the point has been reached, the effects indicating that the point-reaching lottery has been held, and the notification of the lottery results are also postponed. By doing this, in a situation where a transition to a promotion chance or pseudo-BIG is made possible by winning the lottery, it becomes easy for the player to understand whether the transition to the premonition was triggered by the winning lottery, or whether the transition to the promotion chance or pseudo-BIG was made as a result of the lottery held during the premonition.

<Lottery processing for the number of premonition games when a flag is drawn during the normal stage>
FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the lottery processing for determining the number of premonition games when a flag is drawn during the normal stage, which is performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the lottery processing for determining the number of premonition games when a pseudo BIG or promotion chance is drawn during the normal stage, which is performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the lottery processing for determining the number of premonition games when a chance stage is drawn during the normal stage, which is performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 120A(a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition games when a pseudo BIG or promotion chance is drawn during the normal stage (when a point is reached). FIG. 120A(b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition games when a pseudo BIG or promotion chance is drawn during the normal stage (when the ceiling is reached). FIG. 120A(c) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition games when a pseudo BIG or promotion chance is drawn during the normal stage (basic). Fig. 120B(d) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached). Fig. 120B(e) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (basic). Fig. 120B(f) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a ceiling fake is won during the normal stage.

The premonition play number lottery process when a flag is drawn during the normal stage shown in Figure 117 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4084 of Figure 103 (processing exclusive to the normal stage).

In the premonition play number lottery process when a flag is drawn during the normal stage, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the premonition play number counter is 0 (step S4181). The value of the premonition play number counter indicates the remaining number of unit plays controlled in the premonition state, and is stored in the main RAM 103. In the premonition state during the normal stage, a premonition effect is performed suggesting a transition to one of chance stage A, chance stage B, promotion chance, or pseudo BIG. A value of the premonition play number counter that is not 0 (1 or greater) indicates that the premonition state is in progress.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the premonition play count counter is not 0, it terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the premonition play count counter is 0, it determines whether the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON (step S4182). As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag that indicates that a pseudo BIG has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 103, step S4144 in FIG. 112, and step S4167 in FIG. 114).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON (step S4183). As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag that indicates that the promotion chance has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 103, step S4144 in FIG. 112, and step S4167 in FIG. 114).

If it is determined in step S4182 that the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, or if it is determined in step S4183 that the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process for determining the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG or promotion chance is won during the normal stage (step S4184). Here, the lottery process for determining the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG or promotion chance is won during the normal stage will be explained using FIG. 118.

In the premonition play count lottery process for winning a pseudo BIG or promotion chance during the normal stage, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the point-achieved pseudo BIG lottery flag or the point-achieved promotion chance lottery flag is set to ON (step S4201). As described above, the point-achieved pseudo BIG lottery flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo BIG has been won in the point-achieved lottery, and the point-achieved promotion chance lottery flag is a flag indicating that a promotion chance has been won in the point-achieved lottery (see step S4167 in FIG. 114).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag when a point is reached or the promotion chance winning flag when a point is reached is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached) (step S4202). In this process, the main CPU 101 references the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached) (see FIG. 120A(a)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result (candidate number of premonition plays) of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached) from among "0," "1-4," "5-8," "9-12," "13-16," "17-20," "21-24," "25-28," and "29-32."

The premonition play number lottery table for winning the pseudo BIG/promotion chance during the normal stage (when a point is reached) shown in Figure 120A(a) specifies lottery values corresponding to the results of the premonition play number lottery for winning the pseudo BIG/promotion chance during the normal stage (when a point is reached) ("0," "1-4," "5-8," "9-12," "13-16," "17-20," "21-24," "25-28," and "29-32"). The probability of each result being determined in the premonition play number lottery for winning the pseudo BIG/promotion chance during the normal stage (when a point is reached) can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

As a result, when a pseudo-BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached), the result of the premonition play number lottery (premonition play number candidate) is determined to be "0" with a probability of 64/256, "1-4" with a probability of 32/256, "5-8" with a probability of 128/256, "9-12" with a probability of 16/256, and "13-16" with a probability of 16/256. The determined premonition play number candidate may include multiple numerical values. In this case, the main CPU 101 further determines one of the multiple numerical values by performing a lottery based on a random number value. The main CPU 101 determines the single numerical value determined in this manner as the premonition play number. Note that when point mode 3 is set as the point mode, "0" may be determined as the premonition play number.

Then, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the number of premonition games determined in step S4202 and sets the number of premonition games counter (step S4203), and ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4201 that neither the point-reaching pseudo-BIG lottery flag nor the point-reaching promotion chance lottery flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the ceiling-reaching pseudo-BIG lottery flag or the ceiling-reaching promotion chance lottery flag is set to ON (step S4204). As described above, the ceiling-reaching pseudo-BIG lottery flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo-BIG lottery has been won in the ceiling-reaching lottery type lottery, and the ceiling-reaching promotion chance lottery flag is a flag indicating that a promotion chance has been won in the ceiling-reaching lottery type lottery (see step S4144 in FIG. 112).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG win flag when the ceiling is reached or the promotion chance win flag when the ceiling is reached is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when the ceiling is reached) (step S4205). In this process, the main CPU 101 references the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when the ceiling is reached) (see FIG. 120A(b)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when the ceiling is reached) (premonition play number candidate) as one of "0," "1-4," "5-8," "9-12," "13-16," "17-20," "21-24," "25-28," and "29-32."

The basic configuration of the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when the ceiling is reached) shown in Figure 120A (b) is the same as the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when the point is reached) shown in Figure 120A (a). As a result, the main CPU 101 determines the number of premonition plays to be one.

Then, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the number of premonition games determined in step S4205 and sets the number of premonition games counter (step S4206), and ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4204 that neither the pseudo BIG lottery flag when the ceiling is reached nor the promotion chance lottery flag when the ceiling is reached is set to on, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery to determine the number of premonition plays when the pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (basic) (step S4207). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the premonition play number lottery table for winning the pseudo BIG/promotion chance during the normal stage (basic) (see FIG. 120A (c)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the premonition play number lottery for winning the pseudo BIG/promotion chance during the normal stage (basic) (candidate premonition play number) from among "0", "1-4", "5-8", "9-12", "13-16", "17-20", "21-24", "25-28", and "29-32".

The basic configuration of the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (basic) shown in Figure 120A (c) is the same as the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached) shown in Figure 120A (a). As a result, the main CPU 101 determines the number of premonition plays to be one.

Then, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the number of premonition games determined in step S4207 and sets the number of premonition games counter (step S4208), and ends this subroutine.

The above has described, using Figure 118, the process for determining the number of premonition plays when a pseudo-BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage, which is performed in step S4184 of Figure 117. Returning to Figure 117 for explanation, after executing the process of step S4184, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4183 that the promotion chance lottery flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance stage B win count counter is 1 or greater (step S4185). As described above, a value of the chance stage B win count counter being 1 or greater indicates that the chance stage B has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 103 and step S4167 in FIG. 114).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance stage B winning count counter is less than 1 (0), it determines whether the value of the chance stage A winning count counter is 1 or greater (step S4186). As described above, a value of the chance stage A winning count counter of 1 or greater indicates that the player has won chance stage A (see step S4082 in FIG. 103 and step S4167 in FIG. 114).

If it is determined in step S4185 that the value of the chance stage B winning count counter is 1 or greater, or if it is determined in step S4186 that the value of the chance stage A winning count counter is 1 or greater, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process for determining the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (step S4187). Here, the lottery process for determining the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage will be explained using Figure 119.

In the premonition play count lottery process for winning a chance stage during the normal stage, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the chance stage A win count counter when the point is reached or the value of the chance stage B win count counter when the point is reached is 1 or greater (step S4221). As described above, a value of 1 or greater on the chance stage A win count counter when the point is reached indicates that chance stage A has been won by the lottery when the point is reached, and a value of 1 or greater on the chance stage B win count counter when the point is reached indicates that chance stage B has been won by the lottery when the point is reached (see step S4167 in FIG. 114).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance stage A win count counter when a point is reached or the value of the chance stage B win count counter when a point is reached is 1 or greater, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached) (step S4222). In this process, the main CPU 101 references the premonition play count lottery table for when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached) (see FIG. 120B(d)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the premonition play count lottery (premonition play number candidate) when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached) from among "0," "1-4," "5-8," "9-12," "13-16," "17-20," "21-24," "25-28," and "29-32."

The basic configuration of the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached) shown in Figure 120B (d) is the same as the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached) shown in Figure 120A (a). As a result, the main CPU 101 determines the number of premonition plays to be one.

Then, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the number of premonition games determined in step S4222 and sets the number of premonition games counter (step S4223), and ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4221 that the value of the chance stage A win count counter when the point is reached and the value of the chance stage B win count counter when the point is reached are both less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (basic) (step S4224). In this process, the main CPU 101 references the premonition play count lottery table for when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (basic) (see FIG. 120B(e)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (basic) (premonition play number candidate) as one of "0," "1-4," "5-8," "9-12," "13-16," "17-20," "21-24," "25-28," and "29-32."

The basic configuration of the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (basic) shown in Figure 120B(e) is the same as the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (when a point is reached) shown in Figure 120A(a). As a result, the main CPU 101 determines the number of premonition plays to be one.

Then, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the number of premonition games determined in step S4224 and sets the number of premonition games counter (step S4225), and ends this subroutine.

The above has described, using Figure 119, the process of determining the number of premonition games when a chance stage lottery is won during the normal stage, which is performed in step S4187 of Figure 117. Returning to the explanation of Figure 117, after executing the process of step S4187, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. Note that if a winning lottery for chance stage A and a winning lottery for chance stage B are stocked, the process of step S4187 will be executed in the first unit game (the first game of the normal stage) after transitioning from chance stage A or chance stage B to the normal stage.

If it is determined in step S4186 that the value of the chance stage A winning count counter is less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 determines whether the ceiling fake winning flag is set to ON (step S4188). As described above, the ceiling fake winning flag is a flag that indicates that a ceiling fake winning has occurred (see step S4146 in FIG. 112).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the ceiling fake winning flag is not set to ON, it terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, if it determines that the ceiling fake winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for the number of premonition plays when a ceiling fake winning lottery is held during the normal stage (step S4189). In this process, the main CPU 101 references the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when a ceiling fake winning lottery is held during the normal stage (see FIG. 120B(f)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when a ceiling fake winning lottery is held during the normal stage (premonition play number candidate): "0," "1-4," "5-8," "9-12," "13-16," "17-20," "21-24," "25-28," or "29-32."

The basic configuration of the lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a ceiling fake win occurs during the normal stage shown in Figure 120B(f) is the same as the lottery table for determining the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG/promotion chance win occurs during the normal stage (when a point is reached) shown in Figure 120A(a). As a result, the main CPU 101 determines the number of premonition plays to be one.

Then, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the number of premonition games determined in step S4189 and sets the number of premonition games counter (step S4190), and ends this subroutine.

As described above, when the initial value is set in the premonition play count counter in step S4203, step S4206, or step S4208 of FIG. 118, step S4223 or step S4225 of FIG. 119, or step S4190 of FIG. 117, the main CPU 101 generates premonition effect start command data and stores the generated premonition effect start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The premonition effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 of FIG. 32). This enables the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that it is time to start the premonition effect, and performs processing to start displaying images, outputting sounds, outputting lights, etc. for the premonition effect. As a result, the premonition effect is performed (the game is controlled to be in the premonition state) for the number of unit games corresponding to the value set in the premonition play count counter.

<Normal stage premonition game number counter management process>
Figure 121 is a flowchart showing the premonition game number counter management process for the normal stage performed in the main control circuit.

The normal stage premonition play number counter management process shown in Figure 121 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S15 (game end state control process) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is the normal stage (see Figure 88). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area (see Figure 20) in the main RAM 103.

In the normal stage premonition play number counter management process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the premonition play number counter (see steps S4203, S4206, and S4208 in FIG. 118, steps S4223 and S4225 in FIG. 119, and step S4190 in FIG. 117) is greater than 0 (step S4241). If it determines that the value of the premonition play number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the premonition play number counter is greater than 0, it subtracts 1 from the value of the premonition play number counter (step S4242). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the premonition play number counter is 0 (step S4243). If it determines that the value of the premonition play number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the premonition play count counter is 0, the main CPU 101 ends the premonition effect (step S4244). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates premonition effect end command data and stores the generated premonition effect end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The premonition effect end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in Figure 32). This enables the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that it is time to end the premonition effect, and performs processing to end the image display, sound output, light output, etc. that are being performed for the premonition effect.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON (step S4245). As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo BIG has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 103, step S4144 in FIG. 112, and step S4167 in FIG. 114).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG transition flag to ON (step S4246). Furthermore, although not shown, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG winning flag to OFF, and if the point-reaching pseudo BIG winning flag or the ceiling-reaching pseudo BIG winning flag are set to ON, the main CPU 101 also sets these flags to OFF. The main CPU 101 then terminates this subroutine.

The pseudo BIG transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the pseudo BIG. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see Figure 20) during the game start status control process (see step S6 in Figure 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the pseudo BIG transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the pseudo BIG.

If it is determined in step S4245 that the pseudo BIG winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON (step S4247). As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 103, step S4144 in FIG. 112, and step S4167 in FIG. 114).

If it is determined that the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance transition flag to ON (step S4248). Furthermore, although not shown, the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to OFF, and if the point-reaching promotion chance winning flag or the ceiling-reaching promotion chance winning flag are set to ON, the main CPU 101 also sets these flags to OFF. The main CPU 101 then terminates this subroutine.

The promotion chance transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the promotion chance. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see Figure 20) during the game start status control process (see step S6 in Figure 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the promotion chance transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the promotion chance.

If it is determined in step S4247 that the promotion chance winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance stage B winning count counter is 1 or greater (step S4249). As described above, a value of the chance stage B winning count counter being 1 or greater indicates that the chance stage B has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 103 and step S4167 in FIG. 114).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance stage B winning count counter is 1 or greater, it sets the chance stage B transition flag to ON (step S4250). Furthermore, although not shown, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance stage B winning count counter. Furthermore, if the premonition state that is ending this time was initiated by a chance stage winning premonition play count lottery being conducted during the normal stage (when a point is reached) (see step S4222 in FIG. 119), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance stage B winning count counter when a point is reached. The main CPU 101 then terminates this subroutine.

The Chance Stage B transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start Chance Stage B. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see Figure 20) during the game start status control process (see step S6 in Figure 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the Chance Stage B transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to Chance Stage B.

If it is determined in step S4249 that the value of the chance stage B winning count counter is less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance stage A winning count counter is 1 or greater (step S4251). As described above, a value of the chance stage A winning count counter of 1 or greater indicates that chance stage A has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 103 and step S4167 in FIG. 114). If it is determined that the value of the chance stage A winning count counter is less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance stage A winning count counter is 1 or greater, it sets the chance stage A transition flag to ON (step S4252). Furthermore, although not shown, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance stage A winning count counter. Furthermore, if the premonition state that is ending this time was initiated by the execution of a premonition play count lottery when the chance stage is won during the normal stage (when the point is reached) (see step S4222 in FIG. 119), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance stage A winning count counter when the point is reached. The main CPU 101 then terminates this subroutine.

The Chance Stage A transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start Chance Stage A. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see Figure 20) during the game start status control process (see step S6 in Figure 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the Chance Stage A transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to Chance Stage A.

As mentioned above, if you win any of Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Promotion Chance, and Pseudo BIG, you will transition through the premonition state and then to Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Promotion Chance, or Pseudo BIG. On the other hand, even if you win the Ceiling Fake, the ball output state will not change. Also, if you win multiple ball output states among Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, Promotion Chance, and Pseudo BIG, the highest priority will be to transition to Pseudo BIG, followed by Promotion Chance, then Chance Stage B, and then Chance Stage A.

In addition, if the player enters the premonition state by winning the ceiling fake and then wins the promotion chance or pseudo BIG during the premonition state, the player may be set to transition to the promotion chance or pseudo BIG when the premonition state ends. Also, if the player enters the premonition state by winning chance stage A or chance stage B and then wins the promotion chance or pseudo BIG during the premonition state, the player may be set to transition to the promotion chance or pseudo BIG, or to chance stage A or chance stage B when the premonition state ends.

<Probability mode related processing>
Fig. 122 is a flowchart showing the probability mode related processing performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 123(a) is a diagram showing the high probability 2 transition lottery table (1). Fig. 123(b) is a diagram showing the high probability 2 transition lottery table (2). Fig. 123(c) is a diagram showing the high probability 2 transition lottery table (3). Fig. 123(d) is a diagram showing the high probability 2 drop lottery table.

The probability mode-related processing shown in Figure 122 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4085 of Figure 103 (normal stage-only processing).

In the probability mode-related processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether "F_Cherry" (see Figures 85 and 86) has been determined as the internal winning combination in the internal winning combination determination processing (see step S64 in Figure 26) (step S4261).

If it is determined that "F_Cherry" has been determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 101 executes the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery Process (1) (step S4262). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery Table (1) (see FIG. 123(a)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine one of "0", "10", "20", "30", "40", or "50" as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1).

In the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery Table (1) shown in FIG. 123(a), lottery values corresponding to the results of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) ("0," "10," "20," "30," "40," and "50") are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) being determined can be expressed as "the lottery value specified for that result / the number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." For example, if setting value 1 is setting 1, the results of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) are "0" with a probability of 170/256, "10" with a probability of 58/256, and "20" with a probability of 28/256.

As described above, in the normal ball dispensing state, the probability mode is controlled to one of non-high probability, high probability 1, high probability 2, and high probability 3. When the current probability mode is non-high probability, if a value greater than "0" is determined as the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (1) (if the high probability 2 transition lottery (1) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the probability mode to high probability 2 and sets the value determined as the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (1) to the high probability 2 guaranteed number of plays counter (step S4263). The value of the high probability 2 guaranteed number of plays counter indicates the remaining number of unit plays that guarantee staying in high probability 2, and is stored in the main RAM 103. If the value of the high probability 2 guaranteed number of plays counter is greater than 0, it is decremented by 1 each time a unit play is played in high probability 2. Although not shown, this subtraction is performed in step S15 (game end state control process) of FIG. 23 (main process).

Furthermore, when the current probability mode is High Probability 2 and a value greater than "0" is determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) (the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) is won), if the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) is greater than the current value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Number of Plays Counter, the main CPU 101 sets the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) to the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Number of Plays Counter, whereas if the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) is equal to or less than the current value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Number of Plays Counter, the main CPU 101 discards the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1).

Furthermore, when the current probability mode is High Probability 1, if a value greater than "0" is determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) (if the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the probability mode to High Probability 3, sets the High Probability 3 play count counter to "20", clears the value of the High Probability 1 play count counter, and discards the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1). Note that when the current probability mode is High Probability 3, the main CPU 101 does not execute the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (1) even if the determination result of step S4261 is "YES".

If it is determined in step S4261 that "F_Cherry" has not been determined as the internal winning role, or after executing the processing of step S4263, the main CPU 101 determines whether the high probability 2 winning flag when point is reached is set to ON (step S4264). As described above, the high probability 2 winning flag when point is reached is a flag indicating that "high probability 2" has been determined as the result of the lottery when point is reached (see step S4167 of FIG. 114).

If it is determined that the high probability 2 transition lottery flag is set to ON when the point is reached, the main CPU 101 executes the high probability 2 transition lottery process (2) (step S4265). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the high probability 2 transition lottery table (2) (see FIG. 123(b)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (2) as one of "0," "10," "20," "30," "40," or "50." The basic configuration of the high probability 2 transition lottery table (2) shown in FIG. 123(b) is the same as the high probability 2 transition lottery table (1) shown in FIG. 123(a).

Similar to the processing of step S4263, when the current probability mode is not high probability, if a value greater than "0" is determined as the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (2) (the high probability 2 transition lottery (2) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the probability mode to high probability 2 and sets the value determined as the result of the high probability 2 transition lottery (2) to the high probability 2 guaranteed number of plays counter (step S4266).

Furthermore, when the current probability mode is High Probability 2 and a value greater than "0" is determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2) (the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2) is won), if the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2) is greater than the current value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Number of Plays Counter, the main CPU 101 sets the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2) to the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Number of Plays Counter, whereas if the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2) is equal to or less than the current value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Number of Plays Counter, the main CPU 101 discards the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2).

Furthermore, when the current probability mode is High Probability 1, if a value greater than "0" is determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2) (if the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the probability mode to High Probability 3, sets the High Probability 3 play count counter to "20", clears the value of the High Probability 1 play count counter, and discards the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2). Note that when the current probability mode is High Probability 3, the main CPU 101 does not execute the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (2) even if the determination result in step S4264 is "YES".

If it is determined in step S4264 that the High Probability 2 Winning Flag upon Point Reaching is not set to ON, or after executing the processing of step S4266, the main CPU 101 determines whether it is time to transition from Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B to the Normal Stage (step S4267). As described above, transition to the Normal Stage occurs in the game start state control processing (see step S6 in Figure 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the Normal Stage Transition Flag was set to ON. In the game start state control processing for a unit game that transitions to the Normal Stage, the payout state flag storage area (see Figure 20) is updated to transition to the Normal Stage, and then the game start processing for the Normal Stage shown in Figure 99 is performed. In the processing of step S4267, if the current unit game has transitioned to the normal stage (if the current unit game is the first game of the normal stage), and the ball output state from which the transition occurred is chance stage A or chance stage B, the main CPU 101 determines that it is time to transition from chance stage A or chance stage B to the normal stage.

If it is determined that it is time to transition from Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B to the Normal Stage, the main CPU 101 executes High Probability 2 Transition Lottery Processing (3) (step S4268). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery Table (3) (see FIG. 123(c)) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) as one of "0," "10," "20," "30," "40," or "50." The basic configuration of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery Table (3) shown in FIG. 123(c) is the same as the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery Table (1) shown in FIG. 123(a).

Similar to the processing of step S4263, when the current probability mode is not high probability, if a value greater than "0" is determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) (the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the probability mode to High Probability 2 and sets the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) to the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Play Count Counter (step S4269).

Furthermore, when the current probability mode is High Probability 2, if a value greater than "0" is determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) (if the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) to the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Number of Plays Counter if the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) is greater than the current value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Number of Plays Counter, whereas it discards the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) if the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) is equal to or less than the current value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Number of Plays Counter.

Furthermore, when the current probability mode is High Probability 1, if a value greater than "0" is determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) (if the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the probability mode to High Probability 3, sets the High Probability 3 play count counter to "20", clears the value of the High Probability 1 play count counter, and discards the value determined as the result of the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3). Note that when the current probability mode is High Probability 3, the main CPU 101 does not execute the High Probability 2 Transition Lottery (3) even if the determination result in step S4267 is "YES".

If it is determined in step S4267 that it is not time to transition from Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B to the Normal Stage, or after executing the processing of step S4269, the main CPU 101 determines whether the current probability mode is either High Probability 2 or High Probability 3 (step S4270). If it is determined that the current probability mode is either High Probability 2 or High Probability 3, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Play Count Counter is "0" (step S4271).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Play Count Counter is "0", it executes a High Probability 2 Rollover Lottery process (step S4272). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the High Probability 2 Rollover Lottery Table (see FIG. 123(d)) and performs a lottery based on the payout flag in payout flag group 4 (see FIG. 92) and the random number value, thereby determining whether the result of the High Probability 2 Rollover Lottery will be a "No Win" or a "Win."

In the high probability 2 drop lottery table shown in Figure 123 (d), lottery values corresponding to the results of the high probability 2 drop lottery ("non-winning" and "winning") are specified for each ball output flag in ball output flag group 4 ("Other" and "Non-drop role"). The probability of each result of the high probability 2 drop lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." As a result, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4 is "Other," there is a 192/256 probability of winning the high probability 2 drop lottery, and if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 4 is "Non-drop role," the high probability 2 drop lottery will always be a non-winning one. If the high probability 2 drop lottery is won, the main CPU 101 will transition the probability mode from high probability 2 or high probability 3 to non-high probability.

If it is determined in step S4270 that the current probability mode is neither High Probability 2 nor High Probability 3, if it is determined in step S4271 that the value of the High Probability 2 guaranteed play count counter is not "0", or after executing the processing of step S4272, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Pre-processing for promotion chances>
Fig. 124 is a flowchart showing the pre-promotion chance process carried out in the main control circuit, and Fig. 125 is a diagram showing a promotion chance transition lottery table.

The promotion chance pre-processing shown in Figure 124 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4105 of Figure 108 (common processing for normal ball output state).

In the promotion chance pre-processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the premonition play number counter (see steps S4203, S4206, and S4208 in FIG. 118, steps S4223 and S4225 in FIG. 119, and step S4190 in FIG. 117) is 1 (step S4281). If it is determined that the value of the premonition play number counter is not 1, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the premonition play count counter is 1, it determines whether the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON (step S4282). As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag that indicates that a promotion chance has been won (see step S4082 in FIG. 103, step S4144 in FIG. 112, and step S4167 in FIG. 114).

Note that if the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON and a pseudo-BIG is won, the promotion chance winning flag will be set to OFF. Therefore, the fact that the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON means that a pseudo-BIG has not been won. Therefore, the result of the determination in step S4282 being "YES" can be said to mean that a transition to a promotion chance is scheduled for the next unit game.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the promotion chance lottery flag is not set to ON, it terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, if it determines that the promotion chance lottery flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes point mode lottery processing (step S4283). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the point mode lottery table (see FIG. 102) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the point mode lottery (point mode) as one of "point mode 1," "point mode 2," or "point mode 3."

This process is similar to the process of step S4063 in Figure 100, so a detailed explanation will be omitted here. Note that when executing the process of step S4283, if the value of normal points (see Figure 114) is 100 or greater, the main CPU 101 adds the quotient obtained when dividing the value of normal points by 100 to the value of the point arrival count counter. For example, if the value of normal points is 250, then 250 ÷ 100 = 2 with a remainder of 50, so 2 is added to the value of the point arrival count counter and the remainder of 50 points is discarded.

After executing the processing of step S4283, the main CPU 101 executes a promotion chance transition lottery process (step S4284). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the promotion chance transition lottery table (see FIG. 125) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the promotion chance transition lottery: "No Win," "Pseudo BIG," or "Pseudo BIG (ED)."

In the promotion chance transition lottery table shown in Figure 125, lottery values corresponding to the results of the promotion chance transition lottery ("No Win", "Pseudo BIG", and "Pseudo BIG (ED)") are specified for each of "Point Mode 1", "Point Mode 2", and "Point Mode 3, Normal Mode 7, or Normal Mode 8". The probability of each result of the promotion chance transition lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random denominator: 256)".

As a result, when point mode 1 is set as the point mode, the result of the lottery when moving on to the promotion chance will be determined to be "no winning" with a probability of 256/256, and when point mode 2 is set as the point mode, the result of the lottery when moving on to the promotion chance will be determined to be "no winning" with a probability of 256/256. Also, when point mode 3 is set as the point mode, or when the normal mode is mode 7 or mode 8, the result of the lottery when moving on to the promotion chance will be determined to be "pseudo BIG" with a probability of 256/256.

If "Pseudo BIG" is determined as the result of the promotion chance transition lottery (if the Pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to OFF. Then, the main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the promotion chance transition lottery was drawn. This causes a transition to Pseudo BIG.

After executing step S4284, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

The above explains, using Figures 99 to 125, the various lottery processes performed in the normal stage (long freeze lottery process during normal play, lottery process for transition to high probability 1 when normal specified number of plays is reached, lottery process for ceiling fake preparation, lottery process for setting the ceiling preparation flag, lottery process for winning lottery type when ceiling is reached, lottery process for setting the ceiling fake preparation flag, lottery process when transitioning to promotion chance, lottery process for freeze during normal stage, lottery process for transition flag/winning lottery during normal stage, lottery process for point acquisition, lottery process for point mode, lottery process when point is reached, lottery process for number of premonition plays when flag is won during normal stage, lottery process for transition to high probability 2 (1) to (3), and lottery process for falling to high probability 2).

The order in which these processes are performed is not particularly limited, and may be configured to be executed in the following order: normal long freeze lottery processing, normal specified number of plays transition lottery processing, normal stage freeze lottery processing, ceiling fake preparation lottery processing, ceiling preparation flag set lottery processing, ceiling fake preparation flag set lottery processing, winning lottery type lottery processing when ceiling is reached, normal stage transition flag/winning lottery flag lottery processing, point acquisition lottery processing, point mode lottery processing, point reach lottery processing, premonition number of plays when normal stage flag is won lottery processing, high probability 2 transition lottery processing (1)-(3), high probability 2 fall lottery processing, and promotion chance transition lottery processing.

In this case, if the normal long freeze lottery is won (if both the normal long freeze lottery (1) and the normal long freeze lottery (2) are won), subsequent processing may not be executed. Also, if the normal stage freeze lottery is won (if the normal stage freeze lottery results in a "promotion chance" or "pseudo BIG"), subsequent processing may not be executed.

<Chance Stage Game Start Processing>
Fig. 126 is a flowchart showing the process at the start of games for the chance stage carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 127 is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the guaranteed number of chance stage games at the start of the chance stage. Fig. 128 is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining pseudo BIG and promotion chances during the chance stage. Fig. 129 is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining the additional number of games during the chance stage.

The game start processing for the chance stage shown in Figure 126 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the processing of step S6 (game start state control processing) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is chance stage A or chance stage B (see Figure 88) (for example, when the judgment result of step S85 of Figure 27 is "NO"). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 (see Figure 20).

In the game start processing for the chance stage, the main CPU 101 first determines whether it is the start of chance stage A or chance stage B (step S4301). As described above, transition to chance stage A occurs during the game start state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following a unit game in which the chance stage A transition flag (see step S4252 in FIG. 121) is set to on. In the game start state control processing for a unit game that transitions to chance stage A, the payout state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to transition to chance stage A, and then the game start processing for the chance stage shown in FIG. 126 is performed. Similarly, transition to chance stage B occurs during the game start state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following a unit game in which the chance stage B transition flag (see step S4250 in FIG. 121) is set to on. In the game start state control process for a unit game that transitions to chance stage B, the payout state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to transition to chance stage B, and then game start process for the chance stage shown in FIG. 126 is performed. In the process of step S4301, if the current unit game has transitioned to chance stage A or chance stage B (if the current unit game is the first game of chance stage A or chance stage B), the main CPU 101 determines that it is the start of chance stage A or chance stage B.

If it is determined that it is the start of Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B, the main CPU 101 clears High Probability 2 (step S4302). In this process, if High Probability 2 is set as the probability mode, the main CPU 101 clears the value of the High Probability 2 guaranteed play count counter and transitions the probability mode from High Probability 2 to Non-High Probability.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a chance stage start chance stage guaranteed play number lottery process (step S4303). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance stage start chance stage guaranteed play number lottery table (see FIG. 127) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine one of "20", "40", "60", "80", or "100" as the result of the chance stage start chance stage guaranteed play number lottery (chance stage guaranteed play number).

In the chance stage start chance stage guaranteed number of plays lottery table shown in Figure 127, lottery values corresponding to the results of the chance stage start chance stage guaranteed number of plays lottery ('20', '40', '60', '80', and '100') are specified for each of "Chance Stage A" and "Chance Stage B." The probability of each outcome of the chance stage start chance stage guaranteed number of plays lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

As a result, in chance stage A, the result of the lottery for the number of guaranteed chance stage plays at the start of the chance stage (guaranteed chance stage play count) is determined to be "40" with a probability of 250/256, "60" with a probability of 5/256, and "100" with a probability of 1/256. Also, in chance stage B, the result of the lottery for the number of guaranteed chance stage plays at the start of the chance stage (guaranteed chance stage play count) is determined to be "20" with a probability of 250/256, "40" with a probability of 5/256, and "100" with a probability of 1/256. In chance stage B, a smaller value is more likely to be determined as the guaranteed chance stage play count compared to chance stage A.

After executing the processing of step S4303, the main CPU 101 sets the number of guaranteed chance stage games determined in step S4303 in the chance stage guaranteed game number counter (step S4304). The value of the chance stage guaranteed game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games that guarantee staying in chance stage A or chance stage B, and is stored in the main RAM 103. As described below, the value of the chance stage guaranteed game number counter is decremented by 1 each time a unit game is played in chance stage A or chance stage B.

If it is determined in step S4301 that it is not the start of chance stage A or chance stage B, or after executing the processing of step S4304, the main CPU 101 executes the normal ball output state common processing (step S4305). This processing is similar to the processing of step S4043 in FIG. 99, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted here. Note that in chance stage A or chance stage B, even if "ceiling fake preparation in progress" is determined as a result of the ceiling fake preparation lottery (see step S4127 in FIG. 109) (if the lottery is won during ceiling fake preparation), ceiling fake preparation in progress is not set, and the lottery result is discarded.

After executing the processing of step S4305, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery process during the chance stage (step S4306). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery table during the chance stage (see FIG. 128) and performs a lottery based on the payout flag in payout flag group 6 (see FIG. 92) and the random number value, thereby determining the result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage as either "No Win," "Promotion Chance," or "Pseudo BIG."

The pseudo-BIG/promotion chance lottery table during the chance stage shown in Figure 128 is provided for each of the ball output flags in ball output flag group 6 ("Other," "Reach Eye," "Reach Eye BB," and "1-piece role"). If the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 6 is "other", the chance stage pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. 128(a) is referenced, if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 6 is "reach eye", the chance stage pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. 128(b) is referenced, if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 6 is "reach eye BB", the chance stage pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. 128(c) is referenced, and if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 6 is "1-piece role", the chance stage pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. 128(d) is referenced.

In the Pseudo BIG/Promotion Chance Lottery Table for each Chance Stage, lottery values corresponding to the results of the Pseudo BIG/Promotion Chance Lottery during the Chance Stage ("No Win," "Promotion Chance," and "Pseudo BIG") are specified for each of "Chance Stage A" and "Chance Stage B." The probability of each outcome of the Pseudo BIG/Promotion Chance Lottery during the Chance Stage can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

As a result, in Chance Stage A, as a result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Other," a "no win" is determined with a probability of 256/256; if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Reach Eye," a "promotion chance" is determined with a probability of 256/256; if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Reach Eye BB," a "pseudo BIG" is determined with a probability of 256/256; and if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "1-piece role," a "no win" is determined with a probability of 256/256.

Also, in Chance Stage B, as a result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Other," a "no win" is determined with a probability of 256/256; if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Reach Eye," a "promotion chance" is determined with a probability of 256/256; if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Reach Eye BB," a "pseudo BIG" is determined with a probability of 256/256; and if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "1-piece role," a "no win" is determined with a probability of 192/256, a "promotion chance" is determined with a probability of 58/256, and a "pseudo BIG" is determined with a probability of 6/256.

In this way, when the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Other," "Reach mark," or "Reach mark BB," the probability of determining each outcome of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage is the same in chance stage A and chance stage B. On the other hand, when the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "1-piece role," in chance stage A, "promotion chance" or "pseudo BIG" cannot be determined as the result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage, whereas in chance stage B, "promotion chance" or "pseudo BIG" can be determined as the result of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage. This makes chance stage B a more advantageous payout state than chance stage A.

Also, as mentioned above, in the non-high probability, high probability 1, and high probability 2 stages during the normal stage, the probability that a "promotion chance" or "pseudo BIG" will be determined as a result of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (see step S4082 in Figure 103) is 0 (see Figures 105 and 106). In contrast, in chance stage A or chance stage B, the probability that a "promotion chance" or "pseudo BIG" will be determined as a result of the chance stage pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery is relatively high. As a result, chance stage A or chance stage B has a more advantageous ball output state than the normal stage.

If a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the pseudo-BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage (if the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to ON. The promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won. Details will be described later, but if the promotion chance is won, the state will transition to the promotion chance via the premonition state (see transition condition (I) in Figures 89 and 90).

Furthermore, if "Pseudo BIG" is determined as the result of the Pseudo BIG/Promotion Chance Lottery during the Chance Stage (if a Pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the Pseudo BIG winning flag to ON. The Pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that a Pseudo BIG has been won. As will be described in detail later, if a Pseudo BIG is won, the state transitions to Pseudo BIG via the premonition state (see transition condition (J) in Figures 89 and 90). Note that if a "Pseudo BIG" is determined as the result of the Pseudo BIG/Promotion Chance Lottery during the Chance Stage (if a Pseudo BIG is won) while the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 discards the promotion chance winning flag (sets it to OFF).

In addition, in chance stage A or chance stage B, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Reach Eye", that is, if any of "F_Reach Eye Role A", "F_Reach Eye Role B", or "F_Reach Eye Role C" is determined as the internal winning role (see FIG. 92), the promotion chance will always be won. Also, in chance stage A or chance stage B, if the ball output flag in ball output flag group 6 is "Reach Eye BB", that is, if any of "F_BB Confirmed Role A" or "F_BB Confirmed Role B" is determined as the internal winning role (see FIG. 92), the pseudo BIG will always be won.

As described above, if any of "F_Reach Eye Role A," "F_Reach Eye Role B," and "F_Reach Eye Role C" is determined as the internal winning combination, when the first stopping operation is performed on the left reel 3L, "One Reach Eye" is displayed stopped along the winning line (see Figure 87). "One Reach Eye" is a winning combination that can only be achieved if any of "F_Reach Eye Role A," "F_Reach Eye Role B," and "F_Reach Eye Role C" is determined as the internal winning combination. Therefore, when "One Reach Eye" is displayed stopped along the winning line, it means that any of "F_Reach Eye Role A," "F_Reach Eye Role B," and "F_Reach Eye Role C" has been determined as the internal winning combination, and by visually recognizing "One Reach Eye," the player can understand that they have won the promotion chance.

Also, as mentioned above, if either "F_BB Confirmed Role A" or "F_BB Confirmed Role B" is determined as the internal winning role, when the first stopping operation is performed on the left reel 3L, "BB Confirmed Reach One Piece" will be stopped and displayed along the winning line (see Figure 87). "BB Confirmed Reach One Piece" is a winning combination that can only be achieved if either "F_BB Confirmed Role A" or "F_BB Confirmed Role B" is determined as the internal winning role. Therefore, when "BB Confirmed Reach One Piece" is stopped and displayed along the winning line, it means that either "F_BB Confirmed Role A" or "F_BB Confirmed Role B" has been determined as the internal winning role, and by visually recognizing the "BB Confirmed Reach One Piece", the player can understand that they have won the pseudo-BIG.

In this way, the "One Ball to Reach" and "One Ball to Confirm BB Reach" serve to notify the player that they have won a promotion chance or pseudo-BIG (that the transition to the AT state has been confirmed). As will be described later, in this embodiment, a penalty will be incurred if a stop operation (irregular press) is performed on the center reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation. Therefore, in ball-out states other than the AT state (pseudo-BIG and pseudo-REG), the player will basically play by performing a stop operation on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation.

In contrast, in the normal stage, if any of "F_Reach Eye Role A," "F_Reach Eye Role B," "F_Reach Eye Role C," "F_BB Confirmed Role A," and "F_BB Confirmed Role B" is determined as the internal winning role, i.e., if the payout flag in payout flag group 5 is "Other" (see Figure 92), the probability of winning a promotion chance or pseudo-BIG is extremely low (see Figures 105 to 107). In light of the above roles of "One Reach Eye" and "One BB Confirmed Reach," it is not appropriate to show "One Reach Eye" or "One BB Confirmed Reach" to the player even if they have not won either the promotion chance or pseudo-BIG.

Therefore, in the normal stage, if any of "F_Reach Eye Role A," "F_Reach Eye Role B," "F_Reach Eye Role C," "F_BB Confirmed Role A," and "F_BB Confirmed Role B" is determined as the internal winning role, and neither the promotion chance nor the pseudo-BIG has been won, a notification is issued to perform a stop operation (irregular press) on the center reel 3C or the right reel 3R as the first stop operation. This notification (irregular press navigation) is issued by displaying on the main display device 210 an image suggesting that a stop operation (irregular press) on the center reel 3C or the right reel 3R be performed as the first stop operation. By performing a stop operation in accordance with the irregular press navigation, "one normal number" is displayed stopped along the pay line, and "one reach eye" or "one BB confirmed reach eye" does not appear. In this case, no notification is given on the instruction monitor, but even if any of "F_reach eye role A", "F_reach eye role B", "F_reach eye role C", "F_BB confirmed role A" and "F_BB confirmed role B" is determined as the internal winning role, the number of medals paid out will not differ depending on the type of stopping operation (see Figure 87), so there is no particular problem.

In this way, Chance Stage A and Chance Stage B are ball output states in which a transition to the AT state is more likely to be announced through "one ball in the reach" or "one ball in the BB confirmed reach." In contrast, the normal stage is a ball output state in which the likelihood of a transition to the AT state is suggested through presentations controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, rather than through "one ball in the reach" or "one ball in the BB confirmed reach." In the normal stage, multiple presentation modes are provided according to probability mode, point mode, etc., and the background image displayed on the main display device 210 differs in each presentation mode. As a result, the likelihood of a transition is suggested depending on which presentation mode the player is in (background image).

In the normal stage, if any of "F_Reach Eye Role A," "F_Reach Eye Role B," "F_Reach Eye Role C," "F_BB Confirmed Role A," and "F_BB Confirmed Role B" is determined as the internal winning role, there is a possibility of winning a promotion chance or pseudo BIG in the normal stage freeze lottery (see step S4081 in Figure 103 and Figure 104) or the normal stage long freeze lottery (see step S4102 in Figure 108).If a promotion chance or pseudo BIG is won in the normal stage freeze lottery or normal stage long freeze lottery, when a stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation, "one reach eye" or "one BB confirmed reach eye" will be displayed stopped along the activated line. On the other hand, if the promotion chance or pseudo-BIG is not won in the normal stage freeze lottery or normal stage long freeze lottery, the above irregular button push navigation will be performed, and the stopping operation will be performed according to the irregular button push navigation, so the "one ball in reach" or "one ball in reach to confirm BB" will not appear.

After executing the processing of step S4306, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process for determining the number of premonition plays when a flag is won during the chance stage (step S4307). The lottery process for determining the number of premonition plays when a flag is won during the chance stage will be described later using Figure 130.

After executing the processing of step S4307, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process for adding the number of plays during the chance stage (step S4308). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for adding the number of plays during the chance stage (see FIG. 129) and performs a lottery based on the payout flag in payout flag group 5 (see FIG. 92) and the random number value, thereby determining one of "0", "20", "40", "60", "80", or "100" as the result of the lottery for adding the number of plays during the chance stage.

The chance stage number of plays addition lottery table shown in FIG. 129 is provided for each of the ball output flags in ball output flag group 5 ("Other," "Parallel Watermelon," "Diagonal Watermelon," and "Cherry"). If the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is "Other," the chance stage number of plays addition lottery table shown in FIG. 129(a) is referenced. If the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is "Parallel Watermelon," the chance stage number of plays addition lottery table shown in FIG. 129(b) is referenced. If the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is "Diagonal Watermelon," the chance stage number of plays addition lottery table shown in FIG. 129(c) is referenced. If the ball output flag in ball output flag group 5 is "Cherry," the chance stage number of plays addition lottery table shown in FIG. 129(d) is referenced.

In each chance stage play count addition lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the outcome of the chance stage play count addition lottery ("0", "20", "40", "60", "80", and "100") is specified for each setting value ("Setting 1", "Setting 2", "Setting 3", "Setting 4", "Setting 5", and "Setting 6"). The probability of each outcome of the chance stage play count addition lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that outcome / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

For example, if the payout flag in payout flag group 5 is "Diagonal Watermelon" and the setting value is set to 6, the result of the chance stage play count addition lottery will be "0" with a probability of 126/256, "20" with a probability of 128/256, "40" with a probability of 1/256, and "60" with a probability of 1/256. The main CPU 101 adds the value determined as the result of the chance stage play count addition lottery to the value of the chance stage guaranteed play count counter.

After executing step S4308, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Lottery processing for the number of premonition games when a flag is drawn during the chance stage>
Fig. 130 is a flowchart showing a process for lottery determining the number of premonition games when a flag is won during the chance stage, which is performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 131 is a diagram showing a lottery table for lottery determining the number of premonition games when a flag is won during the chance stage.

The process for determining the number of premonition games when a flag is drawn during the chance stage shown in Figure 130 is performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4307 of Figure 126 (processing at the start of games for the chance stage).

In the premonition play number lottery process when a chance stage flag is drawn, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the premonition play number counter is 0 (step S4321). The value of the premonition play number counter indicates the remaining number of unit plays controlled in the premonition state, and is stored in the main RAM 103. In the premonition state during chance stage A or chance stage B, a premonition effect is performed suggesting a transition to either a promotion chance or a pseudo BIG. A value of the premonition play number counter that is not 0 (1 or greater) indicates that the premonition state is in progress.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the premonition play count counter is not 0, it terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the premonition play count counter is 0, it determines whether the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON (step S4322). As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag that indicates that a pseudo BIG has been won (see step S4306 in FIG. 126 and step S4144 in FIG. 112).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether the promotion chance winning flag is set on (step S4323). As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag that indicates that a promotion chance has been won (see step S4306 in FIG. 126 and step S4144 in FIG. 112). If it is determined that the promotion chance winning flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4322 that the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, or if it is determined in step S4323 that the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for the number of premonition plays when the chance stage flag is won (step S4324). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when the chance stage flag is won (see FIG. 131) and performs a lottery based on the payout flag in payout flag group 6 (see FIG. 92) and the random number value, thereby determining one of "0", "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", or "8" as the result of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when the chance stage flag is won.

The premonition play number lottery table when a flag is drawn during the chance stage shown in Figure 131 is provided for each of the payout flags in payout flag group 6 ("Other," "Reach Eye," "Reach Eye BB," and "1-piece role"). If the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "other", the premonition play number lottery table when a chance stage flag is won shown in FIG. 131(a) is referenced, if the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "reach eye", the premonition play number lottery table when a chance stage flag is won shown in FIG. 131(b) is referenced, if the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "reach eye BB", the premonition play number lottery table when a chance stage flag is won shown in FIG. 131(c) is referenced, and if the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "1-piece role", the premonition play number lottery table when a chance stage flag is won shown in FIG. 131(d) is referenced.

In the lottery table for the number of premonition plays when a flag during a chance stage is drawn, lottery values corresponding to the results of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when a flag during a chance stage is drawn ("0," "1," "2," "3," "4," "5," "6," "7," and "8") are specified for each of "Chance Stage A" and "Chance Stage B." The probability of each result of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when a flag during a chance stage is drawn can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, in Chance Stage A, if the payout flag in Payout Flag Group 6 is "Other," the result of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when the flag during the Chance Stage is drawn will be "0" with a probability of 64/256, and "1" with a probability of 192/256. Also, in Chance Stage B, if the payout flag in Payout Flag Group 6 is "1-piece role," the result of the lottery for the number of premonition plays when the flag during the Chance Stage is drawn will be "1" with a probability of 8/256, "2" with a probability of 192/256, and "3" with a probability of 56/256.

After executing the processing of step S4325, the main CPU 101 sets the premonition play number counter to a number determined as a result of the premonition play number lottery when the chance stage flag is won, plus 1 (step S4325), and ends this subroutine.

In this way, when the initial value is set in the premonition play count counter, the main CPU 101 generates premonition effect start command data and stores the generated premonition effect start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The premonition effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in Figure 32). This enables the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that it is time to start the premonition effect, and performs processing to start displaying images, outputting sounds, outputting lights, etc. for the premonition effect. As a result, the premonition effect is performed (the game is controlled to be in the premonition state) for the number of unit games corresponding to the value set in the premonition play count counter.

<Counter management process for chance stage>
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the chance stage counter management process carried out in the main control circuit.

The chance stage counter management process shown in Figure 132 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S15 (game end state control process) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball dispensing state is chance stage A or chance stage B (see Figure 88). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball dispensing state by referring to the ball dispensing state flag storage area (see Figure 20) in the main RAM 103.

In the chance stage counter management process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the premonition play number counter (see step S4325 in FIG. 130) is greater than 0 (step S4341). If it determines that the value of the premonition play number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance stage guaranteed play number counter (step S4342). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance stage guaranteed play number counter is 0 (step S4343). If it determines that the value of the chance stage guaranteed play number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the chance stage guaranteed play count counter is 0, it sets the normal stage transition flag to ON (step S4344) and ends this subroutine. As described above, the normal stage transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the normal stage. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the normal stage transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the normal stage (see transition conditions (F) and (H) in FIGS. 89 and 90).

If it is determined in step S4341 that the value of the premonition play number counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the chance stage guaranteed play number counter is greater than 0 (step S4345). If it is determined that the value of the chance stage guaranteed play number counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance stage guaranteed play number counter (step S4346).

If it is determined in step S4345 that the value of the chance stage guaranteed play number counter is 0, or after executing the processing of step S4346, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the premonition play number counter (step S4347). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the premonition play number counter is 0 (step S4348). If it is determined that the value of the premonition play number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the premonition play count counter is 0, the main CPU 101 ends the premonition effect (step S4349). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates premonition effect end command data and stores the generated premonition effect end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. The premonition effect end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in Figure 32). This enables the sub-control circuit 200 to recognize that it is time to end the premonition effect, and performs processing to end the image display, sound output, light output, etc. that are being performed for the premonition effect.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON (step S4350). As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo BIG has been won (see step S4306 in FIG. 126 and step S4144 in FIG. 112).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG transition flag to ON (step S4351). Furthermore, although not shown, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG winning flag to OFF, and if the pseudo BIG winning flag when the ceiling is reached is set to ON, it also sets that flag to OFF. The main CPU 101 then terminates this subroutine.

As described above, the pseudo BIG transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the pseudo BIG. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see Figure 20) during the game start status control process (see step S6 in Figure 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the pseudo BIG transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the pseudo BIG.

Here, in Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B, the state transitions to the premonition state only if a pseudo-BIG or promotion chance is won. Therefore, if the determination result in step S4350 is "NO," the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON. Therefore, if it is determined in step S4350 that the pseudo-BIG winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance transition flag to ON (step S4352). Furthermore, although not shown, the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to OFF, and if the promotion chance winning flag when the ceiling is reached is set to ON, it also sets that flag to OFF. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the promotion chance transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the promotion chance. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see Figure 20) during the game start status control process (see step S6 in Figure 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the promotion chance transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the promotion chance.

As described above, if a player wins either the Promotion Chance or the Pseudo BIG in Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B, the game will transition to the Promotion Chance or the Pseudo BIG via the premonition state. Also, as described above, if a player wins Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B in the normal stage and transitions to the premonition state, and if a player wins the Promotion Chance or the Pseudo BIG during the premonition state, the game can be configured to transition to Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B when the premonition state ends. In this case, the premonition play count counter is set to an initial value during the premonition play count lottery process (see FIG. 130) when the chance stage flag is won at the start of Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B (the first game of Chance Stage A or Chance Stage B), causing the game to transition to the premonition state, and then transitioning to the Promotion Chance or the Pseudo BIG when the premonition state ends.

<Promotion Chance Game Start Processing>
Fig. 133 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of a promotion chance game performed in the main control circuit. Figs. 134A and 134B are diagrams showing a promotion chance mode lottery table. Fig. 135 is a diagram showing a promotion chance lottery table. Fig. 136 is a diagram showing a next pseudo game lottery table. Fig. 137 is a diagram showing a pseudo BIG promotion lottery table when the specified number of games has been played. Fig. 138 is a diagram showing a current pseudo game lottery table. Fig. 139 is a diagram showing the contents of a pseudo game.

The promotion chance game start processing shown in Figure 133 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the processing of step S6 (game start state control processing) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is promotion chance (see Figure 88) (for example, when the judgment result of step S85 of Figure 27 is "NO"). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 (see Figure 20).

In the promotion chance game start processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the promotion chance has started (step S4361). As described above, the promotion chance is entered during the game start state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the promotion chance transition flag (see step S4248 in FIG. 121 and step S4352 in FIG. 132) has been set to on. In the game start state control processing for the unit game that transitions to the promotion chance, the payout state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to transition to the promotion chance, and then the promotion chance game start processing shown in FIG. 133 is performed. In the processing of step S4361, the main CPU 101 determines that the promotion chance has started if the current unit game has transitioned to the promotion chance (if the current unit game is the first game of the promotion chance).

If it is determined that the promotion chance has started, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined value to the promotion chance play count counter (step S4362). In this process, the main CPU 101 generally sets the promotion chance play count counter to "3." However, if point mode 2 is set as the point mode (see step S4283 in FIG. 124), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance play count counter to "5." Furthermore, although not shown, the main CPU 101 clears various information (counters, etc.) set in the normal ball dispensing state. The value of the promotion chance play count counter indicates the remaining number of unit plays that can remain in the promotion chance state, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the promotion chance play count counter is decremented by one each time a unit play is played. Although not shown, this decrement is performed in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. 23 (main processing).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the entry-time long freeze lottery process (step S4363). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the entry-time long freeze lottery table (not shown) and conducts a lottery based on a random number value to determine either a "no win" or a "win" as the result of entry-time long freeze lottery (1). If the result of entry-time long freeze lottery (1) is a "win," the main CPU 101 determines either a "no win" or a "win" as the result of entry-time long freeze lottery (2). This results in a 1/256 probability of winning entry-time long freeze lottery (1) and a 1/256 probability of winning entry-time long freeze lottery (2).

If both the entry-time long freeze lottery (1) and the entry-time long freeze lottery (2) are won, a long freeze will occur. The duration of the long freeze that occurs when the entry-time long freeze lottery (1) and the entry-time long freeze lottery (2) are won is the same as the duration of the long freeze that occurs when the normal mode long freeze lottery (1) and the normal mode long freeze lottery (2) (see step S4102 in FIG. 108) are won. If both the entry-time long freeze lottery (1) and the entry-time long freeze lottery (2) are won, the main CPU 101 controls the execution of the long freeze in the main-side presentation control process at the start of play (see step S8 in FIG. 23) for the unit game in which the entry-time long freeze lottery (1) and the entry-time long freeze lottery (2) were performed.

Furthermore, if both the entry-time long freeze lottery (1) and the entry-time long freeze lottery (2) are won, the main CPU 101 controls the execution of the pseudo game after the long freeze ends in the main-side presentation control process at the start of play (see step S8 in Figure 23) for the unit game in which the entry-time long freeze lottery (1) and the entry-time long freeze lottery (2) were performed. As a result, the pseudo game is played following the long freeze.

In addition, if both the Entry Long Freeze Lottery (1) and the Entry Long Freeze Lottery (2) are won, the ball output status flag storage area (see Figure 20) is updated. This causes a transition to pseudo BIG. The main CPU 101 also sets the pseudo BIG (ED) flag to ON. As described above, if the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set to ON, control will be restored to pseudo BIG when the pseudo BIG termination condition is met, and the pseudo BIG will continue until the advantageous zone ends.

In this embodiment, "continue until the advantageous period ends" essentially means that the advantageous period ends when the difference in number of coins limiter (payout number limiter: for example, when 2,400 coins are reached). As will be described later, when the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set to ON (transition to pseudo BIG (ED)), 2 is added to the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter. This ensures that control will occur at least three times in pseudo BIG mode, and in this case, it is possible to configure the difference in number of coins limiter to be activated before the three pseudo BIG modes end.

However, the benefit of a long freeze may be something other than a transition to a pseudo-BIG (ED) as described above. For example, when a long freeze occurs, at least a pseudo-BIG or a special bonus of pseudo-BIG or higher may be guaranteed. Special bonuses of pseudo-BIG or higher may include, for example, a guaranteed transition to pseudo-BIG a certain number of times (guaranteed consecutive pseudo-BIGs), or a special advantageous game (pseudo-bonus or AT) that is more valuable than pseudo-BIG. Furthermore, for machines that do not have limiters for the difference in number of coins or number of games, a special pseudo-bonus for a long freeze that continues for a certain period of time (for example, winning 1,000 coins or playing 500 games) may be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, a long freeze lottery is not conducted in the bonus state, but in machines equipped with a real bonus (special role or role continuous operation device) that increases medals, a long freeze may be generated if a real bonus role is drawn in the promotion chance start game or during the promotion chance (for example, if 3BB is internally drawn), and the time when the bonus is in operation may be made into an add-on specialized zone (for example, a state in which it is easier to win a pseudo BIG, i.e., a state in which it is easier to add to the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter).

In addition, if the Pseudo BIG is controlled again when the Pseudo BIG end conditions are met, a Pseudo BIG end screen may be displayed to indicate the end, and then a Pseudo BIG-compatible pseudo game (such as a "V" combination) may be generated the next time the start lever is operated, creating a consecutive win-like effect. Alternatively, if the Pseudo BIG continues, no pseudo game may be generated and only an effect indicating continuation (such as the display of an image or sound indicating continuation, such as "Not yet!") may be displayed to continue the Pseudo BIG.

After executing the processing of step S4363, the main CPU 101 executes a promotion chance mode lottery process (step S4364). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the promotion chance mode lottery table (see Figures 134A and 134B) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine one of "Mode 1," "Mode 2," "Mode 3," and "Mode 4" as the result of the promotion chance mode lottery (promotion chance mode).

The promotion chance mode lottery tables shown in Figures 134A and 134B are provided for each of the normal modes ("Mode 1," "Mode 2," "Mode 3," "Mode 4," "Mode 5," "Mode 6," "Mode 7," and "Mode 8") determined in the normal transition mode lottery process (see step S4061 in Figure 100), as well as for the "Consecutive Challenge → Promotion Chance Transition."

If the ball output state from which the transition to the promotion chance occurs is the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, or chance stage B), one of the promotion chance mode lottery tables shown in Figures 134A and 134B (a) to (h) is referenced. Specifically, if the normal mode is "mode 1," the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in Figure 134A (a) is referenced; if the normal mode is "mode 2," the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in Figure 134A (b) is referenced; if the normal mode is "mode 3," the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in Figure 134A (c) is referenced; and if the normal mode is "mode 4," the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in Figure 134A (d) is referenced. If the normal mode is "mode 5", the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in FIG. 134A(e) is referenced, if the normal mode is "mode 6", the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in FIG. 134B(f) is referenced, if the normal mode is "mode 7", the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in FIG. 134B(g) is referenced, and if the normal mode is "mode 8", the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in FIG. 134B(h) is referenced. Also, if the ball output state from which the transition to the promotion chance occurs is a consecutive chance challenge, the promotion chance mode lottery table shown in FIG. 134B(i) is referenced.

In each promotion chance mode lottery table, lottery values corresponding to the results of the promotion chance mode lottery ("Mode 1," "Mode 2," "Mode 3," and "Mode 4") are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the promotion chance mode lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, if the ball output state from which the promotion chance is entered is the normal ball output state and the normal mode is "Mode 3," then the promotion chance mode lottery result (promotion chance mode) will be determined to be "Mode 3" with a probability of 256/256, regardless of the setting value. Also, if the ball output state from which the promotion chance is entered is the normal ball output state and the normal mode is "Mode 6," then the promotion chance mode lottery result (promotion chance mode) will be determined to be "Mode 3" with a probability of 192/256, and "Mode 4" with a probability of 64/256, regardless of the setting value. Also, if the ball output state from which the promotion chance is entered is a consecutive challenge, then the promotion chance mode lottery result (promotion chance mode) will be determined to be "Mode 2" with a probability of 256/256, regardless of the setting value.

If it is determined in step S4361 that the promotion chance has not yet started, or after executing the processing of step S4364, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the promotion chance play count counter (see step S4362) is 1 or greater (step S4365).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the promotion chance play count counter is 1 or greater, it executes a promotion chance lottery process (step S4366). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the promotion chance lottery table (see FIG. 135) and performs a lottery based on the payout flags (see FIG. 92) in payout flag group 2 and the random number value, thereby determining one of "Fake Pseudo Play," "Pseudo BIG," or "Pseudo BIG (ED)" as the result of the promotion chance lottery.

The promotion chance lottery table shown in Figure 135 is provided for each of the ball output flags in ball output flag group 2 ('Other', 'Weak rare role', 'Diagonal watermelon', 'Reach mark', and 'Reach mark BB'). If the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 2 is "other", the promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. 135(a) is referenced, if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 2 is "weak rare role", the promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. 135(b) is referenced, if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 2 is "diagonal watermelon", the promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. 135(c) is referenced, if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 2 is "reach eye", the promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. 135(d) is referenced, and if the ball dispensing flag in ball dispensing flag group 2 is "reach eye BB", the promotion chance lottery table shown in FIG. 135(e) is referenced.

In each promotion chance lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the promotion chance lottery result ("Fake Pseudo Game," "Pseudo BIG," and "Pseudo BIG (ED)") is specified for each promotion chance mode ("Mode 1," "Mode 2," "Mode 3," and "Mode 4") determined in step S4364. The probability of each promotion chance lottery result being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, if the payout flag in payout flag group 2 is "Other" and the promotion chance mode is "Mode 4," the result of the promotion chance lottery will be "Fake Pseudo Game" with a probability of 204/256, and "Pseudo BIG (ED)" with a probability of 52/256. Also, if the payout flag in payout flag group 2 is "Reach Eye BB" and the promotion chance mode is "Mode 1," the result of the promotion chance lottery will be "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 255/256, and "Pseudo BIG (ED)" with a probability of 1/256.

If "Pseudo BIG" or "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as the result of the lottery during the promotion chance (if a Pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the Pseudo BIG winning flag to ON. As described above, the Pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag that indicates that a Pseudo BIG has been won.

After executing the processing of step S4366, the main CPU 101 executes the next pseudo game lottery processing (step S4367). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the next pseudo game lottery table (see FIG. 136) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine one of "Pseudo Game 1," "Pseudo Game 2," "Pseudo Game 3," "Pseudo Game 4," "Pseudo Game 5," "Pseudo Game 6," "Pseudo Game 7," and "Pseudo Game 8" as the result of the pseudo game lottery.

The next pseudo game lottery table shown in Figure 136 is provided for each of the results of the promotion chance lottery ("Fake pseudo game," "Pseudo BIG," and "Pseudo BIG (ED)"). If "Fake pseudo game" is determined in step S4366, the next pseudo game lottery table shown in Figure 136(a) is referenced; if "Pseudo BIG" is determined in step S4366, the next pseudo game lottery table shown in Figure 136(b) is referenced; and if "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4366, the next pseudo game lottery table shown in Figure 136(c) is referenced.

In each next pseudo game lottery table, lottery values corresponding to the results of the next pseudo game lottery ("Pseudo Game 1," "Pseudo Game 2," "Pseudo Game 3," "Pseudo Game 4," "Pseudo Game 5," "Pseudo Game 6," "Pseudo Game 7," and "Pseudo Game 8") are specified for each promotion chance mode ("Mode 1," "Mode 2," "Mode 3," and "Mode 4") determined in step S4364. The probability of each result of the next pseudo game lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, if the promotion chance mode is "Mode 1" and "Fake Pseudo Game" is determined in step S4366, the result of the next pseudo game lottery will be "Pseudo Game 1" with a probability of 86/256, and "Pseudo Game 2" with a probability of 170/256. Also, if the promotion chance mode is "Mode 1" and "Pseudo BIG" is determined in step S4366, the result of the next pseudo game lottery will be "Pseudo Game 3" with a probability of 112/256, "Pseudo Game 4" with a probability of 112/256, and "Pseudo Game 5" with a probability of 32/256. Furthermore, if the promotion chance mode is "Mode 1" and "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4366, the result of the next pseudo game lottery will be "Pseudo Game 3" with a probability of 32/256, "Pseudo Game 4" with a probability of 32/256, "Pseudo Game 5" with a probability of 32/256, and "Pseudo Game 6" with a probability of 160/256.

The main CPU 101 sets the pseudo game determined by the next pseudo game lottery. As a result, the main CPU 101 controls the execution of the pseudo game in the main presentation control process at the start of game (see step S8 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game for which the next pseudo game lottery was drawn. Also, if "Pseudo BIG" or "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as the result of the promotion chance lottery (the pseudo BIG winning flag is set ON), the main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game for which the promotion chance lottery was drawn. As a result, a transition to pseudo BIG occurs (see transition condition (K) in FIGS. 89 and 90).

Furthermore, if "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the lottery during the promotion chance (if the Pseudo BIG (ED) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the Pseudo BIG (ED) flag to ON. As described above, if the Pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set to ON, control will be restored to Pseudo BIG when the Pseudo BIG termination condition is met, and thus Pseudo BIG will continue until the advantageous period ends.

After executing step S4367, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4365 that the value of the promotion chance play count counter is less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON (step S4368). If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo BIG promotion lottery process when the specified number of plays is played (step S4369). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo BIG promotion lottery table when the specified number of plays is played (see FIG. 137) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is played: "Fake pseudo play," "Pseudo BIG," or "Pseudo BIG (ED)."

In the pseudo BIG promotion lottery table shown in Figure 137, lottery values corresponding to the results of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is reached ("Fake pseudo play," "Pseudo BIG," and "Pseudo BIG (ED)") are specified for each promotion chance mode ("Mode 1," "Mode 2," "Mode 3," and "Mode 4") determined in step S4364. The probability of each result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is reached can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, when the promotion chance mode is "Mode 1," the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is played is determined to be "Fake Pseudo Game" with a probability of 232/256, and "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 24/256. Also, when the promotion chance mode is "Mode 4," the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is played is determined to be "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 224/256, and "Pseudo BIG (ED)" with a probability of 32/256.

After executing the processing of step S4369, the main CPU 101 executes the current pseudo game lottery processing (step S4370). In this processing, the main CPU 101 refers to the current pseudo game lottery table (see FIG. 138) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine one of "Pseudo Game 1," "Pseudo Game 2," "Pseudo Game 3," "Pseudo Game 4," "Pseudo Game 5," "Pseudo Game 6," "Pseudo Game 7," and "Pseudo Game 8" as the result of the current pseudo game lottery.

The current pseudo game lottery table shown in Figure 138 is provided for each result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is played ("Pseudo BIG" and "Pseudo BIG (ED)"). If "Pseudo BIG" is determined in step S4369, the current pseudo game lottery table shown in Figure 138(a) is referenced, and if "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4369, the current pseudo game lottery table shown in Figure 138(b) is referenced.

In each current pseudo game lottery table, a lottery value corresponding to the result of the current pseudo game lottery ("Pseudo Game 1," "Pseudo Game 2," "Pseudo Game 3," "Pseudo Game 4," "Pseudo Game 5," "Pseudo Game 6," "Pseudo Game 7," and "Pseudo Game 8") is specified for each promotion chance mode ("Mode 1," "Mode 2," "Mode 3," and "Mode 4") determined in step S4364. The probability of each result of the current pseudo game lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

For example, if the promotion chance mode is "Mode 1" and "Pseudo BIG" is determined in step S4369, then "Pseudo Game 7" will be determined as the result of the current pseudo game lottery with a probability of 128/256, and "Pseudo Game 8" will be determined with a probability of 128/256. Also, if the promotion chance mode is "Mode 1" and "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4369, then "Pseudo Game 6" will be determined as the result of the current pseudo game lottery with a probability of 256/256. Furthermore, if "Fake Pseudo Game" is determined in step S4369, then "Pseudo Game 7" will be determined.

The main CPU 101 sets the pseudo game determined by the current pseudo game lottery. As a result, the main CPU 101 controls the execution of the pseudo game in the main side presentation control process at the start of play (see step S8 in Figure 23) for the unit game for which the current pseudo game lottery was performed. As a result, the pseudo game determined in step S4369 is executed following the pseudo game determined in step S4367.

Also, if "Pseudo BIG" or "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays has been played (if Pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 updates the ball output status flag storage area (see Figure 20), thereby transitioning to Pseudo BIG. Also, if "Fake Pseudo Game" is determined as the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays has been played (if Pseudo BIG is not won), the main CPU 101 updates the ball output status flag storage area (see Figure 20), thereby transitioning to Pseudo REG (see transition condition (L) in Figures 89 and 90).

Furthermore, if "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as the result of the Pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays has been played (if the Pseudo BIG (ED) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the Pseudo BIG (ED) flag to ON. As described above, if the Pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set to ON, control will be restored to Pseudo BIG when the Pseudo BIG termination condition is met, and thus Pseudo BIG will continue until the advantageous zone ends.

After executing step S4370, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

The above has described eight types of pseudo games (pseudo games 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8). As explained in the first embodiment, the pseudo games are configured to be able to be executed while a lock effect is being executed. A lock effect (lock) is an effect that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time (disables the player's game operations for a predetermined period of time).

As shown in FIG. 139, in pseudo game 1, a "V," "Seven," or "Bar" is completed on the top line, but the "V," "Seven," and "Bar" do not line up on any of the center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line, and cross-down line. Pseudo game 1 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "fake pseudo game" is determined in step S4366. In pseudo game 2, a "V," "Seven," or "Bar" is completed on the bottom line, but the "V," "Seven," and "Bar" do not line up on any of the center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line, and cross-down line. Pseudo game 2 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "fake pseudo game" is determined in step S4366.

In pseudo game 3, "V"s line up on any of the center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line, and cross-down line (the top line if the first stopping operation is performed on the left reel 3L), or "Sevens" line up on the center line. Pseudo game 3 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "pseudo BIG" or "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4366. In pseudo game 4, "V"s line up on any of the center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line, and cross-down line (the bottom line if the first stopping operation is performed on the left reel 3L), or "Sevens" line up on the center line. Pseudo game 4 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "pseudo BIG" or "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4366.

In pseudo game 5, "V"s line up on any of the center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line, and cross-down line (or on the cross-up line if the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L), or "Sevens" line up on the center line. Pseudo game 5 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "Pseudo BIG" or "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4366. In pseudo game 6, "V"s are completed on the center line, cross-up line, and cross-down line, and "V"s line up on the center line, or "Sevens" line up on the center line, and "Bars" do not line up on any of the lines. Pseudo game 6 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined in step S4366 or step S4369.

Furthermore, pseudo game 6 is a pseudo game that can only be executed when "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined. In other words, when pseudo game 6 is executed, pseudo BIG (ED) (pseudo BIG will continue until the advantageous zone ends) is confirmed. For example, pseudo games that are executed when the normal long freeze lottery (1) and the normal long freeze lottery (2) (see step S4102 in FIG. 108) are won, as are pseudo games that are executed when the entry long freeze lottery (1) and the entry long freeze lottery (2) (see step S4363 in FIG. 133) are won, and are also pseudo games 6.

In pseudo game 7, "V" and "Seven" do not line up on any of the center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line, and cross-down line, and "Bar" lines up on the center line. Pseudo game 7 is a pseudo game that can be executed when "Pseudo BIG" or "Fake pseudo game" is determined in step S4369. Note that if "Pseudo BIG" is determined and pseudo game 7 is executed, a reel effect (reel re-spin) is performed after pseudo game 7 ends, and "V" or "Seven" lines up on any line. On the other hand, if "Fake pseudo game" is determined and pseudo game 7 is executed, reel re-spin is not performed.

In pseudo game 8, a "bar" is completed on any of the center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line, and cross-down line, but a "V", "Seven", and "Bar" do not line up on any of the lines. Pseudo game 8 is a pseudo game that can be executed when a "pseudo BIG" is determined in step S4369. If a "pseudo BIG" is determined and pseudo game 8 is executed, a reel effect (re-spinning of the reels) is performed after pseudo game 8 ends, and a "V" or "Seven" lines up on any of the lines.

<Promotion Chance Game Flow>
Figure 140 shows the flow of the game during the promotion chance.

As shown in Figure 140, a long freeze (see step S4363 in Figure 133) may occur in the first game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance game count counter: 3). If this freeze occurs, a pseudo game aiming for a BB (pseudo game 6) occurs following the freeze, and a pseudo BB (pseudo BIG) begins. On the other hand, if a freeze does not occur, the first game of the promotion chance is consumed, and operation of the start lever 7 triggers a transition to the second game of the promotion chance.

In the second promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance game number counter: 2), a pseudo game (see step S4367 in FIG. 133) is played that is determined based on the results of the promotion chance lottery held in the first game (see step S4366 in FIG. 133). If the pseudo BIG transition symbols ("V" or "Seven") line up in the pseudo game (first pseudo game aiming for BB), a pseudo BB (pseudo BIG) begins. On the other hand, if the pseudo BIG transition symbols ("V" or "Seven") do not line up in the pseudo game (first pseudo game aiming for BB), the second promotion chance game is exhausted, and operation of the start lever 7 triggers a transition to the third promotion chance game.

In the third promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance game count counter: 1), a pseudo game (see step S4367 in FIG. 133) is played that is determined based on the results of the promotion chance lottery held in the second game (see step S4366 in FIG. 133). If the pseudo BIG transition symbols ("V" or "Seven") line up in the pseudo game (second pseudo game aiming for BB), a pseudo BB (pseudo BIG) begins. On the other hand, if the pseudo BIG transition symbols ("V" or "Seven") do not line up in the pseudo game (second pseudo game aiming for BB), the third promotion chance game is exhausted, and operation of the start lever 7 triggers a transition to the fourth promotion chance game.

In the fourth promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance game count counter: 0), a pseudo game (see step S4367 in Figure 133) occurs that is determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery held in the third game (see step S4366 in Figure 133). If the pseudo BIG transition symbol ("V" or "Seven") is lined up in this pseudo game (third pseudo game aiming for BB), a pseudo BB (pseudo BIG) begins. On the other hand, if the pseudo BIG transition symbols ("V" or "Seven") are not lined up in this pseudo game (third pseudo game aiming for BB), a pseudo game aiming for RB (pseudo game 7) will occur and a pseudo RB (pseudo REG) will begin unless a pseudo BIG is won in the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of games is played (see step S4369 in FIG. 133).

In the above, it has been explained that if a "fake pseudo game" is determined as a result of the promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in Figure 133) conducted in the third game of the promotion chance, a fake pseudo game (pseudo game 1 or pseudo game 2) is determined based on the result (see step S4367 in Figure 133), and that in the fourth game of the promotion chance, the fake pseudo game is played as the third pseudo game aiming for BB, regardless of the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of games has been played (see step S4369 in Figure 133). However, if a "fake pseudo game" is determined as a result of the promotion chance lottery held in the third game of the promotion chance (see step S4366 in FIG. 133), and if a pseudo BIG is won in the pseudo BIG promotion lottery held when the specified number of plays is played in the fourth game of the promotion chance (see step S4369 in FIG. 133), the fake pseudo game may be discarded, and a pseudo game determined based on the result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery held when the specified number of plays is played (see step S4370 in FIG. 133) may be played as the third pseudo game aiming for BB.

Also, Figure 140 shows that the pseudo BIG or pseudo REG starts after a pseudo game (a pseudo game aiming for BB or a pseudo game aiming for RB) is played. The player can recognize that the pseudo BIG or pseudo REG starts when the pseudo BIG transition symbol ("V" or "Seven") or the pseudo REG transition symbol ("Bar") lines up during the pseudo game (a pseudo game aiming for BB or a pseudo game aiming for RB). However, the timing at which the pseudo BIG or pseudo REG actually starts (the timing at which the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated) may be after the pseudo game (the pseudo game aiming for BB or the pseudo game aiming for RB) has been played (for example, during the main side presentation control process at the start of the game (see step S8 in FIG. 23)), or it may be before the pseudo game (the pseudo game aiming for BB or the pseudo game aiming for RB) has been played (for example, during the state control process at the start of the game (see step S6 in FIG. 23)).

<Example of promotion chance (when a pseudo-BIG win occurs in the first game)>
FIG. 141 shows an example of the presentation when a pseudo-BIG is won in the first game of the promotion chance.

As an example of the presentation shown in Figure 141, Figure 141(a) shows an image corresponding to the word "WIN" being displayed on the main display device 210 in the unit game immediately before the unit game that transitions to the promotion chance (in the case of transitioning from the normal ball output state to the promotion chance, the final game in the normal ball output state: the winning lottery notification game).

Figure 141(b) shows how, following the state shown in Figure 141(a), in the first game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance number of plays counter: 3), an image corresponding to the words "Bonus promotion lottery in progress" is displayed on the main display device 210 in response to a promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in Figure 133). Here, it is assumed that a "pseudo BIG" is determined as the result of the promotion chance lottery. Note that the long freeze (see step S4363 in Figure 133) has not been won.

Figure 141(c) shows how, after the state shown in Figure 141(b), in the second promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance game count counter: 2), an image corresponding to the words "Aim for V!" is displayed on the main display device 210 when the pseudo game (see step S4367 in Figure 133) determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery held in the first game (see step S4366 in Figure 133) begins. This image suggests that a stopping operation should be performed at a timing when the "buoy" symbol, which serves as the pseudo BIG transition symbol, can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. This encourages the player to perform a stopping operation aimed at the "buoy."

Figure 141(d) shows how, in a pseudo game played in the second promotion chance game (promotion chance game number counter value: 2) after the state shown in Figure 141(c), when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning, an image corresponding to the words "V.V.V" and "BIG BONUS!" is displayed on the main display device 210. This notifies the player that the pseudo BIG transition symbol "V" has been lined up, and that a transition to a big bonus (pseudo BIG) will occur. When the pseudo BIG transition symbol is lined up (when the pseudo BIG starts), external signal 1 described in the first embodiment is turned on.

After the state shown in Figure 141 (d), in the second promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 2), following the pseudo play (with the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R stopped), a lock occurs and the progress of the game is further halted for a predetermined period. Figure 141 (e) shows that during the period in which the lock is in effect, a screen for selecting the effect (BB effect) to be performed in the pseudo BIG is displayed on the main display device 210. By operating the effect button, the player can select one of effects A, B, or C as the BB effect.

Figure 141 (f) shows that after the state shown in Figure 141 (e), in the second game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 2), when one effect (here, effect B) is determined as the BB effect, images corresponding to the words "Play proceeds with the lever," "0 coins won," and "30 navigations remaining" are displayed on the main display device 210. This makes it possible to prompt the player to operate the start lever 7, and the lock ends when the start lever 7 is operated. Also, even if the start lever 7 is not operated, the lock ends when a predetermined time (e.g., 50 seconds) has elapsed since all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning in the pseudo-game. "0 medals won" indicates the number of medals won by the player in the pseudo BIG (the difference between the number paid out and the number inserted), and "30 remaining navi times" indicates the remaining number of Bernavi times that can be performed in the first pseudo BIG described above (see Figure 91) (the value of the first Bernavi number counter).

After the state shown in Figure 141 (f) is reached, when the start lever 7 is operated, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R begin to spin for actual play (main play) (a random delay process is performed to progress the game). Figure 141 (g) shows the push order navigation image displayed on the main display device 210 at this time. The push order navigation image is an image used to notify the player of the correct push order for the push order bell (bell navigation). Here, since "F_321 Bell D" has been determined as the internal winning combination, it is notified that the first stop operation should be a stop operation for the right reel 3R with a push aimed at the "buoy," the second stop operation should be a stop operation for the center reel 3C, and the third stop operation should be a stop operation for the left reel 3L (see Figure 91). Furthermore, since one bell navigation has been performed, the number of "remaining navigations" has decreased by one to "29."

Figure 141(h) shows how, after the state shown in Figure 141(g), when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning, an image corresponding to the words "GET 15 coins" is displayed on the main display device 210. Here, a stop operation is performed in accordance with the notification (bell navigation), and the push order bell is activated, resulting in 15 medals being paid out (see Figure 87). In addition, the number of "earned" coins is updated to the difference (12 coins) between the number of coins paid out (15 coins) and the number of coins inserted (3 coins).

Note that in the state shown in Figures 141(e) to (h), the transition from Promotion Chance to Pseudo BIG has already occurred, and the first game of Pseudo BIG is shown, but for convenience, it is described as the second game of Promotion Chance.

<Example of promotion chance (when pseudo BIG is not won)>
FIG. 142 shows an example of the presentation when the pseudo BIG is not won in the first to fourth promotion chance games.

As an example of the presentation shown in Figure 142, Figure 142(a) shows an image corresponding to the word "WIN" being displayed on the main display device 210 in the unit game immediately before the unit game that transitions to the promotion chance (in the case of transitioning from the normal ball output state to the promotion chance, the final game in the normal ball output state: the winning lottery notification game).

Figure 142(b) shows how, following the state shown in Figure 142(a), in the first game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 3), an image corresponding to the words "Bonus promotion lottery in progress" is displayed on the main display device 210 in response to a promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in Figure 133). Here, it is assumed that a "fake pseudo play" has been determined as a result of the promotion chance lottery. Note that the long freeze (see step S4363 in Figure 133) has not been won.

Figure 142(c) shows how, after the state shown in Figure 142(b), in the second promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance game number counter: 2), an image corresponding to the words "Aim for V!" is displayed on the main display device 210 when the pseudo game (see step S4367 in Figure 133) determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery held in the first game (see step S4366 in Figure 133) begins. This image suggests that a stopping operation should be performed at a timing when the "buoy" symbol, which serves as the pseudo BIG transition symbol, can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. This encourages the player to perform a stopping operation aimed at the "buoy."

Figure 142(d) shows how, in the pseudo game played in the second promotion chance game (promotion chance game number counter value: 2) after the state shown in Figure 142(c), when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning, images corresponding to the words "Sorry" and "Play will proceed when lever is on" are displayed on the main display device 210. This notifies the player that the "V" symbol, which is the pseudo BIG transition symbol, has not lined up (the pseudo BIG has not been won), and also prompts the player to operate the start lever 7.

After the state shown in Figure 142 (d), when the start lever 7 is operated, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R begin to spin for actual play (main play) (the game progresses with a random delay process). Figure 142 (e) shows that in the second game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance game number counter: 2), in response to a promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in Figure 133), an image corresponding to the words "Bonus promotion lottery in progress" is displayed on the main display device 210. Here, it is assumed that "fake pseudo game" has been determined as the result of the promotion chance lottery.

Figure 142 (f) shows how, after the state shown in Figure 142 (e), in the third promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance game number counter: 1), an image corresponding to the words "Aim for V!" is displayed on the main display device 210 when the pseudo game (see step S4367 in Figure 133) determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery held in the second game (see step S4366 in Figure 133) begins. This image suggests that a stopping operation should be performed at a timing when the "buoy" symbol, which serves as the pseudo BIG transition symbol, can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. This encourages the player to perform a stopping operation aimed at the "buoy."

Figure 142(g) shows how, in a pseudo game played in the third promotion chance game (promotion chance game number counter value: 1) after the state shown in Figure 142(f), when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning, images corresponding to the words "Sorry" and "Play will proceed when lever is on" are displayed on the main display device 210. This notifies the player that the "V" symbol, which is the pseudo BIG transition symbol, has not lined up (the pseudo BIG has not been won), and also prompts the player to operate the start lever 7.

After the state shown in Figure 142 (g), when the start lever 7 is operated, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R begin to spin for actual play (main play) (random delay processing is performed and play progresses). Figure 142 (h) shows that in the third game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 1), in response to a promotion chance lottery being held (see step S4366 in Figure 133), an image corresponding to the words "Bonus promotion lottery in progress" is displayed on the main display device 210. Here, it is assumed that "fake pseudo play" has been determined as the result of the promotion chance lottery.

Figure 142(i) shows an image corresponding to the words "Aim for V!" being displayed on the main display device 210 when a pseudo game (see step S4367 of Figure 133) determined based on the results of the promotion chance lottery conducted in the third game (see step S4366 of Figure 133) begins in the fourth promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 0) after the state shown in Figure 142(h). This image suggests performing a stop operation when the "V" symbol, which serves as a pseudo BIG transition symbol, is displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. This encourages the player to perform a stop operation aiming for the "V." Note that, here, it is assumed that a "fake pseudo game" is determined as a result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is consumed (see step S4369 of Figure 133). Furthermore, in the fourth promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance game number counter: 0), two pseudo games are played, and the pseudo game (see step S4367 in Figure 133) determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery played in the third game (see step S4366 in Figure 133) will be referred to as the first pseudo game.

Figure 142(j) shows how, in the first pseudo game played in the fourth promotion chance game (promotion chance game number counter value: 0) after the state shown in Figure 142(i), when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning, images corresponding to the words "Sorry" and "Play will proceed when lever is on" are displayed on the main display device 210. This notifies the player that the "V" symbol, which is the pseudo BIG transition symbol, has not lined up (the pseudo BIG has not been won), and also prompts the player to operate the start lever 7.

After the state shown in Figure 142 (j), when the start lever 7 is operated, a pseudo game (see step S4370 in Figure 133) determined based on the results of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays has been played (see step S4369 in Figure 133) begins. This pseudo game will be referred to as the second pseudo game. Figure 142 (k) shows an image corresponding to the words "Aim for the BAR!" being displayed on the main display device 210 when the second pseudo game, which is played in the fourth promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 0), begins. This image suggests that a stopping operation should be performed at a timing when a "bar" symbol, as a pseudo REG transition symbol, can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. This encourages the player to perform a stopping operation aiming for the "bar."

Figure 142 (l) shows how, in the second pseudo game played in the fourth promotion chance game (promotion chance game number counter value: 0) after the state shown in Figure 142 (k), when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning, an image corresponding to the words "REGULAR BONUS!" and "PLAY STARTS BY PUSHING THE LEVER ON" is displayed on the main display device 210. This notifies the player that a transition to a regular bonus (pseudo REG) is about to occur, and prompts the player to operate the start lever 7. When the pseudo REG transition symbols are aligned (when the pseudo REG begins), the external signal 2 described in the first embodiment is turned ON.

After the state shown in Figure 142 (l), when the start lever 7 is operated, the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R begins for actual play (main play) (a random delay process is performed to progress the game). Figure 142 (m) shows the push order navigation image displayed on the main display device 210 at this time. The push order navigation image is an image for notifying the correct push order for the push order bell (bell navigation). Here, since "F_231 Bell A" to "F_231 Bell C" have been determined as the internal winning combination, it is notified that the first stop operation should be performed on the center reel 3C with a push aimed at "seven," the second stop operation should be performed on the right reel 3R, and the third stop operation should be performed on the left reel 3L (see Figure 91). In addition, "4 Navigations Remaining" indicates the remaining number of bell navigations that can be performed in the pseudo-REG (the value of the second bell navigation number counter). The initial value for "Navi remaining" is 5, but since one Bell Navi was performed, the number of "Navi remaining" has been reduced by 1 and updated to "4."

Figure 142(n) shows that after the state shown in Figure 142(m), when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning, an image corresponding to the words "GET 15 coins" is displayed on the main display device 210. Here, a stop operation is performed in accordance with the notification (bell navigation), and the push order bell is won, resulting in the payment of 15 medals (see Figure 87).

Note that in the state shown in Figures 142 (m) and (n), the transition from the promotion chance to the pseudo-REG has already occurred, and the first game of the pseudo-REG is shown, but for convenience, it is described as the fourth game of the promotion chance.

As explained above, when a promotion chance occurs, the game will always transition to either the pseudo BIG or pseudo REG AT state. In other words, a promotion chance is a ball output state in which a transition to the AT state is confirmed. During the promotion chance, it is determined which AT state the game will transition to, and an effect is played to notify the player of the AT state to which the game will transition through the pseudo game. If the pseudo BIG transition symbol ("V" or "Seven") is aligned in the pseudo game played from the first game to the final game, the game will transition to pseudo BIG. If the pseudo BIG transition symbol ("V" or "Seven") is not aligned in the first pseudo game played in the final game, the pseudo REG transition symbol ("Bar") will be aligned in the second pseudo game, and the game will transition to pseudo REG. A transition to pseudo REG is only possible in the final game; a transition to pseudo REG will not occur in games other than the final game.

So far, we have explained the specifications for displaying symbols at the start of a pseudo bonus, etc., using a pseudo game that the player can stop. However, instead of or in conjunction with a pseudo game, it is also possible to use a reel effect in which the reels stop automatically without the player having to stop the game, to display symbols at the start of a pseudo bonus, etc. If a reel effect is used, the presentation effect will be inferior to that of a pseudo game, but the main program capacity can be reduced compared to a pseudo game.

In addition, in pseudo games, the reels automatically stop after a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the pseudo game reels started spinning or the stop operation was enabled, and symbols such as those displayed when a pseudo bonus game begins are displayed. Therefore, in a broad sense, pseudo games can also be considered a type of reel presentation. In the case of automatic stopping due to the passage of time, the reels may be controlled so that a planned symbol combination (such as a buoy, seven, or bar) stops, or a stop signal may be input to each reel to stop it when the time has elapsed. In the latter case, if the timing is right, the planned symbol combination will line up, but there may also be cases where the symbol combination does not line up.

The reel stop control for a pseudo game can be implemented in any of the ways described in the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, the number of sliding symbols may be limited to a maximum of four, and the pseudo stop result may change depending on the pressing position (timing of the stop operation), in the same or similar manner as in a normal game (main game). Alternatively, the symbol may slide to a predetermined position depending on the type of pseudo game (pseudo game 1-8) regardless of the pressing position. Even in a type where the result changes depending on the pressing position, the stop control may be implemented to limit the possible stop positions to two or three (for example, in pseudo game 3, the symbol may slide four or more symbols depending on the pressing position to result in either a buoy or a seven), allowing the player to easily understand the resulting result. Furthermore, in the case of a type in which the result changes depending on the button press position, for example, even if neither a buoy nor a seven-line appears when the pseudo-BIG starts, it is desirable that the effects at the start of the pseudo-BIG (for example, the effects corresponding to a buoy line shown in Figure 141 (d)) be displayed in the same manner as when a buoy line appears, so that the player can understand the situation.

In this embodiment, the maximum number of games played during a promotion chance is four (or six), and the number of games is not increased; however, the number of games for a promotion chance may be extended if certain conditions are met. For example, the remaining number of games may be extended if a rare combination is won but a pseudo-BIG is not won. Furthermore, when extending a promotion chance, the number of games may be increased by +1 game, +5 games, or the player may transition to a state such as an infinite promotion chance that continues until a pseudo-BIG is won.

<Processing at the start of pseudo BIG game>
Fig. 143 is a flowchart showing the pseudo BIG game start processing carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 144 is a flowchart showing the pseudo BIG start processing carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 145 is a diagram showing a pseudo BIG start consecutive win challenge lottery table. Fig. 146 is a diagram showing a pseudo BIG 1G consecutive win lottery table.

The pseudo BIG game start processing shown in Figure 143 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the processing of step S6 (game start state control processing) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is pseudo BIG (see Figure 88) (for example, when the judgment result of step S85 of Figure 27 is "NO"). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area of the main RAM 103 (see Figure 20).

In the pseudo BIG game start processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether it is the start of a pseudo BIG game (step S4381). As described above, a transition to a pseudo BIG game occurs during the game start state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following a unit game in which the pseudo BIG transition flag (see step S4246 in FIG. 121 and step S4351 in FIG. 132) is set to ON, or the unit game following a unit game in which a pseudo BIG game is won in a promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in FIG. 133) during a promotion chance, or a unit game in which a pseudo BIG game is won in a pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of games is played during a promotion chance (see step S4369 in FIG. 133). In the game start state control process for a unit game that transitions to pseudo BIG, the payout state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to transition to pseudo BIG, and then the game start process for pseudo BIG shown in FIG. 143 is performed. In the process of step S4381, the main CPU 101 determines that it is the start of pseudo BIG if the current unit game has transitioned to pseudo BIG (if the current unit game is the first game of pseudo BIG).

If it is determined that it is time for the pseudo-BIG to start, the main CPU 101 executes pseudo-BIG start processing (step S4382). Here, the pseudo-BIG start processing will be explained using FIG. 144.

In the pseudo BIG start processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether it is time to transition from a promotion chance (step S4401). This processing is performed when the current unit game has transitioned to pseudo BIG (when the current unit game is the first game of pseudo BIG). The main CPU 101 determines that it is time to transition from a promotion chance if the ball output state at the transition source is a promotion chance.

If it is determined that the time has not yet passed from the promotion chance, the main CPU 101 sets a pseudo game (step S4402). In this process, if the pseudo BIG (ED) flag (see step S4102 in FIG. 108, and steps S4363, S4366, and S4369 in FIG. 133) is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets pseudo game 6 (see FIG. 139). If the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets pseudo game 5 (see FIG. 139). As a result, the main CPU 101 controls the execution of the set pseudo game in the main-side presentation control process at the start of play for the unit game (see step S8 in FIG. 23). Furthermore, although not shown, the main CPU 101 clears various information (counters, etc.) set in the normal ball-dispensing state.

If it is determined in step S4401 that it is time to transition from the promotion chance, or after executing the processing of step S4402, the main CPU 101 sets the first pseudo BIG (step S4403). As described above, the first pseudo BIG and the second pseudo BIG are provided as pseudo BIGs, and when the pseudo BIG starts, it is controlled to the first pseudo BIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the first Bernavi count counter to "30" (step S4404). As described above, the value of the first Bernavi count counter indicates the remaining number of Bernavis that can be performed in the first pseudo-BIG, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the first Bernavi count counter is decremented by 1 each time a Bernavi is performed in the first pseudo-BIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the normal reply remaining winning count counter to "3" (step S4405). As described above, the value of the normal reply remaining winning count counter indicates the remaining number of times a transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG is possible, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the normal reply remaining winning count counter is decremented by 1 each time a transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG occurs (each time a normal reply wins in the first pseudo BIG).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the pseudo BIG (ED) flag (see step S4102 in FIG. 108, and steps S4363, S4366, and S4369 in FIG. 133) is set to ON (step S4406). If it determines that the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 adds 2 to the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter (step S4407). The value of the pseudo BIG stock counter indicates the remaining number of times that pseudo BIG can be controlled again when the pseudo BIG termination condition is met, and is stored in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo BIG start consecutive game challenge lottery process (step S4408). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo BIG start consecutive game challenge lottery table (see FIG. 145) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine whether the result of the pseudo BIG start consecutive game challenge lottery will be a "no win" or a "win."

In the Pseudo BIG Start Consecutive Chance Challenge Lottery Table shown in Figure 145, lottery values corresponding to the results of the Pseudo BIG Start Consecutive Chance Challenge Lottery ("Lose Winning" and "Winning") are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each result of the Pseudo BIG Start Consecutive Chance Challenge Lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." As a result, regardless of the setting value, there is a 1 in 256 probability of winning the Pseudo BIG Start Consecutive Chance Challenge Lottery.

If the consecutive-game challenge lottery at the start of the pseudo-BIG is won, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive-game challenge winning flag to ON. The consecutive-game challenge winning flag is a flag indicating that the consecutive-game challenge has been won. Details will be described later, but if the consecutive-game challenge is won, the game will transition to the consecutive-game challenge when the pseudo-BIG ending condition is met (see transition condition (M) in Figures 89 and 90).

After executing the processing of step S4408, the main CPU 101 executes the entry-time long freeze lottery processing (step S4409). This processing is similar to the processing of step S4363 in FIG. 133, so its explanation will be omitted here. After executing the processing of step S4409, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

The pseudo-BIG start processing performed in step S4382 of Figure 143 has been explained above using Figure 144. Let's return to the explanation of Figure 143.

If it is determined in step S4381 that the pseudo BIG has not yet started, or after executing the processing of step S4382, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is 2 or greater (step S4383). If it is determined that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is 2 or greater, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is less than 2, it executes a pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery process (step S4384). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery table (see FIG. 146) and performs a lottery based on the payout flag (see FIG. 92) in payout flag group 6 and the random number value, thereby determining the result of the pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery as either "No Win," "Pseudo BIG," or "Pseudo BIG (ED)."

The pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 146 is provided for each of the payout flags in payout flag group 6 ("Other," "Reach mark," "Reach mark BB," and "1 coin role"). If the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Other," the pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 146(a) is referenced. If the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Reach mark," the pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 146(b) is referenced. If the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Reach mark BB," the pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 146(c) is referenced. If the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "1 coin role," the pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 146(d) is referenced.

In each Pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery table, lottery values corresponding to the results of the Pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery ("No Win", "Pseudo BIG", and "Pseudo BIG (ED)") are specified for each of the "First Pseudo BIG" and "Second Pseudo BIG". The probability of each result of the Pseudo BIG 1G consecutive lottery can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

As a result, in the first pseudo BIG, as a result of the 1G consecutive lottery during the pseudo BIG, a "non-winning" lottery is determined with a probability of 256/256, regardless of the payout flag in payout flag group 6. Also, in the second pseudo BIG, as a result of the 1G consecutive lottery during the pseudo BIG, if the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Other" or "1-piece role," a "non-winning" lottery is determined with a probability of 256/256, and if the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Reach Eye" or "Reach Eye BB," a "non-winning" lottery is determined with a probability of 255/256, and a "Pseudo BIG" is determined with a probability of 1/256. If a "Pseudo BIG" is determined as a result of the 1G consecutive lottery during the Pseudo BIG (if the 1G consecutive lottery is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the Pseudo BIG stock counter.

After executing step S4384, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Counter management process for pseudo BIG>
FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-BIG counter management process performed in the main control circuit.

The pseudo BIG counter management process shown in Figure 147 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S15 (game end state control process) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is pseudo BIG (see Figure 88). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area (see Figure 20) in the main RAM 103.

In the pseudo BIG counter management process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not it is controlled by the first pseudo BIG (step S4421). If it determines that it is controlled by the first pseudo BIG, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a replay ("F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" (see Figures 85 and 86)) has been determined as the internal winning role in the internal winning role determination process (see step S64 in Figure 26) (step S4422).

If it is determined that a replay has been determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the replay counter established during the first pseudo-BIG (step S4423). The value of the replay counter established during the first pseudo-BIG indicates the number of times a replay ("F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B") has been determined as the internal winning combination during the first pseudo-BIG, and is stored in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether a normal lip has been awarded (step S4424). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether the combination of symbols stopped and displayed along the pay line is a "normal lip" (any of "C_middle lip A_01-04," "C_lower lip A_01-06," "C_CU lip_01-03," "C_upper lip B_01-06," "C_upper lip A_01-03," and "C_CD lip_01-04" (see Figure 83A)).

If it is determined that a normal RIP has won, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the normal RIP remaining winning count counter (see step S4405 in FIG. 144) (step S4425). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the second pseudo BIG (step S4426). This transitions from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the second Bernavi count counter to "9" (step S4427). As described above, the value of the second Bernavi count counter indicates the remaining number of Bernavis that can be performed in the second pseudo-BIG, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the second Bernavi count counter is decremented by 1 each time a Bernavi is performed in the second pseudo-BIG.

If it is determined in step S4424 that the normal reply has not been won, or after executing the processing of step S4427, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4422 that a replay has not been determined as the internal winning role, the main CPU 101 determines whether a bell navi has occurred (step S4428). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether a push order bell (any of "F_213 Bell A," "F_213 Bell B," "F_213 Bell C," "F_213 Bell D," "F_231 Bell A," "F_231 Bell B," "F_231 Bell C," "F_231 Bell D," "F_312 Bell A," "F_312 Bell B," "F_312 Bell C," "F_312 Bell D," "F_321 Bell A," "F_321 Bell B," "F_321 Bell C," and "F_321 Bell D" (see Figures 83A and 83B)) has been determined as the internal winning role. As mentioned above, in the pseudo BIG mode, if the push order bell is determined to be the internal winning combination, information on the stopping operation to make the push order bell win is announced (bell navigation is performed).

If it is determined that a Bernavi event has occurred, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first Bernavi event count counter (see step S4404 in FIG. 144) (step S4429). The main CPU 101 then determines whether the value of the first Bernavi event count counter is 0 (step S4430). If it is determined that the value of the first Bernavi event count counter is 0, the main CPU 101 executes pseudo BIG end processing (1) (step S4431). The pseudo BIG end processing (1) will be described later using FIG. 148.

If it is determined in step S4428 that a Bernavi event has not occurred, if it is determined in step S4430 that the value of the first Bernavi event counter is not 0, or after executing the processing of step S4431, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S4421 that control is not being performed by the first pseudo BIG (control is being performed by the second pseudo BIG), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a Bell Navi has occurred (step S4432). This process is the same as the process in step S4428. If it is determined that a Bell Navi has not occurred, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a Bernavi event has occurred, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second Bernavi event count counter (see step S4427) (step S4433). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the second Bernavi event count counter is 0 (step S4434). If it is determined that the value of the second Bernavi event count counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the second Bernavi counter is 0, it determines whether the value of the normal RIP remaining winning counter (see step S4425) is 0 (step S4435). If it determines that the value of the normal RIP remaining winning counter is 0, it executes pseudo BIG end processing (2) (step S4436). Pseudo BIG end processing (2) will be described later using FIG. 150.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the normal remaining winning count counter is not 0, it sets the first pseudo BIG (step S4437). This causes a transition from the second pseudo BIG to the first pseudo BIG.

After executing step S4436 or step S4437, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Pseudo BIG End Processing (1)>
148 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-BIG end processing (1) performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a lottery table when the number of successful rep is insufficient.

The pseudo BIG termination process (1) shown in Figure 148 is performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4431 of Figure 147 (pseudo BIG counter management process). This process is also performed when the above-mentioned condition for terminating the pseudo BIG, "(i) the value of the first Bernavi counter is 0," is met.

In the pseudo-BIG end processing (1), the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the pseudo-BIG stock counter (see step S4407 in FIG. 144) is 2 or greater (step S4441).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is less than 2, it determines whether the value of the first pseudo BIG hit rep counter (see step S4423 in FIG. 147) is 2 or less (step S4442).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the first pseudo-BIG successful reply counter is 2 or less, it executes a lottery process for when the number of successful replies is insufficient (step S4443). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for when the number of successful replies is insufficient (see FIG. 149) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the lottery for when the number of successful replies is insufficient: "No Winning Lottery," "Pseudo-BIG," or "Pseudo-BIG (ED)."

In the lottery table for when the number of successful replays is insufficient shown in Figure 149, a lottery value corresponding to the outcome of the lottery for when the number of successful replays is insufficient ("non-winning," "pseudo BIG," and "pseudo BIG (ED)") is specified for each value of the successful replay counter during the first pseudo BIG, i.e., the number of times a replay was determined as an internal winning role during the first pseudo BIG ("0 times," "1 time," and "2 times"). The probability of each outcome of the lottery for when the number of successful replays is insufficient can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random denominator: 256)."

For example, if the value of the successful reply counter during the first pseudo-BIG is "1," the result of the lottery when the number of successful replies is insufficient will be a "no win" with a probability of 224/256, and a "pseudo-BIG" with a probability of 32/256. If a "pseudo-BIG" is determined as the result of the lottery when the number of successful replies is insufficient (if the lottery when the number of successful replies is insufficient is won), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the pseudo-BIG stock counter.

If it is determined in step S4442 that the value of the first pseudo-BIG successful replay counter is 3 or greater, or after executing the processing of step S4443, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the pseudo-BIG stock counter is 1 or greater (step S4444).

If it is determined in step S4441 that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is 2 or greater, or if it is determined in step S4444 that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is 1 or greater, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG continuation flag to ON (step S4445). The pseudo BIG continuation flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo BIG will continue. The main CPU 101 executes the pseudo BIG start processing (see FIG. 144) in the game start state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the pseudo BIG continuation flag was set to ON. This allows the pseudo BIG to continue.

Furthermore, when the main CPU 101 executes the processing of step S4445, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter. Note that if it is determined that the number of times controlled to pseudo BIG (the pseudo BIG start processing is executed) during one advantageous period will be three or more times, it is possible not to subtract from the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter. In this case, it is determined that pseudo BIG (ED) (pseudo BIG will continue until the advantageous period ends) will occur.

If it is determined in step S4444 that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 determines whether the consecutive win challenge flag is set to ON (step S4446). As described above, the consecutive win challenge flag is a flag that indicates that the consecutive win challenge has been won (see step S4408 in FIG. 144).

If it is determined that the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive win challenge transition flag to ON (step S4447). As described above, the consecutive win challenge transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the consecutive win challenge. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the consecutive win challenge transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the consecutive win challenge.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the non-advantageous zone transition flag to ON (step S4448). The non-advantageous zone transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the non-advantageous zone. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the non-advantageous zone transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the non-advantageous zone.

After executing the processing of step S4445, step S4447, or step S4448, if the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the flag to OFF and ends this subroutine. Note that if the pseudo-BIG continues, the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is carried over, and in this case, the consecutive win challenge lottery processing at the start of the pseudo-BIG (see step S4408 in FIG. 144) may not be performed.

<Processing at the end of pseudo-BIG (2)>
Fig. 150 is a flowchart showing the pseudo BIG end process (2) performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 151 is a diagram showing a consecutive chance challenge lottery table at the end of the final second pseudo BIG.

The Pseudo BIG End Processing (2) shown in Figure 150 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S4436 of Figure 147 (Pseudo BIG Counter Management Processing). This processing is also performed when the above-mentioned Pseudo BIG end condition, "(ii) the value of the normal RIP remaining winning count counter is 0 and the value of the second Bernavi count counter is 0," is met.

In the pseudo-BIG end processing (2), the main CPU 101 first determines whether the value of the pseudo-BIG stock counter (see step S4407 in FIG. 144) is 1 or greater (step S4461).

If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is 1 or greater, it sets the pseudo BIG continuation flag to ON (step S4462). As described above, the pseudo BIG continuation flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo BIG will continue. The main CPU 101 executes the pseudo BIG start processing (see FIG. 144) in the game start state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the pseudo BIG continuation flag was set to ON. This allows the pseudo BIG to continue.

Furthermore, when the main CPU 101 executes the processing of step S4462, it subtracts 1 from the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter. Note that if it is determined that the number of times controlled to pseudo BIG (the pseudo BIG start processing is executed) during one advantageous period will be three or more times, it is possible not to subtract from the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter. In this case, it is determined that pseudo BIG (ED) (pseudo BIG will continue until the advantageous period ends) will occur.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is less than 1 (0), it determines whether the consecutive win challenge flag is set to ON (step S4463). As described above, the consecutive win challenge flag is a flag that indicates that the consecutive win challenge has been won (see step S4408 in FIG. 144).

If it is determined that the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes the consecutive win challenge lottery process at the end of the final second pseudo BIG (step S4464). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive win challenge lottery table at the end of the final second pseudo BIG (see FIG. 151) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine whether the result of the consecutive win challenge lottery at the end of the final second pseudo BIG will be "not a winning lottery" or "a winning lottery."

The consecutive win challenge lottery table at the end of the final second pseudo BIG shown in Figure 151 is provided for each value of the first Bernavi count counter when the final second pseudo BIG is entered ("less than 6" and "6 or more"). The value of the first Bernavi count counter when the final second pseudo BIG is entered is the value of the first Bernavi count counter (see step S4429 in Figure 147) when the final (third) second pseudo BIG is entered (when the processing of step S4425 is performed and the value of the normal remaining winning count counter is 0). If the value of the first Bernavi number counter when the final second pseudo BIG is entered is less than "6", the consecutive win challenge lottery table at the end of the final second pseudo BIG shown in Figure 151 (a) is referenced, and if the value of the first Bernavi number counter when the final second pseudo BIG is entered is "6" or greater, the consecutive win challenge lottery table at the end of the final second pseudo BIG shown in Figure 151 (b) is referenced.

In each Final Second Pseudo BIG End Consecutive Winning Challenge Lottery Table, a lottery value corresponding to the outcome of the Final Second Pseudo BIG End Consecutive Winning Challenge Lottery ("No Winning" and "Winning") is specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each outcome of the Final Second Pseudo BIG End Consecutive Winning Challenge Lottery can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that outcome / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random denominator: 256)."

As a result, if the value of the first Bernavi counter when the final second pseudo BIG is entered is less than "6," there is a 256/256 probability of losing the consecutive win challenge lottery at the end of the final second pseudo BIG, regardless of the set value. Also, if the value of the first Bernavi counter when the final second pseudo BIG is entered is "6" or greater, there is a 2/256 probability of winning the consecutive win challenge lottery at the end of the final second pseudo BIG, regardless of the set value. After executing the processing of step S4464, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the consecutive win challenge lottery at the end of the final second pseudo BIG is won (step S4465).

If it is determined in step S4463 that the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is set to ON, or if it is determined in step S4465 that the consecutive win challenge lottery at the end of the final second pseudo-BIG has been won, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive win challenge transition flag to ON (step S4466). As described above, the consecutive win challenge transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the consecutive win challenge. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the consecutive win challenge transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the consecutive win challenge.

If it is determined in step S4465 that the player has not won the consecutive-win challenge lottery at the end of the final second pseudo-BIG, the main CPU 101 sets the non-advantageous zone transition flag to ON (step S4467). As described above, the non-advantageous zone transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the non-advantageous zone. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the non-advantageous zone transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the non-advantageous zone.

The zone lamp (also called the status indicator or advantageous zone lamp) that was lit during the advantageous zone will change from lit to unlit after all reels have stopped for the game in which a transition to a non-advantageous zone has been determined. As explained in the first embodiment, the zone lamp lights up to indicate that the current state is within the advantageous zone.

After executing the processing of step S4462, step S4466, or step S4467, if the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the flag to OFF and ends this subroutine. Note that if the pseudo-BIG continues, the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is carried over, and in this case, the consecutive win challenge lottery processing at the start of the pseudo-BIG (see step S4408 in FIG. 144) may not be performed.

<Processing at the start of a pseudo-REG game>
Fig. 152 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-REG game start processing performed in the main control circuit. Fig. 153 is a diagram showing a pseudo-REG start consecutive game challenge lottery table. Fig. 154 is a diagram showing a pseudo-REG 1G consecutive game lottery table.

The pseudo-REG game start processing shown in Figure 152 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the processing of step S6 (game start state control processing) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is pseudo-REG (see Figure 88) (for example, when the judgment result of step S85 of Figure 27 is "NO"). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area (see Figure 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the pseudo-REG game start processing, the main CPU 101 first determines whether it is the start of the pseudo-REG (step S4481). As described above, transition to the pseudo-REG occurs during the game start state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the final game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance game count counter: 0). In the game start state control processing for a unit game that transitions to a pseudo-REG, the payout state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to transition to the pseudo-REG, and then the pseudo-REG game start processing shown in FIG. 152 is performed. In the processing of step S4481, the main CPU 101 determines that it is the start of the pseudo-REG if the current unit game has transitioned to the pseudo-REG (if the current unit game is the first game of the pseudo-REG).

If it is determined that the pseudo-REG has started, the main CPU 101 sets the second Bernavi count counter to "5" (step S4482). As described above, the value of the second Bernavi count counter indicates the remaining number of Bernavis that can be executed in the pseudo-REG, and is stored in the main RAM 103. The value of the second Bernavi count counter is decremented by 1 each time a Bernavi is executed in the pseudo-REG.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo-REG start consecutive-game challenge lottery process (step S4483). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo-REG start consecutive-game challenge lottery table (see FIG. 153) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine whether the result of the pseudo-REG start consecutive-game challenge lottery will be a "no win" or a "win."

The pseudo-REG start consecutive-win challenge lottery table shown in FIG. 153 is provided for each value of the advantageous zone play count counter for ball output ("199 or less" and "200 or more"). The advantageous zone play count counter for ball output is the advantageous zone game count counter described above, and the value of the advantageous zone play count counter for ball output indicates the number of unit plays performed in the advantageous zone and is stored in main RAM 103. Although not shown, the value of the advantageous zone play count counter for ball output is incremented only in the advantageous zone and is cleared when transitioning to a non-advantageous zone. If the value of the advantageous zone play count counter for ball output is "199" or less, the pseudo-REG start consecutive-win challenge lottery table shown in FIG. 153(a) is referenced, and if the value of the advantageous zone play count counter for ball output is "200" or more, the pseudo-REG start consecutive-win challenge lottery table shown in FIG. 153(b) is referenced.

In each Pseudo-REG Start Consecutive-Hour Challenge Lottery Table, a lottery value corresponding to the outcome of the Pseudo-REG Start Consecutive-Hour Challenge Lottery ("Non-Winning" and "Winning") is specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6"). The probability of each outcome of the Pseudo-REG Start Consecutive-Hour Challenge Lottery can be expressed as "the lottery value specified for that outcome / the number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." As a result, if the value of the advantageous zone play count counter for ball output is "199" or less, there is a 1 in 256 probability of winning the Pseudo-REG Start Consecutive-Hour Challenge Lottery, regardless of the setting value. Also, for example, if the value of the advantageous zone play count counter for ball output is 200 or more and the setting value is set to 6, there is a 40/256 chance of winning the consecutive win challenge lottery at the start of the pseudo-REG.

If the consecutive-game challenge lottery at the start of the pseudo-REG is won, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive-game challenge winning flag to ON. As described above, the consecutive-game challenge winning flag is a flag indicating that the consecutive-game challenge has been won. Details will be described later, but if the consecutive-game challenge is won, the game will transition to the consecutive-game challenge when the pseudo-REG termination condition is met (see transition condition (M) in Figures 89 and 90).

If it is determined in step S4481 that the pseudo-REG has not yet started, or after executing the processing of step S4483, the main CPU 101 executes a 1G consecutive lottery process during the pseudo-REG (step S4484). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the 1G consecutive lottery table during the pseudo-REG (see FIG. 154) and performs a lottery based on the payout flag (see FIG. 92) in payout flag group 6 and the random number value, thereby determining the result of the 1G consecutive lottery during the pseudo-REG as either "No Winning Lottery," "Pseudo BIG," or "Pseudo BIG (ED)."

The pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 154 is provided for each of the payout flags in payout flag group 6 ("Other," "Reach mark," "Reach mark BB," and "1 coin role"). If the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Other," the pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 154(a) is referenced. If the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Reach mark," the pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 154(b) is referenced. If the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Reach mark BB," the pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 154(c) is referenced. If the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "1 coin role," the pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 154(d) is referenced.

In each pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery table, lottery values corresponding to the results of the pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery are specified. The probability of each result of the pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)." For example, if the payout flag in payout flag group 6 is "Reach Eye BB," the results of the pseudo-REG 1G consecutive lottery are "Non-Winning" with a probability of 240/256, "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 15/256, and "Pseudo BIG (ED)" with a probability of 1/256.

If "Pseudo BIG" or "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as the result of the 1G consecutive lottery during the pseudo-REG (if the 1G consecutive lottery is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo-BIG winning flag to ON. As described above, the pseudo-BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo-BIG has been won. Also, if "Pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as the result of the 1G consecutive lottery during the pseudo-REG (if the pseudo-BIG (ED) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo-BIG (ED) flag to ON. As described above, if the pseudo-BIG (ED) flag is set to ON, the pseudo-BIG will be controlled again when the pseudo-BIG end condition is met, and as a result, the pseudo-BIG will continue until the advantageous zone ends.

After executing step S4484, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Pseudo REG Counter Management Processing>
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the pseudo-REG counter management process performed in the main control circuit.

The pseudo-REG counter management process shown in Figure 155 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S15 (game end state control process) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is pseudo-REG (see Figure 88). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area (see Figure 20) in the main RAM 103.

In the pseudo-REG counter management process, the main CPU 101 first determines whether or not a Bernavi has occurred (step S4501). This process is similar to the process of step S4428 in FIG. 147, so a description of this process will be omitted here. If it is determined that a Bernavi has not occurred, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that a Bernavi event has occurred, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second Bernavi event count counter (see step S4482 in FIG. 152) (step S4502). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the second Bernavi event count counter is 0 (step S4503). If it is determined that the value of the second Bernavi event count counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the second Bernavi count counter is 0, it determines whether the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON (step S4504). As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo BIG has been won (see step S4484 in FIG. 152).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG transition flag to ON (step S4505). As described above, the pseudo BIG transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the pseudo BIG. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the pseudo BIG transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the pseudo BIG (see transition condition (N) in FIGS. 89 and 90).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo-BIG winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the consecutive-game challenge winning flag is set to ON (step S4506). As described above, the consecutive-game challenge winning flag is a flag that indicates that the consecutive-game challenge has been won (see step S4483 in FIG. 152).

If it is determined that the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive win challenge transition flag to ON (step S4507). As described above, the consecutive win challenge transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the consecutive win challenge. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the consecutive win challenge transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the consecutive win challenge.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the consecutive win challenge lottery flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the non-advantageous zone transition flag to ON (step S4508). The non-advantageous zone transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the non-advantageous zone. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the non-advantageous zone transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the non-advantageous zone.

After executing the processing of step S4505, step S4507, or step S4508, if the pseudo-BIG winning flag or the consecutive-game challenge winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets these flags to OFF and ends this subroutine. Note that when transitioning to pseudo-BIG, the consecutive-game challenge winning flag is carried over, and in this case, the consecutive-game challenge lottery processing at the start of pseudo-BIG (see step S4408 in FIG. 144) may not be performed.

So far, we have explained the processing related to pseudo-REGs, but as mentioned above, pseudo-REGs have a lower advantage in terms of ball output than pseudo-BIGs. For this reason, it is desirable to be able to execute setting suggestion effects, etc., during pseudo-REGs or at the end of pseudo-REGs, that do not occur during pseudo-BIGs, in order to minimize the decline in player interest. As setting suggestion effects, it is possible to adopt the aspects described in the above-mentioned embodiments as appropriate.

<Processing at the start of play for consecutive challenge>
Fig. 156 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of consecutive games in the challenge game, which is carried out in the main control circuit. Fig. 157 is a diagram showing a pseudo-bonus lottery table at the start of the consecutive games challenge. Fig. 158 is a diagram showing a game number lottery table at the start of the consecutive games challenge. Fig. 159 is a diagram showing a lottery table during the consecutive games challenge. Fig. 160 is a diagram showing a regular transition lottery table at the end of the consecutive games challenge.

The game start processing for consecutive win challenge shown in Figure 156 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in the processing of step S6 (game start state control processing) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is consecutive win challenge (see Figure 88) (for example, when the judgment result of step S85 of Figure 27 is "NO"). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area (see Figure 20) of the main RAM 103.

In the game start processing for the consecutive win challenge, the main CPU 101 first determines whether it is the start of the consecutive win challenge (step S4521). As described above, the transition to the consecutive win challenge occurs in the game start state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the consecutive win challenge transition flag (see step S4003 in FIG. 93, step S4027 in FIG. 95, step S4447 in FIG. 148, step S4466 in FIG. 150, and step S4507 in FIG. 155) is set to on. In the game start state control processing for the unit game that transitions to the consecutive win challenge, the payout state flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is updated to transition to the consecutive win challenge, and then the game start processing for the consecutive win challenge shown in FIG. 156 is performed. In the processing of step S4521, if the current unit game has transitioned to a consecutive game challenge (if the current unit game is the first game of the consecutive game challenge), the main CPU 101 determines that it is time to start the consecutive game challenge.

If it is determined that it is the start of a consecutive-game challenge, the main CPU 101 executes a consecutive-game challenge start pseudo-bonus lottery process (step S4522). In this process, the main CPU 101 references the consecutive-game challenge start pseudo-bonus lottery table (see FIG. 157) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the consecutive-game challenge start pseudo-bonus lottery: "No Win," "Promotion Chance," "Pseudo BIG," or "Pseudo BIG (ED)."

In the pseudo bonus lottery table at the start of the consecutive win challenge shown in FIG. 157, lottery values corresponding to the results of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive win challenge ("No Win," "Promotion Chance," "Pseudo BIG," and "Pseudo BIG (ED)") are specified for each setting value ("Setting 1," "Setting 2," "Setting 3," "Setting 4," "Setting 5," and "Setting 6") and "Definite Consecutive Win Challenge." "Definite Consecutive Win Challenge" indicates that the confirmed consecutive win challenge flag (see step S4003 in FIG. 93 and step S4029 in FIG. 95) is set to on. The probability of each result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive win challenge being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

As a result, if the confirmed consecutive win challenge flag is not set on, the result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive win challenge will be a "no win" with a probability of 178/256, a "promotion chance" with a probability of 77/256, and a "pseudo BIG" with a probability of 1/256, regardless of the set value. Also, if the confirmed consecutive win challenge flag is set on, the result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive win challenge will be a "promotion chance" with a probability of 224/256, a "pseudo BIG" with a probability of 31/256, and a "pseudo BIG (ED)" with a probability of 1/256, regardless of the set value. In other words, if the confirmed consecutive win challenge flag is set on, it is determined that the game will transition to either the pseudo BIG or the promotion chance.

If a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive-game challenge (if the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag to ON. As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won. Also, if a "pseudo BIG" or "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive-game challenge (if the pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG winning flag to ON. As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo BIG has been won. Furthermore, if a "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive win challenge (if a pseudo BIG (ED) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG (ED) flag to ON. As described above, if the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set to ON, control is again given to pseudo BIG when the pseudo BIG end condition is met, and thus pseudo BIG will continue until the advantageous zone ends.

After executing the processing of step S4522, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process for determining the number of plays at the start of a consecutive challenge (step S4523). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive challenge start number of plays lottery table (see FIG. 158) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the result of the consecutive challenge start number of plays lottery (number of consecutive challenge plays) as one of "1," "2," "3," or "4."

In the consecutive-game challenge start play count lottery table shown in Figure 158, a lottery value corresponding to the result of the consecutive-game challenge start play count lottery ("1," "2," "3," and "4") is specified for each result of the consecutive-game challenge start pseudo bonus lottery (see step S4522) ("No Win," "Promotion Chance," "Pseudo BIG," and "Pseudo BIG (ED)"). The probability of each result of the consecutive-game challenge start play count lottery being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

As a result, if the result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive challenge is "no win," the result of the lottery for the number of plays at the start of the consecutive challenge (number of plays in the consecutive challenge) will be determined to be "3" with a probability of 256/256. Also, if the result of the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive challenge is "promotion chance," "pseudo BIG," or "pseudo BIG (ED)," the result of the lottery for the number of plays at the start of the consecutive challenge (number of plays in the consecutive challenge) will be determined to be "3" with a probability of 192/256, and "4" with a probability of 64/256.

After executing the processing of step S4523, the main CPU 101 sets the number of consecutive challenge games determined in step S4523 in the consecutive challenge game number counter (step S4524). The value of the consecutive challenge game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games that can be played in the consecutive challenge, and is stored in the main RAM 103. As described below, the value of the consecutive challenge game number counter is decremented by one each time a unit game is played.

If it is determined in step S4521 that the consecutive-game challenge has not yet begun, or after executing the processing of step S4524, the main CPU 101 executes a consecutive-game challenge lottery process (step S4525). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the consecutive-game challenge lottery table (see FIG. 159) and performs a lottery based on the payout flags (see FIG. 92) in payout flag group 2 and the random number value, thereby determining the result of the consecutive-game challenge lottery as either "No Win," "Promotion Chance," "Pseudo BIG," or "Pseudo BIG (ED)."

In the lottery table during consecutive wins challenge shown in Figure 159, lottery values corresponding to the results of the lottery during consecutive wins challenge ("No Win", "Promotion Chance", "Pseudo BIG", and "Pseudo BIG (ED)") are specified for each payout flag in payout flag group 2 ("Other", "Weak Rare Role", "Diagonal Watermelon", "Reach Eye", and "Reach Eye BB"). The probability of each result of the lottery during consecutive wins challenge being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)".

As a result, if the payout flag in payout flag group 2 is "Other," the result of the lottery during the consecutive win challenge will be "No Win" with a probability of 256/256. Also, if the payout flag in payout flag group 2 is "Weak Rare Role," the result of the lottery during the consecutive win challenge will be "Promotion Chance" with a probability of 256/256. Also, if the payout flag in payout flag group 2 is "Diagonal Watermelon" or "Reach Eye," the result of the lottery during the consecutive win challenge will be "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 256/256. Also, if the payout flag in payout flag group 2 is "Reach Eye BB," the result of the lottery during the consecutive win challenge will be "Pseudo BIG" with a probability of 255/256, and "Pseudo BIG (ED)" with a probability of 1/256.

If a "promotion chance" is determined as a result of the lottery during the consecutive-game challenge (if the promotion chance is won), the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance winning flag on. As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag indicating that the promotion chance has been won. Furthermore, if a "pseudo BIG" or "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the lottery during the consecutive-game challenge (if the pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG winning flag on. As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo BIG has been won. Furthermore, if a "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the lottery during the consecutive-game challenge (if the pseudo BIG (ED) is won), the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG (ED) flag on. As mentioned above, if the pseudo BIG (ED) flag is set to ON, the pseudo BIG will be activated again when the pseudo BIG termination conditions are met, and the pseudo BIG will continue until the advantageous period ends.

In addition, when the promotion chance lottery flag is set to ON and "pseudo BIG" or "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as the result of the consecutive-game challenge lottery (a pseudo BIG is won), the main CPU 101 discards the promotion chance lottery flag (sets it to OFF). Also, if the result determined in this consecutive-game challenge lottery is less favorable than the results determined in the previous consecutive-game challenge lottery or consecutive-game challenge start pseudo bonus lottery (see step S4522), the main CPU 101 discards the result determined in this consecutive-game challenge lottery.

After executing the processing of step S4525, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the consecutive challenge play count counter (see step S4524) is 1 (step S4526). A value of 1 in the consecutive challenge play count counter means that the unit play in question is the final game of the consecutive challenge. If it is determined that the value of the consecutive challenge play count counter is not 1, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the consecutive challenge game number counter is 1, it determines whether the promotion chance winning flag or pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON (step S4527). If it determines that the promotion chance winning flag or pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that neither the promotion chance lottery flag nor the pseudo BIG lottery flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery process for transitioning to normal at the end of a consecutive game challenge (step S4528). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for transitioning to normal at the end of a consecutive game challenge (see FIG. 160) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine either the "non-advantageous zone" or "preparation for consecutive games" as the result of the lottery for transitioning to normal at the end of a consecutive game challenge.

In the lottery table for transitioning to normal at the end of a consecutive win challenge shown in Figure 160, lottery values corresponding to the results of the lottery for transitioning to normal at the end of a consecutive win challenge ("non-advantageous zone" and "consecutive win preparation") are specified for each of "Other" and "Pseudo Bonus → Consecutive Win Challenge." "Pseudo Bonus → Consecutive Win Challenge" indicates that the ball output state from which the current transition to the consecutive win challenge begins is a pseudo bonus (pseudo BIG or pseudo REG). "Other" indicates that the ball output state from which the current transition to the consecutive win challenge begins is a ball output state other than a pseudo bonus (pseudo BIG or pseudo REG). The probability of each outcome of the lottery for transitioning to normal at the end of a consecutive win challenge being determined can be expressed as "lottery value specified for that result / number of all random number values that can be drawn (random number denominator: 256)."

As a result, if the ball output state from which you are currently transitioning to the consecutive win challenge is a pseudo-bonus (pseudo-BIG or pseudo-REG), the result of the regular transition lottery at the end of the consecutive win challenge will determine a "non-advantageous zone" with a probability of 256/256. Also, if the ball output state from which you are currently transitioning to the consecutive win challenge is a ball output state other than a pseudo-bonus (pseudo-BIG or pseudo-REG), the result of the regular transition lottery at the end of the consecutive win challenge will determine a "consecutive win preparation" with a probability of 256/256.

In other words, when a transition is made from a pseudo-BIG or pseudo-REG to a consecutive-game challenge (see step S4447 in FIG. 148, step S4466 in FIG. 150, and step S4507 in FIG. 155), the result of the lottery for normal transition at the end of the consecutive-game challenge, which is performed in the final game of the consecutive-game challenge, is always determined to be the "non-advantageous zone." Also, when a transition is made from a non-advantageous zone or consecutive-game challenge preparation to a consecutive-game challenge (see step S4003 in FIG. 93 and step S4027 in FIG. 95), the result of the lottery for normal transition at the end of the consecutive-game challenge, which is performed in the final game of the consecutive-game challenge, is always determined to be the "consecutive-game preparation."

If a "non-advantageous zone" is determined as a result of the normal transition lottery at the end of a consecutive game challenge, the main CPU 101 sets the non-advantageous zone transition reservation flag to on. The non-advantageous zone transition reservation flag is a flag indicating that the start of a non-advantageous zone has been reserved. Also, if a "consecutive game preparation" is determined as a result of the normal transition lottery at the end of a consecutive game challenge, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive game preparation transition reservation flag to on. The consecutive game preparation transition reservation flag is a flag indicating that the start of consecutive game preparation has been reserved.

After executing step S4528, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Counter management process for consecutive challenge>
Figure 161 is a flowchart showing the counter management process for consecutive game challenges performed in the main control circuit.

The counter management process for consecutive win challenge shown in Figure 161 is a process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S15 (game end state control process) of Figure 23 (main processing) when the current ball output state is consecutive win challenge (see Figure 88). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current ball output state by referring to the ball output state flag storage area (see Figure 20) in the main RAM 103.

In the consecutive-game challenge counter management process, the main CPU 101 first subtracts 1 from the value of the consecutive-game challenge play count counter (see step S4524 in FIG. 156) (step S4541). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the consecutive-game challenge play count counter is 0 (step S4542). If the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the consecutive-game challenge play count counter is not 0, it terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the consecutive challenge game count counter is 0, it determines whether the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON (step S4543). As described above, the pseudo BIG winning flag is a flag indicating that a pseudo BIG has been won (see steps S4522 and S4525 in FIG. 156).

If it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo BIG transition flag to ON (step S4544). As described above, the pseudo BIG transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the pseudo BIG. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the pseudo BIG transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the pseudo BIG (see transition condition (P) in FIGS. 89 and 90).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo BIG winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON (step S4545). As described above, the promotion chance winning flag is a flag that indicates that the promotion chance has been won (see steps S4522 and S4525 in FIG. 156).

If it is determined that the promotion chance winning flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the promotion chance transition flag to ON (step S4546). As described above, the promotion chance transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the promotion chance. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the promotion chance transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the promotion chance (see transition condition (O) in FIGS. 89 and 90).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion chance lottery flag is not set on, the main CPU 101 determines whether the consecutive-game preparation transition reservation flag (see step S4528 in FIG. 156) is set on (step S4547). If it is determined that the consecutive-game preparation transition reservation flag is set on, the main CPU 101 sets the consecutive-game preparation transition flag on (step S4548). As described above, the consecutive-game preparation transition flag is a flag that indicates that it is time to start preparation for consecutive games. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the consecutive-game preparation transition flag was set on. This causes a transition to consecutive-game preparation (see transition condition (R) in FIGS. 89 and 90).

If the determination result of step S4547 is "NO," this means that the non-advantageous zone transition reservation flag (see step S4528 in FIG. 156) has been set to ON. If it is determined in step S4547 that the consecutive win preparation transition reservation flag has not been set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the non-advantageous zone transition flag to ON (step S4549). As described above, the non-advantageous zone transition flag is a flag that indicates the timing to start the non-advantageous zone. The main CPU 101 updates the payout status flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start status control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) for the unit game following the unit game in which the non-advantageous zone transition flag was set to ON. This causes a transition to the non-advantageous zone (see transition condition (Q) in FIGS. 89 and 90).

After executing step S4544, step S4546, step S4548, or step S4549, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

As explained above, while there is a possibility of transitioning to the Consecutive Chance Challenge when the Pseudo BIG or Pseudo REG ends, there is a relatively high probability of winning the Pseudo BIG or Promotion Chance. As a result, when transitioning from Pseudo BIG or Pseudo REG to the Consecutive Chance Challenge, players will play with the aim of transitioning back to Pseudo BIG or Pseudo REG (playing a consecutive challeng).

In addition, in the above, it has been explained that in the final game of a consecutive-game challenge, a consecutive-game challenge lottery (see step S4525 in FIG. 156) is conducted, followed by a consecutive-game challenge end normal transition lottery (see step S4528 in FIG. 156). However, as will be explained below, in the final game of a consecutive-game challenge, a consecutive-game challenge lottery may be conducted after a consecutive-game challenge end normal transition lottery. In this case, after the consecutive-game challenge preparation transition reservation flag or non-advantageous zone transition reservation flag is set on by the consecutive-game challenge end normal transition lottery, the consecutive-game challenge lottery may set on the pseudo-BIG lottery flag or promotion chance lottery flag. In this case, the game will transition to a pseudo-BIG or promotion chance (see steps S4544 and S4546 in FIG. 161), and when the processing of step S4544 or step S4546 is executed, the consecutive win preparation transition reservation flag or non-advantageous zone transition reservation flag may be set to off (discarded).

[Modification of the Fourth Embodiment (Penalty)]
The gameplay of the pachislot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has been described above. The gameplay can be created by performing the processes described using Figures 93 to 161, but the processes for realizing the gameplay are not limited to the above examples. In the modified example described below, a penalty is incurred if a player plays using a specific game method.

Regarding penalties, the first embodiment described a case in which a specific role is provided in which the number of medals awarded varies depending on the player's stop operation mode (which may be the timing of the stop operation, the order in which the buttons are pressed, or a combination of these) (for example, eight medals are paid out if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct), and one medal or no medal is paid out if the stop operation mode is inappropriate (incorrect)).

Furthermore, it was explained that if a specific role is won in a specific game state, and eight coins are paid out, a decision will not be made as to whether or not to change the degree of advantage for transitioning to an AT state in this game to a more advantageous one (this may include a decision as to whether or not to transition directly to an AT state, or whether or not to directly extend the game period in that AT state; hereinafter referred to as an "advantageous decision"). However, if eight coins are not paid out, it is possible to make the advantageous decision for this game. In this specification, this restriction on making advantageous decisions is referred to as a "penalty."

As an example of such a penalty, a modified version of the first gaming machine (see Figures 68 to 80) was described in which, when a predetermined role (for example, the push order bell) is determined as the winning role, if a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, the first left stop), the AT-related processing is favored, and if a stop operation is not performed in that specific mode, the AT-related processing is disadvantaged. The matters described as a modified version of the first gaming machine can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment, as long as the basic playability of the pachislot machine 1 of this embodiment is not compromised.

Here, the push order bell in this embodiment, like the push order bell in the modified version of the first gaming machine, results in different combinations (combinations of symbols) that stop and are displayed along the pay line depending on the order (push order) of the stop operations on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and as a result, the number of medals paid out also differs. Furthermore, this push order bell constitutes the biased bell described above.

As a result, similar to the modified example of the first gaming machine, in a unit game in which the push order bell (biased bell) has been determined as the internal winning role, the expected value of the number of medals paid out when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (e.g., first stop on the left) is smaller than the expected value of the number of medals paid out when a stop operation is not performed in that specific mode. Furthermore, regardless of whether the push order bell (biased bell) has been determined as the internal winning role, in one unit game, the expected value of the number of medals paid out when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (e.g., first stop on the left) is smaller than the expected value of the number of medals paid out when a stop operation is not performed in that specific mode. Furthermore, in the non-AT state as a whole, the expected value of the number of medals paid out when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (e.g., first stop on the left) in all unit games in the non-AT state is smaller than the expected value of the number of medals paid out when a stop operation is not performed in that specific mode in all unit games in the non-AT state.

The following describes a case in which, similar to the modified example of the first gaming machine, specifications are adopted that favor AT-related processing when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, the first left stop), and disadvantage AT-related processing when a stop operation is not performed in that specific mode.

In addition, "AT-related processing" includes processing for directly deciding to transition to the AT state (conducting an AT transition lottery), processing for deciding to transition to the CZ state (CZ) (conducting a CZ transition lottery), processing for setting the period during which the CZ state can continue (CZ period) (conducting a CZ period lottery), processing for deciding to transition to a relatively advantageous AT state among multiple types of AT states (advantage of the AT state) (conducting an AT advantage lottery), and processing for determining the mode referenced in the AT transition lottery, CZ transition lottery, or AT advantage lottery. The concept includes processing for setting the mode (reference mode) (holding a reference mode lottery), processing for shortening the period for which a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) can continue, processing for determining the state (reference mode) to transition to after the relatively advantageous state (reference mode) ends (holding a lottery for transition after falling), processing related to the period until transition to the AT state or CZ state, processing related to the conditions for holding an AT transition lottery or CZ transition lottery, and processing for performing an effect that notifies transition to the AT state (AT confirmation effect).

Examples of AT states include pseudo-BIG (a relatively advantageous AT state) and pseudo-REG (a relatively disadvantageous AT state). The CZ state is a state in which it is easier to transition to the AT state than during normal play (an advantageous zone). During normal play (an advantageous zone), the normal stage can be mentioned, and examples of the CZ state include Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, and Consecutive Challenge. Promotion chance is a state in which transition to the AT state is confirmed, and such a state may also be included in the CZ state.

Examples of the above-mentioned "AT transition lottery" include the freeze lottery during the normal stage (see step S4081 in Figure 103), the long freeze lottery during the normal stage (see step S4102 in Figure 108), the lottery type lottery when the ceiling is reached (see step S4144 in Figure 112), the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage (see step S4306 in Figure 126), the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of a consecutive win challenge (see step S4522 in Figure 156), and the lottery during a consecutive win challenge (see step S4525 in Figure 156). In this example, essentially different AT transition lotteries are conducted during the normal stage (advantageous zone) and the CZ state, but the same AT transition lottery may also be conducted.

Examples of the above-mentioned "CZ transition lottery" include the consecutive win challenge transition lottery (see step S4027 in Figure 95), the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery (see step S4082 in Figure 103), and the point-reaching lottery (see step S4167 in Figure 114). Some of the lottery results for the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery and the point-reaching lottery determine a transition to the AT state, and so they also serve as AT transition lotteries.

Examples of the above-mentioned "CZ period lottery" include the lottery for the guaranteed number of chance stage plays at the start of the chance stage (see step S4303 in Figure 126), the lottery for adding the number of plays during the chance stage (see step S4308 in Figure 126), and the lottery for the number of plays at the start of a consecutive challenge (see step S4523 in Figure 156). The CZ period lottery includes a lottery for determining the initial value of the CZ period and a lottery for extending the CZ period.

Examples of the above-mentioned "AT advantage lottery" include the lottery at the time of transition to the promotion chance (see step S4284 in Figure 124), the long freeze lottery at the time of entry (see step S4363 in Figure 133), the lottery during the promotion chance (see step S4366 in Figure 133), and the pseudo-BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays has been played (see step S4369 in Figure 133). The AT advantage lottery can be conducted when it has been confirmed that the game will transition to the AT state.

Examples of the above-mentioned "reference mode lottery" include the consecutive win preparation mode lottery (see step S4024 and step S4026 in Figure 95), the consecutive win challenge transition confirmation lottery (see step S4029 in Figure 95), the normal transition mode lottery (see step S4061 in Figure 100), the point mode lottery (see step S4063 in Figure 100, step S4166 in Figure 114, and step S4283 in Figure 124), the normal specified number of plays high probability 1 transition lottery (see step S4123 in Figure 109), the high probability 2 transition lottery (see step S4262, step S4265, and step S4268 in Figure 122), and the promotion chance mode lottery (see step S4364 in Figure 133). The reference mode lottery includes a lottery to determine the initial value of the reference mode and a lottery to switch the reference mode.

Examples of the above-mentioned "processing for shortening the period during which a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) can be maintained" include processing for deciding to transition from a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) to an unfavorable state (reference mode) (conducting a fall lottery), and processing for reducing the remaining period during which a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) can be maintained. Examples of fall lotteries include the consecutive game preparation fall lottery (see step S4031 in Figure 95) and the high probability 2 fall lottery (see step S4272 in Figure 122). Examples of processing for reducing the remaining period during which a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) can be maintained include subtracting the value of the consecutive win preparation guaranteed play count counter (see step S4023 in FIG. 95), the value of the high probability 2 guaranteed play count counter (see steps S4263, S4266, and S4269 in FIG. 122), the value of the chance stage guaranteed play count counter (see step S4304 in FIG. 126), the value of the promotion chance play count counter (see step S4362 in FIG. 133), and the value of the consecutive win challenge play count counter (see step S4524 in FIG. 156). Examples of the transition destination lottery after the drop include the normal transition lottery at the end of the consecutive win challenge (see step S4528 in FIG. 156).

The above-mentioned "processing related to the period until transition to the AT state or CZ state" can include processing for determining the period until transition to the AT state or CZ state (conducting a premonition period lottery), and processing for reducing the remaining period until transition to the AT state or CZ state. Examples of the premonition period lottery include lottery for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo-BIG/promotion chance is won during the normal stage (see steps S4202, S4205, and S4207 in FIG. 118), lottery for the number of premonition plays when a chance stage is won during the normal stage (steps S4222 and S4224 in FIG. 119), and lottery for the number of premonition plays when a flag is won during the chance stage (see step S4324 in FIG. 130). An example of a process for reducing the remaining period until transition to the AT state or CZ state is to subtract from the value of the premonition play number counter (see steps S4203, S4206, and S4208 in FIG. 118, steps S4223 and S4225 in FIG. 119, and step S4325 in FIG. 130).

The above-mentioned "processing related to the conditions for conducting an AT transition lottery or a CZ transition lottery" can include processing for conducting a predetermined lottery if the condition is winning a predetermined lottery. If the condition is that a predetermined variable reaches a predetermined value, it can include processing for setting the predetermined value (conducting a condition-setting lottery) and processing for updating the predetermined variable. Examples of the predetermined lottery include a ceiling preparation flag set lottery (see step S4142 in FIG. 112). Examples of the condition-setting lottery include a normal transition ceiling lottery (see step S4062 in FIG. 100). Examples of the processing for updating the predetermined variable include processing for incrementing the value of the normal specified number of plays counter (see step S4121 in FIG. 109) and processing for incrementing the value of normal points (see step S4163 in FIG. 114).

The above-mentioned AT confirmation effect is an effect that is performed only when it is decided to transition to the AT state, and may be an effect that notifies the fact that the AT state will be transitioned to, or, if multiple types of AT states are provided, an effect that notifies the type of AT state to transition to (the result of the above-mentioned AT advantage lottery). The above-mentioned lock effect can be used as the AT confirmation effect, and the lock effect may be a lock effect accompanied by pseudo play, a lock effect accompanied by reel effect, or a lock effect (freeze) without reel effect or pseudo play. Examples of processing for performing pseudo play as an AT confirmation effect include next pseudo play lottery processing (see step S4367 in Figure 133) and current pseudo play lottery processing (see step S4370 in Figure 133). Examples of processing for performing a freeze as an AT confirmation effect include freeze lottery processing during the normal stage (see step S4081 in FIG. 103), long freeze lottery processing during normal play (see step S4102 in FIG. 108), and long freeze lottery processing upon entry (see step S4363 in FIG. 133).

Note that, while the above examples of AT-related processing have shown processing performed in states other than the AT state, AT-related processing also includes processing performed in the AT state. Furthermore, not only processing performed in advantageous zones, but also processing performed in non-advantageous zones can be considered AT-related processing as long as it falls under the aspects described above.

Examples of AT-related processing performed in the AT state include lottery processing for consecutive wins at the start of a pseudo-BIG (see step S4408 in FIG. 144), lottery processing for 1G consecutive wins (see step S4384 in FIG. 143 and step S4484 in FIG. 152), lottery processing for consecutive wins at the end of the final second pseudo-BIG (see step S4464 in FIG. 150), lottery processing when the number of successful rep is insufficient (see step S4443 in FIG. 148), etc. Examples of AT-related processing performed in a non-advantageous zone include lottery processing for transitioning to an advantageous zone (see step S4001 in FIG. 93, for example), lottery processing when transitioning to an advantageous zone (see step S4003 in FIG. 93), etc.

<Counter list>
FIG. 162 is a diagram showing a list of counters managed in the main control circuit.

In Figure 162, the name of each counter managed by the main control circuit 100, the clear timing, addition/subtraction timing, numerical range, and whether or not it is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 are shown in correspondence with each other. In the figure, "LEV" indicates when the start lever 7 is operated (when the start-of-game state control process (see step S6 in Figure 23) is performed), "3OFF" indicates when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning (when the end-of-game state control process (see step S15 in Figure 23) is performed), and "special prize in operation" indicates the bonus state (3BB game state shown in Figure 81). Note that in this example, AT-related processing is not performed in the bonus state, but AT-related processing may also be performed in the bonus state.

The consecutive win preparation guarantee play count counter manages the remaining number of unit games that guarantee staying in consecutive win preparation mode (see steps S4023 and S4025 in Figure 95). The value of the consecutive win preparation guarantee play count counter is decremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of play) for each unit game during consecutive win preparation mode, excluding when the special prize is activated, and is cleared when the ball output state transitions to a state other than consecutive win preparation mode. In addition, a consecutive win preparation drop-out lottery (see step S4031 in Figure 95) will be held from the unit game following the unit game in which the value of the consecutive win preparation guarantee play count counter reaches 0.

The advantageous zone play count counter for ball output is a counter that manages the number of unit plays played in the advantageous zone (see Figure 153). The value of the advantageous zone play count counter for ball output is incremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of play) for each unit play in the advantageous zone, excluding when the special prize is activated, and is cleared when moving to a non-advantageous zone.

The normal specified number of plays counter is a counter that manages the number of unit plays played in the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B) (see step S4121 in Figure 109). The value of the normal specified number of plays counter is incremented by 1 to "LEV" (at the start of play) for each unit play played in the normal ball output state, excluding when the special prize is activated, and is cleared when transitioning to a ball output state other than the normal ball output state.

The premonition play number counter is a counter that manages the remaining number of unit plays controlled in the premonition state (see steps S4203, S4206, and S4208 in Figure 118, steps S4223 and S4225 in Figure 119, and step S4325 in Figure 130). The value of the premonition play number counter is decremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of play) for each unit play in the premonition state except when the special prize is activated, and is cleared when the ball output state transitions.

The normal point counter is a counter that manages points earned in the point acquisition lottery (see step S4163 in Figure 114). The point acquisition lottery is held for each unit game in the normal stage, except when the special prize is activated. The value of the normal point counter is used in the point achievement lottery (see step S4167 in Figure 114), and is decremented by 100 when the point achievement lottery is held ("LEV" (at the start of play)). In addition, the value of the normal point counter is cleared when transitioning to a ball achievement state other than the normal ball achievement state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B).

The point reach count counter is a counter that manages the number of times the normal point value reaches 100 in the normal ball dispensing state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B) (see step S4165 in Figure 114). The value of the point reach count counter is incremented by 1 after the point acquisition lottery (see "LEV" (at the start of play)) is conducted in the normal stage (excluding when the special prize is activated), when the probability mode is not set to high probability 3, the game is not in the premonition state, and the normal point value is 100 or more before the point acquisition lottery is conducted. In addition, the value of the point reach count counter is cleared when transitioning to a ball dispensing state other than the normal ball dispensing state.

The Cherry Counter is a counter that manages the number of times "F_Cherry" has been determined as an internal winning combination in the normal stage (see step S4162 in Figure 114). The value of the Cherry Counter is incremented by 1 when "F_Cherry" is determined as an internal winning combination ("LEV" (at the start of play)) in the normal stage, excluding when the special prize is activated. The value of the Cherry Counter is cleared when transitioning to a ball output state other than the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B).

The Chance Stage A Winning Count Counter is a counter that manages the number of times a player has won Chance Stage A (see step S4082 in FIG. 103 and step S4167 in FIG. 114). The value of the Chance Stage A Winning Count Counter is incremented by 1 when a player wins Chance Stage A ("LEV" (at the start of play)) in the Normal Stage Transition Flag/Winning Flag lottery (step S4082 in FIG. 103) or the Point Reached Lottery (see step S4167 in FIG. 114) held during the Normal Stage, excluding when the Special Prize is activated. The value of the Chance Stage A Winning Count Counter is decremented by 1 when the player transitions to Chance Stage A, and is cleared when the player transitions to a ball-dispensing state other than the normal ball-dispensing state (Normal Stage, Chance Stage A, and Chance Stage B).

The point-reaching chance stage A winning count counter is a counter that manages the number of times a player has won chance stage A in the point-reaching lottery (see step S4167 in Figure 114). The value of the point-reaching chance stage A winning count counter is incremented by 1 when a player wins chance stage A in the point-reaching lottery held during the normal stage, excluding when the special prize is activated ("LEV" (at the start of play)). In addition, the value of the point-reaching chance stage A winning count counter is decremented by 1 when the player transitions to chance stage A, and is cleared when the player transitions to a ball-dispensing state other than the normal ball-dispensing state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B).

The Chance Stage B Winning Count Counter is a counter that manages the number of times a player has won Chance Stage B (see step S4082 in FIG. 103 and step S4167 in FIG. 114). The value of the Chance Stage B Winning Count Counter is incremented by 1 when a player wins Chance Stage B ("LEV" (at the start of play)) in the Normal Stage Transition Flag/Winning Flag lottery (step S4082 in FIG. 103) or the Point Reached Lottery (see step S4167 in FIG. 114) held during the normal stage, excluding when the special prize is activated. The value of the Chance Stage B Winning Count Counter is decremented by 1 when a player transitions to Chance Stage B, and is cleared when a player transitions to a ball output state other than the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B).

The point-reaching chance stage B winning count counter is a counter that manages the number of times a player has won chance stage B in the point-reaching lottery (see step S4167 in Figure 114). The value of the point-reaching chance stage B winning count counter is incremented by 1 when a player wins chance stage B in the point-reaching lottery held during the normal stage (excluding when the special prize is activated) ("LEV" (at the start of play)). In addition, the value of the point-reaching chance stage B winning count counter is decremented by 1 when the player transitions to chance stage B, and is cleared when the player transitions to a ball-dispensing state other than the normal ball-dispensing state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B).

The chance stage guaranteed play number counter is a counter that manages the remaining number of unit plays that guarantee staying in chance stage A or chance stage B (see step S4304 in Figure 126). The value of the chance stage guaranteed play number counter is decremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of play) for each unit play in chance stage A or chance stage B, except when the special prize is activated, and is cleared when transitioning to a ball output state other than the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B). In addition, transition to the normal stage occurs in the unit play following the unit play in which the value of the chance stage guaranteed play number counter reaches 0.

The High Probability 1 Play Count Counter manages the remaining number of unit plays that can remain in High Probability 1, and is set to "50" when High Probability 1 is won in the normal specified number of plays High Probability 1 transition lottery (see step S4123 in Figure 109). The value of the High Probability 1 Play Count Counter is decremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of play) for each unit play when High Probability 1 is set in the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B) excluding when the special prize is activated, and is cleared when transitioning to a ball output state other than the normal ball output state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B).

The High Probability 2 Guaranteed Play Count Counter is a counter that manages the remaining number of unit plays that are guaranteed to stay in High Probability 2 (see step S4263, step S4266, and step S4269 in Figure 122). The value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Play Count Counter is decremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of play) for each unit play when High Probability 2 is set in the normal stage (excluding when the special prize is activated), and is cleared when the ball output state transitions to a state other than the normal stage. In addition, a High Probability 2 drop-out lottery (see step S4272 in Figure 122) will be held from the unit play following the unit play in which the value of the High Probability 2 Guaranteed Play Count Counter has reached 0.

The first Bernavi count counter is a counter that manages the remaining number of Bernavis that can be performed in the first pseudo-BIG (see step S4404 in FIG. 144). The value of the first Bernavi count counter is decremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of play) during a unit game in which a Bernavi was performed in the first pseudo-BIG, and is cleared when the pseudo-BIG ends.

The normal RIP remaining winning counter is a counter that manages the remaining number of times a transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG is possible (see step S4405 in FIG. 144). In the above explanation, the value of the normal RIP remaining winning counter is decremented by 1 when a transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG occurs (when a normal RIP wins in the first pseudo BIG) (see step S4425 in FIG. 147). However, here, the value is decremented by 1 when the second pseudo BIG ends after a transition from the first pseudo BIG to the second pseudo BIG ("3OFF" (end of game)), i.e., when the determination result in step S4434 in FIG. 147 is "YES." The value of the normal RIP remaining winning counter is cleared when the pseudo BIG ends.

The second Bernavi count counter manages the remaining number of Bernavis that can be executed in the second pseudo-BIG or pseudo-REG, and is set to "9" when the second pseudo-BIG starts, and to "5" when the pseudo-REG starts (see step S4427 in FIG. 147 and step S4482 in FIG. 152). The value of the second Bernavi count counter is decremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of play) during a unit game in which a Bernavi is executed in the second pseudo-BIG or pseudo-REG, and is cleared when the pseudo-BIG or pseudo-REG ends.

The pseudo BIG stock counter is a counter that manages the remaining number of times control can be made to pseudo BIG when the termination conditions for pseudo BIG or pseudo REG are met (see steps S4441 and S4444 in Figure 148, and step S4461 in Figure 150). In the above explanation, whether or not to control to pseudo BIG when the termination conditions for pseudo REG are met is managed by the pseudo BIG winning flag (see step S4504 in Figure 155), but here, in the pseudo REG, it is also managed by the pseudo BIG stock counter, just like in the pseudo BIG. The value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is incremented by 1 when a pseudo BIG is won ("LEV" (at the start of play)) in the 1G consecutive lottery (see step S4384 in FIG. 143 and step S4484 in FIG. 152), and is decremented by 1 when a pseudo BIG or pseudo REG ends and a new pseudo BIG begins. The value of the pseudo BIG stock counter is also cleared when a transition to a pseudo BIG (ED) (ending BB) occurs.

In the above explanation, the Pseudo BIG (ED) flag (see step S4406 in FIG. 144) is used to control the continuation of the Pseudo BIG until the end of the advantageous zone. However, here, the Pseudo BIG (ED) is managed as a separate ball output state from the Pseudo BIG in the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20). As a result, if the Pseudo BIG (ED) is won in a 1G consecutive lottery (see step S4384 in FIG. 143 and step S4484 in FIG. 152), the ball output state will transition to Pseudo BIG (ED). The Pseudo BIG (ED) may be a ball output state in which the Pseudo BIG continues until the end of the advantageous zone, or may be the same ball output state as a normal Pseudo BIG, except that 2 is added to the value of the Pseudo BIG stock counter when the Pseudo BIG starts.

The first pseudo-BIG replay counter manages the number of times a replay ("F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B") is determined as the internal winning combination during the first pseudo-BIG (see step S4423 in FIG. 147). The value of the first pseudo-BIG replay counter is incremented by 1 to "3OFF" (at the end of play) during each unit play in which a replay is determined as the internal winning combination during the first pseudo-BIG. The value of the first pseudo-BIG replay counter is cleared when the pseudo-BIG or pseudo-REG ends, or when transitioning to the pseudo-BIG (ED).

The normal mode counter is a counter that manages normal mode, and when a transition occurs from a ball dispensing state other than the normal ball dispensing state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B) to the normal ball dispensing state ("LEV" (at the start of play)), the value determined in the normal transition mode lottery (see step S4061 in Figure 100) is set. The value of the normal mode counter is cleared when a transition occurs to a ball dispensing state other than the normal ball dispensing state or promotion chance state.

The point mode counter is a counter that manages the point mode, and is set to a value determined in the point mode lottery (see step S4063 in Figure 100, step S4166 in Figure 114, and step S4283 in Figure 124) held during the normal ball dispensing state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B) ("LEV" (at the start of play)). The value of the point mode counter is cleared when transitioning to a ball dispensing state other than the normal ball dispensing state or promotion chance state.

The consecutive-game challenge winning count counter is a counter that manages the number of times a consecutive-game challenge has been won in the non-advantageous zone or in the consecutive-game preparation zone. The value of the consecutive-game challenge winning count counter is incremented by 1 when a consecutive-game challenge is won ("LEV" (at the start of play)) in the lottery at the time of transition to the advantageous zone (see step S4003 in FIG. 93) or the lottery at the time of transition to the consecutive-game challenge (see step S4027 in FIG. 95). In addition, the value of the consecutive-game challenge winning count counter is cleared when transitioning to the normal ball-out state (normal stage, chance stage A, and chance stage B) and when the pseudo bonus (pseudo BIG, pseudo BIG (ED), or pseudo REG) ends.

<AT-related processing when lever is on>
FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the AT-related processing performed in the main control circuit when the lever is on.

The lever-on AT-related processing shown in Figure 163 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S6 (game start state control processing) of Figure 23 (main processing).

In the lever-on AT-related processing, the main CPU 101 first executes processing that is not affected by penalties (step S4601). In this processing, the main CPU 101 executes some of the AT-related processing described above and updates various information (counters, flags, etc.) based on the results of that AT-related processing.

The processing performed in step S4601 can include processing that is disadvantageous to the player, processing to perform an AT confirmation effect, processing performed when a ball-out state begins (when the current unit game is the first game in that ball-out state), and processing performed when a ball-out state ends (when the current unit game is the final game in that ball-out state). AT-related processing performed in the AT state or in a non-advantageous zone is also included in the processing performed in step S4601.

Examples of the above-mentioned "processing that is disadvantageous to the player" include the consecutive win preparation fall lottery processing (see step S4031 in FIG. 95) and the high probability 2 fall lottery processing (see step S4272 in FIG. 122). The consecutive win preparation fall lottery processing and the high probability 2 fall lottery processing are the above-mentioned "processing for deciding to transition from a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) to an unfavorable state (reference mode) (performing a fall lottery)."

Examples of the "processing for performing an AT confirmation effect" include the normal long freeze lottery processing (see step S4102 in FIG. 108) and the entry long freeze lottery processing (see step S4363 in FIG. 133). The normal long freeze lottery processing and the entry long freeze lottery processing are the "processing for performing a freeze as an AT confirmation effect" described above. As described above, if the normal long freeze lottery processing or the entry long freeze lottery is won in one unit game, the execution of the long freeze is controlled by the main effect control processing at the start of play in that unit game (see step S8 in FIG. 23). As a result, a long freeze occurs before each reel 3L, 3C, 3R begins spinning (before the first stop operation is performed).

Examples of the "processing performed when a single ball-out state begins (when the current unit game is the first game in that ball-out state)" include consecutive win preparation mode lottery processing (see step S4024 and step S4026 in FIG. 95), normal transition mode lottery processing (see step S4061 in FIG. 100), normal transition ceiling lottery processing (see step S4062 in FIG. 100), point mode lottery processing (see step S4063 in FIG. 100), chance stage guaranteed number of plays lottery processing at the start of chance stage (see step S4303 in FIG. 126), promotion chance mode lottery processing (see step S4364 in FIG. 133), consecutive win challenge start pseudo-bonus lottery processing (see step S4522 in FIG. 156), consecutive win challenge start number of plays lottery processing (see step S4523 in FIG. 156), etc.

Of these processes, the consecutive win preparation mode lottery process, the normal transition mode lottery process, the point mode lottery process, and the promotion chance mode lottery process are the processes described above for "setting the mode (reference mode) referenced in the AT transition lottery, CZ transition lottery, or AT advantage lottery (performing a reference mode lottery)." Note that the point mode lottery process is performed when the normal stage begins (see step S4063 in FIG. 100), when the normal point value reaches 100 (see step S4166 in FIG. 114), and when transitioning from the normal ball output state to the promotion chance state (see step S4283 in FIG. 124). Here, of these point mode lottery processes, only the point mode lottery process performed when the normal stage begins is the subject of step S4601.

The chance stage guaranteed play count lottery process at the start of the chance stage and the consecutive game challenge play count lottery process are the above-mentioned "processes for setting the period during which the CZ state can continue (CZ period) (carrying out a CZ period lottery)." The normal transition ceiling lottery process is the above-mentioned "processing related to the conditions for carrying out an AT transition lottery or CZ transition lottery." The consecutive game challenge start pseudo bonus lottery process is the above-mentioned "processing for directly determining whether to transition to the AT state (carrying out an AT transition lottery)."

The above-mentioned "processing performed when one ball-out state ends (when the current unit play is the final game of that ball-out state)" can be, for example, the lottery for transitioning to normal at the end of a consecutive-game challenge (see step S4528 in FIG. 156). The lottery for transitioning to normal at the end of a consecutive-game challenge is the above-mentioned "processing for determining the state (reference mode) to transition to after the end of a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) (performing a lottery for transition destination after falling)."

After executing the processing of step S4601, the main CPU 101 executes backup processing (step S4602). In this processing, the main CPU 101 stores AT-related parameters as backup data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103. AT-related parameters are various pieces of information (counters, flags, etc.) that can be updated as a result of AT-related processing. For example, the AT-related parameters include the counters and various winning flags shown in FIG. 162. The winning flag is a flag indicating that the AT transition lottery or CZ transition lottery has been won (for example, a pseudo-BIG winning flag, a promotion chance winning flag, a consecutive win challenge winning flag, etc.).

By performing the processing of step S4602, many AT-related parameters are stored as backup data, but some AT-related parameters are not stored as backup data (are not subject to backup). Information that may be updated by performing "processing not affected by penalties" (see step S4601 and step S4626 in Figure 164) can generally be excluded from backup.

For example, AT-related parameters that are not subject to backup include information that can be updated by the above-mentioned "processing to reduce the remaining period for which a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) can continue," information that can be updated by the AT-related processing that is performed in the AT state, and information that can be updated by the above-mentioned "processing that is performed when a ball-out state begins (when the current unit game is the first game in that ball-out state)."

Examples of the above-mentioned "information that can be updated by performing processing to reduce the remaining period for which a relatively advantageous state (reference mode) can be continued" include the consecutive game preparation guaranteed game count counter (see step S4023 in FIG. 95), the high probability 2 guaranteed game count counter (see step S4263, step S4266, and step S4269 in FIG. 122), the chance stage guaranteed game count counter (see step S4304 in FIG. 126), the promotion chance game count counter (see step S4362 in FIG. 133), the consecutive game challenge game count counter (see step S4524 in FIG. 156), and the high probability 1 game count counter (see step S4123 in FIG. 109).

The above-mentioned "information that can be updated by AT-related processing performed in the AT state" includes, for example, the first Bernavi count counter (see step S4404 in FIG. 144), the normal remaining win count counter (see step S4405 in FIG. 144), the second Bernavi count counter (see step S4427 in FIG. 147 and step S4482 in FIG. 152), the first pseudo-BIG win counter (see step S4423 in FIG. 147), the pseudo-bonus win counter (see step S4405 in FIG. 144), the first Bernavi count counter (see step S4405 in FIG. 144), the first pseudo-BIG ... Examples of such flags include the consecutive win challenge lottery flag after the end of the pseudo bonus (see step S4408 in FIG. 144 and step S4483 in FIG. 152), the pseudo BIG stock counter (see step S4441 and step S4444 in FIG. 148 and step S4461 in FIG. 150), and a flag that is set when a pseudo BIG (ED) is won in the 1G consecutive lottery (see step S4384 in FIG. 143 and step S4484 in FIG. 152). Note that here, the consecutive win challenge lottery flag that is set ON in the AT state is referred to as the consecutive win challenge lottery flag after the end of the pseudo bonus to distinguish it from the consecutive win challenge lottery flag that is set ON in states other than the AT state. If a confirmed consecutive win challenge flag is set in the AT state, this flag (confirmed consecutive win challenge flag after the end of the pseudo bonus) can also be included in "information that can be updated by AT-related processing performed in the AT state."

Examples of the above-mentioned "information that can be updated by processing performed when a single ball-out state begins (when the current unit game is the first game in that ball-out state)" include the consecutive win preparation mode counter, normal mode counter, and promotion chance mode counter. The consecutive win preparation mode counter, normal mode counter, and promotion chance mode counter are counters that manage the consecutive win preparation mode, normal mode, and promotion chance mode, respectively. The consecutive win preparation mode counter, normal mode counter, and promotion chance mode counter are information that can be updated by processing the consecutive win preparation mode lottery process, the normal transition mode lottery process, and the promotion chance mode lottery process, respectively. The consecutive win preparation mode lottery process, the normal transition mode lottery process, and the promotion chance mode lottery process are the above-mentioned "processing performed when a single ball-out state begins (when the current unit game is the first game in that ball-out state)." Note that the point mode lottery process is also included in "processing performed when a single ball output state begins (when the current unit game is the first game in that ball output state)", but considering that this process is performed not only when the normal stage begins (see step S4063 in FIG. 100), but also when the normal point value reaches 100 (see step S4166 in FIG. 114) and when transitioning from the normal ball output state to a promotion chance (see step S4283 in FIG. 124), the point mode counter (the counter that manages the point mode) is the target of backup here.

AT-related parameters other than those not subject to backup as described above can be subject to backup. Here, information that can be updated by performing the processing from step S4603 to step S4621 in FIG. 164 is subject to backup.

For example, AT-related parameters that are subject to backup include information that can be updated by performing the above-mentioned "processing for directly deciding to transition to the AT state (conducting an AT transition lottery)" or "processing for deciding to transition to the CZ state (CZ) (conducting a CZ transition lottery)," as well as information indicating various states (reference modes).

Examples of information that can be updated by performing the above-mentioned "processing for directly deciding to transition to the AT state (conducting an AT transition lottery)" or "processing for deciding to transition to the CZ state (CZ) (conducting a CZ transition lottery)" include the chance stage A winning count counter, chance stage A winning count counter when a point is reached, chance stage B winning count counter, chance stage B winning count counter when a point is reached, promotion chance winning flag, promotion chance winning flag when a point is reached, pseudo BIG winning flag, pseudo BIG winning flag when a point is reached, etc.

Examples of the "information indicating various states (reference modes)" include information indicating the ball output states shown in FIG. 88 (non-advantageous zone, normal stage, chance stage A, chance stage B, consecutive win preparation, consecutive win challenge, promotion chance, pseudo BIG, and pseudo REG), information indicating the probability mode (non-high probability, high probability 1, high probability 2, and high probability 3), and information that plays a supporting role in the ball output state. Examples of information indicating the ball output state include information indicating the current ball output state (current ball output state) and information indicating the next ball output state (next ball output state). The current ball output state is managed in the ball output state flag storage area (see FIG. 20), and the next ball output state is similarly managed in the next ball output state flag storage area (not shown).

The next payout states include "none," "next non-advantageous zone," "next normal stage," "next chance stage A," "next chance stage B," "next consecutive win preparation," "next consecutive win challenge," "next promotion chance," "next pseudo BIG," and "next pseudo REG." When controlled to a premonition state, a "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to one of the next payout states in the next payout state flag storage area. For example, if the current payout state is "normal stage" and the next payout state is "next chance stage A," this indicates that the premonition state has been reached due to a win in chance stage A during the normal stage. If the next payout state is other than "none" when the premonition play count counter value reaches 0, the payout state will transition to the payout state corresponding to that next payout state. On the other hand, if the next payout state is "none" when the premonition play count counter value reaches 0, the current payout state will continue.

Examples of information that plays a supplementary role in determining the ball output status include information indicating that ceiling preparation is in progress (see step S4125 in FIG. 109) (ceiling reached state flag), information indicating that ceiling fake preparation is in progress (see step S4127 in FIG. 109) (ceiling fake state flag), confirmed consecutive win challenge flag (see step S4003 in FIG. 93 and step S4029 in FIG. 95), and information indicating that the 3BB flag interval state (see step S4022 in FIG. 95) is not in effect at the start of consecutive win preparation (not in effect at the start of consecutive win preparation flag). Furthermore, pseudo BIG and pseudo REG can be managed using appropriate flags (pseudo BIG operation state flag, pseudo REG operation state flag, second pseudo BIG start state flag, second pseudo BIG operation state flag, etc.), and these flags can also be considered information that plays a supplementary role in determining the ball output status.

Information indicating the ball dispensing state also includes information indicating the previous ball dispensing state (previous ball dispensing state), but this information is not subject to backup. The previous ball dispensing state is the ball dispensing state in which the balls were dispensed during the previous unit game, and by comparing the previous ball dispensing state with the current ball dispensing state, it is possible to check whether the ball dispensing state has changed.

Furthermore, of the counters shown in FIG. 162, counters other than those mentioned above as not subject to backup (counters for the number of games in the advantageous ball zone counter, the number of normal prescribed games counter, the number of premonition games counter, the normal point counter, the number of times a point has been reached counter, the cherry counter, the point mode counter, the number of times a consecutive challenge has been won counter, etc.) are subject to backup. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 162, the number of games during ceiling preparation counter (see step S4142 in FIG. 112) is also subject to backup.

After executing the processing of step S4602, the main CPU 101 executes various AT-related processes when the lever is on (step S4603). In this processing, the main CPU 101 executes all AT-related processes that are executed when the start lever 7 is operated (when the game start state control processing (see step S6 in Figure 23) is executed), except for the processing executed in step S4601. Of the processes described using Figures 93 to 161 as being executed in the game start state control processing (see step S6 in Figure 23), all processes that are not executed in step S4601 are executed in steps S4603 to S4604.

Specifically, the processing performed in step S4603 includes lottery processing for transition to consecutive games (see step S4027 in Figure 95), lottery for determining the transition to consecutive games (see step S4029 in Figure 95), lottery processing for freeze during normal stage (see step S4081 in Figure 103), lottery processing for transition flag/winning flag during normal stage (see step S4082 in Figure 103), lottery processing for transition to normal specified number of plays with high probability 1 (see step S4123 in Figure 109), and lottery processing for ceiling preparation flag. lottery processing for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG or promotion chance is won during the normal stage (see step S4202, step S4205, and step S4207 in FIG. 118); lottery processing for the type of lottery to be won when the ceiling is reached (see step S4144 in FIG. 112); lottery processing for the point mode (see step S4166 in FIG. 114); lottery processing for the number of premonition plays when a pseudo BIG or promotion chance is won during the normal stage (see step S4202, step S4205, and step S4207 in FIG. 118); lottery processing for the type of lottery to be won when the ceiling is reached (see step S4144 in FIG. 112); Lottery processing for the number of premonition plays at the time of lottery (see step S4222 and step S4224 in FIG. 119), lottery processing for transition to high probability 2 (see step S4262, step S4265, and step S4268 in FIG. 122), lottery processing for transition to promotion chance (see step S4284 in FIG. 124), lottery processing for pseudo BIG and promotion chance during chance stage (see step S4306 in FIG. 126), lottery processing for adding the number of plays during chance stage (see step S4308 in FIG. 126), Examples of such processes include lottery processing for the number of premonition plays when a flag is drawn during the match stage (see step S4324 in FIG. 130), lottery processing during promotion chance (see step S4366 in FIG. 133), lottery processing for the next pseudo play (see step S4367 in FIG. 133), lottery processing for pseudo BIG promotion when the specified number of plays has been consumed (see step S4369 in FIG. 133), lottery processing for the current pseudo play (see step S4370 in FIG. 133), lottery processing during consecutive win challenge (see step S4525 in FIG. 156), etc.

These processes are essentially advantageous to the player, and correspond to the "advantageous decision" described above. In this modified example, if the penalty conditions described below (see step S4623 in Figure 164) are met, such advantageous decisions will be restricted (the results of the advantageous decision will be canceled).

Of the above-mentioned "processing for performing a freeze as an AT confirmation effect," the normal long freeze lottery processing (see step S4102 in FIG. 108) and the entry long freeze lottery processing (see step S4363 in FIG. 133) are performed in step S4601. In contrast, the normal stage freeze lottery processing (see step S4081 in FIG. 103) is performed in step S4603. As described above, the long freeze controlled as a result of the normal long freeze lottery or entry long freeze lottery occurs before the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R begins (before the first stop operation is performed). In contrast, the freeze controlled as a result of the normal stage freeze lottery occurs after the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R stops (after the third stop operation is performed). In this respect, the freeze lottery process during the normal stage differs from the long freeze lottery process during the normal stage and the long freeze lottery process when entering the stage.

After executing the processing of step S4603, the main CPU 101 updates various information (counters, flags, etc.) based on the results of the AT-related processing performed in step S4603 (step S4604). Also, during this processing, the main CPU 101 updates the values of counters that are backed up and that may be incremented or decremented when the start lever 7 is operated ("LEV" shown in FIG. 162) (e.g., the normal specified number of plays counter, normal point counter, point reach count counter, cherry counter, point mode counter, consecutive challenge win count counter, etc.) if it is time for increment or decrement. After executing the processing of step S4604, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<AT related processing when completely stopped>
FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the AT-related processing performed in the main control circuit when the engine is completely stopped.

The AT-related processing at full stop shown in Figure 164 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S15 (game end state control processing) of Figure 23 (main processing).

In the AT-related processing when all reels are stopped, the main CPU 101 first executes various AT-related processing when all reels are stopped (step S4621). In this processing, the main CPU 101 executes all AT-related processing that is performed when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning (when the game end state control processing (see step S15 in Figure 23) is performed), except for the processing performed in step S4626. Of the processing described using Figures 93 to 161 as being performed in the game end state control processing (see step S15 in Figure 23), all processing that is not performed in step S4626 is performed in steps S4621 to S4622.

In the above, it has been explained that the promotion chance pre-processing (see step S4105 in FIG. 108) and the high probability 2 transition lottery processing (3) (see steps S4267 to S4269 in FIG. 122) are performed in the start-of-game state control processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23). However, here, it is assumed that the promotion chance pre-processing (see step S4105 in FIG. 108) and the high probability 2 transition lottery processing (3) (see steps S4267 to S4269 in FIG. 122) are performed in the end-of-game state control processing (see step S15 in FIG. 23). Also, in step S4621, it is determined whether the penalty condition (see step S4623) is met, and if it is determined that the penalty condition is met, the high probability 2 transition lottery processing (3) may not be executed.

After executing the processing of step S4621, the main CPU 101 updates various information (counters, flags, etc.) based on the results of the AT-related processing performed in step S4621 (step S4622). Also, in this processing, the main CPU 101 updates the values of counters that are the target of backup and that may be added or subtracted when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning ("3OFF" shown in FIG. 162) (for example, the advantageous ball-out zone play count counter, the premonition play count counter, etc.) if it is time for addition or subtraction.

After executing the process of step S4622, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the penalty conditions are met (step S4623). Here, the penalty conditions are that all of the following (a) to (g) are met:
(a) Not in a non-advantageous zone (including unit games that transition to an advantageous zone); (b) A stop operation (irregular press) is performed on the center reel 3C or the right reel 3R as the first stop operation; (c) Not in a pseudo-BIG; (d) Not in a pseudo-REG; (e) Not in a pseudo-BIG (ED); (f) When in the normal stage or during preparation for a consecutive win, none of the following internal winning roles have been determined: "Miss,""F_Reach Eye Role A,""F_Reach Eye Role B,""F_Reach Eye Role C,""F_BB Confirmed Role A,""F_BB Confirmed Role B,""F_1 Piece Role A," and "F_1 Piece Role B"; (g) Not in a bonus state (3BB game state shown in Figure 81).

As described above, if any of "F_Reach Eye A," "F_Reach Eye B," "F_Reach Eye C," "F_BB Confirmed A," and "F_BB Confirmed B" is determined as the internal winning combination in the normal stage, and neither the Promotion Chance nor the Pseudo BIG has been won, a notification (irregular button press navigation) will be issued to perform a stopping operation on the center reel 3C or the right reel 3R as the first stopping operation. In this case, it would be inappropriate to impose a penalty even if a stopping operation was performed in accordance with the irregular button press navigation. Therefore, if any of "F_Reach Eye A," "F_Reach Eye B," "F_Reach Eye C," "F_BB Confirmed A," and "F_BB Confirmed B" is determined as the internal winning combination in the normal stage, the penalty condition will not be met (see (f) above).

Furthermore, even if a "miss" is determined as the internal winning combination in the normal stage, if a stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L as the first stop operation, there is a possibility that a symbol combination that the player may perceive as a "reach" (for example, a result in which three "V"s are displayed on the left reel 3L) will appear, so irregular button navigation will also be performed. Furthermore, if the situations in which irregular button navigation occurs are limited, there is a possibility that a player may be able to guess the results of AT-related processing based on the occurrence of irregular button navigation. Therefore, irregular button navigation will also be performed when either "F_1-Coin Role A" or "F_1-Coin Role B" is determined as the internal winning combination in the normal stage. As a result, in the normal stage, if any of the following roles are determined as the internal winning roles: "F_Reach Eye Role A," "F_Reach Eye Role B," "F_Reach Eye Role C," "F_BB Confirmed Role A," and "F_BB Confirmed Role B," as well as "Miss," "F_1-Piece Role A," and "F_1-Piece Role B," the penalty conditions will not be met. Similarly, for consecutive win preparations, if these roles are determined as the internal winning roles, the penalty conditions will not be met (see (f) above).

If it is determined in step S4623 that the penalty condition is met, the main CPU 101 assigns backup information to various counters/flags (step S4624). In this process, the main CPU 101 overwrites the information (counters, flags, etc.) updated in steps S4604 of FIG. 163 through step S4622 of FIG. 164 with the information (counters, flags, etc.) stored as backup data in step S4602 of FIG. 163. This changes the AT-related parameters from the updated information to the information stored as backup data. In other words, the AT-related parameters revert to the information stored at the time of the previous unit game, and the results of the AT-related processing performed in the current unit game are canceled.

Then, if it has been determined that a pseudo game will be played in the next unit game, the main CPU 101 discards the pseudo game information (step S4625). In this process, if information indicating that a pseudo game will be played in the next unit game (pseudo game information) is stored as a result of the processing of steps S4604 in FIG. 163 through S4622 in FIG. 164, the main CPU 101 erases the pseudo game information. For example, if the current ball output state is a promotion chance, and a pseudo game determined by the next pseudo game lottery (see step S4367 in FIG. 133) is set, the main CPU 101 erases the information indicating the pseudo game. This cancels the pseudo game that was scheduled to be played in the unit game following the unit game for which the next pseudo game lottery was drawn.

The pseudo-game information discarded in the processing of step S4625 is updated based on the results of the AT-related processing performed in step S4603 of FIG. 163 through step S4621 of FIG. 164. In this regard, as described above, the next pseudo-game lottery processing (see step S4367 of FIG. 133) is performed in step S4603 of FIG. 163, while the normal long freeze lottery processing (see step S4102 of FIG. 108) is performed in step S4601 of FIG. 163. Even if the normal long freeze lottery is won, it will be decided that a pseudo-game will be played in the next unit game, but in this case, it will not be subject to processing in step S4625 and the pseudo-game will not be canceled.

If it is determined in step S4623 that the penalty condition is not met, or after executing the processing of step S4625, the main CPU 101 executes processing that is not affected by the penalty (step S4626). In this processing, the main CPU 101 executes some of the AT-related processing described above, and updates various information (counters, flags, etc.) based on the results of that AT-related processing. Examples of processing executed in step S4626 include processing that is disadvantageous to the player, AT-related processing executed in the AT state, etc.

In the processing of step S4626, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned "processing disadvantageous to the player" by updating (subtracting 1) the values of, for example, the consecutive win preparation guaranteed play count counter (see step S4023 of FIG. 95), the high probability 2 guaranteed play count counter (see step S4263, step S4266, and step S4269 of FIG. 122), the chance stage guaranteed play count counter (see step S4304 of FIG. 126), the promotion chance play count counter (see step S4362 of FIG. 133), the consecutive win challenge play count counter (see step S4524 of FIG. 156), and the high probability 1 play count counter (see step S4123 of FIG. 109). Furthermore, if the value of the chance stage guaranteed play count counter is 0, the main CPU 101 transitions to the normal stage (see step S4344 of FIG. 132).

Examples of the "AT-related processing performed in the AT state" include the consecutive win challenge lottery processing at the end of the final second pseudo-BIG (see step S4464 in FIG. 150), the lottery processing when the number of successful rips is insufficient (see step S4443 in FIG. 148), etc. The main CPU 101 also updates the information indicating the previous ball payout state described above.

In addition, in the processing of step S4626, the main CPU 101 executes supplemental exception processing for the consecutive-game preparation rollover lottery processing (see step S4031 in FIG. 95). This processing is processing in which, if a player wins the consecutive-game preparation rollover lottery performed in step S4601 in FIG. 163, and also wins the consecutive-game challenge transition lottery performed in step S4603 in FIG. 163 (see step S4027 in FIG. 95) and the consecutive-game challenge transition flag is set to ON, the result of the consecutive-game preparation rollover lottery is discarded. As a result of this, the next unit game will transition to the consecutive-game challenge. On the other hand, if a player wins the consecutive-game preparation rollover lottery and also wins the consecutive-game challenge transition lottery, but a penalty condition is met, the consecutive-game challenge transition flag is set to OFF in step S4624. Therefore, in this case, the supplementary exception processing will not be executed, and the next unit game will transition to the normal stage.

In addition, in the processing of step S4626, the main CPU 101 executes supplemental exception processing for the consecutive-game challenge end normal transition lottery processing (see step S4528 in FIG. 156). This processing discards the result of the consecutive-game challenge end normal transition lottery processing if, as a result of the consecutive-game challenge end normal transition lottery performed in step S4601 in FIG. 163, a transition to the non-advantageous zone or consecutive-game challenge preparation is scheduled, and if a promotion chance or pseudo-BIG is won in the consecutive-game challenge lottery processing performed in step S4603 in FIG. 163, and the promotion chance winning flag or pseudo-BIG winning flag is set to ON. As a result of executing this supplemental exception processing, a transition to the promotion chance or pseudo-BIG will occur in the next unit game. On the other hand, if a transition to the non-advantageous zone or the consecutive-game preparation zone is scheduled by the consecutive-game challenge end normal transition lottery, and if a promotion chance or pseudo-BIG lottery is won during the consecutive-game challenge, but a penalty condition is met, the promotion chance lottery flag or pseudo-BIG lottery flag is set to OFF in step S4624. Therefore, in this case, the supplemental exception processing is not executed, and the next unit game will transition to the non-advantageous zone or the consecutive-game preparation zone. Also, in FIG. 156, it has been described that the consecutive-game challenge end normal transition lottery processing is executed when the determination result of step S4527 is "NO," but the consecutive-game challenge end normal transition lottery processing may also be executed without executing step S4527 (regardless of whether the promotion chance lottery flag or pseudo-BIG lottery flag is set to ON). In this case, the supplemental exception processing can be executed even if a promotion chance or pseudo BIG is won in the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive game challenge (see step S4522 in FIG. 156). Note that because the pseudo bonus lottery processing at the start of the consecutive game challenge is performed in step S4601 in FIG. 163, if a promotion chance or pseudo BIG is won in the pseudo bonus lottery at the start of the consecutive game challenge, the promotion chance winning flag or pseudo BIG winning flag will not be set to OFF in step S4624 even if the penalty condition is met.

Furthermore, in the processing of step S4626, the main CPU 101 executes supplemental exception processing for the consecutive-game winning preparation drop lottery processing (see step S4031 in FIG. 95). This processing discards the result of the consecutive-game winning preparation drop lottery processing if the consecutive-game winning preparation drop lottery processing performed in step S4601 in FIG. 163 is won, the consecutive-game winning challenge transition lottery processing performed in step S4603 in FIG. 163 is also won, and the consecutive-game winning challenge transition flag is set to on.

After executing step S4626, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

As a result, for example, in the normal stage, the current value of the chance stage A winning count counter is stored as backup data in step S4602 of FIG. 163. Thereafter, if the chance stage A is won in the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery performed in step S4603 (see step S4082 of FIG. 103), 1 is added to the value of the chance stage A winning count counter in step S4604. Thereafter, if a penalty condition is met in that unit game, the value of the chance stage A winning count counter after the increment in step S4604 is overwritten by the value of the chance stage A winning count counter stored as backup data in step S4602 in step S4624 of FIG. 164. As a result, the value of the Chance Stage A Winning Count Counter will return to the value it had before the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery was held, and the results of the normal stage transition flag/winning flag lottery will be canceled.

Also, for example, in Chance Stage A, in step S4602 of FIG. 163, information indicating the current pseudo BIG winning flag (here, "OFF") is stored as backup data. Thereafter, if a pseudo BIG is won in the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during the chance stage (see step S4306 of FIG. 126) performed in step S4603, the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON in step S4604. Thereafter, if a penalty condition is met in the unit game, in step S4624 of FIG. 164, the information indicating the pseudo BIG winning flag after processing in step S4604 ("ON") is overwritten with the information indicating the pseudo BIG winning flag ("OFF") stored as backup data in step S4602. As a result, the pseudo BIG winning flag is set back to off, and the results of the pseudo BIG/promotion chance lottery during that chance stage are canceled. Note that, although the above describes an example in which information indicating a pseudo BIG win is managed by a flag, information indicating a pseudo BIG win may also be managed by a counter, in the same way as information indicating a win in Chance Stage A.

Also, for example, in consecutive win preparation, if the consecutive win preparation drop lottery (see step S4031 in FIG. 95) performed in step S4601 of FIG. 163 is won, the normal stage transition flag is set to ON. Information that may be updated by performing step S4601 is not subject to backup, and information indicating this flag is not stored as backup data in step S4602. Furthermore, the AT-related parameters that are the subject of processing in step S4624 of FIG. 164 are information that is updated based on the results of the AT-related processing performed in steps S4603 to S4621, and because the consecutive win preparation drop lottery is performed in step S4601, the normal stage transition flag is not subject to processing in step S4624. Therefore, even if a penalty condition is met in that unit game, the information indicating the normal stage transition flag after processing in step S4601 ("ON") is maintained, and a transition to the normal stage will occur in the next unit game.

Furthermore, for example, the consecutive win preparation guaranteed play count counter (see step S4023 in Figure 95), the high probability 2 guaranteed play count counter (see step S4263, step S4266, and step S4269 in Figure 122), the chance stage guaranteed play count counter (see step S4304 in Figure 126), the promotion chance play count counter (see step S4362 in Figure 133), the consecutive win challenge play count counter (see step S4524 in Figure 156), and the high probability 1 play count counter (see step S4123 in Figure 109) are not subject to backup. Therefore, in step S4602 in Figure 163, the values of these counters are not stored as backup data. Furthermore, AT-related parameters that are not subject to backup are not subject to processing in step S4624 in Figure 164. Therefore, regardless of whether the penalty condition is met, if the value is 1 or greater, the value is decremented by 1 in step S4626 for each unit game.

For example, the premonition play count counter (see steps S4203, S4206, and S4208 in FIG. 118, steps S4223 and S4225 in FIG. 119, and step S4325 in FIG. 130) is subject to backup. The AT-related parameters that are subject to backup are also subject to processing in step S4624 in FIG. 164. Therefore, if the game is controlled to a premonition state, the current value of the premonition play count counter is stored as backup data in step S4602. Then, in step S4622, one is subtracted from the value of the premonition play count counter. If the penalty condition is subsequently met, the value of the premonition play count counter after subtraction in step S4622 is overwritten in step S4624 with the value of the premonition play count counter stored as backup data in step S4602. This causes the value of the premonition play counter to return to the value it had when the unit play started, canceling the subtraction.

As explained above, to achieve the playability of the pachislot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, numerous AT-related processes must be executed. However, the penalty function can be implemented through relatively simple processing, without creating complex branching in the flowchart between processes that are not affected by penalties and processes that are affected by penalties. This allows for appropriate penalty implementation while saving the capacity required for penalty-related processing. If the AT-related processing were to be executed after determining whether the penalty conditions were met, the AT-related processing would need to be executed after the first stop operation, making it difficult to reflect the results of the AT-related processing (such as the AT transition lottery) in the presentation. In this regard, the above example allows the AT-related processing to be executed before determining whether the penalty conditions are met (when the start lever 7 is operated), allowing the results of the AT-related processing (such as the AT transition lottery) to be immediately reflected in the presentation. Note that, in order to create presentations based on the results of the AT-related processing, information indicating the results of the AT-related processing can be included in the start command data (see step S7 in Figure 23).

Although not explained above, in the processing of step S4601 in FIG. 163 or step S4626 in FIG. 164, the main CPU 101 clears each counter when it is the clear timing for that counter (see FIG. 162). Also, in the processing of step S4601 in FIG. 163, if the current ball output state is a promotion chance and the value of the promotion chance play count counter is 1, the main CPU 101 provisionally sets the destination ball output state (pseudo-REG or pseudo-BIG) after the promotion chance ends. In this processing, the main CPU 101 sets pseudo-REG as the destination ball output state if the promotion chance mode is any of "Mode 1" to "Mode 3," and sets pseudo-BIG if the promotion chance mode is "Mode 4." This provisional setting of the destination ball output state will be referred to as "forced setting."

Here, in the final game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 0), if the pseudo BIG winning flag is set ON at the time the pseudo BIG promotion lottery process is performed when the specified number of plays is consumed (see step S4369 in FIG. 133), the main CPU 101 can transition to pseudo BIG based on the pseudo BIG winning flag. However, if the pseudo BIG winning flag is not set ON at that time, the main CPU 101 cannot transition to pseudo BIG based on the pseudo BIG winning flag, and cannot transition to pseudo REG based on the pseudo REG winning flag (because the pseudo REG winning flag is not set ON in this case). In this case, the main CPU 101 refers to the forcibly set ball payout state and transitions to that ball payout state. This situation can occur because a "pseudo REG" is not provided (the pseudo REG winning flag is not set ON) as a result of the promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in Figure 133) and the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is played (see step S4369 in Figure 133), and because the pseudo BIG winning flag may be set OFF when a penalty condition is met.

For example, if the value of the promotion chance number of plays counter is 1, and a pseudo BIG is won in the promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 of FIG. 133) performed in step S4603 of FIG. 163, and the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to ON, but if a penalty condition is met, the pseudo BIG winning flag is set to OFF in step S4624 of FIG. 164. Thereafter, in the next unit play (value of the promotion chance number of plays counter: 0), if a pseudo BIG is not won in the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is consumed (see step S4369 of FIG. 133), neither the pseudo BIG winning flag nor the pseudo REG winning flag will be set to ON. In this case, the main CPU 101 refers to the forcibly set ball payout state and transitions to that ball payout state.

Also, when the value of the promotion chance number of plays counter is 1, if the pseudo BIG is not won in the promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in Figure 133) performed in step S4603 in Figure 163, and if the pseudo BIG is not won in the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is consumed (see step S4369 in Figure 133) in the next unit play (value of the promotion chance number of plays counter: 0), neither the pseudo BIG winning flag nor the pseudo REG winning flag will be set to ON. In this case, the main CPU 101 will refer to the forcibly set ball output state and transition to that ball output state.

<Example of promotion chance (when a penalty occurs)>
Figure 165 shows an example of a presentation when a penalty occurs during a promotion chance.

As an example of the presentation shown in Figure 165, Figure 165(a) shows an image corresponding to the word "WIN" being displayed on the main display device 210 in the unit game immediately before the unit game that transitions to the promotion chance (in the case of transitioning from the normal ball output state to the promotion chance, the final game in the normal ball output state: the winning lottery notification game).

Figure 165(b) shows that after the state shown in Figure 165(a), in the first game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance number of plays counter: 3), a promotion chance lottery (see step S4366 in Figure 133) is held, and an image corresponding to the words "Bonus promotion lottery in progress" is displayed on the main display device 210. Note that the long freeze (see step S4363 in Figure 133) is not a winning lottery.

Figure 165(c) shows the state after the state shown in Figure 165(b) in the first game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 3), when reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to spin and a stop operation (irregular press) is performed on center reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation, an image corresponding to the words "irregular press being performed" is displayed on the main display device 210. An image corresponding to the words "bonus promotion lottery in progress" also continues to be displayed.

Figure 165(d) shows that after the state shown in Figure 165(c), in the second game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 2), an image corresponding to the words "Bonus promotion lottery in progress" is displayed on the main display device 210 in response to the promotion chance lottery being held (see step S4366 in Figure 133). As a result of irregular button presses being performed in the first game, a penalty condition is met, and the pseudo-game (see step S4367 in Figure 133) determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery held in the first game (see step S4366 in Figure 133) is canceled (see step S4625 in Figure 164).

Figure 165(e) shows the state in which, after the state shown in Figure 165(d), in the second game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 2), when reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to spin and a stop operation (irregular press) is performed on center reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation, an image corresponding to the words "irregular press being performed" is displayed on the main display device 210. An image corresponding to the words "bonus promotion lottery in progress" also continues to be displayed.

Figure 165 (f) shows that after the state shown in Figure 165 (e), in the third game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 1), an image corresponding to the words "Bonus promotion lottery in progress" is displayed on the main display device 210 in response to the promotion chance lottery being held (see step S4366 in Figure 133). As a result of irregular button presses being performed in the second game, a penalty condition is met, and the pseudo-game (see step S4367 in Figure 133) determined based on the result of the promotion chance lottery held in the second game (see step S4366 in Figure 133) is canceled (see step S4625 in Figure 164).

Figure 165 (g) shows the state after the state shown in Figure 165 (f) in the third game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 1), where, after reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have started to spin, when a stop operation (irregular press) is performed on center reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation, an image corresponding to the words "irregular press being performed" is displayed on the main display device 210. An image corresponding to the words "bonus promotion lottery in progress" also continues to be displayed.

Figure 165(h) shows an image corresponding to the words "Aim for the BAR!" being displayed on the main display device 210 when the pseudo game (see step S4370 in Figure 133) determined based on the results of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is consumed (see step S4369 in Figure 133) begins in the fourth game of the promotion chance (value of the promotion chance play count counter: 0) after the state shown in Figure 165(g). This image suggests that a stopping operation should be performed at a timing when a "bar" symbol, as a pseudo REG transition symbol, can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. This encourages the player to perform a stopping operation aiming for the "bar." As a result of irregular button presses being performed in the third game, the penalty conditions are met, and the pseudo game (see step S4367 in FIG. 133) determined based on the results of the promotion chance lottery performed in the third game (see step S4366 in FIG. 133) is canceled (see step S4625 in FIG. 164). In contrast, the pseudo game determined based on the results of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays has been played (see step S4369 in FIG. 133) occurs without being affected by the penalty.

Figure 165(i) shows how, in a pseudo game played in the fourth promotion chance game (promotion chance game number counter value: 0) after the state shown in Figure 165(h), when all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have stopped spinning, an image corresponding to the words "REGULAR BONUS!" and "PLAY PROGRESS BY TURNING THE LEVER" is displayed on the main display device 210. This notifies the player that a transition to a regular bonus (pseudo REG) will occur, and prompts the player to operate the start lever 7.

After the state shown in Figure 165(i) is reached, when the start lever 7 is operated, the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R begins for actual play (main play) (a random delay process is performed to progress the game). Figure 165(j) shows the push order navigation image displayed on the main display device 210 at this time. The push order navigation image is an image for announcing the correct push order for the push order bell (bell navigation). Here, since "F_231 Bell A" to "F_231 Bell C" have been determined as the internal winning combination, it is announced that the first stop operation should be performed on the center reel 3C with a push aimed at "seven," the second stop operation should be performed on the right reel 3R, and the third stop operation should be performed on the left reel 3L (see Figure 91). In addition, "4 Navigations Remaining" indicates the remaining number of bell navigations that can be performed in the pseudo-REG (the value of the second bell navigation number counter). The initial value for "Navi remaining" is 5, but since one Bell Navi was performed, the number of "Navi remaining" has been reduced by 1 and updated to "4."

The above describes the case where a "fake pseudo game" is determined as a result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays has been played (see step S4369 in Figure 133). As a result, a pseudo game aiming for "BAR" occurs (see Figure 165 (h)), and the game transitions to a pseudo REG (see Figures 165 (i) and (j)). In contrast, if a "pseudo BIG" or "pseudo BIG (ED)" is determined as a result of the pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays has been played (see step S4369 in Figure 133), then instead of the effects in Figures 165 (h) to (j), effects such as those in Figures 141 (c) to (h) are performed, and the game transitions to a pseudo BIG.

As explained above, in this embodiment, even if a pseudo-BIG is won in an AT-related process (e.g., a lottery during a promotion chance) performed in one unit game and the pseudo-BIG winning flag is set to ON, if a penalty condition is met in that unit game, the pseudo-BIG winning flag is returned to its OFF state (see step S4624 in FIG. 164). This invalidates the result of the AT-related process (e.g., a lottery during a promotion chance). On the other hand, AT-related parameters that are not subject to backup (e.g., a promotion chance play count counter) are updated even if a penalty condition is met (see step S4626 in FIG. 164). Therefore, each time a penalty condition is met in a promotion chance, one opportunity to be promoted to the pseudo-BIG is lost. Furthermore, if it has been determined that the game will transition to a promotion chance via a premonition state, and a penalty condition is met in the winning notification game (see FIG. 165(a)), the value of the premonition play count counter will not be updated (see step S4624 in FIG. 164), and therefore the game will not transition to a promotion chance as long as the penalty condition is met.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a penalty condition is met in a unit game and a decision is made to play a pseudo game as a result of AT-related processing (e.g., a lottery during a promotion chance) executed in that unit game, the pseudo game is discarded. On the other hand, if a penalty condition is met in a unit game and a decision is made to play a pseudo game as a result of AT-related processing (e.g., a pseudo BIG promotion lottery when the specified number of plays is consumed) executed in a unit game other than that unit game (e.g., the next unit game), the pseudo game is not discarded based on the fact that the penalty condition is met. However, even in such a case, the pseudo game may be discarded. Note that, here, it is assumed that a pseudo game is played at the start of play (in the game start state control processing (see step S6 in Figure 23)), and the pseudo game scheduled to be played in the unit game following the unit game in which the penalty condition was met is discarded. However, the pseudo game may also be performed at the end of the game (during the game end state control process (see step S15 in Figure 23)), in which case the pseudo game scheduled to be performed in the unit game in which the penalty condition was met may be discarded.

The penalty condition can be met when a stop operation (irregular press) is performed on the center reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation. However, this stop operation is, of course, a stop operation in the actual game (main game), not a stop operation in the pseudo game. Therefore, even if a stop operation is performed on the center reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation in the pseudo game that occurs in the fourth promotion chance game (value of the promotion chance game number counter: 0), a pseudo BIG or pseudo REG will start in that unit game.

In addition, Figure 165 explains that when irregular button presses are performed, an image corresponding to the words "Irregular button presses are being performed" is displayed on the main display device 210. As explained in the modified example of the first gaming machine, when a stop operation is performed in a manner that may result in a penalty condition being met, it is possible to configure the device to display text or sound to explain the situation, saying "Irregular button presses are being performed."

Furthermore, if a stop operation is performed in a manner that could result in a penalty condition, the presentation content may be changed (the currently running presentation may be terminated). For example, as described above, in the normal stage, multiple presentation modes are provided, and if an irregular button press is performed while the player is in a presentation mode with a relatively high expectation (special presentation mode), the screen may be switched to the presentation mode with the lowest expectation (basic presentation mode) at the time the first stop operation is performed. Furthermore, when the player is in Chance Stage A, Chance Stage B, or consecutive win preparation, the player is in a presentation mode different from the normal stage, and if an irregular button press is performed in these ball output states, the screen may similarly be switched to the basic presentation mode. On the other hand, when the player is in a consecutive win challenge or promotion chance, the player is in a presentation mode different from the normal stage, but if an irregular button press is performed in these ball output states, the presentation mode may not be switched (the currently displayed background image may be maintained).

Fifth Embodiment
The first to fourth embodiments have been described above. The fifth embodiment will now be described. The basic configuration of the pachislot machine 2001 according to the fifth embodiment is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to fourth embodiments. In the following, components that are the same as those of the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to fourth embodiments will be described with the same reference numerals. Furthermore, explanations of portions that apply to the fifth embodiment from the explanations of the first to fourth embodiments will be omitted.

Note that even if the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, such as "In the first embodiment," or "In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment," these statements can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, provided that they do not deviate from the spirit of the fifth embodiment. Similarly, the above description contains statements that are limited to the pachislot machines 1 of the second to fourth embodiments, and these statements can also be applied to the pachislot machine 1 of the fifth embodiment, provided that they do not deviate from the spirit of the fifth embodiment. Therefore, it is possible to partially replace or combine each of the configurations shown in the first to fourth embodiments (including each of the configurations shown in the modified examples and the extended examples) with the configuration shown in the fifth embodiment.

Furthermore, even if a component has a different shape from the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to fourth embodiments, the same reference numerals may be used for convenience to designate components with similar functions. Furthermore, even if a component has the same shape or the same processing as the pachislot machine 1 according to the first to fourth embodiments, different reference numerals or step numbers may be used for convenience.

(microprocessor)
The pachislot machine 2001 of this embodiment has a configuration similar to that of the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and the main control board 2071 is similar to the configuration of the main control board 71 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 1). A detailed view of the microprocessor (main control circuit) 2100 included in the main control board 2071 is shown, for example, in FIG. 166. Here, the microprocessor 2100 shown in FIG. 166 corresponds to the main control circuit 100 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 1, and the main CPU 2101, main ROM 2102, and main RAM 2103 shown in FIG. 166 correspond to the main CPU 101, main ROM 102, and main RAM 103 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 1, respectively. Although not shown in FIG. 1, in this embodiment, in addition to the microprocessor 2100, a random number circuit 2150, a clock pulse generating circuit 2160, and a power management circuit 2170 are also included in the main control board 2071.

The random number circuit 2150 generates a role lottery random number value (a random number value corresponding to the internal lottery random number value in the first embodiment) used in the internal lottery process, and the clock pulse generation circuit 2160 generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU and outputs the generated clock pulse signal to the clock circuit 2105 (EX) (described below) within the microprocessor 2100. The microprocessor 2100 executes a control program based on the input clock pulse signal.

The power management circuit 2170 manages fluctuations in the 12V DC power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board and supplies 5V DC (VCC) power to the microprocessor 2100. For example, when power is turned on (when the power supply voltage rises from 0V to the startup voltage value (10V)), the power management circuit 2170 outputs a reset signal to a reset controller 2106 (XSRST) (described below) within the microprocessor 2100, and when a power interruption occurs (when the power supply voltage falls from 12V to below the power interruption voltage value (10.5V)), it outputs a power interruption detection signal to a parallel input port 2111 (XINT) (described below) within the microprocessor 2100. In other words, the power management circuit 2170 functions as a means (startup means) for outputting a reset signal (startup signal) to the microprocessor 2100 when power is turned on, and further functions as a means (power interruption means) for outputting a power interruption detection signal (power interruption signal) to the microprocessor 2100 when a power interruption occurs.

Furthermore, when the microprocessor 2100 inputs a reset signal to the XSRST terminal, the reset controller 2106 generates a reset interrupt, and the main CPU 2101 starts operation from address "0000"H. Address "0000"H is the starting address where the power-on processing (Figure 171) described below is stored, and inputting a reset signal to the XSRST terminal and starting operation from address "0000"H is also referred to as a "power-on reset."

Next, with reference to Figure 166, an example configuration of the microprocessor 2100 of this embodiment will be described. The microprocessor 2100 is a microprocessor with security functions for use in gaming machines.

The microprocessor 2100 has a main CPU 2101, a main ROM 2102, a main RAM 2103, an external bus interface 2104 (signal bus 2116 (local bus)), a clock circuit 2105, a reset controller 2106, an arithmetic circuit 2107, a matching block 2108, unique information 2109, a random number circuit 2110 (random number generation circuit), a parallel input port 2111, an interrupt controller 2112, a timer circuit 2113, a serial communication circuit 2114, and a parallel output port 2115. The components of the microprocessor 2100 other than the signal bus 2116 are connected to each other via the signal bus 2116.

The main CPU 2101 executes various control programs and performs various controls based on the clock pulses generated by the clock circuit 2105. The main CPU 2101 also executes various control programs to control game operations and the counting of game media (game value) at the time of payout and settlement.

The main ROM 2102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 2101, various data tables, etc. The storage capacity of the main ROM 2102 is, for example, 12 kilobytes. In the microprocessor 2100, the main ROM 2102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 2101, various data tables, data for sending various control instructions (commands) to the sub-control board 72, etc.

The main RAM 2103 is provided with various storage areas for storing various data (parameters, flags, etc.) used when the main CPU 2101 executes various control programs. The main RAM 2103 has a storage capacity of, for example, 1 kilobyte. In the microprocessor 2100, the main RAM 2103 is provided with storage areas for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by executing the control programs, as well as storage areas for storing various counters (e.g., medal counters, insertion counters, etc.) used when executing payout control, etc., and various flags, etc.

The external bus interface 2104 is an interface circuit for electrically connecting the microprocessor 2100 to an external signal bus to which various components located outside the microprocessor 2100 are connected.

Clock circuit 2105 is configured to include, for example, a frequency divider (not shown), and converts the clock pulse signal input from the clock pulse generating circuit into clock pulse signals of multiple frequencies used for operating the main CPU and other components (e.g., timer circuit 2113). The clock pulse signals of multiple frequencies generated by clock circuit 2105 are output to all circuits within microprocessor 2100 except for clock circuit 2105 (main CPU 2101 to external bus interface 2104, and reset controller 2106 to parallel output port 2115) at frequencies corresponding to the operation of each circuit.

The reset controller 2106 resets the IAT (Illegal Address Trap) 2106a and WDT (watchdog timer) 2106b based on the reset signal input from the power management circuit. The arithmetic circuit 2107 includes a multiplication circuit 2107a, a division circuit 2107b, and a CRC circuit (cyclic redundancy check (CRC16) circuit) 2107c. When an inspection device is connected, the verification block 2108 verifies the signal level to determine whether the connected inspection device is genuine.

Unique information 2109 stores the unique information (identification information) of the microprocessor 2100. The chip individual number of the microprocessor 2100 consists of 4 bytes of data and is set when the chip is manufactured. In addition, the chip individual number of the microprocessor MP is set to a different number for each chip.

In the microprocessor 2100, the unique information (identification information) of the microprocessor 2100 is stored in the unique information 2109. The ROM code of the main ROM 2102 and the individual chip number of the microprocessor 2100 are also stored in the unique information 2109. The ROM code of the main ROM 2102 is composed of 4 bytes x 4 pieces of data, i.e., 16 bytes of data. Each 4-byte piece of data that makes up the ROM code of the main ROM 2102 is generated from data stored in the area of addresses "0000h" to "2FBFh" in the built-in ROM (main ROM 2102), and the method of generating the 4-byte data also differs for each 4-byte piece of data.

The random number circuit 2110 generates random numbers within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). The random number circuit 2110 is composed of multiple random number registers, such as random number register 0 for obtaining 2-byte hard-latch random numbers, random number registers 1 to 3 for obtaining 2-byte soft-latch random numbers, and random number registers 4 to 7 for obtaining 1-byte soft-latch random numbers. In the microprocessor 2100 of this embodiment, the main CPU 2101 obtains one value from a predetermined range of random numbers generated by an external random number circuit 2150, separate from the random number circuit 2110, as, for example, a random number value for role lottery (random number value for internal lottery). However, instead of the random number circuit 2150, random number register 0 for obtaining 2-byte hard-latch random numbers may be used to obtain the random number value for internal lottery.

The parallel input port 2111 is an input port (memory-mapped I/O) for signals input to the microprocessor 2100 from various circuits (e.g., a power management circuit, etc.) external to the microprocessor 2100. The parallel input port 2111 is also connected to the random number circuit 2110 and the interrupt controller 2112. In the microprocessor 2100, a start switch (e.g., a start switch corresponding to the start switch 7S in the first embodiment) is connected to the parallel input port 2111. When the start switch is turned on (on edge) in response to operation of a start lever (e.g., the start lever 7S in the first embodiment), a latch signal is output from the parallel input port 2111 to a predetermined random number register (e.g., random number register 0) in the random number circuit 2110. Then, in the random number circuit 2110, the predetermined random number register is latched in response to the input of the latch signal, and a 2-byte hard-latch random number is obtained.

The interrupt controller 2112 controls the timing of interrupt processing by the main CPU 2101 based on a reset signal or power interruption detection signal input from the power management circuit via the parallel input port 2111, or a timeout signal input at a predetermined interval from the timer circuit 2113. Furthermore, when a reset signal or power interruption detection signal is input from the power management circuit, or when a timeout signal is input from the timer circuit 2113, the interrupt controller 2112 outputs an interrupt request signal indicating an interrupt processing start command to the main CPU 2101. The main CPU 2101 then performs various interrupt processing based on the interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 2112.

Specifically, in the microprocessor 2100, the interrupt controller 2112 controls the execution timing of interrupt processing by the main CPU 2101 (for example, the periodic interrupt processing shown in FIG. 32 in the case of a timeout signal) based on a reset signal or power interruption detection signal input from the power management circuit via the parallel input port 2111, or a timeout signal input from the timer circuit 2113 at 1.1172 msec intervals. The main CPU 2101 then performs various processes within the periodic interrupt processing (for example, see FIG. 32) based on an interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 2112 in response to the timeout signal from the timer circuit 2113. Note that the interrupt processing by the main CPU 2101 executed based on a reset signal corresponds to the main processing shown in FIG. 23. In other words, the interrupt request signal issued by the interrupt controller 2112 serves as the starting point for all processing executed by the main CPU 2101.

The timer circuit 2113 (PTC) operates (counts the elapsed time) using the clock pulse signal (a clock pulse signal whose frequency is obtained by dividing the clock pulse signal for operating the CPU by a frequency divider (not shown)) generated by the clock circuit 2105. The timer circuit 2113 then outputs a timeout signal (trigger signal) to the interrupt controller 2112 at a predetermined interval (1.1172 msec for the microprocessor 2100).

The serial communication circuit 2114 is a communication circuit that controls the serial communication of various data between the control board on which the communication circuit is implemented and various boards provided external to the control board. In the microprocessor 2100, the serial communication circuit 2114 serially communicates data (various control commands, various data, etc.) with various boards (such as the sub-control board 2072) provided external to the main control board 2071. The serial communication circuit 2114 is composed of, for example, five communication circuits: SCU0 (the above-mentioned "asynchronous serial transmission/reception 0"), SCU1 (the above-mentioned "asynchronous serial transmission/reception 1"), and STU2 to STU4. Communication circuits SCU0 and SCU1 are composed of bidirectional serial communication circuits, and communication circuits STU2 to STU4 are composed of serial communication circuits dedicated to transmission.

For example, in this embodiment, for test firing signal control processing (transmission processing), communication circuit STU2 (for transmission to interface 2 (I/F2)), a serial communication circuit dedicated to transmission, is used. Furthermore, when connecting the main control board 2071 and sub-control board 2072 via serial communication, communication circuit STU3, a serial communication circuit dedicated to transmission, is used. Note that these communication specifications are a method of using serial communication circuits established from the perspective of anti-cheating (preventing fraudulent activity). Note that the above-mentioned interface 2 (I/F2) is the second interface board 302 for the test machine in Figure 3.

The parallel output port 2115 is an output port (memory-mapped I/O) for signals output from the microprocessor 2100 to various external circuits. In this example, data is output using a FIFO (First In First Out) method, for example.

(Registers in the main CPU)
Here, various registers of the main CPU 2101 will be described with reference to Fig. 167. Fig. 167 is a schematic diagram of the various registers included in the main CPU 2101.

As shown in FIG. 167(A), the main CPU 2101 has, as main registers, extended registers (Q register, U register), general-purpose registers (A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register), flag register (F register), index register (IX register, IY register), and stack pointer (stack pointer SP).

The main CPU 2101 also has sub-registers, including an extended register (Q' register), general-purpose registers (A' register, B' register, C' register, D' register, E' register, H' register, L' register), a flag register (F' register), and index registers (IX' register, IY' register). Each of the main registers and sub-registers mentioned above is composed of a 1-byte register.

In this embodiment, the B register and C register are used as a pair of registers (BC registers), and the D register and E register are used as a pair of registers (DE registers). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the H register and L register are used as a pair of registers (HL registers).

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to control processing by switching between two banks (Bank 0 and Bank 1), and with regard to the main registers and sub-registers mentioned above, there are main registers and sub-registers in Bank 0 and main registers and sub-registers in Bank 1, and by switching banks, the registers used and referenced by program instructions can be switched between the registers in Bank 0 and the registers in Bank 1.

In the program of this embodiment, address data (address value) on the upper side of the address is stored in the Q register. For example, when the main CPU 2101 is reset, the Q register may be set to the top address (upper side) "F0"H of the main RAM 2103 used in bank 0, and when the bank is switched to use bank 1, the Q register may be controlled (processed) to set the top address (upper side) "F2"H of the main RAM 2103 used in bank 1.
In addition to using the Q register as the upper address data, the first address (upper side) of the main RAM 2103, "F0"H, may be set in a register other than the Q register (for example, the H register), and the first address (upper side) of the main RAM 2103, "F2"H, may be set in a register other than the Q register (for example, the D register).
In particular, when referencing the game area (RAM area within the used area described below) and the outside area (RAM area outside the used area described below) of main RAM 2103, the upper addresses of the game area can be referenced using an instruction that uses the Q register (a specific register), and the upper addresses of the outside area can be referenced using an instruction that uses a register other than the Q register.In this case, the control (processing) can be performed so that the top address (upper side) "F2"H is set in a register other than the Q register before or after switching to bank 1.
In the program of this embodiment, depending on the amount of control (processing) that references and writes to the game area and out-of-area area of the main RAM 2103, it is desirable to set the starting address (upper side) of the main RAM 2103 to be set in the Q register to "F0"H or "F2"H.
For example, if the number of times that the first address (upper side) of the main RAM 2103 refers to and writes to the area "F0"H is large, then the Q register is set to "F0"H. If the number of times that the first address (upper side) of the main RAM 2103 refers to and writes to the area "F2"H is large, then the Q register is set to "F2"H.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the control registers are an interrupt page address register (I register), a memory refresh register (R register), a program counter (PC), an interrupt enable register 1, and an interrupt enable register 2, each of which is made up of a 1-byte register.

Also, as shown in FIG. 167 (B), in each of the flag registers, the F register and the F' register, predetermined flag information indicating the result of the arithmetic processing is set in each bit. For example, in bit 6 (D6), data (zero flag) indicating whether the arithmetic result is "0" or not is set in the arithmetic result determination process. Specifically, if the arithmetic result is "0", data "1" is set in bit 6, and if the arithmetic result is not "0", data "0" is set in bit 6. Then, in the arithmetic result determination process, the main CPU 2101 determines the arithmetic result by referring to the data "0"/"1" in bit 6.

In addition, bit 2 (D2) of the flags register is set to a parity flag or an overflow flag. For example, when used as a parity flag, it counts the number of "1" bits in the destination where the operation result is stored when a logical operation is performed, and sets "0" if the total is odd, or "1" if the total is even. When used as an overflow flag, the overflow flag is set when an overflow occurs when a signed arithmetic operation is performed.

In addition, by using a specific instruction, it is possible to control each bit of the flag register (for example, bit 2) to be set to the value of another register.

(Internal structure of main ROM and main RAM (memory map))
Next, the internal configurations (hereinafter referred to as "memory maps") of the main ROM 2102 and main RAM 2103 included in the microprocessor 2100 will be described with reference to Fig. 168. Fig. 168(A) shows a memory map of the entire memory, Fig. 168(B) shows the configuration of the built-in ROM of the entire memory, and Fig. 168(C) shows the configuration of the built-in RAM of the entire memory. The built-in ROM of Fig. 168(A) corresponds to, for example, the main ROM 2102 of Fig. 166, and the built-in RAM of Fig. 168(A) corresponds to the main RAM 2103 of Fig. 166.

In the memory map of the entire memory provided by the microprocessor 2100, as shown in Figure 168 (A), starting from the top address (e.g., "0000"H), the memory area of the main ROM 2102, the memory area of the main RAM 2103, and the area for the function registers are arranged in that order, with unused areas in between. Here, the function registers include two types of built-in registers, consisting of, for example, a first register used to set the operation of each peripheral function, and a second register for monitoring and control.

In the memory map of main ROM 2102, as shown in Figure 168 (B), from the top address of main ROM 2102 ("0000"H), the following areas are located in the order listed, at their respective predetermined addresses: in-use area program area 2102a, in-use area data area 2102b, unused area, out-of-use area program area 2102c, out-of-use area data area 2102d, unused area, trademark recording area 2102e, and program management area (e.g., an area for program management and security settings) 2102f. Furthermore, in-use area program area 2102a and in-use area data area 2102b are collectively referred to as in-use area ROM area 2202a, and out-of-use area program area 2102c and out-of-use area data area 2102d are collectively referred to as out-of-use area ROM area 2202b.

In this embodiment, as described above, unused areas of a predetermined size (e.g., 16 bytes) are provided between the in-use ROM area 2202a and the out-of-use ROM area 2202b, and between the out-of-use ROM area 2202b and the trademark recording area 2102e.

In the example of Figure 168 (B), the ROM area 2202a within the used area is the area from address "0000"H to address "1FF0"H, and the ROM area 2202b outside the used area is the area from address "2000"H to address "3DF0"H.

The program area 2102a in the usage area stores control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 2101 in various control processes related to game progress and playability. The data area 2102b in the usage area stores various data used by the main CPU 2101 in various control processes related to game progress and playability (for example, data tables such as the internal lottery table (see Figure 10), data for sending various control instructions (commands) to the sub-control circuit 2200 (corresponding to the sub-control circuit 200 in the first embodiment), etc.).

In other words, the ROM area 2202a in the usage area, which consists of the program area 2102a in the usage area and the data area 2102b in the usage area, stores various programs and data necessary for control processing (game-related processing) related to the games actually played by players at the gaming facility.

In addition, the non-usage ROM area 2202b, consisting of the non-usage program area 2102c and the non-usage data area 2102d, stores control programs and data for various processes (processes that do not affect gameplay) that are not directly related to the game (progression of the game and gameplay) played by the player. For example, programs and data used in gaming machine certification tests (test firing tests), control programs and data used in checksum generation processes when power is lost and sum check processes when power is restored (when power is restored), as well as anti-fraud programs and the data required for them, are stored.

In the memory map of main RAM 2103, as shown in Figure 168 (C), starting from the top address of main RAM 2103 ("F000"H), the working area within the used area 2103a, the stack area within the used area 2103b, the unused area, the working area outside the used area 2103c, and the stack area outside the used area 2103d are located in this order at their respective predetermined addresses. Furthermore, the working area within the used area 2103a and the stack area within the used area 2103b are collectively referred to as the RAM area within the used area 2203a, and the working area outside the used area 2103c and the stack area outside the used area 2103d are collectively referred to as the RAM area outside the used area 2203b.

In this embodiment, as described above, an unused area of a predetermined size (e.g., 16 bytes) is provided between the RAM area within the used area 2203a and the RAM area outside the used area 2203b.

The working area 2103a within the use area and the stack area 2103b within the use area temporarily store various data (various random number values, internal lottery winning combinations, etc.) determined by the execution of a control program related to the game (game progress and playability) played by the player.

In addition, the out-of-use work area 2103c and the out-of-use stack area 2103d are work areas for various processes that are not directly related to the game (progression and playability) played by the player. In this embodiment, this out-of-use RAM area 2203b is used to execute various processes that are not directly related to the game played by the player, such as sum check processing.

As described above, in the pachislot machine 2001 of this embodiment, various programs and various data (tables) used for various processes not directly related to the game played by the player are stored in the outside-usage-area ROM area 2202b, which is located at an address different from the inside-usage-area ROM area 2202a, within the main ROM 2102. Furthermore, such various processes not directly related to the game played by the player are performed within the main RAM 2103 using the outside-usage-area RAM area 2203b, which is located at an address different from the inside-usage-area RAM area 2203a.

With this configuration of the main ROM 2102, programs and data not required for the actual game played by the player can be placed in another area (outside-use area ROM area 2202b), thereby avoiding pressure on the capacity of the inside-use area ROM area 2202a, which is set as a game area.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as described above, by switching banks, it is possible to switch between processing related to Bank 0 and processing related to Bank 1. Here, the processing related to Bank 0 uses programs and data stored in the in-use ROM area 2202a of the main ROM 2102, temporarily using the in-use RAM area 2203a of the main RAM 2103, to perform calculations to control the game actions performed by the player. In other words, the processing related to Bank 0 can also be said to be processing related to the game areas (the in-use ROM area 2202a and the in-use RAM area 2203a). Furthermore, the main register and sub-register used at this time are the registers of Bank 0 described in Figure 167.

On the other hand, processing related to bank 1 uses programs and data stored in the off-use ROM area 2202b of the main ROM 2102, and temporarily uses the off-use RAM area 2203b of the main RAM 2103 to perform processing not directly related to the game played by the player (arithmetic processing for performing processing other than the game). In other words, processing related to bank 1 can also be said to be processing related to the off-area areas (off-use ROM area 2202b and off-use RAM area 2203b). Furthermore, the main register and sub-register used at this time are the registers of bank 1 described in Figure 167.

The processing related to bank 0 (processing related to the gaming area) is initiated by a program stored in the program area 2102a in the usage area of the main ROM 2102, and during this processing, data stored in the data area 2102b in the usage area of the main ROM 2102 is referenced, and data is referenced and updated using the working area 2103a in the usage area of the main RAM 2103, but data stored in the working area 2103c outside the usage area of the main RAM 2103, etc., may also be referenced.

Similarly, processing related to bank 1 (processing related to the area outside the area) is initiated by a program stored in the program area outside the area in use 2102c of main ROM 2102, and during this processing, data stored in the data area outside the area in use 2102d of main ROM 2102 is referenced, and data is referenced and updated using the work area outside the area in use 2103c of main RAM 2103, but data stored in the work area inside the area in use 2103a of main RAM 2103, etc., may also be referenced.

Switching from processing Bank 0 to processing Bank 1 is accomplished, for example, by executing a specific call instruction (e.g., "CALLEX") in a specific subprogram (also called a "subroutine"). Switching back from processing Bank 1 to processing Bank 0 is accomplished, for example, by executing a specific return instruction (e.g., "RETEX") in the specific subprogram called by the specific call instruction described above.

Furthermore, Figure 168 is a schematic representation of areas within memory, and the configuration of the present invention is not limited to the addresses shown or the apparent size (capacity) of each area.

(Interrupt enable register)
Next, the interrupt permission register 1 and the interrupt permission register 2 shown in FIG. 167 will be described in more detail.

Interrupt enable register 1, based on its value and the interrupt cause mask, determines whether to enable or disable maskable interrupts, which can be controlled so that interrupt processing is not performed for specific interrupt causes. Interrupt enable register 2 is used to restore the value of interrupt enable register 1 after processing non-maskable interrupts, which cannot be controlled so that interrupt processing is not performed for specific interrupt causes.

In addition to returning from non-maskable interrupt processing as described above, with regard to interrupt enable register 2, if an instruction to call processing related to an area outside the used area (e.g., outside the used area ROM area 2202b or outside the used area RAM area 2203b) (hereinafter referred to as an "outside the used area processing call instruction") is executed, and then an instruction to return from processing related to the outside the used area to processing related to an area within the used area (e.g., inside the used area ROM area 2202a or inside the used area RAM area 2203a) (hereinafter referred to as an "inside the used area processing return instruction") is issued, the value previously stored in interrupt enable register 2 is copied to interrupt enable register 1 (the value of interrupt enable register 2 is restored to interrupt enable register 1).

In addition, when a non-maskable interrupt is accepted or an instruction to call processing for an area outside the used area is executed, the value of interrupt permission register 1 is cleared (the value becomes "0"), and as a result, maskable interrupts are prohibited while that value is maintained.

Furthermore, the value of Interrupt Enable Register 2 is stored in the parity/overflow flag of the Flag Register (F Register) by a specific instruction, allowing the value of Interrupt Enable Register 2 to be referenced or temporarily saved.

Furthermore, when an interrupt enable instruction is executed, the value of interrupt enable register 1 becomes "1", indicating that an interrupt is enabled, and at the same time, the value of interrupt enable register 2 also becomes "1", indicating that an interrupt is enabled. In this way, when an interrupt enable instruction is executed, a maskable interrupt is enabled. Furthermore, when an interrupt disable instruction is executed, the value of interrupt enable register 1 becomes "0", indicating that an interrupt is disabled, and at the same time, the value of interrupt enable register 2 also becomes "0", indicating that an interrupt is disabled.

(Interrupt processing)
Next, an overview of the external maskable interrupt processing when a power outage is detected in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

When the main CPU 2101 receives an interrupt request signal from an external terminal (XINT terminal) via the parallel input port 2111, it starts a program whose start address is the entry address of the setting area associated with this external terminal. This program is external maskable interrupt processing. This setting area also contains data indicating the priority of the interrupt processing. For example, the entry address is stored in the upper bits of the setting area, and data indicating the priority is stored in the lower bits, with at least one "0" bit placed between the entry address and the data indicating the priority.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a timer interrupt signal is received from a timer counter (e.g., timer counter PTC2) of the timer circuit 2113, a program is started whose start address is the entry address of the setting area associated with this timer counter. This program is system timer interrupt processing. This setting area also contains data indicating the priority of the interrupt processing. For example, the entry address is stored in the upper bits of the setting area, and data indicating the priority is stored in the lower bits, with at least one "0" bit placed between the entry address and the data indicating the priority.

In this way, the above-mentioned setting area is provided for each interrupt cause, such as an external interrupt from an external terminal (XINT terminal) or a timer interrupt from a timer counter, and the data stored in the corresponding setting area determines the entry address of the processing program executed in response to the interrupt and the priority of the interrupt.

When the above-mentioned external maskable interrupt processing begins, the main CPU 2101 checks a specific address of the parallel input port 2111 to determine whether a power interruption signal has been received. This processing determines whether the interrupt cause is a power interruption, and if a power interruption signal is received, the interrupt mask register is updated with the interrupt cause mask shown in Figure 169 (A), and the specific interrupt cause is masked.

In the interrupt mask register, the interrupt cause mask shown in Figure 169 (A) is used to set "0" in the corresponding bits (e.g., bit positions 2 and 3 of bits 0 to 7) during initial setting after power-on, so that an interrupt caused by a timer counter (timer counter interrupt) and an interrupt caused by a power outage (power outage interrupt) are accepted. Then, in the above-mentioned external maskable interrupt processing, when a power outage occurs, bit positions 2 and 3 of the interrupt mask register are set to "1".

In this way, by setting bit position 2 and bit position 3 of the interrupt mask register to "1", the main CPU 2101 is controlled not to accept timer counter interrupts and power interruption interrupts from that point on (i.e., it is controlled not to start new external maskable interrupt processing or system timer interrupt processing).

Next, the external maskable interrupt process sets the XINT detection flag and sets a status indicating that a power outage has occurred. The contents of this XINT detection flag are then referenced to determine whether a power outage has occurred, and if a power outage has occurred, the power outage interrupt process (see Figure 190) is executed.

Figure 169 (B) shows the interrupt initial setting data stored in the program management area, which stores information necessary for the main CPU 2101 to execute programs. This data includes the setting value for interrupt priority.

Figure 169 (C) shows the priority order for each interrupt cause when the interrupt priority setting value is "01." As shown in Figure 169 (B), when the interrupt priority setting value is bit "01," the timer counter interrupt (interrupt from timer counter PTC2) is set to have a higher priority than the power interrupt (interrupt due to a signal from the XINT terminal). Note that this priority order can be changed by changing the setting value. Furthermore, in this embodiment, there is no need to specify the priority order in the program.

In the interrupt mask register of Figure 169(A), each bit is associated with a respective interrupt cause, but here, the interrupt causes shown in Figure 169(C) are associated in order of priority from bit position 0 to bit position 5. That is, bit position 0 of the interrupt mask register is associated with an interrupt from timer counter PTC0, bit position 1 is associated with an interrupt from timer counter PTC1, bit position 2 is associated with an interrupt from timer counter PTC2, bit position 3 is associated with an external interrupt from the external terminal (XINT terminal), bit position 4 is associated with an interrupt due to asynchronous serial transmission/reception 0, and bit position 5 is associated with an interrupt due to asynchronous serial transmission/reception 1. Bit positions 7 and 6 are unused.

As mentioned above, this embodiment is based on the assumption that timer counter interrupts and power interrupts occur, but as mentioned above, it can also handle at least interrupts caused by multiple timer counters, interrupts caused by multiple asynchronous serial transmission/reception, and external interrupts input from the XINT terminal.

This configuration, which uses an interrupt cause mask, can limit the occurrence of other interrupts after a power outage, eliminating the need to write branch instructions to process those other interrupts. As a result, the program structure can be simplified and the size can be reduced.

In addition, by using an interrupt cause mask, it is possible to limit the occurrence of other interrupts after a power outage occurs, so processing related to the power outage can be executed quickly after the power outage is detected, and there is no need to consider the execution timing or processing order of processing caused by those other interrupts.

In this way, whether or not to detect the occurrence of each interrupt cause can be adjusted by setting the bit position to "1" in the interrupt mask register. For example, after an external maskable interrupt process is executed upon detection of a power outage, it is possible to control the process so that interrupt processes related to specific interrupt causes are allowed.

(Processing by the main control circuit)
170 to 192, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 2101 of the main control circuit 2100 using each program will be described. Note that in the explanation of the various processes shown below, a specific example of the processing contents will be explained using the specifications of the slot machine 2001, but the processing contents of the various processes shown below are not limited to this.

First, referring to Figure 170, we will explain the main processing (main operation processing) executed by the main CPU 2101 of the main control circuit 2100. Note that Figure 170 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure for the main processing, which roughly corresponds to the flow shown in Figure 23 of the first embodiment described above, and descriptions of similar processing will be omitted where appropriate. Figure 170 also shows the power-on processing that is executed prior to the start of the main processing.

First, when power is supplied to the pachislot machine 1 (when the power is turned on), the main CPU 2101 performs power-on processing (step S2001). This processing involves various processes required when the power is turned on. Details of the power-on processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs initialization processing at the end of one game (step S2002). In this processing, a subprogram for transmission standby and RAM initialization processing is called, which performs operations such as obtaining unsent data and clearing designated storage areas in the main RAM 2103. Details of the processing performed by the subprogram for transmission standby and RAM initialization processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs medal acceptance/start check processing (step S2003). In this processing, the input status of the medal sensor, bet switch, and start switch (for example, the components corresponding to the medal sensor 31S, bet switch 6S, and start switch 7S in the first embodiment) is checked, and various processing required at the start of play is performed. Note that this medal acceptance/start check processing is the same as the medal acceptance/start check processing in the first embodiment (step S3 in Figure 23, see Figure 25).

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs random number value acquisition processing (step S2004). This processing extracts random number values for role lottery (e.g., a range of 0 to 65535) and random number values for effects (random number values for other lotteries) used in various gameplay-related lotteries (e.g., a range of 0 to 65535 or a range of 0 to 255), and stores the extracted random number values in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 2103. Note that the manner in which the various random number values are acquired is not limited to the above. The required number of random number values can be acquired as appropriate from predetermined numerical ranges (e.g., a range of 0 to 65535, a range of 0 to 32767, a range of 0 to 255, or a range of 0 to 127). This random number value acquisition processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs internal lottery processing (step S2005). This processing involves various processes required to determine the internal winning combination based on the internal lottery table and the random number value for the combination lottery, which correspond to the current game state, etc. Details of the internal lottery processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs game start state control processing (step S2006). In this processing, when game play starts, if a transition condition is met for each game state (for example, based on a determined internal lottery combination, etc.), various processes are performed to transition the game state in accordance with the transition condition that has been met, or to manage the play period of the current game state. Note that this game start state control processing is similar to the game start state control processing of the first embodiment (step S6 in Figure 23, see Figure 27).

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs a start command generation and storage process (step S2007). In this process, start command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 2103. The data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 2100 to the sub-control circuit 2200 in a communication data transmission process executed in the periodic interrupt process described below. The methods for generating, storing, and transmitting data for other commands are also basically the same. This start command generation and storage process is the same as the start command generation and storage process of the first embodiment (step S7 in Figure 23).

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs interface 2 output processing (step S2017). In this processing, the interface output processing stored in the out-of-use program area 2102c is called, and after generating transmission data, the generated data is output to interface 2 (I/F2) via serial communication. Details of the interface 2 output processing will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs main-side effect control processing at the start of game (step S2008). In this processing, if various effects are to be performed under the control of the main control circuit 2100 (main side) when game play begins, various processes necessary to perform those effects are performed. For example, if a specific effect (such as a "lock effect," "freeze effect," or "pseudo game" effect using reels 3L, 3C, and 3R) is to be performed at the start of game play, the main CPU 2101 controls the execution of that effect. Furthermore, if this effect includes pseudo game play, the main CPU 2101 controls the progress of that pseudo game play (or notifications related to the pseudo game play). Note that this main-side effect control processing at the start of game play is the same as the main-side effect control processing at the start of game play in the first embodiment (step S8 in FIG. 23).

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs a reel stop initial setting process (step S2009). In this process, various information necessary for stop control, such as the type of stop table and the type of draw priority table to be used in the current game, is set based on the internal winning combination and game status. Note that this reel stop initial setting process is the same as the reel stop initial setting process in the first embodiment (step S9 in Figure 23).

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs a reel spin start process (step S2010). This process requests that all reels start spinning. Once all reels have been requested to start spinning, the reel control process (see, for example, step S203 in FIG. 32 of the first embodiment) controls the drive of each stepping motor (e.g., the stepping motors corresponding to 51L, 51C, and 51R in the first embodiment), causing each reel (e.g., the reels corresponding to 3L, 3C, and 3R in the first embodiment) to start spinning. Once each reel starts spinning, its rotation is accelerated until it reaches a constant speed, and then the constant speed is maintained. Although details are omitted, this process also includes a reel spin start command generation and storage process. This reel spin start process is similar to the reel spin start process of the first embodiment (step S10 in FIG. 23).

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs a draw priority storage process (step S2011). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) on the spinning reel (all reels in this case), data indicating the draw priority is obtained by referencing the set internal winning combination and the set draw priority table, and stored in a draw priority data storage area (not shown). Although not shown, a symbol code storage process is performed prior to this process. This draw priority storage process is similar to the draw priority storage process of the first embodiment (step S11 in Figure 23).

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs reel stop control processing (step S2012). In this processing, various processes necessary to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel are performed based on the determined internal winning combination (or information related to various stop control settings set accordingly) and the stop operation mode of each stop button (for example, the stop buttons corresponding to 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first embodiment). Note that this reel stop control processing is similar to the reel stop control processing in the first embodiment (step S12 in Figure 23, see Figure 29).

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs a win activation determination process (step S2013). In this process, it determines whether the combination of symbols displayed on the active line is one of the combinations defined in the symbol combination table. For example, it determines whether there is a bit in which a "1" is stored in the win activation flag storage area. Also, although details are omitted, this process involves a win activation command generation and storage process. Note that this win activation determination process is the same as the win activation determination process of the first embodiment (step S13 in Figure 23).

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs a process to determine an abnormality in the number of medals passing through (step S2018). In this process, the difference (number difference) between the number of medals detected inside a selector (for example, a selector corresponding to selector 31 in the first embodiment) and the number of medals counted at the exit of that selector is calculated, and it is determined whether this number difference is within an acceptable range. Details of the process to determine an abnormality in the number of medals passing through will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs medal payout/replay activation processing (step S2014). In this processing, if the symbol combination determined in the above-mentioned winning activation determination processing is a symbol combination related to a minor role, the corresponding number of medals is paid out. If the symbol combination is a symbol combination related to a replay role, various processing steps are performed to activate replay in the next game. Note that, for example, if the symbol combination determined in the above-mentioned winning activation determination processing is a symbol combination related to a replay role, a processing step is performed to set a value equal to the number of bets in the current game in the automatic medal counter described below. Also, in this processing, a medal payout signal corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is output from an external centralized terminal board (for example, an external centralized terminal board corresponding to the external centralized terminal board 55 in the first embodiment). Note that the medal payout/replay activation processing will be described in detail below.

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs a role ratio monitor tally start process (step S2019). In this process, data for calculating various ratio information related to the game, which is displayed on a role ratio monitor device (for example, a role ratio monitor device corresponding to role ratio monitor device 54 of the first embodiment), is stored in a tally storage device. Details of the role ratio monitor tally start process will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs game end state control processing (step S2015). In this processing, when game play ends, for various game states, if a transition condition is met (for example, based on the combination of displayed symbols), various processes are performed to transition the game state in accordance with the transition condition that has been met, or to manage the play period of the current game state. Note that this game end state control processing is similar to the game end state control processing of the first embodiment (step S15 in Figure 23, see Figure 30).

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs a BB (special prize) play count check process (step S2020). In this process, it determines whether the BB (special prize) operation has ended, and sets the "BB (special prize) end clear address" to the RAM initialization address. Here, the BB (special prize) play count is, for example, the number of plays in the BB state in the first embodiment. Then, in step S2020, it continues with a transmission standby & RAM initialization process and a designated RAM initialization process. Details of the BB (special prize) play count check process, transmission standby & RAM initialization process, and designated RAM initialization process will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 2101 performs main-side presentation control processing at the end of play (step S2016). In this processing, if various presentations are to be performed under the control of the main control circuit 2100 (main side) when play ends, various processes necessary to perform those presentations are performed. For example, if a predetermined presentation is to be performed at the end of play, the execution of that predetermined presentation is controlled. Furthermore, if this includes a pseudo-game, the progress of that pseudo-game (or notifications related to the pseudo-game) is controlled. Note that this main-side presentation control processing at the end of play is the same processing as the main-side presentation control processing at the end of play in the first embodiment (step S16 in Figure 23).

In this way, in the pachislot machine 2001, one unit game is controlled by performing the above-mentioned steps S2002 to S2020, and the progress of the game is controlled by repeating these steps. Note that the machine can be configured to perform processes other than these as needed, or to not perform some of these processes. In other words, the various processes described above are merely examples.

(Power-on processing)
Next, referring to Fig. 171, the power-on processing executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described. Fig. 171 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure of the power-on processing. As explained in Fig. 170, this power-on processing is called and executed before the main processing in the main CPU 2101 and immediately after power is turned on (step S2001 in Fig. 170).

The power-on process first calls the CRC check process (outside the area in use) to perform a CRC check of the main RAM 2103 (step S2031). In Figure 171, this process in step S2031 is referred to as "CRC check process (outside the area in use)." The "outside the area in use" in parentheses means that the "CRC check process" program is stored in the out-of-area program area 2102c of the main ROM 2102 (hereinafter, the notation (outside the area in use) after "... process" has the same meaning). Furthermore, when the subprogram that executes this process is called from a program stored in the in-area program area 2102a in step S2001 of Figure 170, it is called by "CALLEX" in the program, for example, and returns to the calling program by "RETEX."

In addition, the objects inspected by this CRC inspection process are the working area 2103a within the used area, the stack area 2103b within the used area, and the working area 2103c outside the used area of the main RAM 2103.

Depending on the results of the CRC inspection process, data indicating one of three states (game return impossible state 1 (CRC abnormality), game return impossible state 2 (power interruption abnormality), and game return possible state (normal)) is stored in the game return state storage area. Details of the CRC inspection process will be described later.

Next, in step S2032, the RAM initialization address is set to the "clear address when a RAM abnormality occurs" associated with the RAM area 2203a in the used area. It is then determined whether data indicating an impossible game return state (i.e., impossible game return state 1 or impossible game return state 2) is stored in the game return status storage area, and whether "impossible to return" is set in the impossible game return error flag (step S2033). If data indicating an impossible game return state is not stored in the game return status storage area or the impossible game return error flag (No in step S2033), in step S2034 the RAM initialization address is set to the "clear address when settings are changed" associated with the RAM area 2203a in the used area, and the process proceeds to step S2035.

If data indicating a game return impossible state is stored in the game return status storage area or the game return impossible error flag (Yes in step S2033), the processing of step S2034 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2035.

Next, in step S2035, it is determined whether the setting change conditions are met, i.e., whether an operation to change the settings has been performed. When the arcade manager turns on a setting key switch (e.g., a switch corresponding to setting key switch 52 in the first embodiment) by inserting a setting key into the keyhole and turning it counterclockwise (from the initial position) (to perform the setting change process), and the door monitoring switch (e.g., a switch corresponding to door monitoring switch 56 in the first embodiment) indicates that the lower door mechanism (e.g., the lower door mechanism corresponding to lower door mechanism DD in the first embodiment) is open, and the main CPU 2101 can detect the on state and power is turned on (Yes in step S2035), step S2036 calls the designated RAM initialization process to initialize the main RAM 2103.

On the other hand, if the above-mentioned condition of Yes in step S2035 is not met and data indicating a game return impossible state (i.e., game return impossible state 1 (CRC abnormality) or game return impossible state 2 (power interruption abnormality)) is stored in the game return state storage area (No_1 in step S2035), data indicating "return impossible" is set in the game return impossible error flag in the outside use area working area 2103c, and game return impossible error processing is invoked. Details of game return impossible error processing will be described later.

Furthermore, if the condition for Yes in step S2035 described above is not met and data indicating a state in which game play can be returned to (i.e., a state in which game play can be returned to (normal)) is stored in the game play return status storage area (No_2 in step S2035), game play return processing is invoked. The game play return processing corresponds, for example, to the game play return processing of the first embodiment (step S29 in FIG. 24), and performs processing to return the game play status to the state before power interruption was detected.

If the above-mentioned condition of Yes in step S2035 is met, the designated RAM initialization process is called in step S2036. In this case, the designated RAM initialization process is called with the "address to be cleared when settings are changed" set as the RAM initialization address, and the designated RAM initialization process initializes the in-use area work area 2103a, the out-of-use area work area 2103c, etc. of the main RAM 2103. Details of the designated RAM initialization process will be described later.

Next, in step S2037, a setting change process is executed. In the setting change process, for example, the setting key switch described above is used to change the setting value of the pachislot machine 2001 (e.g., six levels of setting 1 to setting 6). Note that this setting change process is similar to the setting change described for the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment.

Next, in step S2038, the "clear address when settings are changed" for the RAM area 2203a in the used area is set as the RAM initialization address, and in step S2039, the transmission standby and RAM initialization process is called. Details of the transmission standby and RAM initialization process will be described later.

(CRC check processing (outside of used area))
Next, the CRC check processing (outside the area of use) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described with reference to Fig. 172. Fig. 172 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the CRC check processing (outside the area of use). As mentioned above, this CRC check processing (outside the area of use) is called by "CALLEX" in the program in step S2031 of Fig. 171.

In the CRC check process (outside the used area), first, in step S2051, the stack pointer is set to the out-of-use stack area, and the program counter of the caller is stored in that area. Specifically, the stack start address ("F400"H) of the out-of-use stack area 2103d is set to the stack pointer (SP) provided in the register of bank 1. Furthermore, after being called by "CALLEX", the SP of the register of bank 1 is used as the stack pointer (SP) until returning to the caller by "RETEX", and the stack area used is the out-of-use stack area 2103d.

Next, in step S2052, the CRC calculation process (outside the used area) is called, where a CRC calculation is performed on the in-use area work area 2103a, the out-of-use area work area 2103c, etc. This process is written as "CRC calculation process (outside the used area)", but the "outside the used area" in parentheses means that the "CRC calculation process" program is stored in the out-of-use area program area 2102c of the main ROM 2102. Furthermore, the subprogram that executes this process is called in the program in step S2052 of Figure 172, for example, by "CALL", and the program returns to the calling program by "RET".

As mentioned above, the CRC calculation process (outside the area in use) is called using the usual "CALL" command, and "CALLEX" is not used. This is because both the calling program (CRC check process (outside the area in use)) and the program for this process are stored in the out-of-area program area 2102c of the main ROM 2102, and there is no bank switching.

Next, in step S2053, data indicating game return impossible state 1 (data indicating a CRC abnormality) is set in a specified area, and in step S2054, the CRC value at the time of power interruption is obtained. In this embodiment, when a power interruption occurs, processing similar to the CRC calculation processing (outside the used area) described above is performed, and the CRC value for the main RAM 2103 immediately before the power was turned off is stored. Note that this CRC value is obtained from the CRC value storage area 2103e in the outside used area working area 2103c, and the CRC calculation at the time of power interruption is performed for the outside used area working area 2103c, but not including the CRC value storage area 2103e.

Next, in step S2055, the difference between the calculation result (CRC16 calculation result) obtained in the CRC calculation process (outside the used area) and the CRC value obtained in step S2054 is calculated, and in step S2056, it is determined whether the calculation result is 0.

If the calculation result is 0, i.e., the calculation result (CRC16 calculation result) obtained by the CRC calculation process (outside the used area) matches the CRC value obtained in step S2054 (Yes in step S2056), data indicating game return impossible state 2 (data indicating a power interruption abnormality) is set in a specified area in step S2057; if they do not match (No in step S2056), proceed to step S2060.

Next, in step S2058, it is determined whether the power interruption flag is on. In this embodiment, when a power interruption occurs, the power interruption flag is set to on in step S2471 of the CRC generation process (outside the use area) (step S2455 in Figure 190) called by the power interruption interruption process. If the power interruption flag is on (Yes in step S2058), data indicating a state in which game play can be resumed (data indicating normal) is set in a specified area in step S2059. If the power interruption flag is not on (No in step S2058), that is, if the above-mentioned CRC generation process (outside the use area) has not been performed in the power interruption interruption process, the process proceeds to step S2060, and the set contents of the power interruption abnormality (game play unreturnable state 2) are ultimately stored in the game resumption status storage area.

Finally, in step S2060, the data (status) set in the specified area is stored in the game return status storage area. Also, at this point, the power interruption occurrence flag is set to OFF. Then, "RETEX" is used to return to the next address of the calling program counter saved in the off-chip stack area, and execution of the original program continues.

If, as a result of this CRC inspection process (outside the use area), the CRC calculation results do not match when the power is turned on and when the power is interrupted, the game will enter a state 1 where it is not possible to resume play (CRC abnormality). Even if the CRC calculation results match, if the power interruption flag is not on, the game will enter a state 2 where it is not possible to resume play (power interruption abnormality). Under all other conditions, the game will enter a state where it is possible to resume play (normal).

(CRC calculation processing (outside used area))
Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the CRC calculation process (outside the area of use) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described. FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the CRC calculation process (outside the area of use). As mentioned above, this CRC calculation process (outside the area of use) is a process called by a "CALL" or the like in the program in step S2052 of the CRC check process (outside the area of use) in FIG. 172. The program that executes this CRC calculation process (outside the area of use) is a "normal subroutine" that is called from the "CRC check process (outside the area of use)" stored in the outside the area of use program area 2102c and always returns to the CRC check process (outside the area of use). In addition, a program stored in the outside the area of use program area 2102c that is called from a program also stored in the outside the area of use program area 2102c and always returns to the called program is also a "normal subroutine."

In the CRC calculation process (outside the used area), first, in step S2081, the CRC register port (address assigned to the "function register" in FIG. 168(A)) is set. For example, the port number for outputting the data to be CRC calculated to the CRC circuit 2107c is set, for example, in the C register. Next, in step S2082, the number of bytes to be used for the CRC calculation in the working area 2103a within the used area is set, for example, in the B register. Then, in step S2083, the starting address of the working area 2103a within the used area is set, for example, in the HL register. Here, the number of bytes to be used for the CRC calculation set in the B register is the data size to be used for the CRC calculation in the working area 2103a within the used area. Note that in the microprocessor 2100 used in this embodiment, addresses are all assigned to the "function register" in FIG. 168(A) for the input/output ports to each circuit built into the microprocessor 2100.

Next, the main CPU 2101 outputs the data specified by the CRC calculation byte count and starting address to the CRC circuit 2107c (step S2084). This process is performed, for example, by the OTIR instruction. The OTIR instruction writes the contents of the area specified by the HL register to the input/output port specified by the C register and U register (addresses assigned to the "function register" in Figure 168 (A) on the main CPU 2101 side), then subtracts 1 from the contents of the B register and adds 1 to the contents of the HL register. This process is repeated until the B register becomes 0, and the data to be CRC calculated is output to the CRC circuit 2107c. The CRC circuit 2107c then performs a CRC calculation on the received data to be CRC calculated. When the output of the data to be CRC calculated is complete, the B register becomes 0, and the HL register becomes the starting address of the stack area 2103b in the used area (for example, the address of the last address of the work area 2103a in the used area + 1).

Next, in step S2085, the main CPU 2101 sets the number of bytes to be subjected to the CRC calculation in the stack area 2103b within the used area to the B register, and outputs the data identified by the above starting address to the CRC circuit 2107c (step S2086). This output process is similar to the process of outputting the data to be subjected to the CRC calculation in the working area 2103a within the used area using the OTIR instruction described above. This process outputs the data to be subjected to the CRC calculation in the stack area 2103b within the used area to the CRC circuit 2107c, and a CRC calculation is performed on this data. At this time, the CRC calculation by the CRC circuit 2107c continues from the CRC calculation on the data to be subjected to the CRC calculation in the working area 2103a within the used area.

Then, a CRC calculation is similarly performed on the outside used work area 2103c. That is, in step S2087, the number of bytes to be subjected to the CRC calculation on the outside used work area 2103c is set in the B register, in step S2088, the starting address of the outside used work area 2103c is set in the HL register, and in step S2089, the data specified by the number of bytes to be subjected to the CRC calculation and the starting address is output to the CRC circuit 2107c, for example, using the OTIR instruction mentioned above. The CRC calculation is then performed on this data. At this time, the CRC calculation by the CRC circuit 2107c continues from the CRC calculation on the data to be subjected to the CRC calculation in the inside used stack area 2103b.

Note that the range of the working area outside the used area 2103c where the CRC calculation is performed excludes the CRC value storage area 2103e where the CRC value obtained by the CRC calculation when a power outage occurs. For example, the CRC value storage area 2103e is placed at the final address of the working area outside the used area 2103c, and the number of bytes for the CRC calculation is adjusted so that the data to be subjected to the CRC calculation extends up to just before that final address. The reason for this configuration is that when a power outage occurs, the result of the CRC calculation including the working area outside the used area 2103c is stored in the CRC value storage area 2103e of the working area outside the used area 2103c after the CRC calculation.

Then, in step S2090, the process waits for the calculation to be confirmed by the CRC circuit 2107c (cycles 1 to 5), and in step S2091, the CRC calculation result (CRC16 calculation result) is obtained from the CRC circuit 2107c, and processing ends. Here, the CRC calculation result is received, for example, from a specified parallel input port related to the CRC circuit 2107c and set, for example, in the HL register.

(Game return impossible error processing (out of use area))
Next, referring to Fig. 174, a description will be given of the game return impossible error processing (outside the use area) executed by the main CPU 2101. Fig. 174 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure of the game return impossible error processing (outside the use area). As described above, this game return impossible error processing (outside the use area) is called (for example, by CALLEX) when the judgment in step S2035 of Fig. 171 is No_1, that is, when no setting change operation is performed when the power is turned on and data indicating game return impossible state 1 (CRC abnormality) or game return impossible state 2 (power interruption abnormality) is stored in the game return state storage area.

In this embodiment, the game return impossible error processing (outside the use area) is executed by a program stored in the outside use area program area 2102c of the main ROM 2102, but it may also be configured to be executed by a program stored in the inside use area program area 2102a.

The game return impossible error processing (outside the use area) is also called (for example, by CALLEX) from the internal lottery processing (step S2005) of the main processing described below.

The game cannot be restored unless the power is turned off and settings are changed. If the power is turned on without changing the settings, the game cannot be restored error processing (outside of the usage area) will cause the device to enter a standby state with communication data transmission postponed. This processing is similar to the power-on error processing shown in step S30 of Figure 24 in the first embodiment.

When processing an error that makes it impossible to return to play (outside the usage area), first, in step S2111, interrupts are prohibited, which prevents power cut interrupts and other such processing from occurring. Next, in step S2112, the insertion of medals (and betting operations) is prohibited. Note that in the case of medal-less machines, only betting operations are prohibited.

Next, in step S2113, the information display device (for example, a display device using a 7-segment LED such as the information display device 14 of the first embodiment) is set to display that an error preventing return to play has occurred.

Next, in step S2114, the WDT 2106b of the reset controller 2106 is reset (cleared). This process causes the WDT 2106b to return to its initial value and restart counting, and then immediately thereafter a reset is performed again in step S2114, so that no process (restart due to reset) is initiated when the WDT 2106b reaches a predetermined count value.

In step S2115, control is performed to carry over the transmission of the remaining communication data. Control of carry over the transmission of the remaining communication data is a process for transmitting the stored communication data to the sub-control circuit 2200 immediately after power is restored if communication data is stored in the communication data storage area at the time the game recovery impossible error is detected. Specifically, the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the transmission interval timer is repeated in an infinite loop, and the value of the transmission interval timer immediately becomes 0 (however, it is never subtracted to a negative value).

In this embodiment, in the communication data transmission process of the periodic interrupt process described below, communication data is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2200 at regular intervals (e.g., approximately 8 msec). After a predetermined value is set in the transmission interval timer, the value of the transmission interval timer is decremented by 1 at each interval. When the value reaches 0, any unsent communication data is transmitted.

However, when a game return impossible error is detected, as described above, interrupts are prohibited in step S2111, and therefore, in the periodic interrupt processing, the communication data transmission processing stored in the communication data storage area is stopped and the transmission of the remaining communication data is postponed. After that, when the power is turned off and on and a setting change processing is performed, the value of the transmission interval timer is set to 0, so that unsent communication data is immediately transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2200. Here, the communication data transmitted to the sub-control circuit 2200 includes, for example, various control commands related to the game presentation and data related to those commands.

In addition, even if the power is turned off during the infinite loop of the impossible-to-return-to-play error processing (outside the use area) (the process of infinitely repeating steps S2114 and S2115), interrupts are prohibited in step S2111 of the impossible-to-return-to-play error processing (outside the use area), so the power interruption processing does not occur, and the device is set to the off state (no setting change processing is performed) without operating the setting key. Even if the power is then turned on, data indicating an impossible-to-return-to-play state (i.e., impossible-to-return-to-play state 1 (CRC abnormality) or impossible-to-return-to-play state 2 (power interruption abnormality)) will remain stored in the game recovery status storage area, and the above-mentioned infinite loop will occur again immediately after the power is turned on, causing the device to enter standby mode.

Therefore, unless the setting change process is performed, the gaming machine cannot transition to normal operation. If the setting change process is performed, the communication data stored in the communication data storage area is cleared, and any unsent communication data stored in the communication data storage area before the game return impossible error occurred is discarded. This game return impossible error processing (outside the use area) allows for effective restart management in the pachislot machine 2001 of this embodiment.

(BB (special prize) number of games checked, transmission standby & RAM initialization, designated RAM initialization)
Next, referring to Figures 175 and 176, three processes executed by the main CPU 2101 (i.e., BB (special prize) number of plays check process, transmission waiting & RAM initialization process, and designated RAM initialization process) will be described.

Figures 175 and 176 are flowcharts showing the processing procedures for the three processes mentioned above, and are a single subprogram consisting of a series of consecutive program codes. This flowchart also includes two end symbols (rounded rectangles indicating "RET") and three start symbols (other rounded rectangles indicating something other than "RET", namely, "BB (special prize) number of plays check process", "transmission standby & RAM initialization process", and "designated RAM initialization process"). The end symbols indicate that when the flow reaches that end symbol, it will return to the calling program, and the start symbols indicate addresses (entry points) from which other calling programs can be called.

For convenience, we will assign step numbers to each of the end symbols (returns) and start symbols (entry points).

The BB (special prize) number of plays check process is called from the calling program by specifying the address of entry point S2131 (the address of the program stored in the program area 2102a in the use area) or the label corresponding to that address. Specifically, this BB (special prize) number of plays check process is called from the main process shown in FIG. 170 (step S2020).

In step S2132 shown in FIG. 175, the main CPU 2101 determines whether BB (special prize) is in operation. If it is not in operation (No in step S2132), the process proceeds to return S2133, where the program returns to the calling program. If it is in operation (Yes in step S2132), the process proceeds to step S2134, where the program determines whether the operation of BB (special prize) has ended.

If the BB (special prize) operation has not ended (No in step S2134), the number of RB plays is decremented in step S2135, and it is determined in step S2136 whether RB has ended. If RB has not ended (No in step S2136), proceed to return S2133 and return to the calling program.

If the BB (special prize) operation has ended (Yes in step S2134) or the RB has ended (Yes in step S2136), the RB differential signal is set to off (test signal) in step S2137, and the interrupt is waited for two cycles in step S2138.

Next, in step S2139, it is determined whether or not the operation of BB (special prize) has finished. If the operation of BB (special prize) has not finished (No in step S2139), the process proceeds to return S2133 and returns to the calling program. On the other hand, if the operation of BB (special prize) has finished (Yes in step S2139), in step S2140, the RAM initialization address is set to the "BB (special prize) end clear address" related to RAM area 2203a in the used area.

Next, the process proceeds to entry point S2141 shown in Figure 176, where the transmission standby and RAM initialization process begins. The transmission standby and RAM initialization process is called from the calling program by specifying the address of entry point S2141 (the address of the program stored in the program area 2102a in the area of use) or the label corresponding to that address. Specifically, this transmission standby and RAM initialization process is called from the process of step S2039 shown in Figure 171, and when called from the process of step S2039, the RAM initialization address is set to the address set in step S2038.

Next, in step S2142, interrupts are prohibited, and then in step S2143, the communication data stored in the communication data storage area is obtained, and in step S2144, interrupt permission is set. Between the time when interrupts are prohibited and the time when interrupts are permitted, the occurrence of interrupt processing such as periodic interrupt processing and power interruption processing is suppressed, thereby preventing the communication data transmission processing of periodic interrupt processing (see FIG. 186) from being performed and the communication data stored in the communication data storage area being transmitted.

Next, in step S2145, it is determined whether there is unsent communication data, and if there is unsent communication data (Yes in step S2145), the processing of steps S2142 to S2144 is repeated. If there is no unsent communication data (No in step S2145), the processing proceeds to entry point S2146, where the designated RAM initialization processing begins.

The designated RAM initialization process is called from the calling program by specifying the address of entry point S2146 (the address of the program stored in the program area in use 2102a) or the label corresponding to that address. Specifically, this designated RAM initialization process is called from the processing of step S2036 shown in FIG. 171, and when called from the processing of step S2036, the RAM initialization address is set to the address set in step S2032 or step S2034.

Next, in step S2147, the return address is protected (the program counter is stored in the stack area), the RAM initialization address is set, and the initialization count (= the number of bytes to be initialized) is set. Then, in step S2148, interrupts are disabled, and in step S2149, the contents of the RAM initialization address where the clear address for the RAM area 2203a in the used area is set is saved in the start address storage area. Specifically, the RAM initialization address is set by setting the address set in the DE register to the HL register, and the initialization count is the number of bytes calculated from the address set in the HL register to the address where the stack area protected by the return address is not cleared, and is the value set in the BC register.

Next, in step S2150, the out-of-use RAM initialization process (out-of-use area) is called (using CALLEX) to initialize the out-of-use RAM area 2203b. Details of the out-of-use RAM initialization process (out-of-use area) will be described later.

Then, in step S2151, RAM in the used area is initialized, that is, the RAM area 2203a in the used area is initialized, and in step S2152, interrupt permission is set. During the period from when interrupts are disabled to when they are allowed, interrupt processing such as periodic interrupt processing and power interruption processing is suppressed. Specifically, the number of initializations (= number of bytes to be initialized) is overwritten with 0 from the RAM initialization address set in step S2147 for the RAM area 2203a in the used area. Although not shown here, the initialization in step S2151 is performed, for example, by executing the "CLRIR" command.

In this RAM initialization process within the used area, the initialization start address for the RAM area 2203a within the used area is originally stored in the RAM initialization address, so this address is used as the initialization start address. Also, in this embodiment, the initialization end address for the RAM area 2203a within the used area is set to a fixed address, but it may also be set to a different address depending on the initialization start address.

Processing then proceeds to return S2153 and returns to the calling program.

(RAM initialization process outside the area of use (outside the area of use))
Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the out-of-use RAM initialization process (out-of-use area) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described.

Figure 177 is a flowchart showing the processing steps for the above-mentioned out-of-use RAM initialization process (outside of the use area). Figure 177 shows two processes: out-of-use RAM initialization process (outside of the use area) and out-of-use RAM initialization process (continued). However, by executing, for example, a jump instruction in out-of-use RAM initialization process (outside of the use area), out-of-use RAM initialization process (continued) is subsequently executed, so these are described as a series of programs.

For convenience, we will assign step numbers to each of the two start symbols (rounded rectangles other than "RETEX", i.e., "RAM initialization outside of used area (outside of used area)" and "RAM initialization outside of used area (continued)").

The out-of-use RAM initialization process (outside the used area) is called by the calling program by specifying the address of entry point S2171 (the address of the program stored in the in-use program area 2102a) or the label corresponding to that address. Specifically, this out-of-use RAM initialization process (outside the used area) is called (by CALLEX) from step S2150 in Figure 176.

In step S2172 shown in FIG. 177, the main CPU 2101 moves (jumps) by specifying the address of entry point S2173 (the address of the program stored in the out-of-use area program area 2102c) or the label corresponding to that address, for example, using a jump command, and transfers control of the out-of-use area RAM initialization processing (outside of the used area). For convenience, the processing after the move is referred to as out-of-use area RAM initialization processing (continued). Also, for convenience, the move (jump) processing indicated by step S2172 is represented by a trapezoid symbol. Note that such move (jump) processing can be implemented in various ways, including using a jump command.

When the out-of-use RAM initialization process (continue) begins, in step S2174, a lower address (e.g., 1 byte) from the start address storage area is obtained and stored, for example, in a specified area (memory determination area) of the out-of-use work area 2103c. Here, the start address storage area stores a clear address related to the in-use RAM area 2203a, e.g., 2 bytes, set as the RAM initialization address (step S2149 in Figure 176). Depending on the situation, for example, one of the following is stored: a clear address when a RAM abnormality occurs, a clear address when settings are changed, a clear address at the end of BB (special prize), or a clear address at the end of one game. These clear addresses are addresses related to the in-use RAM area 2203a. The clear address at the end of one game is set as the RAM initialization address, for example, in the main side presentation control process at the end of game (step S2016) shown in Figure 170.

Next, in step S2175, the initialization start address used to initialize the RAM outside the used area (step S2183) is temporarily set to the address outside the used area that is cleared when a RAM abnormality occurs. If the address in the memory determination area is not the address that is cleared when a RAM abnormality occurs (No in step S2176), the initialization start address is set to the address outside the used area that is cleared when the settings are changed (step S2177) as the next candidate.

Next, if the address in the memory judgment area is not the address cleared when the settings are changed (No in step S2178), the next candidate initialization start address is set to the address outside the used area that is cleared when BB (special prize) ends (step S2179).

Furthermore, if the address in the memory determination area is not the address cleared at the end of BB (special prize) (No in step S2180), the initialization start address is finally set to the address cleared outside the use area at the end of one game (step S2181), and then the process proceeds to step S2182.

If the answer is Yes in step S2176, step S2178, or step S2180, proceed to step S2182 without changing the contents of the initialization start address.

By performing the above process, by referencing only the lower address (address of the memory determination area) of the start address storage area where the RAM initialization address for the in-use RAM area 2203a is stored, it is possible to specify the initialization start address of the out-of-use RAM area 2203b corresponding to that lower address.

Next, in step S2182, the initialization count (= number of bytes to be initialized) is calculated and set in a specified area. Then, the initialization start address set in the above process is used to initialize the out-of-use RAM area 2203b (step S2183). Specifically, the initialization count is set in the BC register by subtracting the initialization start address set in the HL register from the initialization end address of the out-of-use RAM area 2203b. Then, the specified range of the out-of-use RAM area 2203b is initialized by executing the "CLRIR" instruction described above. Note that in this embodiment, the initialization end address of the out-of-use RAM area 2203b is set to a fixed address regardless of the lower address of the start address storage area; however, like the initialization start address, it may be set to a different address depending on the lower address of the start address storage area. Then, "RETEX" is used to return to the calling program.

The program that executes the out-of-use RAM initialization process (continued) is stored in the out-of-use program area 2102c and is a "specific subroutine" that is stored in the in-use program area 2102a, is called from step S2150 of the process shown in Figures 175 and 176, and returns to that process.

(Random number acquisition process, internal lottery process)
Next, with reference to Figures 178 and 179, the random number value acquisition process and internal lottery process executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described.

Figure 178 is a flowchart showing the processing steps for the random number acquisition process described above. Figure 179 is a flowchart showing the processing steps for the internal lottery process described above. These two processes are a single subprogram consisting of a series of consecutive program codes. This flowchart also includes one end symbol (a rounded rectangle marked "RET") and two start symbols (other rounded rectangles marked other than "RET", i.e., "random number acquisition process" and "internal lottery process"). The end symbol indicates that when the flow reaches that end symbol, it will return to the calling program, and the start symbol indicates an address (entry point) from which other calling programs can be called.

For convenience, we will assign a step number to each of the two start symbols (representing "random number acquisition process" and "internal lottery process").

The random number value acquisition process is called from the calling program by specifying the address of the entry point S2201 (the address of the program stored in the program area in use 2102a) or the label corresponding to that address. Specifically, this random number value acquisition process is called from step S2004 in Figure 170.

As can be seen from Figures 178 and 179, when the internal lottery processing calls the random number value acquisition processing described above, processing automatically proceeds to the internal lottery processing entry point S2205, and there is no need to call it from the calling program. In Figure 170, to make the processing easier to understand, the internal lottery processing is shown as being called in step S2005 after step S2004, but in reality, when the random number value acquisition processing is called in step S2004, the internal lottery processing is automatically executed after the random number value acquisition processing is executed.

First, when the random number value acquisition process is started, the main CPU 2101 sets interrupt prohibition in step S2202 shown in FIG. 178, and then in step S2203, acquires a random number value for the role lottery and saves the acquired random number value in the role lottery random number value storage area. In this embodiment, the random number value for the role lottery is generated by the random number circuit 2150 connected to the microprocessor 2100.

Next, in step S2204, interrupt permission is set. Between the time when interrupts are disabled and the time when they are permitted, interrupt processing such as periodic interrupt processing and power interruption processing is suppressed.

Next, when the internal lottery process is initiated, the main CPU 2101 executes a medal insertion count check process in step S2206 shown in FIG. 179. During this process, the medal insertion count stored in the medal insertion counter and credit counter is updated based on the detection results of a medal sensor (e.g., a medal sensor corresponding to medal sensor 31S in the first embodiment) and a bet switch (e.g., a bet switch corresponding to bet switch 6S in the first embodiment) during the period in which medals can be accepted.

Next, in step S2207, the set content is obtained from the game return impossible error flag. For example, if the setting value check process (outside the use range) or the random number inspection process (outside the use range) described below, as shown in FIG. 189, determines that game return is impossible (abnormal), data indicating "return impossible" (for example, a value other than "0") is set to the game return impossible error flag, and if the game return is determined to be possible (normal), the game return impossible error flag remains set to data indicating "return possible" (for example, a value of "0").

Here, a determination is made as to whether the setting of the game return impossible error flag is "return impossible" (step S2208), and if the setting of the game return impossible error flag is "return impossible" (Yes in step S2208), the game return impossible error processing (see FIG. 174) is called. Note that although this embodiment refers to a "game return impossible state," it may more accurately be expressed as a "game continuation impossible state."

If the setting of the game return impossible error flag is not "return impossible" (No in step S2208), that is, if game return is possible (normal), in step S2209, the internal lottery table (address) used for internal lottery processing is set.

The subsequent internal lottery processing (steps S2210 to S2220) is the same as steps S62 to S73 shown in Figure 26 of the first embodiment, so a detailed description will be omitted.

(Interface 2 output processing (outside of use area))
180, the interface 2 output process (outside the use area) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described. This process is a subprogram for outputting using the communication circuit STU2, which is a serial communication circuit dedicated to transmission to the second interface board 302 for testing machine in FIG. 3.

Figure 180 is a flowchart showing the processing steps for the interface 2 output processing (outside the area of use) described above. Figure 180 shows two processes: interface 2 output processing (outside the area of use) and interface 2 output processing (continued). However, by executing a jump instruction in interface 2 output processing (outside the area of use), interface 2 output processing (continued) is subsequently executed, so these will be described as a series of programs.

For convenience, we will assign step numbers to each of the two start symbols (rounded rectangles other than "RETEX", i.e., "Interface 2 output processing (outside of used area)" and "Interface 2 output processing (continued)").

Interface 2 output processing (outside the area in use) is called from the calling program by specifying the address of entry point S2241 (the address of the program stored in the area in use program area 2102a) or the label corresponding to that address. Specifically, this interface 2 output processing (outside the area in use) is called (by CALLEX) from step S2017 in Figure 170.

In step S2242 shown in FIG. 180, the main CPU 2101 moves (jumps) by specifying the address of entry point S2243 (the address of the program stored in the out-of-use program area 2102c) or the label corresponding to that address, for example, using a jump command, and transfers control of interface 2 output processing (outside of the used area). For convenience, the processing after the move is referred to as interface 2 output processing (continuation). Also, for convenience, the move (jump) processing indicated by step S2242 is represented by a trapezoid symbol. Note that this move (jump processing) can be achieved in various ways, as described above.

When interface 2 output processing (continued) begins, step S2244 determines whether or not transmission is currently in progress to interface 2 (I/F2). Interface 2 represents an interface that connects the main control board 2071 and sub-control board 2072 via serial communication; for example, STU3, which is one of the serial communication circuits 2114 described above and is a serial communication circuit dedicated to transmission, controls communication between the main control board 2071 and sub-control board 2072.

If it is determined that transmission to interface 2 is not in progress (No in step S2244), in step S2245, the transmission parameter table (address) to be used for transmitting the transmission data is set, and then in step S2246, the transmission data is generated using the set transmission parameter table.

Then, in step S2247, the generated transmission data is sent to interface 2 (sub-control board 2072, sub-control circuit 2200), and then "RETEX" is used to return to the calling program.

Also, if it is determined that transmission to interface 2 is in progress (Yes in step S2244), no processing is performed and the program returns to the calling program using "RETEX."

The program that executes the interface 2 output process (continued) is stored in the program area outside the area in use 2102c and is a "specific subroutine" that is stored in the program area within the area in use 2102a, is called by "CALLEX" from step S2017 of the main process shown in FIG. 170, and returns to the main process.

(Medal currency number abnormality determination process (outside of use area))
Next, referring to Fig. 181, the medal currency number abnormality determination process (outside the use area) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described. Fig. 181 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the medal currency number abnormality determination process (outside the use area). As mentioned above, this medal currency number abnormality determination process (outside the use area) is a process called by "CALLEX" in the program in step S2018 of Fig. 170.

In the medal/currency count abnormality determination process (outside the use area), first, in step S2261, the medal insertion counter is set, and in step S2262, the guide rail medal/currency count is set. Here, the medal insertion counter counts the number of medals that have passed through the medal discharge guide connected to the outlet of a selector (for example, a selector corresponding to selector 31 in the first embodiment), and the guide rail medal/currency count is the number of medals detected (by a medal detection sensor) as having passed through a guide rail provided inside the selector.

Next, in step S2263, the difference between the number of medals inserted in the medal counter and the number of medals in the guide rail is calculated, and in step S2264, it is determined whether the difference is within the allowable range.

If it is determined that the difference in number of sheets is not within the allowable range (No in step S2264), data indicating an abnormal difference in number of sheets error is set in the out-of-use area error flag (step S2265). After step S2265, or if it is determined that the difference in number of sheets is within the allowable range (Yes in step S2264), the program returns to the calling program by "RETEX".

(Medal payout/replay operation processing, settlement execution processing, medal payout processing)
Next, with reference to Figures 182 and 183, we will explain three processes executed by the main CPU 2101 (i.e., medal payout/replay operation process, settlement execution process, and medal payout process).

Figures 182 and 183 are flowcharts showing the processing procedures for the three processes mentioned above, and are a single subprogram consisting of a series of consecutive program codes. This flowchart also includes two end symbols (rounded rectangles indicating "RET") and three start symbols (other rounded rectangles indicating symbols other than "RET", i.e., "medal payout/replay activation processing," "settlement execution processing," and "medal payout processing"). An end symbol indicates that when the flow reaches that end symbol, it will return to the calling program, and a start symbol indicates an address (entry point) from which other calling programs can be called.

For convenience, we will assign step numbers to each end symbol (return) and start symbol (entry point).

The medal payout/replay activation process is called from the calling program by specifying the address of entry point S2281 (the address of the program stored in the program area 2102a in the usage area) or the label corresponding to that address. Specifically, this medal payout/replay activation process is called from the main process shown in Figure 170 (step S2014). In the first embodiment, this process corresponds to the medal payout/replay activation process (step S14) shown in Figure 23.

In step S2282 shown in FIG. 182, the main CPU 2101 determines whether the winning combination is a replay or not, and if it is not a replay (No in step S2282), proceeds to step S2284. If it is a replay (Yes in step S2282), proceeds to step S2283, where the value of the medal insertion counter, which indicates the number of medals inserted, is set in the automatic insertion medal counter.

Next, in step S2284, the winning activation command is stored in the communication data storage area, and in step S2285, it is determined whether the winning number counter = 0. If the winning number counter = 0 (Yes in step S2285), proceed to return S2292 and return to the calling program.

If the winning medal counter is not equal to 0 (No in step S2285), in step S2286, the address of the payout medal counter storage area is set in a specified register. Next, in step S2287, it is determined whether the number of credit medals is at the upper limit (for example, 50 medals).

If the number of medals in the credit is not at the upper limit (No in step S2287), in step S2288, 1 is added to the credit counter, and each medal paid out as a result of a win is accumulated in the credit.

In step S2289, a medal payout count check process is executed. This medal payout count check process subtracts 1 from the payout count counter, adds 1 to the counter (medal out counter) for the medal payout signal output to the external centralized terminal board (for example, an external centralized terminal board corresponding to external centralized terminal board 55 in the first embodiment), and updates the medal insertion counter.

Next, in step S2291, it is determined whether payout has ended, i.e., whether the number of medals paid out has reached 0. If it is determined that payout has ended (Yes in step S2291), the process proceeds to return S2292 and returns to the calling program. If it is determined that payout has not ended (No in step S2291), the process returns to step S2287 and determines whether the number of medals credited has reached the upper limit.

If it is determined that the number of credit medals has reached the upper limit (Yes in step S2287), the process proceeds to step S2298 in FIG. 183, where the medal payout process related to the payout number counter is initiated. The medal payout process is executed when the number of credit medals has reached the upper limit in the flowchart shown in FIG. 182, and is also called when the settlement execution process (step S2293) shown in FIG. 183 is initiated (step S2295), as described below.

The medal payout process receives the number of medals to be paid out as an input parameter, and performs the payout process based on the number of medals to be paid out determined therein. In this embodiment, when this process is called, one of the payout number counter, credit counter, or medal insertion counter is received as an input parameter, and the number received is used as the number of medals to be paid out. In addition, at this time, the input parameter is the lower address (e.g., the lowest 8 bits) of the address (in the working area 2103a within the used area) where each counter is stored.

When the medal payout process begins, in step S2299, the hopper drive is turned on to operate the hopper device for paying out medals (for example, a device with a configuration similar to the hopper device 32 in the first embodiment), and in step S2300, it is determined whether a medal has passed through the hopper count switch. If it is determined that a medal has not passed through the hopper count switch (No in step S2300), a hopper error check process is performed in step S2301.

The hopper error check process detects hopper jam errors and hopper empty errors. In the case of a hopper jam error, it is determined that an error has been detected when the hopper count switch remains on for a certain period of time. In the case of a hopper empty error, it is determined that an error has been detected when the hopper count switch remains off for a certain period of time. When one of these errors is detected, the type of error detected is displayed on a specified 7-segment LED on an information display device (for example, a display device corresponding to information display device 14 in the first embodiment).

Then, the process proceeds to step S2300, where it is repeatedly determined whether a medal has passed through the hopper count switch. If it is determined that a medal has passed through the hopper count switch (Yes in step S2300), the process proceeds to step S2302, where a medal payout number check process is performed. This medal payout number check process is the same as the medal payout number check process in step S2289 shown in FIG. 182.

Next, in step S2303, it is determined whether payout has ended, i.e., whether the number of medals paid out has reached 0. If it is determined that payout has ended (Yes in step S2303), the program proceeds to return S2305 and returns to the program from which it was called. If it is determined that payout has not ended (No in step S2303), the program proceeds to step S2300 and repeats the determination of whether medals have passed the hopper count switch.

If it is determined that dispensing has ended (Yes in step S2303), proceed to step S2304, where the hopper drive is turned off, and then proceed to return S2305, returning to the calling program.

The flowchart in Figure 183 shows another entry point S2293 related to the settlement execution process.

This settlement execution process is a process in which a specified program is launched when the player presses the settlement button (for example, a button corresponding to settlement button 9 in the first embodiment) during the medal acceptance/start check process (step S2003) in the main process of Figure 170, and the program is called by specifying the address of entry point S2293 (the address of the program stored in the program area 2102a in the use area) or the label corresponding to that address. Note that in the first embodiment, this process corresponds to the process executed when the settlement button is pressed during the medal acceptance/start check process (step S3) shown in Figure 23.

When the settlement execution process begins, the main CPU 2101 sets the address of the credit counter storage area in a specified register in step S2294 shown in FIG. 183, and executes (calls) the medal payout process related to the credit counter in step S2295. This medal payout process is the process from step S2298 to step S2305 in FIG. 183, as described above.

When this medal payout process is completed, the program proceeds to step S2296, where it determines whether or not a game is being replayed. If a game is being replayed (Yes in step S2296), the program proceeds to return S2305, returning to the program that called the program. If a game is not being replayed (No in step S2296), the main CPU 2101 sets the address of the medal insertion counter storage area in a specified register in step S2297 and proceeds to the next step, where it executes the medal payout process related to the medal insertion counter. This medal payout process is the process from step S2298 to step S2305 in FIG. 183, as described above. In the flowchart of Figure 183, when the settlement execution process (steps S2293 to S2297) is completed, the program proceeds to the next payout process without returning. This continuous programming also eliminates the need for a CALL command for the payout process, and also reduces the number of RET commands by one, thereby saving space in the program area 2102a in the main ROM 2102's usage area.

When this medal payout process is complete, return S2305 returns to the calling program.

(Counting the number of medals passed (outside the area of use))
Next, referring to Fig. 184, the medal passing count counting process (outside the use area) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described. Fig. 184 is a flowchart showing the processing steps for the medal passing count counting process (outside the use area). This medal passing count counting process (outside the use area) is the medal payout count check process (steps S2289, S2302) shown in Figs. 182 and 183, and its program is stored in the out-of-use area program area 2102c, and is called by the calling program using "CALLEX."

In the medal passing counting process (outside the use area), the medal insertion counter is updated in step S2321. Then, "RETEX" is used to return to the original program.

(Role ratio monitor aggregation start process (outside of use area))
Next, with reference to Fig. 185, the role ratio monitor tally start process (outside the use area) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described. Fig. 185 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the role ratio monitor tally start process (outside the use area). This role ratio monitor tally start process (outside the use area) is called from the calling program by specifying the entry point address (the address of the program stored in the out-of-use area program area 2102c) or the label corresponding to that address. Specifically, this role ratio monitor tally start process (outside the use area) is called (by CALLEX) from step S2019 in Fig. 170.

The role ratio monitor tally start process (outside the use area) is a tally start process for displaying various ratio information related to the game on a role ratio monitor device (for example, a role ratio monitor device corresponding to role ratio monitor device 54 of the first embodiment), and the tallying, calculation, and display control process for the information to be displayed on the role ratio monitor device is executed, for example, in step S2364 of the periodic interrupt process.

When the role ratio monitor tally start process (outside the use area) is initiated, the main CPU 2101 sets the role ratio tally start flag in step S2341, and stores the special prize signal (a signal indicating a bonus (special prize) state) in the role ratio tally storage area in step S2342.

Next, in step S2343, the number of dispensed coins is stored in the tally storage area, and in step S2344, the navigation data is stored in the tally storage area. After that, "RETEX" is used to return to the original program.

(Periodic interrupt processing)
Next, the periodic interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described with reference to Fig. 186. Fig. 186 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure of the periodic interrupt processing.

In this embodiment, the periodic interrupt processing cycle (one interrupt time) is 1.1172 ms, but the periodic interrupt processing cycle is not limited to this. Furthermore, the periodic interrupt processing of this embodiment is the same as the periodic interrupt processing of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 32, except for the test firing signal control processing (outside the use area) in step S2364 and the error detection processing (outside the use area) in step S2368. Therefore, only the test firing signal control processing (outside the use area) and the error detection processing (outside the use area) will be explained here.

In step S2364, a test firing signal control process (outside the use area) is performed. This test firing signal control process (outside the use area) performs aggregation, calculation, and display control processes to display various ratio information related to the game on a role ratio monitor device (for example, a role ratio monitor device corresponding to role ratio monitor device 54 of the first embodiment). Details of the test firing signal control process (outside the use area) will be described later.

In step S2368, error detection processing (outside the area of use) is performed. This error detection processing (outside the area of use) corresponds to the error detection processing of the first embodiment (step S207 in Figure 32), and detects whether various error conditions have occurred based on the input status, etc. checked in step S2362. In this embodiment, a unique configuration also performs setting value check processing and random number inspection processing. Details of the error detection processing (outside the area of use) will be described later.

(Test firing signal control processing (outside of operating range))
Next, the test firing signal control process (outside the use area) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described with reference to Fig. 187. Fig. 187 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the test firing signal control process (outside the use area). As mentioned above, this test firing signal control process (outside the use area) is a process called by "CALLEX" in step S2364 of Fig. 186.

In the test firing signal control process (outside the use area), first, in step S2391, a test signal generation process is performed. Next, in step S2392, a reel stop enable signal output process is performed.

Next, in step S2393, special prize signal control processing is performed, in step S2394, pseudo-game signal control processing is performed, and in step S2395, condition device signal control processing is performed.

Next, in step S2396, the role ratio monitor aggregation process is performed, in step S2397, the role ratio monitor display management process is performed, and in step S2398, the test signal output process is performed. After that, "RETEX" is used to return to the calling program. The main functions are: the role ratio monitor display management process is a display management process that includes display control on the role ratio monitor device 54, and the test signal output process is a test signal output process to the first interface board 301 for the test machine.

(Error detection process (out of use area))
Next, the error detection processing (outside the area of use) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described with reference to Fig. 188. Fig. 188 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the error detection processing (outside the area of use). As mentioned above, this error detection processing (outside the area of use) is called by "CALLEX" in step S2368 of Fig. 186.

The error detection process (outside the range of use) corresponds to the error detection process (step S207 in Figure 32) executed in the periodic interrupt process of the first embodiment. First, in step S2411, the setting value check process (outside the range of use) is called. This setting value check process (outside the range of use) determines whether the setting value is normal or not, and details will be described later.

Next, in step S2412, a medal passage check process is performed, and in step S2413, a hopper check process is performed. Note that these processes are not necessary for medalless machines.

Next, in step S2414, the random number check process (outside the area of use) is called. This random number check process (outside the area of use) determines whether the random number circuit is operating normally, and details will be described later. After that, "RETEX" is used to return to the calling program.

(Setting value check process (outside of range of use), random number check process (outside of range of use))
Next, with reference to FIG. 189, two processes executed by the main CPU 2101 (i.e., setting value check process (outside the use area) and random number inspection process (outside the use area)) will be described.

Figure 189 is a flowchart showing the processing steps for the two processes mentioned above, and is a single subprogram consisting of a series of consecutive program codes. This flowchart also includes three end symbols (one rounded rectangle notating "RET" and two rounded rectangles notating "RET") and two start symbols (the other rounded rectangles notating "RET", i.e., "Setting value check processing (outside of range of use)" and "Random number inspection processing (outside of range of use)"). The end symbols indicate that when the flow reaches that end symbol, it will return to the calling program, and the start symbols indicate addresses (entry points) from which other calling programs can be called.

For convenience, we will assign step numbers to each end symbol (return) and start symbol (entry point).

The setting value check process (outside the area of use) is called from the calling program by specifying the address of entry point S2431 (the address of the program stored in the out-of-area program area 2102c) or the label corresponding to that address. Specifically, this setting value check process (outside the area of use) is called from the error detection process (outside the area of use) shown in FIG. 188 (step S2411).

When the setting value check process (outside the use area) is initiated, the main CPU 2101 determines in step S2432 whether the setting value is normal. If it is not normal (No in step S2432), the process proceeds to step S2434, where it sets the game return impossible error flag to data indicating that return is impossible, and returns to the calling program with "RET" in step S2435.

On the other hand, if the setting value is determined to be normal (Yes in step S2432), the program returns to the calling program (step S2433). Note that because the processing in steps S2432 and S2433 is executed by a single command, the end symbol for returning to the calling program is written as "return" rather than "RET." Note that in this embodiment, a normal setting value is a value between 0 and 5 (setting 1 to setting 6) stored in the setting value storage area allocated to the working area within the used area 2103a, and any value other than the normal value is considered abnormal.

The above-mentioned single instruction is, for example, "opcode1 C, (Addr1), 6", where opcode1 is a description representing a specific instruction, the first operand "C" represents the C (carry) bit of flag register F (see Figure 167(B)), the second operand "(Addr1)" represents the value stored at address Addr1, and the third operand "6" is the value stored at address Addr1 compared to. When this single instruction is executed, the value stored at address Addr1 is subtracted by 6. If the C bit of flag register F is "1", the program returns to the caller; if it is "0", the program proceeds to the next step.

In this case, address Addr1 represents the location in the working area within the used area 2103a where the setting value is stored. If this command causes the stored setting value to be 6 or greater, the C bit of flag register F is set to "0" and processing proceeds to step S2434 described above. If the stored setting value is 5 or less, the C bit of flag register F is set to "1", the setting value is determined to be normal, and processing returns to the caller. In this embodiment, the setting change process changes the setting value within the range of "0" to "5".

The random number check process (outside the area in use) is called from the calling program by specifying the address of entry point S2436 (the address of the program stored in the out-of-area program area 2102c) or the label corresponding to that address. Specifically, this random number check process (outside the area in use) is called from the error detection process (outside the area in use) shown in FIG. 188 (step S2414).

When the random number inspection process (outside the use area) is initiated, the main CPU 2101 determines in step S2437 whether the random number circuit for determining the winning combination (random number circuit 2150 connected to the microprocessor 2100) is normal. This determination is made, for example, by reading the status of the random number circuit 2150. Alternatively, if random number values are obtained multiple times from the random number circuit 2150 and the obtained multiple random number values match, it can be determined that the random number circuit 2150 has not updated the random number and an abnormality has occurred.

If the random number circuit for lottery winnings is normal (Yes in step S437), proceed to step S2438 to check another random number circuit; if it is not normal (No in step S437), proceed to step S2434, where the game return impossible error flag is set to data indicating that return is impossible, and return to the calling program with "RET" in step S2435.

Next, in step S2438, the random number circuit 2110 inside the microprocessor 2100 is inspected. In this embodiment, the random number circuit 2110 generates random numbers related to performances and random numbers for transitioning to the AT state. Here, it is determined whether the random number status of the internal information register is normal.

The internal information register (CIF) of the microprocessor 2100 has areas that notify of abnormalities in the random number update or the random number update clock frequency, and here, the values of these areas are checked to determine whether the random number circuit 2110 is operating normally. If the random number status of the internal information register is normal (i.e., the random number circuit 2110 is normal) (Yes in step S2438), the process returns to the calling program with "RET" in step S2439.

If the random number status of the internal information register is not normal (i.e., the random number circuit 2110 is not normal) (No in step S2438), as in the case of the random number circuit 2150, proceed to step S2434, where the game return impossible error flag is set to data indicating that return is impossible, and return to the calling program is made with "RET" in step S2435.

(Power interruption processing)
Next, the power interruption interruption processing executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described with reference to Fig. 190. Fig. 190 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure of the power interruption interruption processing. In this embodiment, as described above, when a power interruption occurs, the power interruption is detected by the power interruption detection signal output to the parallel input port 2111 (XINT), and in that case, the power interruption interruption processing is executed.

In the power interruption processing, the main CPU 2101 first saves all registers to the stack area (step S2451). In this embodiment, the main registers in bank 0 (general-purpose registers A, B, C, E, D, H, L, flag register F, index register IX, IY) and the sub-registers corresponding to these main registers are saved. However, the registers in bank 1 are not saved.

Next, in step S2452, the acceptance of medals is prohibited, and in step S2453, the hopper motor is turned off. Then, in step S2454, the current stack pointer SP is stored in a specified storage area. The reason for saving the current stack pointer SP is to return processing to the processing immediately before the power outage occurred, based on the stored stack pointer SP, during the game return processing shown in the power-on processing in Figure 171.

Next, in step S2455, the CRC generation process (outside the used area) is called, and in step S2456, settings are made to prohibit access to RAM (e.g., RAM area 2203a within the used area and RAM area 2203b outside the used area).

(CRC generation process (outside use area))
Next, the CRC generation process (outside the area of use) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described with reference to Fig. 191. Fig. 191 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the CRC generation process (outside the area of use). As mentioned above, this CRC generation process (outside the area of use) is called by "CALLEX" in step S2456 of Fig. 190.

The CRC generation process (outside the area in use) first sets the power interruption occurrence flag to ON in step S2471. Next, in step S2472, the CRC calculation process (outside the area in use) is called, where CRC calculation is performed for the in-area working area 2103a, the out-of-area working area 2103c, etc. Note that the CRC calculation process (outside the area in use) is the same as the process described with reference to FIG. 173.

Next, in step S2473, the result (CRC value) of the CRC calculation process (outside the area in use) called in step S2472 is stored in a specified storage area. The CRC value stored in this way at the time of the power interruption is obtained in the CRC inspection process (outside the area in use) at power-on (step S2032 in Figure 171) and compared with the CRC value at power-on (steps S2054 and S2055 in Figure 172).

The CRC generation process (outside the used area) then returns to the calling program using "RETEX."

(Out-of-use area error cause clearing process (outside of use area))
Next, an outside-usage-area error cause clearing process (outside the use area) executed by the main CPU 2101 will be described with reference to Fig. 192. Fig. 192 is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for the outside-usage-area error cause clearing process (outside the use area).

The out-of-use area error cause clearing process (outside the use area) is a process for clearing the difference in number error and the like that was set in the out-of-use area error flag in the medal passing number abnormality determination process (outside the use area) in Figure 181. This process is initiated by pressing the reset button on the main control board 2071 (a button similar to the reset button on the main control board 71 described in connection with the modified example of the first gaming machine according to the first embodiment) when some kind of error that allows gameplay to be restored, such as a hopper jam error or hopper empty error, occurs.

The out-of-area error cause clearing process (outside of area of use) first obtains the error flag in step S2491, and then inverts the error flag (its bit) in step S2492. Next, in step S2493, the logical product of the out-of-area error flag and the inverted data is calculated, and in step S2494 the result of the logical product is set as the out-of-area error flag.

The out-of-area error cause clearing process (outside of area of use) then returns to the calling program using "RETEX."

Next, the characteristic configuration and functions of this embodiment will be explained in detail with reference to Figures 170 to 192, which have been explained so far. In this explanation, further reference will be made to Figures 193 to 209.

[1. Specifying the call destination for CALLEX]
As described above, within the main ROM 2102, various programs and various data (tables) used for various processes that are not directly related to the game played by the player are stored in the outside-use-area ROM area 2202b, which is located at an address different from the inside-use-area ROM area 2202a, thereby avoiding pressure on the capacity of the inside-use-area ROM area 2202a, which is set as a game area.

In addition, processing related to bank 0 uses programs and data stored in the in-use ROM area 2202a of the main ROM 2102, temporarily using the in-use RAM area 2203a of the main RAM 2103, to perform calculations to control the game actions performed by the player. In other words, processing related to bank 0 can be said to be processing related to the game areas (the in-use ROM area 2202a and the in-use RAM area 2203a).

On the other hand, processing related to bank 1 uses programs and data stored in the off-use ROM area 2202b of the main ROM 2102, and temporarily uses the off-use RAM area 2203b of the main RAM 2103 to perform processing that is not directly related to the game played by the player (arithmetic processing for performing processing other than the game). In other words, processing related to bank 1 can be said to be processing related to the off-area areas (off-use ROM area 2202b and off-use RAM area 2203b).

The in-use ROM area 2202a of the main ROM 2102 is an area that stores programs and data for controlling the actions of games played by players. However, as gaming machine processing becomes more diverse and complex, the capacity of the specified in-use ROM area 2202a is becoming increasingly limited. Therefore, a major challenge is how to ensure that programs and data related to processing not directly related to games played by players are stored in the out-of-use ROM area 2202b of the main ROM 2102, while also conserving the capacity of the in-use ROM area 2202a of the main ROM 2102.

Furthermore, when processing bank 0, the instruction to call the subprogram that executes the processing of bank 1 is, for example, "CALLEX," followed by "RETEX" to return to the calling program. Such call instructions (for example, "CALLEX") are designed to take advantage of the characteristics of the main CPU 2101: if the subprogram is stored before a specific address (for example, "2100"H) in the out-of-use ROM area 2202b, i.e., in this embodiment, between "2000"H and "20FF"H, they become 2-byte instructions; if a subprogram is called that is stored after that specific address (i.e., between "2100"H and "24BF"H), they become 4-byte instructions.

As mentioned above, the size of a subprogram called by a "CALLEX" instruction varies depending on its storage location. When specifying the subprogram's destination address (hereafter referred to as the "start point") using an address, addresses between "2000"H and "20FF"H can be specified without the "20" in the upper address, and the CPU's design specifications require only one byte for the address. However, if the start point of the subprogram to be called is at "2100"H or higher, two bytes of space must be reserved for the upper and lower addresses. This was a design innovation adopted by the main CPU 2101 designers to take into account the constraints of the gaming machine industry and to make it easier to secure as much space as possible in the ROM area within the used area. Furthermore, given the address storage considerations described above, if the start point of the subprogram to be called is at "2100"H or higher, the "CALLEX" instruction could conceivably be a three-byte instruction. Therefore, since the machine language (the language that the CPU can understand) for the "CALLEX" command differs depending on the start point, gaming machine program designers must be careful about the start point of the subprogram specified by the "CALLEX" command.

In any case, by keeping the storage location of subprograms called with instructions such as "CALLEX" at addresses between "2000"H and "20FF"H, it is possible to save 2 bytes for each instruction in the in-use ROM area 2202a. Furthermore, if the start point of a subprogram being called with "CALLEX" is at an address after "2100"H, and it is a 3-byte instruction, the number of bytes that can be saved is 1 byte.

In consideration of the above situation, this embodiment is configured to minimize the capacity of the in-use ROM area 2202a when using an instruction (for example, "CALLEX") to call a subprogram that executes processing in bank 1 during processing in bank 0. Furthermore, gaming machine program designers no longer need to pay attention to the start point when using the "CALLEX" instruction.

The main ROM 2102 shown in Figure 193 (A) is a partial extract of the configuration of the main ROM 2102 in Figure 168 (B), and conceptually represents the calling of a subprogram using conventional CALLEX.

Figure 193(A) shows a situation in which program PRG1 is stored in the in-use program area 2102a of main ROM 2102, and PRG1 calls subprograms EX_Proc1 and EX_Proc2 using the call instruction "CALLEX." Here, EX_Proc1 and EX_Proc2 are stored in the out-of-use program area 2102c of main ROM 2102, and their start points (first addresses of storage locations) are before "2100"H. Therefore, the instruction size of the call instruction "CALLEX" used by PRG1 is 2 bytes. Figure 193(A) shows, with dotted lines, a situation in which EX_Proc1 is called from PRG1 using "CALLEX."

Furthermore, Figure 193 (A) shows a situation in which program PRG2 is stored in the in-use program area 2102a of main ROM 2102, and PRG2 calls subprograms EX_Proc3, EX_Proc4, and EX_Proc5 using the call instruction "CALLEX." Here, EX_Proc3 is stored in the out-of-use program area 2102c of main ROM 2102, and its start point (first address of the storage location) is before "2100"H. Therefore, in PRG2, the instruction size of the "CALLEX" instruction that calls EX_Proc3 is 2 bytes. Furthermore, EX_Proc4 and EX_Proc5 are stored in the out-of-use program area 2102c of main ROM 2102, and their start points (first address of the storage location) are after "2100"H. Therefore, the instruction size of the "CALLEX" instruction that calls EX_Proc4 and EX_Proc5 in PRG2 is 4 bytes each. In Figure 193 (A), the situation in which EX_Proc4 is called by "CALLEX" from PRG2 is shown by the dotted line.

In this way, when using a call instruction such as "CALLEX" to call a subprogram whose start point is "2100"H or later, each call instruction consumes an extra 2 bytes of capacity in the program area 2102a within the used area.

The main ROM 2102 shown in Figure 193(B), like Figure 193(A), is a partial extract of the configuration of the main ROM 2102 in Figure 168(B), and conceptually represents the calling of a subprogram using CALLEX in this embodiment.

Figure 193(B) shows a situation in which program PRG3 is stored in the in-use program area 2102a of main ROM 2102, and PRG3 calls subprograms EX_Proc6 and EX_Proc7 using the call instruction "CALLEX." Here, EX_Proc6 and EX_Proc7 are stored in the out-of-use program area 2102c of main ROM 2102, and their start points (first addresses of storage locations) are before "2100"H. Therefore, the instruction size of the call instruction "CALLEX" used by PRG3 is 2 bytes. Such RPG3 has the same configuration as PRG1 shown in Figure 193(A). Figure 193(B) shows, with a dotted line, a situation in which EX_Proc6 is called from PRG3 using "CALLEX."

Furthermore, Figure 193 (B) shows that program PRG4 is stored in the in-use program area 2102a of main ROM 2102, and that PRG4 calls subprogram EX_Proc8, address (label) EX_Proc9_JP, and address (label) EX_Proc10_JP using the call instruction "CALLEX." Here, EX_Proc8 is stored in the out-of-use program area 2102c of main ROM 2102, and its start point (first address of the storage location) is before "2100"H. Therefore, the instruction size of the instruction "CALLEX" in PRG4 that calls EX_Proc8 is 2 bytes.

EX_Proc9_JR and EX_Proc10_JR are stored in the external program area 2102c of the main ROM 2102, and their start points (first address of the storage location) are before "2100"H. Therefore, in PRG4, the instruction size of the "CALLEX" instruction that calls EX_Proc9_JR and EX_Proc10_JR is 2 bytes each. The addresses before "2100"H indicated by EX_Proc9_JR and EX_Proc10_JR contain programs such as the jump instruction "JR," which causes a further jump to the subprograms EX_Proc9 and EX_Proc10, where these subprograms are executed.

As shown in Figure 193(B), the addresses of EX_Proc9 and EX_Proc10 are "2100"H and above. However, the instruction size of the "CALLEX" that ultimately calls EX_Proc9 and EX_Proc10 in PRG4 is 2 bytes, as mentioned above. Figure 193(B) shows, with dotted lines, the situation in which EX_Proc9_JR is called from PRG4 by "CALLEX," and then EX_Proc9_JR subsequently jumps to (calls) EX_Proc9. Similarly, EX_Proc10_JR is called from PRG4 by "CALLEX," and then EX_Proc10_JR subsequently jumps to (calls) EX_Proc10. As will be described later, the relationship between EX_Proc9 and EX_Proc9_JR, and the relationship between EX_Proc10 and EX_Proc10_JR, corresponds to the relationship between out-of-use RAM initialization processing (continued) and out-of-use RAM initialization processing (out-of-use area) shown in FIG. 177, and the relationship between interface 2 output (continued) and interface 2 output (out-of-use area) shown in FIG. 178.

The configuration shown in Figure 193(B) allows the instruction size of a "CALLEX" command for calling a subprogram located after address "2100"H to be 2 bytes. However, this requires an instruction size (e.g., 2 or 3 bytes) for a jump instruction in the area before address "2100"H in the out-of-use program area 2102c, resulting in a total increase of 1 or 2 bytes. However, even if this configuration wastes the capacity of out-of-use program area 2102c, which has relatively more capacity than in-use program area 2102a, it is still significant that it saves capacity in in-use program area 2102a, which is more tight on capacity.

Furthermore, with the above configuration of this embodiment, if the capacity of the addresses before "2100"H in the out-of-use program area 2102c becomes low, the subprograms stored in that area (for example, EX_Proc6, EX_Proc7, and EX_Proc8 in Figure 193 (B)) can also be moved to addresses after "2100"H, and a jump instruction to jump to that subprogram can be placed at an address before "2100"H.

Note that jump instructions in the execution environment of this embodiment can be broadly divided into JP-series instructions and JR-series instructions. JP-series instructions are three-byte instructions consisting of three bytes: one byte for the instruction code (command) and two bytes for the absolute address. JR-series instructions are two-byte instructions consisting of two bytes: one byte for the instruction code (command) and one byte for the relative address. Therefore, if you want to conserve space for addresses before "2100"H in the out-of-use program area 2102c, it is preferable to use JR-series instructions. However, because JR-series instructions use a one-byte relative address, as described above, it is important to note that they can only jump to subprograms stored within (or "less than") 128 bytes in relative location. Furthermore, subprograms called by "CALLEX" are not limited to jump instructions. Any program (including instructions and other statements) can be used as long as it can ultimately call a subprogram located after "2100"H.

This configuration of this embodiment is applied, for example, to a program that executes out-of-use RAM initialization processing (out-of-use area) as shown in Figure 177.

First, the program that executes the processing in Figures 175 and 176 is stored in the in-use area program area 2102a of the main ROM 2102, and this program corresponds, for example, to PRG4 in Figure 193 (B). Then, in step S2150 shown in Figures 175 and 176, this program calls the out-of-use area RAM initialization processing (outside the in-use area) (steps S2171 and S2172) shown in Figure 177 using "CALLEX." This call corresponds, for example, to "CALLEX EX_Proc9_JR" in Figure 193 (B).

The out-of-use RAM initialization process (outside of the used area) shown in Figure 177 is a process that jumps (calls) to the out-of-use RAM initialization process (continued) shown in Figure 177, and this program corresponds, for example, to "EX_Proc9_JR" in Figure 193 (B). Finally, the out-of-use RAM initialization process (continued) shown in Figure 177 is executed, and this program corresponds, for example, to "EX_Proc9" in Figure 193 (B).

Finally, the final "RETEX" in the out-of-use RAM initialization process (continued) shown in Figure 177 returns to the calling program that was called by "CALLEX," and processing proceeds to step S2151 in Figure 176.

This method is also applied to the program shown in Figure 180 that executes interface 2 output processing (outside the use area).

First, the program that executes the main processing in Fig. 170 is stored in the in-use program area 2102a of the main ROM 2102, and this program corresponds, for example, to PRG4 in Fig. 193 (B). Then, in step S2017 shown in Fig. 170, this program calls the interface 2 output processing (outside the in-use area) (steps S2241 and S2242) shown in Fig. 180 using "CALLEX." This call corresponds, for example, to "CALLEX EX_Proc9_JR" in Fig. 193 (B).

The interface 2 output process (outside the area in use) shown in Figure 180 is a process that jumps to (calls) the interface 2 output process (continuation) shown in Figure 180, and this program corresponds, for example, to "EX_Proc9_JR" in Figure 193 (B). Finally, the interface 2 output process (continuation) shown in Figure 180 is executed, and this program corresponds, for example, to "EX_Proc9" in Figure 193 (B).

Finally, the final "RETEX" in the interface 2 output process (continuation) shown in Figure 177 returns to the calling program that was called by "CALLEX," and processing proceeds to step S2008 in Figure 170.

Note that, as a rule restriction, writing to the in-use RAM area 2203a can only be performed by programs stored in the in-use program area 2102a, and writing to the out-of-use RAM area 2203b can only be performed by programs stored in the out-of-use program area 2102c. Therefore, if a flowchart in this embodiment contains the phrase "store...", the storage area is identified depending on whether the flowchart is a program stored in the in-use program area 2102a or the out-of-use program area 2102c.

On the other hand, when reading the work area within the used area 2103a and the work area outside the used area 2103c, it is possible to read either a program stored in the program area within the used area 2102a or a program stored in the program area outside the used area 2102c.

[2. CRC check of main RAM]
In this embodiment, the main RAM check acquires the CRC calculation result (CRC value) for the main RAM when a power outage occurs, acquires the CRC calculation result (CRC value) for the main RAM when the power is turned on, and compares these two CRC values when the power is turned on. If the difference is 0, the system is deemed normal (a state in which game return is possible), and then performs game return processing. On the other hand, if the difference is not 0, the system is deemed to have a CRC abnormality (a state in which game return is not possible 1), and then (unless an operation related to a setting change was performed when the power was turned on) proceeds to game return impossible processing (see Figures 171 and 172).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the main RAM check is performed using the CRC circuit 2107c included in the microprocessor 2100 to perform a CRC calculation. Here, the concept of the CRC check of the main RAM in this embodiment will be explained with reference to Figure 194. Figure 194 shows the processing when power is interrupted on the left side, and the processing when power is applied on the right side.

(Processing in the event of power outage)
When a power interruption occurs, the power interruption is detected by a power interruption detection signal (the power interruption detection signal is input to the parallel input port 3111 (XINT terminal)), and in that case, the interruption interrupt process shown in Fig. 190 is executed by the interrupt controller 2112 (see Figs. 166 and 169). Then, in the power interruption interrupt process, a CRC generation process (outside the used area) is called in step S2455 to obtain the CRC value of the main RAM 2103.

The flow of the CRC generation process (outside the area in use) is shown in Figure 191. In this process, the power outage flag is turned on (step S2471), and then the CRC calculation process (outside the area in use) is called (step S2472). The calculation result obtained in this CRC calculation process (outside the area in use) is stored in the outside the area in use work area 2103c as the CRC value 2301 at the time of the power outage (step S2473).

The flow of this CRC calculation process (outside the used area) is shown in Figure 173. In this process, as shown in Figure 194, the starting address of the area and the number of bytes to be calculated are set for each of the in-use area work area 2103a, in-use area stack area 2103b, and out-of-use area work area 2103c of the main RAM 2103, and the data to be calculated is output to the CRC circuit 2107c.

In the CRC calculation process (outside the used area), data relating to the three areas in the main RAM 2103 described above is output sequentially to the CRC circuit 2107c, which then combines this data to obtain one CRC calculation result. However, it is also possible to obtain a CRC calculation result for each area and obtain three CRC calculation results.

In addition, in this embodiment, the main RAM 2103 is checked using CRC calculations for three areas: the in-use area work area 2103a, the in-use area stack area 2103b, and the out-of-use area work area 2103c, as described above. The out-of-use area stack area 2103d is omitted because it is not directly related to the progress of the game and is therefore of little importance. However, the check range of the main RAM 2103 may include the out-of-use area stack area 2103d, or may be an area or range different from that of this embodiment.

In addition, the CRC calculation result (CRC value 2301) when a power outage occurs is stored in the CRC value storage area 2103e of the out-of-use working area 2103c of the main RAM 2103, as shown in FIG. 194. Therefore, the CRC calculation in the CRC calculation process (outside the used area) is specified to exclude the CRC value storage area 2103e for the out-of-use working area 2103c. Note that in this embodiment and other embodiments, the processing when a power outage occurs is executed by the power outage interrupt processing, but this is not limited to this. For example, a subprogram that monitors the power outage detection signal may be provided within the periodic interrupt processing (FIG. 186), and when the power outage detection signal is detected, the power outage interrupt processing of FIG. 190 may be executed. In this case, it is desirable to execute the power interruption interrupt processing in Figure 190 after confirming that the power interruption detection signal is in a state indicating a power interruption state (power interruption detection signal = ON state) for 2 to 4 interruption times (1 interruption time = 1.1172 ms), as this will prevent malfunctions due to momentary power outages or noise in the power interruption detection signal.

(Processing when power is turned on)
When power is turned on, the flow shown in FIG. 170 starts, and first the power-on processing shown in FIG. 171 is executed. Then, during the power-on processing, a CRC check processing (outside the used area) is called in step S2031 to obtain the CRC value of the main RAM 2103. Before the power-on processing is executed, the main CPU 2101 sets the security settings and interrupt initial setting data stored in the program management area 2102f. The processing for this setting is not stored in the in-use program area 2102a, and is therefore not shown in the flow. This is a function of the microprocessor 2100 itself, and is also a function provided in the microprocessor 2100 to save the capacity of the in-use program area 2102a.

The flow of the CRC inspection process (outside the used area) is shown in Figure 172. In this process, the CRC calculation process (outside the used area) is called (step S2052). The obtained CRC calculation result (CRC value 2302 at power-on) is then compared with the CRC value 2301 at the time of the power outage. If the difference is 0 and the power outage flag is on, the game return status is considered normal (game return possible), and the game return process or setting change process proceeds (step S2035 in Figure 171). As mentioned above, the CRC value 2301 at the time of the power outage is stored in the CRC value storage area 2103e of the outside the used area working area 2103c of the main RAM 2103, and the CRC value 2301 is obtained from there.

The flow of the CRC calculation process (outside the area of use) called by the CRC inspection process (outside the area of use) is shown in Figure 173, and is the same as the CRC calculation process (outside the area of use) called by the CRC generation process (outside the area of use) during a power outage. Note that when a power outage occurs, the CRC calculation in the CRC calculation process (outside the area of use) is specified to exclude the CRC value storage area 2103e from the outside the area of use work area 2103c, but the CRC calculation is also performed over the same range when the power is turned on (because it is necessary to compare the CRC values of both).

With the configuration of this embodiment as described above, the main RAM is checked by CRC calculation using the CRC circuit 2107c when the power is turned off and when the power is turned on. In this process, as described above with reference to FIG. 173, it is sufficient to write the program so that the starting address and number of bytes for specifying the CRC calculation target are passed to the CRC circuit 2107c. On the other hand, when calculating a sum value, the main program must be written to read the calculation target area of the main RAM into a register one byte (or two bytes) at a time, accumulate these values in another register, and repeat this process as many times as the size of the calculation target area. Furthermore, when calculating sum values for multiple calculation target areas in the main RAM, such as areas within the used area and areas outside the used area, a program must be written to perform the above-mentioned accumulation for each of those calculation target areas.

In contrast, in this embodiment, there is no need to write such individual processes in the program executed by the main CPU 2101. As a result, there is no need to develop logic related to calculating sum values or comparing sum values in the program, which makes it possible to reduce the size of the program accordingly and ultimately saves program space in the main ROM 2102.

Furthermore, the program space saved in this way can be used to realize the gameplay related to the gaming machine, leading to providing players with a more fulfilling and sophisticated gameplay.

In addition, because the main RAM is checked by the CRC circuit 2107c, which is an independent circuit separate from the main CPU 2101, the load on the main CPU 2101 is reduced compared to check methods that calculate sum values. Furthermore, because there is no need to develop logic related to calculating and comparing sum values in programs executed by the main CPU 2101, the programs can be simplified and the processing time can be reduced. As a result, program development efficiency can be improved, the maintainability of the programs can be improved, and CRC checks can be performed in a short time.

[3. 4-bit data acquisition process]
Next, the 4-bit data acquisition process in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

When storing data in a table stored in the data area 2102b in the used area of the main ROM 2102, the program is typically configured to store each piece of data in 1-byte or 2-byte units. However, if the data to be stored has 16 possible values, for example, from 0 to 15, and only a maximum of 4 bits are required, it is possible to store two pieces of data with a maximum of 4 bits per 1-byte area, thereby reducing the amount of storage space that is essentially unused and, as a result, saving capacity on the main ROM 2102.

Furthermore, if different types of data groups each contain a maximum of 4 bits of data like this, storing them all in a single table and using a common program to retrieve the target 4-bit data eliminates the need to create a program for each type of data, which also saves space in the main ROM 2102. Even if different types of data groups are stored in a single table, as long as it is known which data of which type is located in which entry (relative address position), it is possible to specify that the desired data be retrieved using a common program.

Figure 195 shows a common subprogram (4-bit data acquisition process) that extracts data individually from a table that stores two pieces of data, each with a maximum of 4 bits, in a 1-byte area, according to a specified entry.

Figure 195 is a flowchart showing the processing steps of the common subprogram (4-bit data acquisition process) described above.

In the 4-bit data acquisition process, first, in step S2511, the quotient obtained by dividing the selection value by 2 is used as the offset value, and the remainder is used as the odd/even judgment data. Here, the selection value is a value that indicates the position of the data stored in the table in that table, and has the same meaning as an "entry." Next, in step S2512, the target data in the table is acquired. Here, the data is data stored in the table in 1-byte units, and the target data includes two 4-bit data pieces, one of which is the 4-bit data to be acquired. The target data is 1 byte of data located at the starting address of the table + offset value.

Next, in step S2513, the odd/even determination data is used to determine whether the selected value is even or odd. If the odd/even determination data is 0 (Yes in step S2513), the selected value is an even number, and in step S2514, the upper 4 bits and lower 4 bits of the acquired target data are swapped using a swap command, and the process proceeds to step S2515. If the odd/even determination data is 1 (No in step S2513), the selected value is an odd number, and in this case, the swapping is not performed and the process proceeds to step S2515.

In step S2515, 4-bit data is obtained. If the selected value is an even number, the upper 4 bits and lower 4 bits of the obtained target data are swapped. The desired 4-bit data is obtained by ANDing this data with "0F"H (i.e., the bit string "00001111"), and the program then returns to the calling program. The obtained 4-bit data is ultimately stored in a specified area in the in-use work area 2103a or the out-of-use work area 2103c of the main RAM 2103. Note that the notation ("4-bit data") to the right of the "RET" notation in the end symbol (rounded rectangle) indicates that the 4-bit data obtained by the logical AND is stored (return value) in the A register, and the calling program can reference/obtain it using the 4-bit data from the A register.

Next, the 4-bit data acquisition process described in the flowchart of Figure 195 will be explained using a specific example shown in Figure 196.

As shown in Figure 196, the target table starts at address "1F00"H and has 1 byte of data (Data 1, Data 2, Data 3, ...). In this example, the upper 4 bits of Data 1 have a selection value (entry) = 0 and a value of 2, and the lower 4 bits have entry = 1 and a value of 3. The upper 4 bits of Data 2 have entry = 2 and a value of 12, and the lower 4 bits have entry = 3 and a value of 8. The upper 4 bits of Data 3 have entry = 4 and a value of 15, and the lower 4 bits have entry = 5 and a value of 0.

Furthermore, the starting address of Data 1 is "1F00"H, the same as the beginning of the table, the starting address of Data 2 is "1F01"H, and the starting address of Data 3 is "1F02"H.

Here, as shown in (1), the selection value (entry) of the 4-bit data to be obtained is set to "2." Then, as shown in (2), the quotient (offset value) = 1 and the remainder (even/odd determination data) = 0.

Next, in (3), the start of the target data is the table's start address "1F00" + offset value "1", i.e. "1F01"H, which corresponds to data 2 in the target table. The upper 4 bits of data 2 are entry = 2, with a value of 12, and the lower 4 bits are entry = 3, with a value of 8.

Next, in (4), the odd/even determination data is 0, i.e., an even number, so the upper 4 bits and lower 4 bits of data 2 are swapped. That is, the upper 4 bits are set to value 8 for entry = 3, and the lower bits are set to value 12 for entry = 2. Then, when the logical product of the swapped data and "0F"H (i.e., the bit string "00001111") is taken, the bit string "00001100" is obtained, and the bit string "1100" (value "8") is obtained from the rightmost 4 bits corresponding to entry = 2, which becomes the acquired 4-bit data.

When a large amount of data with values between 0 and 15 exists across multiple entries using this 4-bit data acquisition process, this data can be stored effectively by creating a table with the above data structure in main ROM 2102.

For example, the data for each entry shown in Figure 196 can be defined as a table (d4BITTBL) like the one shown in Figure 197(A). As mentioned above, the data for each entry takes a value between 0 and 15. Note that "DB" is a pseudo-instruction that defines the contents of one byte of data. Here, data 1 in Figure 196 is generated and defined by a calculation such as "DB 2 * 10H + 3" as shown in Figure 197(A). "* 10H" is a multiplication that shifts the value 2 of entry = 0 to the upper 4 bits. Data 2 in Figure 196 is generated and defined as "DB 12 * 10H + 8" in Figure 197(A), and data 3 in Figure 196 is generated and defined as "DB 15 * 10H + 0" in Figure 197(A). The calculations to obtain each byte of data are performed in advance, and the table data, which is a collection of the obtained byte of data, is stored, for example, in the data area 2102b in the used area of the main ROM 2102.

Note that the "pseudo instruction" mentioned above does not refer to an instruction to the CPU to execute a process (such as the "CALLEX" instruction mentioned above), but rather to an instruction for a conversion application (commonly known as an "assembler" or "compiler") used when converting a program source file into data to be written to ROM (stored during the gaming machine manufacturing process).

Furthermore, for example, if the above-described 4-bit data acquisition mechanism is applied to the symbol arrangement table of Figure 82(a) used in the 13th embodiment, the table can be defined as shown in Figure 197(B). The "dREEL_ZU1" table is data related to the left reel in the symbol arrangement table, the "dREEL_ZU2" table is data related to the middle reel in the symbol arrangement table, and the "dREEL_ZU3" table is data related to the right reel in the symbol arrangement table.

In addition, each 1-bit data defined by a "DB" has a comment on the right edge indicating which symbol position the symbol code corresponds to. Of course, a program that uses this data will know in advance which entry's data stores which symbol position's symbol code. In each "DB" definition, the data that is shifted to the upper 4 bits by multiplying by "10"H is the symbol code for odd-numbered symbol positions, and the lower 4 bits represent the symbol code for even-numbered symbol positions.

In each table definition, the symbol codes are represented by variables, with the value (bit string) of each variable shown below the table definition. This corresponds to the symbol arrangement code table (main reel) in Figure 82 (b) used in the 13th embodiment. There are 10 patterns in total, with the maximum value being 10 (bit string "1010"), and all can be expressed as 4-bit data. For example, the symbol code for the "V" symbol is 1 (bit string "0001"), and the symbol code for the "Bell B" symbol is 7 (bit string "0111").

In the example shown in Figure 197(B), three tables "dREEL_ZU1", "dREEL_ZU2", and "dREEL_ZU3" are shown, but these can be defined as a single table (at consecutive storage locations within the data area in use 2102b), and each 4-bit data can be extracted (by specifying the table address and selection value) using the above-mentioned 4-bit data acquisition process executed by a common program. Furthermore, these data can also be further combined with other types of 4-bit data and defined as a single table (the same applies to the tables described in Figures 198, 199, and 202).

Furthermore, for example, if the above-mentioned 4-bit data acquisition mechanism is applied to the symbol combination arrangement table of Figures 83A and 83B used in the 13th embodiment, the table can be defined as shown in Figure 198. The "dPayCnv" table represents data on the number of coins to be paid out (number of coins to be paid out when 3 coins are bet) for each 13-byte storage area type data (for each symbol combination) in the symbol combination table.

In addition, each 1-bit data defined by a "DB" has a comment on the right edge, indicating which storage area identification data the respective payout number corresponds to. Of course, a program using this data will know in advance which entry's data stores the payout number corresponding to which storage area identification data. In each "DB" definition, the data shifted to the upper 4 bits by multiplying by "10"H is the payout number data corresponding to the symbol combination represented by the odd-numbered bits of the storage area identification data, and the lower 4 bits are the payout number data corresponding to the symbol combination represented by the even-numbered bits of the storage area identification data. For example, in the 1-bit data defined by the first "DB," the upper bits contain the payout number corresponding to the symbol combination represented by bit "B1" in the first byte of the storage area type data, and the lower bits contain the payout number corresponding to the symbol combination represented by bit "B0" in the first byte of the storage area type data.

Furthermore, for example, in the 13th embodiment, when displaying numerical values on the instruction monitor in the pseudo BIG and pseudo REG, it is conceivable that the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the numerical values as shown in Figure 91(a) can be defined as a new table (referred to as the instruction monitor determination table) by applying the 4-bit data acquisition mechanism of this embodiment. Here, the instruction monitor determination table can be defined as shown in Figure 199. The "dNaviTbl" table shows the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the numerical values displayed on the instruction monitor as shown in Figure 91(a).

Each 1-bit data defined by a "DB" has a comment on the right edge indicating which internal winning combination the value corresponds to. Of course, a program using this data will know in advance which entry's data stores the value corresponding to which internal winning combination. In each "DB" definition, the data shifted to the upper 4 bits by multiplying by "10"H is the value displayed in the pseudo-REG when the corresponding internal winning combination occurs, and the lower 4 bits are the value displayed in the pseudo-BIG when the corresponding internal winning combination occurs. Note that in this embodiment, the upper 4 bits are defined as odd numbers in the even/odd determination data, and the lower 4 bits are defined as even numbers in the even/odd determination data. However, the upper 4 bits may also be defined as even numbers in the even/odd determination data, and the lower 4 bits as odd numbers in the even/odd determination data. In this case, the determination in step S2513 of the 4-bit data acquisition process will be reversed, and the arrangement of each piece of data described above must be taken into consideration.

So far, we have explained the 4-bit data acquisition process. This 4-bit data acquisition process allows for a configuration in which smaller data sizes are possible because there are fewer possible patterns, for example, two pieces of data can be stored in a 1-byte area. This configuration is effective when applied to the in-use data area 2102b, which is running low on space, but it can also be applied to data stored in the out-of-use data area 2102d, with the aim of improving development efficiency and maintainability through program standardization, and saving space that may be required in the future.

[4. 2-bit data acquisition process]
Next, the 2-bit data acquisition process in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

When storing data in a table stored in the data area 2102b in the used area of the main ROM 2102, the program is typically configured to store each piece of data in 1-byte or 2-byte units. However, if the data to be stored has four possible ranges, for example, from 0 to 3, and only a maximum of 2 bits are required, it is possible to store four pieces of data with a maximum of 2 bits in a 1-byte area, thereby reducing the amount of storage space that is essentially unused and, as a result, saving capacity on the main ROM 2102.

Furthermore, if different types of data groups each contain a maximum of two bits of data like this, storing them all in a single table and using a common program to retrieve the target two-bit data eliminates the need to create a program for each type of data, which also saves space in the main ROM 2102. Even if different types of data groups are stored in a single table, as long as it is known which data of which type is located in which entry (relative address position), it is possible to specify that the desired data be retrieved using a common program.

Figure 200 shows a common subprogram (2-bit data acquisition process) that extracts individual pieces of data, each up to four bits long, from a table that stores four pieces of data, each up to two bits long, in a 1-byte area, according to a specified entry.

Figure 200 is a flowchart showing the processing steps of the common subprogram (2-bit data acquisition process) described above.

In the 2-bit data acquisition process, first, in step S2531, the quotient obtained by dividing the selection value by 4 is used as the offset value, and the remainder is used as the shift counter. Here, the selection value is a value that indicates the position of the data stored in the table in that table, and has the same meaning as an "entry." Next, in step S2532, the target data is acquired. Here, the data is data stored in the table in 1-byte units, and the target data includes four 2-bit data pieces, one of which is the 2-bit data to be acquired. The target data is 1 byte of data located at the starting address of the table + offset value.

Next, in step S2533, the shift counter is incremented by 1. However, if the increment result is 4, it is reset to 0. Next, in step S2534, it is determined whether the shift counter is 0, and if it is determined to be 0 (Yes in step S2534), the process proceeds to step S2537.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the shift counter is not 0 (No in step S2534), the target data is shifted two bits to the left in step S2535. This left shift operation returns the two bits that were on the left side before the operation to the two right-most bits in the target data.

Next, in step S2536, the shift counter is decremented by 1, and then the process returns to step S2534, where 2-bit left shifts are repeated until the shift counter reaches 0. This flow allows the process to proceed to step S2537 without performing a single left shift operation for 2-bit data located at the right end of the data, such as selection values (entries) of 3, 7, and 11.

In step S2537, 2-bit data is obtained. The obtained target data is shifted left as appropriate using the above process. The desired 2-bit data is obtained by taking the logical AND of this data with "03"H (i.e., "00000011" in bit string terms), and then the program returns to the calling program. Note that the notation "(2-bit data)" to the right of the "RET" in the end symbol (rounded rectangle) means that the obtained 2-bit data is stored (returned value) in register A, and the calling program can reference/obtain it using the 2-bit data from register A.

Next, the 2-bit data acquisition process described in the flowchart in Figure 200 will be explained using a specific example shown in Figure 201.

As shown in Figure 201, the target table starts at address "1F00"H and has one byte of data (Data 1, Data 2, Data 3, ...). In this example, the first two bits of Data 1 have a selection value (entry) = 0 and a value of 1, the second two bits have entry = 1 and a value of 1, the third two bits have entry = 2 and a value of 0, and the fourth two bits have entry = 3 and a value of 3.

Furthermore, the first two bits of data 2 have a selection value (entry) of 4 and a value of 2, the second two bits have an entry of 5 and a value of 1, the third two bits have an entry of 6 and a value of 2, and the fourth two bits have an entry of 7 and a value of 3. The first two bits of data 3 have a selection value (entry) of 8 and a value of 1, the second two bits have an entry of 9 and a value of 1, the third two bits have an entry of 10 and a value of 3, and the fourth two bits have an entry of 11 and a value of 0.

Furthermore, the starting address of Data 1 is "1F00"H, the same as the beginning of the table, the starting address of Data 2 is "1F01"H, and the starting address of Data 3 is "1F02"H.

Here, as shown in (1), let's say the selected value (entry) of the 2-bit data to be obtained is "5." Then, as shown in (2), the quotient (offset value) = 1 and the remainder (shift counter) = 1.

Next, in (3), the start of the target data is the table's start address "1F00" + offset value "1", i.e., "1F01"H, which corresponds to data 2 in the target table. Data 2 contains four 2-bit data entries, 4 to 7.

Next, in (4), the shift counter = 1 + 1 = 2, and data 2 is shifted leftward twice by two bits. This left shift operation shifts the value 1 of entry = 5, which was originally in the second two-bit position in data 2, to the fourth two-bit position at the right end of data 2. Therefore, taking the logical AND of the shifted data with "03"H (i.e., the bit string "00000011") results in the bit string "00000001", and the bit string "01" (value "1") is obtained in the rightmost two bits corresponding to entry = 5, which becomes the obtained 2-bit data.

When a large amount of data with values between 0 and 3 exists across multiple entries due to this 2-bit data acquisition process, this data can be effectively stored by creating a table with the above data structure in main ROM 2102.

For example, if the above-described 2-bit data acquisition mechanism is applied to the symbol combination arrangement table of Figures 83A and 83B used in the 13th embodiment, the table can be defined as shown in Figure 202. The "dAttCnv" table represents attribute data for each 13-byte storage area type data (each symbol combination) in the symbol combination table.

In addition, each byte of data defined in the "DB" has a comment on the right side indicating which storage area identification data each attribute corresponds to. Of course, a program that uses this data will know in advance which entry's data stores the attribute corresponding to which storage area identification data.

In addition, in each "DB," the data shifted to the first two bits (see Figure 201 for the first two bits to the fourth two bits) by multiplying by "40"H is attribute data corresponding to the combination of symbols represented by bits "B7" and "B3" of the storage area identification data, the data shifted to the second two bits by multiplying by "10"H is attribute data corresponding to the combination of symbols represented by bits "B6" and "B2" of the storage area identification data, the data shifted to the third two bits by multiplying by "4"H is attribute data corresponding to the combination of symbols represented by bits "B5" and "B1" of the storage area identification data, and the lower two bits (fourth two bits) are attribute data corresponding to the combination of symbols represented by bits "B4" and "B0" of the storage area identification data. Each byte of data is calculated by adding four pieces of data, for example, data multiplied by "40"H, "10"H, and "4"H, and the raw data, as described above. However, this calculation is performed in advance, and the table data, which is a collection of the byte data calculated in this way, is stored in the data area 2102b in the used area of the main ROM 2102, etc.

Note that Figure 202 is an example where 1 byte is written in 8-bit units, and when multiplied by "40"H, "10"H, and "4"H, for example, if the second byte of the "dAttCnv" table in Figure 202 is "DB 00000011B", it becomes "DB 0*40H+0*10H+0*4H+3", and if the third byte is "DB 01010101B", it becomes "DB 1*40H+1*10H+1*4H+1".

For example, in the 1-bit data defined by the first "DB," the first 2 bits represent the attribute corresponding to the combination of symbols represented by bit "B7" in the 0th byte of the storage area type data, the second 2 bits represent the attribute corresponding to the combination of symbols represented by bit "B6" in the 0th byte of the storage area type data, the third 2 bits represent the attribute corresponding to the combination of symbols represented by bit "B5" in the 0th byte of the storage area type data, and the fourth 2 bits represent the attribute corresponding to the combination of symbols represented by bit "B4" in the 0th byte of the storage area type data.

Here, four attribute patterns are set: "NON", "REP", "FRU", and "BB", which are represented as bit strings "00", "01", "10", and "11", respectively.

In this embodiment, we have described a method for obtaining 2-bit data by shifting 2 bits to the left, but 2-bit data can also be obtained in the same way by shifting 2 bits to the right. In that case, when "shifting data 2 bits to the right" is selected in step S2535 of the 2-bit data acquisition process, the arrangement of each piece of data described above must be taken into consideration.

So far, we have explained the 2-bit data acquisition process. This 2-bit data acquisition process allows for a configuration in which smaller data sizes are possible because there are fewer possible patterns, for example, four pieces of data can be stored in a 1-byte area. This configuration is effective when applied to the in-use data area 2102b, which is running low on space, but it can also be applied to data stored in the out-of-use data area 2102d, with the aim of improving development efficiency and maintainability through program standardization, and saving space that may be required in the future.

[5. Common processing using the lower address of the counter as an input parameter]
Figure 203 conceptually shows the process flow in which the medal payout process is commonly used in the three processes shown in Figures 182 and 183 (medal payout/re-play operation process, settlement execution process, and medal payout process).

In Figure 203, the start and end symbols (step S2292, RET) of the medal payout/replay operation processing (step S2281) are shown with detailed processing omitted, and the start and end symbols (step S2305, RET) of the settlement execution processing (step S2293) are also shown with detailed processing omitted. Furthermore, the settlement execution processing includes the start symbol of the medal payout processing (step S2298), and when this medal payout processing is called, the process also proceeds to the above-mentioned end symbol (step 2305, RET).

As described above, the medal payout/replay operation processing is called from the main processing shown in FIG. 170 (step S2014), and more specifically, it is called when medals are paid out at the end of a unit game. On the other hand, the settlement execution processing is called from a predetermined program (for example, the settlement button press detection processing (a program that detects the pressing of the settlement button) in the medal acceptance/start check processing (step S2003) in the main processing of FIG. 170) when the player presses the settlement button (a state waiting for the start of a unit game in which medals can be accepted).

The medal payout process is called in three flows. In the first flow, it is called from the medal payout/replay operation process to pay out any medals that have overflowed from the credits when the credit counter reaches its upper limit. In the second flow, it is called from the settlement execution process when medals related to the credit counter are to be paid out in response to a settlement instruction. In the third flow, it is called from the settlement execution process when medals related to the medal insertion counter are to be paid out. As described above, in the settlement execution process, the medal payout process is called twice under certain conditions.

Now, with reference to Figure 203, the first to third flows described above will be explained in detail. The first flow is indicated by a thick solid arrow. First, the main processing calls the medal payout/replay operation processing (step S2281), which executes processing related to the medal payout and replay operation, sets the address of the payout number counter storage area in a specified register, and calls the medal payout processing (step S2298), which executes processing related to the medal payout, and then ends (step 2305, RET) to return to the main processing that called it.

Here, the medal payout process is called by, for example, a jump command (JP). With a jump command, the program counter is not saved in the stack area, and the program counter is updated sequentially while the command is executed. Therefore, even when the medal payout process ends, it does not return to the caller (the command following the jump command). Instead, when the medal payout process ends (step S2305, RET), it returns to the command that called the medal payout/replay operation process of the main process, and the next command is executed.

On the other hand, the call instruction (CALL) saves the program counter of the called instruction in the stack area, and when the called process is completed, the program returns to the caller and the next instruction in the program counter saved in the stack area is executed.

The second flow is indicated by the dotted arrow. First, the settlement button press detection process of the medal acceptance/start check process in the main process calls the settlement execution process (step S2293) in response to pressing the settlement button, and executes the process related to settlement. This then sets the address of the credit counter storage process in a specified register, and calls the medal payout process (step S2298) with a call command (CALL), which executes the process related to the medal payout, and then returns to the caller by ending (step 2305, RET).

The third flow is indicated by the dashed arrow. In the second flow, after returning to the caller, the process proceeds to the next command, where the address of the medal insertion counter storage area is set in a specified register and the medal payout process (step S2298) is executed again, where the process related to the medal payout is executed, and upon completion (step 2305, RET), the process returns to the settlement button press detection process that called the settlement execution process.

As shown in Figure 203, immediately before the medal payout process is called, the storage areas for the three types of medal counters are set in specified registers. This processing allows the medal payout process to be used in common as a process for paying out medals for each medal counter. As a result, there is no need to write medal payout processing for each medal counter, saving space in the program area 2102a in the use area of the main ROM 2102.

Figure 204 shows how the storage area of each medal counter is set when the medal payout process described in Figure 203 is called, and how the storage area of each medal counter is referenced as a result.

The medal payout process, which is a common process, receives the lower address of each medal counter's storage area (in this embodiment, the lowest byte of a 2-byte address) from the calling program into the DE register or HL register, sets a specified upper address in that register to identify the address of each medal counter's storage area, references each medal counter from the working area 2103a in the used area of the main RAM 2103, obtains the number of medals for each, and pays out the obtained number of medals (processing such as the medal payout number check process (step S2302)).

For example, when the caller wishes to perform a payout process for the payout number counter, the lower address "20"H of the payout number counter's storage area is set as an input parameter in the DE register, and the medal payout process is called. The medal payout process then determines that the payout process is related to the payout number counter, and for example, sets "F0"H in the upper byte of the DE register to "F020"H, and uses this as an address to reference the payout number counter in the working area 2103a within the used area (for example, referenced using the code "(LD A, DE)"). In this example, the 1-byte payout number counter stored at the address location "F020"H stores the number of medals "15".

Note that "F0"H is set in the upper bits of the DE register here; this is a setting that is predetermined between the calling program and the called medal payout processing program. This setting eliminates the need to send the value of "F0"H as an input parameter to the medal payout processing program, thereby reducing the size of load commands in the calling program and ultimately saving space in the program area 2102a within the used area of the main ROM 2102. Note that while a fixed value such as "F0"H is set here, the upper address may be changed depending on the value of the lower address received as an input parameter. For example, if the lower address is smaller than "80"H, "F1"H is used as the upper address, and if the lower address is "80"H or greater, "F0"H is used as the upper address.

The same is true for the credit counter. First, the lower address "40"H of the credit counter's storage area is set as an input parameter in the DE register, and the medal payout process is called. The medal payout process then determines that this is a payout process related to the credit counter, so for example, "F0"H is set in the upper bits of the DE register to make it "F040"H, and this is used as an address to reference the credit counter in the working area within the used area 2103a (for example, the value is referenced using the code "(LD A, DE)"). In this example, the 1-byte credit counter stored at address "F040"H stores the number of medals, "42".

The same applies to the medal insertion counter. First, the lower address "60"H of the medal insertion counter's storage area is set as an input parameter in the DE register, and the medal payout process is called. The medal payout process then determines that this is a payout process related to the medal insertion counter, so for example, "F0"H is set in the upper bits of the DE register to make it "F060"H, and this is used as an address to reference the medal insertion counter in the working area 2103a within the used area (for example, referenced using the code "(LD A, DE)"). In this example, the 1-byte medal insertion counter stored at address "F060"H stores the number of medals "2".

As described above, the medal payout process receives the number of medals to be paid out as an input parameter and performs the payout process based on the number of medals to be paid out. In this embodiment, when this process is called, one of the payout number counter, credit counter, or medal insertion counter is received as an input parameter, and the number of the received counter is used as the number of medals to be paid out. Furthermore, the input parameter uses the lower address (e.g., the lower byte (8 bits) of a 2-byte address) of the address (in the working area 2103a within the used area) where each medal counter is stored. This allows the size of load commands to be smaller than if both the upper and lower addresses were specified, which saves space in the program area 2102a within the used area of the main ROM 2102. Furthermore, by passing parameters in this way, the medal payout process can be used as a common process, eliminating the need to write a process to pay out medals for each medal counter. This also saves space in the program area 2102a within the used area.

[6. Method for determining clear start address of RAM area outside used area]
As can be seen by referring to Figure 172, when the power to the gaming machine is turned on, a CRC inspection process (outside the use area) is performed, and if a CRC abnormality is detected, "game return impossible state 1 (CRC abnormality)" is set in the game return status storage area, and if the power outage occurrence flag is not on (i.e., if the power outage interrupt process is not performed normally), "game return impossible state 2 (power outage abnormality)" is set in the game return status storage area, and in all other cases, "game return possible state (normal)" is set in the game return status storage area.

Referring to FIG. 171, only when an operation to change settings is performed (Yes in step S2035), is the main RAM 2103 initialized (designated RAM initialization process (step S2036)). Furthermore, if the game return status storage area described above is in "Game return impossible status 1 (CRC abnormality)" or "Game return impossible status 2 (power interruption abnormality)" before this initialization is performed, or if the game return impossible error flag is set to data indicating "return impossible," the "RAM abnormality clear address" for the in-use RAM area 2203a is set to the RAM initialization address. If the game return status storage area is in "game return possible status (normal)" and the game return impossible error flag is set to data indicating "return possible," the RAM initialization address is set to the "setting change clear address" for the in-use RAM area 2203a. When processing proceeds to the designated RAM initialization (step S2146) shown in FIG. 176, the RAM initialization address is saved in the start address storage area, and based on this address, the out-of-use RAM initialization process (outside the used area) (step S2150) is first performed.

Figure 177 shows the flow of the out-of-use RAM initialization process (outside the used area), in which the RAM initialization address is set to either the "address to clear when a RAM abnormality occurs" for the in-use RAM area 2203a or the "address to clear when settings are changed" for the in-use RAM area 2203a. Here, the out-of-use RAM initialization process (outside the used area) uses the out-of-use RAM clear address when a RAM abnormality occurs as the initialization start address if the lowest byte (e.g., the lowest byte of the two bytes) of the RAM initialization address saved in the start address storage area is the lower address of the "address to clear when a RAM abnormality occurs" for the in-use RAM area 2203a (step S2183). In other words, the address to be cleared for the in-use RAM area 2203a is determined from the lower address, and the initialization start address is set to the clear address for the out-of-use RAM area 2203b.

Similarly, if the lowest byte stored in the memory determination area is the lower address of the "clear address when setting is changed" related to the in-use RAM area 2203a, the RAM outside the use area is initialized with the clear address when setting is changed as the initialization start address; if the lowest byte stored in the memory determination area is the lower address of the "clear address when BB (special prize) ends" related to the in-use RAM area 2203a, the RAM outside the use area is initialized with the clear address when setting is changed as the initialization start address; in all other cases, the RAM outside the use area is initialized with the clear address when one game ends as the initialization start address.

This determination can be made, for example, by referencing correspondence data that associates the lowest byte (i.e., the lower address stored in the memory determination area) of the initialization address (RAM initialization address) for the in-use RAM area 2203a with the initialization start address for the out-of-use RAM area 220b. In this case, if the highest byte of the initialization start address for the out-of-use RAM area 2203b is a fixed value such as "F2," it is sufficient to store only the lowest byte of this address. In the example shown in FIG. 177, the use area clear address at the end of one game is set only if it does not match any previous address, so there is no need to maintain a correspondence relationship for the use area clear address at the end of one game as the above-mentioned correspondence data. The correspondence data is stored, for example, in the in-use data area 2102b.

After that, returning to FIG. 176, RAM initialization within the used area (step S2151) is performed. In this case, the "address to clear when a RAM abnormality occurs" for RAM area 2203a within the used area, which is set as the initialization start address (RAM initialization address), or the "address to clear when settings are changed" for RAM area 2203a within the used area is used.

Then, returning to FIG. 171, when the setting change process (step S2037) is performed, the RAM initialization address is set to the "clear address when setting is changed" relating to the RAM area 2203a in the used area (step S2038). Then, when the transmission standby & RAM initialization process (step S2039) is called, processing starts from the transmission standby & RAM initialization process (step S2141) in FIG. 176, and after first obtaining unsent data (steps S2142 to S2145), processing starts again from the specified RAM initialization process (step S2146). This time, the RAM initialization address is set only to the "clear address when settings are changed" for the in-use RAM area 2203a, so in the out-of-use RAM initialization process (outside of the used area) (step S2150), for the out-of-use area, the out-of-use RAM is initialized using the clear address when settings are changed as the initialization start address, and for the in-use area (step S2151), the "clear address when settings are changed" for the in-use RAM area 2203a is used.

In addition, the BB (special prize) number of plays check process (step S2131) is called from the main process shown in Figure 170, and if it is determined that BB (special prize) operation has ended, the BB (special prize) end clear address is set to the RAM initialization address, and then, as above, the lower address of that address is stored in the memory determination area, and based on the lowest byte of this, the BB (special prize) end outside use area clear address is set, and RAM outside the use area is initialized, and then RAM initialization within the use area is executed using the BB (special prize) end clear address of the RAM initialization address.

In addition, in the main side presentation control process at the end of a game (step S2016) shown in Figure 170, the clear address at the end of one game is set to the RAM initialization address, and then, as described above, the lower address of that address is stored in the memory judgment area, and based on this lower byte, the clear address outside the used area at the end of one game is set, and RAM outside the used area is initialized, and then RAM within the used area is initialized using the clear address at the end of one game of the RAM initialization address.

Figure 205 shows an overview of each of the clear addresses mentioned above. For the working area 2103a within the used area of the main RAM 2103, as mentioned above, the address locations of the "clear address when a RAM abnormality occurs," "clear address when settings are changed," "clear address at the end of BB (special prize)," and "clear address at the end of one game," which are set as RAM initialization addresses, are indicated by solid arrows. Furthermore, for the RAM area 2203a within the used area, a clear end address is set fixedly, and the range of initialization is from each of the above clear addresses, including the stack area 2103b within the used area, to this clear end address.

The clear end address is set, for example, so that the first address (the largest address value, 2 bytes) of the in-use stack area 2103b is not initialized. This is because the program counter of the calling program is stored here, and after RAM initialization, it is necessary to return from the running program to the calling program.

With regard to the out-of-use working area 2103c of the main RAM 2103, as described above, the address locations of the "out-of-use area clear address when a RAM abnormality occurs," "out-of-use area clear address when a setting is changed," "out-of-use area clear address when BB (special prize) ends," and "out-of-use area clear address when one game ends" converted based on the lower addresses of the RAM initialization address are indicated by dotted arrows. Note that the names of each clear address are substituted for the clear addresses within the used area and are not displayed. Furthermore, with regard to the out-of-use RAM area 2203b, a fixed clear end address is also set, and the range of initialization is from each of the above clear addresses to this clear end address. Note that while the out-of-use stack area 2103d is not subject to initialization here, this area may also be included in the area to be cleared. This area does not store data related to the game, and is therefore not subject to clearing in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 205, the clear addresses for the in-use working area 2103a of the main RAM 2103 are set to different address locations. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 205, the clear addresses for the out-of-use working area 2103c of the main RAM 2103 are set to the same address location in part, but may all be set to different address locations. Note that in this embodiment, the clear address for the out-of-use working area 2103c is determined according to the lower address of the clear address for the in-use working area 2103a, so it is necessary to set the clear addresses for the in-use working area 2103a so that they do not contain the same address or have the same value for the lower addresses.

In addition, non-clear areas that are not initialized under any circumstances are set at the beginning of the in-use working area 2103a and the beginning of the out-of-use working area 2103c of the main RAM 2103. These areas store data that should be retained even when the RAM is initialized.

With this configuration of the present embodiment, the clear address (clear start address) for RAM initialization related to the in-use RAM area 2203a is used as the selection condition for the clear address (clear start address) for RAM initialization related to the out-of-use RAM area 2203b. This eliminates the need to create individual processing condition programs that select the clear address for RAM initialization related to the out-of-use RAM area 2203b depending on the state of the gaming machine, which ultimately leads to savings in capacity of the main ROM 2102.

In addition, the process of clearing the out-of-use RAM area 2203b can be performed completely independently, making it easier to create and maintain programs for other standards.

[7. Standardization of reel stop control processing in actual games and simulated games]
In this embodiment, similar to the first embodiment, a pseudo game is performed. As described in relation to the first embodiment, the pseudo game is a presentation in which a pseudo game is performed during the execution of a presentation when predetermined execution conditions are met. In addition, in the pseudo game, a stop operation using a stop button (for example, a stop button corresponding to stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R in the first embodiment) is also accepted in the same way as in a normal game, and in particular, the process of monitoring the operation of the stop button is the same as in a normal game.

In this embodiment, therefore, the stop button input monitoring process for normal play and the stop button input monitoring process for simulated play are made common (i.e., they are processed by the same subroutine). This makes it possible to reduce the overall program size, and as a result, it is possible to save program space in the main ROM. Furthermore, by making the above common processes subroutines, the program structure is simplified, which in turn makes it possible to improve program development efficiency and maintainability.

The stop button input monitoring process in this embodiment determines whether a valid press of the stop button has occurred, and if a valid press has occurred, provides the calling program with data indicating that a valid press has occurred and also updates the stop button status information, etc.

In normal gameplay, this stop button input monitoring process roughly corresponds to the determination process of step S113 of the reel stop control process (FIG. 29) called by the main process (FIG. 23) of the first embodiment, where it is determined whether a valid stop button has been pressed. The stop button input monitoring process of this embodiment will be explained in detail later using a flowchart, but because this is an example of application to this embodiment, it may not be possible to directly incorporate it as the determination process of the reel stop control process of the first embodiment described above. The stop button input monitoring process of this embodiment, which will be described later, is provided as an example to explain the technical concept of the present application.

In addition, the stop button input monitoring process of this embodiment described above generally corresponds, in the pseudo-game mode, to the processes of steps S1063 and S1064 of the normal pseudo-game processing (Figure 47) called by the pseudo-game processing (Figure 46) of the second embodiment, and the judgment process of step S1106 of the post-reel pseudo-game processing (Figure 49) called by the pseudo-game processing (Figure 46) of the second embodiment, and also generally corresponds to the judgment process of step S1251 of the normal pseudo-game processing (Figure 57) of the third embodiment, and the judgment process of step S1262 of the stop button operation acceptance processing (Figure 58), where it is determined whether a valid stop button has been pressed. The stop button input monitoring process of this embodiment will be explained in detail later using a flowchart, but because this is an example of application to this embodiment, it is not necessarily possible to incorporate it directly into the normal pseudo-game processing of the second embodiment, the post-reel effect pseudo-game processing, or the normal pseudo-game processing of the third embodiment. The stop button input monitoring process of this embodiment, which will be described later, is provided as an example to explain the technical concept of this application.

Figure 206 shows a flowchart of the stop button input monitoring process of this embodiment. This process begins in step S2551, where the address of the stop button input status storage area is set in a specified register. This sets the address of input port storage area 1 (an area in main RAM 2103) that stores the status of the stop button input port, entered in the input port processing (step S2362) of the periodic interrupt processing of Figure 186, in a specified register (for example, the HL register).

Next, in step S2552, input port on-edge data is acquired. Here, the address of input port storage area 0 (an area within main RAM 2103) that stores the input port edge state of the stop button, which was input in the input port processing (step S2362) of the periodic interrupt processing in Figure 186, is set (for example, in the DE register).

Next, in step S2553, a logical OR operation is performed on the data obtained in step S2551 and the data obtained in step S2552, and valid stop button input data is obtained from the result of this operation. A valid stop button input requires that there is a press that is not chattering and that the reel corresponding to the press is currently spinning. If multiple stop buttons are pressed simultaneously, the stop button on the left takes priority (for example, in the first embodiment, priority is given to stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R in that order). Furthermore, if stop buttons 8L and 8C are pressed simultaneously while the first reel has stopped and the second reel is spinning, stop button 8L takes priority and stop button 8C is disabled.

Next, in step S2554, it is determined whether the press input is valid. If it is not valid (No in step S2554), data indicating the determination result "invalid" is retained and processing ends. If it is valid (Yes in step S2554), information about the stop button corresponding to the acquired information related to the validly pressed stop button and information about the operation status of the stop button are acquired below.

That is, in step S2555, the address of the first cylinder control data storage area is set in a specified register, in step S2556, the stop button activation bit is set in a specified register, in step S2557, the address is updated for one reel, in step S2558, the stop button activation bit is updated for one stop button, and in step S2559, valid/invalid information is extracted from the acquired stop button input.

Next, in step S2560, it is determined whether the information is valid. If it is not valid (No in step S2560), the process returns to step S2557. If it is valid (Yes in step S2560), the stop button status information, etc. is updated.

That is, in step S2561, the stop button information in the stop button input status storage area is updated, in step S2562 the operation status is stored in the stop button operation status storage area, and in step S2563 the stop button operation counter is decremented by 1. Thereafter, data indicating the judgment result "valid" is retained and processing ends.

The stop button input monitoring process configured in this way is called separately for normal play and simulated play, and the stop button input status storage area, stop button activation status storage area, and stop button activation counter are used in both normal play and simulated play, so the processing can be shared.

8. Common processing for backup generation and backup restoration
Of the common information backup generation processing shown in Fig. 207, the processing related to the generation of the common information backup generally corresponds to, for example, the backup processing of the fourth embodiment described above (step S4602 of Fig. 163). Note that the processing related to the generation of the common information backup shown in Fig. 207 shows processing realized in this embodiment, and therefore it is not necessarily possible to incorporate it as is as the backup generation processing of the fourth embodiment described above. The common information backup generation processing described here is provided as an example to explain the technical concept of the present application.

The process for generating a common information backup shown in Figure 207 is executed, for example, in the process of this embodiment corresponding to the lever-on AT-related process of the fourth embodiment shown in Figure 163. In the lever-on AT-related process, first, a process that is not affected by a penalty is executed, then a backup process is executed to store the original information of the various information in order to cancel updates of various information (counters and flags for AT-related parameters) in the event of a penalty, and then in the lever-on AT-related process, various AT-related lotteries are drawn when the lever is on, and various information is updated in accordance with the results of the AT-related lottery when the lever is on. Here, the various information corresponds to the data stored in the "common information storage area" of this embodiment, which will be described later, and the backup information corresponds to the data stored in the "common information backup storage area" of this embodiment, which will be described later.

The lever-on AT-related processing is executed in the game start state control processing (step S6 in FIG. 23) of the main processing in the first embodiment, and this processing corresponds to the game start state control processing (step S2006 in FIG. 170) of the main processing in this embodiment. In the game start state control processing, when the start lever is operated, the "lever-on AT-related processing" shown in FIG. 163 (of the fourth embodiment) is performed. Also, as described above, in the AT state, an advantageous stop operation mode is notified to the notification means (for example, a device corresponding to the notification monitor or main display device 210 in the first embodiment).

Of the common information backup restoration process shown in FIG. 207 and the common information restoration process shown in FIG. 208, the process related to the restoration of common information corresponds, for example, to the process of the fourth embodiment described above (step S4624 of FIG. 164 (process of assigning backed-up information to various counters and flags, i.e., process of returning data in the common information backup storage area to the common information storage area)). Note that the process related to the restoration of common information backup shown in FIGS. 207 and 208 represents the process realized in this embodiment, and therefore may not be able to be incorporated as is as the backup restoration process of the fourth embodiment described above. The common information restoration process described here is provided as an example to explain the technical concept of the present application.

The common information restoration process shown in FIG. 208 is called, for example, by the process of this embodiment corresponding to the AT-related process when all reels are stopped of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 164. In the AT-related process when all reels are stopped, when all reels are stopped, various AT-related lotteries are executed when all reels are stopped, and then various information (counters, flags, etc.) is updated according to the results of the AT-related lottery when all reels are stopped. If a predetermined penalty condition is met, the above-mentioned various updated information is written back to the backup information data, and the updates of the various information (i.e., the update according to the results of the AT-related lottery when the lever is on and the update according to the results of the AT-related lottery when all reels are stopped shown in FIG. 163) are canceled. Here, the various information corresponds to the data stored in the "common information storage area" of this embodiment, which will be described later, and the backup information corresponds to the data stored in the "common information backup storage area" of this embodiment, which will be described later.

Therefore, here, the cancellation of various information means that the contents of the various information updated after the backup process (step S4602) shown in FIG. 163 (i.e., the various information updated in steps S4603 and S4604 in FIG. 163 and step S4622 in FIG. 164) are returned to the state of the data backed up in step S4602.

Note that the AT-related processing at full stop in the fourth embodiment (FIG. 164) is processing executed in the game end state control processing of the main processing in the fourth embodiment (step S15 in FIG. 23), and this processing corresponds to the game end state control processing of the main processing in this embodiment (step S2015 in FIG. 170).

Figure 207 shows a flowchart explaining the processing steps for the common information backup generation process. In this process, first, settings related to common information backup generation are set in a specified register (step S2581). Then, in step S2584, the next pseudo-game selection effect number is cleared, and in step S2585, the address of the common information backup storage area (i.e., the area where the data stored in the common information storage area is backed up) is set in, for example, the HL register, and in step S2586, the address of the common information storage area is set in, for example, the DL register.

In this example, the common information storage area is the backup target (data restoration target), and, as in the fourth embodiment described above, includes AT-related parameters (various information (counters, flags, etc.) that can be updated as a result of AT-related processing), and some examples of these AT-related parameters are shown in Figure 162.

Next, in step S2587, the data length of the common information storage area is set in a specified register, and in step S2588, it is determined whether a backup restoration or backup is being performed. If a backup restoration is not being performed (i.e., a backup is being created) (No in step S2588), the addresses of the common information backup storage area and the common information storage area are swapped in step S2589.

After step S2589, or if it is determined in step S2588 that a backup restoration is being performed (Yes in step S2588), the process proceeds to step S2590, where the data in the storage area indicated by the source address is transferred to the storage area indicated by the destination address.

As described above, this is the common information backup generation process called by the game start state control process (step S2006 in FIG. 170) of the main process, so the determination of whether to restore or back up in step S2588 is No, and addresses are swapped in step S2589. Then, in the transfer process of step S2590, the source address is the address of the common information storage area, and the destination address is the address of the common information backup storage area, and a backup of the AT-related parameters is obtained by this process.

Furthermore, when the common information backup restoration process is called from step S2617 of the common information restoration process shown in Figure 208 (described later) using the A register as an argument, the process of step S2582 in Figure 207 is initiated, and this process determines whether or not restoration has occurred (i.e., whether or not the backup determination value (A register) = 0). If this process determines that restoration has occurred (A register = 0) (Yes in step S2582), the process proceeds to step S2583 described above. If it determines that restoration has not occurred (A register ≠ 0) (No in step S2582), the process terminates.

If the determination in step S2582 is Yes, the process proceeds to step S2583 described above, and the same processing as above is performed. However, since this is processing from the common information restoration processing, the determination of whether to restore backup or backup in step S2588 is Yes, and no address switching is performed in step S2589. Then, in the transfer processing in step S2590, the address of the transfer source becomes the address of the common information backup storage area, and the address of the transfer destination becomes the address of the common information storage area, and this processing performs backup restoration of AT-related parameters.

Figure 208 shows a flowchart explaining the processing steps for the common information restoration process. This process determines whether or not to perform the common information backup restoration process, that is, whether or not the penalty condition is met. Note that this determination is similar to the conditions described in connection with step S4623 in Figure 164 in the fourth embodiment described above.

First, in step S2611, if the game is in a favorable zone (i.e., not in a non-favorable zone) (Yes in step S2611), this is one of the penalty conditions, and the process proceeds to step S2612. If the game is not in a favorable zone (No in step S2611), the process terminates. Next, in step S2612, it is determined whether the first reel is at the first stop. If the first reel (e.g., reel 3L) is not at the first stop (i.e., a stop operation (irregular press) is performed on the center reel 3C or right reel 3R as the first stop operation) (No in step S2612), this is one of the penalty conditions, and the process proceeds to step S2613. If the first drum is the first stop (Yes in step S2612), proceed to step S2617. In this case, the backup determination value = ball-out game status flag, and since the ball-out game status flag has not been acquired at this time, a value other than 0 is set in the A register, and proceed to the common information backup restoration process in step S2617, where the process ends without actually performing the backup restoration process.

In step S2613, the payout game status flag is obtained. The payout game status flag allows the current payout state to be determined. For example, in the fourth embodiment, pseudo bonuses such as "pseudo BIG," "pseudo REG," and "pseudo BIG (ED)," as well as the 3BB game status shown in FIG. 81, can be determined. Then, in step S2614, it is determined whether the obtained payout game status flag indicates a bonus state. If a bonus state is indicated (Yes in step S2614), the process proceeds to common information backup restoration processing in step S2617. Here, whether or not backup restoration processing is performed is determined, for example, depending on the value of the payout game status flag. For example, if the value of the payout game status flag is set in register A and its content is set to 0, the penalty condition is met and backup restoration processing is performed.

If neither of the bonus states is in effect (No in step S2614), proceed to step S2615 to determine whether the internal winning combination is the combination to be determined. If it is not the combination to be determined (No in step S2615), proceed to step S2617. Here, if a value other than 0 is set in register A and the common information backup restoration process is called in step S2617, the process ends without actually performing the backup restoration process.

If the combination is subject to judgment (Yes in step S2615), in step S2616, a backup judgment value is obtained according to the internal winning combination. In other words, whether or not the penalty conditions are met is determined based on the internal winning combination. The backup judgment value stores data indicating whether or not there will be a return (A register = 0) or not (A register is other than 0). Next, the process proceeds to step S2617, where the common information backup return process in Figure 207 is called using the A register as an argument, and the process ends. Furthermore, in the common information backup return process in Figure 207, if the A register is 0, the backup return process is performed.

The determinations in steps S2611 to S2615 are related to penalty conditions. If these penalty conditions are met, backup restoration processing is performed and various information updates are restored. As described above, the penalty conditions are determined based on whether or not the machine is in a favorable zone, the stopping mode of the first drum, the bonus status, and the internal winning combination.

Here, with reference to Figure 209, we will provide an overview of the common information backup creation process and common information backup restoration process in this embodiment.

Figure 209 (A) shows an overview of the backup restoration process (so-called restore process) in the common information backup restoration process. In the main RAM 2103 shown on the left, common information is stored from address "F020"H in the working area 2103a within the used area over a length of L1, and the area shaded with diagonal lines slanting downward to the left is the common information storage area. Address "F020"H is also stored in the DE register. Meanwhile, common information backup, which is the previous version of common information, is stored from address "F030"H in the working area 2103a within the used area over a length of L1, and the area shaded with diagonal lines slanting downward to the right is the common information backup storage area. Address "F030"H is also stored in the HL register.

When the transfer command shown in (1) is executed in this state of main RAM 2103, an area of length L1 from the address stored in the HL register is transferred to an area starting from the address stored in the DE register. As a result, main RAM 2103 becomes as shown on the right. In other words, the common information data is rewritten with common information backup data.

This transfer command corresponds, for example, to the processing of step S2590 shown in Figure 207.

Figure 209(B) shows an overview of the backup generation process (so-called backup processing) in the common information backup generation process. In the main RAM 2103 shown on the left, common information is stored over a length of L1 from address "F020"H in the working area within the used area 2103a. The area shaded with diagonal lines in a grid pattern is the common information storage area, and indicates that the data has been updated from the state in Figure 209(A).

On the other hand, the common information of the version used for the backup restoration in Figure 209 (A) is stored in the working area 2103a in the used area from address "F030"H over a length of L1, and the area shaded diagonally downward to the right is the common information backup storage area.

When the exchange instruction shown in (1) is executed in this state of main RAM 2103, the address stored in the HL register and the address stored in the DE register are swapped. In this way, address "F020"H is stored in the HL register, and address "F030"H is stored in the DE register, in the opposite order to Figure 209 (A).

Furthermore, when the transfer instruction (2) is executed, an area of length L1 from the address stored in the HL register is transferred to an area starting from the address stored in the DE register. As a result, the main RAM 2103 will be in the state shown on the right. In other words, the data in the common information backup is rewritten with the common information data.

This exchange instruction corresponds, for example, to the processing of step S2589 shown in Figure 207, and the transfer instruction corresponds, for example, to the processing of step S2590 shown in Figure 207. The data transfer direction of the transfer instruction is opposite in Figure 209(A) and Figure 209(B), but this is because the register values are swapped by the exchange instruction in Figure 209(B), and the code itself is the same.

As described above, backups of various information are obtained in the common information backup generation process of FIG. 207, which is executed in the game start state control process (step S2006), and the various information is restored to the state it was in at the start of play in the common information restoration process of FIG. 208, which is executed in the game end state control process (step S2015), using the backups obtained for various information. However, if the penalty conditions described above are met, backup restoration processing is performed on various information to cancel updates to the various information at the end of play.

In addition, the common information restoration process shares most of its processing with the common information backup generation process, with the exception of determining penalty conditions. Clearing the next pseudo-game performance number, setting each storage area address, setting the length of the storage area, etc. are all common processes, and when transferring data, the storage area addresses are swapped between the common information restoration process and the common information backup generation process, reversing the data transfer direction.

By standardizing programs in this way, it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity of the program area in the main ROM. Furthermore, by standardizing programs in this way, it is possible to simplify the program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

[9. Detection of game return impossible error]
When the game-return-impossible error processing (outside the use area) shown in FIG. 174 is called, it sets interrupt prohibition, prohibits medal insertion, displays a message on the information display device (7-segment LED) indicating that a game-return-impossible error has occurred, and then starts an infinite loop. When this processing detects a game-return-impossible error and calls the game-return-impossible error processing (outside the use area), the pachislot machine 2001 enters a standby state due to an infinite loop. At this time, the pachislot machine 2001 does not accept any operations other than turning off the power, or at least, it can be made impossible to perform operations to start a game. Here, if the pachislot machine 2001 is powered off and then powered on again, if an operation to change the settings is performed using the setting key, the setting change operation becomes possible (see FIG. 171). If no operation to change the settings is performed when the power is turned on, the same standby state will occur again.

Furthermore, the causes of the game return impossible error are: (1) when a comparison of the CRC value calculated when the power is turned on with the CRC value calculated when the power is interrupted and stored in the CRC value storage area 2103e results in a mismatch (see Figures 171 and 172); when the comparison of the CRC values results in a match, but the CRC value calculation is not performed (or is not performed correctly) in the power interruption processing (see Figures 172, 190, and 191); and (3) when an abnormality in the setting value or the random number circuit is detected in the error detection processing (outside the use area) in the periodic interrupt processing (see Figures 186, 188, and 189).

For causes (1) and (2) above, the above-mentioned error processing (outside of the usage area) is executed as soon as the error preventing game return is detected when the power is turned on. However, for cause (3), the error processing (outside of the usage area) is not executed when the power is turned on, and the error processing (outside of the usage area) is executed during the internal lottery process (see Figure 179).

For this purpose, in the case of cause (3), the game return impossible error flag is set to data indicating "return impossible," and the contents of this flag are determined by internal lottery processing. As shown in FIG. 170, internal lottery processing is executed after the medal acceptance and start check processing, and is executed when medals are inserted (or credits are available) and the start switch is turned on by operating the start lever (i.e., when the player commands the start of play).

With this configuration in this embodiment, if an abnormality in the setting value or the random number circuit is detected, the abnormality is not displayed or a standby process (infinite loop) is performed at the time of detection. Instead, the next time the start lever is operated to start play, the abnormality is displayed and the machine goes into standby mode.

This behavior of the pachislot machine 2001 assumes a situation in which a cheating offense (so-called cheating) is committed after the gaming parlor closes, and the cheater (for example, a player) begins playing the following day immediately after the gaming parlor reopens, attempting to gain an unfair advantage. With the above-described mechanism of this embodiment, the cheater begins playing immediately after the gaming parlor opens, and only then will the gaming machine display an abnormality and enter a standby state, making it possible to identify the cheater on the spot (even if the cheater cannot be apprehended on the spot, it is possible to obtain video footage of the player operating the gaming machine, etc.). At this point, the cheater will begin playing under the mistaken belief that their cheating on the previous day was successful.

On the other hand, if an abnormality caused by fraud is detected, the gaming machine will display the abnormality and go into standby mode. In the situation described above where fraudulent activity occurs after the amusement center has closed the previous day, the abnormality will be displayed and the machine will go into standby mode when a staff member turns the machine on before the amusement center opens, meaning that the person who committed the fraud will not be present and it will be impossible to identify the person who committed the fraud.

The fifth embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, but these configurations and processes are merely examples, and the technical concept of the present invention can be realized using a variety of other configurations and methods. Furthermore, while the above description primarily covers the application of the technical concept of the present application to pachislot machines, it can also be applied to pachinko machines and the medal-less gaming machine of the sixth embodiment described below.

Sixth Embodiment
(Medalless gaming machine)
In the pachislot machine 2501 of this embodiment, play begins with one of the conditions being the player's betting operation (i.e., inserting medals held in hand into the medal insertion slot 2505 to place a bet, or operating the MAX BET button 2506a or 1 BET button 2506b to place a bet with credited medals), and if medals are to be paid out when the game ends, the hopper device 2532 is driven to pay out medals from the medal payout port 2511, or the medals are credited, as described above, but the configuration of the pachislot machine 2501 is not limited to this.

For example, the invention according to this embodiment can be applied to all types of gaming in which a player bets the amount of gaming value required for a game, the game is played based on that bet, and a bonus is awarded based on the outcome of the game (e.g., gaming value is awarded). In other words, the invention can be applied not only to types in which medals are physically inserted (bet) and paid out through the player's actions, but also to those in which the gaming value held by the player is managed electromagnetically within the pachislot machine 2501 (or, even if not electromagnetically, at least managed in a manner that prevents the player from directly accessing the gaming value), allowing for medal-free gaming. Here, such pachislot machines 2501 are referred to as "medalless gaming machines." Medalless gaming machines are also sometimes referred to as "managed gaming machines" or "enclosed gaming machines," etc.

The game value held by the player may be electromagnetically managed by the main control circuit 2600 (main control board 2571) itself, or by a game value management device attached to (connected to) the main control circuit 2600 (main control board 2571) (hereinafter, such a management device may be referred to as a "medal count control board"). An example of how this game value management device is installed is described below.

The gaming value management device is a device equipped with at least ROM and RWM (or RAM) and installed in the pachislot machine 2501. It is connected to an external gaming value providing device (hereinafter, such a gaming value providing device may be referred to as a "communication-only unit") for two-way communication via a communication device (hereinafter, such a communication device may be referred to as a "connection terminal board"). By performing the necessary communication with the external gaming value providing device, the gaming value management device is capable of performing operations such as lending gaming value (i.e., providing the gaming value required for a player to place a gaming value bet), granting gaming value (i.e., providing the granted gaming value to a player when a winning combination related to the granting of gaming value is achieved (such combination is realized)), and electromagnetically recording the gaming value provided by these operations. The gaming value providing device is also sometimes referred to as a "gaming value (gaming medium) handling device," "gaming value (gaming medium) lending device," or "sandbox."

The external gaming value providing device is also connected to an external ball payout management device (ball payout management server), and the gaming value management device is configured to be able to send ball payout management information to the external ball payout management device via a communication device and the external gaming value providing device. Here, the ball payout management information is made up of various pieces of information necessary to enable the external ball payout management device to manage ball payouts. An example of ball payout management information will be described later. The external gaming value providing device and the external ball payout management device are connected, for example, by an internet line.

Here, "balls paid out" directly refers to the number of gaming media paid out, but in this embodiment, the concept also includes, for example, the difference (net increase) between the number of payouts and the number of bets, the degree of benefit given to the player (for example, how much the player gained (how much the gaming establishment lost), or how much the player lost (how much the gaming establishment gained), etc.), the duration of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state, an AT state, or a series of advantageous periods, etc.), or the degree of gambling potential assumed by a combination of these.

Also, for example, a retained game value number display device (not shown) that displays the number of retained game values may be provided on the front side of the pachislot machine 2501, and the game value management device may manage the number of game values displayed on this retained game value number display device based on the management results of the number of game values. In other words, the game value management device may not only record the total number of game values that a player can use for play by electromagnetic means, but may also be configured to be able to control the display of the recorded results. In this case, it is desirable that the game value management device have the ability to allow a player to freely transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game values to an external game value providing device, and also have the ability to prevent the recorded number of game values from being reduced except by direct operation by the player, and also have the ability to transmit a signal indicating the recorded number of game values only via a communications device.

The gaming value management device may not only have the function of electromagnetically managing a player's gaming value using an external gaming value providing device, but may also have the function of managing the number of gaming values bet by the player's physical actions and the number of gaming values paid out by the physical actions of the pachislot machine 2501. In other words, it may also be capable of managing the actual insertion and payout of medals in a conventional pachislot machine 2501. In this way, the pachislot machine 2501 can be controlled using conventional methods or using methods similar to those of the medal-less gaming machine described above, allowing for a common configuration regardless of the specifications of the pachislot machine 2501. In this case, the gaming value management device may directly control the selector 2531 and hopper device 2532 described above, or it may indirectly control these by controlling them using the main control circuit 2600 (main control board 2571) and transmitting the control results.

In addition to the above, the pachislot machine 2501 may be provided with various operating means necessary for the operation of a medal-less gaming machine, such as a lending operating means and a return (settlement) operating means that can be operated by the player. The gaming value providing device may be provided with various operating means necessary for the operation of a medal-less gaming machine, such as a lending operating means and a return operating means that can be operated by the player, in addition to various devices such as an insertion slot for valuables such as banknotes, an insertion slot for recording media (e.g., IC cards), and a contactless communication antenna for depositing electronic money from a mobile terminal (all not shown). Insertable recording media include not only non-member recording media issued by gaming establishments on the same day, but member recording media held by members of the gaming establishment. Gaming value recorded on non-member recording media is valid only for the day (it becomes invalid from the following day onwards), but gaming value recorded on member recording media is valid from the following day onwards.

An example of the flow of play in this case will be explained below. For example, first, the player deposits valuable value into the game value providing device using one of the methods. The game value providing device subtracts a predetermined amount of valuable value in response to the player's operation of one of the lending operation means, and provides the pachislot machine 2501 with game value corresponding to the subtracted valuable value. The player then plays, and if more game value is required, repeats the above operation. Thereafter, when the player has acquired a predetermined amount of game value as a result of the game and wishes to end the game, the player operates one of the return operation means. The game value management device transmits the number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's operation of one of the return operation means. The game value providing device ejects the recording medium on which the transmitted number of game values is recorded. When the game value number has been transmitted, the game value management device clears the number of game values stored in itself. The player can take the ejected recording medium to a prize exchange center or similar location to exchange it for a prize, or can move to another pachislot machine 2501 and continue playing by inserting the ejected recording medium into a game value providing device corresponding to that machine. Also, if the ejected recording medium is a member's recording medium, it will remain valid from the next day onwards, so the player can stop playing here.

In the above example, the game value management device transmits the total number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's return operation. However, the device may be configured to transmit only the number of game values desired by the player depending on the manner of the player's return operation. In other words, the game value held by the player may be divided. Furthermore, while the game value providing device records the transmitted number of game values on a recording medium and dispenses it, it may transmit information of the same value to the player's mobile terminal using the above-mentioned non-contact communication antenna, or may dispense, for example, cash or a cash equivalent, as long as it provides the player with something of equivalent value.

Furthermore, if the pachislot machine 2501 is not properly connected to the gaming value providing device (communication-only unit), and information corresponding to the number of gaming values is sent to the communication-only unit in response to the player's return operation, there is a risk that this information will be lost. Therefore, when the main control circuit 2600 (main control board 2571) is not properly connected to the communication-only unit, it may be configured to, for example, control the system to enter an error state when play begins, and in this error state, it may be made impossible to play (for example, a state in which betting operations, return operations, start operations, etc. cannot be accepted), thereby preventing play from progressing. This makes it possible to prevent information corresponding to the number of gaming values from being lost.

The pachislot machine 2501 or the gaming value providing device may also be provided with a lock operation means operable by the player, and may be controlled to a state (locked state) in which communication between the gaming value management device and the gaming value providing device is disabled in response to operation of this lock operation means. In this case, the pachislot machine 2501 or the gaming value providing device may be configured to perform authentication processes such as setting a PIN (and inputting the set PIN), issuing a one-time password (and inputting the issued one-time password), or biometric authentication, and the locked state may be released if the results of the authentication process are normal.

With the medal-less gaming machine described so far, compared to when gaming media are physically provided for play, there is no need to provide some external structures such as the medal insertion slot 2505 and medal payout outlet 2511, or some internal structures such as the selector 2531 and hopper device 2532. This not only reduces the cost and manufacturing costs of the gaming machine, but also reduces the power consumption of the gaming machine. Furthermore, since it is more difficult to access the inside of the gaming machine, fraudulent activity against the gaming machine can be prevented. Furthermore, because players do not come into direct contact with the gaming media, the gaming environment is improved and noise can be reduced. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various aspects of the environment surrounding the gaming machine.

(Example of medal-less gaming machine configuration)
Next, with reference to Figures 210 to 213, other examples (other configuration examples, modified examples, and extended examples) of the main control board of a pachislot machine will be described. Note that, with regard to the various specifications and functions described as other examples of the main control board in this embodiment, some or all of them can be applied to other gaming machines (other configuration examples) described in this embodiment, and further, with regard to the various specifications and functions described as other gaming machines (other configuration examples) in this embodiment, some or all of them can be applied to other examples of the main control board in this embodiment. In other words, an appropriate combination of these can be considered as the invention according to this embodiment.

[Pachislot machine equipped with main control board according to another example]
First, with reference to Figures 210 and 211, a pachislot machine (referred to as pachislot machine 3001 in this example) equipped with a main control board according to another example will be described. Figure 210 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of pachislot machine 3001 equipped with main control board 3011, and Figure 211 is a diagram showing an example configuration of game information display unit 3037, medal count display unit 3041, and medal lending display unit 3042 provided in pachislot machine 3001 equipped with main control board 3011. Note that in this example, pachislot machine 3001 equipped with main control board 3011 according to another example is configured as a medalless gaming machine, but this is merely an example, and of the inventions described in this example, those that do not require this configuration can naturally also be applied to gaming machines (pachislot machine 1, pachislot machine 2001, etc.) in which games are played using physical gaming value.

The pachislot machine 3001 is configured to be able to play games by having the various components shown in Figure 210. The pachislot machine 3001, together with the gaming media lending device 3002 and peripheral devices 3003 such as a data display, constitutes a gaming system capable of performing various gaming-related operations. Although not shown, the gaming media lending device 3002 and peripheral devices 3003 such as a data display are connected to the gaming parlor's management computer (hall computer) via a LAN line, for example, and are configured to be able to transmit data to the management computer. The gaming media lending device 3002 also has the same functions as the gaming value providing device (communication-only unit) described above.

The pachislot machine 3001 has a main control board 3011, a sub-control board 3012, a door relay board 3013, and a sub-relay board 3014. The main control board 3011 and the door relay board 3013, the door relay board 3013 and the sub-relay board 3014, and the sub-relay board 3014 and the sub-control board 3012 are electrically connected to each other. Furthermore, the main control board 3011 and the sub-control board 3012 are electrically connected so that one-way serial communication is possible from the main control board 3011 to the sub-control board 3012 via the door relay board 3013 and the sub-relay board 3014.

The main control board 3011 has a main control unit 3011a, which serves as a game control means (game control unit) that controls the progress of the game, and a medal count control unit 3011b, which serves as a game value control means (game value control unit) that controls the management of game value. The main control unit 3011a has the same functions as the main control board 2571 described above, and the medal count control unit 3011b has the same functions as the game value management device (medal count control board) described above.

Here, in Figure 210, the main control unit 3011a and the medal count control unit 3011b are mounted on the same main control board 3011, but they may also be mounted on separate boards (configured as separate boards) and electrically connected to perform the same functions.

The sub-control board 3012 is a performance control board that controls performance-related functions and is housed in a resin sub-control board case (not shown). The door relay board 3013 is attached to a specific position within cabinet G (for example, the back side of the lower door mechanism DD) and is an intermediate control board that relays signals between various devices and the main control board 3011, and between the main control board 3011 and the sub-control board 3012. The sub-relay board 3014 is attached to a specific position within cabinet G (for example, the back side of the lower door mechanism DD) and is an intermediate control board that relays signals between the various devices connected to the sub-relay board 3014 and the sub-control board 3012.

The pachislot machine 3001 also has a power supply unit 3015 that includes a power supply board 3015a and a power switch 3015b.

The pachislot machine 3001 also has a reel unit 3021, a reset switch 3022, a setting key switch 3023, and an adjustment switch 3024, which are electrically connected to the main control unit 3011a. These may also be connected to the main control unit 3011a via a door relay board 3013. Furthermore, as long as control is performed smoothly, they may also be connected to the medal count control unit 3011b.

The reel unit 3021 has the same functions as the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (and stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R) described above. The reset switch 3022 has the same functions as the reset switch 53 described above. The setting key switch 3023 has the same functions as the setting key switch 52 described above. The settlement switch 3024 has the same functions as the settlement switch 9S described above.

However, since the pachislot machine 3001 in this example is configured as a medalless gaming machine, when the settlement switch 3024 detects that the corresponding settlement button (not shown) has been pressed, the number of credited medals is sent to the gaming medium lending device 3002 (described below) via the gaming ball etc. connection terminal board 3043 (described below) (credit settlement is performed).

The pachislot machine 3001 also has a start switch 3031, a return switch 3032, a 1BET switch 3033, a MAXBET switch 3034, a stop switch board 3035, a door open/close switch 3036, and a game information display unit 3037, all of which are electrically connected to the main control unit 3011a via the door relay board 3013. However, these may also be connected directly to the main control unit 3011a without going through the door relay board 3013. Furthermore, as long as control is performed smoothly, they may also be connected to the medal count control unit 3011b.

The start switch 3031 has the same function as the start switch 7S described above. The 1 bet switch 3033 has the same function as the bet switch 6S when the 1 bet button 6b described above is pressed. The max bet switch 3034 has the same function as the bet switch 6S when the max bet button 6a described above is pressed. The stop switch board 3035 has the same function as the stop switch 8S described above. The door opening/closing switch 3036 has the same function as the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 described above.

Here, the return switch 3032 and its corresponding return button (not shown) are configured as a return operation detection unit (means) that can detect the player's return operation, and when the return switch 3032 detects that the corresponding return button has been pressed, the number of medals bet is returned as credits (bet settlement is carried out). The game information display unit 3037 will be explained later with reference to Figure 211.

The pachislot machine 3001 also has a medal count display unit 3041, a medal lending display unit 3042 including a medal lending operation board 3042a, a lending switch 3042b, and a return switch 3042c, a gaming ball etc. connection terminal board 3043, and a medal count clear switch 3044, all of which are electrically connected to the medal count control unit 3011b. These may also be connected to the medal count control unit 3011b via a door relay board 3013. Alternatively, they may be connected to the main control unit 3011a as long as control is performed smoothly. The medal count display unit 3041 and medal lending display unit 3042 will be explained later with reference to Figure 211.

The gaming ball etc. connection terminal board 3043 has the same functions as the external centralized terminal board 55 described above, and also has the same functions as the communication device (connection terminal board) described above. The gaming ball etc. connection terminal board 3043 is equipped with a connection mechanism (not shown) for connecting the gaming medium lending device 3002 to the medal count control unit 3011b, and for connecting the data display and other peripheral devices 3003 to the medal lending operation board 3042a, and the connection mechanism 3045a is provided with a connector (e.g., a 25-pin connector) consisting of multiple connection pins that is connected to the gaming medium lending device 3002 via a harness.

The medal count clear switch 3044 is a switch that can detect an initialization operation (e.g., a press operation) when an administrator at the gaming parlor clears (initializes) the number of medals credited to the pachislot machine 3001. When the medal count clear switch 3044 is pressed, it outputs a detection signal (medal count clear signal) to the medal count control unit 3011b. In this case, based on the medal count clear signal, the medal count control unit 3011b controls the medal count display unit 3041 so that the display on the five-digit seven-segment LED for credit display (see Figure 211 (B)) provided in the medal count display unit 3041 (described below) becomes "00000" (number of credits = 0).

The pachislot machine 3001 also has a display device 3051, which is electrically connected to the sub-control board 3012. Note that the display device 3051 may also be connected to the sub-control board 3012 via the sub-relay board 3014. Here, the display device 3051 has the same functions as the main display device 210 and sub-display device 220 described above.

The pachislot machine 3001 also has a speaker group 3052, an LED drive board 3053, a performance switch 3054, and an operation switch 3055, which are electrically connected to the sub-control board 3012 via the sub-relay board 3014. However, these may also be connected directly to the sub-control board 3012 without going through the sub-relay board 3014.

The speaker group 3052 has the same functions as the speaker groups 35a, 35b, etc. described above. The LED drive board 3053 is a board on which the drive circuits for each LED board 3056 are mounted, and each LED board 3056 has the same functions as the lamp/LED group 23, etc. described above. The effect switch 3054 and the operation switch 3055 have the same functions as the effect button groups 10a, 10b, etc. described above.

Next, with reference to Figure 211 (A), an example configuration of the game information display unit 3037 will be described. The game information display unit 3037 is configured to be able to display various types of game information, and its display operation is controlled by a main control microprocessor 3070 (main control circuit) described below within the main control unit 3011a. The game information display unit 3037 can be installed in any position that is easily visible to the player. For example, it may be installed on the base of the front door of the pachislot machine 1 (in Figure 1, at the position where the medal slot 5 and performance button 10a are located, or in the vicinity thereof).

As shown in Figure 211 (A), the gaming information display unit 3037 is provided with a payout display section for displaying information on the number of gaming media paid out (number of gaming values awarded). The payout display section is composed of a two-digit 7-segment LED ("Payout Display" in Figure 211 (A)) for digitally displaying (notifying) this information to the player.

The game information display unit 3037 also has LEDs (hereinafter referred to as "line LEDs") for displaying the number of bets, labeled "START," "REPLAY," "1 BET," "2 BET," and "3 BET" in Figure 211(A)A, as lamps that indicate game operation information.

For example, when the number of gaming media bets (inserted numbers) is 0 (all line LEDs are off), pressing the 1 bet button 6b lights up the "1 BET" line LED, and when the 1 bet button 6b is pressed again, the "1 BET" and "2 BET" line LEDs light up, and when the 1 bet button 6b is pressed again, all of the "1 BET" to "3 BET" line LEDs light up, and the "START" line LED lights up. At this time, each time the 1 bet button 6b is pressed, the value of the accumulated number of gaming media (number of credits) displayed by the 5-digit 7-segment LED in the medal count display unit 3041 (described below) is decremented by 1.

Furthermore, for example, when the number of gaming media bets (inserted numbers) is 0 (all line LEDs are off), pressing the MAX BET button 6a will light up all of the line LEDs for "1 BET" to "3 BET," as well as the "START" line LED. At this time, with one bet operation, the value of the number of gaming media stored (number of credits) displayed on the 5-digit 7-segment LED in the medal count display unit 441 (described below) will be reduced by 3.

Furthermore, for example, if a replay role is won in the previous game, the "START" and "REPLAY" line LEDs will light up. At this time, the value of the number of gaming media stored (number of credits) displayed on the 5-digit 7-segment LED described below in the medal count display unit 3041 described below will not be subtracted.

The game information display unit 3037 is also provided with an instruction display unit for displaying information about the stop operation to be notified to the player in situations where such information is to be notified to the player (for example, in AT mode). The instruction display unit is composed of a three-digit seven-segment LED ("Instruction Display" in Figure 211 (A)) for digitally displaying (notifying) the information to the player. Note that, like the instruction monitor (notification lamp) described above, the instruction display unit may display information that uniquely corresponds to the information about the stop operation to be notified (for example, displaying "1" when notifying the push order of "left → center → right"), or it may directly display the information about the stop operation to be notified (for example, displaying "123" when notifying the push order of "left → center → right").

Next, with reference to Figure 211 (B), an example configuration of the medal count display unit 3041 will be described. The medal count display unit 3041 is configured to be able to display information such as the number of game media stored (retained game value) inside the pachislot machine 3001, and its display operation is controlled by a medal count control microprocessor 3080 (game value control circuit) described below within the medal count control unit 3011b. The medal count display unit 3041 can be installed in any position that is easily visible to the player. For example, it may be installed on the base of the front door of the pachislot machine 1 (in Figure 1, the position where the medal insertion slot 5 and performance button 10a are located, or nearby). The medal count display unit 3041 also has the same functions as the above-mentioned retained game value number display device.

As shown in Figure 211 (B), the medal count display unit 3041 is provided with a credit display unit for displaying information on the number of gaming media stored (number of gaming values held). The credit display unit is composed of a five-digit seven-segment LED ("credit display" in Figure 211 (B)) for digitally displaying (notifying) this information to the player. Note that, for example, if a similar credit display is performed in the gaming media lending device 3002, the pachislot machine 3001 may not be provided with a credit display unit, or, as with conventional pachislot machines 1, a credit display may be performed with a predetermined number (for example, 50) as the upper limit.

The medal count display unit 3041 is also provided with an error display unit for displaying information about errors related to the control of the medal count (number of credits) managed by the medal count control unit 3011b. The error display unit is composed of a single-digit 7-segment LED ("Error Display" in Figure 211 (B)) for digitally displaying (notifying) this information to the player. If an error occurs related to the control of the medal count (number of credits) managed by the medal count control unit 3011b, an error code (letters, numbers, etc.) corresponding to the type of error is displayed by this single-digit 7-segment LED for error display. Because the error display unit is an error display means dedicated to the management and control of the medal count (game value), there is no confusion between errors related to the management and control of the medal count and other errors, making it easier to recognize that an error related to the management and control of the medal count has occurred.

Here, examples of errors related to the control of the number of medals (number of credits) managed by the medal count control unit 3011b include upper limit exceeding errors. An upper limit exceeding error occurs when an upper limit (for example, "16369") is set on a credit counter provided in the medal count control unit 3011b for counting the number of stored gaming media, and it is determined that adding the number of payouts to the credit counter would exceed that upper limit. Note that if an upper limit exceeding error occurs, it can be resolved (cancelled) by performing a credit settlement.

Next, referring to Figure 211 (C), an example configuration of the medal lending display unit 3042 will be described. The medal lending display unit 3042 is configured to display information such as the number of gaming media (game value) remaining on a gaming card (not shown) inserted into the gaming media lending device 3002 (referred to as "degrees"), and its display operation is controlled by a medal count control microprocessor 3080 (game value control circuit) described below within the medal count control unit 411b. The medal lending display unit 3042 can be installed in any position that is easily visible to the player. For example, it may be installed on the base of the front door of the pachislot machine 1 (in Figure 1, the position where the medal insertion slot 5 and the performance button 10a are located, or nearby). The degree may also include the number of gaming media (game value) that can be loaned out depending on the amount of money inserted into the gaming media lending device 3002.

As shown in Figure 211 (C), the medal lending display unit 3042 is provided with a number display unit for displaying information on the remaining number of points. The number display unit is composed of a three-digit seven-segment LED ("Number Display" in Figure 211 (C)) for digitally displaying (notifying) this information to the player.

The medal lending display unit 3042 is also provided with a lending lamp, marked "Lending" in Figure 211 (C), which indicates whether the gaming medium can be loaned or not. The lending lamp is lit when the gaming medium can be loaned (before the loaning operation) and is extinguished when the gaming medium cannot be loaned (during loan, settlement, return, or when an error has occurred). The lending lamp is also configured to function as a loan button that can be pressed, and pressing this button (i.e., the loaning operation) is detected by the lending switch 3042b.

If the lending lamp is lit when a lending operation is detected (i.e., if a lending operation is possible), a predetermined number of gaming media are added to the number of credits managed by the pachislot machine 3001 from the number of points managed by the gaming media lending device 3002. In addition, the number of points remaining after subtracting the number of points corresponding to the predetermined number of gaming media is displayed on the point display unit. In this example, the lending lamp is configured to also function as a lending button, but the lending button may be provided separately from the lending lamp, and the lending lamp may be configured to only perform display functions.

The medal lending display unit 3042 is also provided with a return lamp marked "Return" in Figure 211 (C), which indicates whether the gaming medium can be returned or not. The return lamp is lit when the gaming medium can be returned (before the return operation), and is extinguished when the gaming medium cannot be returned (during lending, settlement, return, or when an error has occurred). The return lamp is also configured to function as a return button that can be pressed, and this pressing (i.e., return operation) is detected by the return switch 3042c.

If the return lamp is lit when a return operation is detected (i.e., if the return operation is possible), the number of credits or bets managed by the pachislot machine 3001 is added to the frequency managed by the gaming media lending device 3002, and then a gaming card with that frequency stored (this also includes a configuration in which the frequency itself is not stored on the gaming card, but information associated with it is stored) is ejected from the gaming media lending device 3002. Note that in this example, the return lamp is configured to also function as a return button, but the return button may be provided separately from the return lamp, with the return lamp only performing a display function.

In this example, dynamic lighting control is used as the control method for the various 7-segment LEDs provided in the game information display unit 3037, medal count display unit 3041, and medal lending display unit 3042, but a different control method (for example, static lighting control) may also be used.

[Configuration example of main control unit and medal count control unit of main control board according to another example]
Next, a configuration example of the main control unit and medal count control unit of the main control board according to another example will be described with reference to Fig. 212. Fig. 212 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the main control microprocessor 3070 and medal count control microprocessor 3080 of the main control board 3011.

As described above, the main control board 3011 is equipped with the main control unit 3011a and medal count control unit 3011b, as well as the medal count clear switch 3044. Details of the main control unit 3011a and medal count control unit 3011b will be described later. The main control board 3011 is installed inside the pachislot machine 3001, for example, in the same manner as the above-mentioned main control board 71, housed in a transparent (or nearly transparent) resin board case (in this example, the main control board case 3060).

Although not shown in the figures, the main control board case 3060 has various sealing structures to prevent it from being easily opened, or to ensure that if it is opened, traces of it are easily discernible, in order to prevent tampering. In other words, the main control board case 3060 is basically configured to make it difficult to access the main control board 3011 while still ensuring visibility of the main control board 3011.

In this example, since the medal count clear switch 3044 is mounted on the main control board 3011, it is necessary to ensure such safety while still allowing access to the medal count clear switch 3044 (operation of the medal count clear switch 3044) (i.e., without the main control board case 3060 being opened).

In this example, a small hole 3061a is formed in the main control board case 3060 at a position corresponding to the location of the medal count clear switch 3044, allowing the medal count clear switch 3044 to be pressed from outside the main control board case 3060.

In order to prevent the medal count clear switch 3044 from being easily operated by a human finger or the like, the size of the small hole 3061a may be, for example, approximately 2 mm in diameter or less. A gaming parlor staff member may then press this switch, for example, using a dedicated tool. As described above, the medal count clear switch 3044 is a switch used by the gaming parlor's administrator to clear (initialize) the number of medals credited to the pachislot machine 3001. Therefore, it is not used under normal circumstances. It is designed for use when an unexpected state occurs in the medal count control (control related to payouts, etc.) related to the management of the number of gaming media stored (number of credits). Therefore, this configuration is unlikely to cause problems, and it also prevents the medal count clear switch 3044 from being pressed accidentally.

Next, we will explain an example configuration of the main control unit 3011a. The main control unit 3011a has a main control microprocessor 3070 (game control circuit), a clock pulse generating circuit 3071 (not shown), and a power management circuit 3072 (not shown). Details of the main control microprocessor 3070 will be described later.

The clock pulse generating circuit 3071 generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU and outputs the generated clock pulse signal to the clock circuit 3105 (EX) within the main control microprocessor 3070. The main control microprocessor 3070 executes the control program based on the input clock pulse signal.

The power management circuit 3072 manages fluctuations in the 12V DC power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 3015a (see Figure 210) and supplies 5V DC (VCC) power to the main control microprocessor 3070. For example, when the power is turned on (when the power supply voltage rises from 0V to the startup voltage value (10V)), the power management circuit 3072 outputs a reset signal to the reset controller 3106 (XSRST) described below in the main control microprocessor 3070, and when a power interruption occurs (when the power supply voltage falls from 12V to below the power interruption voltage value (10.5V)), it outputs a power interruption detection signal to the parallel input port 3111 (XINT) described below in the main control microprocessor 3070. In other words, the power management circuit 3072 also functions as a means (start-up means) for outputting a reset signal (start-up signal) to the main control microprocessor 3070 when power is turned on, and as a means (power outage means) for outputting a power outage detection signal (power outage signal) to the main control microprocessor 3070 when a power outage occurs.

Next, an example configuration of the medal count control unit 3011b will be described. The medal count control unit 3011b has a medal count control microprocessor 3080 (game value control circuit), a clock pulse generation circuit 3081 (not shown), a power supply management circuit 3082 (not shown), and a role ratio monitor 3083 (not shown). Details of the medal count control microprocessor 3080 will be provided later.

Furthermore, as is clear from a comparison between the main control unit 3011a and the medal count control unit 3011b, the medal count control unit 3011b is configured by adding a role ratio monitor 3083 to the main control unit 3011a, and the configurations and functions of the clock pulse generation circuit 3081 and power supply management circuit 3082 provided in the medal count control unit 3011b are similar to the configurations and functions of the clock pulse generation circuit 3071 and power supply management circuit 3072 provided in the main control unit 3011a, respectively. Therefore, a description of the configurations and functions of the clock pulse generation circuit 3081 and power supply management circuit 3082 will be omitted here.

In this example, the main control microprocessor 3070 and the medal count control microprocessor 3080 are gaming machine-specific microprocessors designed and manufactured by the same semiconductor manufacturer, and as described above, the clock pulse generating circuits (3071, 3081) and power management circuits (3072, 3082) have similar configurations and functions. Therefore, when the main control microprocessor 3070 and the medal count control microprocessor 3080 are mounted on the same control board (main control board 3011), as in this example, a single clock pulse generating circuit and power management circuit may be shared by the two microprocessors, rather than providing separate corresponding clock pulse generating circuits and power management circuits.

In other words, clock pulse generating circuit 3071 and clock pulse generating circuit 3081 can be configured as one and the same clock pulse generating circuit. Furthermore, power supply management circuit 3072 and power supply management circuit 3082 can be configured as one and the same power supply management circuit. Note that they can also be configured so that they share a clock pulse generating circuit but have individual power supply management circuits, or so that they share a power supply management circuit but have individual clock pulse generating circuits.

The role ratio monitor 3083 is composed of a four-digit, seven-segment LED and has the same functions as the above-mentioned role ratio monitor device 54. In this example, the role ratio monitor 3083 is similar to the above-mentioned role ratio monitor device 54 in that it is provided inside the main control board case 3060, but differs from the above-mentioned role ratio monitor device 54 in that it is implemented on the main control board 3011 as part of the medal count control unit 3011b, and its display content (various ratio information) is controlled by the medal count control microprocessor 3080. However, it may also be implemented on the main control board 3011 as part of the main control unit 3011a, and its display content (various ratio information) may be controlled by the main control microprocessor 3070.

The display content (various ratio information) is controlled by the medal count control microprocessor 3080, which is installed inside the main control board case 3060, but it may also be configured to be mounted on another board (for example, a ratio display board) connected to the medal count control unit 3011b, or such a display unit may be provided separately and connected to the medal count control unit 3011b. Either configuration can be adopted as long as visibility of the role ratio monitor 3083 can be ensured when the main control board 3011 is housed in the main control board case 3060 and installed inside the pachislot machine 3001.

Next, referring to Figure 212, an example configuration of the main control microprocessor 3070 and the medal count control microprocessor 3080 will be described. Both the main control microprocessor 3070 and the medal count control microprocessor 3080 are microprocessors with security functions for gaming machines, and in this example, the configuration of the main control microprocessor 3070 and the configuration of the medal count control microprocessor 3080 are the same (although they may, of course, have different configurations).

Therefore, the main control microprocessor 3070 and the medal count control microprocessor 3080 will be referred to simply as "microprocessor MP" in this explanation. Note that for components with different functions between the main control microprocessor 3070 and the medal count control microprocessor 3080, the differences will be explained as appropriate.

The microprocessor MP has a CPU 3101, ROM 3102, RAM 3103, external bus interface 3104 (signal bus 3116 (local bus)), clock circuit 3105, reset controller 3106, arithmetic circuit 3107, matching block 3108, unique information 3109, random number circuit 3110 (random number generator), parallel input port 3111, interrupt controller 3112, timer circuit 3113, serial communication circuit 3114, and parallel output port 3115. All components of the microprocessor MP except for signal bus 3116 are connected to each other via signal bus 3116. Terminals D0 to D7 of IC1 and terminals D0 to D7 of IC2, described below, are terminals for the external bus interface 3104 (see Figure 213, described below).

The CPU 3101 executes various control programs and performs various controls based on the clock pulses generated by the clock circuit 3105. In the main control microprocessor 3070, the CPU 3101 (hereinafter also referred to as the "main CPU") executes various control programs and performs control over all gaming operations. On the other hand, in the medal count control microprocessor 3080, the CPU 3101 (hereinafter also referred to as the "medal count control CPU") executes various control programs and mainly performs control over the counting of gaming media (gaming value) at the time of payout and settlement.

ROM 3102 stores various control programs executed by CPU 3101, various data tables, etc. The storage capacity of ROM 3102 is 12 kilobytes. In the main control microprocessor 3070, ROM 3102 (hereinafter also referred to as "main ROM") stores various control programs executed by main CPU 3101, various data tables, data for sending various control instructions (commands) to sub-control board 3012, etc. On the other hand, in the medal count control microprocessor 3080, ROM 3102 (hereinafter also referred to as "medal count control ROM") stores various control programs executed by medal count control CPU 3101, and various data required for input/output operations of signals and data between main control unit 3011a and gaming ball etc. connection terminal board 3043 (gaming medium lending device 3002, data display etc. peripheral devices 3003).

RAM 3103 is provided with various storage areas for storing various data (parameters, flags, etc.) used when CPU 3101 executes various control programs. The storage capacity of RAM 3103 is 1 kilobyte. In the main control microprocessor 3070, RAM 3103 (hereinafter also referred to as "main RAM") is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal lottery winning combinations determined by executing the control programs. On the other hand, in the medal count control microprocessor 3080, RAM 3103 (hereinafter also referred to as "medal count control RAM") is provided with a storage area for storing various counters (e.g., medal counter, insertion counter, etc.) and various flags used when executing payout control, etc.

The external bus interface 3104 is an interface circuit for electrically connecting the microprocessor MP to an external signal bus to which various components located outside the microprocessor MP are connected. An example of the connection configuration for the main control microprocessor 3070 and the medal count control microprocessor 3080 will be described later with reference to Figure 213.

Clock circuit 3105 is configured to include, for example, a frequency divider (not shown), and converts the clock pulse signals input from clock pulse generating circuits 3071 and 3081 into clock pulse signals of multiple frequencies used for CPU operation and other components (e.g., timer circuit 3113). The clock pulse signals of multiple frequencies generated by clock circuit 3105 are output to all circuits within microprocessor MP (CPU 3101 to external bus interface 3104, and reset controller 3106 to parallel output port 3115) except for clock circuit 3105, at frequencies corresponding to the operation of each circuit.

The reset controller 3106 resets the IAT (Illegal Address Trap) and WDT (Watchdog Timer) based on the reset signals input from the power management circuits 3072 and 3082. The arithmetic circuit 3107 includes a multiplication circuit and a division circuit. When an inspection device is connected, the verification block 3108 verifies the signal level to determine whether the connected inspection device is legitimate.

Unique information 3109 stores the unique information (identification information) of the microprocessor MP. The chip individual number of the microprocessor MP consists of 4 bytes of data and is set when the chip is manufactured. In addition, a different number is set for each chip as the chip individual number of the microprocessor MP.

In the main control microprocessor 3070, the main control microprocessor 3070's unique information (identification information) is stored in unique information 3109. The ROM code of ROM 3102 and the main control microprocessor 3070's individual chip number are also stored in unique information 3109. The ROM code of ROM 3102 is composed of 4 bytes x 4 pieces of data, i.e., 16 bytes of data. Each 4-byte piece of data that makes up the ROM code of ROM 3102 is generated from data stored in the area of addresses "0000h" to "2FBFh" in the built-in ROM (ROM 3102), and the method of generating the 4-byte data also differs for each 4-byte piece of data.

Meanwhile, in the medal count control microprocessor 3080, the medal count control microprocessor 3080's unique information (identification information) is stored in unique information 3109. The ROM code of medal count control ROM 3102 and the medal count control microprocessor 3080's individual chip number are also stored in unique information 3109. The ROM code of medal count control ROM 3102 is composed of 4 bytes x 4 pieces of data, i.e., 16 bytes of data. Each of the 4 bytes of data that make up the ROM code of medal count control ROM 3102 is generated from data stored in the area of addresses "0000h" to "0FBFh" in the built-in ROM (medal count control ROM 3102), and the method of generating the 4 bytes of data also differs for each 4 bytes of data.

Random number circuit 3110 generates random numbers within a predetermined range (e.g., 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). Random number circuit 3110 is composed of multiple random number registers, and can be configured, for example, with random number register 0 for obtaining 2-byte hard-latch random numbers, random number registers 1 to 3 for obtaining 2-byte soft-latch random numbers, and random number registers 4 to 7 for obtaining 1-byte soft-latch random numbers. In main control microprocessor 3070, main CPU 3101 extracts one value from the predetermined range of random numbers generated by random number circuit 3110, for example, as a random number value for an internal lottery.

The parallel input port 3111 is an input port (memory-mapped I/O) for signals input to the microprocessor MP from various circuits (e.g., power management circuits 3072, 3082, etc.) external to the microprocessor MP. The parallel input port 3111 is also connected to the random number circuit 3110 and the interrupt controller 3112. In the main control microprocessor 3070, the start switch 3031 is connected to the parallel input port 3111, and when the start switch 3031 is turned on (on edge), a latch signal is output from the parallel input port 3111 to a specified random number register (e.g., random number register 0) of the random number circuit 3110. Then, in the random number circuit 3110, the specified random number register is latched by the input of the latch signal, and a 2-byte hard-latch random number is obtained.

The interrupt controller 3112 controls the timing of interrupt processing by the CPU 3101 based on a reset signal or power interruption detection signal input from the power management circuits 3072 and 3082 via the parallel input port 3111, or a timeout signal input at a predetermined interval from the timer circuit 3113. Furthermore, when a reset signal or power interruption detection signal is input from the power management circuits 3072 and 3082, or when a timeout signal is input from the timer circuit 3113, the interrupt controller 3112 outputs an interrupt request signal indicating an interrupt processing start command to the CPU 3101. The CPU 3101 then performs various interrupt processing based on the interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 3112.

Specifically, in the main control microprocessor 3070, the interrupt controller 3112 controls the execution timing of interrupt processing by the main CPU 3101 (for example, the periodic interrupt processing shown in FIG. 32 in the case of a timeout signal) based on a reset signal, a power interruption detection signal, or a timeout signal input from the power management circuit 3072 via the parallel input port 3111, or a 1.1172 msec cycle from the timer circuit 3113. The main CPU 3101 then performs various processes within the periodic interrupt processing (for example, see FIG. 32) based on an interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 3112 in response to the timeout signal from the timer circuit 3113. Note that the interrupt processing by the main CPU 3101 executed based on a reset signal corresponds to the main processing shown in FIG. 23. In other words, the interrupt request signal issued by the interrupt controller 3112 is the starting point for all processing executed by the main CPU 3101.

Meanwhile, in the medal count control microprocessor 3080, the interrupt controller 3112 controls the timing of interrupt processing by the medal count control CPU 3101 based on a reset signal, a power interruption detection signal, or a timeout signal input at 1 msec intervals from the timer circuit 3113 via the parallel input port 3111. Then, similar to the above, the medal count control CPU 3101 performs various processes, such as port input processing, game information reception processing, data transmission processing to the main control unit 3011a, data transmission processing to peripheral devices, data reception processing from peripheral devices, and port output processing, based on an interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 3112 in response to the reset signal, power interruption detection signal, or timeout signal. In other words, the interrupt request signal issued by the interrupt controller 3112 serves as the starting point for all processing performed by the medal count control CPU 3101.

The timer circuit 3113 (PTC) operates (counts the elapsed time) using the clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 3105 (a clock pulse signal with a frequency obtained by dividing the clock pulse signal for operating the CPU by a frequency divider (not shown)). The timer circuit 3113 then outputs a timeout signal (trigger signal) to the interrupt controller 3112 at predetermined intervals (1.1172 msec for the main control microprocessor 3070, and 1 msec for the medal count control microprocessor 3080).

The serial communication circuit 3114 is a communication circuit that controls the serial communication of various data between the control board on which it is implemented and various boards provided external to the control board. In the main control microprocessor 3070, the serial communication circuit 3114 serially communicates data (various control commands, various data, etc.) between the main control unit 3011a and various boards (e.g., sub-control board 3012, etc.) provided external to the main control board 3011. The serial communication circuit 3114 is made up of four communication circuits SCU0, SCU1, and STU2-STU4, with communication circuits SCU0 and SCU1 being made up of bidirectional serial communication circuits and communication circuits STU2-STU4 being made up of serial communication circuits dedicated to transmission. For example, when connecting the main control board 3011 (main control unit 3011a) and sub-control board 3012 via serial communication, the communication circuit STU2, which is a serial communication circuit dedicated to transmission, is used, and when connecting the main control unit 3011a and medal count control unit 3011b via serial communication, the communication circuit SCU0, which is a bidirectional serial communication circuit, is used. Note that this is the method of using serial communication circuits established from the perspective of anti-cheating measures (preventing fraudulent activity).

The parallel output port 3115 is an output port (memory-mapped I/O) for signals output from the microprocessor MP to various external circuits. In this example, data is output using a FIFO (First In First Out) method, for example.

[Example of circuit configuration of main control board according to another example]
Next, an example of the circuit configuration of a main control board according to another example will be described with reference to Fig. 213. Fig. 213 is a schematic diagram of an example of the circuit configuration of a main control board 3011.

Control boards used in gaming machines are generally configured as printed circuit boards (PCBs), and in this example, the main control board 3011 is also configured as a printed circuit board. In the case of a double-sided printed circuit board, for example, a copper-clad laminate with copper foil attached to both sides of the main board (insulating board) constructed as an insulator is processed using glass fiber or resin, and then cut to the required size. Then, through-holes, VIA holes, etc. are formed to allow electrical continuity. The copper foil in the areas to be left as the required wiring pattern (circuit pattern) is masked, and the copper foil in areas other than the masked areas is removed to form the wiring pattern. All areas of the formed wiring pattern that need not be exposed (such as areas to be soldered later) are covered with an insulating solder resist made of ink or film material (protected by laminating an insulating layer). The required electronic components are then mounted on the board manufactured in this way to form a control board that performs specific functions.

The electronic components mounted on such control boards include surface-mounted devices (SMD), which are mounted by soldering their terminals to the front (one side) of the control board, and dip-in-place (DIP) components (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "dip components"), which have their terminals inserted into through holes from the front (one side) of the control board and soldered to the back (other side) (or both the front and back sides).

Surface-mounted components are smaller than equivalent dip-mounted components, and do not require through-holes for mounting, which has the advantage of saving space on the mounting surface. Furthermore, because they have become more widely used than dip-mounted components in recent years, they also have the advantage of being easier to obtain and less expensive than equivalent dip-mounted components. On the other hand, because they are small, they are difficult to inspect using measuring instruments such as digital oscilloscopes, and they also have the disadvantage of being less strong after mounting than equivalent dip-mounted components.

On the other hand, dip-mounted components have the disadvantages of being more difficult to secure mounting space for than equivalent surface-mounted components, and being more expensive and difficult to obtain. However, they also have the advantages of being easier to handle than equivalent surface-mounted components, facilitating the above-mentioned inspections, and being stronger after mounting.

In this example, certain conditions are set taking into consideration these advantages and disadvantages, and if these conditions are met, surface-mounted components are used for the target electronic components and mounted on the main control board 3011; if these conditions are not met, dip-mounted components are used for the target electronic components and mounted on the main control board 3011. Here, we will focus on this point and explain an example of the circuit configuration of the main control board 3011.

(Outline of an example circuit configuration of the main control board 3011)
An outline of an example circuit configuration of the main control board 3011 will be described with reference to Fig. 213. Note that Fig. 213 shows an outline of an example of a specific location (the connection path between the main control microprocessor 3070 and the medal count control microprocessor 3080) on the main control board 3011, and does not show the entire circuit configuration on the main control board 3011. In other words, if certain conditions are met, it is possible to employ surface mount components in locations other than those shown in Fig. 213 and provide test patterns in the connection paths between these surface mount components.

In Figure 213, IC1 represents the main control microprocessor 3070 (see Figure 212), and IC2 represents the medal count control microprocessor 3080 (see Figure 40). Furthermore, IC3 to IC6 are, for example, 20-pin ICs configured as buffer ICs, and are surface-mounted components.

As shown in FIG. 213, IC1 and IC3 are connected by an external signal bus between the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC1 and the Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output) of IC3. That is, IC3 is electrically connected to the external bus interface 3104 of the main control microprocessor 3070. Also, IC1 and IC4 are connected by an external signal bus between the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC1 and the Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output) of IC4. That is, IC4 is electrically connected to the external bus interface 3104 of the main control microprocessor 3070. This makes it possible to output data from IC3 or IC4 to the main control microprocessor 3070.

The Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal outputs) of IC3 and IC4 may be configured as, for example, D0 to D7 terminals (data bus), allowing data to be input and output between the main control microprocessor 3070 and IC3 or IC4. Alternatively, the main control microprocessor 3070 may be configured to output data to IC3 or IC4.

Here, a "data bus" is a signal bus that handles data (for data transfer). In other words, a "data bus" refers to a signal bus that handles "data" signals. Although not used in this embodiment, there is also a signal bus called an "address bus" that handles addresses (for address specification). In other words, an "address bus" refers to a signal bus that handles "address" signals. In contrast, a "local bus," as the word "local" suggests, refers to a signal bus with a relatively slow transfer speed. Therefore, for example, a signal bus labeled "data bus" may be equivalent to a "local bus," and a signal bus labeled "local bus" may be equivalent to a "data bus," but there is no contradiction between these terms.

Furthermore, IC1 and IC3 are connected by a signal line between the XCS0 terminal (chip select) of IC1 and the G1 and G2 terminals (gate input) of IC3. Furthermore, IC1 and IC4 are connected by a signal line between the XCS1 terminal (chip select) of IC1 and the G1 and G2 terminals (gate input) of IC4. This makes it possible to switch on the IC1 side whether data is output from IC3 or IC4. The XCS0 and XCS1 terminals are output terminals from the parallel output port 3115 (see Figure 212).

Also, as shown in FIG. 213, IC2 and IC5 are connected by an external signal bus between the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC2 and the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC5. That is, IC5 is electrically connected to the external bus interface 3104 of the medal count control microprocessor 3080. Also, IC2 and IC6 are connected by an external signal bus between the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC2 and the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC6. That is, IC6 is electrically connected to the external bus interface 3104 of the medal count control microprocessor 3080. This enables data input and output between the medal count control microprocessor 3080 and IC5 or IC6 (or data output from the medal count control microprocessor 3080 to IC5 or IC6).

In addition, the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC5 and IC6 may be configured as, for example, Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output), allowing data to be output from IC5 or IC6 to the medal count control microprocessor 3080.

Furthermore, the D0 to D7 terminals (data bus) of IC2 are connected to the input terminal (which may be an input/output terminal, not shown) of the role ratio monitor 3083 via an external signal bus. In other words, the role ratio monitor 3083 is electrically connected to the external bus interface 3104 of the medal count control microprocessor 3080.

Furthermore, IC2 and IC5 are connected by a signal line between the XCS2 terminal (chip select) of IC2 and the CP terminal (clock input) of IC5. Furthermore, IC2 and IC6 are connected by a signal line between the XCS3 terminal (chip select) of IC2 and the CP terminal (clock input) of IC6. This makes it possible to switch on the IC2 side whether to output data to IC5 or IC6. The XCS2 and XCS3 terminals are output terminals from the parallel output port 3115 (see Figure 212).

Furthermore, IC3 and IC5 are connected by signal lines between the A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC3 and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC5. This allows data to be output from IC5 to IC3. In other words, data output from IC2 is output to IC1 via IC5 (input → output) and IC3 (input → output). In other words, IC1 and IC2 are electrically connected in such a way that IC3 and IC5 are mounted on the connection path.

Furthermore, IC4 and IC6 are connected by signal lines between the A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC4 and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC6. This allows data to be output from IC6 to IC4. In other words, data output from IC2 is output to IC1 via IC6 (input → output) and IC4 (input → output). In other words, IC1 and IC2 are electrically connected in such a way that IC4 and IC6 are mounted on the connection path.

Note that these are merely examples, and the connection between IC1 and IC2 is not limited to the above. For example, the positions of IC3 and IC5 may be swapped, and in a connection path between IC1 and IC2 where IC3 and IC5 are implemented, data output from IC1 may be configured to be output to IC2 via IC5 (input → output) and IC3 (input → output). Also, for example, the positions of IC4 and IC6 may be swapped, and in a connection path between IC1 and IC2 where IC4 and IC6 are implemented, data output from IC1 may be configured to be output to IC2 via IC6 (input → output) and IC4 (input → output).

Also, for example, the Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output) and A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC3, and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC5 may all be configured as input/output terminals (e.g., data buses), and the connection path between IC1 and IC2 where IC3 and IC5 are implemented may be configured to allow mutual input/output of data.Also, for example, the Y1 to Y8 terminals (signal output) and A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC4, and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC6 may all be configured as input/output terminals (e.g., data buses), and the connection path between IC1 and IC2 where IC4 and IC6 are implemented may be configured to allow mutual input/output of data.

Note that although reference numerals are omitted in Figure 213, the connection path between the A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC3 and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC5 has eight test points (TP1 to TP8, described below) connected to the respective signal lines. Furthermore, the connection path between the A1 to A8 terminals (signal input) of IC4 and the Q0 to Q7 terminals (signal output) of IC6 has eight test points (TP9 to TP16, described below) connected to the respective signal lines.

The following is a description of the configuration and effects of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

<Appendix A-1>

Conventionally, a gaming machine known as a pachislot machine includes multiple reels with multiple symbols arranged on their periphery, multiple display windows corresponding to each reel that display some of the symbols arranged on the periphery of each reel so that the player can see them, a start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of each reel when it detects a player's operation (hereinafter referred to as a "start operation"), provided that a medal has been inserted, a stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of that reel depending on the type of reel when it detects a player's operation (hereinafter referred to as a "stop operation"), and a control unit that controls the operation of a stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and stop switch, thereby rotating and stopping each reel. Typically, such pachislot machines determine whether a win has occurred based on the combination of symbols displayed in the multiple display windows, and if a win has been determined, medals are dispensed from a hopper and stored in a medal receiver.

In such gaming machines, programming technology has been disclosed that uses the CALLEX command when calling a program in control area 2 (game media number limit ROM area) from a program in control area 1 (main control ROM area) (for example, JP 2022-001223 A).

As in the gaming machine described above, when a program stored in the in-use ROM area uses the "CALLEX" command to call a program stored in the out-of-use ROM area, if the called program is located in the first address range (2000H to 20FFH) of the out-of-use ROM area, the "CALLEX" command will be a two-byte command. However, if the called program is located in the second address range (from 2100H), the "CALLEX" command will be a four-byte command. In such a situation, each time the "CALLEX" command is used, it will put pressure on the capacity of the in-use ROM area.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can effectively save the capacity used in specific program storage areas of the main ROM.

Another objective of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with simple, easy-to-read program code that is easy to develop and maintain.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(A-1-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 2001) that controls the progress of a game by implementing a microprocessor (e.g., a microprocessor 2100) including an arithmetic circuit (e.g., a main CPU 2101), a read memory (e.g., a main ROM 2102), and a read/write memory (e.g., a main RAM 2103),
The read memory is composed of a first storage means (e.g., a ROM area 2202a within the use area) in which programs and data directly related to the progress of the game are stored, and a second storage means (e.g., a ROM area 2202b outside the use area) in which programs and data not directly related to the progress of the game are stored,
The programs stored in the second storage means include specific subroutines that are called by the program stored in the first storage means, execute processing, and then always return to the program of the first storage means that called them (for example, a subprogram that executes RAM initialization processing (continued) outside the used area shown in FIG. 177 and a subprogram that executes interface 2 output processing (continued) shown in FIG. 180), and normal subroutines that are called by the program stored in the second storage means, execute processing, and then always return to the program of the second storage means that called them (for example, a CRC calculation processing (outside the used area) shown in FIG. 173).
the arithmetic circuit executes a specific call instruction (e.g., "CALLEX") used when calling the specific subroutine to call the specific subroutine;
The specific call instruction stores different instruction capacity in the first storage means depending on whether the specific subroutine to be called calls a program stored before a specific address (e.g., "2100"H) in the second storage means or a program stored at an address after the specific address (e.g., a 2-byte instruction when calling a program before the specific address, and a 4-byte instruction when calling a program after the specific address),
the instruction capacity is required to be larger when calling a program stored at an address after the specific address than when calling a program stored before the specific address,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the program body of the specific subroutine is stored at an address after the specific address, the specific call instruction executes the program body of the specific subroutine by calling a program (for example, a "JR" or "JP" instruction) stored at an address before the specific address, in order to reduce the instruction capacity.

With this configuration of the present invention, in a program stored in the program area within the main ROM's used area, by setting the actual storage location of the called subprogram before a specified address, instructions that are normally 4 bytes long can be converted into 2-byte instructions, effectively saving space in the program area within the main ROM's used area.

(A-1-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
When the program body of the specific subroutine is stored at an address subsequent to the specific address, a processing code (e.g., a code that can be interpreted by the main CPU 2101) for executing the program body of the specific subroutine is stored at an address prior to the specific address,
The specific call instruction is configured to execute the processing code, thereby executing the program body of the specific subroutine.

With this configuration of the present invention, in a program stored in the program area within the main ROM's used area, by setting the actual storage location of the called subprogram before a specified address, instructions that are normally 4 bytes long can be converted into 2-byte instructions, effectively saving space in the program area within the main ROM's used area.

(A-1-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second embodiment.
The processing code is configured to be a jump instruction (for example, a "JR" or "JP" instruction) for jumping to the program body of the specific subroutine.

With this configuration of the present invention, in a program stored in the program area within the main ROM's used area, by setting the actual storage location of the called subprogram before a specified address, instructions that are normally 4 bytes long can be converted into 2-byte instructions, effectively saving space in the program area within the main ROM's used area.

(A-1-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the third embodiment.
The jump instruction is configured to be an instruction (for example, a "JR" instruction) that specifies the program body of the specific subroutine by a relative address.

With this configuration of the present invention, in a program stored in the program area within the main ROM's used area, by setting the actual storage location of the called subprogram before a specified address, instructions that are normally 4 bytes long can be made 2 bytes long.Furthermore, by setting jump instructions using relative addresses, the instruction size can also be reduced, resulting in effective savings in the capacity used in the program area within the main ROM's used area.

(A-1-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
When the specific call instruction calls a program stored before the specific address in the second storage means, the program is identified using a lower address than the address at which the program is stored.

With this configuration of the present invention, in a program stored in the program area within the main ROM's used area, by setting the actual storage location of the called subprogram before a specified address, instructions that are normally 4 bytes long can be converted into 2-byte instructions, effectively saving space in the program area within the main ROM's used area.

(A-1-6) The invention according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The arithmetic circuit functions as a game control means for controlling the progress of a game,
a payout means (e.g., a hopper device) that pays out game media according to the progress of a game;
a settlement means (for example, a settlement button) that can be pressed by a player to perform a settlement operation;
The game control means
a game value input means for detecting the game medium and inputting the game value (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing a process for detecting an operation of inserting medals to bet, or a process for detecting an operation of betting credited medals by operating a bet button);
A winning payout means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout/replay operation process shown in FIG. 182) that performs a winning payout process for paying out game media from the payout means in accordance with the winning combination;
a settlement processing means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the settlement execution process shown in FIG. 183) that performs a settlement process for paying out game media from the payout means based on the depression of the settlement means;
and a payout processing means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout and replay operation process shown in FIG. 182) that causes the payout means to perform a payout operation and performs a payout process.
The game value input means is capable of inputting a game value during a first period (for example, a unit game start waiting state (a period during which medals can be accepted and bets can be made, and before a start operation using a start lever)),
The winning payout means is capable of performing the winning payout process during a second period that does not overlap with the first period (for example, a period from the end of a unit game until payout is completed),
the settlement processing means is capable of performing the settlement processing when the settlement means is pressed during the first period;
The payout processing means
The payout process can be executed when the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means,
When the prize payout process is performed by the prize payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement processing means, different parameters (for example, the address of the corresponding medal counter) are assigned when the payout process is executed.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-1-7) The seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the sixth embodiment.
When the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout process, the parameters assigned when the payout process is executed are configured to be information relating to the address of a payout number memory area (e.g., a payout number counter storage area) in which a value based on the number of gaming media paid out according to the winning role is stored.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-1-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The arithmetic circuit functions as a game control means for controlling the progress of a game,
a start operation detection means (e.g., a start lever) for detecting a start operation by a player;
An internal lottery combination determination means (main CPU 2101 that executes the internal lottery process called in the main process shown in FIG. 170) that determines an internal lottery combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means;
A variable display means includes a plurality of display columns and displays the symbols provided in each display column in a variable manner (a main CPU 2101 that executes a reel rotation start process called in the main process shown in FIG. 170 );
A stop operation detection means (main CPU 2101 that executes the reel stop control process called in the main process shown in FIG. 170) that detects a stop operation by a player (for example, an operation of pressing a stop button),
A stop control means (main CPU 2101 that executes a reel stop control process called in the main process shown in FIG. 170) that stops the variable display of the symbols based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of a stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
The variation display of the variation display means includes a game variation (normal game) for awarding a game value and a pseudo variation (pseudo game) for awarding no game value,
The stop control means executes a control process for stopping the variable display of the symbols for the game variation,
The game control means
A pseudo stop control means for executing a control process to stop the display of the symbol variation in the pseudo variation;
a stop operation detection input monitoring means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes a stop button input monitoring process shown in FIG. 206 ) for determining whether or not the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means is valid,
The stop control means and the pseudo stop control means are each configured to execute the stop operation detection input monitoring means to determine whether the stop operation is valid or not (executing common processing in normal play and pseudo play (i.e., for example, the stop button input monitoring processing shown in Figure 206)).

This configuration of the present invention allows for some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by sharing some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, the present invention allows for simpler program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-1-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The arithmetic circuit functions as a game control means for controlling the progress of a game,
the read/write memory has a first storage area (common information storage area) for storing a group of information relating to a game, and a second storage area (common information backup storage area) located at a position different from the first storage area,
The game control means
a saving means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the common information backup generation process of FIG. 207) that saves all of the information stored in the first storage area to the second storage area when a predetermined condition is met;
a restoring means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the common information restoring process of FIG. 208) that restores the information saved in the second storage area to the first storage area when the predetermined condition and a specific condition (for example, a penalty condition) are met,
the saving means and the restoring means are common programs except for some processes,
the saving means and the restoring means set the leading address of the first storage area in a first register (e.g., a DE register, an HL register) capable of setting two bytes of data, and set the leading address of the second storage area in a second register (e.g., an HL register, an DE register) capable of setting two bytes of data;
Transferring information stored in the source address set in the first register from the source address set in the second register to the destination address set in the second register in response to a transfer command;
When the processing by the return means is executed, the source address set in the first register and the destination address set in the second register are swapped before the transfer instruction is executed.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-1-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the ninth embodiment.
a game start instruction means (for example, a start lever) by which a player instructs the start of a game;
a variable display means (for example, each reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information in response to an operation of the game start instruction means;
A role determination means capable of determining a winning role (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 179 );
a stop operation detection means (e.g., a stop button and a stop switch) capable of detecting a stop operation that stops the variable display of the variable display means;
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 170) that can stop the variable display of the variable display means and derive a stop display based on the winning combination determined by the combination determination means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detection means;
A winning means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the process of step S2013 in FIG. 170 ) that can generate a winning result corresponding to the stop display;
and a notification means (for example, an indication monitor or a main display device) capable of notifying an advantageous stop operation mode.
When the game start instruction means is operated by the player,
The saving means saves information (e.g., various information) stored in the first storage area and related to an advantageous state (e.g., an AT state) in which notification by the notification means can be executed, into the second storage area (e.g., processing corresponding to step S4602 in FIG. 163 ),
The game state related processing means for updating the information related to the advantageous state updates the information stored in the first storage area (for example, processing corresponding to step S4603, step S4604 in FIG. 163, step S4622 in FIG. 164, etc.),
When the game start instruction means is operated by the player and a predetermined penalty condition is met, the return means is configured to return the information saved in the second storage area to the first storage area (for example, processing corresponding to step S4624 in Figure 164).

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-1-11) The invention according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the ninth embodiment.
The specific condition is a penalty condition that cancels a predetermined advantageous gaming state,
The penalty conditions are configured to be conditions based on the game state and a predetermined operation by the player.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

According to the present invention, by reducing the size of the program stored in a specific area of the main ROM (the program area within the used area), it is possible to effectively conserve the capacity used in that specific area. Furthermore, according to the present invention, by configuring a program stored in a specific area of the main ROM so that the actual storage location of a called subprogram is set before a specified address, it is possible to achieve concise, easy-to-read program code, which ultimately improves development efficiency and maintainability.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, since some of the processing for normal games and simulated games is shared, it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity of the program area in the main ROM. Furthermore, according to the present invention, by sharing some of the processing for normal games and simulated games, it is possible to simplify the program structure and description, thereby improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, the backup restoration process that restores specified information to the information before the game and the backup process that backs up that specified information can be partially shared, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

<Appendix A-2>
[0003] Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that is a pachislot machine that includes a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on its periphery, a plurality of display windows corresponding to each reel and displaying some of the symbols arranged on the periphery of each reel so that the player can see them, a start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of each reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "start operation"), provided that medals have been inserted, a stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the reel according to the type of reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "stop operation"), and a control unit that controls the operation of a stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch to rotate and stop each reel. Typically, in such pachislot machines, a combination of symbols displayed in the display windows determines whether a prize has been won, and if a prize has been won, medals are paid out from a hopper and stored in a medal receiving unit.

In relation to such gaming machines, a main program calculates and stores a sum value of the main RAM when a power outage occurs, and when power is restored, the main program compares the stored sum value at the time of the power outage with the main RAM sum value calculated when power is restored to check whether there are any abnormalities in the main RAM (for example, JP 2018-027107 A). The sum value is, for example, the remainder obtained by treating the data string in the area being inspected as a string of integer values and calculating the sum, dividing this by a predetermined constant.

This main RAM check process is one of the most important processes in a gaming machine, but the process of calculating the sum value and using the calculated sum value to determine if there is an abnormality in the main RAM must all be performed by the main program, which puts pressure on the program area of the main ROM where the main program is stored. Furthermore, in order to perform this type of processing, the structure and description of the main program become more complex, which places a heavy load on the main CPU that executes the main program.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that reduces the size of the processing program related to checking the main RAM and is configured so as not to take up too much space in the program area of the main ROM.

Furthermore, by performing calculations related to checking the main RAM outside the main CPU, the present invention aims to simplify the structure and description of the main program, improve the development efficiency and maintainability of the program, and further reduce the load on the main CPU and shorten processing time.

The present invention also aims to manage effective restarts based on CRC values calculated without using calculations by the main CPU.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(A-2-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A gaming machine (e.g., a slot machine 2001) that controls the progress of a game by implementing a microprocessor (e.g., a microprocessor 2100) including an arithmetic circuit (e.g., a main CPU 2101), a read memory (e.g., a main ROM 2102), a read/write memory (e.g., a main RAM 2103), and a cyclic redundancy check circuit (e.g., a CRC circuit 2017c),
The microprocessor
a power cutoff means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes a power cutoff interruption process shown in FIG. 190) that executes a power cutoff process when a drop in the power supply voltage is detected;
power-on means for executing power-on processing when power is turned on (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing the power-on processing shown in FIG. 171 );
The power supply disconnection means performs an operation within a specific address range of the read-write memory (e.g., a part of the main RAM 2103) using the cyclic redundancy check circuit, and stores the operation result (e.g., a CRC value) in an operation result storage area (e.g., a CRC value storage area 2103e) outside the specific address range of the read-write memory;
The power-on means uses the cyclic redundancy check circuit to perform calculations within the specific address range of the read/write memory, and compares the calculation results with the calculation results stored in the calculation result storage area.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value. This eliminates the need to write this calculation in the main program, making it possible to free up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, by eliminating the calculation of the sum value, the structure and writing of the main program can be made simpler. Furthermore, by not performing calculations related to the main RAM check, including the calculation of the sum value, in the main program, the load on the main CPU that executes the main program can be reduced.

(A-2-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The microprocessor is configured to send data within the specific address range to the cyclic redundancy check circuit to cause the cyclic redundancy check circuit to perform an operation within the specific address range, and to receive an operation result of the operation from the cyclic redundancy check circuit.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value. This eliminates the need to write this calculation in the main program, making it possible to free up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, by eliminating the calculation of the sum value, the structure and writing of the main program can be made simpler. Furthermore, by not performing calculations related to the main RAM check, including the calculation of the sum value, in the main program, the load on the main CPU that executes the main program can be reduced.

(A-2-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second embodiment.
the data in the specific address range transmitted to the cyclic redundancy check circuit includes data in a plurality of non-contiguous areas in the read/write memory;
The calculation result received from the cyclic redundancy check circuit is configured to be a single piece of data.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value. This eliminates the need to write this calculation in the main program, making it possible to free up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, by eliminating the calculation of the sum value, the structure and writing of the main program can be made simpler. Furthermore, by not performing calculations related to the main RAM check, including the calculation of the sum value, in the main program, the load on the main CPU that executes the main program can be reduced.

(A-2-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
If the result of the calculation by the power-on means does not match the result of the calculation stored in the calculation result storage area (for example, if the result of the comparison does not match, a CRC abnormality (game return impossible state 1) is set in Figure 172 (step S2053), and if the game return impossible state is set in Figure 171 and predetermined conditions are met, game return impossible error processing is executed (NO_1 in step S2035), and interrupt prohibition is set and then loop is performed), a standby process is executed to wait until the power of the gaming machine is turned off.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value. This eliminates the need to write this calculation in the main program, making it possible to free up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, by eliminating the calculation of the sum value, the structure and writing of the main program can be made simpler. Furthermore, by not performing calculations related to the main RAM check, including the calculation of the sum value, in the main program, the load on the main CPU that executes the main program can be reduced.

(A-2-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
When the power supply cutoff means determines that no calculation is being performed within the specific address range, the means is configured to execute a standby process to wait until the power supply of the gaming machine is turned off.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value and the need to write this calculation process in the main program, thereby freeing up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, main RAM abnormalities can be properly detected based on the CRC value calculated without using calculations by the main CPU, allowing for effective restart management.

(A-2-6) The sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth or fifth embodiment.
The power supply is controlled so that the power cutoff process is not executed while the standby process is being executed.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value and the need to write this calculation process in the main program, thereby freeing up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, main RAM abnormalities can be properly detected based on the CRC value calculated without using calculations by the main CPU, allowing for effective restart management.

(A-2-7) The seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth or fifth embodiment.
The power-on means
Even if the result of the calculation by the power-on means does not match the result of the calculation stored in the calculation result storage area, the gaming machine is configured to be controlled so that the standby process is not executed by performing a predetermined operation when the gaming machine is powered on.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value and the need to write this calculation process in the main program, thereby freeing up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, main RAM abnormalities can be properly detected based on the CRC value calculated without using calculations by the main CPU, allowing for effective restart management.

(A-2-8) The eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth or fifth embodiment.
When the standby process is being executed,
A return impossible display is displayed indicating that the game cannot be returned,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is turned off and then turned on again, the standby process is executed again and the return-impossible display is displayed.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value and the need to write this calculation process in the main program, thereby freeing up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, main RAM abnormalities can be properly detected based on the CRC value calculated without using calculations by the main CPU, allowing for effective restart management.

(A-2-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the eighth embodiment.
Even if the power supply to the gaming machine is turned off while the standby process is being executed, the gaming machine is configured to be controlled so that the standby process is not executed again by performing a predetermined operation when the power supply to the gaming machine is turned on thereafter.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value and the need to write this calculation process in the main program, thereby freeing up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, main RAM abnormalities can be properly detected based on the CRC value calculated without using calculations by the main CPU, allowing for effective restart management.

(A-2-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth or fifth embodiment.
The device further includes a communication control means for executing a communication data transmission process for transmitting communication data at a fixed interval to a control unit connected to the microprocessor and performing control related to the presentation of the game.
The communication data transmission process is stopped while the standby process is being executed.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value and the need to write this calculation process in the main program, thereby freeing up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, main RAM abnormalities can be properly detected based on the CRC value calculated without using calculations by the main CPU, allowing for effective restart management.

(A-2-11) The invention according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the tenth embodiment.
The communication control means
a transmission interval timer for transmitting the communication data to the control unit at regular intervals;
When the value of the transmission interval timer reaches a predetermined value, the communication data is transmitted to the control unit.
while the standby process is being executed, the timer value of the transmission interval timer is repeatedly updated so that the timer value becomes the predetermined value;
The communication control means is configured to control the transmission of unsent communication data to the control unit as soon as the power of the gaming machine is turned on again and the communication data transmission process is started when unsent communication data remains due to the halt of the communication data transmission process.

With this configuration of the present invention, the main RAM check that was previously calculated by the main program is performed using a CRC circuit built into the microprocessor, eliminating the need to calculate the sum value and the need to write this calculation process in the main program, thereby freeing up more free space in the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, main RAM abnormalities can be properly detected based on the CRC value calculated without using calculations by the main CPU, allowing for effective restart management.

According to the present invention, there is no longer a need to write the sum value calculation process in the main program, freeing up the program area in the main ROM. As a result, this freed up program area can be used for logic, etc., to enhance gameplay. Furthermore, by eliminating the sum value calculation process, the structure and description of the main program can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, by not performing calculations related to main RAM checks, including the sum value calculation process, in the main program, the load on the main CPU that executes the main program can be reduced, and CRC checks can be performed in a shorter time.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, abnormalities in the main RAM can be properly detected based on a CRC value calculated without using calculations by the main CPU, and effective restart management can be achieved.

<Appendix A-3>
[0003] Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that is a pachislot machine that includes a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on its periphery, a plurality of display windows corresponding to each reel and displaying some of the symbols arranged on the periphery of each reel so that the player can see them, a start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of each reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "start operation"), provided that medals have been inserted, a stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the reel according to the type of reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "stop operation"), and a control unit that controls the operation of a stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch to rotate and stop each reel. Typically, in such pachislot machines, a combination of symbols displayed in the display windows determines whether a prize has been won, and if a prize has been won, medals are paid out from a hopper and stored in a medal receiving unit.

In such gaming machines, technology has been disclosed in which multiple tables are stored in the main ROM and the control processing program retrieves data from those tables (for example, JP 2021-079129 A).

However, when each control processing program in the main control unit retrieves data from its corresponding table, it is common to provide a separate process for retrieving the data. However, as the number of control processes and table types increases, the number of processes for retrieving the data also increases, which puts pressure on the capacity of the main ROM that stores the control processing programs.

In addition, while it is common to store data in tables in units of one byte, there are many cases where there are few data patterns and one byte of capacity is not actually required when storing data in a table. In such cases, there is a large amount of unused space, which puts pressure on the capacity of the main ROM.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that does not require separate data acquisition processes for each type of data, but instead uses a common data acquisition process to efficiently use the program storage area of the main ROM, thereby reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity.

The present invention also aims to provide a gaming machine that can store multiple data items in a table's data storage unit, reducing unused space and easing pressure on the main ROM capacity. Furthermore, the above-mentioned common data acquisition process can expand multiple data items when they are stored in a table's data storage unit.

Another object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine equipped with a smaller program that can initialize the main RAM for both the in-use area work area and the out-of-use area work area, without the need to determine the RAM initialization range for each area.

The present invention also aims to simplify the structure and description of the main program, thereby improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

The present invention also aims to make the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area completely independent from the RAM clearing process for the in-use work area, making it easier to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(A-3-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A game control means (e.g., a main CPU 2101) that controls the progress of the game;
a first storage means (e.g., a main ROM 2102) in which programs and table data are stored;
a second storage means (e.g., a main RAM 2103) for storing data in association with the execution of the program;
The table data includes a plurality of table data,
The predetermined table data among the plurality of table data is a data group of one-byte data collected by a plurality of bytes,
the 1-byte data of the data group is a 4-bit data table composed of upper 4-bit data and lower 4-bit data,
the game control means has a 4-bit data acquisition means for acquiring 4-bit data consisting of only the upper 4 bits or the lower 4 bits from the 1-byte data of the 4-bit data table, and storing the 4-bit data in a predetermined area of the second storage means;
The 4-bit data acquisition means
This gaming machine is characterized in that after obtaining the 1-byte data from the 4-bit data table, the 4-bit data is obtained by swapping the upper 4-bit data and the lower 4-bit data contained in the 1-byte data according to predetermined conditions.

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 4-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, making it possible to efficiently use the program storage area of the main ROM and reduce pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, since two 4-bit data can be stored in each 1-byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving on main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 4-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 4-bit data, even in special situations where two 4-bit data are stored in one byte of data.

(A-3-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
By the process of executing the 4-bit data acquisition means, the position of the predetermined table data (e.g., the top address of the table data) and the selection value (e.g., an entry indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired) are set,
The 4-bit data acquisition means is configured to determine, based on the result of dividing the selected value by a specific number, the location where 1 byte data to be acquired from the specified table data is stored, and a value indicating whether or not to swap the upper 4 bits of data with the lower 4 bits of data (for example, by dividing the selected value by 2 and making a determination based on the quotient and remainder).

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 4-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, allowing for efficient use of the main ROM's program storage area and reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, since two 4-bit data can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 4-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 4-bit data by specifying the table data position and a selection value indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired, even in special situations where two 4-bit data are stored in one byte of data.

(A-3-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second embodiment.
The 4-bit data acquisition means is configured to divide the selected value by 2 to calculate a quotient and a remainder, and to determine the position of the 1-byte data to be acquired by adding a relative position based on the quotient to the position of the specified table data, and to determine whether to swap the upper 4 bits of data and the lower 4 bits of data depending on whether the remainder is odd or even.

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 4-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, allowing for efficient use of the main ROM's program storage area and reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, since two 4-bit data can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 4-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 4-bit data by specifying the table data position and a selection value indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired, even in special situations where two 4-bit data are stored in one byte of data.

(A-3-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
One byte of data in the 4-bit data table is generated by multiplying the 4-bit data stored in the upper 4 bits by "10"H, shifting it by 4 bits, and then adding it to the 4-bit data stored in the lower 4 bits.

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 4-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, allowing for efficient use of the main ROM's program storage area and reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, since two 4-bit data can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 4-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 4-bit data by specifying the table data position and a selection value indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired, even in special situations where two 4-bit data are stored in one byte of data.

(A-3-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
the 1-byte data of the data group is a 2-bit data table configured of data in 2-bit units,
the game control means has a 2-bit data acquisition means for acquiring 2-bit data from the 1-byte data of the 2-bit data table and storing the 2-bit data in a predetermined area of the second storage means;
The 2-bit data acquisition means
After obtaining one byte of data from the two-bit data table, the two-bit data is obtained by shifting the obtained data by two bits in units according to a predetermined condition.

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 2-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, allowing for efficient use of the main ROM's program storage area and reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, because four 2-bit data items can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 2-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 2-bit data by specifying the table data position and a selection value indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired, even in special situations where four 2-bit data items are stored in one byte of data.

(A-3-6) The invention according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fifth embodiment.
The position and selection value of the predetermined table data are set by the process of executing the 2-bit data acquisition means,
The 2-bit data acquisition means is configured to determine the location where the 1-byte data to be acquired from the specified table data is stored and the number of 2-bit shifts based on the result of dividing the selected value by a specific number.

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 2-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, allowing for efficient use of the main ROM's program storage area and reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, because four 2-bit data items can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 2-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 2-bit data by specifying the table data position and a selection value indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired, even in special situations where four 2-bit data items are stored in one byte of data.

(A-3-7) The seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the sixth embodiment.
The 2-bit data acquisition means is configured to divide the selected value by 4 to calculate a quotient and a remainder, to determine the position of the 1-byte data to be acquired by adding a relative position based on the quotient to the position of the specified table data, and to determine the number of 2-bit shifts based on the remainder.

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 2-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, allowing for efficient use of the main ROM's program storage area and reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, because four 2-bit data items can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 2-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 2-bit data by specifying the table data position and a selection value indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired, even in special situations where four 2-bit data items are stored in one byte of data.

(A-3-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fifth embodiment.
One byte of data in the 2-bit data table is configured to be generated by multiplying the 2-bit data to be stored in the first 2 bits by "40"H, multiplying the 2-bit data to be stored in the second 2 bits by "10"H, and multiplying the third 2-bit data by "4"H to shift each of the 2-bit data, and then adding the 2-bit data thus shifted and the 2-bit data to be stored in the fourth 2 bits.

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 2-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, allowing for efficient use of the main ROM's program storage area and reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, because four 2-bit data items can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 2-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 2-bit data by specifying the table data position and a selection value indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired, even in special situations where four 2-bit data items are stored in one byte of data.

(A-3-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
Further provided is a setting switch (for example, a setting key switch) for changing or confirming a setting value;
The second storage means is composed of a third storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203a within the used area) for storing data directly related to the progress of the game, and a fourth storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203b outside the used area) for storing data not directly related to the progress of the game,
The game control means
Range calculation means for performing calculation within a specific address range of the second storage means and storing the calculation result in a calculation result storage area (for example, a CRC circuit 2107c for performing CRC calculation processing in a CRC generation process (outside the use area) called by the power interruption process shown in FIG. 190, and a main CPU 2101 for storing the CRC value of the calculation result in a CRC value storage area 2103e);
Range comparison means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that compares CRC values in the CRC check process (outside the use area) shown in FIG. 172) that performs calculation within a specific address range of the second storage means and compares the calculation result with the calculation result stored in the calculation result storage area;
an initialization means for initializing the second storage means (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing initialization processing such as the designated RAM initialization processing shown in FIG. 176 );
The game control means
determining a start position of the third storage means in accordance with the state of the setting switch when power is turned on and the result of the comparison by the range comparison means;
determining a start position of the fourth storage means based on the determined start position of the third storage means;
The initialization means is configured to initialize the third storage means based on the determined start position of the third storage means, and to initialize the fourth storage means based on the determined start position of the fourth storage means.

With this configuration of the present invention, the state of the gaming machine is not judged when determining the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-3-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the ninth embodiment.
The final position to be initialized (for example, the clear end address shown in FIG. 205) is configured to be set one for each of the third storage means and the fourth storage means, regardless of the start position of the third storage means and the start position of the fourth storage means.

With this configuration of the present invention, the state of the gaming machine is not judged when determining the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-3-11) The invention according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the ninth embodiment.
The initialization means is configured to determine the start position of the fourth storage means using correspondence data indicating the correspondence between a lower address relating to the start position of the third storage means and an address relating to the start position of the fourth storage means.

With this configuration of the present invention, the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined without determining the state of the gaming machine, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, because the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined based on part of the RAM initialization start address for the in-use work area, the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area can be completely independent, making it easy to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

According to the present invention, even if the data groups are of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, 4-bit units or 2-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, and allows for efficient use of the program storage area in the main ROM, reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, multiple data can be stored in the data storage unit of a table, reducing unused space and saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common data retrieval process makes it easy to retrieve desired data even in special situations where multiple data are stored in the data storage unit of a table (for example, 1 byte of data).

Furthermore, according to the present invention, the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined based on the RAM initialization range for the in-use work area, eliminating the need to determine the RAM initialization range for each area, thereby reducing the program size and alleviating pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, the above-described configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, because the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined based on part of the RAM initialization start address for the in-use work area, the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area can be completely independent, making it easy to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

<Appendix A-4>
[0003] Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that is a pachislot machine that includes a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on its periphery, a plurality of display windows corresponding to each reel and displaying some of the symbols arranged on the periphery of each reel so that the player can see them, a start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of each reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "start operation"), provided that medals have been inserted, a stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the reel depending on the type of reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "stop operation"), and a control unit that controls the operation of a stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch to rotate and stop each reel. Typically, in such pachislot machines, a combination of symbols displayed in the display windows determines whether a prize has been won, and if a prize has been won, medals are paid out from a hopper and stored in a medal receiving unit.

In such gaming machines, technology has been disclosed in which multiple tables are stored in the main ROM and the control processing program retrieves data from those tables (for example, JP 2021-079129 A).

However, when each control processing program in the main control unit retrieves data from its corresponding table, it is common to provide a separate process for retrieving the data. However, as the number of control processes and table types increases, the number of processes for retrieving the data also increases, which puts pressure on the capacity of the main ROM that stores the control processing programs.

In addition, while it is common to store data in tables in units of one byte, there are many cases where there are few data patterns and one byte of capacity is not actually required when storing data in a table. In such cases, there is a large amount of unused space, which puts pressure on the capacity of the main ROM.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that does not require separate data acquisition processes for each type of data, but instead uses a common data acquisition process to efficiently use the program storage area of the main ROM, thereby reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity.

The present invention also aims to provide a gaming machine that can store multiple data items in a table's data storage unit, reducing unused space and easing pressure on the main ROM capacity. Furthermore, the above-mentioned common data acquisition process can expand multiple data items when they are stored in a table's data storage unit.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(A-4-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A game control means (e.g., a main CPU 2101) that controls the progress of the game;
a first storage means (e.g., a main ROM 2102) in which programs and table data are stored;
a second storage means (e.g., a main RAM 2103) for storing data in association with the execution of the program;
The table data includes a plurality of table data,
The predetermined table data among the plurality of table data is a data group of one-byte data collected by a plurality of bytes,
the 1-byte data of the data group is a 2-bit data table configured of data in 2-bit units,
the game control means has a 2-bit data acquisition means for acquiring 2-bit data from the 1-byte data of the 2-bit data table and storing the 2-bit data in a predetermined area of the second storage means;
The 2-bit data acquisition means
A gaming machine characterized in that after obtaining one byte of data from the 2-bit data table, the 2-bit data is obtained by shifting the obtained data by 2 bits in units according to predetermined conditions.

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 2-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, making it possible to efficiently use the program storage area of the main ROM and reduce pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, because four 2-bit data items can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving on main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 2-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 2-bit data, even in special situations where four 2-bit data items are stored in one byte of data.

(A-4-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
By the process of executing the 2-bit data acquisition means, the position of the predetermined table data (e.g., the top address of the table data) and the selection value (e.g., an entry indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired) are set,
The 2-bit data acquisition means is configured to determine the location where the 1-byte data to be acquired from the specified table data is stored and the number of 2-bit shifts based on the result of dividing the selected value by a specific number (for example, by dividing the selected value by 4 and determining the number based on the quotient and remainder).

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 2-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, allowing for efficient use of the main ROM's program storage area and reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, because four 2-bit data items can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 2-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 2-bit data by specifying the table data position and a selection value indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired, even in special situations where four 2-bit data items are stored in one byte of data.

(A-4-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second embodiment.
The 2-bit data acquisition means is configured to divide the selected value by 4 to calculate a quotient and a remainder, to obtain the position of the 1-byte data to be acquired by adding a relative position based on the quotient to the position of the specified table data, and to obtain the number of 2-bit shifts based on the remainder.

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 2-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, allowing for efficient use of the main ROM's program storage area and reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, because four 2-bit data items can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 2-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 2-bit data by specifying the table data position and a selection value indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired, even in special situations where four 2-bit data items are stored in one byte of data.

(A-4-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
One byte of data in the 2-bit data table is configured to be generated by multiplying the 2-bit data to be stored in the first 2 bits by "40"H, multiplying the 2-bit data to be stored in the second 2 bits by "10"H, and multiplying the third 2-bit data by "4"H to shift each of the 2-bit data, and then adding the 2-bit data thus shifted and the 2-bit data to be stored in the fourth 2 bits.

With this configuration of the present invention, even for data groups of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 2-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, allowing for efficient use of the main ROM's program storage area and reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity. Furthermore, because four 2-bit data items can be stored in each byte of table data, unused space can be reduced, saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common 2-bit data acquisition process makes it easy to acquire the desired 2-bit data by specifying the table data position and a selection value indicating the relative position of the data to be acquired, even in special situations where four 2-bit data items are stored in one byte of data.

(A-4-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
a payout means (e.g., a hopper device) for paying out game media according to the progress of a game;
and a settlement means (e.g., a settlement button) that can be pressed by a player to perform a settlement operation;
The game control means
a game value input means for detecting the game medium and inputting the game value (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing a process for detecting an operation of inserting medals to bet, or a process for detecting an operation of betting credited medals by operating a bet button);
A winning payout means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout/replay operation process shown in FIG. 182) that performs a winning payout process for paying out game media from the payout means in accordance with the winning combination;
a settlement processing means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the settlement execution process shown in FIG. 183) that performs a settlement process for paying out game media from the payout means based on the depression of the settlement means;
and a payout processing means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout and replay operation process shown in FIG. 182) that causes the payout means to perform a payout operation and performs a payout process.
The game value input means is capable of inputting a game value during a first period (for example, a unit game start waiting state (a period during which medals can be accepted and bets can be made, and before a start operation using a start lever)),
The winning payout means is capable of performing the winning payout process during a second period that does not overlap with the first period (for example, a period from the end of a unit game until payout is completed),
the settlement processing means is capable of performing the settlement processing when the settlement means is pressed during the first period;
The payout processing means
The payout process can be executed when the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means,
When the prize payout process is performed by the prize payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement processing means, different parameters (for example, the address of the corresponding medal counter) are assigned when the payout process is executed.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-4-6) The invention according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fifth embodiment.
When the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout process, the parameters assigned when the payout process is executed are configured to be information relating to the address of a payout number memory area (e.g., a payout number counter storage area) in which a value based on the number of gaming media paid out according to the winning role is stored.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-4-7) The invention according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
Further provided is a setting switch (for example, a setting key switch) for changing or confirming a setting value;
The second storage means is composed of a third storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203a within the used area) for storing data directly related to the progress of the game, and a fourth storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203b outside the used area) for storing data not directly related to the progress of the game,
The game control means
Range calculation means for performing calculation within a specific address range of the second storage means and storing the calculation result in a calculation result storage area (for example, a CRC circuit 2107c for performing CRC calculation processing in a CRC generation process (outside the use area) called by the power interruption process shown in FIG. 190, and a main CPU 2101 for storing the CRC value of the calculation result in a CRC value storage area 2103e);
Range comparison means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that compares CRC values in the CRC check process (outside the use area) shown in FIG. 172) that performs calculation within a specific address range of the second storage means and compares the calculation result with the calculation result stored in the calculation result storage area;
an initialization means for initializing the second storage means (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing initialization processing such as the designated RAM initialization processing shown in FIG. 176 );
The game control means
determining a start position of the third storage means in accordance with the state of the setting switch when power is turned on and the result of the comparison by the range comparison means;
determining a start position of the fourth storage means based on the determined start position of the third storage means;
The initialization means is configured to initialize the third storage means based on the determined start position of the third storage means, and to initialize the fourth storage means based on the determined start position of the fourth storage means.

With this configuration of the present invention, the state of the gaming machine is not judged when determining the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-4-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
a start operation detection means (e.g., a start lever) for detecting a start operation by a player;
An internal lottery combination determination means (main CPU 2101 that executes the internal lottery process called in the main process shown in FIG. 170) that determines an internal lottery combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means;
A variable display means includes a plurality of display columns and displays the symbols provided in each display column in a variable manner (a main CPU 2101 that executes a reel rotation start process called in the main process shown in FIG. 170 );
A stop operation detection means (main CPU 2101 that executes the reel stop control process called in the main process shown in FIG. 170) that detects a stop operation by a player (for example, an operation of pressing a stop button),
A stop control means (main CPU 2101 that executes a reel stop control process called in the main process shown in FIG. 170) that stops the variable display of the symbols based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of a stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
The variation display of the variation display means includes a game variation (normal game) for awarding a game value and a pseudo variation (pseudo game) for awarding no game value,
The stop control means executes a control process for stopping the variable display of the symbols for the game variation,
The game control means
A pseudo stop control means for executing a control process to stop the display of the symbol variation in the pseudo variation;
a stop operation detection input monitoring means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes a stop button input monitoring process shown in FIG. 206 ) for determining whether or not the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means is valid,
The stop control means and the pseudo stop control means are each configured to execute the stop operation detection input monitoring means to determine whether the stop operation is valid or not (executing common processing in normal play and pseudo play (i.e., for example, the stop button input monitoring processing shown in Figure 206)).

This configuration of the present invention allows for some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by sharing some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, the present invention allows for simpler program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-4-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
the second storage means has a first storage area (common information storage area) for storing a group of information relating to games, and a second storage area (common information backup storage area) located at a position different from the first storage area,
The game control means
a saving means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the common information backup generation process of FIG. 207) that saves all of the information stored in the first storage area to the second storage area when a predetermined condition is met;
a restoring means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the common information restoring process of FIG. 208) that restores the information saved in the second storage area to the first storage area when the predetermined condition and a specific condition (for example, a penalty condition) are met,
the saving means and the restoring means are common programs except for some processes,
the saving means and the restoring means set the leading address of the first storage area in a first register (e.g., a DE register, an HL register) capable of setting two bytes of data, and set the leading address of the second storage area in a second register (e.g., an HL register, an DE register) capable of setting two bytes of data;
Transferring information stored in the source address set in the first register from the source address set in the second register to the destination address set in the second register in response to a transfer command;
When the processing by the return means is executed, the source address set in the first register and the destination address set in the second register are swapped before the transfer instruction is executed.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-4-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the ninth embodiment.
a game start instruction means (for example, a start lever) by which a player instructs the start of a game;
a variable display means (for example, each reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information in response to an operation of the game start instruction means;
A role determination means capable of determining a winning role (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 179 );
a stop operation detection means (e.g., a stop button and a stop switch) capable of detecting a stop operation that stops the variable display of the variable display means;
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 170) that can stop the variable display of the variable display means and derive a stop display based on the winning combination determined by the combination determination means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detection means;
A winning means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the process of step S2013 in FIG. 170 ) that can generate a winning result corresponding to the stop display;
and a notification means (for example, an indication monitor or a main display device) capable of notifying an advantageous stop operation mode.
When the game start instruction means is operated by the player,
The saving means saves information (e.g., various information) stored in the first storage area and related to an advantageous state (e.g., an AT state) in which notification by the notification means can be executed, into the second storage area (e.g., processing corresponding to step S4602 in FIG. 163 ),
The game state related processing means for updating the information related to the advantageous state updates the information stored in the first storage area (for example, processing corresponding to step S4603, step S4604 in FIG. 163, step S4622 in FIG. 164, etc.),
When the game start instruction means is operated by the player and a predetermined penalty condition is met, the return means is configured to return the information saved in the second storage area to the first storage area (for example, processing corresponding to step S4624 in Figure 164).

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-4-11) The invention according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the ninth embodiment.
The specific condition is a penalty condition that cancels a predetermined advantageous gaming state,
The penalty conditions are configured to be conditions based on the game state and a predetermined operation by the player.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

According to the present invention, even if the data groups are of different types, as long as the maximum data size is the same (for example, in 2-bit units), a common data acquisition process (data expansion process) can be used. This eliminates the need to provide a separate data acquisition process for each data type, and allows for efficient use of the program storage area in the main ROM, reducing pressure on the main ROM's capacity.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, multiple data can be stored in the data storage unit of a table, reducing unused space and saving main ROM capacity. Furthermore, this common data retrieval process makes it easy to retrieve desired data even in special situations where multiple data are stored in the data storage unit of a table (for example, 1 byte of data).

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

With this configuration of the present invention, the state of the gaming machine is not judged when determining the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

This configuration of the present invention allows for some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by sharing some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, the present invention allows for simpler program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

<Appendix A-5>
[0003] Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that is a pachislot machine that includes a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on its periphery, a plurality of display windows corresponding to each reel and displaying some of the symbols arranged on the periphery of each reel so that the player can see them, a start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of each reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "start operation"), provided that medals have been inserted, a stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the reel according to the type of reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "stop operation"), and a control unit that controls the operation of a stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch to rotate and stop each reel. Typically, in such pachislot machines, a combination of symbols displayed in the display windows determines whether a prize has been won, and if a prize has been won, medals are paid out from a hopper and stored in a medal receiving unit.

Among such gaming machines, there is one that performs separate processes: the settlement process, which is executed when the settlement button is pressed while waiting for a unit game to start, and the payout process, which is executed when the unit game ends (for example, JP 2019-170605 A).

When it comes to paying out gaming media, there is no difference between the settlement process and the payout process, and although there are common processing parts, it is common for the settlement process and the payout process to be separate processes, as in the gaming machine mentioned above, and the fact that each of these separate processes with common processing parts is written is one of the factors that put pressure on the program area of the main ROM.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that standardizes the pressing of the settlement button while waiting for a unit game to start and the payout process for gaming media that is executed when a unit game ends, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM.

Another object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area by setting the lower address of the target counter when executing the gaming media payout process, which is executed when the settlement button is pressed or when a unit game ends.

Furthermore, by standardizing the payout process, the present invention aims to simplify the program structure and description, thereby improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(A-5-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A game control means (e.g., a main CPU 2101) that controls the progress of the game;
a payout means (e.g., a hopper device) for paying out game media according to the progress of a game;
and a settlement means (e.g., a settlement button) that can be pressed by a player to perform a settlement operation;
The game control means
a game value input means for detecting the game medium and inputting the game value (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing a process for detecting an operation of inserting medals to bet, or a process for detecting an operation of betting credited medals by operating a bet button);
A winning payout means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout/replay operation process shown in FIG. 182) that performs a winning payout process for paying out game media from the payout means in accordance with the winning combination;
a settlement processing means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the settlement execution process shown in FIG. 183) that performs a settlement process for paying out game media from the payout means based on the depression of the settlement means;
and a payout processing means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout and replay operation process shown in FIG. 182) that causes the payout means to perform a payout operation and performs a payout process.
The game value input means is capable of inputting a game value during a first period (for example, a unit game start waiting state (a period during which medals can be accepted and bets can be made, and before a start operation using a start lever)),
The winning payout means is capable of performing the winning payout process during a second period that does not overlap with the first period (for example, a period from the end of a unit game until payout is completed),
the settlement processing means is capable of performing the settlement processing when the settlement means is pressed during the first period;
The payout processing means
The payout process can be executed when the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means,
A gaming machine characterized in that different parameters (for example, the addresses of the corresponding medal counters) are assigned when the prize payout process is performed by the prize payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement processing means.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-5-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
When the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout process, the parameters assigned when the payout process is executed are configured to be information relating to the address of a payout number memory area (e.g., a payout number counter storage area) in which a value based on the number of gaming media paid out according to the winning role is stored.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-5-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
When the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means, the payout process is configured to be executed twice for different payout operations.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-5-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the third embodiment.
When the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means and the payout process is executed twice,
The parameter assigned when the first payout process is executed is information relating to the address of a reserved number storage area (e.g., a credit counter storage area) in which the number of game media transferred from the payout number of game media corresponding to the winning combination is stored,
The parameter assigned when executing the second payout process is configured to be information relating to the address of an input number memory area (e.g., a medal insertion counter storage area) in which the game value of the game medium detected by the game value input means is stored.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-5-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second or fourth embodiment.
The address information is configured to be part of the address of the corresponding storage area (for example, the address of the lowest byte of the 2-byte address data indicating the storage location of the storage area).

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing the pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, because only a portion of the address of the corresponding memory area is set, the calling program size can be reduced accordingly, reducing the pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area.

(A-5-6) The invention according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth embodiment.
The command (e.g., a jump (JP) command) that executes the payout process when the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout process, and the command (e.g., a call (CALL) command) that executes the first payout process when the settlement process is performed by the settlement processing means are configured to be different types of commands (which differ in whether or not they return to the calling program when the processing is completed).

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-5-7) The seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the sixth embodiment.
When the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout process, the call command for executing the payout process is a command that does not return to the next step of the call command that called the payout process (for example, a jump (JP) command),
When the settlement process is performed by the settlement processing means, the instruction to execute the first payout process is configured to be an instruction (e.g., a CALL instruction) to return to the next step of the call instruction that called the payout process.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-5-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the third embodiment.
When the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means and the payout process is executed twice,
When the payout process is executed, different parameters are assigned (for example, in the first payout process, address information of the credit counter storage area is assigned, and in the second payout process, address information of the medal insertion counter storage area is assigned).

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when settlement processing is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-5-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fifth embodiment.
The payout processing means is configured to specify a storage area by combining a predetermined upper address with a lower address received as a parameter, and to perform payout processing based on the payout number stored in the storage area.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-5-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the eighth embodiment.
The program that executes the settlement processing means includes a program that executes the payout process, and is configured to be controlled so that when the payout process is executed twice, the program range related to the same payout process is called.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-5-11) The invention according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the tenth embodiment.
The winning payout process is configured to be controlled so that when the payout process is executed, a program range related to the payout process is called.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

According to the present invention, by standardizing the payout process for gaming media that is executed when the settlement button is pressed or when a unit game ends, it is possible to reduce pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, when the game media payout process is executed when the settlement button is pressed or when a unit game ends, the lower address of the target counter is set, which reduces the size of the calling program and reduces pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, by standardizing the payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

<Appendix A-6>
[0003] Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that is a pachislot machine that includes a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on its periphery, a plurality of display windows corresponding to each reel and displaying some of the symbols arranged on the periphery of each reel so that the player can see them, a start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of each reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "start operation"), provided that medals have been inserted, a stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the reel depending on the type of reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "stop operation"), and a control unit that controls the operation of a stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch to rotate and stop each reel. Typically, in such pachislot machines, a combination of symbols displayed in the display windows determines whether a prize has been won, and if a prize has been won, medals are paid out from a hopper and stored in a medal receiving unit.

Among such gaming machines, there is one that performs initialization from multiple starting addresses depending on the conditions of the game control working area (for example, JP 2019-141455 A).

In gaming machines like the one described above, only the game control work area is initialized, but nowadays, it is necessary to initialize the area within the main RAM's used area, which is the game control work area, and the area outside the main RAM's used area, which is not the game control work area, under the same conditions. Due to rules unique to the gaming machine industry, programs must be created according to the conditions for both the used area and the outside area, and stored in the main ROM. However, preparing such programs separately is one factor that puts pressure on the main ROM's program area, and also leads to the main program becoming more complicated.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine equipped with a smaller program that can initialize the main RAM for both the in-use area work area and the out-of-use area work area.

The present invention also aims to simplify the structure and description of the main program, thereby improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

The present invention also aims to make the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area completely independent from the RAM clearing process for the in-use work area, making it easier to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(A-6-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
a game control means that implements a microprocessor (e.g., microprocessor 2100) including an arithmetic circuit (e.g., main CPU 2101), a read memory (e.g., main ROM 2102), and a read/write memory (e.g., main RAM 2103) and controls the progress of the game;
a setting switch (e.g., a key switch for setting) provided for changing or confirming a setting value;
The game control means
Range calculation means for performing calculation within a specific address range of the read-write memory and storing the calculation result in a calculation result storage area outside the specific address range of the read-write memory (for example, a CRC circuit 2107c for performing CRC calculation processing in a CRC generation process (outside the area in use) called by the power interruption process shown in FIG. 190, and a main CPU 2101 for storing the CRC value of the calculation result in a CRC value storage area 2103e);
a range comparison means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that compares CRC values in the CRC check process (outside the use area) shown in FIG. 172) that performs calculations within a specific address range of the read/write memory and compares the calculation results with the calculation results stored in the calculation result storage area;
An initialization means for initializing the read/write memory (for example, the main CPU 2101 for executing initialization processing such as the designated RAM initialization processing shown in FIG. 176);
a main processing means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the main processing shown in FIG. 170 ) that performs main processing as the game progresses;
The read/write memory is composed of a first storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203a in the used area) for storing data directly related to the progress of the game, and a second storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203b outside the used area) for storing data not directly related to the progress of the game,
The plurality of ranges are:
a first start address (e.g., a clear address when a RAM error occurs) of the first storage means when the setting switch is in an on state and a mismatch is detected by the range comparison means when the power is turned on;
a second start address (e.g., a clear address at the time of setting change) of the first storage means when the setting switch is in an on state at power-on and no matching mismatch is detected by the range matching means;
A third start position (for example, a clear address at the end of one game) of the first storage means when the unit game of the main processing means has ended and the next unit game has not yet started is set.
the initialization start positions of the first storage means, including the first start position, the second start position, and the third start position, are represented by a 2-byte address;
The initialization means
storing a 2-byte address value relating to one start position selected from the first start position, the second start position, or the third start position in a storage determination area;
determining an initialization start position of the second storage means according to the value of the lower address of the address stored in the storage determination area;
With respect to the first storage means, initialization is performed from an initialization start position of the first storage means, which is one of the first start position, the second start position, and the third start position (for example, initialization of RAM in the used area in step S2151 shown in FIG. 176 );
A gaming machine (e.g., pachislot machine 2001) characterized in that initialization is performed from the determined initialization start position of the second storage means (e.g., RAM initialization processing outside the used area (outside the used area) of step S2150 shown in FIG. 176) with respect to the second storage means.

With this configuration of the present invention, the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined without determining the state of the gaming machine, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, because the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined based on part of the RAM initialization start address for the in-use work area, the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area can be completely independent, making it easy to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

(A-6-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The final position to be initialized (for example, the clear end address shown in FIG. 205) is configured to be set one for each of the first storage means and the second storage means, regardless of the initialization start position of the first storage means and the initialization start position of the second storage means.

With this configuration of the present invention, the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined without determining the state of the gaming machine, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, because the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined based on part of the RAM initialization start address for the in-use work area, the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area can be completely independent, making it easy to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

(A-6-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
the second storage means stores correspondence data indicating a correspondence relationship between a lower address of an initialization start position of the first storage means and an address of an initialization start position of the second storage means;
The initialization means is configured to use the correspondence data to determine an initialization start position of the second storage means that corresponds to the value of the lower address stored in the storage determination area.

With this configuration of the present invention, the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined without determining the state of the gaming machine, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, because the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined based on part of the RAM initialization start address for the in-use work area, the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area can be completely independent, making it easy to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

(A-6-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The arithmetic circuit functions as a game control means for controlling the progress of a game,
a payout means (e.g., a hopper device) that pays out game media according to the progress of a game;
a settlement means (for example, a settlement button) that can be pressed by a player to perform a settlement operation;
The game control means
a game value input means for detecting the game medium and inputting the game value (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing a process for detecting an operation of inserting medals to bet, or a process for detecting an operation of betting credited medals by operating a bet button);
A winning payout means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout/replay operation process shown in FIG. 182) that performs a winning payout process for paying out game media from the payout means in accordance with the winning combination;
a settlement processing means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the settlement execution process shown in FIG. 183) that performs a settlement process for paying out game media from the payout means based on the depression of the settlement means;
and a payout processing means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout and replay operation process shown in FIG. 182) that causes the payout means to perform a payout operation and performs a payout process.
The game value input means is capable of inputting a game value during a first period (for example, a unit game start waiting state (a period during which medals can be accepted and bets can be made, and before a start operation using a start lever)),
The winning payout means is capable of performing the winning payout process during a second period that does not overlap with the first period (for example, a period from the end of a unit game until payout is completed),
the settlement processing means is capable of performing the settlement processing when the settlement means is pressed during the first period;
The payout processing means
The payout process can be executed when the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means,
When the prize payout process is performed by the prize payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement processing means, different parameters (for example, the address of the corresponding medal counter) are assigned when the payout process is executed.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-6-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth embodiment.
When the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout process, the parameters assigned when the payout process is executed are configured to be information relating to the address of a payout number memory area (e.g., a payout number counter storage area) in which a value based on the number of gaming media paid out according to the winning role is stored.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-6-6) The invention according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth embodiment.
When the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means, the payout process is configured to be executed twice for different payout operations.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-6-7) The invention according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the sixth embodiment.
When the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means and the payout process is executed twice,
The parameter assigned when the first payout process is executed is information relating to the address of a reserved number storage area (e.g., a credit counter storage area) in which the number of game media transferred from the payout number of game media corresponding to the winning combination is stored,
The parameter assigned when executing the second payout process is configured to be information relating to the address of an input number memory area (e.g., a medal insertion counter storage area) in which the game value of the game medium detected by the game value input means is stored.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-6-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The arithmetic circuit functions as a game control means for controlling the progress of a game,
a start operation detection means (e.g., a start lever) for detecting a start operation by a player;
An internal lottery combination determination means (main CPU 2101 that executes the internal lottery process called in the main process shown in FIG. 170) that determines an internal lottery combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means;
A variable display means includes a plurality of display columns and displays the symbols provided in each display column in a variable manner (a main CPU 2101 that executes a reel rotation start process called in the main process shown in FIG. 170 );
A stop operation detection means (main CPU 2101 that executes the reel stop control process called in the main process shown in FIG. 170) that detects a stop operation by a player (for example, an operation of pressing a stop button),
A stop control means (main CPU 2101 that executes a reel stop control process called in the main process shown in FIG. 170) that stops the variable display of the symbols based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of a stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
The variation display of the variation display means includes a game variation (normal game) for awarding a game value and a pseudo variation (pseudo game) for awarding no game value,
The stop control means executes a control process for stopping the variable display of the symbols for the game variation,
The game control means
A pseudo stop control means for executing a control process to stop the display of the symbol variation in the pseudo variation;
a stop operation detection input monitoring means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes a stop button input monitoring process shown in FIG. 206 ) for determining whether or not the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means is valid,
The stop control means and the pseudo stop control means are each configured to execute the stop operation detection input monitoring means to determine whether the stop operation is valid or not (executing common processing in normal play and pseudo play (i.e., for example, the stop button input monitoring processing shown in Figure 206)).

This configuration of the present invention allows for some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by sharing some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, the present invention allows for simpler program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-6-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The arithmetic circuit functions as a game control means for controlling the progress of a game,
a third storage means (e.g., a main ROM 2102) in which programs and table data are stored;
a fourth storage means (e.g., a main RAM 2103) for storing data in association with the execution of the program;
the fourth storage means has a first storage area (common information storage area) for storing a group of information relating to games, and a second storage area (common information backup storage area) located at a position different from the first storage area,
The game control means
a saving means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the common information backup generation process of FIG. 207) that saves all of the information stored in the first storage area to the second storage area when a predetermined condition is met;
a restoring means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the common information restoring process of FIG. 208) that restores the information saved in the second storage area to the first storage area when the predetermined condition and a specific condition (for example, a penalty condition) are met,
the saving means and the restoring means are common programs except for some processes,
the saving means and the restoring means set the leading address of the first storage area in a first register (e.g., a DE register, an HL register) capable of setting two bytes of data, and set the leading address of the second storage area in a second register (e.g., an HL register, an DE register) capable of setting two bytes of data;
Transferring information stored in the source address set in the first register from the source address set in the second register to the destination address set in the second register in response to a transfer command;
When the processing by the return means is executed, the source address set in the first register and the destination address set in the second register are swapped before the transfer instruction is executed.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-6-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the ninth embodiment.
a game start instruction means (for example, a start lever) by which a player instructs the start of a game;
a variable display means (for example, each reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information in response to an operation of the game start instruction means;
A role determination means capable of determining a winning role (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 179 );
a stop operation detection means (e.g., a stop button and a stop switch) capable of detecting a stop operation that stops the variable display of the variable display means;
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 170) that can stop the variable display of the variable display means and derive a stop display based on the winning combination determined by the combination determination means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detection means;
A winning means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the process of step S2013 in FIG. 170 ) that can generate a winning result corresponding to the stop display;
and a notification means (for example, an indication monitor or a main display device) capable of notifying an advantageous stop operation mode.
When the game start instruction means is operated by the player,
The saving means saves information (e.g., various information) stored in the first storage area and related to an advantageous state (e.g., an AT state) in which notification by the notification means can be executed, into the second storage area (e.g., processing corresponding to step S4602 in FIG. 163 ),
The game state related processing means for updating the information related to the advantageous state updates the information stored in the first storage area (for example, processing corresponding to step S4603, step S4604 in FIG. 163, step S4622 in FIG. 164, etc.),
When the game start instruction means is operated by the player and a predetermined penalty condition is met, the return means is configured to return the information saved in the second storage area to the first storage area (for example, processing corresponding to step S4624 in Figure 164).

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-6-11) The invention according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the ninth embodiment.
The specific condition is a penalty condition that cancels a predetermined advantageous gaming state,
The penalty conditions are configured to be conditions based on the game state and a predetermined operation by the player.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

This invention provides a smaller program that can initialize the main RAM for both the in-use area work area and the out-of-use area work area, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM.

In addition, according to the present invention, the structure and description of the main program can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.Furthermore, the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area can be made completely independent, making it easier to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the capacity of the program area in the main ROM. Furthermore, by using such a common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, some of the processing for normal games and simulated games is shared, which reduces pressure on the capacity of the program area in the main ROM. Furthermore, according to the present invention, by sharing some of the processing for normal games and simulated games, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, the backup restoration process that restores specified information to the information before the game and the backup process that backs up that specified information can be partially shared, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

<Appendix A-7>
[0003] Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that is a pachislot machine that includes a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on its periphery, a plurality of display windows corresponding to each reel and displaying some of the symbols arranged on the periphery of each reel so that the player can see them, a start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of each reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "start operation"), provided that medals have been inserted, a stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the reel according to the type of reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "stop operation"), and a control unit that controls the operation of a stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch to rotate and stop each reel. Typically, in such pachislot machines, a combination of symbols displayed in the display windows determines whether a prize has been won, and if a prize has been won, medals are paid out from a hopper and stored in a medal receiving unit.

In such gaming machines, the process of stopping the reels related to the symbol stop limit is generally separate for normal play and pseudo play (for example, JP 2022-067988 A).

As in the gaming machine described above, if normal play and simulated play were processed separately and corresponding programs were created for each, the program size would be small, but it would take up space in the program area of the main ROM.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that shares some of the processing between normal games and simulated games, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM.

Furthermore, by sharing some of the processing between normal games and simulated games, the present invention aims to simplify the program structure and description, thereby improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(A-7-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A game control means (for example, a main CPU 2101) that controls the progress of the game;
a start operation detection means (e.g., a start lever) for detecting a start operation by a player;
An internal lottery combination determination means (main CPU 2101 that executes the internal lottery process called in the main process shown in FIG. 170) that determines an internal lottery combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means;
A variable display means includes a plurality of display columns and displays the symbols provided in each display column in a variable manner (a main CPU 2101 that executes a reel rotation start process called in the main process shown in FIG. 170 );
A stop operation detection means (main CPU 2101 that executes the reel stop control process called in the main process shown in FIG. 170) that detects a stop operation by a player (for example, an operation of pressing a stop button),
A stop control means (main CPU 2101 that executes a reel stop control process called in the main process shown in FIG. 170) that stops the variable display of the symbols based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of a stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
The variation display of the variation display means includes a game variation (normal game) for awarding a game value and a pseudo variation (pseudo game) for awarding no game value,
The stop control means executes a control process for stopping the variable display of the symbols for the game variation,
The game control means
A pseudo stop control means for executing a control process to stop the display of the symbol variation in the pseudo variation;
a stop operation detection input monitoring means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes a stop button input monitoring process shown in FIG. 206 ) for determining whether or not the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means is valid,
The stop control means and the pseudo stop control means each execute the stop operation detection input monitoring means to determine whether the stop operation is valid or not (a gaming machine (e.g., pachislot machine 2001) that executes a process common to normal gaming and pseudo gaming (i.e., the stop button input monitoring process shown in FIG. 206).

This configuration of the present invention allows for some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by sharing some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, the present invention allows for simpler program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-7-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
a payout means (e.g., a hopper device) for paying out game media according to the progress of a game;
and a settlement means (e.g., a settlement button) that can be pressed by a player to perform a settlement operation;
The game control means
a game value input means for detecting the game medium and inputting the game value (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing a process for detecting an operation of inserting medals to bet, or a process for detecting an operation of betting credited medals by operating a bet button);
A winning payout means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout/replay operation process shown in FIG. 182) that performs a winning payout process for paying out game media from the payout means in accordance with the winning combination;
a settlement processing means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the settlement execution process shown in FIG. 183) that performs a settlement process for paying out game media from the payout means based on the depression of the settlement means;
and a payout processing means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout and replay operation process shown in FIG. 182) that causes the payout means to perform a payout operation and performs a payout process.
The game value input means is capable of inputting a game value during a first period (for example, a unit game start waiting state (a period during which medals can be accepted and bets can be made, and before a start operation using a start lever)),
The winning payout means is capable of performing the winning payout process during a second period that does not overlap with the first period (for example, a period from the end of a unit game until payout is completed),
the settlement processing means is capable of performing the settlement processing when the settlement means is pressed during the first period;
The payout processing means
The payout process can be executed when the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means,
When the prize payout process is performed by the prize payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement processing means, different parameters (for example, the address of the corresponding medal counter) are assigned when the payout process is executed.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-7-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second embodiment.
When the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout process, the parameters assigned when the payout process is executed are configured to be information relating to the address of a payout number memory area (e.g., a payout number counter storage area) in which a value based on the number of gaming media paid out according to the winning role is stored.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-7-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second embodiment.
When the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means, the payout process is configured to be executed twice for different payout operations.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-7-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth embodiment.
When the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means and the payout process is executed twice,
The parameter assigned when the first payout process is executed is information relating to the address of a reserved number storage area (e.g., a credit counter storage area) in which the number of game media transferred from the payout number of game media corresponding to the winning combination is stored,
The parameter assigned when executing the second payout process is configured to be information relating to the address of an input number memory area (e.g., a medal insertion counter storage area) in which the game value of the game medium detected by the game value input means is stored.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-7-6) The invention according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
a game control means that implements a microprocessor (e.g., microprocessor 2100) including an arithmetic circuit (e.g., main CPU 2101), a read memory (e.g., main ROM 2102), and a read/write memory (e.g., main RAM 2103) and controls the progress of the game;
a setting switch (e.g., a key switch for setting) provided for changing or confirming a setting value;
The game control means
Range calculation means for performing calculation within a specific address range of the read-write memory and storing the calculation result in a calculation result storage area outside the specific address range of the read-write memory (for example, a CRC circuit 2107c for performing CRC calculation processing in a CRC generation process (outside the area in use) called by the power interruption process shown in FIG. 190, and a main CPU 2101 for storing the CRC value of the calculation result in a CRC value storage area 2103e);
a range comparison means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that compares CRC values in the CRC check process (outside the use area) shown in FIG. 172) that performs calculations within a specific address range of the read/write memory and compares the calculation results with the calculation results stored in the calculation result storage area;
An initialization means for initializing the read/write memory (for example, the main CPU 2101 for executing initialization processing such as the designated RAM initialization processing shown in FIG. 176);
a main processing means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the main processing shown in FIG. 170 ) that performs main processing as the game progresses;
The read/write memory is composed of a first storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203a in the used area) for storing data directly related to the progress of the game, and a second storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203b outside the used area) for storing data not directly related to the progress of the game,
The plurality of ranges are:
a first start address (e.g., a clear address when a RAM error occurs) of the first storage means when the setting switch is in an on state and a mismatch is detected by the range comparison means when the power is turned on;
a second start address (e.g., a clear address at the time of setting change) of the first storage means when the setting switch is in an on state at power-on and no matching mismatch is detected by the range matching means;
A third start position (for example, a clear address at the end of one game) of the first storage means when the unit game of the main processing means has ended and the next unit game has not yet started is set.
the initialization start positions of the first storage means, including the first start position, the second start position, and the third start position, are represented by a 2-byte address;
The initialization means
storing a 2-byte address value relating to one start position selected from the first start position, the second start position, or the third start position in a storage determination area;
determining an initialization start position of the second storage means according to the value of the lower address of the address stored in the storage determination area;
With respect to the first storage means, initialization is performed from an initialization start position of the first storage means, which is one of the first start position, the second start position, and the third start position (for example, initialization of RAM in the used area in step S2151 shown in FIG. 176 );
The second storage means is configured to be initialized from the determined initialization start position of the second storage means (for example, the out-of-use area RAM initialization process (out-of-use area) in step S2150 shown in FIG. 176).

With this configuration of the present invention, the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined without determining the state of the gaming machine, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, because the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined based on part of the RAM initialization start address for the in-use work area, the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area can be completely independent, making it easy to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

(A-7-7) The seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the sixth embodiment.
The final position to be initialized (for example, the clear end address shown in FIG. 205) is configured to be set one for each of the first storage means and the second storage means, regardless of the initialization start position of the first storage means and the initialization start position of the second storage means.

With this configuration of the present invention, the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined without determining the state of the gaming machine, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, because the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined based on part of the RAM initialization start address for the in-use work area, the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area can be completely independent, making it easy to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

(A-7-8) The eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the sixth embodiment.
the second storage means stores correspondence data indicating a correspondence relationship between a lower address of an initialization start position of the first storage means and an address of an initialization start position of the second storage means;
The initialization means is configured to use the correspondence data to determine an initialization start position of the second storage means that corresponds to the value of the lower address stored in the storage determination area.

With this configuration of the present invention, the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined without determining the state of the gaming machine, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, because the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined based on part of the RAM initialization start address for the in-use work area, the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area can be completely independent, making it easy to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

(A-7-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
a third storage means (e.g., a main ROM 2102) in which programs and table data are stored;
a fourth storage means (e.g., a main RAM 2103) for storing data in association with the execution of the program;
the fourth storage means has a first storage area (common information storage area) for storing a group of information relating to games, and a second storage area (common information backup storage area) located at a position different from the first storage area,
The game control means
a saving means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the common information backup generation process of FIG. 207) that saves all of the information stored in the first storage area to the second storage area when a predetermined condition is met;
a restoring means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the common information restoring process of FIG. 208) that restores the information saved in the second storage area to the first storage area when the predetermined condition and a specific condition (for example, a penalty condition) are met,
the saving means and the restoring means are common programs except for some processes,
the saving means and the restoring means set the leading address of the first storage area in a first register (e.g., a DE register, an HL register) capable of setting two bytes of data, and set the leading address of the second storage area in a second register (e.g., an HL register, an DE register) capable of setting two bytes of data;
Transferring information stored in the source address set in the first register from the source address set in the second register to the destination address set in the second register in response to a transfer command;
When the processing by the return means is executed, the source address set in the first register and the destination address set in the second register are swapped before the transfer instruction is executed.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-7-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the ninth embodiment.
a game start instruction means (for example, a start lever) by which a player instructs the start of a game;
a variable display means (for example, each reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information in response to an operation of the game start instruction means;
A role determination means capable of determining a winning role (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 179 );
a stop operation detection means (e.g., a stop button and a stop switch) capable of detecting a stop operation that stops the variable display of the variable display means;
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 170) that can stop the variable display of the variable display means and derive a stop display based on the winning combination determined by the combination determination means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detection means;
A winning means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the process of step S2013 in FIG. 170 ) that can generate a winning result corresponding to the stop display;
and a notification means (for example, an indication monitor or a main display device) capable of notifying an advantageous stop operation mode.
When the game start instruction means is operated by the player,
The saving means saves information (e.g., various information) stored in the first storage area and related to an advantageous state (e.g., an AT state) in which notification by the notification means can be executed, into the second storage area (e.g., processing corresponding to step S4602 in FIG. 163 ),
The game state related processing means for updating the information related to the advantageous state updates the information stored in the first storage area (for example, processing corresponding to step S4603, step S4604 in FIG. 163, step S4622 in FIG. 164, etc.),
When the game start instruction means is operated by the player and a predetermined penalty condition is met, the return means is configured to return the information saved in the second storage area to the first storage area (for example, processing corresponding to step S4624 in Figure 164).

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-7-11) The invention according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the ninth embodiment.
The specific condition is a penalty condition that cancels a predetermined advantageous gaming state,
The penalty conditions are configured to be conditions based on the game state and a predetermined operation by the player.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

According to the present invention, some of the processing for normal games and simulated games is shared, which reduces pressure on the capacity of the program area in the main ROM. Furthermore, according to the present invention, by sharing some of the processing for normal games and simulated games, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the capacity of the program area in the main ROM. Furthermore, by using such a common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined without determining the state of the gaming machine, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, the above-described configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, thereby improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program. Furthermore, because the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area is determined based on part of the RAM initialization start address for the in-use work area, the RAM clearing process for the out-of-use work area can be completely independent, making it easy to create and modify programs that comply with other standards.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, the backup restoration process that restores specified information to the information before the game and the backup process that backs up that specified information can be partially shared, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

<Appendix A-8>
[0003] Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that is a pachislot machine that includes a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on its periphery, a plurality of display windows corresponding to each reel and displaying some of the symbols arranged on the periphery of each reel so that the player can see them, a start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of each reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "start operation"), provided that medals have been inserted, a stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the reel according to the type of reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "stop operation"), and a control unit that controls the operation of a stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch to rotate and stop each reel. Typically, in such pachislot machines, a combination of symbols displayed in the display windows determines whether a prize has been won, and if a prize has been won, medals are paid out from a hopper and stored in a medal receiving unit.

For such gaming machines, technology for generating comprehensive status information has been disclosed (for example, JP 2019-198435 A).

Recent gaming machines generate general status information like the one described above through multiple lottery processes at the start of the game. However, depending on the player's play, the generated general status information may not be applied to the next game. In such cases, the general status information must be restored to its state before the game began. Creating a program to perform this type of processing is one of the factors that puts pressure on the program area of the main RAM.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that partially shares the backup restoration process, which returns specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM.

Furthermore, the present invention aims to simplify the structure and description of programs by promoting program standardization, thereby improving the development efficiency and maintainability of those programs.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(A-8-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A game control means (e.g., a microprocessor 2100) that controls the progress of the game and the status of the game;
a first storage means (e.g., a main ROM 2102) in which programs and table data are stored;
a second storage means (e.g., a main RAM 2103) for storing data in association with the execution of the program;
the second storage means has a first storage area (common information storage area) for storing a group of information relating to games, and a second storage area (common information backup storage area) located at a position different from the first storage area,
The game control means
a saving means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the common information backup generation process of FIG. 207) that saves all of the information stored in the first storage area to the second storage area when a predetermined condition is met;
a restoring means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the common information restoring process of FIG. 208) that restores the information saved in the second storage area to the first storage area when the predetermined condition and a specific condition (for example, a penalty condition) are met,
the saving means and the restoring means are common programs except for some processes,
the saving means and the restoring means set the leading address of the first storage area in a first register (e.g., a DE register, an HL register) capable of setting two bytes of data, and set the leading address of the second storage area in a second register (e.g., an HL register, an DE register) capable of setting two bytes of data;
Transferring information stored in the source address set in the first register from the source address set in the second register to the destination address set in the second register in response to a transfer command;
A gaming machine characterized in that when processing is executed by the return means, the source address set in the first register and the destination address set in the second register are swapped before executing the transfer command.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-8-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
a game start instruction means (for example, a start lever) by which a player instructs the start of a game;
a variable display means (for example, each reel) capable of variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information in response to an operation of the game start instruction means;
A role determination means capable of determining a winning role (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 179 );
a stop operation detection means (e.g., a stop button and a stop switch) capable of detecting a stop operation that stops the variable display of the variable display means;
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 170) that can stop the variable display of the variable display means and derive a stop display based on the winning combination determined by the combination determination means and the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detection means;
A winning means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the process of step S2013 in FIG. 170 ) that can generate a winning result corresponding to the stop display;
and a notification means (for example, an indication monitor or a main display device) capable of notifying an advantageous stop operation mode.
When the game start instruction means is operated by the player,
The saving means saves information (e.g., various information) stored in the first storage area and related to an advantageous state (e.g., an AT state) in which notification by the notification means can be executed, into the second storage area (e.g., processing corresponding to step S4602 in FIG. 163 ),
The game state related processing means for updating the information related to the advantageous state updates the information stored in the first storage area (for example, processing corresponding to step S4603, step S4604 in FIG. 163, step S4622 in FIG. 164, etc.),
When the game start instruction means is operated by the player and a predetermined penalty condition is met, the return means is configured to return the information saved in the second storage area to the first storage area (for example, processing corresponding to step S4624 in Figure 164).

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-8-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The specific condition is a penalty condition that cancels a predetermined advantageous gaming state,
The penalty conditions are configured to be conditions based on the game state and a predetermined operation by the player.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-8-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second embodiment.
The predetermined penalty condition is configured to be a condition based on whether the gaming state is in a specific gaming state (for example, whether it is in an advantageous zone or not).

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-8-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second embodiment.
The predetermined penalty condition is configured to be a condition based on whether or not the stopping operation by the player is performed in a specific manner (for example, whether or not the first reel is the first stop).

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-8-6) The invention according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second embodiment.
The predetermined penalty condition is configured to be a condition based on whether or not the gaming state is in a specific bonus state (for example, whether or not it is in a bonus state such as pseudo BIG or pseudo REG).

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-8-7) The invention according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the second embodiment.
The predetermined penalty condition is configured to be a condition based on whether or not the winning combination determined by the combination determining means is a predetermined winning combination.

This configuration of the present invention allows for a partial sharing of the backup restoration process, which restores specified information to the information before the game, and the backup process, which backs up that specified information, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-8-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
a payout means (e.g., a hopper device) for paying out game media according to the progress of a game;
and a settlement means (e.g., a settlement button) that can be pressed by a player to perform a settlement operation;
The game control means
a game value input means for detecting the game medium and inputting the game value (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing a process for detecting an operation of inserting medals to bet, or a process for detecting an operation of betting credited medals by operating a bet button);
A winning payout means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout/replay operation process shown in FIG. 182) that performs a winning payout process for paying out game media from the payout means in accordance with the winning combination;
a settlement processing means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the settlement execution process shown in FIG. 183) that performs a settlement process for paying out game media from the payout means based on the depression of the settlement means;
and a payout processing means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the medal payout and replay operation process shown in FIG. 182) that causes the payout means to perform a payout operation and performs a payout process.
The game value input means is capable of inputting a game value during a first period (for example, a unit game start waiting state (a period during which medals can be accepted and bets can be made, and before a start operation using a start lever)),
The winning payout means is capable of performing the winning payout process during a second period that does not overlap with the first period (for example, a period from the end of a unit game until payout is completed),
the settlement processing means is capable of performing the settlement processing when the settlement means is pressed during the first period;
The payout processing means
The payout process can be executed when the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement process means,
When the prize payout process is performed by the prize payout means and when the settlement process is performed by the settlement processing means, different parameters (for example, the address of the corresponding medal counter) are assigned when the payout process is executed.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-8-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the eighth embodiment.
When the winning payout process is performed by the winning payout process, the parameters assigned when the payout process is executed are configured to be information relating to the address of a payout number memory area (e.g., a payout number counter storage area) in which a value based on the number of gaming media paid out according to the winning role is stored.

With this configuration of the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by using this common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-8-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
Further provided is a setting switch (for example, a setting key switch) for changing or confirming a setting value;
The second storage means is composed of a third storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203a within the used area) for storing data directly related to the progress of the game, and a fourth storage means (e.g., a RAM area 2203b outside the used area) for storing data not directly related to the progress of the game,
The game control means
Range calculation means for performing calculation within a specific address range of the second storage means and storing the calculation result in a calculation result storage area (for example, a CRC circuit 2107c for performing CRC calculation processing in a CRC generation process (outside the use area) called by the power interruption process shown in FIG. 190, and a main CPU 2101 for storing the CRC value of the calculation result in a CRC value storage area 2103e);
Range comparison means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that compares CRC values in the CRC check process (outside the use area) shown in FIG. 172) that performs calculation within a specific address range of the second storage means and compares the calculation result with the calculation result stored in the calculation result storage area;
an initialization means for initializing the second storage means (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing initialization processing such as the designated RAM initialization processing shown in FIG. 176 );
The game control means
determining a start position of the third storage means in accordance with the state of the setting switch when power is turned on and the result of the comparison by the range comparison means;
determining a start position of the fourth storage means based on the determined start position of the third storage means;
The initialization means is configured to initialize the third storage means based on the determined start position of the third storage means, and to initialize the fourth storage means based on the determined start position of the fourth storage means.

With this configuration of the present invention, the state of the gaming machine is not judged when determining the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use work area, which allows for a corresponding reduction in program size and reduces pressure on the capacity of the main ROM's program area. Furthermore, this configuration allows for a simpler main program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

(A-8-11) The invention according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
a start operation detection means (e.g., a start lever) for detecting a start operation by a player;
An internal lottery combination determination means (main CPU 2101 that executes the internal lottery process called in the main process shown in FIG. 170) that determines an internal lottery combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means;
A variable display means includes a plurality of display columns and displays the symbols provided in each display column in a variable manner (a main CPU 2101 that executes a reel rotation start process called in the main process shown in FIG. 170 );
A stop operation detection means (main CPU 2101 that executes the reel stop control process called in the main process shown in FIG. 170) that detects a stop operation by a player (for example, an operation of pressing a stop button),
A stop control means (main CPU 2101 that executes a reel stop control process called in the main process shown in FIG. 170) that stops the variable display of the symbols based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of a stop operation by the stop operation detection means,
The variation display of the variation display means includes a game variation (normal game) for awarding a game value and a pseudo variation (pseudo game) for awarding no game value,
The stop control means executes a control process for stopping the variable display of the symbols for the game variation,
The game control means
A pseudo stop control means for executing a control process to stop the display of the symbol variation in the pseudo variation;
a stop operation detection input monitoring means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes a stop button input monitoring process shown in FIG. 206 ) for determining whether or not the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means is valid,
The stop control means and the pseudo stop control means are each configured to execute the stop operation detection input monitoring means to determine whether the stop operation is valid or not (executing common processing in normal play and pseudo play (i.e., for example, the stop button input monitoring processing shown in Figure 206)).

This configuration of the present invention allows for some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by sharing some commonality between normal gameplay and simulated gameplay processing, the present invention allows for simpler program structure and description, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

According to the present invention, the backup restoration process that restores specified information to the information before the game and the backup process that backs up that specified information are partially shared, thereby reducing pressure on the program area capacity of the main ROM. Furthermore, by promoting program sharing in this way, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, a common payout process is used when the winning payout process or the settlement process is performed, thereby reducing pressure on the capacity of the program area in the main ROM. Furthermore, by using such a common payout process, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, the state of the gaming machine is not judged when determining the RAM initialization range for the out-of-use working area, which allows the program size to be reduced accordingly, thereby reducing pressure on the capacity of the program area in the main ROM. Furthermore, the above-mentioned configuration allows the structure and description of the main program to be more concise, thereby improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, some of the processing for normal games and simulated games is shared, which reduces pressure on the capacity of the program area in the main ROM. Furthermore, according to the present invention, by sharing some of the processing for normal games and simulated games, the program structure and description can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program.

<Appendix A-9>
[0003] Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that is a pachislot machine that includes a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on its periphery, a plurality of display windows corresponding to each reel and displaying some of the symbols arranged on the periphery of each reel so that the player can see them, a start switch that outputs a signal requesting the start of rotation of each reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "start operation"), provided that medals have been inserted, a stop switch that outputs a signal requesting the stop of rotation of the reel according to the type of reel when it detects an operation by the player (hereinafter referred to as a "stop operation"), and a control unit that controls the operation of a stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch to rotate and stop each reel. Typically, in such pachislot machines, a combination of symbols displayed in the display windows determines whether a prize has been won, and if a prize has been won, medals are paid out from a hopper and stored in a medal receiving unit.

Furthermore, gaming machines have been disclosed that check RAM when powered on, and if a RAM abnormality is detected, issue a notification urging the user to resolve the abnormality (for example, JP 2006-326203 A).

However, with gaming machines like those described above, when hall staff turn on the power to the machine, an abnormality is immediately reported, so even if fraudulent activity (so-called cheating) is committed, the abnormality is immediately cleared, meaning the person committing the fraudulent activity never uses the gaming machine and goes undetected.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that allows the person who committed the fraud to start playing on the gaming machine that has been the target of fraudulent activity.

Another object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that reduces the size of the processing program related to checking the main RAM and is configured so as not to overwhelm the program area of the main ROM. Furthermore, by performing the calculation processing related to checking the main RAM outside the main CPU, the structure and description of the main program can be simplified, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program, and further reducing the load on the main CPU.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(A-9-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
a game control means (e.g., main control board 2071) that has an arithmetic circuit (e.g., main CPU 2101), a read memory (e.g., main ROM 2102), a read/write memory (e.g., main RAM 2103), and a random number circuit (e.g., random number circuit 2110, random number circuit 2150) that generates random numbers and controls the progress of the game;
a setting switch (e.g., a key switch for setting) provided for changing or confirming a setting value;
The game control means
A main processing means for performing main processing as the game progresses (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing the main processing shown in FIG. 170 );
A periodic processing means for executing processing at a fixed cycle (for example, a main CPU 2101 for executing periodic interrupt processing shown in FIG. 186 );
Range calculation means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the CRC generation process (outside the area used) in FIG. 191, which is called by the power interruption process in FIG. 190) that performs calculation within a specific address range of the read/write memory (a predetermined area in the main RAM 2103) and stores the calculation result in a calculation result storage area (CRC value storage area 2103e) outside the specific address range of the read/write memory;
a range comparison means (for example, the main CPU 2101 that executes the CRC check process (outside the area in use) shown in FIG. 172) that performs calculations within a specific address range of the read/write memory and compares the calculation results with the calculation results stored in the calculation result storage area;
a setting value storage area in which the setting value is stored;
An error detection means for detecting an error in the game control means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the CRC check process (outside the use area) shown in FIG. 172 and the setting value check process (outside the use area) shown in FIG. 189);
When the error detection means detects an error, an error processing means (for example, a main CPU 2101 that executes the game return impossible error processing (outside the use area) shown in FIG. 174) is provided,
When the error detection means detects an abnormality in the random number circuit, or when the set value stored in the set value storage area is different from a predetermined value, an error flag (for example, a game return impossible error flag) is set to an error (data representing "return impossible");
The game control means
When the range comparison means detects a mismatch, the error processing means is executed (for example, the game return impossible error processing is called in the power-on processing shown in FIG. 171),
A gaming machine characterized in that when an error is set in the error flag during the main processing (e.g., during the internal lottery processing), the error processing means (e.g., calling up the game return impossible error processing during the power-on processing shown in Figure 171) is executed.

With this configuration of the present invention, if fraudulent activity is committed, a game return impossible error will not occur at the time the fraudulent activity is committed. Instead, a game return impossible error will occur at the start of the unit game thereafter. This means that the person committing the fraudulent activity will start the gaming machine under the mistaken belief that the fraudulent activity was successful, and as a result, the person committing the fraudulent activity can be identified on the spot.

(A-9-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The game control means further includes power-on means for executing a power-on process when the power is turned on,
The range comparison means is controlled to be executed by the power-on means (for example, executed in the power-on processing shown in FIG. 171 ),
The game control means
When a mismatch is detected by the range comparison means, the main processing means is controlled to execute the error processing means before performing the main processing (for example, in the power-on processing shown in Figure 171, if there is a CRC abnormality, a game return impossible error processing is called).

With this configuration of the present invention, if fraudulent activity is committed, a game return impossible error will not occur at the time the fraudulent activity is committed. Instead, a game return impossible error will occur at the start of the unit game thereafter. This means that the person committing the fraudulent activity will start the gaming machine under the mistaken belief that the fraudulent activity was successful, and as a result, the person committing the fraudulent activity can be identified on the spot.

(A-9-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The error detection means is executed at a fixed cycle by the periodic processing means (for example, by the periodic interrupt processing shown in FIG. 186 ),
The game control means
When an error is set in the error flag, the error processing means is controlled to be executed (for example, by calling the game return impossible error processing in the internal lottery processing shown in Figure 179) after the player instructs the start of the game (for example, after the player operates the start lever).

With this configuration of the present invention, if fraudulent activity is committed, a game return impossible error will not occur at the time the fraudulent activity is committed. Instead, a game return impossible error will occur at the start of the unit game thereafter. This means that the person committing the fraudulent activity will start the gaming machine under the mistaken belief that the fraudulent activity was successful, and as a result, the person committing the fraudulent activity can be identified on the spot.

(A-9-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The microprocessor (e.g., microprocessor 2100) of the game control means comprises the arithmetic circuit, the read memory, and the read/write memory;
the random number circuit includes a first random number circuit provided in the microprocessor and a second random number circuit disposed outside the microprocessor;
The error detection means is configured to set an error in the error flag when an abnormality is detected in either the first random number circuit or the second random number circuit.

With this configuration of the present invention, if fraudulent activity is committed, a game return impossible error will not occur at the time the fraudulent activity is committed. Instead, a game return impossible error will occur at the start of the unit game thereafter. This means that the person committing the fraudulent activity will start the gaming machine under the mistaken belief that the fraudulent activity was successful, and as a result, the person committing the fraudulent activity can be identified on the spot.

(A-9-5) The invention according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth embodiment.
The error detection means is configured to detect abnormalities in the first random number circuit and the second random number circuit using different methods.

With this configuration of the present invention, if fraudulent activity is committed, a game return impossible error will not occur at the time the fraudulent activity is committed. Instead, a game return impossible error will occur at the start of the unit game thereafter. This means that the person committing the fraudulent activity will start the gaming machine under the mistaken belief that the fraudulent activity was successful, and as a result, the person committing the fraudulent activity can be identified on the spot.

(A-9-6) The invention according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The game control means further includes a power supply cutoff means for executing a power supply cutoff process when a drop in power supply voltage is detected,
the range calculation means is controlled to be executed by the power supply interruption means,
The game control means is configured to execute the error processing means (for example, call the game return impossible error processing in the power-on processing shown in Figure 171) if it is determined that the range calculation means is not being executed (for example, if the power outage occurrence flag is turned off) even if the range comparison means has not detected a comparison mismatch.

With this configuration of the present invention, if fraudulent activity is committed, a game return impossible error will not occur at the time the fraudulent activity is committed. Instead, a game return impossible error will occur at the start of the unit game thereafter. This means that the person committing the fraudulent activity will start the gaming machine under the mistaken belief that the fraudulent activity was successful, and as a result, the person committing the fraudulent activity can be identified on the spot.

(A-9-7) The invention according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The error processing performed by the error processing means is
The error content is displayed on the display.
The device is configured to maintain a standby state in which no operation to start the game is accepted.

With this configuration of the present invention, if fraudulent activity is committed, a game return impossible error will not occur at the time the fraudulent activity is committed. Instead, a game return impossible error will occur at the start of the unit game thereafter. This means that the person committing the fraudulent activity will start the gaming machine under the mistaken belief that the fraudulent activity was successful, and as a result, the person committing the fraudulent activity can be identified on the spot.

(A-9-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the seventh embodiment.
In the standby state, when the power is turned off and then a predetermined operation is performed on the setting switch when the power is turned on, a process for changing or confirming the setting value is executed, and the main process is executed.

With this configuration of the present invention, if fraudulent activity is committed, a game return impossible error will not occur at the time the fraudulent activity is committed. Instead, a game return impossible error will occur at the start of the unit game thereafter. This means that the person committing the fraudulent activity will start the gaming machine under the mistaken belief that the fraudulent activity was successful, and as a result, the person committing the fraudulent activity can be identified on the spot.

(A-9-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the eighth embodiment.
In the standby state, if the predetermined operation is not performed on the setting switch when the power is turned on after being turned off, the standby state is resumed.

With this configuration of the present invention, if fraudulent activity is committed, a game return impossible error will not occur at the time the fraudulent activity is committed. Instead, a game return impossible error will occur at the start of the unit game thereafter. This means that the person committing the fraudulent activity will start the gaming machine under the mistaken belief that the fraudulent activity was successful, and as a result, the person committing the fraudulent activity can be identified on the spot.

(A-9-10) The invention according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the fourth embodiment.
the microprocessor further comprises a cyclic redundancy check circuit;
The microprocessor is configured to send data within the specific address range to the cyclic redundancy check circuit to cause the cyclic redundancy check circuit to perform an operation within the specific address range, and to receive an operation result of the operation from the cyclic redundancy check circuit.

With this configuration of the present invention, by performing the calculation processing related to checking the main RAM outside the main CPU, the size of the processing program related to checking the main RAM can be reduced, and the program area in the main ROM can be prevented from being overwhelmed. Furthermore, the structure and description of the main program can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program, and further reducing the load on the main CPU.

(A-9-11) The invention according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the tenth embodiment.
the data in the specific address range transmitted to the cyclic redundancy check circuit includes data in a plurality of non-contiguous areas in the read/write memory;
The calculation result received from the cyclic redundancy check circuit is configured to be a single piece of data.

With this configuration of the present invention, by performing the calculation processing related to checking the main RAM outside the main CPU, the size of the processing program related to checking the main RAM can be reduced, and the program area in the main ROM can be prevented from being overwhelmed. Furthermore, the structure and description of the main program can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program, and further reducing the load on the main CPU.

According to this invention, when fraudulent activity is committed, a game return impossible error does not occur at the time the fraudulent activity is committed. Instead, a game return impossible error occurs at the start of a unit game thereafter. This allows the person committing the fraudulent activity to start the gaming machine under the mistaken belief that the fraudulent activity was successful, making it possible to identify the person committing the fraud on the spot.

Furthermore, according to the present invention, by performing the calculation processing related to checking the main RAM outside the main CPU, the size of the processing program related to checking the main RAM can be reduced, and the program area in the main ROM can be prevented from being overwhelmed. Furthermore, the structure and description of the main program can be made simpler, improving the development efficiency and maintainability of the program, and further reducing the load on the main CPU.

1, 2001, 3001 Pachislot machine A Display unit B Irradiation unit C Screen device G Cabinet UD Upper door mechanism DD Lower door mechanism 2071 Main control board 2100 Microprocessor 2101 Main CPU
2102 Main ROM
2103 Main RAM

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that controls the progress of a game by implementing a microprocessor including an arithmetic circuit, a read memory, and a read/write memory,
The read memory is composed of a first storage means in which programs and data directly related to the progress of a game are stored, and a second storage means in which programs and data not directly related to the progress of a game are stored,
the read/write memory is comprised of a third storage means to which the program of the first storage means reads and writes, and a fourth storage means to which the program of the second storage means reads and writes,
The programs stored in the second storage means include specific subroutines that are called by the programs stored in the first storage means, execute processing, and then always return to the program in the first storage means that called them, and normal subroutines that are called by the programs stored in the second storage means, execute processing, and then always return to the program in the second storage means that called them,
When executing the specific subroutine, the arithmetic circuit executes a specific call instruction to call the specific subroutine, and executes a specific return instruction to return to the caller;
the specific call instruction has a different instruction capacity stored in the first storage means depending on whether the specific subroutine to be called calls a program stored before the specific address in the second storage means or a program stored at an address after the specific address;
the instruction capacity is required to be larger when calling a program stored at an address after the specific address than when calling a program stored before the specific address,
The specific subroutines include a first type subroutine and a second type subroutine,
The first type subroutine is
a program body is stored at an address subsequent to the specific address, and in order to reduce the instruction capacity, the specific call instruction executes the program body of the specific subroutine via a call of a program stored at an address prior to the specific address;
When the program body is stored at an address subsequent to the specific address, a processing code for executing the program body of the specific subroutine is stored at an address prior to the specific address;
the first type subroutine stores the specific return instruction at the specific address and thereafter;
The second type subroutine has a program body and the specific return instruction stored in a location called by the specific call instruction,
an out-of-area initialization means for initializing the fourth storage means is stored in the second storage means;
The gaming machine, wherein the out-of-area initialization means is the first type subroutine.